Omron CS1D PCS User Manual

Omron CS1D PCS User Manual
Cat. No. W405-E1-09
SYSMAC CS Series
CS1D-CPU_H CPU Units
CS1D-CPU_S CPU Units
CS1D-DPL01/02D Duplex Unit
CS1D-PA/PD_ Power Supply Unit
CS1D Duplex System
OPERATION MANUAL
[email protected]@H CPU Units
[email protected]@S CPU Units
CS1D-DPL01/02D Duplex Unit
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@ Power Supply Unit
CS1D Duplex System
Operation Manual
Revised October 2009
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 2002
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series CPU Units
Unit Versions
A “unit version” has been introduced to manage CPU Units in the CS/CJ
Series according to differences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades.
This applies to the CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units.
Notation of Unit Versions
on Products
The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the
products for which unit versions are being managed, as shown below.
Product nameplate
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
CS1H-CPU67H
CPU UNIT
Unit version
Example for Unit version 2.0
Lot No.
Lot No. 031001 0000
OMRON Corporation
Ver.2.0
MADE IN JAPAN
• CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units (except for low-end models) manufactured on or before November 4, 2003 do not have a unit version given
on the CPU Unit (i.e., the location for the unit version shown above is
blank).
• The unit version of the CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units, as well as
the CS1D CPU Units for Single CPU Systems, begins at version 2.0.
• The unit version of the CS1D CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems, begins
at version 1.1.
• CPU Units for which a unit version is not given are called Pre-Ver. @[email protected]
CPU Units, such as Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units and Pre-Ver. 1.1 CPU Units.
Confirming Unit Versions
with Support Software
CX-Programmer version 4.0 or later can be used to confirm the unit version
using one of the following two methods.
• Using the PLC Information
• Using the Unit Manufacturing Information (This method can be used for
Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units as well.)
Note CX-Programmer version 3.3 or lower cannot be used to confirm unit versions.
PLC Information
• If you know the device type and CPU type, select them in the Change
PLC Dialog Box, go online, and select PLC - Edit - Information from the
menus.
• If you don’t know the device type and CPU type, but are connected
directly to the CPU Unit on a serial line, select PLC - Auto Online to go
online, and then select PLC - Edit - Information from the menus.
In either case, the following PLC Information Dialog Box will be displayed.
vi
Unit version
Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit.
Unit Manufacturing Information
In the IO Table Window, right-click and select Unit Manufacturing information - CPU Unit.
The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed.
Unit version
Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit connected
online.
vii
Using the Unit Version
Labels
The following unit version labels are provided with the CPU Unit.
Ver.
2.0
Ver.
Ver.
2.0
Ver.
Th e s e L a b e l s c a n b e
used to manage
differences in the
a va i l a b l e f u n c t i o n s
among the Units.
Place the appropriate
label on the front of
the Unit to show what
U n i t ve r s i o n i s
actually being used.
These labels can be attached to the front of previous CPU Units to differentiate between CPU Units of different unit versions.
Unit Version Notation
In this manual, the unit version of a CPU Unit is given as shown in the following table.
Product nameplate CPU Units on which no unit version is given
Units on which a version is given
(Ver. @[email protected])
Lot No. XXXXXX XXXX
OMRON Corporation
MADE IN JAPAN
OMRON Corporation
Meaning
Designating individual CPU Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS1-H CPU Units
Units (e.g., the CS1HCPU67H)
Designating groups of CPU Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS1-H CPU Units
Units (e.g., the CS1-H CPU
Units)
Designating an entire series Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS-series CPU Units
of CPU Units (e.g., the CSseries CPU Units)
Ver. .
Lot No. XXXXXX XXXX
MADE IN JAPAN
CS1H-CPU67H CPU Unit Ver. @[email protected]
CS1-H CPU Units Ver. @[email protected]
CS-series CPU Units Ver. @[email protected]
System Configuration Support by Unit Version
System configuration
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System
Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System
Single CPU System
Note
Pre-Ver. 1.1
--OK
---
[email protected]@H/P
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
----OK
OK
-----
Ver. 1.3
OK
OK
---
[email protected]@S
Ver. 2.0
----OK
1. OK: Supported, ---: Not supported
2. Only [email protected]@H/P CPU Units with unit version 1.3 support the Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System. If a Dual I/O Expansion System is
connected to a CPU Unit with an earlier unit version, an I/O bus error will
occur and the PLC will not operate.
viii
Function Support by Unit Version
CS1D CPU Units
Function
[email protected]@H
Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion
System
[email protected]@S
Duplex CPU, CS1D CPU Units
Dual I/O Expan- for Single CPU
sion System
Systems
Pre-Ver. Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.2 Ver. 1.3
Ver. 1.3
1.1
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
--OK
OK
OK
-----
OK
OK
OK
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
---
Removal/Addition of Units
without a Programming
Device (See note 2.)
---
---
---
---
OK (See note 2.) ---
Duplex Connecting Cables
Online Addition of Units and
Backplanes
-----
-----
-----
--OK
(See
notes 3
and 4.)
OK
--OK (See note 3.) ---
Online Addition of Duplex Unit
Downloading and Uploading Individual
Tasks
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords
Write Protection from FINS Commands
Sent to CPU Units via Networks
Online Network Connections without I/O
Tables
Communications through a Maximum of 8
Network Levels
Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series
PTs
Setting First Slot Words
-----
-----
-----
-----
OK
---
OK
OK
---
---
---
---
---
OK
---
---
---
---
---
OK
---
---
---
---
---
OK
---
---
---
---
---
OK
---
---
---
---
---
OK
---
---
---
---
---
OK for up to 64
groups
Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a
Parameter File
Automatic Detection of I/O Allocation
Method for Automatic Transfer at Power ON
Operation Start/End Times
Automatic Allocation of Communications
Ports
---
---
---
---
---
OK
---
---
---
---
---
---
-----
OK
---
OK
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Functions Duplex CPU Units
unique to
Online Unit Replacement
CS1D CPU using a Programming Device
Units
Duplex Power Supply Units
Duplex Controller Link Units
Duplex Ethernet Units
Unit Removal without a Programming Device
Ver. 2.0
ix
Function
[email protected]@H
Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion
System
New Appli- MILH, MILR, MILC
cation
=DT, <>DT, <DT, <=DT, >DT,
Instruc>=DT
tions
BCMP2
GRY
TPO
DSW, TKY, HKY, MTR, 7SEG
EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR,
ECHRD, ECHWR
Reading/Writing CPU Bus
Units with IORD/IOWR
Instructions
Note
[email protected]@S
Duplex CPU, CS1D CPU Units
Dual I/O Expan- for Single CPU
sion System
Systems
Pre-Ver. Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.2 Ver. 1.3
Ver. 1.3
Ver. 2.0
1.1
----------OK
----------OK
-----------
-----------
-----------
-----------
-----------
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
---
---
---
---
---
OK
1. OK: Supported, ---: Not supported
2. The Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function is
supported only by CS1D CPU Units with unit version 1.3 or later and a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System.
If the Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function is
selected in a Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System, the function will
operate as the earlier Unit Removal without a Programming Device function.
3. Basic I/O Units and Special I/O Units can be added for the Online Addition
of Units and Backplanes function. CPU Units cannot be added.
4. Expansion Backplanes cannot be added with a Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System.
Unit Versions and Programming Devices
CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher is required to use the functions added
to the [email protected]@H CPU Units in unit version 1.3 (Duplex CPU Systems).
CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher is required to use the functions added
to the [email protected]@S CPU Units in unit version 2.0 (Single CPU Systems).
The following tables show the relationship between unit versions and CX-Programmer versions.
x
Unit Versions and Programming Devices
CPU Unit
CJ1M CPU Units,
low-end models, Unit
Ver. 2.0
CS1-H, CJ1-H, and
CJ1M CPU Units
except low-end
models, Unit Ver. 2.0
Functions
CX-Programmer
Programming
Ver. 3.2 Ver. Ver. 4.0 Ver.6.1 Ver.7.0
Console
or
3.3
to
lower
Ver. 6.0
Functions
Using new functions
----OK
OK
OK
No
added for unit Not using new functions --restrictions
OK
OK
OK
OK
version 2.0
Functions
Using new functions
----OK
OK
OK
added for unit Not using new functions OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
version 2.0
CS1D CPU Units for
Single CPU Systems,
Unit Ver. 2.0
Functions
Using new functions
--added for unit Not using new functions
version 2.0
---
OK
OK
OK
CS1D CPU Units for
Duplex CPU
Systems, Unit Ver.1
Functions
Using new functions
--added for unit Not using new functions OK
version 1.1
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
CS1D Duplex CPU
Unit Ver. 1.2
Functions
upgraded in
Unit Ver. 1.2
Functions
upgraded in
Unit Ver. 1.3
Using new functions
--Not using new functions OK
--OK
--OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Using new functions
---
---
---
OK
(See
note.)
OK
OK
OK
OK
CS1D Duplex CPU
Unit Ver. 1.3
---
Not using new functions OK
Online
addition of
Units is not
supported.
Note With CX-Programmer version 7.0, the auto update function can be used to
expand the Unit’s functions.
Device Type Setting
Series
The unit version does not affect the setting made for the device type on the
CX-Programmer. Select the device type as shown in the following table
regardless of the unit version of the CPU Unit.
CPU Unit group
CS Series
CS1-H CPU Units
CJ Series
CS1D CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems
CS1D CPU Units for Single CPU Systems
CJ1-H CPU Units
CJ1M CPU Units
CPU Unit model
[email protected]@H
[email protected]@H
[email protected]@H
[email protected]@S
[email protected]@H
[email protected]@H
[email protected]@
Device type setting on
CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or higher
CS1G-H
CS1H-H
CS1D-H (or CS1H-H)
CS1D-S
CJ1G-H
CJ1H-H
CJ1M
xi
Troubleshooting Problems with Unit Versions on the CX-Programmer
Problem
Cause
An attempt was made using CXProgrammer version 4.0 or higher
to download a program containing instructions supported only by
CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later to a
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units.
Solution
Check the program or change
the CPU Unit being downloaded to a CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or later.
An attempt was made using CXProgrammer version 4.0 or higher
to download a PLC Setup containing settings supported only by
CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later (i.e.,
not set to their default values) to a
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units.
Check the settings in the PLC
Setup or change the CPU Unit
being downloaded to a CPU
Unit Ver. 2.0 or later.
CX-Programmer version 3.3 or
lower was used to upload a program containing instructions supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0
or later from a CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or later.
The new instructions cannot
be uploaded using CX-Programmer version 3.3 or lower.
Use CX-Programmer version
4.0 or higher.
After the above message is displayed, a compiling
error will be displayed on the Compile Tab Page in the
Output Window.
“????” is displayed in a program transferred from the
PLC to the CX-Programmer.
xii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiv
2
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiv
3
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiv
4
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxvi
5
Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxvii
6
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxiii
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
CS1D Duplex System Overview and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-2
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
SECTION 2
Specifications, Nomenclature, and Functions . . . . . . . . . . .
15
2-1
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2-2
Configuration Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
2-3
Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
2-4
CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
2-5
File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
2-6
Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
2-7
Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
2-8
Backplanes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
2-9
Units for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
2-10 Units on CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
2-11 Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
2-12 Unit Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
2-13 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
2-14 I/O Table Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
SECTION 3
Duplex Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3-1
Duplex CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
3-2
Duplex Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
3-3
Duplex Communications Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
3-4
Duplex Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
SECTION 4
Operating Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
4-2
Basic Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
xiii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5-1
Fail-safe Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
5-2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
5-3
Power Supply Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
165
5-4
Wiring Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
SECTION 6
PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
6-1
Overview of PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
SECTION 7
I/O Allocations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
7-1
I/O Allocations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
7-2
I/O Allocation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
7-3
Allocating First Words to Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
7-4
Allocating First Words to Slots (Single CPU Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
237
7-5
Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
240
7-6
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
7-7
Online Addition of Units and Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
245
SECTION 8
Memory Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
xiv
8-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
252
8-2
I/O Memory Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
8-3
I/O Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
8-4
CS-series DeviceNet Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
266
8-5
Data Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
267
8-6
CPU Bus Unit Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
268
8-7
Inner Board Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
270
8-8
Special I/O Unit Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
8-9
Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
272
8-10 Holding Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
273
8-11 Auxiliary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
274
8-12 TR (Temporary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
304
8-13 Timer Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
305
8-14 Counter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
8-15 Data Memory (DM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
8-16 Extended Data Memory (EM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
310
8-17 Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
8-18 Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
317
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8-19 Task Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
8-20 Condition Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
319
8-21 Clock Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
322
8-22 Parameter Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
323
SECTION 9
CPU Unit Operation and the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
9-1
CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
329
9-2
CPU Unit Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
336
9-3
Power OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
338
9-4
Computing the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
342
9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
358
SECTION 10
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
10-1 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
388
10-2 Error Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
389
10-3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
416
10-4 Troubleshooting Errors in Duplex Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
419
SECTION 11
Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
11-1 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
424
11-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
426
11-3 Replacing a CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
11-4 Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
435
11-5 Replacing Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
455
11-6 Replacement of Expansion Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
455
11-7 Replacing the Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
457
Appendices
A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
461
B
Auxiliary Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
501
C
Memory Map of PLC Memory Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
549
D
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
551
E
Precautions in Replacing CS1-H PLCs with CS1D PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
565
F
Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
573
G
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
583
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
xv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
xvi
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of the CS1D Duplex Programmable Controllers
(PLCs) and includes the sections described below. The CS Series and CJ Series are subdivided as
shown in the following table.
Unit
CPU Units
CS Series
CS1-H CPU Units: [email protected]@H
[email protected]@H
CJ Series
CJ1-H CPU Units: [email protected]@H
[email protected]@H
CJ1-H Loop-control CPU Units:
[email protected]@H
CS1 CPU Units:
[email protected]@-EV1
[email protected]@-EV1
CS1D CPU Units: [email protected]@H
[email protected]@S
CJ1 CPU Units:
[email protected]@-EV1
CJ1M CPU Units: [email protected]@
CS1D Process-control CPU Units:
[email protected]@P
Basic I/O Units
Special I/O Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O Units
CJ-series Basic I/O Units
CJ-series Special I/O Units
CPU Bus Units
Power Supply Units
CS-series CPU Bus Units
CS-series Power Supply Units
CJ-series CPU Bus Units
CJ-series Power Supply Units
CS1D Power Supply Units
Please read this manual and all related manuals listed in the table on the next page and be sure you
understand information provided before attempting to install or use [email protected]@H/S CPU Units in a
PLC System.
Process-control CPU Units refer to CPU Units with the models [email protected]@P. Each Process-control
CPU Unit consists of a [email protected]@H CS1D CPU Unit and a CS1D-LCB05D Loop Control Board as
a set.
Precautions provides general precautions for using the CS1D Programmable Controllers (PLCs) and
related devices, including the [email protected]@H CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems, [email protected]@S
CPU Units for Single CPU Systems, CS1D-DPL01 Duplex Unit, and CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@ Power Supply
Unit.
Section 1 introduces the special features and functions of the CS1D Duplex PLCs and describes the
differences between these PLCs and other PLCs.
Section 2 provides the specifications, defines the nomenclature, and describes the functions of CS1D
PLCs.
Section 3 describes the basic operation of a Duplex System.
Section 4 outlines the steps required to assemble and operate a CS1D Duplex PLC system.
Section 5 describes how to install a PLC System, including mounting the various Units and wiring the
System. Be sure to follow the instructions carefully. Improper installation can cause the PLC to malfunction, resulting in very dangerous situations.
Section 6 describes the settings in the PLC Setup and how they are used to control CPU Unit operation.
Section 7 describes I/O allocations to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units, and data
exchange with Units.
Section 8 describes the structure and functions of the I/O Memory Areas and Parameter Areas.
Section 9 describes the internal operation of the CPU Unit and the cycle used to perform internal processing.
Section 10 provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PLC operation.
Section 11 provides inspection and maintenance information.
The Appendices provide Unit specifications, Auxiliary Area words and bits, a memory map of internal
addresses, and PLC Setup coding sheets, RS-232C port connection information, and precautions
when upgrading a system to duplex operation with CS1D PLCs
xvii
About this Manual, Continued
Name
Cat. No.
Contents
SYSMAC CS Series
[email protected]@H CPU Units
[email protected]@S CPU Units
CS1D-DPL01/02D Duplex Unit
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@ Power Supply Unit
Duplex System Operation Manual
W405
Provides an outline of and describes the design,
installation, maintenance, and other basic operations
for a Duplex System based on CS1D CPU Units.
(This manual)
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1, CS1G/[email protected]@H,
[email protected]@H, [email protected]@S, [email protected]@,
[email protected]@, [email protected]@P, CJ1G/[email protected]@H,
[email protected]@@@@(B)-G5D, [email protected]@@@@(B)-M3D
Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
W394
This manual describes programming and other methods to use the functions of the CS/CJ-series PLCs
and NSJ Controllers.
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1, CS1G/[email protected]@H,
[email protected]@H, [email protected]@S, [email protected]@,
[email protected]@, [email protected]@P, CJ1G/[email protected]@H,
[email protected]@@@@(B)-G5D, [email protected]@@@@(B)-M3D
Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual
W340
Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions supported by CS/CJ-series PLCs and NSJ Controllers.
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series
CQM1H-PRO01-E, C200H-PRO27-E, CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming Consoles Operation Manual
W341
Provides information on how to program and operate
CS/CJ-series PLCs using a Programming Console.
SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP/NSJ Series
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1, CS1G/[email protected]@H, [email protected]@H,
[email protected]@S, [email protected]@, [email protected]@, [email protected]@P, CJ1G/[email protected]@H, [email protected]@-V1, [email protected]@-V1, [email protected]@-V1, [email protected]@@@[email protected], [email protected]@@@[email protected], [email protected]@@@[email protected],
[email protected]@@@@(B)-G5D, [email protected]@@@@(B)-M3D
Communications Commands Reference Manual
W342
Describes the communications commands used with
CS-series, CJ-series, and CP-series PLCs and NSJ
Controllers.
SYSMAC
WS02-CXPC1-E-V70
CX-Programmer Ver. 7.0 Operation Manual
W446
Describes operating procedures for the CX-Programmer Support Software running on a Windows computer.
SYSMAC CX-Programmer Ver. 7.0
W447
WS02-CXPC1-E-V7, CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, CP1H CPU Units,
NSJ, FQM1
Operation Manual: Function Blocks
Describes specifications and procedures required to
use function blocks.
SYSMAC WS02-PSTC1-E
CX-Protocol Operation Manual
W344
Describes the use of the CX-Protocol to create protocol macros as communications sequences to communicate with external devices.
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Loop Control Boards/Process-control
CPU Units/Loop-control CPU Units
CS1W-LCB01/LCB05, [email protected]@P, CJ1G-CPU42P,
CJ1G-CPU43P/44P/45P
Operation Manual
W406
Provides information on how to operate CS1 Loop
Control Boards, including descriptions of the installation, maintenance, and other basic operations.
CS1D-ETN21D
Ethernet Unit Operation Manual
W430
Provides information on how to operateCS1D Ethernet Units, including descriptions of the installation,
maintenance, and other basic operations.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xviii
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xix
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xx
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xxi
xxii
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CS1D Programmable Controllers (PLCs) and related devices,
including the [email protected]@H CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems, [email protected]@S CPU Units for Single CPU
Systems, CS1D-DPL01 Duplex Unit, and CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@ Power Supply Unit.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Programmable
Controllers. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or
operate a PLC system.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiv
xxiv
xxiv
xxvi
xxvii
xxxiii
xxxiii
xxxiii
xxxiii
xxxiv
xxiii
1
Intended Audience
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned applications.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING The CPU Unit refreshes I/O even when the program is stopped (i.e., even in
PROGRAM mode). Confirm safety thoroughly in advance before changing the
status of any part of memory allocated to I/O Units, Special I/O Units, or CPU
Bus Units. Any changes to the data allocated to any Unit may result in unexpected operation of the loads connected to the Unit. Any of the following operation may result in changes to memory status.
• Transferring I/O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Programming
Device.
• Changing present values in memory from a Programming Device.
• Force-setting/-resetting bits from a Programming Device.
• Transferring I/O memory files from a Memory Card or EM file memory to
the CPU Unit.
• Transferring I/O memory from a host computer or from another PLC on a
network.
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
xxiv
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch the Power Supply Unit while power is being supplied or immediately after power has been turned OFF. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor
affecting the PLC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
With a CS1D System operating in Duplex Mode, operation will be stopped
and all outputs will be turned OFF in the following circumstances.
• When self-diagnosis simultaneously detects an error in both the active
and standby CPU Units.
• When a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is simultaneously executed in both the active and standby CPU Units.
• When self-diagnosis detects an error in Simplex Mode or when it detects
an error during duplex initialization for Duplex Mode.
• When a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed in Simplex
Mode or during duplex initialization for Duplex Mode.
Unexpected operation, however, may still occur for errors in the I/O control
section, errors in I/O memory, and other errors that cannot be detected by the
self-diagnosis function. As a countermeasure for all such errors, external
safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!WARNING The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the
output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for
such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in
the system.
!WARNING When the 24-V DC output (service power supply to the PLC) is overloaded or
short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned
OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must
be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!Caution Confirm safety before transferring data files stored in the file memory (Memory Card or EM file memory) to the I/O area (CIO) of the CPU Unit using a
peripheral tool. Otherwise, the devices connected to the output unit may malfunction regardless of the operation mode of the CPU Unit.
!Caution Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes. Serious accidents may
result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not provided.
xxv
Operating Environment Precautions
4
!Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
!Caution The CS1D CPU Units automatically back up the user program and parameter
data to flash memory when these are written to the CPU Unit. I/O memory
(including the DM, EM, and HR Areas), however, is not written to flash memory. The DM, EM, and HR Areas can be held during power interruptions with a
battery. If there is a battery error, the contents of these areas may not be
accurate after a power interruption. If the contents of the DM, EM, and HR
Areas are used to control external outputs, prevent inappropriate outputs from
being made whenever the Battery Error Flag (A40204) is ON.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to
another node or changing contents of the I/O memory area. Doing either of
these without confirming safety may result in injury.
!Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in
burning or malfunction.
!Caution Caution is required when connecting peripheral devices, such as a personal
computer, to the PLC when Units with non-isolated power supplies, such as
the CS1W-CLK12/CLK52(-V1), that are connected to an external power supply are mounted to the PLC. If the 24-V side is grounded on the external
power supply, a short will be created if the 0-V side of the peripheral device is
grounded. When connecting peripheral devices, either ground the 0-V side of
the external power supply or do not ground the external power supply at all.
4
Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
xxvi
5
Application Precautions
!Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC
System. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life
of the system.
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PLC System.
• Do not use the C200H/CS-series Power Supply Units ([email protected]@@@)
in a CS1D PLC. System operation will not be dependable and may stop.
• Do not use a CS1D Power Supply Unit (CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@) for any PLC
other than a CS1D PLC. Operational errors and burning will result.
• If duplex Power Supply Units are to be used, calculate the current consumption so that the system will be able to operate with a single Power
Supply Unit in case an error occurs in the other Power Supply Unit. If two
different kinds of Power Supply Units are to be used, calculate the current
consumption using the output of the smaller-capacity Power Supply Unit.
• In a CS1D Duplex CPU System, always mount the [email protected]@H/P
CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems to the CS1D-BC052/BC042D CPU
Backplane. Faulty operation will occur if any other CPU Unit is mounted.
• In a CS1D Single CPU System, always mount a [email protected]@S CPU
Unit for Single CPU Systems to the CS1D-BC82S CPU Backplane. Faulty
operation will occur if any other CPU Unit is mounted.
• Do not mount a [email protected]@H/P/S CPU Unit to a [email protected]@ (nonCS1D) CPU Backplane. Otherwise, faulty operation will occur.
• The cycle time will be increased over the normal cycle time whenever
duplex operation is initialized, including when power is turned ON, when
the initialization button is pressed, when operation is started, and when
data is transferred. The increase will be a maximum of 190 ms for the
CS1D-CPU65H and 520 ms for the CS1D-CPU67H. Set the monitoring
time (10 to 40,000 ms, default: 1 s) for the cycle time high enough to allow
for this increase. Also, confirm that the system will operate correctly and
safely even for the maximum cycle time, including the increase for duplex
initialization.
• If operation switches from Duplex Mode to Simplex Mode, processing to
synchronize the active and standby CPU Units will no longer be performed, resulting in a shorter cycle time. The more instructions requiring
synchronization (such as IORF, DLNK, IORD, IOWR, PID, RXD, FREAD,
and FWRIT) are used, the greater the difference between Duplex Mode
and Simplex Mode operation will be (with Duplex Mode having the longer
cycle time). Confirm that the system will operate correctly and safely even
for the cycle time in both Simplex and Duplex Modes.
• If the active CPU Unit is switched when PTs or host computers are connected to the RS-232C port on both the active and standby CPU Units,
communications may be interrupted momentarily. Always enable retry
process in communications programs at the PTs or host computers.
• Before replacing a Unit online, always disable the operation of all connected external devices before starting the replacement procedure. Unexpected outputs from the Unit being replaced may result in unexpected
operation of controlled devices or systems.
xxvii
5
Application Precautions
• Always following the procedures provided in the operation manual when
performing online replacement.
• When replacing a Unit online, always replace it with a Unit that has the
same specifications.
• When replacing a Duplex Unit online in a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System, always follow the procedure provided in this operation manual.
• When replacing a Connecting Cable or Expansion Unit online in a Duplex
CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System, always follow the procedure provided
in this operation manual.
• When using duplex Connecting Cables in a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System, always use cables that are the same length.
• In a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System, do not connect two Connecting Cables to Expansion Backplanes that are in different operating
levels. Doing so may cause improper operation.
• Before removing a Unit during operation without a PLC Programming
Device (CX-Programmer or a Programming Console), always confirm that
the Removal of a Unit without a Programming Device or Removal/Addition
of Units without a Programming Device function is enabled in the PLC
Setup. If a Unit is removed while the PLC Setup is not set to enable Unit
removal without a Programming Device, an I/O bus error will occur and
the PLC (CPU Unit) will stop operating.
• When a Unit has been removed during operation without a PLC Programming Device (CX-Programmer or a Programming Console), data transferred from the removed Unit to the CPU Unit may be invalid. If an invalid
data transfer will adversely affect the system, use a Programming Device
to replace the Unit online.
• When the Removal of a Unit without a Programming Device or Removal/
Addition of Units without a Programming Device function is enabled in the
PLC Setup and a Special I/O Unit has been removed, the Special I/O Unit
Area words allocated to that Unit for data transfer (to and from the CPU
Unit) will be cleared. If the loss of the Special I/O Unit Area data will
adversely affect the system, disable these functions in the PLC Setup and
use a Programming Device to replace the Unit online. (When a Programming Device is used to replace the Unit online, the data in the Special I/O
Unit Area is retained while the Unit is removed.)
• An I/O bus error, which can be caused by a Unit malfunction, is normally a
fatal error that stops operation. When he Removal of a Unit without a Programming Device or Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming
Device function is enabled in the PLC Setup, the I/O bus error will be
treated as a non-fatal error and PLC (CPU Unit) will not stop operating. If
there are any Units that will adversely affect the system if an I/O bus error
occurs, do not enable these functions in the PLC Setup.
• Do not turn ON the Maintenance Start Bit (A80015) continuously from the
ladder program. As long as the Maintenance Start Bit is ON, errors will
not be generated even if there are Unit malfunctions, so the system may
be adversely affected.
Note
The Maintenance Start Bit is provided to prevent non-fatal errors
from occurring during Unit removal without a Programming Device.
• Do not turn ON the Online Replacement Completed Bit (A80215) continuously from the ladder program. If the Unit is mounted while the Online
Replacement Completed Bit is ON, the PLC (CPU Unit) may stop operating.
xxviii
5
Application Precautions
Note
The Online Replacement Completed Bit is provided to restart the
data exchange between the replaced Unit and CPU Unit. After a
Unit has been replaced without a Programming Device, turn ON the
Online Replacement Completed Bit to restart the data exchange.
• Always turn OFF the reserved pin (RSV) of the Duplex Unit's Communications Setting DIP Switch.
• Never connect pin 6 (5-V power supply) on the RS-232C port on the CPU
Unit to any device other than an NT-AL001, CJ1W-CIF11 Adapter, or
[email protected] Programmable Terminal. The external device or the CPU
Unit may be damaged.
• You must use the CX-Programmer (programming software that runs on
Windows) if you need to program more than one task. A Programming
Console can be used to program only one cyclic task. A Programming
Console can, however, be used to edit multitask programs originally created with the CX-Programmer.
!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
• Always connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not
connecting to a ground of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• A ground of 100 Ω or less must be installed when shorting the GR and LG
terminals on the Power Supply Unit.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of
the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction
or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units, Inner Boards, or any other Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the PLC or the system, or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed
these precautions.
• The user program and parameter area data in the CPU Units are backed
up in the built-in flash memory. The BKUP indicator will light on the front
of the CPU Unit when the backup operation is in progress. Do not turn
OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit. The
data will not be backed up if power is turned OFF.
• The PLC Setup is set to specify using the mode set on the Programming
Console and a Programming Console is not connected, the CPU Unit will
start in RUN mode. This is the default setting in the PLC Setup. (A CS1
CPU Unit will start in PROGRAM mode under the same conditions.)
• When creating an AUTOEXEC.IOM file from a Programming Device (a
Programming Console or the CX-Programmer) to automatically transfer
data at startup, set the first write address to D20000 and be sure that the
size of data written does not exceed the size of the DM Area. When the
data file is read from the Memory Card at startup, data will be written in
xxix
Application Precautions
5
the CPU Unit starting at D20000 even if another address was set when
the AUTOEXEC.IOM file was created. Also, if the DM Area is exceeded
(which is possible when the CX-Programmer is used), the remaining data
will be written to the EM Area. Refer to information on file operations in
the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual for details.
• Always turn ON power to the PLC before turning ON power to the control
system. If the PLC power supply is turned ON after the control power supply, temporary errors may result in control system signals because the
output terminals on DC Output Units and other Units will momentarily turn
ON when power is turned ON to the PLC.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event that outputs from Output Units remain ON as a result of internal circuit failures, which can occur in relays, transistors, and other elements.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal
lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable Controller) must be provided by the
customer.
• Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC when data is being transferred. In particular, do not turn OFF the power supply when reading or
writing a Memory Card. Also, do not remove the Memory Card when the
BUSY indicator is lit. To remove a Memory Card, first press the memory
card power supply switch and then wait for the BUSY indicator to go out
before removing the Memory Card.
• If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be
turned OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PLC is
switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode. Make sure
that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this
occurs. (When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced
with the FALS(007) instruction, all outputs from Output Unit will be turned
OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained.)
• The contents of the DM, EM, and HR Areas in the CPU Unit are backed
up by a Battery. If the Battery voltage drops, this data may be lost. Provide
countermeasures in the program using the Battery Error Flag (A40204) to
re-initialize data or take other actions if the Battery voltage drops.
• When supplying power at 200 to 240 V AC, always remove the metal
jumper from the voltage selector terminals on the Power Supply Unit
(except for Power Supply Units with wide-range specifications). The product will be destroyed and must be replaced if 200 to 240 V AC is supplied
while the metal jumper is attached. Refer to 5-4 Wiring Methods for
details.
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.
• Install the Units as far away as possible from devices that generate
strong, high-frequency noise.
xxx
5
Application Precautions
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage. Excess voltages may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of
the maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in
burning.
• Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand
voltage tests. Not disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result
in burning.
• Install the Units properly as specified in the operation manuals. Improper
installation of the Units may result in malfunction.
• Be sure that all the Backplane mounting screws, terminal block screws,
and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the
relevant manuals. Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
• Wire all connections correctly.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power
supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors completely.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, Memory Units, expansion cables, and
other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper
locking may result in malfunction.
• Check switch settings, the contents of the DM Area, and other preparations before starting operation. Starting operation without the proper settings or data may result in an unexpected operation.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in unexpected operation.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the
startup operating mode).
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of the DM Area, HR Area, and other data required for resuming
operation. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit.
Doing either of these may break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines. Doing so
may break the cables.
• Do not use commercially available RS-232C personal computer cables.
Always use the special cables listed in this manual or make cables
according to manual specifications. Using commercially available cables
may damage the external devices or CPU Unit.
xxxi
5
Application Precautions
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is
correct. Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static build-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.
• When transporting or storing circuit boards, cover them in antistatic material to protect them from static electricity and maintain the proper storage
temperature.
• Do not touch circuit boards or the components mounted to them with your
bare hands. There are sharp leads and other parts on the boards that
may cause injury if handled improperly.
• Do not short the battery terminals or charge, disassemble, heat, or incinerate the battery. Do not subject the battery to strong shocks. Doing any
of these may result in leakage, rupture, heat generation, or ignition of the
battery. Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subjected to excessive shock. Batteries that have been subjected
to shock may leak if they are used.
• UL standards required that batteries be replaced only by experienced
technicians. Do not allow unqualified persons to replace batteries.
• Dispose of the product and batteries according to local ordinances as they apply. Have qualified specialists properly
dispose of used batteries as industrial waste.
• Separate the line ground terminal (LG) from the functional ground terminal (GR) on the Power Supply Unit before performing withstand voltage
tests or insulation resistance tests.
• Do not drop the product or subject it to excessive vibration or shock.
xxxii
6
Conformance to EC Directives
6
Conformance to EC Directives
6-1
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
6-2
Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the
standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by
the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN61131-2 or EN61000-6-2
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference):
EN61000-6-4
(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 V AC and 75
to 1,500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC (EN61131-2).
6-3
Conformance to EC Directives
The CS1D Duplex PLCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that the
machine or device in which the CS1D Duplex PLC is used complies with EC
Directives, the PLC must be installed as follows:
1,2,3...
1. The CS1D Duplex PLC must be installed within a control panel.
2. You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power
supplies used for the communications power supply and I/O power supplies.
3. CS1D Duplex PLCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the
Common Emission Standard (EN61000-6-4). Radiated emission characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the
control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring,
and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine
or equipment complies with EC Directives.
xxxiii
6
Conformance to EC Directives
6-4
Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods
The CS1D Duplex PLCs conforms to the Common Emission Standards
(EN61000-6-4) of the EMC Directives. However, noise generated by relay output switching may not satisfy these Standards. In such a case, a noise filter
must be connected to the load side or other appropriate countermeasures
must be provided external to the PLC.
Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depending on the
devices on the load side, wiring, configuration of machines, etc. Following are
examples of countermeasures for reducing the generated noise.
Countermeasures
(Refer to EN61000-6-4 for more details.)
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the
whole system with the PLC included is less than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole
system with the PLC included is more than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasure Examples
When switching an inductive load, connect an surge protector, diodes, etc., in
parallel with the load or contact as shown below.
Circuit
Current
AC
DC
Yes
Yes
Power
supply
xxxiv
Inductive
load
CR method
Characteristic
Required element
If the load is a relay or solenoid, there is
a time lag between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load
is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert
the surge protector in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the surge protector
between the contacts.
The capacitance of the capacitor must
be 1 to 0.5 µF per contact current of
1 A and resistance of the resistor must
be 0.5 to 1 Ω per contact voltage of 1 V.
These values, however, vary with the
load and the characteristics of the
relay. Decide these values from experiments, and take into consideration that
the capacitance suppresses spark discharge when the contacts are separated and the resistance limits the
current that flows into the load when
the circuit is closed again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is an
AC circuit, use a capacitor with no
polarity.
6
Conformance to EC Directives
Circuit
Current
AC
DC
No
Yes
Power
supply
Inductive
load
Diode method
Yes
Power
supply
Inductive
load
Varistor method
Yes
Characteristic
Required element
The diode connected in parallel with
the load changes energy accumulated
by the coil into a current, which then
flows into the coil so that the current will
be converted into Joule heat by the
resistance of the inductive load.
This time lag, between the moment the
circuit is opened and the moment the
load is reset, caused by this method is
longer than that caused by the CR
method.
The varistor method prevents the imposition of high voltage between the contacts by using the constant voltage
characteristic of the varistor. There is
time lag between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load
is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert
the varistor in parallel with the load. If
the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V,
insert the varistor between the contacts.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode must be at least 10 times
as large as the circuit voltage value.
The forward current of the diode must
be the same as or larger than the load
current.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode may be two to three times
larger than the supply voltage if the
surge protector is applied to electronic
circuits with low circuit voltages.
---
When switching a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent
lamp, suppress the inrush current as shown below.
Countermeasure 1
Countermeasure 2
R
OUT
OUT
R
COM
Providing a dark current of
approx. one-third of the rated
value through an incandescent
lamp
COM
Providing a limiting resistor
xxxv
Conformance to EC Directives
xxxvi
6
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration
This section introduces the features and system configuration of a CS1D Duplex PLC System.
1-1
1-2
CS1D Duplex System Overview and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-1
CS1D Duplex System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-2
CS1D Duplex System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
1-2-1
7
CS1D Duplex Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Section 1-1
CS1D Duplex System Overview and Features
1-1
1-1-1
CS1D Duplex System Overview and Features
CS1D Duplex System Overview
The CS1D Duplex System is a highly reliable Programmable Controller (PLC)
System. By providing duplex CPU Units, Power Supply Units, and Communications Units, the CS1D can continue control operations and be restored with
no need to shut down the entire system in the event of an error or malfunction.
Select from either of two Duplex Systems: A Duplex CPU System or a Single
CPU System. A Duplex CPU System includes two CPU Units. Even if an error
occurs in the active CPU Unit, the standby CPU Unit continues operation,
thus preventing a system shutdown. The Single CPU System uses a single
CPU Unit. In either System, duplex Power Supply Units or Communications
Units can be used to provide high reliability in the event of an error in the
power supply system or the active Communications Unit.
It is now possible to select a Duplex CPU with duplex Connecting Cables
(Dual I/O Expansion System), as well as the previously available Duplex CPU
with a single Connecting Cable (Single I/O Expansion System).
CS1D Duplex System
Configurations
CS1D Duplex System
Duplex CPU system
Duplex CPU, Single
I/O Expansion System
Duplex CPU, Dual
I/O Expansion System
Redundancy
High
Low
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System
CS1D I/O Control Unit
Communications Units
(Controller Link Unit or
Ethernet Unit)
Duplex Connecting
Cables
2
Single CPU System
Duplex Communications Units
Duplex Unit
CPU Units for a
Duplex CPU System
Duplex CPU Units
CS1D Power Supply Units
Duplex Power
Supply Units
Section 1-1
CS1D Duplex System Overview and Features
Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System
Communications Units
(Controller Link Units)
Duplex Unit
CS1D CPU Units for
Duplex CPU Systems
CS1D Power Supply Units
RUN
ERR/ALM
DPL01
L
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
R
RUN
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
LEFT CPU
USE
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
NO USE
RIGHT CPU
MCPWR
USE
BUSY
MCPWR
BUSY
NO USE
OPEN
OPEN
DPL SW
ON OFF
SPL DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
ON
PERIPHERAL
PERIPHERAL
INIT.
SW
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
PORT
ON
PORT
DUPLEX
Duplex
Communications
Units
Duplex
CPU Units
Duplex Power
Supply Units
Single CPU System
Controller Link Units
CS1D CPU Unit
for Single CPU Systems
Ethernet Units
CS1D Power Supply Units
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
MCPWR
BUSY
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
PORT
Duplex Communications
Units
1-1-2
Duplex Power
Supply Units
CS1D Duplex System Features
Duplex CPU Systems
Two CPU Units and one Duplex Unit are mounted.
The two CPU Units always run the same user's program. One of them executes the system I/O while the other remains on standby. If an error (see note)
occurs in the controlling CPU Unit (called the active CPU Unit), control is
switched to the other CPU Unit (called the standby CPU Unit), and operation
continues. (The system will stop, however, if the same error occurs in the
standby CPU Unit, or if another operation switching error or a fatal error
occurs.)
Note Operation will be taken over by the standby CPU Unit for any of the following
operation switching errors: CPU error, memory error, cycle time overrun error,
program error, FALS error, or fatal Inner Board error. (A fatal Inner Board error
applies only to Process-control CPU Units.)
Using the Hot Standby Method
With the hot standby method, the standby CPU Unit operates with the same
status as the active CPU Unit. Using this method provides the following benefits.
3
Section 1-1
CS1D Duplex System Overview and Features
1,2,3...
1. There is no need to incorporate special programming for duplex operations, such as programming to switch when an error occurs, and thus there
is no need for the duplex setup to be considered in individual parameter
settings.
2. The time required for switching when an error occurs is shortened, enabling operation to be continued without any interruption.
Standby CPU Unit:
Remains on standby while
executing the program.
C
P
U
D
P
L
Active CPU Unit:
Controls operation.
C
P
U
No special programming
is required, because
duplex CPU Units are
operating.
Automatic Recovery to Duplex Mode
With existing Duplex CPU Systems (such as the CVM1D), it is necessary to
manually return the system to Duplex Mode after a CPU Unit error occurs during operation in Duplex Mode and operation is switched to Simplex Mode.
With the CS1D Duplex System, operation is automatically returned to the original Duplex Mode when the error that caused the switch to Simplex Mode is
cleared.
Unmanned duplex operation can be continued even when incidental errors
occur temporarily due to causes such as noise.
Single CPU Systems
Although only a single CPU Unit is mounted, duplex Power Supply Units,
duplex Communications Units, and online Unit replacement are possible.
Duplex Power Supply Units
Power is always supplied in parallel from two Power Supply Units. Even if one
of the Power Supply Units breaks down, the other one continues providing
power automatically. Power Supply Unit models for AC power and DC power
are both available, and a combination of both types can be used. A Power
Supply Unit that malfunctions or for which a broken line occurs can be confirmed by means of flags in the AR Area. If a Power Supply Unit malfunctions,
it can be replaced online without turning OFF the power supply or stopping
operation.
Duplex Communications Units
Duplex Controller Link
Units Using Active/
Standby Units
Two Communications Units (see note) are connected by fiber-optic cable. If
one of the Units stops communicating, the other one continues communications.
Note The following Communications Units support duplex operation: The CS1WCLK12-V1 (H-PCF Cable) and the CS1W-CLK52-V1 (GI Cable) Controller
Link Units.
As shown in the following diagram, two Controller Link Units are mounted in a
single network with identical unit numbers and node addresses. One of the
Controller Link Units is in standby mode.
When an error is detected at the active Controller Link Unit, the standby Controller Link Unit switches to active operating status. This allows communications to continue without the node being disconnected.
4
Section 1-1
CS1D Duplex System Overview and Features
Identical unit numbers and node addresses
C
L
K
C
L
K
C
P
U
D
P
L
C
P
U
P
S
U
P
S
U
Identical unit numbers and node addresses
C
L
K
C
L
K
C
P
U
System with duplex communications
D
P
L
C
P
U
P
S
U
P
S
U
System with duplex communications
Fiber-optic cable
(ring connection)
C
L
K
C
L
K
C
P
U
P
S
U
C
L
K
P
S
U
System with duplex communications
C
P
U
P
S
U
System without duplex communications
CLK: Controller Link Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
DPL: Duplex Unit
PSU: Power Supply Unit
Identical unit numbers and node addresses
Duplex Ethernet Units
Using Primary/Secondary
Lines
Using duplex Ethernet Units and redundant communications lines increases
the reliability of the network. The communications lines use a primary line and
a secondary line, to which Ethernet Units are connected. Normally the primary communications line is used, but operation will switch to the secondary
communications line automatically if an error occurs in the primary communications line or the primary Ethernet Unit, thereby allowing continuous communications.
• Duplex Ethernet Units do not require duplex programming considerations.
The CPU Unit select the Unit to use as the send destination.
• Ethernet Units use 100Base-TX and support high-speed communications.
Non-duplex device
Duplex lines
including hubs
100Base-TX
Primary Network
100Base-TX
Secondary Network
Primary Secondary
Unit
Unit
Duplex Units
Note Duplex operation of Ethernet Units for a Duplex CPU System requires a CS1D
CPU Unit Ver. 1.1 or later and CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or higher. Duplex
operation of Ethernet Units for a Single CPU System is possible for any CS1D
CPU Unit for Single CPU Systems, but CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or higher is
required.
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System (Duplex CPU System Only)
A more reliable system can be configured by expanding the Duplex CPU System.
5
CS1D Duplex System Overview and Features
Section 1-1
Note A Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System requires compatible Duplex Units,
CPU Backplane, Expansion Backplanes, I/O Control Units, I/O Interface Units,
and Duplex CPU Units with unit version 1.3 or later.
Duplex Connecting Cables
When the Connecting Cable between the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks is
duplexed, the system can continue operating through the second Cable if one
Cable is damaged or disconnected.
Online Replacement of
Duplex Units
If a Duplex Unit fails, the faulty Unit can now be replaced online. (The PLC
operates in simplex mode while the Duplex Unit is being replaced.)
Replacement of Basic and
Special I/O Units without a
Programming Device
If the Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function is
enabled in advance, Units can be removed and mounted without any CX-Programmer or Programming Console operations.
Online Addition of Units
and Expansion
Backplanes
A CX-Programmer operation can be used to add a Basic I/O Unit, Special I/O
Unit, or Expansion Backplane to an existing Rack. An operating Rack can be
expanded without stopping the Rack.
CS Series Compatibility
The CS1D CPU Units ([email protected]@H and [email protected]@S) are based on
the architecture of CS1-H CPU Units and can use the same programs and
Units as the CS1 and CS1-H CPU Units.
For a comparison of functions between the CS1D and CS1-H Units, refer to
Appendix E Precautions in Replacing CS1-H PLCs with CS1D PLCs.
Online Replacement of CPU Units
CPU Units can be replaced online without stopping system operation.
Online Replacement of Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units can be replaced online
by using Programming Console or CX-Programmer operations (see note). In
particular, with Duplex Communications Units (e.g., Ethernet Units and Controller Link Units, optical ring type, token ring mode). Communications Units
can be replaced without disconnecting the node or interrupting communications.
Note
1. Online Unit replacement is possible with CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or higher.
2. When CS1D CPU Units with unit version 1.3 or later are being used and
the Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function has
been enabled in advance, Units can be replaced without any CX-Programmer or Programming Console operations.
6
Section 1-2
System Configuration
1-2
1-2-1
System Configuration
CS1D Duplex Systems
Duplex Functions
The following duplex functions are supported by a CS1D Duplex System.
Duplex function
Support
Duplex CPU System
([email protected]@H)
Unit Ver.
1.3
Unit Ver.
1.2
Unit Ver.
1.1
Pre-Ver.
1.1
Single CPU
System
([email protected]@S)
Duplex CPU Units (with Duplex Inner Boards)
(See note 1.)
Duplex Power Supply Units (See note 2.)
Duplex Communications Controller Link Units
Units (See note 3.)
Ethernet Units
Duplex Connecting Cables (See note 4.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Online Unit Replacement using a Programming
Device
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Unit Removal without a Programming Device
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device (See note 4.)
Yes
No
No
No
No
Online Addition of Duplex Unit (See note 4.)
Online Addition of Units and Backplanes (See
notes 4 and 5.)
New functions shared by CS/CJ-series CPU
Unit Ver. 2.0 (See note 6.)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Note
No
1. The only Duplex Inner Boards that can be used are the ones built into the
the Process-control CPU Units. Process-control CPU Units consist of a
CPU Unit for Duplex CPU Systems with a built-in Loop Control Board (Inner Board). The following two types are available. The Loop Control
Boards cannot be removed from these CPU Units.
Process-control CPU Unit
CPU Unit
CS1D-CPU65P
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67P
CS1D-CPU67H
Loop Control Board
CS1D-LCB05D
Details on the CPU Units are provided in this manual. For details on the Loop
Control Boards, refer to the Loop Control Boards Operation Manual (W406)
and the Loop Control Board Function Block Reference Manual (W407).
2. A single Power Supply Unit can also be used, but it must be the CS1D Power Supply Unit
3. A single Communications Unit can also be used, but it must be a CS-series
Communications Unit. Duplex Units can also be used for both Controller
Link Units and Ethernet Units at the same time.
4. In a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System, an Expansion Backplane
can be added in addition to Basic I/O Units and Special I/O Units. (CPU
Bus Units cannot be added.)
5. In a Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System, only Basic I/O Units and
Special I/O Units can be added. (Expansion Backplanes and CPU Bus
Units cannot be added.)
6. For details on the functions added to CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0, refer
to the CS Series PLC Operation Manual (W339)
7
Section 1-2
System Configuration
The Two Modes in a CS1D Duplex CPU System
A CS1D Duplex CPU System can be operated in either Duplex Mode or Simplex Mode.
• Duplex Mode
In Duplex Mode, the CPU Units are placed in duplex system status. If a
fatal error occurs in the active CPU Unit, control is switched to the standby
CPU Unit and operation continues.
• Simplex Mode
In Simplex Mode, a single CPU Unit controls operation.
System Configuration
CS1D CPU Rack for a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System
4) CS1D-BC042D CPU Backplane
for Duplex CPU Systems
1) CS1D-DPL02D
Duplex (DPL) Unit
5) CS1D-IC102D
I/O Control Units
2) CS1D-CPU65H/67H/65P/67P
CPU Units with unit version 1.3 or later, 3) CS1D-PA207R or
for Duplex CPU Systems (See note 3.) CS1D-PD024/025
Power Supply Units
CS1D CPU Rack
Duplex Connecting
Cables
Up to 3 to 5 Units can
Duplex
be mounted. (See note 2.)
CPU Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units, Special
I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units.
Note
Duplex Power
Supply Units
1. C200H-series Units cannot be mounted.
2. The maximum number of Units depends on the number of CS1D I/O Control Units that are mounted.
3. The only CPU Units that can be mounted are CPU Units for a CS1D Duplex System with a unit version 1.3 or later. If a CPU Unit with unit version
1.2 or earlier is mounted, an I/O bus error will occur and the system will not
operate.
1
2
8
Name
Model number
Duplex Unit
CS1D-DPL02D
(Especially for a
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System)
CPU Units for Duplex CS1D-CPU65H
CPU Systems (Unit
CS1D-CPU67H
version 1.3 or later)
CS1D-CPU65P
CS1D-CPU67P
Contents
The Duplex Unit is the Unit that controls duplex system operation. It
monitors for errors and switches operation when an error occurs.
This Duplex Unit can be replaced online.
This Duplex Unit cannot be used in a Duplex CPU, Single I/O
Expansion System.
CPU Units for Duplex CPU System are designed especially for a
Duplex CPU System. Two CPU Units of the identical model are
mounted.
CPU Units with unit version 1.3 or later are required.
These CPU Units cannot be used in a Single CPU System.
Section 1-2
System Configuration
3
Name
CS1D Power Supply
Units
Model number
CS1D-PA207R
CS1D-PD024
CS1D-PD025
4
CPU Backplane for
CS1D-BC042D
Duplex CPU Systems
(Especially for a
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System)
5
CS1D I/O Control
CS1D-IC102D
Unit (Especially for a
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System)
Contents
CS1D Power Supply Units are designed especially for a Duplex
System. Two Power Supply Units are mounted to a CPU Rack,
Expansion Rack, or Long-distance Expansion Rack for a duplex
power supply configuration. When not configuring a duplex power
supply, only one Power Supply Unit is mounted.
A CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU System is used in a Duplex CPU
System. It allows the mounting of Duplex CPU Units, Duplex Power
Supply Units, and Duplex Communications Units, as well as online
Unit replacement and online Duplex Unit replacement.
These Backplanes cannot be used as Backplanes for Long-distance Expansion Racks.
These Units are required to create a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System. The Connecting Cables can be duplexed by using two
of these Units.
These I/O Control Units cannot be used in a Duplex CPU, Single
I/O Expansion System.
Note When using a Memory Card in Duplex Mode, mount it in the active CPU Unit.
(Duplex Memory Card operation is not possible.) Duplex EM File Memory
operation is possible.
CS1D CPU Rack for a Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System
2) CS1DCPU65H/67H/65P/67P 3) CS1D-PA207R
CPU Units for Duplex
CS1D-PD024/025
CPU Systems
Power Supply Units
1) CS1D-DPL01
4) CS1D-BC052 CPU
Duplex Unit
Backplane for Duplex CPU
Systems (See note.)
RUN
ERR/ALM
DPL01
L
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
R
RUN
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
LEFT CPU
USE
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
NO USE
RIGHT CPU
MCPWR
USE
BUSY
MCPWR
BUSY
NO USE
OPEN
CS1D CPU Rack
OPEN
DPL SW
ON OFF
SPL DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
ON
PERIPHERAL
PERIPHERAL
INIT.
SW
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
PORT
ON
PORT
DUPLEX
A maximum of 5 Units can be mounted.
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU
Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
1
2
Name
Duplex Unit
(Especially for a Duplex
CPU, Single I/O Expansion System)
Model number
CS1D-DPL01
CPU Units for Duplex
CPU Systems
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU65P
CS1D-CPU67P
Duplex CPU Units
Duplex Power
Supply Units
Contents
The Duplex Unit is the Unit that controls duplex system operation. It
monitors for errors and switches operation when an error occurs.
This Duplex Unit cannot be used in a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System.
CPU Units for Duplex CPU System are designed especially for a
Duplex CPU System. Two CPU Units of the identical model are
mounted.
These CPU Units cannot be used in a Single CPU System.
9
Section 1-2
System Configuration
3
4
Name
CS1D Power Supply
Units
Model number
CS1D-PA207R
CS1D-PD024
CS1D-PD025
CPU Backplane for
Duplex CPU Systems
(Especially for a Duplex
CPU, Single I/O Expansion System)
CS1D-BC052
Contents
CS1D Power Supply Units are designed especially for a Duplex System. Two Power Supply Units are mounted to a CPU Rack, Expansion Rack, or Long-distance Expansion Rack for a duplex power
supply configuration. When not configuring a duplex power supply,
only one Power Supply Unit is mounted.
A CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU System is used in a Duplex CPU
System. It allows Duplex CPU Units, Duplex Power Supply Units,
and Duplex Communications Units to be mounted, and enables
online Unit replacement.
This Backplane cannot be used in a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System.
Note When using a Memory Card in Duplex Mode, mount it in the active CPU Unit.
(Duplex Memory Card operation is not possible.) Duplex EM File Memory
operation is possible.
CS1D CPU Rack for a Single CPU System
CS1D-BC082S
1) [email protected]@S CPU Unit
CPU Backplane
for Single CPU Systems
for Single CPU Systems (See note.)
2) CS1D-PA207R
CS1D-PD024/025
Power Supply Units
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
MCPWR
BUSY
OPEN
CS1D CPU Rack
PERIPHERAL
PORT
A maximum of 8 Units can be mounted.
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
Duplex Power
Supply Units
Name
CPU Units for Single
CPU Systems
Model number
CS1D-CPU42S
CS1D-CPU44S
CS1D-CPU65S
CS1D-CPU67S
Contents
These CPU Units are designed especially for a Single CPU System.
These CPU Units cannot be used in a Duplex CPU System.
2
CS1D Power Supply
Units
CS1D-PA207R
CS1D-PD024
CS1D-PD025
CS1D Power Supply Units are designed especially for a CS1D System. Two Power Supply Units are mounted to a CPU Rack, Expansion Rack, or Long-distance Expansion Rack for a duplex power
supply configuration. When not configuring a duplex power supply,
only one Power Supply Unit is mounted.
3
CPU Backplane for Single CPU Systems
CS1D-BC082S
This CPU Backplane is designed for a Single CPU System and does
not support Duplex CPU Units. It does support Duplex Power Supply
Units, Duplex Communications Units, and online Unit replacement.
1
CS1D CPU Rack and CS1D Expansion Racks for a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System
The CS1D Expansion Racks in a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System
are specifically for this system configuration. Use the following Expansion
Backplanes and I/O Interface Units, which are specifically for the Duplex CPU,
Dual I/O Expansion System.
10
Section 1-2
System Configuration
Name
Model number
Expansion Backplane SupCS1D-BI082D
porting Online Replacement
(Especially for a Duplex CPU,
Dual I/O Expansion System)
Contents
This Expansion Backplane is used in a Duplex CPU System, Dual
I/O Expansion System. It allows the mounting of Duplex Power Supply Units and Duplex Communications Units, as well as online Unit
replacement and online addition of Units and Backplanes.
This Backplane cannot be used in a Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System or Single CPU System.
This Backplane cannot be used for a Long-distance Expansion
Rack.
CS1D I/O Interface Unit
CS1D-II102D
(Especially for a Duplex CPU,
Dual I/O Expansion System)
These Units are required to create a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System. The Connecting Cables can be duplexed by using two
of these Units.
These I/O Control Units cannot be used in a Duplex CPU, Single I/O
Expansion System or Single CPU System.
CS1D-IC102D I/O Control Units
(See note.)
CS1D-BC042D CPU
Backplane (see note) for
Duplex CPU Systems
CS1D-DPL02D
Duplex Unit
(See note.)
[email protected]@H/P CPU Units
for Duplex CPU Systems
(unit version 1.3 or later)
CS1D CPU Rack
[email protected]@3
CS1 Connecting Cables
CS1D-BI082D Expansion Backplane
supporting online addition/removal
(See note.)
Up to 3 Units can be mounted.
• CS1 Basic I/O Units
• CS1 Special I/O Units and
CPU Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be
mounted.
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
Power Supply Units
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
12 m max.
[email protected]@3
Up to 7 Racks total
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D-BI082D
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D-II102D
I/O Interface Units
(See note.)
Up to 7 Units can be mounted.
• CS1 Basic I/O Units
• CS1 Special I/O Units and CPU Bus
Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
Power Supply Units
Note These Units are for use in a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System only.
11
Section 1-2
System Configuration
CS1D CPU Rack and CS1D Expansion Racks for a Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System
The same kind of CS1D Expansion Rack is used in both the Duplex CPU Single I/O Expansion Systems and Single CPU Systems. Use the following
CS1D Expansion Backplane, which is specifically for the CS1D System.
Name
CS1D Expansion
Backplane (supports online Unit
replacement)
CS1D-BC052 CPU
Backplane for
Duplex CPU Systems
CS1D-DPL01
Duplex Unit
Model number
Contents
CS1D-BI092
This Backplane must be used for any
Expansion Racks in a CS1D Duplex System. It enables Duplex Power Supply Units,
Duplex Communications Units, and online
Unit replacement. It is also used as the
Backplane for a Long-distance Expansion
Rack.
This Backplane cannot be used in a Duplex
CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System.
[email protected]@H/P
CPU Units for
Duplex CPU Systems
[email protected]@S
CS1D-BC082S
CPU Unit for
CPU Backplane
for Single CPU Systems Single CPU Systems
CS1D CPU Rack
[email protected]@3
CS-series Connecting
Cable
CS1D-BI092
Expansion Backplane
Maximum of 5 Units can be mounted.
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU
Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
Power Supply Units
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@
Power Supply Units
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
12 m max.
[email protected]@3
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D-BI092
The maximum number of Expansion Racks is as follows:
[email protected]/P/S: Up to 7 Racks total
CS1D-CPU44S: Up to 3 Racks total
CS1D-CPU42S: Up to 2 Racks total
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
Maximum of 9 Units can be mounted.
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU
Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
12
Maximum of 8 Units can be mounted.
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU
Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
Power Supply Units
Section 1-2
System Configuration
CS1D CPU Rack + CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks for a Duplex CPU Single I/O Expansion
System or Single CPU System
The same Backplanes for Long-distance Expansion Racks are used in both
Duplex CPU Single I/O Expansion Systems and Single CPU Systems. Use
the following CS1D Expansion Backplane, which is specifically for the CS1D
System.
Name
CS1D Expansion
Backplane (supports online Unit
replacement)
Model Number
Contents
CS1D-BI092
This Backplane must be used for any Longdistance Expansion Racks in a CS1D
Duplex System. It enables duplex Power
Supply Units, duplex Communications
Units, and online Unit replacement.
Note An I/O Control Unit (CS1W-IC102) is mounted only to the CPU Rack.
CS1D-BC052 CPU
Backplane for
Duplex CPU Systems
CS1D-DPL01
Duplex Unit
[email protected]@H/P
CPU Units for
CS1D-BC082S
Duplex CPU Systems
CPU Backplane for
Single CPU Systems
[email protected]@S
CPU Unit for
Single CPU Systems
CS1D
CPU
Rack
CS1W-IC102
I/O Control Unit
A maximum of 4 Units can be mounted.
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU
Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
Maximum of 8 Units can be mounted.
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@
Power Supply Units
[email protected]@2
CV-series Connecting
Cable
Series A
CS1D-BI092
Expansion
Backplane
CS1W-II102
Series B
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
50 m max.
CS1D-BI092
CS1D-BI092
50 m max.
The maximum number
of Expansion Racks is
as follows:
[email protected]/S:
Up to 7 Racks total
CS1D-CPU44S:
Up to 3 Racks total
CS1D-CPU42S:
Up to 2 Racks total
CS1W-II102
I/O Interface Unit
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
[email protected]@2
CV500-TER01
Terminator
A maximum of 8 Units can be mounted.
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU
Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
[email protected]@2
CV500-TER01
Terminator
13
System Configuration
14
Section 1-2
SECTION 2
Specifications, Nomenclature, and Functions
This section provides the specifications, defines the nomenclature, and describes the functions of CS1D PLCs.
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2-1-1
Individual Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2-1-2
Duplex Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
2-1-3
Common Specifications other than Duplex Specifications . . . . . . .
22
2-1-4
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
Configuration Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
2-2-1
CPU Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
2-2-2
Expansion Racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
2-3-1
Duplex Unit Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
2-3-2
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
2-3-3
External Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
2-4-1
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
2-4-2
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
2-4-3
CPU Unit Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
2-4-4
Battery Compartment and Peripheral Port Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
2-4-5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
2-5-1
File Memory Functions in Duplex CPU Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
2-5-2
Files Handled by CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
2-5-3
Initializing File Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
2-5-4
Using File Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
2-5-5
Memory Card Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
2-5-6
Installing and Removing the Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
2-6-1
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
2-6-2
Precautions when Connecting Programming Devices to
Duplex CPU Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
Power Supply Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
2-7-1
Duplex Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
2-7-2
CS1D Power Supply Unit Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
2-7-3
Components and Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
2-7-4
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
2-8-1
CPU Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
2-8-2
Expansion Backplanes for Online Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
15
2-9
16
Units for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
2-9-1
CS1D-IC102D I/O Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
2-9-2
CS1D-II102D I/O Interface Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
2-10 Units on CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
2-10-1 CS1W-IC102 I/O Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
2-10-2 CS1W-II102 I/O Interface Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
2-11 Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
2-11-1 CS-series Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
2-11-2 Interrupt Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
2-11-3 High-speed Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
2-11-4 CS-series Basic I/O Units with Connectors (32-, 64-, and 96-pt Units)
101
2-12 Unit Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
2-12-1 CPU Rack and Expansion Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
2-12-2 Total Current and Power Consumption Calculation Example . . . . .
105
2-12-3 Current Consumption Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
106
2-13 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
2-13-1 Memory Required for Units and Inner Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
2-14 I/O Table Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
2-14-1 Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
2-14-2 CS-series Special I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
2-14-3 CS-series CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
Section 2-1
Specifications
2-1
2-1-1
Specifications
Individual Specifications
CS1D CPU Units
Item
Duplex CPU Systems
CS1DCS1DCPU65H
CPU67H
Specifications
Single CPU Systems
CS1DCS1DCS1DCPU42S
CPU44S
CPU65S
Number of I/O points
(Number of Expansion
Racks)
User program capacity
(See note.)
5,120 points
(7 Racks)
960 points
(2 Racks)
1,280 points
(3 Racks)
5,120 points
(7 Racks)
60 Ksteps
250 Ksteps
10 Ksteps
30 Ksteps
60 Ksteps
250 Ksteps
Data Memory
Extended Data Memory
32 Kwords
32 Kwords x
3 banks
E0_00000 to
E2_32767
32 Kwords x
13 banks
E0_00000 to
EC_32767
32 Kwords x 1 bank
E0_00000 to E0_32767
32 Kwords x
3 banks
E0_00000 to
E2_32767
32 Kwords x
13 banks
E0_00000 to
EC_32767
Current consumption
(provided from CS1D
Power Supply Unit)
5 V DC at 0.82 A
5 V DC at 0.79 A
5 V DC at 0.82 A
Model number
CS1DCPU67S
Note The number of steps in a program is not the same as the number of instructions. Depending on the instruction, anywhere from one to seven steps may
be required. For example, LD and OUT require one step each, but MOV(021)
requires three steps. The total number of steps must not exceed the program
capacity indicated in the above table. Refer to 9-5 Instruction Execution Times
and Number of Steps for the number of steps required for each instruction.
Duplex Unit Required for Duplex CPU System
Item
Model number
Specifications
CS1D-DPL01
CS1D-DPL02D
(for a Duplex CPU, Single I/O (for a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System)
Expansion System)
Number mounted
Current consumption
(provided from CS1D
Power Supply Unit)
One Duplex Unit.
5 V DC, 0.55 A
(with CS1D-BC052 CPU
Backplane for Duplex CPU
System)
One Duplex Unit.
5 V DC, 0.41 A
(Duplex Unit only)
17
Specifications
2-1-2
Section 2-1
Duplex Specifications
System Configuration and Basic Functions
Item
Functional
equivalence
of existing
CS1-H CPU
Units
Mountable
Inner Boards
Specifications
The following CPU Units are equivalent in terms of basic functions (I/O points,
program capacity, DM capacity, and instruction execution speed).
CS1D-CPU67H: Equivalent to CS1H-CPU67H.
CS1D-CPU65H: Equivalent to CS1H-CPU65H.
CS1D-CPU42S: Equivalent to CS1G-CPU42H.
CS1D-CPU44S: Equivalent to CS1G-CPU44H.
CS1D-CPU65S: Equivalent to CS1H-CPU65H.
CS1D-CPU67S: Equivalent to CS1H-CPU67H.
Duplex CPU Systems
Inner Boards cannot be used in a Duplex CPU System except for in the Processcontrol CPU Units ([email protected]@P), which have a built-in CS1D-LCB05D Loop
Control Board that cannot be removed.
Single CPU Systems
CS-series Inner Boards can be mounted in CPU Units for Single CPU Systems,
but must be CS1W-LCCB01/05 Loop Control Boards with unit version 1.5 or
later.
Reference
3-1-7 Duplex CPU System Restrictions
Appendix E Precautions in Replacing CS1H PLCs with CS1D
PLCs
1-2-1 CS1D Duplex
Systems
Mountable
Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units, CS-series Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus
1-2-1 CS1D Duplex
Units
Systems
C200H Basic I/O Units, C200H Group-2 Multipoint I/O Units, and C200H Special
I/O Units cannot be mounted.
System configuration
The following system configurations are possible:
1-2 System Configuration
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems
In a this system, two CS1D CPU Units (CS1D-CPU65H/67H/65P/67P, unit version 1.3 or later), two (or one) CS1D Power Supply Units, and one CS1DDPL02D Duplex Unit are mounted to a CS1D-BC042D Backplane.
Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion Systems
In a Duplex CPU System, two CS1D CPU Units (CS1D-CPU65H/67H/65P/67P,),
two (or one) CS1D Power Supply Units, and one CS1D-DPL01 Duplex Unit are
mounted to a CS1D-BC052 Backplane.
Single CPU Systems
In a Single CPU System, one CS1D CPU Unit ([email protected]@S), two (or one)
CS1D Power Supply Units, and one Duplex Unit are mounted to a CS1D CS1DBC082S Backplane.
18
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
Duplex CS1D Duplex Mode
CPU Units
(Supported
only in Duplex
CPU Systems)
Specifications
Reference
A Duplex CPU System can be operated in either of the fol- 1-2-1 CS1D Duplex
lowing two modes:
Systems
Duplex Mode (DPL)
The system operates with CS1D CPU Units and CS1D
Power Supply Units in duplex status.
Simplex Mode (SPL)
The system operates with just a single CS1D CPU Unit.
Operation of the two Hot standby method: One of the two CS1D CPU Units
3-1-1 Duplex CPU SysCS1D CPU Units in actually controls operations, and the other is on standby
tems
Duplex Mode
as a backup. The two CS1D CPU Units have the same I/O
memory, and parameters (PLC Setup, I/O tables, etc.),
and both run the same user’s program.
Their operation differ in the following points:
The active CPU Unit executes I/O refreshing and all event
servicing.
The standby CPU Unit handles file accessing (read only)
and FINS command execution event servicing (read only).
Operation switching Power interruptions
errors
(CPU operation setting switch: NO
USE), CPU errors,
memory errors, program errors, cycle
time overrun errors,
FALS executions,
fatal Inner Board
errors
If any of the errors listed on the left
occur in the active CPU Unit, stopping operation, the standby CPU
Unit automatically switches to active
status and takes over control. At the
same time, the mode is switched to
Simplex Mode. The CPU Unit where
the error occurred can be replaced
without stopping system operation.
Note A fatal Inner Board error
applies only to Process-control CPU Units.
If either of the errors listed on the
left occurs in Duplex Mode, the
active CPU Unit remains the same
and operation is switched to Simplex Mode.
3-1-2 Errors Causing
Operation to Switch to
the Standby CPU Unit
Duplex errors
Duplex bus errors
Duplex verification
errors
Automatic recovery
to duplex operation
After operation has been switched from Duplex Mode to
3-1-4 Automatic RecovSimplex Mode as a result of any of the operation switching ery to Duplex Operaerrors listed above, operation is automatically returned to tion by Self-diagnosis
Duplex Mode when it is determined that the cause of the
error has been cleared. Automatic recovery to duplex
operation must first be enabled in the PLC Setup. (The
recovery can be repeated up to ten times.)
Hardware conditions for the two
CS1D CPU Units in
Duplex Mode
Identical models must be used for the two CS1D CPU
Units.
Software conditions The same user program areas must be used.
for the two CS1D
The same parameter areas (PLC Setup, etc.) must be
CPU Units in Duplex used.
Mode
The same Inner Board data must be used (Process-control CPU Units only).
Only the functions that can be executed by both CPU
Units can be used (when the unit versions of the CPU
Units are not the same).
CS1D CPU Unit
online replacement
3-1-3 Duplex Errors
3-1-1 Duplex CPU Systems
3-1-1 Duplex CPU Systems
3-1-6 Duplex CPU
Units with Different Unit
Versions
The CS1D CPU Unit where the error occurred can be
11-3 Replacing a CPU
replaced online by turning OFF the power to only that Unit Unit
(i.e., setting the CPU operation switch to NO USE).
19
Specifications
Section 2-1
Item
Specifications
Duplex CS1D Operation with two Power is supplied to the Backplane simultaneously by two
Power SupCS1D Power Supply CS1D Power Supply Units. (The load for each CS1D
ply Units
Units mounted
Power Supply Unit is approximately one half.)
Operation when one If one CS1D Power Supply Unit breaks down (i.e., if the
CS1D Power Supply power supply voltage drops), operation is continued using
Unit breaks down
only the other one.
Duplex Com- When two Optical-ring Controller Link Units for duplex communications (H-PCF
munications
cable: CS1W-CLK12-V1; GI cable: CS1W-CLK52-V1) are mounted using the
Units
same node address and unit number, and a special cable is used to connect
them, one of the Units will continue communications even if the other one breaks
down (active-standby Units)
Reference
3-2 Duplex Power Supply Units
Duplex Ethernet Units
Two CS1D-ETN21D Ethernet Units are mounted. One is connected to the secondary communications line and the other to the primary communications line,
thereby increasing reliability of the network (primary/secondary communications
lines).
3-3 Duplex Communications Units
CS-series CS1D Ethernet Unit Operation
Manual (W430)
Duplex Connecting
Cables
Two Connecting Cables are installed between the CPU Rack and Expansion
Racks. If one Connecting Cable is removed or damaged, operation continues
using the other cable.
3-4 Duplex Connecting
Cables
11-6 Replacement of
Expansion Units
Online Unit
replacement
using a Programming
Devices
Unit Removal
without a Programming
Device
Using the Programming Console, it is possible to mount or remove CS-series
Basic I/O Units, CS-series Special I/O Units, and CS-series CPU Bus Units while
the power is ON and the CPU Unit is operating in any mode (PROGRAM, MONITOR, or RUN).
11-4 Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU
Bus Units
When Unit removal without a Programming Device is enabled in the PLC Setup,
a Unit can be removed without using the CX-Programmer or a Programming
Console.
Note Unit removal without Programming Device is possible only in a CS1D
Duplex System (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later). After the replacement Unit is
mounted, the Online Replacement Completed Bit must be turned ON.
6-1-3 Tab Pages for
Duplex Settings in the
PLC Setup
11-4-5 Online Replacement without a Programming Device
Removal/
Addition of
Units without
a Programming Device
If the Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function is
enabled in advance, Units can be removed and mounted without CX-Programmer or Programming Console operations.
Note This function is possible only in a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System.
Online Addition of Units
and Backplanes
A new Basic I/O Unit, Special I/O Unit, or Expansion Backplane can be added
7-7 Online Addition of
during operation. to an existing Rack. An operating Rack can be expanded with- Units and Backplanes
out stopping the Rack.
Note This function is possible only in a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System or Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System with CPU Units that
have unit version 1.2 or later. Backplanes can be replaced only in a
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System.
Securing
Expansion
Rack Cables
Secure cables help prevent Expansion Rack Cables from being disconnected
accidentally.
Optical Ring Controller
Link Units Operation
Manual (W370)
6-1-3 Tab Pages for
Duplex Settings in the
PLC Setup
11-4-5 Online Replacement without a Programming Device
Online Addi- If there is a Duplex Unit error, the Duplex Unit can be replaced during operation. 11-7 Replacing the
tion of Duplex The Duplex Unit in which the error occurred can be replaced after turning OFF Duplex Unit
Unit
power to the Unit by setting the DPL USE/NO USE Switch to NO USE.
Note This function is possible only in a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System. The PLC operates in simplex mode while the Duplex Unit is being
replaced.
20
5-2-6 I/O Connecting
Cables
Section 2-1
Specifications
Specifications with Application Restrictions
Item
Programming CX-Programmer
Device operating restrictions
Programming Console
(Duplex CPU Systems only)
Specifications
CX-Programmer Ver. [email protected] or lower: The Duplex CPU System uses the [email protected]@H, so select “CS1H-H” as the
device type. This version does not support Single CPU
Systems.
CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or higher: The Duplex CPU System uses the [email protected]@H, so select “CS1D-H” or
“CS1H-H” as the device type. The Single CPU System
uses the [email protected]@S, so select “CS1D-S” as the
device type.
Cable connection: Connect to the peripheral port or RS232C port of the active CPU Unit.
Note If a CX-Programmer is connected to the standby
CPU Unit in a Duplex CPU System, write processing from the CX-Programmer cannot be executed.
Reference
2-6-2 Precautions
when Connecting Programming Devices to
Duplex CPU Systems
Cable connection: Connect to peripheral port of active
CPU Unit.
If a Programming Console is connected to the standby
CPU Unit, write processing from the Programming Console cannot be executed.
Applications
constantly
connected to
RS-232C port
in Duplex
CPU Systems
When a constant monitoring system, such as a PT or personal computer application, is connected to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port, an RS-232C/RS-422
Adapter can be used to connect to both the active and standby CS1D CPU
Units.
Set the standby CPU Unit’s RS-232C port setting in the PLC Setup so that it
cannot be used independently.
6-2-11 CPU Duplex Tab
Page
Appendix F Connecting to the RS-232C
Port on the CPU Unit
Restrictions
on Memory
Card functions
(Duplex CPU
Systems only)
When writing to a Memory Card, the same data is written to not only the Memory 2-5-1 File Memory
Card mounted in the active CPU Unit, but also to the one mounted in the
Functions in Duplex
standby CPU Unit.
CPU Systems
Note In the PLC Setup, duplex operation must be enabled for Memory Cards.
Note No processing is executed during duplex initialization to match the data
on the Memory Cards mounted in the active and standby CPU Units even
if the data is not the same. Therefore, before enabling duplex operation
for Memory Cards, make sure that the contents are the same for both of
the Memory Cards.
Note When EM File Memory is set for duplex operation, processing is executed to match the contents of EM File Memory in both CPU Units. It is
not necessary to enable duplex operation for Memory Cards in the PLC
Setup.
21
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
Restrictions
on interrupts
(Duplex CPU
Systems only)
Specifications
The CS1D CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems do not support any interrupt
functions.
Power OFF interrupt tasks, scheduled interrupt tasks, I/O interrupt tasks, and
external interrupt tasks cannot be used in either Duplex or Simplex Mode. Interrupt control instructions (MSKS, MSKR, and CLI) are executed as NOPs.
Restrictions
No restrictions.
Cyclic refreshing
on I/O refresh
Refreshing by I/O refresh instruction (IORF(097))
methods
Refreshing by CPU Bus Unit immediate refresh instruction
(Duplex CPU
(DLINK(226))
Systems only)
Cannot be used in
Immediate refresh option “!”
Duplex CPU SysImmediate refresh option “!” will be not be used even if it is
tems (disabled).
specified.
Reference
3-1-7 Duplex CPU System Restrictions
Appendix E Precautions in Replacing CS1H PLCs with CS1D
PLCs
Restrictions
Only Normal Mode can be used in Duplex CPU Systems. Parallel Processing
on CPU pro- Mode and Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode cannot be used.
cessing
modes
(Duplex CPU
Systems only)
Restrictions
on background execution
(Duplex CPU
Systems only)
Accuracy of
timer instructions in
Duplex CPU
Systems
Background execution of text string instructions, table data instructions, and data
shift instructions cannot be used in Duplex CPU Systems.
± (10 ms + cycle time)
If a timer instruction is being executed when operation is switched from duplex to
simplex, the error in the timer in the first cycle after switching may exceed the
normal time. In this case, the timer accuracy will be as follows:
TIM, TIMX, TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TTIM(087), TTIMX(555), TIML(542),
TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), MTIMX(554), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815),
TMHWX(817): ± (10 ms + cycle time) ± 10 ms or less
TMHH(540), TMHHX(552): ± (10 ms + cycle time) ± 20 ms or less
PV refreshing in Duplex
CPU Systems during
timer instructions in
jumped program sections or in
stopped block
program section (Differences from
CS1-H.)
TIM, TIMX, TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TMHH(540), TMHHX(552), TTIM(087),
TTIMX(555):
The timer PV is not refreshed when the timer instruction is jumped for JMP,
CJMP, or CJPN-JME. The PV will be refreshed for the entire period it was
jumped the next time it is executed (i.e., the next time it is not jumped). (With
CS1-H CPU Units, the PV for these timers were refreshed even when jumped.)
3-1-7 Duplex CPU System Restrictions
Appendix E Precautions in Replacing CS1H PLCs with CS1D
PLCs
TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815), TMHWX(817):
When the input condition for BPRG is OFF, or when the block program is temporarily stopped by BPPS, the timer PV is not refreshed. (With the CS1-H CPU
Units, the PV for these timers were refreshed each cycle.)
Clock function Synchronized with active CPU Unit.
in Duplex
CPU Systems
2-1-3
Common Specifications other than Duplex Specifications
Item
Control method
I/O control method
Programming
22
Specifications
Reference
Stored program
---
Cyclic scan and immediate processing (by IORF only)
are both supported.
Ladder diagram
-----
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
CPU processing mode
Specifications
Duplex CPU Systems: Normal Mode only
Note Parallel Processing Mode and Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode cannot be used.
Single CPU Systems: Normal Mode, Parallel Processing
with Asynchronous Memory Access Mode, Parallel Processing with Synchronous Memory Access Mode, and
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode can be used.
Instruction length
1 to 7 steps per instruction
Number of ladder instructions
Duplex CPU Systems: Approx. 440 (3-digit function
codes)
Single CPU Systems: Approx. 470
0.02 µs min.
Instruction
execution
times
Basic instructions
Special
instructions
Overhead processing time
Number of Expansion Racks
Number of
Tasks
Reference
---
9-5 Instruction Execution
Times and Number of Steps
---
9-5 Instruction Execution
Times and Number of Steps
0.06 µs min.
Duplex CPU Systems: 1.9 ms
9-4-2 Cycle Time Overview
Single CPU Systems: 0.5 ms (Normal Mode)
0.4 ms (Parallel Processing Mode)
7 max. (CS1D Expansion Racks)
2-2-2 Expansion Racks
(C200H Expansion I/O Racks and SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Slave Racks cannot be connected.)
Duplex CPU
Systems
288 (cyclic tasks: 32; extra cyclic tasks: 256)
Extra cyclic tasks can be executed each cycle, just like
cyclic tasks, making a total of 288 tasks that can be executed each cycle.
Cyclic tasks are executed each cycle and are controlled
with TKON(820) and TKOF(821) instructions.
Single CPU
Systems
288 (cyclic tasks: 32; interrupt tasks: 256)
Interrupt tasks can be executed each cycle, just like cyclic
tasks, making a total of 288 tasks that can be executed
each cycle.
Cyclic tasks are executed each cycle and are controlled
with TKON(820) and TKOF(821) instructions.
The following 4 types of interrupt tasks are supported:
Power OFF interrupt task (1 max.), scheduled interrupt
tasks (2 max.), I/O interrupt tasks (32 max.), and external
interrupt tasks (256 max.).
Starting subroutines from mul- Supported (by global subroutines).
tiple starts
Programming Manual (W394)
Programming Manual (W394)
23
Section 2-1
Specifications
CIO
(Core I/O)
Area
Item
I/O Area
Data Link
Area
3,200 (200 words): CIO 10000 to CIO 119915 (words
8-5 Data Link
CIO 1000 to CIO 1199)
Area
Link bits are used for data links and are allocated to Units
in Controller Link Systems.
CPU Bus Unit
Area
6,400 (400 words): CIO 150000 to CIO 189915 (words
CIO 1500 to CIO 1899)
CPU Bus Unit bits can be used to store the operating status of CPU Bus Units.
(25 words per Unit, 16 Units max.)
15,360 (960 words): CIO 200000 to CIO 295915 (words
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959)
Special I/O Unit bits can be allocated to CS-series Special I/O Units.
(10 words per Unit, 96 Units max.)
1,600 (100 words): CIO 190000 to CIO 199915 (words
CIO 1900 to CIO 1999)
Inner Board bits can be allocated to Inner Boards. (100
I/O words max.)
8-6 CPU Bus
Unit Area
9,600 (600 words): CIO 320000 to CIO 379915 (words
CIO 3200 to CIO 3799)
CS-series DeviceNet Area bits are allocated to Slaves
according to CS1W-DRM21(-V1) DeviceNet Unit remote
I/O communications.
8-4 CS-series
DeviceNet
Area
Special I/O
Unit Area
Inner Board
Area (Process-control
CPU Units
and Single
CPU Systems
only)
CIO
(Core I/O)
Area, continued
Specifications
Reference
5,120: CIO 000000 to CIO 031915 (320 words from CIO Input bits
The CIO Area
0000 to CIO 0319)
can be used
Output bits
as work bits if
The setting of the first word can be changed from the
8-3 I/O Area the bits are
default (CIO 0000) so that CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 can be
not used as
used.
shown here.
I/O bits are allocated to Basic I/O Units (CS-series Basic
I/O Units).
CS-series
DeviceNet
Area
Fixed Allocations 1 Output: 3200 to 3263
Input: 3300 to 3363
Fixed Allocations 2 Output: 3400 to 3463
Input: 3500 to 3563
Fixed Allocations 3 Output: 3600 to 3663
Input: 3700 to 3763
The following words are allocated in the Master even
when fixed allocations are used for the remote I/O communications Slave functions of a CS-series DeviceNet
Unit (CS1W-DRM21(-V1)).
Item
To Slave
Fixed Allocations 1 Output: 3370
Fixed Allocations 2 Output: 3570
Fixed Allocations 3 Output: 3770
24
To Master
Input: 3270
Input: 3470
Input: 3670
8-8 Special
I/O Unit Area
8-7 Inner
Board Area
Section 2-1
Specifications
CIO
(Core I/O)
Area, Work
Areas
Item
Internal I/O
Area
Work Area
Specifications
Reference
4,800 (300 words): CIO 120000 to CIO 149915 (words
8-3 I/O Area
CIO 1200 to CIO 1499)
37,504 (2,344 words): CIO 380000 to CIO 614315 (words
CIO 3800 to CIO 6143)
These bits in the CIO Area are used as work bits in programming to control program execution. They cannot be
used for external I/O.
8,192 bits (512 words): W00000 to W51115 (W000 to
8-9 Work Area
W511)
These bits are used to control the programs only. (I/O
from external I/O is not possible.)
When using work bits in programming, use the bits in the
Work Area first before using bits from other areas.
Holding Area
8,192 bits (512 words): H00000 to H51115 (H000 to
8-10 Holding Area
H511)
Holding bits are used to control the execution of the program, and maintain their ON/OFF status when the PLC is
turned OFF or the operating mode is changed.
Auxiliary Area
Read only: 7,168 bits (448 words): A00000 to A44715
(words A000 to A447)
Read/write: 8,192 bits (512 words): A44800 to A95915
(words A448 to A959)
Auxiliary bits are allocated for specific functions.
16 bits (TR0 to TR15)
Temporary bits are used to temporarily store the ON/OFF
execution conditions at program branches.
Temporary Relay (TR) Area
Functions: 8-11 Auxiliary
Area
Addresses: Appendix B Auxiliary Area Allocations
8-12 TR (Temporary Relay)
Area
Timer Area
Counter Area
Data Memory (DM) Area
4,096: T0000 to T4095 (used for timers only)
8-13 Timer Area
4,096: C0000 to C4095 (used for counters only)
8-14 Counter Area
32 Kwords: D00000 to D32767
8-15 Data Memory (DM) Area
Used as a general-purpose data area for reading and
writing data in word units (16 bits). Words in the DM Area
maintain their status when the PLC is turned OFF or the
operating mode is changed.
Special I/O Unit DM Area: D20000 to D29599 (100 words
× 96 Units)
Used to set parameters for Special I/O Units.
CPU Bus Unit DM Area: D30000 to D31599 (100 words ×
16 Units)
Used to set parameters for CPU Bus Units.
Inner Board DM Area: D32000 to D32099
Used to set parameters for Inner Boards (Single CPU
Systems or Process-control CPU Units only).
Extended Data Memory (EM)
Area
32 Kwords per bank, 13 banks max.: E0_00000 to
8-16 Extended Data Memory
EC_32767 max. (Not available on some CPU Units.)
(EM) Area
Used as a general-purpose data area for reading and
writing data in word units (16 bits). Words in the EM Area
maintain their status when the PLC is turned OFF or the
operating mode is changed.
The EM Area is divided into banks, and the addresses
can be set by either of the following methods.
Changing the current bank using the EMBC(281) instruction and setting addresses for the current bank.
Setting bank numbers and addresses directly.
EM data can be stored in files by specifying the number
of the first bank.
25
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
Index Registers
Data Registers
Specifications
Reference
IR0 to IR15
8-17 Index Registers
Store PLC memory addresses for indirect addressing.
One register is 32 bits (2 words).
Index registers can be set to be shared by all tasks or to
be used independently by each task.
DR0 to DR15
8-18 Data Registers
Used to offset the PLC memory addresses in Index Registers when addressing words indirectly.
Data registers can be set to be shared by all tasks or to
be used independently by each task.
Task Flags
32 (TK0000 to TK0031)
8-19 Task Flags
Task Flags are read-only flags that are ON when the corresponding cyclic task is executable and OFF when the
corresponding task is not executable or in standby status.
Trace Memory
File Memory
4,000 words (trace data: 31 bits, 6 words)
Memory Cards: Compact flash memory cards can be
used (MS-DOS format).
EM file memory: The EM Area can be converted to file
memory (MS-DOS format).
Programming Manual (W394)
Programming Manual (W394)
Functions
Function
Constant cycle time
Specifications
1 to 32,000 ms (Unit: 1 ms)
Note When Parallel Processing Mode is used in a Single
CPU System, the cycle time for executing instructions is constant.
Cycle time monitoring Possible (Unit stops operating if the cycle is too long):
10 to 40,000 ms (Unit: 10 ms)
Note When Parallel Processing Mode is used in a Single
CPU System, the cycle time for executing instructions is monitored.
CPU Unit operation will stop if the peripheral servicing
cycle time exceeds 2 s (fixed).
I/O refreshing
Duplex CPU Systems: Cyclic refreshing, refreshing by
IORF (097).
Single CPU Systems: Cyclic refreshing, refreshing by IORF
(097), immediate refreshing
IORF(097) refreshes I/O bits allocated to Basic I/O Units
and Special I/O Units.
The CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH (DLNK(226)) instruction can be used to execute cyclic refreshing of bits allocated to CPU Bus Units.
Reference
Cycle time: 9-4 Computing the
Cycle Time
Constant cycle time: Programming
Manual (W394)
Timing of special
refreshing for CPU
Bus Units
9-1-3 I/O Refreshing and Peripheral
Servicing
I/O memory holding
when changing operating modes
Load OFF
26
Data links for Controller Link Units and SYSMAC LINK
Units, remote I/O for DeviceNet Units, and other special
refreshing for CPU Bus Units is performed at the I/O refresh
period and when the CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH
(DLNK(226)) instruction is executed.
Depends on the ON/OFF status of the IOM Hold Bit in the
Auxiliary Area.
All outputs on Output Units can be turned OFF when the
CPU Unit is operating in RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM
mode.
Cycle time: 9-4 Computing the
Cycle Time
Constant cycle time: Programming
Manual (W394)
I/O refreshing: 9-4 Computing the
Cycle Time
I/O refreshing method: Programming Manual (W394)
I/O memory: SECTION 8 Memory
Areas
Holding memory areas when
changing operating modes: Programming Manual (W394)
Holding I/O memory: 8-2-3 Data
Area Properties
Programming Manual (W394)
Section 2-1
Specifications
Function
Input response time
setting
Specifications
Time constants can be set for inputs from Basic I/O Units.
The time constant can be increased to reduce the influence
of noise and chattering or it can be decreased to detect
shorter pulses on the inputs.
Startup mode setting
Supported
Programming Manual (W394)
The CPU Unit will start in RUN mode if the PLC Setup is set 6-1 Overview of PLC Setup
to use the Programming Console mode (default) and a Programming Console is not connected.
Flash memory
The user program and Parameter Area data (e.g., PLC
Setup) are always backed up automatically in flash memory.
Automatically reading proSupported.
grams (autoboot) from the
Memory Card when the
power is turned ON.
---
Program replacement during PLC operation.
Supported.
Programming Manual (W394)
Format in which data is
stored in Memory Card
User program: Program file Programming Manual (W394)
format
PLC Setup and other parameters: Data file format
I/O memory: Data file format
(binary format), text format,
or CSV format (except preversion-1 CS1 CPU Units)
Memory Card functions (Accessed only
for Memory Card
mounted in active
CPU Unit of Duplex
CPU System.)
Reference
Input response time: 9-4-8 I/O
Response Time
Input response settings: Programming Manual (W394)
2-5 File Memory
Programming Manual (W394)
Functions for which Memory User program instructions,
Programming Manual (W394)
Card read/write is supported Programming Devices
(including Programming
Consoles), Host Link computers, AR Area control bits,
simple backup operation
Filing
Memory Card data and the EM (Extended Data Memory)
Area can be handled as files.
Programming Manual (W394)
Debugging
Control set/reset, differential monitoring, data tracing
(scheduled, each cycle, or when instruction is executed),
storing location generating error when a program error
occurs
Programming Manual (W394)
Online editing
User programs can be overwritten in program-block units
when the CPU Unit is in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode.
This function is not available for block programming areas.
With the CX-Programmer, more than one program block
can be edited at the same time.
Overwrite protection: Set using DIP switch.
Copy protection: Password set using Programming Device.
User-defined errors (i.e., user can define fatal errors and
non-fatal errors)
The FPD(269) instruction can be used to check the execution time and logic of each programming block.
FAL and FALS instructions can be used with the CS1-H
CPU Units to simulate errors.
Up to 20 errors are stored in the error log. Information
includes the error code, error details, and the time the error
occurred.
The CPU Unit can be set so that user-defined FAL errors
are not stored in the error log.
Programming Manual (W394)
Program protection
Error check
Error log
Programming Manual (W394)
Failure diagnosis: Programming
Manual (W394)
Fatal and nonfatal errors: SECTION
10 Troubleshooting
User-defined errors: Programming
Manual (W394)
Programming Manual (W394)
27
Section 2-1
Specifications
Function
Serial communications
Specifications
Reference
Built-in peripheral port: Programming Device (including
2-6 Programming Devices
Programming Console) connections, Host Links, NT Links Programming Manual (W394)
Built-in RS-232C port: Programming Device (excluding Programming Console) connections, Host Links, no-protocol
communications, NT Links
Serial Communications Board (sold separately): Protocol
macros, Host Links, NT Links
Clock
Provided on all models. Accuracy: ± 30 s/mo. at 25°C
Programming Manual (W394)
Note a) The accuracy varies with the temperature.
b) Used to store the time when power is turned
ON and when errors occur.
10 to 25 ms (AC power supply)
9-3 Power OFF Operation
2 to 5 ms (DC power supply)
Power OFF detection
time
Power OFF detection
delay time
0 to 10 ms (user-defined, default: 0 ms)
Programming Manual (W394)
Memory protection
Held Areas: Holding bits, contents of Data Memory and
8-2-3 Data Area Properties
Extended Data Memory, and status of the counter Completion Flags and present values.
Note If the IOM Hold Bit in the Auxiliary Area is turned
ON, and the PLC Setup is set to maintain the IOM
Hold Bit status when power to the PLC is turned
ON, the contents of the CIO Area, the Work Area,
part of the Auxiliary Area, timer Completion Flags
and PVs, Index Registers, and the Data Registers
will be saved.
Sending commands to FINS commands can be sent to a computer connected via --a Host Link computer the Host Link System by executing Network Communications Instructions from the PLC.
Remote programming Host Link communications can be used for remote proProgramming Manual (W394)
and monitoring
gramming and remote monitoring through a Controller Link
System or Ethernet network.
Multiple-level commu- Duplex CPU Systems: 3 levels
--nications
Single CPU Systems: 8 levels
Note Communications are possible across up to eight levels only for the Controller Link and Ethernet networks (and the CX-Integrator or CX-Net in CXProgrammer version 4.0 or higher is required to set
the routing tables). Communications are possible
across only up to three communications levels for
the SYSMAC LINK, DeviceNet, and FL-net networks.
Storing comments in
CPU Unit
I/O comments can be stored in the CPU Unit in Memory
Cards or EM file memory.
Program check
I/O comments: CX-Programmer
User Manual
Storing comments in CPU Units:
Programming Manual (W394)
Program checks are performed at the beginning of operation for items such as no END instruction and instruction
errors.
CX-Programmer can also be used to check programs.
Control output signals RUN output: An internal contact turns ON when the CPU
Unit is operating in RUN or MONITOR mode.
These terminals are provided only on CS1D-PA207R
Power Supply Units.
Programming Manual (W394)
Battery service life
Battery Set: CS1W-BAT01
11-2-1 Battery Replacement
Self-diagnostics
CPU errors (watchdog timer), I/O verification errors, I/O bus 10-2-4 Errors and Troubleshooting
errors, memory errors, and battery errors
Storage of number of times power has been interrupted.
9-3 Power OFF Operation
(Stored in A514.)
Other functions
28
Programming Manual (W394)
Section 2-1
Specifications
2-1-4
General Specifications
Item
CS1D Power Supply Unit
Power supply voltage
Operating voltage range
Power consumption
Inrush current
Power supply output capacity
Specifications
CS1D-PD024
24 V DC
CS1D-PD025
24 V DC
85 to 132 V AC/170 to
264 V
150 VA max.
100 to 120 V AC: 30 A
max. (cold start at normal
temperatures); 8 ms max.
200 to 240 V AC: 40 A
max. (cold start at normal
temperatures); 8 ms max.
(See note 1.)
19.2 to 28.8 V DC
19.2 to 28.8 V DC
40 W max.
30 A max.
60 W max.
30 A max.
5 V DC, 7 A (including the
CPU Unit power supply)
5 V DC, 4.3 A (including the 5 V DC, 5.3 A (including the
CPU Unit power supply)
CPU Unit power supply)
26 V DC, 1.3 A
Total: 35 W max.
26 V DC, 0.56 A
Total: 28 W max.
26 V DC, 1.3 A
Total: 40 W max.
Not provided.
Not provided.
Not provided.
Not provided.
20 MΩ min. (at 500 V DC)
between DC external and
GR terminals (See note 2.)
1,000 V AC 50/60 Hz for 1
min between DC external
and GR terminals (See note
2.)
Leakage current: 10 mA
max.
20 MΩ min. (at 500 V DC)
between DC external and
GR terminals (See note 2.)
1,000 V AC 50/60 Hz for 1
min between DC external
and GR terminals (See note
2.)
Leakage current: 10 mA
max.
CS1D-PA207R
100 to 120 V AC/200 to
240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power supply output terminal
Not provided.
RUN output
Contact configu- SPST-NO
(See note 3.) ration
Switch capacity
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
240 V AC, 2A (resistive
load)
120 V AC, 0.5 A (induction
load)
24 V DC, 2A (resistive
load)
24 V DC, 2 A (induction
load)
20 MΩ min. (at 500 V DC)
between AC external and
GR terminals (See note 2.)
2,300 V AC 50/60 Hz for 1
min between AC external
and GR terminals (See
note 2.)
Leakage current: 10 mA
max.
1,000 V AC 50/60 Hz for 1
min between AC external
and GR terminals (See
note 2.)
Leakage current: 10 mA
max.
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
2 kV on power supply line (conforming to IEC61000-4-4)
Shock resistance
147 m/s2 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions (according to JIS 0041)
0 to 55°C
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
Must be free from corrosive gases.
−20 to 75°C (excluding battery)
Less than 100 Ω
Mounted in a panel.
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Atmosphere
Ambient storage temperature
Grounding
Enclosure
10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z
directions for 80 minutes
(Time coefficient: 8 minutes × coefficient factor 10 = total time 80 min.)
29
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
Item
CS1D Power Supply Unit
Weight
CPU Rack dimensions
Expansion Rack dimensions
Safety standards
Note
Specifications
CS1D-PA207R
CS1D-PD024
CS1D-PD025
Refer to SECTION 2 Specifications, Nomenclature, and Functions.
5 slots (CS1D-BC052): 505 × 130 × 153 mm (W x H x D) (See note 4.)
9 slots (CS1D-BI092): 505 × 130 × 153 mm (W x H x D) (See note 4.)
Conforms to cULus, NK, Lloyd’s, and EC Directives.
1. The above inrush current value is for a cold start at normal temperatures.
The inrush current circuit for this power supply includes a thermistor element (for current suppression at low temperatures). If the ambient temperature is too high, the thermistor element will not be cool enough, so the
above inrush current value may be exceeded (by as much as double the
value shown). Provide a sufficient margin by taking this into consideration
along with breaking or detection characteristics when selecting fuses and
breakers for external circuits.
2. Disconnect the CS1D Power Supply Unit’s LG terminal from the GR terminal when testing insulation and dielectric strength. Testing the insulation
and dielectric strength with the LG terminal and the GR terminals connected will damage internal circuits in the CPU Unit.
3. Supported when mounted to a Backplane.
4. The depth (D) is 123 mm for the CS1D-PD024.
2-2
2-2-1
Configuration Devices
CPU Rack
Expansion Patterns
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion Systems
CS1D-BC042D CPU Backplane
for Duplex CPU Systems
CS1D-DPL02D
Duplex Unit
CS1D-IC102D
I/O Control Units
CS1D-CPU65H/67H CPU Units
for Duplex CPU Systems
(unit version 1.3 or later)
CS1D-PA207R
CS1D-PD024/PD025
Power Supply Units
CS1D CPU Rack
30
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
Duplex CPU, Single I/O
Expansion Systems
CS1D-DPL01
CS1D-CPU65H/67H
Duplex Unit
CPU Units for Duplex
CS1D-BC052 CPU Backplane
CPU Systems
for Duplex CPU Systems
RUN
ERR/ALM
DPL01
L
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
R
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
RUN
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
LEFT CPU
USE
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CS1D-PA207R
CS1D-PD024/PD025
CS1D Power Supply Units
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
NO USE
RIGHT CPU
MCPWR
USE
BUSY
MCPWR
BUSY
NO USE
OPEN
OPEN
DPL SW
CS1D CPU Rack
ON OFF
SPL DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
ON
PERIPHERAL
PERIPHERAL
INIT.
SW
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
ON
PORT
PORT
DUPLEX
Single CPU Systems
CS1D-BC082S CPU Backplane
for Single CPU Systems
[email protected]@S CPU Unit
for Single CPU Systems
CS1D-PA207R
CS1D-PD024/PD025
CS1D Power Supply Units
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
MCPWR
BUSY
OPEN
CS1D CPU Rack
PERIPHERAL
PORT
Rack Configurations
Rack name
CPU Rack for
Duplex CPU, Dual
I/O Expansion Systems
CPU Rack for
Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion
Systems
Devices
CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems (unit version 1.3 or later)
(See note 1.)
CS1D Power Supply Units
Remarks
Two Units (or one) are
required.
CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU
Systems (See note 2.)
Duplex Unit (See note 2.)
CS1D I/O Control Units (See
note 2.)
One Unit is required.
Memory Card
Install a Memory Card in the
active CPU Unit as required.
CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems (See note 1.)
CS1D Power Supply Units
Two Units (or one) are
required.
Two Units (or one) are
required.
CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU
Systems (See note 3.)
One Unit is required.
Duplex Unit (See note 3.)
Memory Card
One Unit is required.
Install a Memory Card in the
active CPU Unit as required.
Two Units (or one) are
required.
One Unit is required.
Two Units (or one) are
required for expansion.
31
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
Rack name
CPU Rack for Single CPU Systems
Devices
CPU Unit for Single CPU Systems (See note 4.)
CS1D Power Supply Units
Remarks
One Unit is required.
CPU Backplane for Single CPU
Systems (See note 4.)
One Unit is required.
Duplex Inner Boards
Install an Inner Board as
required.
Install a Memory Card as
required.
Memory Card
Note
Two Units (or one) are
required.
1. The CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems are specially designed for use in
Duplex CPU Systems and cannot be used in Single CPU Systems or
mounted in a CS-series CPU Rack.
2. The CS1D-BC042D CPU Backplane, CS1D-DPL02D Duplex Unit, and
CS1D I/O Control Unit are specially designed for use in Duplex CPU Dual
I/O Expansion Systems. These components cannot be used in Duplex
CPU Single I/O Expansion Systems, Single CPU Systems, or a CS-series
CPU Rack.
3. The CS1D-BC052 CPU Backplane and CS1D-DPL01 Duplex Unit are specially designed for use in Duplex CPU Single I/O Expansion Systems.
These components cannot be used in Duplex CPU Dual I/O Expansion
Systems, Single CPU Systems, or a CS-series CPU Rack.
4. CPU Units for Single CPU Systems and CPU Backplanes for Single CPU
Systems are specially designed for use in Single CPU Systems and cannot
be used in Duplex CPU Systems or for a CS-series CPU Rack.
Devices
CPU Units
Two CS1D CPU Units of the same model are required when using Duplex
CPU Units in a Duplex CPU System.
Name
CPU Units for
Duplex CPU
System
Model
CS1D-CPU67H
Specifications
I/O bits: 5,120; program capacity: 250 Ksteps;
Data Memory: 448 Kwords
(DM: 32 Kwords; EM: 32 Kwords x 13 banks)
CS1D-CPU65H
I/O bits: 5,120; program capacity: 60 Ksteps;
Data Memory: 128 Kwords
(DM: 32 Kwords; EM: 32 Kwords x 3 banks)
I/O bits: 960; program capacity: 10 Ksteps;
Data Memory: 64 Kwords
(DM: 32 Kwords; EM: 32 Kwords x 1 bank)
I/O bits: 1,280; program capacity: 30 Ksteps;
Data Memory: 128 Kwords
(DM: 32 Kwords; EM: 32 Kwords x 1 bank)
CPU Units for
CS1D-CPU42S
Single CPU System
CS1D-CPU44S
CS1D-CPU65S
CS1D-CPU67S
32
I/O bits: 5,120; program capacity: 60 Ksteps;
Data Memory: 128 Kwords
(DM: 32 Kwords; EM: 32 Kwords x 3 banks)
I/O bits: 5,120; program capacity: 250 Ksteps;
Data Memory: 448 Kwords
(DM: 32 Kwords; EM: 32 Kwords x 13 banks)
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
CPU Backplanes
Name
Model
Specifications
CPU Backplane for Duplex
CS1D-BC042D Duplex Connecting Cable:3 slots
CPU Systems
Single Connecting Cable:4 slots
(Especially for a Duplex CPU,
No Expansion:5 slots
Dual I/O Expansion System)
CPU Backplane for Duplex
CS1D-BC052
CPU Systems
(Especially for a Duplex CPU,
Single I/O Expansion System)
CPU Backplane for Single
CPU System
Power Supply Units
CS1D-BC082S 8 slots
Two CS1D Power Supply Units are required for a duplex power supply configuration.
Name
CS1D Power Supply
Units
Model
Specifications
CS1D-PA207R 100 to 120 V AC; 200 to 240 V AC (RUN
output)
Output capacity:
5 V DC at 7 A; 26 V DC at 1.3 A
CS1D-PD024
CS1D-PD025
Duplex Unit
5 slots
24 V DC
Output capacity: 5 V DC at 4.3 A;
26 V DC at 0.56 A
24 V DC
Output capacity: 5 V DC at 5.3 A;
26 V DC at 1.3 A
One Duplex Unit is required on the CPU Rack.
Name
Model
Specifications
Duplex Unit
CS1D-DPL02D Required in a Duplex CPU System.
(Especially for a Duplex CPU,
Can be replaced online.
Dual I/O Expansion System)
Duplex Unit
CS1D-DPL01
Required in a Duplex CPU System.
(Especially for a Duplex CPU,
Single I/O Expansion System)
I/O Control Unit
Name
Model
CS1D I/O Control Unit
CS1D-IC102D
(Especially for a Duplex CPU,
Dual I/O Expansion System)
Specifications
Two Units (or one) are required to
expand a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System.
Other Devices
Name
Memory Cards
Programming Consoles
Programming Console Key Sheet
Model
HMC-EF372
HMC-EF671
HMC-EF183
HMC-AP001
CQM1H-PRO01-E
CQM1-PRO01-E
C200H-PRO27-E
CS1W-KS001
Specifications
Flash memory, 30 MB
Flash memory, 45 MB
Flash memory, 128 MB
Memory Card Adapter
An English Keyboard Sheet (CS1WKS001-E) is required.
For CQM1-PRO01-E or C200HPRO27-E
33
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
Name
Programming Console Connecting
Cables
Model
CS1W-CN114
CS1W-CN224
CS1W-CN624
Programming Device CS1W-CN118
Connecting Cables
(for peripheral port)
CS1W-CN226
CS1W-CN626
Programming Device XW2Z-200S-CV
Connecting Cables
(for RS-232C port)
Expansion Rack
Cable Mounting
Bracket
Note
Connects the CQM1-PRO27-E Programming Console. (Length: 6.0 m)
Connects IBM PC/AT or compatible
computers.
D-Sub 9-pin receptacle (For converting
between RS-232C cable and peripherals) (Length: 0.1 m)
Connects IBM PC/AT or compatible
computers.
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 2.0 m)
Connects IBM PC/AT or compatible
computers.
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 6.0 m)
Connects IBM PC/AT or compatible
computers.
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 2.0 m), Staticresistant connector used.
XW2Z-500S-CV
Connects IBM PC/AT or compatible
computers.
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 5.0 m), Staticresistant connector used.
XW2X-200S-V
Connects IBM PC/AT or compatible
computers.
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 2.0 m
(See note 2.)
Connects IBM PC/AT or compatible
computers.
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 5.0 m)
(See note 2.)
For CS Series only.
Mount to an unused I/O slot.
Mount to an unused Power Supply Unit
slot (same shape as PA207R).
XW2X-500S-V
Battery Set
Space Units
Specifications
Connects the CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console. (Length: 0.05 m)
Connects the CQM1-PRO27-E Programming Console. (Length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-BAT01
CS1W-SP001
CS1D-SP001
CS1D-SP002
Mount to an unused Power Supply Unit
slot (same shape as PD024).
CS1D-ATT02
Mounting Bracket to prevent accidental
disconnection of the Expansion Rack's
cable (for a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System)
CS1D-ATT01
Mounting Bracket to prevent accidental
disconnection of the Expansion Rack's
cable (for a Duplex CPU, Single I/O
Expansion System)
1. A Host Link (SYSWAY) connection is not possible when connecting a CXProgrammer via Peripheral Bus Connecting Cable for the peripheral port.
Use a peripheral bus connection.
2. A peripheral bus connection is not possible when connecting a CX-Programmer via RS-232C Connecting Cable.
34
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
3. For precautions regarding the use of Memory Cards, refer to 5-1 File Memory in the SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual (W394).
2-2-2
Expansion Racks
It is possible to connect Expansion Racks in order to mount Units outside of
the CS1D CPU Rack.
There are two types of Expansion Racks that can be connected: CS1D
Expansion Racks and CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks. Both Racks
can be connected to Duplex CPU Systems and Simple-CPU Systems, but the
appropriate CS1D Backplane must be used for either type of Rack.
Note Neither CS-series Expansion Racks nor C200H Expansion I/O Racks can be
connected to a CS1D CPU Rack.
Expansion Patterns
CS1D CPU Rack + CS1D Expansion Racks (Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System)
■ Configuration with Duplex Connecting Cables
CS1D-IC102D
I/O Control Units
CS1D-DPL02D
Duplex Unit
CS1D-BC042D CPU
Backplane (see note) for
Duplex CPU Systems
[email protected]@H/P CPU Units
for Duplex CPU Systems
(unit version 1.3 or later)
CS1D CPU Rack
[email protected]@3
CS1 Connecting Cables
CS1D-BI082D Expansion Backplane
supporting online addition/removal
Up to 3 Units can be mounted.
• CS1 Basic I/O Units
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
• CS1 Special I/O Units and
Power Supply Units
CPU Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be
mounted.
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
12 m max.
[email protected]@3
Up to 7 Racks total
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D-BI082D
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D-II102D
I/O Interface Units
(See note.)
Up to 7 Units can be mounted.
• CS1 Basic I/O Units
• CS1 Special I/O Units and CPU Bus
Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
Power Supply Units
35
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
■ Configuration with Single Connecting Cable
CS1D-IC102D I/O Control Unit
CS1D-DPL02D
Duplex Unit
CS1D-BC042D CPU Backplane
for Duplex CPU Systems
[email protected]@H/P CPU Units
for Duplex CPU Systems
(unit version 1.3 or later)
CS1D CPU Rack
[email protected]@3
CS1 Connecting
Cables
CS1D-BI082D Expansion Backplane
supporting online addition/removal
Up to 4 Units can be mounted.
• CS1 Basic I/O Units
• CS1 Special I/O Units and
CPU Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be
mounted.
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
Power Supply Units
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
12 m max.
[email protected]@3
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D-BI082D
Up to 7 Racks
total
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D-II102D
I/O Interface Unit
Up to 8 Units can be mounted.
• CS1 Basic I/O Units
• CS1 Special I/O Units and
CPU Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be
mounted.
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
Power Supply Units
■ Configuration without Expansion Racks
CS1D-DPL02D
Duplex Unit
CS1D-BC042D CPU Backplane
for Duplex CPU Systems
[email protected]@H/P CPU Units
for Duplex CPU Systems
(unit version 1.3 or later)
CS1D CPU Rack
Up to 5 Units can be mounted.
• CS1 Basic I/O Units
• CS1 Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
36
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
Power Supply Units
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
CS1D CPU Rack + CS1D Expansion Racks (Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System)
CS1D-BC052 CPU
Backplane for
Duplex CPU Systems
CS1D-DPL01
Duplex Unit
CS1D-BC082S
[email protected]@H/P
CPU Backplane for
CPU Units for
Duplex CPU Systems Single CPU Systems
[email protected]@S
CPU Unit for
Single CPU Systems
CS1D CPU Rack
[email protected]@3
CS-series Connecting
Cable
CS1D-BI092
Online Replacement
Expansion Backplane
A maximum of 5 Units can be mounted.
CS-series Basic I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU
Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
CS1D Power Supply Units
A maximum of 8 Units can be mounted.
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU
Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
Power Supply Units
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
12 m max.
[email protected]@3
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D-BI092
The maximum number of Expansion Racks is as follows:
[email protected]/P/S: Up to 7 Racks total
CS1D-CPU44S: Up to 3 Racks total
CS1D-CPU42S: Up to 2 Racks total
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Expansion
Rack
A maximum of 9 Units can be mounted.
CS-series Basic I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU
Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
CS1D Power Supply Units
37
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
CS1D CPU Rack + CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks (Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System)
CS1D-BC052
CPU Backplane for
Duplex CPU Systems
CS1D-DPL01
Duplex Unit
[email protected]@H/P
CPU Unit
[email protected]@S
CS1D-BC082S
CPU Unit for
CPU Backplane for
Single CPU Systems Single CPU Systems
CS1D
CPU
Rack
CS1W-IC102
I/O Control Unit
A maximum of 4 Units can be mounted.
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU
Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
50 m max.
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@@
Power Supply Units
[email protected]@2
CV-series Connecting
Cable
Series A
CS1D-BI092
Expansion
Backplane
CS1W-II102
Series B
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
50 m max.
CS1D-BI092
CS1D-BI092
The maximum number
of Expansion Racks is
as follows:
[email protected]/S:
Up to 7 Racks total
CS1D-CPU44S:
Up to 3 Racks total
CS1D-CPU42S:
Up to 2 Racks total
CS1W-II102
I/O Interface Unit
CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
CS1D
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
[email protected]@2
CV500-TER01
Terminator
A maximum of 8 Units can be mounted.
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• CS-series Special I/O Units and CPU
Bus Units
Note: C200H Units cannot be mounted.
[email protected]@2
CV500-TER01
Terminator
Maximum Expansion Racks
Expansion pattern
Rack
Maximum
No. of Racks
(See note.)
Remarks
CS1D CPU Rack +
CS1D Expansion
Racks
CS1D Expansion
Rack
7 Racks
The total cable length
must be 12 m or less.
CS1D CPU Rack +
CS1D Long-distance Expansion
Racks
CS1D Long-distance
Expansion Rack
7 Racks
The total cable length
must be 50 m or less
each for up to two
series of Long-distance Expansion
Racks (100 m max.
total).
Note The maximum number of Racks depends on the CPU Unit being used.
Model
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU42S
CS1D-CPU44S
CS1D-CPU65S
CS1D-CPU67S
38
Number of Expansion Racks
7
7
2
3
7
7
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
Rack Configurations
Name
CS1D Expansion
Racks
CS1D Long-distance Expansion
Racks
Configuration
CS1D Online Replacement
Expansion Backplane
Remarks
One Backplane is required.
CS1D Power Supply Units
Two Units (or one) are
required.
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion
System
• Mount a CS1D-IC102D I/O
Control Unit to the CS1D CPU
Rack.
• Mount CS1D-II102D I/O Interface Units to the CS1D Expansion Racks.
• A terminator is not required.
CS-series Connecting Cable
(When CS1D CPU Rack + CS1D
Expansion Racks are connected)
One (or two) CS1D I/O Control Units or I/O Interface
Units are required.
Mount an I/O Control Unit
(CS1W-IC102) to the CS1D CPU
Rack.
Mount an I/O Interface Unit
(CS1W-II102) to each Long-distance Expansion Rack.
Attach a Terminator (CV500TER01) to the last Long-distance
Expansion Rack in each series.
Two Terminators are provided
with the I/O Control Unit.
Each I/O Control Unit and
I/O Interface Unit requires
one slot.
These Units are not allocated I/O words.
Use CV-series I/O Connecting Cables.
A CS1D Long-distance
Expansion Rack cannot be
connected to another Longdistance Expansion Rack
using CS-series I/O Connecting Cable.
It is not possible to connect
to either a CS-series Expansion Rack or a C200H
Expansion I/O Rack from a
CS1D Expansion Rack.
Configuration Device List
CS1D Online Replacement Expansion Backplane
Name
Expansion Backplane supporting online replacement
(for a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System)
Model
CS1D-BI082D
Specifications
Duplex Connecting Cables: 7 slots
Single Connecting Cable: 8 slots
CS1D Online Replacement
Expansion Backplane (for a
Duplex CPU Single I/O
Expansion System or Single
CPU System)
CS1D-BI092
9 slots
Used for both CS1D Expansion
Racks and CS1D Long-distance
Expansion Racks.
39
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
CS1D Power Supply Units
Two CS1D Power Supply Units are required for a duplex configuration.
Name
CS1D Power Supply
Units
Model
Specifications
CS1D-PA207R 100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC
(RUN output)
Output capacity: 5 V DC, 7 A; 26 V DC,
1.3 A
CS1D-PD024
24 V DC
Output capacity: 5 V DC at 4.3 A;
26 V DC at 0.56 A
CS1D-PD025
24 V DC
Output capacity: 5 V DC at 5.3 A;
26 V DC at 1.3 A
CS1D I/O Interface Unit
Name
Model
CS1D I/O Interface Unit (for a CS1D-II102D
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System)
Specifications
One or two Units are required for a
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion
System.
CS-series Connecting Cables
Name
CS-series
Connecting Cables
Model
CS1W-CN313
(See note.)
CS1W-CN713
(See note.)
Specifications
Remarks
Connects between CS1D
0.3 m
CPU Racks or CS1D Expansion Racks.
0.7 m
CS1W-CN223
CS1W-CN323
CS1W-CN523
CS1W-CN133
CS1W-CN133B2
2m
3m
5m
10 m
12 m
Note When using a CS1W-CN313 or CS1W-CN713 CS-series I/O Expansion
Cable for a CS1D System, always use a Cable manufactured on or after September 20, 2001. The manufacturing date is indicated on the connector as a
4-digit code or a 6-digit code. Cables that were manufactured before this date,
or that do not indicate a manufacturing date cannot be used.
Manufacturing Date Codes
6-digit Code
4-digit Code
Year
(e.g., 8 for 1998, 1 for 2001)
Month (1 to 9, X, Y, Z)
Factory code
(A to Z, or blank)
Day (01 to 31)
Day (01 to 31)
Month (01 to 12)
Year (E.g., 02 for 2002)
40
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
Devices for Long-distance Expansion Racks
Name
I/O Control Unit
Model
CS1W-IC102
Specifications
Mounts to the leftmost slot
on the CS1D CPU Rack to
enable connecting CS1D
Long-distance Expansion
Racks.
I/O Interface Unit
CS1W-II102
CV-series I/O Connecting Cables
CV500-CN312
CV500-CN612
CV500-CN122
CV500-CN222
CV500-CN322
CV500-CN522
CV500-CN132
CV500-CN232
CV500-CN332
Mounts to the leftmost slot
on a Long-distance Expansion Rack.
Connects CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks.
Remarks
---
0.3 m
0.6 m
1m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
20 m
30 m
CV500-CN432
CV500-CN532
Connectable Units
The following table shows the Units that can be connected to CS1D CPU
Racks and CS1D Expansion Racks.
Rack
Unit
Basic I/O Units (See note 1.)
CS1D CPU Racks
CS1D Expansion
Racks
CS1D Long-distance Expansion
Racks
40 m
50 m
CS-series
Basic I/O
Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note
C200H Basic
I/O Units
Special I/O Units
No
No
C200H Group
CS-series
2 Multi-point
Special I/O
I/O Units
Units
No
Yes
No
Yes
C200H
Special I/O
Units
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
CPU Bus
Units
CPU Bus
Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
(See note 2.)
1. Interrupt Input Units can be used only as ordinary Input Units.
2. Although CPU Bus Units can be mounted, it is not recommended because
of delays in cycle time.
Maximum Number of
Connectable Units
The maximum number of expansion slots depends upon the system configuration, as shown in the following table. The total number of each type of Unit is
not limited by the mounting location.
Note Up to 16 CPU Bus Units can be mounted.
System
Duplex Connecting Cables
Single Connecting Cable
Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System
Single CPU System
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System
Max. number of slots
52 slots
60 slots
68 slots
71 slots
41
Configuration Devices
Section 2-2
CS1D Configuration
Devices
The following table shows the Units, Programming Devices, and Support Software that can be used to configure a CS1D Duplex System.
Note Always use the specified CS1D Units for the CPU Units, Power Supply Units,
CPU Backplanes, and Expansion Backplanes. CS-series Units cannot be
used.
Name
CPU
Units
CPU Units for
Duplex CPU
Systems
CPU Units for
Single CPU
Systems
CS-series CPU
Units
Model
[email protected]@H
[email protected]@P
[email protected]@S
Support
Duplex CPU, Duplex CPU,
Dual I/O
Single I/O
Expansion
Expansion
System
System
Yes
(Unit version
1.3 or later)
No
CS1G/[email protected]@-V1 No
CS1G/[email protected]@H
Remarks
Single
CPU
System
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Use specified CS1D Units
only.
CS-series Units cannot be
used.
Duplex Duplex CPU,
CS1D-DPL02D
Unit
Dual I/O Expansion System
Duplex CPU,
CS1D-DPL01
Single I/O
Expansion System
Yes
No
No
---
No
Yes
No
---
Power CS1D Power
Supply Supply Units
Units
CS1D-PA207R
CS1D-PD024
CS1D-PD025
Yes
Yes
Yes
[email protected]@@@@
No
No
No
Use specified CS1D Units
only.
C200H and CS-series Units
cannot be used.
CS1D-BC042D
(for a Duplex CPU,
Dual I/O Expansion
System)
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
CPU
Backplanes
C200H and CSseries Power
Supply Units
CPU Backplane
for Duplex CPU
Systems
CS1D-BC052 (See
No
note.)
(for a Duplex CPU,
Single I/O Expansion
System)
CPU Backplane CS1D-BC082S
for Single CPU
Systems
CS-series CPU [email protected]@@
Backplanes
42
Use specified CS1D Units
only.
CS-series Units cannot be
used.
Note When securing the
Expansion Rack's
cable, the Backplane
must have a production date of July 2005
or later.
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
Name
Model
Support
Remarks
Duplex CPU, Duplex CPU, Single
Dual I/O
Single I/O
CPU
Expansion
Expansion
System
System
System
Expan- Online Replace- CS1D-BI082D
Yes
No
No
Use specified CS1D Units
sion
ment Expan(for a Duplex CPU,
only.
Back- sion Backplane Dual I/O Expansion
CS-series Units cannot be
planes
System)
used.
CS1D-BI092
No
Yes
Yes
CS1D Expansion Racks and
(for a Duplex CPU,
CS1D Long-distance ExpanSingle I/O Expansion
sion Racks can both be
System or Single
used. The Connecting Cable
CPU System)
is the same as that used for
the CS Series.
CS-series
[email protected]@@
No
No
No
Expansion
Note When securing the
Backplanes
Expansion Rack's
cable, the Backplane
C200H Expan- [email protected]@@-V1 No
No
No
must have a producsion Backplanes
tion date of July 2005
or later.
CS1D I/O Control Unit
CS1D-IC102D
Yes
No
No
Use with a Duplex CPU, Dual
I/O Expansion System.
(Mount in the CPU Rack.
Cannot be mounted in an
Expansion Rack.)
CS1D I/O Interface Unit
CS1D-II102D
Yes
No
No
Use with a Duplex CPU, Dual
I/O Expansion System.
(Mount in the Expansion
Racks. Cannot be mounted
in the CPU Rack.)
I/O Control Unit
CS1W-IC102
No
Yes
Yes
Use with a Long-distance
Expansion Rack (Mount to
the CPU Backplane. Cannot
be mounted to an Expansion
Backplane.)
I/O Interface Unit
CS1W-II102
No
Yes
Yes
Use with the Long-distance
Expansion Rack. (Cannot be
mounted to an Expansion
Rack.)
Terminator
CV500-TER01
No
Yes
Yes
Use for terminating resistance on the Long-distance
Expansion Rack.
Expansion Rack Cable
Mounting Bracket
CS1D-ATT01
No
Yes
No
Secures the Connecting
Cable in a Duplex CPU, Dual
I/O Expansion System.
CS1D-ATT02
Yes
No
No
Secures the Connecting
Cable in a Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System.
43
Section 2-2
Configuration Devices
Name
Basic I/O Units
Special I/O Units
Model
Support
Duplex
Single
CPU
CPU
System
System
CS-series Basic I/O Units Yes
Yes
CS1W-INT01 CS-series Restricted Yes
Interrupt Input Units
C200H Basic I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O
Units
C200H Special I/O Units
Remarks
--Can be used only as Standard I/O
Units in Duplex CPU Systems.
No
Yes
No
Yes
C200H I/O Units cannot be used.
---
No
No
C200H Special I/O Units cannot be
used.
CPU Bus Units
CS-series CPU Bus Units Yes
(including Communications Units that support
duplex operation)
Yes
---
Inner Boards
CS1W-SBC21
CS1W-SCB21-V1
CS1W-SCB41
CS1W-SCB41-V1
CS1W-LCB01/05 (See
note.) and other models
No
Yes
Inner Boards cannot be used in
Duplex CPU Systems unless built
into a Process-control CPU Unit.
Note Loop Control Board unit version 1.5 or later must be used.
Memory Cards
Battery Set
Connector Covers
[email protected]@@
CS1W-BAT01
C500-COV01
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
----Use to protect the power supply connector on the Backplane.
CV500-COV01
Yes
Yes
Use to protect the I/O slot connector
on the Backplane.
CS1W-SP001
CS1D-SP001
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mount to an unused I/O slot.
Mount to an unused Power Supply
Unit slot (same shape as PA207R).
CS1D-SP002
Yes
Yes
CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0
or higher
Yes
Yes
Mount to an unused Power Supply
Unit slot (same shape as PD024).
---
CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0
or higher
Yes
No
Use Ver. 3.1 or higher for online Unit
replacement functions.
CX-Programmer Ver. 2.1
or higher
CX-Protocol
SYSMAC-CPT
SYSMAC Support Software (SSS)
No
No
---
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
-------
CQM1-PRO01
Yes
Yes
The Key Sheet and Connecting
Cable are the same as those used for
the CS1/CS1-H System.
0.3 m
0.7 m
2m
CQM1H-PRO01
C200H-PRO27
CS1W-CN313
CS1W-CN713
CS1W-CN223
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
----Use to connect between Expansion
Racks or between Expansion Rack
and CPU Rack.
3m
5m
10 m
12 m
CS1W-CN323
CS1W-CN523
CS1W-CN133
CS1W-CN133-B2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Space Units
ProSoftware for
grampersonal comming
puter
Devices
and Support Software
Programming
Console
CSseries
Connecting
Cables
44
Section 2-3
Duplex Unit
Name
Longdistance
Expansion
Cables
2-3
2-3-1
0.3 m
0.6 m
1m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
20 m
30 m
40 m
50 m
Model
CV500-CN312
CV500-CN612
CV500-CN122
CV500-CN222
CV500-CN322
CV500-CN522
CV500-CN132
CV500-CN232
CV500-CN332
CV500-CN432
CV500-CN532
Support
Duplex
Single
CPU
CPU
System
System
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remarks
Use to connect Long-distance
Expansion Racks.
Duplex Unit
Duplex Unit Model
Item
Model number
Specifications
CS1D-DPL02D (for a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System)
CS1D-DPL01 (for a Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System)
Number mounted
Weight
One Duplex Unit is required for a Duplex CPU System.
200 g max.
One Duplex Unit is required for a Duplex CPU System. It is not required for a
Single CPU System.
45
Section 2-3
Duplex Unit
2-3-2
Nomenclature
DPL STATUS (Green/Red)
Displays duplex status (green) and duplex
error status (red).
DPL02D
CS
L/ACTIVE CPU (Green)
ON when active CPU Unit is on the left.
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
L
L/CPU STATUS (Green/Red)
Displays the operation mode (RUN,
MONITOR, or PROGRAM) of the left
CPU Unit, or duplex initialization in progress, and operation switching error (red).
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
R
CPU STATUS
R/ACTIVE CPU (Green)
ON when active CPU Unit is on the right.
LEFT CPU
USE
R/CPU STATUS (Green/Red)
Displays the operation mode (RUN,
MONITOR, or PROGRAM) of the right
CPU Unit, or duplex initialization in progress, and operation switching error (red).
NO USE
RIGHT CPU
USE
NO USE
DPL SW
DPL SW
Duplex Setting Switches
DPL/SPL
Duplex/Simplex Mode setting
ACT. RIGHT/ACT. LEFT
Sets whether the active CPU Unit will be on
the right or the left side.
ON
ON
OFF
SPL
DPL
LEFT CPU
Left CPU Operation Setting Switch
To turn OFF the power to the left CPU while
it is mounted, set this switch to NO USE.
RIGHT CPU
Right CPU Operation Setting Switch
To turn OFF the power to the right CPU while
it is mounted, set this switch to NO USE.
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
INIT.
INIT
Initial Switch
Enables the Mode Setting Switch (DPL/SPL).
SW
PRPHL
SW
Communications Setting Switch
Sets communications conditions.
COMM
A39512
RSV
ON
DPL
USE
NO USE
DPL (CS1D-DPL02D Only)
Duplex Operation Setting Switch
To turn OFF the power to the Duplex Unit
while it is mounted, set this switch to NO USE.
Duplex Unit Switches
!Caution Before touching the Duplex Unit, be sure to first touch grounded metal to discharge static electricity.
CPU Operating Switches
LEFT CPU
USE
NO USE
46
RIGHT CPU
U SE
U SE
N O U SE
N O U SE
Setting
Turns ON power to
CPU Unit.
Turns OFF power to
CPU Unit.
Contents
Turns ON or OFF the
power supply to the
respective CPU
Units.
Application
Set to NO USE when
replacing a CPU Unit
while leaving the power
ON, or when not using a
CPU Unit.
Section 2-3
Duplex Unit
Duplex Unit Operating
Switch
DPL
USE
NO USE
USE
NO USE
Setting
Turns ON power to
the Duplex Unit.
Turns OFF power to
the Duplex Unit.
Contents
Application
Turns ON or OFF the Set to NO USE when
power supply to the
replacing a Duplex Unit.
Duplex Unit.
while leaving the power
ON.
The Duplex CPU System will operate in Simplex Mode during
replacement.
Duplex Setting Switches
DPL SW
ON
ON
SPL
ACT.
LEFT
OFF
DPL
ACT.
RIGHT
(1) Mode Setting Switch (DPL/SPL)
Switch
Setting
DPL/SPL OFF DPL Duplex
Mode
ON SPL Simplex
Mode
Meaning
Sets whether the System will
operate in Duplex Mode or Simplex Mode.
This switch is enabled in the following situations:
1) When the power is turned ON.
2) When the CPU Operation Setting Switch is switched from NO
USE to USE.
3) When the Initial Switch is
pressed.
Note: Switching is disabled during operation. This switch is also
disabled in a Simplex System.
Application
Set to OFF
(DPL) for Duplex
Mode, and to
ON (SPL) for
Simplex Mode.
Note Duplex Mode and Simplex Mode can also be determined by the status of bit
08 of word A328.
(2) Active Setting Switch (ACT. RIGHT/ACT. LEFT)
Switch
ACT
RIGHT/
ACT
LEFT
Setting
OFF ACT
Sets the right
RIGHT CS1D CPU Unit
as the active
Unit.
ON
ACT
LEFT
Contents
Sets whether the right
or left CS1D CPU Unit
is to be the active Unit.
This switch is enabled
only when the power is
Sets the left
CS1D CPU Unit turned ON, so, after
changing the setting,
as the active
turn the power OFF
Unit.
and then back ON
again.
Changing the setting
is disabled during
operation. This switch
is also disabled in
Simplex Mode.
Application
To set the right
CS1D CPU Unit
as the active
Unit, set the
switch to OFF
(ACT RIGHT).
To set the left
CS1D CPU Unit
as the active
Unit, set the
switch to ON
(ACT LEFT).
47
Section 2-3
Duplex Unit
Initial Switch
Press the Initial Switch to toggle between Duplex Mode and Simplex Mode
after a CS1D CPU Unit has been replaced.
INIT.
Setting
The Mode Setting
Switch is enabled
when this switch is
pressed.
Contents
Reflects the status
(Duplex/Simplex Mode) of the
Mode Setting Switch while the
power is ON.
Application
Press to return to Duplex
Mode after a CS1D CPU Unit
has been replaced.
If there is no change in the
Mode Setting Switch, then the
mode (Duplex/Simplex) will
not be changed even if the Initial Switch is pressed.
Note If the Initial Switch is pressed immediately after the power supply is turned
ON, it may not have any effect.
Communications Setting
Switch
SW
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
ON
In place of pins 4, 5, and 6 of the DIP switches on the right and left CPU Units,
set the PRPHL and COMM pins and bit A39512 as shown in the following
table.
Turn OFF pins 4, 5, and 6 on both the right and left CPU Units.
Pin
PRPHL
Contents
Peripheral port
ON
communications
(In place of pin 4
of the DIP
OFF
switches.)
(default)
Setting
According to the peripheral port baud
rate setting in the PLC Setup. (See
note 3.)
Connect a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer at the baud rate for
Programming Devices. (The communications conditions are automatically
detected.) (See note 1.)
COMM
RS-232C commu- ON
nications conditions
(In place of pin 5
of the DIP
OFF
switches.)
(default)
Connect a CX-Programmer at the
baud rate for Programming Consoles.
(The baud rate is automatically
detected.) (See note 2.)
A39512
User-customized
DIP switch pin
(In place of pin 6
of the DIP
switches.)
A39512 ON
RSV
Leave OFF when RS-232C port is to
be used by other than a CX-Programmer (peripheral bus), such as a PT or
host computer.
According to the RS-232C port com- Turn ON when RS-232C port is to be
munications conditions settings in the used by a CX-Programmer (peripheral bus).
PLC Setup.
OFF
A39512 OFF
(default)
Disabled
Note
48
ON
Applications
Leave OFF when peripheral port is to
be used by a Programming Console
or CX-Programmer (with peripheral
bus setting).
Turn ON when peripheral port is to be
used by other than a Programming
Console or CX-Programmer (peripheral bus).
The status of this DIP switch pin is
reflected in the User DIP Switch Pin
Flag (A39512) in the Auxiliary Area.
Set to OFF.
1. The order of automatic detection looks for a Programming Console first
and then it will attempt to detect a peripheral bus connect at the following
speeds: 9,600 bps, 19,200 bps, 38,400 bps, and then 115,200 bps. If the
Programming Device is in a mode other than peripheral bus, or if it is set
Section 2-3
Duplex Unit
by peripheral bus to a baud rate other than those that are automatically detected, the auto-detection function will not work.
2. The order of automatic detection is as follows: 9,600 bps, 19,200 bps,
38,400 bps, and then 115,200 bps. If the Programming Device is in a mode
other than peripheral bus, or if it is set by peripheral bus to a baud rate other than those that are automatically detected, the auto-detection function
will not work.
3. For details on the PLC Setup, refer to SECTION 6 PLC Setup.
4. When connecting a CX-Programmer to the peripheral port or RS-232C
port, set the CX-Programmer’s network classification and either the
PRPHL pin or the COMM pin on the DIP switch as shown in the following
table.
CX-Programmer’s
network setting
Peripheral bus
Connecting to
peripheral port
Set the PRPHL
pin to OFF.
SYSWAY (Host Link) Set the PRPHL
pin to ON.
Connecting to
RS-232C port
PLC Setup
Set the COMM pin --to ON.
Set the COMM pin Set to “Host Link.”
to OFF.
5. Be sure to set the RSV (reserve) pin to OFF.
49
Section 2-3
Duplex Unit
Duplex Unit Indicators
DPL01
L
R
Indicator
DPL STATUS
Red
Green
CS
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
Status
Green
(ON)
Contents
The System is operating
normally in Duplex Mode.
Description
The active and standby CPU Units are operating
normally in synchronization in Duplex Mode.
Green
(flashing)
The System is being initialized for duplex operation.
Red (ON)
A duplex bus error has
occurred in the System.
The active and standby CPU Units are being initialized for duplex operation (transferring or verifying data).
A duplex bus error has occurred in Duplex
Mode. (An error has occurred in the duplex bus,
and A31601 has turned ON.)
Note At this time, the mode is switched from
Duplex Mode to Simplex Mode, and
operation is continued by the active CPU
Unit alone.
Red
(flashing)
A duplex verification error
A duplex verification error has occurred in
has occurred in the System. Duplex Mode. (One of the following items does
not match for the active and standby CPU Units,
and A31600 has turned ON.)
CPU Unit model numbers
Parameter Areas
User program areas
Inner Board data is not the same (Process-control CPU Units only).
A function not supported by the standby CPU
Unit was performed by the active CPU Unit (unit
version 1.1 or later).
The cause of the duplex verification error is
stored in Auxiliary Area word A317.
Note
1. At this time, the mode is switched from Duplex Mode to Simplex Mode, and operation
is continued by the active CPU Unit alone.
2.
OFF
50
The System is operating
normally in Simplex Mode.
Verification is not performed for the mounting, model number, or data contents of
Memory Cards, or for front-panel DIP switch
settings. Operation will continue in Duplex
Mode even if these do not match for the active and standby CPU Units.
Either operation is normal in Simplex Mode, or
an error has occurred in Duplex Mode and the
System is now operating normally in Simplex
Mode.
Section 2-3
Duplex Unit
Indicator
L
Status
ACTIVE
Contents
Description
Green
(ON)
OFF
The left CPU Unit is active
(ACT).
The left CPU Unit is on
standby (STB).
The left CPU Unit is the active (i.e., controlling)
CPU Unit.
Either the left CPU Unit is on standby or the
CPU Unit has stopped.
Green
(ON)
Green
(flashing)
The left CPU Unit is in RUN
or MONITOR Mode.
The left CPU Unit is being
initialized for duplex operation, or the CPU Unit is waiting.
The left CPU Unit is operating (i.e., in RUN or
MONITOR Mode).
Either the left CPU Unit is being initialized for
duplex operation (transferring or verifying duplex
data) or the CPU Unit is waiting.
While this indicator is flashing, neither of the
CPU Units will begin operation.
Note
1. If “Run Under Duplex Initial” in the PLC Setup is set to “Start running during initialization” only the active CPU Unit will start
running during duplex initialization.
Green
CPU STATUS
Red
Green
2.
This indicator will flash even if a duplex bus
error or a duplex verification error occurs
when the power is turned ON.
A CPU error has occurred at the left CPU Unit.
One of the following operation switching errors
has occurred at the left CPU Unit.
Memory error
Program error
Cycle time overrun error
FALS instruction executed
Fatal Inner Board error (Process-control CPU
Units only)
Red (ON)
Red
(flashing)
Operation
CPU error
switching
Other than
error at the
CPU error
left CPU Unit
OFF
The left CPU Unit is in PRO- The left CPU Unit is in PROGRAM Mode, or a
GRAM Mode.
fatal error other than those indicated by a lit or
flashing red indicator has occurred.
51
Section 2-3
Duplex Unit
Indicator
R
Status
ACTIVE
Contents
Description
Green
(ON)
OFF
The right CPU Unit is active
(ACT).
The right CPU Unit is on
standby (STB).
The right CPU Unit is the active (i.e., controlling)
CPU Unit.
Either the right CPU Unit is on standby or the
CPU Unit is stopped.
Green
(ON)
Green
(flashing)
The right CPU Unit is in
RUN or MONITOR Mode.
The right CPU Unit is being
initialized for duplex operation, or the CPU is waiting.
The right CPU Unit is operating (i.e., in RUN or
MONITOR Mode).
Either the right CPU Unit is being initialized for
duplex operation (transferring or verifying duplex
data) or the CPU is waiting.
While this indicator is flashing, neither of the
CPU Units will begin operation.
Note
1. If “Run Under Duplex Initial” in the PLC Setup is set to “Start running during initialization” only the active CPU Unit will start
running during duplex initialization.
Green
CPU STATUS
Red
Green
2.
Indicator Status when
Power Is Turned ON
Red (ON)
Red
(flashing)
Operation
switching
error at the
right CPU
Unit
CPU error
Other than
CPU error
OFF
The right CPU Unit is in
PROGRAM Mode.
The right CPU Unit is in PROGRAM Mode, or a
fatal error other than those indicated by a lit or
flashing red indicator has occurred.
The following table shows the status of Duplex Unit indicators when the power
supply is turned ON. In this example, the left (L) CPU Unit is set as the active
one (ACT.LEFT).
Duplex Unit indicators
DPL STATUS
L (Active)
This indicator will flash even if a duplex bus
error or a duplex verification error occurs
when the power is turned ON.
A CPU error has occurred at the right CPU Unit.
One of the following operation switching errors
has occurred at the right CPU Unit.
Memory error
Program error
Cycle time overrun error
FALS instruction executed
Fatal Inner Board error (Process-control CPU
Units only)
Status at startup
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
R (Non-active) ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
Being initialized (transferring
data, e.g., user program
immediately after startup)
Green (flashing)
Green (ON)
Green (flashing)
OFF
Green (flashing)
In PROGRAM
Mode
Green (ON)
Green (ON)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Operating in
Duplex Mode
Green (ON)
Green (ON)
Green (ON)
OFF
Green (ON)
Operating in
Simplex Mode
OFF
Green (ON)
Green (ON)
OFF
OFF
Note The items set in bold text in the table are the main ones to indicate the status.
52
Section 2-3
Duplex Unit
Indicator Status when
Errors Occur
The following table shows the status of Duplex Unit indicators when errors
occur during Duplex Mode operation (i.e., in either RUN Mode or MONITOR
Mode). In this example, the left (L) CPU Unit is set as the active one
(ACT.LEFT).
Duplex Unit indicators
Operation switching Fatal error at
error at active CPU
active CPU
Unit
Unit (e.g., too
many I/O
Non- CPU
CPU
points)
error
error
DPL STATUS
L (When
set to
active)
OFF
Green (ON)
ACTIVE
Green (ON)
CPU STATUS Green (ON)
(See note 1.)
System operation
Continues.
Note
Duplex
verification error
Duplex
bus
error
Non-fatal
error at
active CPU
Unit
CPU waiting
Green (ON)
OFF
OFF
Red
Red
(flashing) (ON)
Green (ON)
Green (flashing)
(See note 2.)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Green (ON)
OFF
Green (flashing)
Stops.
Continues.
Continues.
Waits.
ACTIVE
OFF
Green (ON)
CPU STATUS Red
Red (ON) OFF
(flashing)
R (When
set to
standby)
Error status
Duplex error
Green (ON)
Green (ON)
Green (flashing)
Green (ON)
Green (flashing)
1. If operation is switched to the standby CPU Unit (i.e., in this example, from
the left CPU Unit to the right), and then an error occurs at the newly active
CPU Unit, the CPU STATUS indicator will flash red for a non-CPU error and
stay lit red for a CPU error.
2. This indicator will light green if a duplex error occurs during operation.
3. The items set in bold text in the table are the main ones to indicate the status.
Indicator Status when
Replacing the Duplex
Unit Online
(CS1D-DPLO2D Only)
2-3-3
When the Duplex Unit Operating Switch (DPL USE/NO USE) is set to NO
USE to replace the Duplex Unit online, all of the Duplex Unit indicators will be
OFF (not lit). During online replacement, only the active CPU Unit will continue operating.
External Dimensions
DPL01
L
R
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
LEFT CPU
USE
NO USE
RIGHT CPU
USE
NO USE
DPL SW
ON OFF
SPL DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
130
ON
INIT.
SW
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
ON
DUPLEX
34.5
1.2
100.5
124
22.3 (Backplane)
53
Section 2-4
CPU Units
2-4
2-4-1
CPU Units
Models
Number of I/O
points (Number
of Expansion
Racks)
Programming
Data Memory
(DM + EM)
CPU Units for Duplex CPU
Systems
5,120 points
(7 Racks)
CPU Units for Single CPU
Systems
960 points
(2 Racks)
1,280 points
(3 Racks)
250 Ksteps
60 Ksteps
10 Ksteps
448 Kwords
128 Kwords
64 Kwords
CS1D-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU42S
30 Ksteps
64 Kwords
CS1D-CPU44S
5,120 points
(7 Racks)
60 Ksteps
128 Kwords
CS1D-CPU65S
5,120 points
(7 Racks)
250 Ksteps
448 Kwords
CS1D-CPU67S
54
Model
Weight
350 g max.
Section 2-4
CPU Units
2-4-2
Components
Inner Board
Connector
Install an Inner
Board. (See note.)
RUN
Lit green when the CPU Unit is
operating normally in MONITOR or
RUN mode.
Peripheral Port
Connects
Programming
Device (including
Programming
Console) host
computer, etc.
Refer to 2-6.
RUN
ERR/ALM
Lit read when a fatal error was
discovered in self-diagnosis or a
Memory Card
hardware error has occurred. The CPU
Powered/Accessed Indicators Unit will stop operating and all outputs
MCPWR (ON: green)
will be turned OFF.
Power provided to Memory
Flashing red when a non-fatal error
Card.
was discovered in self-diagnosis.
BUSY (ON: Yellow)
Memory Card being accessed. The CPU Unit will continue operating.
ERR/ALM
INH BKU
P
PRPHL
COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-C
PROGRAMMABLEPU67H
CONTROLLER
OPEN
MCPW
RS-232C Port
Connects CXProgrammer (but not
Programming
Console), host
computer, external
devices,
Programmable
Terminal (PT), etc.
Refer to 2-6.
PERI
PHER
R
BUSY
AL
PORT
Memory Card
Connector
Memory Card
Install into the active CPU Unit.
Note: An Inner Board can be
mounted in a Single CPU System.
Memory Card Power Supply
Button
Press this button to turn OFF
the power supply before
removing the Memory Card or
when performing the simple
backup operation.
Memory Card Eject Button
Press to remove the Memory
Card.
View with battery housing opened.
INH
Lit yellow when the Output OFF Bit
(A50015) has been turned ON. The
outputs from all Output Units will turn
OFF.
BKUP
Lit yellow when data is being
transferred between RAM and flash
memory.
Do not turn OFF the power supply to
the PLC while this indicator is lit.
PRPHL
Flashes yellow when the CPU Unit is
communicating (sending or receiving)
via the peripheral port.
COMM
Flashes yellow when the CPU Unit is
communicating (sending or receiving)
via the RS-232C port.
MCPWR
Lit green when power is being supplied
to the Memory Card.
DIP Switch
BUSY
Flashes yellow when the Memory Card
is being accessed.
Pin 1: User program memory write (enable: OFF; disable: ON)
Pin 2: Automatic user program transfer at startup (not transferred: OFF; transferred: ON)
Pin 3: Always OFF.
Pin 4:
Pin 5:
Refer to DIP Switch Settings.
Pin 6:
Pin 7:
Easy backup (read/write from Memory Card) with pin 7 ON and pin 8 OFF.
Easy backup (verification with Memory Card) with pin 7 OFF and pin 8 OFF.
Pin 8: Always OFF.
Note In a Duplex CPU System, the DIP switch on the front panel of the active CPU
Unit is enabled (and the one on the standby CPU Unit is disabled). The DIP
switch settings on the active and standby CPU Units do not necessarily have
to match. Even if they do not match, operation in Duplex Mode is still possible.
55
Section 2-4
CPU Units
Indicators
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
Indicator Color
RUN
Green
ERR/ALM Red
Status
ON
Meaning
CPU Unit is operating normally in MONITOR or RUN
mode.
Flashing
OFF
DIP switch settings error.
PLC has stopped operating while in PROGRAM
mode, or has stopped operating due to a fatal error.
ON
A fatal error has occurred (including FALS instruction
execution), or a hardware error (CPU error) has
occurred.
The CPU Unit will stop operating, and the outputs will
turn OFF.
A non-fatal error has occurred (including FAL instruction execution).
The CPU Unit will continue operating.
CPU Unit is operating normally.
Output OFF Bit (A50015) has been turned ON. The
outputs from all Output Units will turn OFF.
Output OFF Bit (A50015) has been turned OFF.
User program and Parameter Area data is being
backed up to flash memory in the CPU Unit or being
restored from flash memory.
Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC while
this indicator is lit.
Flashing
Yellow
OFF
ON
BKUP
Yellow
OFF
ON
PRPHL
Yellow
OFF
Flashing
Data is not being written to flash memory.
CPU Unit is communicating (sending or receiving)
via the peripheral port.
OFF
CPU Unit is not communicating via the peripheral
port.
CPU Unit is communicating (sending or receiving)
via the RS-232C port.
INH
COMM
Yellow
Flashing
OFF
56
CPU Unit is not communicating via the RS-232C
port.
Section 2-4
CPU Units
MCPWR
BUSY
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
Indicator
MCPWR
BUSY
DIP Switch Settings
Color
Green
Yellow
Status
ON
Meaning
Power is being supplied to the Memory
Card.
Flashing
Flashes once: Simple backup write, read, or
verify normal.
Flashes five times: Simple backup read
error.
Flashes three times: Simple backup read
warning.
Flashes continuously: Simple backup write
or verify error.
OFF
Power is not being supplied to the Memory
Card.
Flashing
OFF
Memory Card is being accessed.
Memory Card is not being accessed.
A Duplex CPU System, the DIP switch on the front panel of the active CPU
Unit is enabled (and the one on the standby CPU Unit is disabled). The DIP
switch settings on the active and standby CPU Units do not necessarily have
to match. (A duplex verification error will not be generated.) Even if they do
not match, operation in Duplex Mode is still possible.
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin No.
1
2
Setting
ON
Function
Writing prohibited for user program
memory. (See note 1.)
OFF
Writing enabled for user program
memory.
The user program is automatically
transferred from the Memory Card
when power is turned ON. (See
note 2.)
ON
OFF
The user program is not automatically transferred from the Memory
Card when power is turned ON.
Application
Default
Used to prevent programs from being accidently OFF
overwritten from Programming Devices (including Programming Console).
Used to store the programs in the Memory Card OFF
for switching operations, or to automatically
transfer programs at startup (Memory Card ROM
operation).
Note When pin 7 is ON and pin 8 is OFF, simple backup reading from the Memory
Card is given priority, so even if pin 2 is
ON, the user program is not automatically
transferred from the Memory Card when
power is turned ON.
3
Always OFF. Use with this pin set to OFF.
---
4 to 6
See below.
---
OFF
57
Section 2-4
CPU Units
Pin No.
7
8
Setting
Function
Simple backup type
Always OFF. ---
DIP Switch Pins 4 to 6
Application
Default
Used to determine the simple backup type. (See OFF
note 3.)
Normally turn this pin OFF.
--OFF
Set these pins as described below. Settings are different for Duplex CPU and
Single CPU Systems.
■ Duplex CPU Systems
Pin No.
4
5
6
Setting
Function
Always OFF. Use with this pin set to OFF.
Always OFF. Use with this pin set to OFF.
Always OFF. Use with this pin set to OFF.
Application
Default
Do not set these switches. Instead, use the
OFF
PRPHL and COMM switches on the Duplex Unit OFF
and A39512 in the Auxiliary Area.
OFF
■ Single CPU Systems
Pin No.
4
Setting
ON
OFF
5
6
Function
Application
Peripheral port communications
Turn ON to use the peripheral port for a device
parameters set in the PLC Setup
other than Programming Console or CX-Proare used.
grammer (Peripheral bus only).
Peripheral port communications
parameters set using Programming
Console or CX-Programmer
(Peripheral bus only) are used.
Default
OFF
ON
RS-232C port communications
parameters set using a CX-Programmer (Peripheral bus only) are
used.
OFF
RS-232C port communications
parameters set in the PLC Setup
are used.
User-defined pin. Turns OFF the
Set pin 6 to ON or OFF and use A39512 in the
OFF
User DIP Switch Pin Flag (A39512). program to create a user-defined condition without using an I/O Unit.
User-defined pin. Turns ON the
ON
OFF
Turn ON to use the RS-232C port for a Program- OFF
ming Device.
User DIP Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
!Caution Always touch a grounded metal object to discharge static electricity from your
body before changing the settings on the DIP switch during operation.
Note
1. When pin 1 is set to ON, writing is prohibited for the user program and all
parameter data (PLC Setup, I/O table registration, etc.). Moreover, it is not
possible to clear the user program or parameters even by executing a
memory clear operation from a Programming Device.
2. In a Duplex CPU System, automatic transfer at startup can be executed
only from the active CPU Unit. Duplex initialization is performed between
the two CPU Units after the automatic transfer, and the user program, parameters, and I/O memory are matched. If pin 2 it set to ON, I/O memory
(AUTOEXEC.IOM, [email protected]@.IOM) will also be transferred automatically. (Refer to the Programming Manual.) The program (AUTOEXEC.OBJ)
and Parameter Area (AUTOEXEC.STD) must both be on the Memory
Card, but the I/O memory (AUTOEXEC.IOM, [email protected]@.IOM) does not
need to be.
3. Simple Backup Operations
In Duplex Mode, the simple backup function can be executed only from the
active CPU Unit. Duplex initialization is not executed between the two CPU
58
Section 2-4
CPU Units
Units after simple backup is performed. Therefore, after the data has been
read to the CPU Unit, turn the power OFF and back ON and then press the
Initial Switch on the Duplex Unit. If DIP switch pin 7 on the active CPU Unit
is ON, a duplex verification error will occur.
Pin 7 of DIP switch
on CPU Unit
ON
Procedure
Writing from active CPU Unit Hold down the Memory
to Memory Card
Card Power Supply Switch
for three seconds.
OFF (default)
Note
Simple backup operation
Reading from Memory Card Turn PLC power OFF and
to active CPU Unit
then back ON.
This setting is given priority
over automatic transfer at
startup (pin 2 ON).
Comparison of Memory
Hold down the Memory
Card and CPU Unit
Card Power Supply Switch
for three seconds.
After data is read from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit using the
simple backup function, operation is not possible in any mode other
than PROGRAM Mode. To switch to either MONITOR Mode or
RUN Mode, first turn the power OFF and turn DIP switch pin 7 back
OFF.
Then turn the power back ON and change the mode from a Programming Device.
2-4-3
CPU Unit Memory Map
The memory of CS1D CPU Units is configured in the following blocks.
• I/O Memory: The data areas accessible from the user program
• User Memory: The user program and Parameter Area (See note 1.)
The above memory is backed up using a CS1W-BAT01 Battery. If the battery
voltage is low, the data in these areas will not be stable.
The CPU Unit has a built-in flash memory, however, to which the user program and Parameter Area data is backed up whenever the user memory is
written to, including data transfers and online editing from a Programming
Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console, data transfers from a
Memory Card, etc.). The user program and the Parameter Area data will thus
not be lost even if battery voltage drops.
59
Section 2-4
CPU Units
CPU Unit
Built-in RAM
I/O Memory Area
Backup
Drive 1: EM file
memory (See note 2.)
Flash Memory
User program
Written
automatically
The battery life is 5 years at an
ambient temperature of 25°C.
User program
Drive 0: Memory
Card
(flash memory)
Written
automatically
Parameter Area
Battery
Parameter Area
(See note 1.)
File memory
Automatically backed up to flash memory whenever
a write operation for the user program or parameter
area is performed from a Programming Device.
Note
1. The Parameter Area stores system information for the CPU Unit, such as
the PLC Setup.
2. Part of the EM (Extended Data Memory) Area can be converted to file
memory to handle data files and program files in RAM memory format,
which has the same format as Memory Cards. File memory in the EM Area
is backed up by a battery.
60
Section 2-4
CPU Units
2-4-4
Battery Compartment and Peripheral Port Covers
Opening the Battery
Compartment Cover
Insert a small flat-blade screwdriver into the opening at the bottom of the battery compartment cover and lift open the cover.
Insert a small flat-blade
screwdriver into the opening
at the bottom of the battery
compartment cover and lift
open the cover.
Battery
DIP switch
Opening the Peripheral Port Cover and Connecting Cables
Insert a small flat-blade
screwdriver into the
opening at the top of the
port cover and pull open.
Make sure the connector is
in facing the correct direction.
Hold the grips on the side of the
connector and push into the port.
61
Section 2-5
File Memory
2-4-5
Dimensions
104.3
100.5
71
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
OPEN
MCPWR
BUSY
OPEN
130 134
PERIPHERAL
PORT
(Backplane) 22.3
2-5
File Memory
For CS1D CPU Units, the Memory Card and a specified part of the EM Area
can be used to store files. All user programs, the I/O Memory Area, and the
Parameter Area can be stored as files.
File memory
Memory capacity
Model
Memory Card
(See note 3.)
Flash
memory
30 Mbytes
64 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
HMC-EF372
HMC-EF672
HMC-EF183
EM file memory
RAM
The maximum capacity of the CPU Unit’s
EM Area (e.g., the
maximum capacity for
a CPU67 is
832 Kbytes)
The specified bank
(set in the PLC Setup)
to the last bank of the
EM Area in the I/O
Memory.
Bank 0
Bank n
Bank C
Note
Memory
type
EM file
memory
1. A Memory Card can be written up to approximately 100,000 times. (Each
write operation to the Memory Card must be counted regardless of the size
of the write.) Be particularly careful not to exceed the service life of the
Memory Card when writing to it from the ladder program.
2. The HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter is shown below.
3. For precautions regarding the use of Memory Cards, refer to 5-1 File Memory in the SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual (W394).
62
Section 2-5
File Memory
2-5-1
File Memory Functions in Duplex CPU Systems
Only the Memory Card in the active CPU Unit is accessed, whereas EM file
memory is accessed for both the active and standby CPU Units.
Using Memory Cards
Operation in a Duplex CPU
System
Memory Card functions can be executed in duplex only when the doing so is
enabled in the PLC Setup. In Duplex Mode, the same data that is written to
the Memory Card mounted in the active CPU Unit will also be written to the
Memory Card in the standby CPU Unit. No processing, however, is executed
during duplex initialization to match the data on the Memory Cards mounted
in the active and standby CPU Units. Therefore, before enabling duplex operation for Memory Cards, make sure that the contents are the same for both of
the Memory Cards.
Data read from the Memory Card mounted in the active CPU Unit is used by
both the active and standby CPU Units, so this ensures that the data for the
two CPU Units will match.
Memory Card Functions
Function
Writing to Memory
Card using the
FWRIT instruction
Reading from Memory Card using the
FREAD instruction
The following table shows the operations of the various Memory Card-related
functions.
Memory Card location
Data unification
processing method
Installed
Installed
in active in standby
CPU Unit CPU Unit
Accessed. Accessed. Data is written to the Mem(Same
ory Cards mounted in both
data writCPU Units.
ten as for
active CPU
Unit.)
Not
accessed.
Notes
When referencing file memory-related
status, use the status for the active CPU
Unit (word A343).
Data read from the Memory
Card in the active CPU Unit
is used by both CPU Units.
Automatic transfer
when power is
turned ON
After the automatic transfer
There is no need to mount a Memory
at startup, duplex initializaCard or to set the DIP switch at the
tion is executed between the standby CPU Unit.
two CPU Units, and the user
program, parameters, and
I/O memory are matched.
Replacement of the
Entire Program During Operation
Simultaneously with program replacement during
operation, duplex operation
is initialized between the two
CPU Units, and the user programs are matched.
Simple backup
Duplex operation is not initialized between the CPU
Units after reading to the
CPU Units.
After data is read from the Memory Card
by the simple backup operation, the CPU
Unit will be in PROGRAM mode. (CSseries specifications)
To begin the operation:
1. Turn OFF the power and set DIP
switch pins 7 and 8 on the CPU Units.
Then turn the power back ON.
2.
Press the Initial Switch on the Duplex
Unit.
Note If pin 7 on the active CPU Unit is
turned ON, a duplex verification
error will be generated.
63
Section 2-5
File Memory
Note For details, refer to the CS/CJ-series Programming Manual.
Using EM File Memory
Operation in a Duplex CPU
System
When a file is written to the EM file memory in the active CPU Unit in a Duplex
System, the same file is simultaneously written to the EM file memory in the
standby CPU Unit.
Note If EM file memory is specified for the active CPU Unit’s EM Area with the PLC
Setup, the same banks will be specified for the standby CPU Unit’s EM Area
by means of duplex initialization.
EM File Memory-related
Functions
Function
Writing to EM file
memory by FWRIT
instruction
EM file memory
In active
In standby
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Accessed.
Reading from EM file
memory by FREAD
instruction
2-5-2
The following table shows the operations of the EM file memory-related functions.
Data matching method
Note
Accessed
When a file is written to the active CPU
Unit’s EM file memory, the file is simultaneously written to the standby CPU
Unit’s EM file memory. FWRIT instruction execution is synchronized for the
active and standby CPU Units.
When referencing file memory-related status, use the
status for the active CPU Unit
(word A343).
Not
accessed.
The FREAD instruction is executed for
both CPU Units, and the data read
from the active CPU Unit’s EM file
memory is used by both CPU Units.
Files Handled by CPU Unit
Files are ordered and stored in the Memory Card or EM file memory according to the file name and the extension attached to it. File names handled by
the CPU Unit (i.e., file names that can be read) are set as shown in the following tables.
General-use Files
File type
Data files
Contents
Specified range in I/O Binary
memory
Text
CSV
File name
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
Extension
.IOM
.TXT
.CSV
Program files
Parameter files
All user programs
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
PLC Setup, registered I/O tables,
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
routing tables, CPU Bus Unit settings, SYSMAC LINK link tables, and
Controller Link link tables
.OBJ
.STD
File type
Data files
Contents
DM Area data (stores data for
AUTOEXEC
specified number of words starting
from D20000)
DM Area data (stores data for
ATEXECDM
specified number of words starting
from D00000)
File name
.IOM
EM area for bank No. @ (stores
[email protected]
data for specified number of words (EM bank No.)
starting from [email protected]_00000)
.IOM
Files Transferred
Automatically at Startup
64
.IOM
Section 2-5
File Memory
File type
Program files
Parameter files
Contents
All user programs
PLC Setup, registered I/O tables,
routing tables, CPU Bus Unit settings, SYSMAC LINK link tables,
and Controller Link link tables
File type
Data files
Contents
Words allocated to Special I/O
Units, CPU Bus Units, and Inner
Boards in the DM Area
CIO area
DM Area
EM area
AUTOEXEC
AUTOEXEC
File name
.OBJ
.STD
BACKUP
File name
.IOM
Simple Backup Files
Note
BACKUPIO
.IOR
BACKUPDM
.IOM
[email protected] (@: .IOM
EM bank No.)
Program files
Parameter files
All user programs
PLC Setup, registered I/O tables,
routing tables, CPU Bus Unit settings, SYSMAC LINK link tables,
and Controller Link link tables
BACKUP
Unit/Board
backup files
Data from specific Units or Boards [email protected]@
(@@: Unit
address)
.OBJ
.STD
.PRM
1. Specify up to eight ASCII characters.
2. Always specify the name of files to be transferred automatically at startup
as AUTOEXEC or [email protected]@.
3. The Units and Boards use the following file names.
Unit/Board
CPU Bus Units
Special I/O Units
Inner Boards
2-5-3
@@
I0 to IF
20 to 6F
E1
Unit No.
0 to F
0 to 79
---
Initializing File Memory
File memory
Initializing procedure
Data capacity after
initialization
Essentially the specific capacity of the Memory Card
Memory Card
1. Install Memory Card into
CPU Unit.
2. Initialize the Memory Card
using a Programming Device
(including Programming Console).
EM file memory
1. Convert the part of the EM 1 bank:
Approx. 61 KB
Area from the specified bank 13 banks: Approx. 825 KB
No. to the last bank No. to file
memory in the PLC Setup.
2. Initialize the EM file memory using a Programming
Device (excluding Programming Console).
Note To delete all of the contents of a Memory Card, or to format the Memory Card,
use either a CX-Programmer or Programming Console with the CPU Unit. Do
not use a personal computer for this purpose.
65
Section 2-5
File Memory
2-5-4
Using File Memory
Note For details on using file memory, refer to the CS/CJ-series Programming Manual.
Memory Cards
Reading/Writing Files Using Programming Device
File
Program files
I/O memory files
Parameter files
1,2,3...
File name and extension
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.OBJ
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.STD
Data transfer direction
Between CPU Unit and Memory Card,
1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Initialize the Memory Card if necessary.
3. Name the file containing the data in the CPU Unit and save the contents in
the Memory Card.
4. Read the file that is saved in the Memory Card to the CPU Unit.
Automatically Transferring Memory Card Files to the CPU Unit at Startup
1,2,3...
File
Program files
I/O memory files
File name and extension
AUTOEXEC.OBJ
AUTOEXEC.IOM
ATEXECDM.IOM
[email protected] (@= EM bank No.)
Parameter files
AUTOEXEC.STD
Data transfer direction
From Memory Card to
CPU Unit
1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Set pin 2 of the DIP switch to ON.
3. The files are read automatically when the power is turned ON.
Reading/Writing I/O Memory Files Using FREAD(700)and FWRIT(701)
File
I/O memory files
1,2,3...
File name and extension
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.TXT
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.CSV
Data transfer direction
Between CPU Unit and
Memory Card
1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Initialize the Memory Card using a Programming Device.
3. Using the FWRIT(701) instruction, name the file of the specified I/O memory area, and save to the Memory Card.
4. Using the FREAD(700) instruction, read the I/O memory files from the
Memory Card to the I/O memory in the CPU Unit.
Note When using spreadsheet software to read data that has been written to the
Memory Card in CSV or text format, it is now possible to read the data using
Windows applications by mounting a Memory Card in the personal computer
card slot using a HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter.
66
Section 2-5
File Memory
Reading and Replacing Program Files during Operation
File
Program files
1,2,3...
File name and extension
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.OBJ
Data transfer direction
Memory Card to CPU Unit
1. Install a Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Set the following information: Program File Name (A654 to A657) and Program Password (A651).
3. Next, from the program, turn ON the Replacement Start Bit (A65015).
Backing Up or Restoring CPU Unit Data or Data for Specific Units and Boards
1,2,3...
File
Program files
Data files
File name and extension
BACKUP.OBJ
BACKUP.IOM
BACKUPIO.IOR
BACKUPDM.IOM
[email protected] (@= EM bank No.)
Parameter files
Unit/Board
backup files
BACKUP.STD
[email protected]@.PRM (@@= unit No.)
Data transfer direction
CPU Unit to Memory Card
(when backing up)
Memory Card to CPU Unit
(when restoring)
1. Install a Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Turn ON pin 7 and turn OFF pin 8 on the DIP switch.
3. To back up data, press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply Switch
for three seconds. To restore data, turn ON the PLC power.
Note The following files can be transferred between the Memory Card and the CXProgrammer.
File
Symbols file
Comment file
1,2,3...
File name and extension
SYMBOLS.SYM
COMMENTS.CMT
Data transfer direction
Between CX-Programmer and
Memory Card
1. Insert a formatted Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Place the CX-Programmer online and use the file transfer operations to
transfer the above files from the personal computer to the PLC or from the
PLC to the personal computer.
EM File Memory
Reading/Writing EM File Memory Files Using Programming Device
File
Program files
I/O memory files
Parameter files
1,2,3...
File name and extension
Data transfer direction
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.OBJ
Between CPU Unit and EM
file memory
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.STD
1. Convert the part of the EM Area specified by the first bank number into file
memory in the PLC Setup.
2. Initialize the EM file memory using a Programming Device.
3. Name the data in the CPU Unit and save in the EM file memory using the
Programming Device.
4. Read the EM file memory files to the CPU Unit using the Programming Device.
67
Section 2-5
File Memory
Reading/Writing I/O Memory Files in EM File Memory Using FREAD(700)and FWRIT(701)
File
I/O memory files
1,2,3...
File name and extension
Data transfer direction
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
Between CPU Unit and EM
file memory
1. Convert the part of the EM Area specified by the first bank number into file
memory in the PLC Setup.
2. Initialize the EM file memory using a Programming Device.
3. Using the FWRIT(701) instruction, name the specified area in I/O memory
with a file name and save in the EM file memory.
4. Using the FREAD(700) instruction, read the I/O memory files from the EM
file memory to the I/O memory in the CPU Unit.
Note The following files can be transferred between EM file memory and the CXProgrammer.
File
Symbols file
Comment file
1,2,3...
File name and extension
Data transfer direction
SYMBOLS.SYM
Between CX-Programmer
and EM file memory
COMMENTS.CMT
1. Format the EM Area in the CPU Units as file memory.
2. Place the CX-Programmer online and use the file transfer operations to
transfer the above files from the personal computer to the PLC or from the
PLC to the personal computer.
2-5-5
Memory Card Dimensions
42.8
36.4
2-5-6
3.3
Installing and Removing the Memory Card
Installing the Memory Card
Note In a Duplex CPU System, install the Memory Card into the active CPU Unit.
Even if Memory Cards are mounted in both CPU Units, there will be no duplex
initialization to match the data on the two Memory Cards. Therefore there is
no guarantee that operation will continue after an operation switching error.
68
Section 2-5
File Memory
1,2,3...
1. Pull the top end of the Memory Card cover forward and remove from the
Unit.
∇
2. Insert the Memory Card with the label facing to the right. (Insert with the ∆
on the CPU Unit facing each other.)
on the Memory Card label and the
Product label
3. Push the Memory Card securely into the compartment. If the Memory Card
is inserted correctly, the Memory Card eject button will be pushed out.
Removing the Memory Card
1,2,3...
1. Press the Memory Card Power Supply Switch.
Memory Card power supply switch
69
Section 2-5
File Memory
2. Press the Memory Card eject button after the BUSY indicator is no longer
lit.
BUSY indicator
BUSY
Memory Card eject button
3. The Memory Card will eject from the compartment.
4. Remove the Memory Card cover when a Memory Card is not being used.
Note
1. Never turn OFF the PLC while the CPU is accessing the Memory Card.
2. Never remove the Memory Card while the CPU is accessing the Memory
Card. Press the Memory Card Power Supply Switch and wait for the BUSY
indicator to go OFF before removing the Memory Card. In the worst case,
the Memory Card may become unusable if the PLC is turned OFF or the
Memory Card is removed while the Card is being accessed by the CPU.
3. Never insert the Memory Card facing the wrong way. If the Memory Card
is inserted forcibly, it may become unusable.
Installing the Memory Card into a Personal Computer
HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter
Memory Card
Personal computer PC card slot
70
Section 2-6
Programming Devices
Note When a Memory Card is inserted into a computer using a Memory Card
Adapter, it can be used as a standard storage device, like a floppy disk or hard
disk.
2-6
2-6-1
Programming Devices
Overview
There are two types of Programming Devices that can be used: the Hand-held
Programming Consoles or the CX-Programmer, which is operated on a Windows computer. The CX-Programmer is usually used to write the programs,
and a Programming Console is then used to change the operating modes,
edit the programs, and monitor a limited number of points.
Use one of the following methods to connect the Programming Devices to a
CS1D CPU Unit.
• Programming Console:
Connect to the peripheral port of the CPU Unit. Online replacement is
possible for Units mounted to a CS1D CPU Rack or CS1D Expansion
Rack.
• CX-Programmer:
Connect to the peripheral port or RS-232C port. Online Unit replacement
is supported for version 3.1 or higher.
Note In a Duplex CPU System, the Programming Device must be connected to the
active CPU Unit.
Programming Consoles
There are three Programming Consoles that can be used CPU Units: The
CQM1H-PRO01-E, CQM1-PRO01-E, and C200H-PRO27-E. These Programming Consoles are shown here.
CQM1H-PRO01-E Programming Console
Connection
RUN
DPL01
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1DPROGRAMMABCPU67 H
L
R
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
USE
NO USE
MCPWR
PRO01
PR
O01
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1DPROGRAMMABCPU67 H
LE CONTROLLER
OPEN
RIGHT CPU
BUSY
USE
OPEN
NO USE
OPEN
PROGRAMMING
PR
OGRAMMING CONSOLE
RUN
ERR/ALM
CPU STATUS
LEFT CPU
LE CONTROLLER
MCPWR
DPL SW
ON
LCD area
PERIPHERAL
ON OFF
SPL DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
BUSY
OPEN
INIT.
PERIPHERAL
SW
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
PORT (RS-232C
)
,-IR+
, IR
IR
TN
AND
ST
OR
TK
CNT
,-IR
TR
WR/LR
AA
LD
AC
OUT
TIM
EM
DM
SFT
A
M
7
E
B
A
H
11
00
C
I
N
8
7
44
NOT
B
G
F
C
O
9
8
6
55
22
D
9
6
33
D
J
E
K
F
AR
HR
L
CH
DM
P
EM
EM_/EXT
Q
R
CF
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
DUPLEX
PORT (RS-232C
)
Mode selector switch
FUN
ON
Operation keys (Install
the CS1W-KS001-E Key
Sheet.)
PR
O 01
PROG
RAMM
ING
RU MONI
N
TO
R
PR
OG
Z
RA
CO
NSOL
E
M
FU
N
!
7
F
4
C
1
2
!
9
6
,-IR
TR
EM
DM
EM
EM_/E
XT
J
D
IR
E
WR
/LR
CH
DM
P
F
L
CF
T
3
AR
HR
K
Q
S
6
D
,
, -IR+
IR
C
I
O
9
8
5
5
2
TK
CN
T
TIM
N
4
1
0
NO
T
B
H
AC
OU
T
8
7
E
B
0
ST
OR
G
M
A
SFT
A
TN
AN
D
AA
LD
V
R
U
3
W
Y
X
Z
Cable included with CQM1H-PRO01-E
Programming Console
CQM1H-PRO01
71
Section 2-6
Programming Devices
CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console
Connection
RUN
DPL01
ERR/ALM
L
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
R
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
RUN
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
ERR/ALM
CPU STATUS
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
LEFT CPU
SYSMAC
CS1D-
H
PROGRAMMABCPU67
LE CONTROLLER
USE
SYSMAC
CS1D-
NO USE
OPEN
MCPWR
RIGHT CPU
BUSY
USE
OPEN
NO USE
OPEN
PRO01
PR
O01
H
PROGRAMMABCPU67
LE CONTROLLER
MCPWR
PROGRAMMING
PR
OGRAMMING CONSOLE
DPL SW
ON
PERIPHERAL
LCD area
BUSY
OPEN
ON OFF
SPL DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
INIT.
PERIPHERAL
SW
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
ON
PORT (RS-232C
)
DUPLEX
PORT (RS-232C
)
Mode selector switch
,-IR+
, IR
IR
TN
AND
ST
OR
TK
CNT
,-IR
TR
WR/LR
AA
LD
AC
OUT
TIM
EM
DM
FUN
B
G
E
B
A
C
H
M
7
NOT
SFT
A
N
8
7
44
11
F
55
22
00
O
9
8
C
D
I
6
D
J
6
33
F
AR
HR
K
P
Q
L
Operation keys (Install the
CS1W-KS001-E Key
Sheet.)
R
CF
EM
EM_/EXT
9
E
CH
DM
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
PR
O 01
PROG
RAMM
ING
RU MONI
N
TO
R
PR
OG
Z
RA
CO
NSOL
E
M
FU
N
!
B
1
C
1
A
0
5
9
D
CS1W-CN114 (cable length: 0.05 m)
IR
E
WR
/LR
AR
HR
K
CH
DM
F
L
Q
CF
T
3
V
R
U
3
!
J
S
6
D
2
0
,
, -IR+
IR
,-IR
TR
P
EM
EM_/E
XT
6
5
C
EM
DM
O
9
8
2
NO
T
I
TIM
N
F
4
TK
CN
T
H
AC
OU
T
8
7
4
B
ST
OR
G
M
E
SFT
A
TN
AN
D
AA
LD
7
W
Y
X
Z
Cable included with CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming Console
CQM1-PRO01
Connect the CPU Unit to the Programming Console with the following cables.
CS1W-CN114 (Cable length: 0.05 m)
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
RUN
DPL01
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
L
R
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
PRO27
PR
O27
USE
NO USE
PROGRAMMING
PR
OGRAMMING CONSOLE
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
LEFT CPU
SYSMAC
CS1D-
H
PROGRAMMABCPU67
LE CONTROLLER
OPEN
MCPWR
RIGHT CPU
BUSY
USE
OPEN
NO USE
OPEN
LCD area
SYSMAC
CS1D-
H
PROGRAMMABCPU67
LE CONTROLLER
MCPWR
DPL SW
ON
PERIPHERAL
ON OFF
SPL DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
BUSY
OPEN
INIT.
PERIPHERAL
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
SW
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
Mode selector switch
PORT (RS-232C
)
ON
DUPLEX
PORT (RS-232C
)
FUN
SFT
A
NOT
B
C
,-IR+
, IR
IR
WR/LR
D
TN
AND
ST
OR
TK
CNT
,-IR
TR
AA
LD
AC
OUT
TIM
EM
DM
8
9
G
M
7
E
B
A
H
N
7
44
11
00
I
F
C
O
8
6
55
22
D
9
6
33
J
E
K
F
AR
HR
L
CH
DM
P
EM
EM_/EXT
Q
R
CF
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Operation keys (Install the
CS1W-KS001-E Key
Sheet.)
PR
O 01
PROG
RAMM
ING
CO
NSOL
E
RU MONI
N
TO
R
PR
OG
Z
RA
M
FU
N
!
7
EAR MIC
F
4
C
1
2
!
9
6
,-IR
TR
EM
DM
EM
EM_/E
XT
J
D
IR
E
WR
/LR
CH
DM
P
L
CF
T
3
V
U
3
W
Y
AR
HR
K
Q
S
6
D
,
, -IR+
IR
C
I
O
9
8
5
5
2
TK
CN
T
TIM
N
4
1
0
NO
T
B
H
AC
OU
T
8
7
E
B
0
ST
OR
G
M
A
SFT
A
TN
AN
D
AA
LD
R
F
CS1W-CN224 (Cable length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN624 (Cable length: 6.0 m)
X
Z
Casette jacks
Cannot be used.
C200H-PRO27
Connect the CPU Unit to the Programming Console with the following cables.
CS1W-CN224 (Cable length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN624 (Cable length: 6.0 m)
72
Section 2-6
Programming Devices
CX-Programmer
There are differences in functions depending on the version of CX-Programmer connected to the CS1D PLC. These are listed in the following table.
CXProgrammer
Version [email protected] or
lower
Duplex CPU Single CPU
Remarks
Systems
Systems
Not supNot supThis version cannot be used for
ported.
ported.
CS1D PLCs.
Version [email protected]
Supported.
Not supported.
Online Unit replacement is supported
for version 3.1 or higher.
Select “CS1H-H” as the device type.
When using duplex functions, select
Duplex Settings from the Option
Menu in the PLC Setup.
Single CPU Systems are not supported.
Version [email protected] or
higher
Supported.
Supported.
Select “CS1D-S” as the device type
when using a Single CPU System.
Select “CS1D-H” as the device type
when using a Duplex CPU System.
The “CS1H-H” can also be selected
as the device type, but if it is, then
Duplex Settings must be selected
from the Option Menu in the PLC
Setup.
Primary/secondary communications
are supported for Duplex CS1D
Communications Units, such as the
Duplex Ethernet Units. (See note.)
Note Supported for CPU Unit Ver. 1.1 or later.
Main CX-Programmer Specifications
Item
Applicable PLC
Details
CS-series, CJ-series, CVM1, CV-series, C200HX/HG/HE (-Z),
C200HS, CQM1, CPM1, CPM1A, SRM1, C1000H/2000H
Personal computer
OS
Connection method
Communications
protocol with PLC
IBM PC/AT or compatible
Microsoft Windows 95, 98, Me, XP, or NT 4.0
CPU Unit’s peripheral port or built-in RS-232C port
Peripheral bus or Host Link
Offline operation
Programming, I/O memory editing, creating I/O tables, setting
PLC parameters, printing, program changing
Transmitting, referencing, monitoring, creating I/O tables, setting PLC parameters
Online operation
Basic functions
1. Programming: Creates and edits ladder programs and mnemonic programs for the applicable PLC.
2. Creating and referencing I/O tables.
3. Changing the CPU Unit operating mode.
4. Transferring: Transfers programs, I/O memory data, I/O
tables, PLC Setup, and I/O comments between the personal
computer and the CPU Unit.
5. Program execution monitoring: Monitors I/O status/present
values on ladder displays, I/O status/present values on mnemonic displays, and present values on I/O memory displays.
73
Section 2-6
Programming Devices
Connections
Personal computer
IBM PC/AT or compatible
Peripheral port connection
RS-232C port connection
9-pin male
9-pin male
DUPLEX
DUPLEX
PC-9801
9-pin
male
PC-9801
BX
BX
NEC
Peripheral port
9-pin
10-pin female
female
CS1W-CN118 (0.1 m) (See note 1.)
CS1W-CN226 (2.0 m)
CS1W-CN616 (6.0 m)
CS1W-CN118
CS1W-CN226
CS1W-CN616
(See note 1.)
Note
9-pin
female
NEC
9-pin
RS-232C port
female
9-pin female
XW2Z-200S-CV/200S-V (See note 2.)
XW2Z-500S-CV/500S-V (See note 2.)
XW2Z-200SCV/200S-V or
XW2Z-500SCV/500S-V
10-pin
9-pin
female
9-pin
male
1. The CS1W-CN118 Cable is used with one of the RS-232C Cables shown
on the right ([email protected]@@[email protected]@) to connect to the peripheral port on the
CPU Unit.
Peripheral port
PC-9801
BX
NEC
DUPLEX
RS-232C Cable
CS1W-CN118
2. If cables with model numbers ending in -V instead of -CV are used to connect the computer running the CX-Programmer to the RS-232C port (including when using a CS1W-CN118 Cable), a peripheral bus connection
cannot be used. Use a Host Link (SYSWAY) connection. To connect to the
port using a peripheral bus connection, prepare an RS-232C cable as described in Connection Methods on page 77.
CX-Programmer Connecting Cables
Unit
CPU Units
Serial Communications
Boards/Units
(See note 1.)
Unit port
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
D-Sub, 9pin, male
Serial
Model
communications
mode
Peripheral bus or
CS1W-CN226
Host Link
CS1W-CN626
Built-in RS- IBM PC/AT or
232C port
compatible
D-Sub, 9-pin,
female
D-Sub, 9pin, male
Peripheral bus or
Host Link
XW2Z-200S-CV 2 m
XW2Z-500S-CV 5 m
Use a staticresistant connector.
RS-232C
IBM PC/AT or
Port
compatible
D-Sub, 9-pin,
female
D-Sub, 9pin, male
Host Link
XW2Z-200S-CV 2 m
XW2Z-500S-CV 5 m
Use a staticresistant connector.
Peripheral
port
Computer
Note
Computer
port
Length Cable notes
2.0 m
6.0 m
---
1. Serial Communications Boards are supported only for Single CPU Systems.
2. Before connecting a connector from the above table to a PLC RS-232C
port, touch a grounded metal object to discharge static electricity from your
body. The [email protected]@@S-CV Cables have been strengthened against static because they use a static-resistant connector hood (XM2S-0911-E).
Even so, always discharge static electricity before touching the connectors.
3. Do not use commercially available RS-232C personal computer cables. Always use the special cables listed in this manual or make cables according
74
Section 2-6
Programming Devices
to manual specifications. Using commercially available cables may damage the external devices or CPU Unit.
RS-232C Cables for a Peripheral Port
Unit
CPU Units
Unit port
Computer
Computer
Serial
Model
port
communications
mode
IBM PC/AT or D-Sub, 9- Peripheral bus or CS1W-CN118 +
compatible
pin, male Host Link
XW2Z-200SCV/500S-CV
Built-in
peripheral port
Length
Cable notes
0.1 m+ [email protected]@@S(2 m or CV models
5 m)
use a static resistant connector.
Using a CQM1-CIF01/02 Cable for a Peripheral Port
Unit
CPU Units
Unit port
Computer
Built-in
peripheral port
Computer
port
IBM PC/AT or D-Sub, 9compatible
pin, male
Serial
Model
Length Cable notes
communications
mode
Host Link
CS1W-CN114 0.05 m + --+ CQM1-CIF02 3.3 m
Using an RS-232C Cable for an IBM PC/AT or Compatible
Unit
Unit port
Computer
Computer
port
CPU Units
Built-in
IBM PC/AT
D-Sub, 9-pin,
RS-232C
or compatible male
port
D-Sub, 9pin, female
Serial Communications
Boards/Units
(See note.)
RS-232C
IBM PC/AT
D-Sub, 9-pin,
port
or compatible male
D-Sub, 9pin, female
Serial
Model
communications
mode
Host Link
XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-V
Host Link
XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-V
Length
2m
5m
Cable
notes
---
2m
5m
Note Serial Communications Boards are supported only for Single CPU Systems.
Connection Method for USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Computer
CS1W-CIF31
Cable 1
Cable 2
PLC
CS1W-N226/626 CS/CJ-series
Peripheral Port Programming
Device Connecting Cable
CS1W-CN114 C-series PeripheralCS/CJ-series Peripheral
Conversion Cable
OR
CS1W-CIF31 USB
Connecting Cable
+
CQM1H-CIF02 C-series
Peripheral Port Programming
Device Connecting Cable
OR
[email protected]@@ RS-232C
Programming Device
Connecting Cable
+
CS1W-CN118 RS-232C-CS/CJseries Peripheral Conversion
Cable
75
Section 2-6
Programming Devices
CX-Programmer Connecting Cables
Cables Connecting to CPU Units
USB
Connecting
Cable
Model
CS1WCIF31
Cable 1
Connector
Cable model
Cable 2
Connector
Connector
CS/CJseries
peripheral
Not required.
CQM1-CIF02
(length: 3.3 m)
C-series
peripheral
C-series
peripheral
XW2Z-200SV/500S-V (length:
2 m/5 m)
XW2Z-200SV/500S-V (length:
2 m/5 m
D-sub, 9- CS1W-CN226/626
pin
(length: 2 m/6 m)
female
Cable model
Unit port
Connector
CS/CJseries
peripheral
Peripheral Bus (Toolbus) or Host Link
(SYSWAY)
CS1W-CN114
(length: 5 cm)
CS/CJseries
peripheral
Host Link (SYSWAY)
D-sub, 9- D-sub, 9pin male pin
female
CS1W-CN118
(length: 0.1 m)
CS/CJseries
peripheral
Peripheral Bus (Toolbus) or Host Link
(SYSWAY)
D-sub, 9- D-sub, 9pin male pin
female
CS1W-CN118
(length: 0.1 m)
CS/CJseries
peripheral
Host Link (SYSWAY)
XW2Z-200SRS-232C Not required.
CV/500S-CV (length: D-sub, 92 m/5 m)
pin male
XW2Z-200SV/500S-V (length:
2 m/5 m)
Serial
communications
mode
(network)
RS-232C Peripheral Bus (ToolD-sub, 9- bus) or Host Link
pin
(SYSWAY)
female
Host Link (SYSWAY)
RS-232C Not required.
D-sub, 9pin male
Peripheral Port Specifications
Protocol PLC Setup and Duplex Unit DIP Switch Settings
PRPHL
OFF
ON
Peripheral port settings (in PLC Setup)
Default value: 0 hex
NT Link: 2 hex
Peripheral bus: 4 hex
Host Link: 5 hex
Programming Console or CX-Programmer through peripheral bus (automatically detects the Programming Device’s communications parameters)
Host computer or CXPT (NT Link)
Programmer (Host Link)
CX-Programmer
(peripheral bus)
Host computer or CXProgrammer (Host Link)
RS-232C Port Specifications
Connector Pin Arrangement
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connector hood
Signal
FG
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
5V
DR (DSR)
ER (DTR)
SG (0 V)
FG
Name
Protection earth
Send data
Receive data
Request to send
Clear to send
Power supply
Data set ready
Data terminal ready
Signal ground
Protection earth
Direction
--Output
Input
Output
Input
--Input
Output
-----
5
9
6
1
Note Do not use the 5-V power from pin 6 of the RS-232C port for anything but an
NT-AL001 Link Adapter, CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion Adapter, or [email protected]
Programmable Terminal. Using this power supply for any other external device
may damage the CPU Unit or external devices.
76
Section 2-6
Programming Devices
Connection Methods
Connection between CPU Unit and Personal Computer
The following connections are in Host Link serial communications mode.
CS-series
CPU Unit
Signal
Personal computer
Pin
No.
Pin
Signal
No.
FG 1
SD 2
RD 3
RS-232C RS
4
interface
CS 5
5V 6
DR 7
ER 8
SG 9
D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Male connector on cable
Note
1 CD
2 RD
3 SD
4 ER RS-232C
interface
5 SG
DR
6
7 RS
8 CS
CI
9
D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Female connector on cable
1. Refer to Connection Examples under Appendix F Connecting to the RS232C Port on the CPU Unit when converting between RS-232C and RS422A/485 for 1:N connections.
2. Refer to Recommended Wiring Methods under Appendix F Connecting to
the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit when making your own RS-232C cable.
The following connections are in peripheral bus serial communications mode.
CS-series
CPU Unit
Personal computer
Pin
Signal No.
Pin
No. Signal
FG 1
SD 2
RD 3
RS-232C RS
4
interface
CS 5
5V 6
DR 7
ER 8
SG 9
D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Male connector on cable
1 CD
2 RD
3 SD
4 ER RS-232C
5 SG interface
6 DR
7 RS
8 CS
9
CI
D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Female connector on cable
Use the following connectors and cables when creating RS-232C cable for
connecting to the RS-232C port.
Applicable Connectors
CPU Unit Connector
Item
Plug
Hood
Model
XM2A-0901
XM2S-0911-E
Specifications
9-pin male
Used together (One
of each provided
9-pin, millimeter
with CPU Unit.)
screws
77
Section 2-6
Programming Devices
Personal Computer Connector
Item
Plug
Hood
Model
XM2D-0901
XM2S-0913
IBM PC/AT or compatible
(9-pin male connector)
Specifications
9-pin female
Used together
9-pin, inch screws
CS1-series CPU Unit
Plug: XM2D-0901
(9-pin female)
Hood: XM2S-0913
Recommended cable
RS-232C port
Hood: XM2S-0911-E
Plug: XM2A-0901 (9-pin male)
Provided with CPU Unit
Note Use the special cables provided from OMRON for all connections whenever
possible. If cables are produced in-house, be sure they are wired correctly.
External devices and the CPU Unit may be damaged if general purpose (e.g.,
computer to modem) cables are used or if wiring is not correct.
Fujikura Ltd.:UL2464 AWG28 × 5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL product)
AWG 28 × 5P IFVV-SB (non-UL product)
Recommended Cables
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.: UL2464-SB(MA) 5P × 28AWG (7/0.127) (UL product)
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG (7/0.127) (non-UL product)
RS-232C Port Specifications
Item
Communications method
Synchronization
Baud rate
Specification
Half duplex
Start-stop
0.3/0.6/1.2/2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2/38.4/57.6/115.2 kbps
(See note.)
Transmission distance
Interface
Protocol
15 m max.
EIA RS-232C
Host Link, NT Link, 1:N, No-protocol, or peripheral bus
Note Baud rates for the RS-232C are specified only up to 19.2 kbps. The CS Series
supports serial communications from 38.4 kbps to 115.2 kbps, but some computers cannot support these speeds. Lower the baud rate if necessary.
Protocol PLC Setup and Duplex Unit DIP Switch Settings
COMM
OFF
ON
RS-232C port settings (in PLC Setup)
Default value:
NT Link:
No protocol:
Peripheral bus:
Host Link:
0 hex
2 hex
3 hex
4 hex
5 hex
Host computer or
PT
General-purpose
CX-Programmer
Host computer or
CX-Programmer
external devices
CX-Programmer
(NT Link)
(peripheral bus)
(Host Link)
(No protocol)
(Host Link)
CX-Programmer (not a Programming Console) connected through the peripheral bus. (The Programming
Device’s communications parameters are detected automatically.)
Note The location of the setting depends on the system.
Duplex CPU Systems: COMM switch on the front of the Duplex Unit.
Single CPU Systems: Pin 5 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit.
78
Section 2-6
Programming Devices
2-6-2
Precautions when Connecting Programming Devices to Duplex
CPU Systems
This section describes factors that must be taken into account when connecting a CX-Programmer or a Programming Console to a CS1D Duplex System.
Connecting a
Programming Device
With a Duplex CPU System, Programming Devices must be connected to a
serial communications port (peripheral port or RS-232C port) of the active
CPU Unit.
CX-Programmer
Active CPU Unit
RUN
ER R /A LM
CS
C S D P L01
D PLSTATU S
A C T IV E
R
C PU STATU S
A C T IV E
L
C PU STATU S
CS
or
RUN
ER R /A LM
IN H B K U P
IN H B K U P
Programming Console
(peripheral port only)
P R P HC O M M
P R P HC O M M
R IG H T C P U
N O U SE
LEFT C P U
U SE
N O U SE
M O DE
O N O FF
SP L D P L
A C T. A C T.
LEFT R IG H T
ON
IN IT .
SW
Connect to peripheral port
or RS-232C port of active
CPU Unit.
COM M
PRPHL
A 39512
R SV
ON
Note
1. If connected to the peripheral port of the standby CPU Unit, no writing can
be executed from either the CX-Programmer or the Programming Console.
Only reading is enabled. (The CX-Programmer cannot be used for operations such as changing operating modes, transferring user programs,
transferring PLC Setup settings, changing I/O memory, creating and transferring I/O tables, performing online editing, and changing timer/counter
settings.)
2. If connected to the RS-232C port of the standby CPU Unit, neither reading
nor writing can be executed from the CX-Programmer. Reading only, however, can be enabled by means of the Standby CPU Unit RS-232C Port
Setting in the PLC Setup.
CX-Programmer
Standby CPU Unit
RUN
ER R /A LM
CS
C S D P L01
D PLSTATU S
A C T IV E
R
C PU STATU S
A C T IV E
L
C PU STATU S
IN H B K U P
P R P HC O M M
Programming Console
(peripheral port only)
or
CS
RUN
ER R /A LM
IN H B K U P
P R P HC O M M
R IG H T C P U
N O U SE
LEFT C P U
U SE
N O U SE
M O DE
ON
O N O FF
SP L D P L
A C T. A C T.
LEFT R IG H T
IN IT .
SW
COM M
PRPHL
A 39512
R SV
ON
When connected to the peripheral port,
write operations cannot be executed.
Only read operations are enabled.
When connected to the RS-232C port, and
with the default settings in the PLC Setup,
both reading and writing are disabled.
Leaving CX-Programmer Connected Constantly to RS-232C Port
With a Duplex CPU Systems, communications will become possible if the CXProgrammer is left connected constantly only to the active CPU Unit, and an
operation switching error occurs causing the active CPU Unit to become the
standby CPU Unit.
For that reason, if the CX-Programmer is to be left connected, or if it is preferable to not have to reconnect the cable to the other CPU Unit when a switching error occurs, it is recommended that the following connection be used. For
this, it is required that the Standby CPU Unit RS-232C Port Setting in the PLC
79
Section 2-6
Programming Devices
Setup be set so that independent communications are disabled (i.e., the
default setting).
Active CPU Unit
Standby CPU Unit
CX-Programmer
RUN
ER R /A LM
CS
C S D P L01
D PLSTATU S
A C T IV E
R
C PU STATU S
A C T IV E
L
C PU STATU S
IN H B K U P
PRPH
CS
RUN
ER R /A LM
IN H B K U P
P R P HC O M M
R IG H T C P U
N O U SE
LEFT C P U
U SE
N O U SE
M O DE
ON
O N O FF
SP L D P L
A C T. A C T.
LEFT R IG H T
IN IT .
SW
COM M
PRPHL
A 39512
R SV
ON
RS-422A/485 (See note a.)
CJ1W-CIF11 R422A
Conversion Adapter or
NT-AL001 Link Adapter
(See note b.)
RS-422A/485 (See note a.)
RS-232C
+5 V
NT-AL001 Link Adapter
Termination resistance ON
+5 V must be provided to the Link
Adapter on the side that connects
to the personal computer.
Note a) Use shielded twisted-pair cable for the RS422A/RS-485 cable.
Model
CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2
Manufacturer
Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.
b) The CJ1W-CIF11 does not provide isolation. The total length of
the transmission path must therefore be 50 m or less. If the transmission distance is greater than 50 m, use the NT-AL001, which
provides isolation, and do not include the CJ1W-CIF11 in the
transmission path. When only the NT-AL001 is used, the total
length of the transmission path can be a maximum of 500 m.
80
Section 2-6
Programming Devices
Leaving a PT or Host Computer Connected Constantly to RS-232C Port
If a PT (Programmable Terminal) or host computer (running SCADA software)
is left connected constantly for monitoring a Duplex CPU System, and if the
connection is only to the active CPU Unit, then writing will become impossible
when an operation switching error occurs and the active CPU Unit becomes
the standby CPU Unit.
For that reason, it is recommended that the following connection be used. For
this, it is required that the Standby CPU Unit RS-232C Port Setting in the PLC
Setup be set so that independent communications are disabled (i.e., the
default setting).
PT Connection Example
In this example, communications between the CPU Unit and the PT are continued even after an operation switching error occurs.
Active CPU Unit
Standby CPU Unit
RUN
ER R /A LM
CS
C S D P L01
D PLSTATU S
A C T IV E
R
C PU STATU S
A C T IV E
L
C PU STATU S
CS
RUN
ER R /A LM
IN H B K U P
IN H B K U P
P R P HC O M M
P R P HC O M M
PT
R IG H T C P U
N O U SE
LEFT C P U
U SE
N O U SE
M O DE
ON
O N O FF
SP L D P L
A C T. A C T.
LEFT R IG H T
IN IT .
SW
COM M
PRPHL
A 39512
R SV
ON
RS-422A/485 (See note a.)
CJ1W-CIF11 R422A
Conversion Adapter or
NT-AL001 Link Adapter
(See note b.)
NS-AL002 RS-232C/RS-422A
Conversion Adapter for NS
Series
RS-422A/485 (See note a.)
Note a) Use shielded twisted-pair cable for the RS422A/RS-485 cable.
Model
CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2
Manufacturer
Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.
b) The CJ1W-CIF11 does not provide isolation. The total length of
the transmission path must therefore be 50 m or less. If the transmission distance is greater than 50 m, use the NT-AL001, which
provides isolation, and do not include the CJ1W-CIF11 in the
transmission path. When only the NT-AL001 is used, the total
length of the transmission path can be a maximum of 500 m.
Note
1. The above Conversion Adapter is not required for the RS-422A/RS-485
port at the PT.
2. When the CPU Units are switched, communications may be momentarily
interrupted, so enable communications retries in the PT communications
settings.
81
Section 2-7
Power Supply Units
Personal Computer Connection Example
In this example, communications between the CPU Unit and the personal
computer are continued even after an operation switching error occurs.
Active CPU Unit
Standby CPU Unit
Personal computer
RUN
ER R /A LM
CS
C S D P L01
D PLSTATU S
A C T IV E
R
C PU STATU S
A C T IV E
L
C PU STATU S
CS
RUN
ER R /A LM
IN H B K U P
IN H B K U P
P R P HC O M M
P R P HC O M M
R IG H T C P U
N O U SE
LEFT C P U
U SE
N O U SE
M O DE
ON
O N O FF
SP L D P L
A C T. A C T.
LEFT R IG H T
IN IT .
SW
COM M
PRPHL
A 39512
R SV
CJ1W-CIF11 R422A
Conversion Adapter or
NT-AL001 Link Adapter
(See note b.)
ON
RS-422A/485 (See note a.)
RS-422A/485 (See note a.)
RS-232C
+5 V
NT-AL001 Link Adapter
Termination resistance ON
+5 V must be provided to the
Link Adapter on the side that
connects to the personal
computer.
Note a) Use shielded twisted-pair cable for the RS422A/RS-485 cable.
Model
CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2
Manufacturer
Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.
b) The CJ1W-CIF11 does not provide isolation. The total length of
the transmission path must therefore be 50 m or less. If the transmission distance is greater than 50 m, use the NT-AL001, which
provides isolation, and do not include the CJ1W-CIF11 in the
transmission path. When only the NT-AL001 is used, the total
length of the transmission path can be a maximum of 500 m.
Note When the CPU Units are switched, communications may be momentarily
interrupted, so enable communications retries in the personal computer
(SCADA software, etc.) communications settings.
2-7
2-7-1
Power Supply Units
Duplex Power Supply Units
In a CS1D Duplex System, a duplex power supply can be configured by
mounting a pair of CS1D Power Supply Units on the CPU Rack, an Expansion
Rack, or Long-distance Expansion Rack.
With a duplex power supply, the Backplane’s 5-V DC/26-V DC power supply is
provided from the two CS1D Power Supply Units. Therefore the load per
CS1D Power Supply Unit is approximately 50%.
If there is a breakdown at one of the CS1D Power Supply Units, operation is
continued by using only the other one. In that event, the load at the one
remaining CS1D Power Supply Unit will increase to 100%. (See note 1.) At
the same time, A31602 (duplex power supply error) will turn ON.
Errors at Power Supply Units mounted on any Rack can be checked by means
of A31900 to A31915 (for 5-V/26-V output errors) or A32000 to A32015 (for
primary-side input voltage errors).
Note Even if duplex Power Supply Units are to be used, take into account the
effects if an error occurs at one of the Power Supply Units and calculate the
82
Section 2-7
Power Supply Units
current consumption under the condition of one Power Supply Unit. If two different kinds of Power Supply Units are to be used, calculate the current consumption using the output of the smaller-capacity Power Supply Unit.
2-7-2
CS1D Power Supply Unit Models
Power supply
voltage
100 to 120 V AC, or
200 to 240 V AC
(Switched with short
bar for voltage
switching terminals.)
24 V DC
24 V DC
Power supply
output capacity
Power supply
output terminals
RUN output
Model
Weight
5 V DC, 7 A
26 V DC, 1.3 A
Total: 35 W
No
Yes
CS1D-PA207R
1,000 g max.
5 V DC, 4.3 A
26 V DC, 0.56 A
Total: 28 W
5 V DC, 5.3 A
26 V DC, 1.3 A
Total: 40 W
No
No
CS1D-PD024
550 g max.
No
No
CS1D-PD025
630 g max.
Note Use the above Duplex Power Supply Units in a CS1D System. The [email protected]@@@ is for the CS Series and C200H, and cannot be used with the CS1D.
2-7-3
Components and Switch Settings
POWER
POWER indicator
Lit when there is a 5-V output
from the Power Supply Unit.
PA207R
CS1D-PA207R
L2/N
CS1D-PD024/025
+
L2/N
AC100V-120V/
AC200-240V/
INPUT
100 to 120 VAC/
200 to 240 VAC/
INPUT
AC input
L1
DC input
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
Terminals for external
connections
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
Voltage selector
(See note.)
100 to 200
CLOSE
200 to 240
OPEN
LG
LG
GR
GR
RUN
output
24 VDC
-
L1
RUN
OUTPUT
240 VAC
24 VDC
2A RESISTIVE
Note For 100 to 120 V AC: Close (short circuit)
For 200 to 240 V AC: Open
Always remove the metal jumper before applying a voltage of 200 to 240 V
AC. Not doing so will damage the Unit.
AC Input
Either a power supply of 100 to 120 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 200 to 240 V AC
(50/60 Hz) can be selected.
Voltage Selector
Before applying a voltage of 100 to 120 V AC, close the circuit using the metal
jumper.
!Caution Always remove the metal jumper before applying a voltage of 200 to 240 V
AC. Otherwise, the Unit will be damaged.
LG
Ground to a resistance of 100 Ω or less to increase noise resistance and
avoid electric shock.
83
Section 2-7
Power Supply Units
GR
Ground to a resistance of 100 Ω or less to avoid electric shock.
RUN Output
An internal contact turns ON when the CPU Unit is operating in RUN or MONITOR mode. Any of the RUN outputs at the CPU Rack, an Expansion Rack, or
a Long-distance Rack can be used. When Power Supply Units are used in
duplex operation, the RUN output turns ON for both Power Supply Units
together.
Contact configuration
Switching capacity
DC Input
2-7-4
SPST-NO
240 V AC, 2 A (resistive load)
120 V AC, 0.5 A (induction load)
24 V DC, 2 A (resistive load)
24 V DC, 2 A (induction load)
DC input power (24 V DC) is supplied.
Dimensions
CS1D-PA207R
CS1D-PD025
POWER
PA207R
130
58
130
152.3
CS1D-PD024
PD024
POWER
130
54
100
105.2
84
22.3 (Backplane)
Section 2-8
Backplanes
2-8
2-8-1
Backplanes
CPU Backplanes
Model
Model
CS1D-BC042D
Number of slots
Application
3 to 5
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion Systems
CS1D-BC052
5
CS1D-BC082S
8
Weight
1,600 g max.
Duplex CPU, Single I/O 1,600 g max.
Expansion Systems
Single CPU Systems
1,600 g max.
Nomenclature and Functions
CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems: CS1D-BC042D
Slots for mounting Units
Slots for both
Expansion Units
and I/O Units
CPU Unit connectors (two)
Unit connectors
Duplex Unit
connector (one)
Backplane mounting screws
(Four M4 screws)
Power Supply Unit
connectors (two)
CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion Systems: CS1D-BC052
Slots for mounting Units
CPU Unit connectors
Backplane mounting screws
Mount the Backplane with four M4 screws.
The Backplane is constructed so that it can
be insulated from the control panel when
installed.
Power Supply Unit connectors (two)
Unit connectors
Duplex Unit connector (one)
When connecting a CS1D Long-distance Expansion
Rack, mount a CS1W-IC102 I/O Control Unit.
I/O Connecting Cable connector
For connecting CS1D Expansion Racks.
C200H Expansion I/O Racks and CS-series
Expansion Racks cannot be connected.
Note Backplanes produced from July 2005 have screw holes that allow an Expansion Rack Cable Mounting Bracket to be attached to secure the cable.
85
Section 2-8
Backplanes
CPU Backplane for Single CPU Systems: CS1D-BC082S
Slots for mounting
CS-series Units
Connecting Cable connector
CS-series Unit connectors
6.25
Backplane mounting screws
Power Supply Unit connectors (two)
CPU Unit for Single CPU
Systems connectors
Note To protect unused connectors, always cover them with CV500-COV01 I/O Unit
Connector Covers (sold separately) or mount the CS1W-SP001 Spacer Unit
(sold separately). When using only one Power Supply Unit, cover the unused
Power Supply Unit connector with a C500-COV01 Power Supply Unit Connector Covers (sold separately).
Name
I/O Unit Connector Cover
I/O Unit Spacer Unit
Power Supply Unit Connector Cover
Power Supply Unit Spacer Cover (same shape as
PA207R)
Model
CV500-COV01
CS1W-SP001
C500-COV01
CS1D-SP001
Power Supply Unit Spacer Cover (same shape as
PD024)
CS1D-SP002
Dimensions
CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems: CS1D-BC042D
6.25
118
130
131.9
6
505.1
491
17.1
5.9
5.2
86
Section 2-8
Backplanes
118
130
299
6
35
2.1
CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion Systems: CS1D-BC052
5.2
6.25
491
17.1
505.1
26.8
CPU Backplane for Single CPU Systems: CS1D-BC082S
505.1
491
118
130
131.9
6
6.25
17.1
26.8
2-8-2
5.9
5.2
Expansion Backplanes for Online Replacement
These Backplanes are used for CS1D Expansion Racks and CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks.
Model
Number of slots
7 or 8
Model
CS1D-BI082D
9
CS1D-BI092
Application
Weight
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O 1,600 g max.
Expansion System
Duplex CPU, Single I/O 1,600 g max.
Expansion System
Nomenclature
Backplane for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems: CS1D-BI082D
Slots for mounting Units
Slot for Expansion
Unit only
Slot for either Expansion Unit
or I/O Unit
Backplane mounting screws
(Four M4 screws)
Unit connectors
Power Supply Unit
connectors (two)
87
Section 2-8
Backplanes
CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion Systems or Single CPU Systems: CS1D-BI092
Slots for mounting Units
Backplane mounting screws
Mount the Backplane with four M4 screws.
The Backplane is constructed so that it can
be insulated from the control panel when
installed.
Unit connectors
Power Supply Unit connectors (two)
When connecting a Long-distance Expansion
Rack, mount a CS1W-II102 I/O Interface Unit.
I/O Connecting Cable connector
For connecting CS1D Expansion Racks.
I/O Connecting Cable connector
For connecting CS1D Expansion Racks.
Note
1. Backplanes produced from July 2005 have screw holes that allow an Expansion Rack Cable Mounting Bracket to be attached to secure the cable.
2. To protect unused connectors, always cover them with CV500-COV01 I/O
Unit Connector Covers (sold separately) or mount the CS1W-SP001 Spacer Unit (sold separately). When using only one Power Supply Unit, cover
the unused Power Supply Unit connector with a C500-COV01 Power Supply Unit Connector Covers (sold separately).
Name
I/O Unit Connector Cover
I/O Unit Spacer Unit
Power Supply Unit Connector Cover
Power Supply Unit Spacer Cover (same shape as
PA207R)
Model
CV500-COV01
CS1W-SP001
C500-COV01
CS1D-SP001
Power Supply Unit Spacer Cover (same shape as
PD024)
CS1D-SP002
Dimensions
Backplane for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems: CS1D-BI082D
6.25
118
130
131.9
6
505.1
491
17.1
5.9
5.2
88
Section 2-9
Units for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems
118
130
111
6
35
2.1
CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion Systems or Single CPU Systems: CS1D-BI092
6.25
491
26.8
505.1
2-9
5.2
17.1
Units for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems
CS1D I/O Control Units and CS1D I/O Interface Units are required to construct a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System.
2-9-1
CS1D-IC102D I/O Control Unit
Mount the CS1D-IC102D I/O Control Units in the CS1D CPU Rack.
Note The CS1D-IC102D I/O Control Unit cannot be used in a Duplex CPU Single
I/O Expansion System or Single CPU System.
Nomenclature and Functions
LED Indicators
Connector to CS1D
I/O Interface Unit's
IN Connector
LED Indicators
Indicator
RDY (Green)
CABLE ERR L (Red)
END RACK (Yellow)
Status
Meaning
ON (lit)
Operating normally.
OFF (not lit) • PLC error
• Error in connected Expansion Rack
• There is only a CPU Rack.
ON (lit)
Error in connected Expansion Rack
OFF (not lit) Operating normally.
ON (lit)
There is only a CPU Rack (no Expansion
Rack).
OFF (not lit) There is an Expansion Rack.
89
Section 2-9
Units for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems
52.6
130
Dimensions (mm)
12.5
3.8
100.5
34.5
Connecting the Units
Mount the CS1D I/O Control Unit in either slot 0 or slot 1 (or mount two Units
in both slots) of the CS1D-BC042D CPU Backplane.
If CS1D I/O Control Units are mounted in slot 0 and slot 1, the Connecting
Cables can be duplexed.
CS1D-IC102D I/O Control Units
Slot 0 Slot 1
CS1D CPU Rack
[email protected]@3 CS-series Connecting Cables
Note: Use cables of the same length.
Duplex Connecting Cables
connect to next Rack.
Note
1. When using duplex Connecting Cables, always use cables that are the
same length.
2. Do not connect separate Expansion Backplane systems with the two Connecting Cables. Connecting two Expansion Backplane systems will cause
improper operation.
Correct
Incorrect
Separate Expansion Backplanes
cannot be connected.
If a CS1D I/O Control Unit is mounted in slot 0 only, a Basic I/O Unit, Special
I/O Unit, or CPU Bus Unit can be mounted in slot 1.
90
Section 2-9
Units for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems
CS1D-IC102D I/O Control Unit
Slot 0
CS1D CPU Rack
Slot 1
A CS-series Basic I/O Unit, Special I/O Unit,
or CPU Bus Unit can be mounted.
Single Connecting
Cable connects to
next Rack.
If a CS1D I/O Control Unit is mounted in slot 1 only, a Basic I/O Unit, Special
I/O Unit, or CPU Bus Unit cannot used in slot 0.
If mounted here, a CS-series
Basic I/O Unit, Special I/O Unit, or
CPU Bus Unit will not operate.
CS1D-IC102D I/O Control Unit
Slot 0 Slot 1
CS1D CPU Rack
Single Connecting Cable
connects to next Rack.
2-9-2
CS1D-II102D I/O Interface Unit
Mount the CS1D-II102D I/O Interface Units in the CS1D Expansion Racks.
Note The CS1D-II102D I/O Interface Units cannot be used in a Duplex CPU Single
I/O Expansion System or Single CPU System.
Nomenclature and Functions
II102D
CS
LED Indicators
OUT IN
OUT Expansion Connector
(to next Rack)
IN Expansion Connector
(to following Rack)
91
Section 2-9
Units for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems
LED Indicators
Indicator
RDY (Green)
Status
Meaning
ON (lit)
Operating normally.
OFF (not lit) • PLC error
• Error in Expansion Rack connection
ON (lit)
Error in lower (OUT) Expansion Rack connection
OFF (not lit) Operating normally.
ON (lit)
Error in higher (IN) Expansion Rack connection
OFF (not lit) Operating normally.
ON (lit)
The Rack is the last Rack. (No lower Expansion Rack
is connected.)
OFF (not lit) There is a lower Expansion Rack connected.
CABLE ERR L
(Red)
CABLE ERR R
(Red)
END RACK
(Yellow)
52.6
130
Dimensions (mm)
12.5
25.6
34.5
Connecting the Units
3.8
100.5
Mount the CS1D I/O Interface Unit in either slot 0 or slot 1 (or mount Units in
both slots) of the CS1D-BI082D Expansion Backplane.
If CS1D I/O Interface Units are mounted in slot 0 and slot 1, the Connecting
Cables can be duplexed.
Duplex Connecting Cables
connect to previous Rack.
Slot 0 Slot 1
CS1D-II102D I/O Interface Units
CS1D Expansion Rack
[email protected]@3 CS-series Connecting Cables
Note: Use cables of the same length.
Duplex Connecting Cables
connect to next Rack.
Note
92
1. When using duplex Connecting Cables, always use cables that are the
same length.
Section 2-9
Units for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems
2. Do not connect separate Expansion Backplane systems with the two Connecting Cables. Connecting two Expansion Backplane systems will cause
improper operation.
Correct
Incorrect
Separate Expansion Backplanes
cannot be connected.
If a CS1D I/O Interface Unit is mounted in slot 0 only, a Basic I/O Unit, Special
I/O Unit, or CPU Bus Unit can be used in slot 1.
Single Connecting Cable
connects to previous Rack.
CS1D-II102D I/O Interface Unit
Slot 0
CS1D Expansion Rack
Slot 1
A CS-series Basic I/O Unit, Special I/O Unit,
or CPU Bus Unit can be mounted.
Single Connecting Cable
connects to next Rack.
If a CS1D I/O Interface Unit is mounted in slot 1 only, a Basic I/O Unit, Special
I/O Unit, or CPU Bus Unit cannot be mounted in slot 0.
Single Connecting Cable
connects to previous Rack.
CS1D-II102D I/O Interface Unit
Slot 0
CS1D Expansion Rack
Slot 1
If mounted, a CS-series Basic
I/O Unit, Special I/O Unit, or
CPU Bus Unit will not operate.
Single Connecting Cable
connects to next Rack.
93
Section 2-10
Units on CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks
2-10 Units on CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks
I/O Control Units and I/O Interface Units are required when creating CS1D
Long-distance Expansion Racks. Terminators (CV500-TER01) are connected
to the last CS1D Long-distance Expansion Rack in each series. (Up to two
series of CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks can be connected.)
2-10-1 CS1W-IC102 I/O Control Units
When connecting Expansion Racks, connect an I/O Control Unit to the leftmost slot on the CPU Rack.
Part Names and Functions
IC102
CS
RDY
TERM ERR
Indicators
OUT A OUT B
Connector to Backplane
Connector to I/O Interface
Unit of series A
Connector to I/O Interface
Unit of series B
Indicators
Indicator
RDY (green)
TERM ERR
(red)
94
Status
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Meaning
Operating normally.
Bus error
Terminator missing
Terminator connected.
Section 2-10
Units on CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks
Dimensions and Weight
190
IC102
123
CS
RDY
TERM ERR
OUT A OUT B
130
236.5
34.5
Backplane
Weight: 300 g max. (including cable to Backplane)
Connection Method
Note Connect a Terminator (CV500-TER01) to the unused connector when connecting only series A or series B.
When Mounting to CPU Rack
Connect the Backplane connector to the I/O expansion connector.
IC102
CS
RDY
TER ERR
LEFT CPU
RIGHT CPU
Connect to I/O
cable connector.
DPL SW
CPU Rack
ON
INIT.
SW
ON
DUPLEX
Series A
Series B
Note An I/O Control Unit cannot be mounted on an Expansion Backplane.
95
Section 2-10
Units on CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks
2-10-2 CS1W-II102 I/O Interface Units
Mount a CS1W-II102 I/O Interface Unit to the leftmost slot on each Long-distance Expansion Rack. Always use a CS1D-BI092 Expansion Backplane (for
online replacement).
Part Names and Functions
II102
CS
RDY
IN
Indicator
OUT
Connector to
Backplane
IN expansion connector
(to previous Rack)
OUT expansion connector
(to following Rack)
Indicator
Indicator
RDY (green)
Status
Meaning
ON
Operating normally
OFF
Bus error (bus reset) or system error
Dimensions and Weight
190
II102
123
CS
RDY
130
34.5
Weight: 300 max. (including connector to Backplane)
96
236.5
Backplane
Section 2-10
Units on CS1D Long-distance Expansion Racks
Connection Method
Connect the I/O Interface Unit to the input I/O cable connector on the Backplane (left side). Always connect a Terminator (CV500-TER01) to the connector for the next Rack when it is not used (i.e., on the last Long-distance
Expansion Rack in the series).
To the previous Rack
(I/O Control Unit or
I/O Interface Unit)
IC102
CS
RDY
TER ERR
CS1 Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
To the next Rack
(I/O Interface Unit)
CV500-TER01 Terminator
Connect a Terminator when not used.
Two Terminators are provided with an I/O Control Unit.
12
37
68
Weight: 50 g max.
Long-distance Expansion
Cable
Use CV-series Expansion Cable for long-distance expansion cable.
Model number
CVM1-CN312
CVM1-CN612
CVM1-CN122
CVM1-CN222
CVM1-CN322
CVM1-CN522
CVM1-CN132
CVM1-CN232
CVM1-CN332
CVM1-CN432
CVM1-CN532
Length
0.3 m
0.6 m
1m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
20 m
30 m
40 m
50 m
97
Section 2-11
Basic I/O Units
2-11 Basic I/O Units
2-11-1 CS-series Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks
Basic Input Units
(with terminal
blocks)
Name
AC Input Units
Basic Output Units
(with terminal
blocks)
DC Input Units
Interrupt Input Units
Specifications
100 to 120 V AC, 100 to 120 V DC, 16 inputs
200 to 240 V AC, 16 inputs
24 V DC, 16 inputs
24 V DC, 16 inputs
Model
CS1W-IA111
CS1W-IA211
CS1W-ID211
CS1W-INT01
(See note 2.)
CS1W-IDP01
Page
463
463
464
466
CS1W-OC201
473
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., 0.1 A at
CS1W-OC211
120 V DC, 16 outputs
1.2 A at 250 V AC max., 8 outputs, with fuse CS1W-OA201
burnout detection circuit
472
0.5 A at 250 V AC max., 16 outputs
0.5 A at 12 to 24 V DC, 16 outputs
CS1W-OA211
CS1W-OD211
474
476
0.5 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protection, 16 outputs
CS1W-OD212
481
High-speed Input
Unit
24 V DC, 16 inputs
Relay Output Units
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., 0.1 A at
120 V DC, independent contacts, 8 outputs
Triac Output Units
Transistor Output
Units, Sinking
Transistor Output
Units, Sourcing
Note
467
475
1. C200H I/O Units cannot be used.
2. An Interrupt Input Unit can be used to input interrupts for a Single CPU
System. With a Duplex CPU System, however, interrupt inputs cannot be
used, i.e., the Interrupt Input Unit will function only as a standard Input Unit.
Optional Product
Name
CS-series Special I/O Unit Connector
Cover
98
Specifications
For protecting unused
connectors on Backplane.
Model
CV500-COV01
Section 2-11
Basic I/O Units
Components and Switch Settings
CS-series Basic Input Units (20-pin Terminal Block)
Unit mounting hooks
Hooked onto Backplane to mount Unit.
CS
ERR
0 1 2
3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10
11 12 13
14 15
I/O indicator
Model label
Terminal block
connector
(20-pin)
16-point Unit
CS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
8-point Unit
CS
20-pin terminal block
CS1W-ID211
CS
ER R
CS1W-INT01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CS1W-IDP01
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CS1W-OD211
CS1W-IA111
CS1W-IA211
CS1W-OC211
CS1W-OA211
CS1W-OC201
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CS
ER R
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
16-point Units
with ERR indicator (load short-circuit)
CS1W-OD212
8-point Units
with ERR indicator (fuse burnout)
CS1W-OA201
Dimensions
CS-series Basic I/O Units (20-pin Terminal Blocks)
CS
Backplane
CS1W-IA111
CS1W-IA211
CS1W-ID211
CS1W-INT01
CS1W-IDP01
CS1W-OD211
CS1W-OD212
CS1W-OA201
CS1W-OA211
CS1W-OC201
CS1W-OC211
130
35
124
147
Terminal Dimensions
6.6
M3.5
7.2
8.4
99
Section 2-11
Basic I/O Units
2-11-2 Interrupt Input Units
An Interrupt Input Unit can be used to input interrupts for a Single CPU System. With a Duplex CPU System, however, interrupt inputs cannot be used,
i.e., the Interrupt Input Unit will function only as a standard 16-point Input Unit.
Model
Model
Specifications
CS1W-INT01
24 V DC 16 inputs
No. of Units mountable
Reference
to CPU Rack
2 max.
466
C200H Interrupt Input Units cannot be used.
Dimensions
CS1W-INT01
20-pin terminal block
Backplane
CS
130
35
124
147
2-11-3 High-speed Input Units
Functions
The CS1W-IDP01 High-speed Input Unit enables inputting pulse signals that
are shorted than the cycle time of the CPU Unit.
High-speed Inputs Units
Model
CS1W-IDP01
Name
High-speed Input Unit
Specifications
24 V DC, 16 inputs
C200H Input Units cannot be used.
Components
Input indicators
CS
ERR
0 1 2
3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10
11 12 13
14 15
CS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
100
Reference
467
Section 2-11
Basic I/O Units
Input Signal Width
High-speed input signals must meet the following conditions for the ON time.
ON OFF
Model
CS1W-IDP01
Dimensions
ON time
0.1 ms min.
The High-speed Input Unit has the same dimensions as the Units with a 20terminal block.
2-11-4 CS-series Basic I/O Units with Connectors
(32-, 64-, and 96-pt Units)
CS-series Basic I/O Units are classified as Basic I/O Units.
Name
DC Input Unit
Transistor Output
Unit, Sinking
Transistor Output
Unit, Sourcing
Specifications
24 V DC, 32 inputs
24 V DC, 64 inputs
24 V DC, 96 inputs
0.5 A at 12 to 24 V DC, 32 outputs
0.3 A at 12 to 24 V DC, 64 outputs
0.1 A at 12 to 24 V DC, with fuse
burnout detection circuit, 96 outputs
0.5 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit
protection, 32 outputs
Model
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-ID291
CS1W-OD231
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD291
Page
468
469
470
477
478
479
CS1W-OD232 482
0.3 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit CS1W-OD262 484
protection, 64 outputs
0.1 A at 24 V DC, with fuse burnout CS1W-OD292 485
detection circuit, 96 outputs
DC Input/Transistor 24 V DC input, 0.3 A output at 12
Output Unit, Sinking to 24 V DC, 32 inputs/32 outputs
24 V DC input, 0.1 A output at 12
to 24 V DC, with fuse burnout
detection circuit, 48 inputs/48 outputs
DC Input/Transistor
Output Unit, Sourcing
TTL I/O Unit
CS1W-MD261 487
CS1W-MD291 489
24 V DC input, 0.3 A output at 24 V CS1W-MD262 491
DC, load short-circuit protection,
32 inputs/32 outputs
24 V DC input, 0.1 A output at 24 V CS1W-MD292 493
DC, with fuse burnout detection circuit, 48 inputs/48 outputs
3.5 mA input at 5 V DC, 35 mA out- CS1W-MD561 495
put at 5 V DC, 32 inputs/32 outputs
Note Immediate refreshing is possible for the CS-series Basic I/O Units (with 32-,
64-, and 96-point connectors) using the IORF instruction.
101
Section 2-11
Basic I/O Units
Unit mounting hooks
Hooked onto Backplane to mount Unit.
Model label
CH
I/O indicators
0123
4567
1 CH
10CH 0 2 4
1 3 5
29
56-pin I/O wiring
connectors × 2
Display Switch for
64-point I/O Units
I CH
II CH
0
1
2
3
DISPLAY
1
CN1
CN2
Display switch
1
29
B
A
A
Unit lock notch
(Attach Unit to Backplane and fix securely)
32-point Units
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-OD231
Area 1
Area 2
B
32-point Units with ERR indicator
(load short-circuit indicator)
CS1W-OD232
CS
CS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
I CH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
IICH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
IICH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
64-point Units
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-MD261
CS
ERR
I CH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
I CH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
IICH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
IICH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
96-point Units
CS1W-ID291/OD291/OD292/MD291/MD292
CS
ERR
102
I CH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
IICH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DISPLAY
Display switch (3-level selection)
Display switch
Area 1
Area 2
64-point Units with ERR indicator
(load short-circuit indicator)
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD262
CS
2, 3
m+2
m+3
Display Switch for
96-point I/O Units
I1CH
0 2 4
II CH
1 3 5
ERR
I CH
0, 1
m
m+1
F (fuse burnt out) indicator
Available on Output Units.
Lights when one or more fuses in the Unit blows.
Lights when external power is OFF.
0, 1
m
m+1
2, 3
m+2
m+3
4, 5
m+4
m+5
Section 2-11
Basic I/O Units
Dimensions
130
35
130
35
101
35
Using Soldered or Crimped Connector
Backplane
Units with 56-pin
connectors (c)
CS1W-ID291
CS1W-OD291
CS1W-OD292
CS1W-MD291
CS1W-MD292
130
(c)
Indicator switch
Units with Two 40-pin
connectors (b)
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD262
(b)
Indicator switch
(a)
Units with One 40-pin
connector (a)
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-OD231
CS1W-OD232
123
Approx. 169 for 32- and 64-pt Units/Approx. 179 for 96-pt Units
103
Section 2-12
Unit Current Consumption
Backplane
Using Pressure-welded Connector
Connecting Cables:
[email protected]@@[email protected]@@[email protected]@@
[email protected]@@
123
150
2-12 Unit Current Consumption
There are fixed amounts of current and power that can be provided to the
Units on the Rack. Even when using only one Power Supply Unit, design the
system so that the total current consumption of Units on the Rack does not
exceed the values for the maximum Power Supply Unit current and the maximum total power.
Calculate the total current consumption under normal conditions (i.e., with
one Power Supply Unit mounted), taking into account the load when an error
occurs at one of the Power Supply Units. If two different kinds of Power Supply
Units are to be used, calculate the current consumption using the output of
the smaller-capacity Power Supply Unit.
Note When duplex Power Supply Units are used, the load for each CS1D Power
Supply Unit is reduced by approximately half.
2-12-1 CPU Rack and Expansion Racks
The maximum current and power provided for the CPU Rack and Expansion
Racks is shown below.
Note
1. CPU Rack: When making calculations, include the current and power consumption for a CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU System, a Duplex Unit, and
two CS1D Power Supply Units.
2. When making calculations, include the current and power consumption for
an Online Replacement Expansion Backplane.
Power Supply
Unit model
CS1D-PA207R
CS1D-PD024
CS1D-PD025
104
Maximum current provided
5-V (internal
26-V (relay
24-V (service
logic power
power
power
supply)
supply)
supply)
7A
4.3 A
5.3 A
1.3 A
0.56 A
1.3 A
None
None
None
Maximum
total
power
provided
35 W
28 W
40 W
Section 2-12
Unit Current Consumption
Note
1. When duplexing by combining the CS1D-PA207R and CS1D-PD024, design the total current consumption for all Units on the Rack to be within the
power supply capacity of the CS1D-PD024.
2. When duplexing by combining the CS1D-PA207R and CS1D-PD025, design the total current consumption for all Units on the Rack to be within the
power supply capacity for the CS1D-PA027R.
3. When duplexing by combining the CS1D-PD025 and CS1D-PD024, design the total current consumption for all Units on the Rack to be within the
power supply capacity for the CS1D-PD024.
2-12-2 Total Current and Power Consumption Calculation Example
Example 1: Mounting the Following Units on a CPU Rack with a CS1DPA207R Power Supply Unit
Item
Model
Quantity
CPU Backplane
for Duplex CPU
System (5 slots)
CS1D-BC052
1
Duplex Unit
CPU Unit
Input Unit
Output Unit
Special I/O Unit
CPU Bus Unit
Service power
supply
Current consumption
CS1D-DPL01
CS1D-CPU67H
CS1W-ID291
CS1W-OC221
CS1W-MAD44
CS1W-CLK21-V1
---
1
2
1
1
2
1
Calculation
Result
Power consump- Calculation
tion
Result
Voltage group
5-V
26-V
0.55 A
---
0.82 A
0.20 A
0.13 A
0.20 A
0.33 A
---
----0.096 A
0.20 A
-----
0.55 + 0.82 × 2
+ 0.20 + 0.13 +
0.20 × 2 + 0.33
0.096 + 0.20 × 2
3.25 A (≤7 A)
0.496 A (≤1.3 A)
3.25 A × 5 V =
0.496 A × 26 V
16.3 W
= 12.9 W
16.3 + 12.9 = 29.2 W (≤35 W)
Example 1: Mounting the Following Units on an Expansion Rack with a CS1DPA207R Power Supply Unit
Item
Model
Quantity
Online Replacement Expansion
Backplane
CS1D-BI092
1
0.28 A
Input Unit
Output Unit
CS1W-ID291
CS1W-OD291
2
7
0.20 A
0.48 A
Current consumption
Calculation
Result
Power consump- Calculation
tion
Result
Voltage group
5-V
26-V
---
-----
0.28 A + 0.20 A × 2 + --0.48 A × 7
4.04 A (≤7 A)
--4.04 A × 5 V = 20.2 W --20 2 W (≤35 W)
105
Section 2-12
Unit Current Consumption
2-12-3 Current Consumption Tables
Note For the current consumption of Units not shown in these tables, refer to the
individual user manuals for those Units.
5-V Voltage Group
Name
Model
Current consumption (A)
CPU Backplane for Single CPU Systems CS1D-BC082S 0.17
CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O CS1D-BC042D 1.2
Expansion Systems
Duplex Unit for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
CS1D-DPL02D 0.41
Expansion Systems
CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU, Single
Expansion I/O Systems
CS1D-BC052
Duplex Unit for Duplex CPU, Single
Expansion I/O Systems
CS1D CPU Units
Note The values shown on the right
include the current consumption
of a Programming Console. .
CS1D-DPL01
Online Replacement Expansion Backplane for Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems
Online Replacement Expansion Backplane for Duplex CPU, Single Expansion
I/O Systems or Single CPU Systems
CS1D I/O Control Unit
CS1D I/O Interface Unit
I/O Control Unit
I/O Interface Unit
0.55 (total for Backplane
and Duplex Unit)
CS1D-CPU67H 0.82 (See note.)
CS1D-CPU65H 0.82 (See note.)
CS1D-CPU42S 0.78 (See note.)
CS1D-CPU44S
CS1D-CPU65S
CS1D-CPU67S
CS1D-BC082D
0.78 (See note.)
0.82 (See note.)
0.82 (See note.)
1.21
CS1D-BI092
0.28
CS1W-IC102D
CS1W-II102D
CS1W-IC102
CS1W-II102
0.2
0.22
0.92
0.23
Note NT-AL001 Link Adapters consume an additional 0.15 A each when used.
Add 0.04 A for each CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter that is used.
Add 0.20 A for each [email protected] Programmable Terminal that is used.
Basic I/O Units
Name
DC Input Units
AC Input Unit
Interrupt Input Unit
High-speed Input Unit
Relay Output Unit
106
Model
CS1W-ID211
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-ID291
CS1W-IA111
CS1W-IA211
CS1W-INT01
CS1W-IDP01
CS1W-OC201
CS1W-OC211
Current consumption (A)
0.10
0.15
0.15
0.20
0.11
0.11
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.13
Section 2-12
Unit Current Consumption
Name
Transistor Output Unit
Triac Output Unit
DC Input/Transistor Output
Unit
TTL I/O Unit
Model
CS1W-OD211
CS1W-OD212
CS1W-OD231
CS1W-OD232
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-OD291
CS1W-OD292
CS1W-OA201
CS1W-OA211
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD262
CS1W-MD291
Current consumption (A)
0.17
0.17
0.27
0.27
0.39
0.39
0.48
0.48
0.23
0.41
0.27
0.27
0.35
CS1W-MD292
CS1W-MD561
0.35
0.27
CS-series Special I/O Units
Name
Analog I/O Unit
Analog Input Unit
Analog Output Unit
Isolated Thermocouple Input
Unit
Isolated Resistance Thermometer Input Unit
Model
CS1W-MAD44
CS1W-AD041-V1/081-V1
CS1W-DA041/08V/08C
CS1W-PTS01-V1
Current consumption (A)
0.20
0.12
0.13
0.15
CS1W-PTS02
0.15
Isolated Ni508Ω Resistance
Thermometer Input Unit
CS1W-PTS03
0.15
Isolated 2-wire Transmission
Device Input Unit
CS1W-PTW01
0.15
Isolated DC Input Unit
Isolated Control Output Unit
(Analog Output Unit)
Power Transducer Input Unit
DC Input Unit (100 mV)
CS1W-PDC01
CS1W-PMV01
0.15
0.15
CS1W-PTR01
CS1W-PTR02
0.15
0.15
Isolated Pulse Input Unit
Motion Control Units
CS1W-PPS01
CS1W-MC221(-V1)
0.20
0.6 (0.80 when connected
to a Teaching Box)
CS1W-MC421(-V1)
0.7 (1.00 when connected
to a Teaching Box)
CS1W-NC113
CS1W-NC133
CS1W-NC213
CS1W-NC233
CS1W-NC413
CS1W-NC433
CS1W-HIO01-V1
CS1W-HCP22-V1
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.36
0.36
0.60
0.80
CS1W-HCA22-V1
CS1W-GPI01
0.75
0.33
Position Control Units
Customizable Counter Units
GPIB Interface Unit
107
Section 2-13
CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity
CS-series CPU Bus Units
Name
Controller Link Unit
Serial Communications Units
SYSMAC LINK Unit
Ethernet Unit
DeviceNet Unit
Loop Control Unit
Model
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CS1W-CLK11
CS1W-CLK12-V1
CS1W-CLK52-V1
CS1W-SCU21-V1
CS1W-SLK21
CS1W-SLK11
CS1D-ETN21D
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
CS1W-DRM21-V1
CS1W-LC001
Current consumption (A)
0.33
0.47
0.58
0.65
0.30 (See note.)
0.48
0.47
0.38
0.38
0.40
0.40
0.29
0.36
Note NT-AL001 Link Adapters consume an additional 0.15 A each when used.
Add 0.04 A for each CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter that is used.
Add 0.20 A for each [email protected] Programmable Terminal that is used.
26-V Voltage Group
Name
Relay Output Units
Analog I/O Unit
Analog Input Unit
Model
CS1W-OC201
CS1W-OC211
CS1W-MAD44
CS1W-AD04V11/081-V1
Analog Output Unit
Current consumption (A)
0.006 per ON output point
0.006 per ON output point
0.20
0.10
CS1W-DA041/08V
CS1W-DA08C
Isolated Thermocouple Input Unit CS1W-PTS01-V1
Isolated Resistance Thermome- CS1W-PTS02
ter Input Unit
Isolated Ni508Ω Resistance
CS1W-PTS03
Thermometer Input Unit
0.18
0.25
0.15
0.15
Isolated 2-wire Transmission
Device Input Unit
CS1W-PTW01
0.16
Isolated DC Input Unit
Isolated Control Output Unit
(Analog Output Unit)
Power Transducer Input Unit
DC Input Unit (100 mV)
Isolated Pulse Input Unit
Customizable Counter Unit
CS1W-PDC01
CS1W-PMV01
0.15
0.16
CS1W-PTR01
CS1W-PTR02
CS1W-PPS01
CS1W-HCA22-V1
0.08
0.08
0.16
0.15
0.15
2-13 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity
Settings for most CPU Bus Units and Inner Boards are stored in the CPU Bus
Unit Setting Area in the CPU Unit. Refer to 8-22 Parameter Areas for details.
The CPU Bus Units are allocated the required number of words for settings
from this area.
There is a limit to the capacity of the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area of 10,752
bytes (10 Kbytes). The system must be designed so that the number of words
108
Section 2-14
I/O Table Settings
used in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area by all of the CPU Bus Units and the
Inner Board does not exceed this capacity. If the wrong combination of Units
is used, the capacity will be exceeded and either Units will operate from
default settings only or will not operate at all.
The following table shows the number of bytes required in the CPU Bus Unit
Setting Area by each Unit and the Inner Board. Any Unit or Inner Board with a
usage of “0” does not use the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area at all.
2-13-1 Memory Required for Units and Inner Boards
Classification
CS-series CPU
Bus Units
Name
Note
Memory
required (bytes)
512
Controller Link Unit
CS1W-CLK21/12/52V1
CS1W-CLK11
SYSMAC LINK Unit
CS1W-SLK21/11
512
Serial Communications Unit
Ethernet Unit
CS1W-SCU21
0
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-ETN01
CS1D-ETN21D
994
412
384
Duplex Ethernet Unit
(See note 2.)
Inner Boards
Model number
DeviceNet Unit
CS1W-DRM21-V1
Loop Control Unit
CS1W-LC001
Loop Control Board
CS1D-LCB05D
built into Process-control CPU Unit
(See note 3.)
0
0
0
Loop Control Board
(See note 4.)
CS1W-LCB01/02
0
Serial Communications Board
(See note 4.)
CS1W-SCB21-V1/41V1
0
1. Units that are allocated no bytes do not use the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area
at all.
2. When duplex Ethernet communications are used, twice the listed memory
will be required (i.e., memory will be required for two Units). With Duplex
Controller Link communications (CS1W-CLK12/52-V1), memory is required only for one Unit even though two Controller Link Units are mounted.
3. Only for Process-control CPU Units.
4. Only for Single CPU Systems.
2-14 I/O Table Settings
The following settings are used in the I/O tables on the CX-Programmer.
Note Refer to the CX-Programmer manual for Units not listed in the table.
109
Section 2-14
I/O Table Settings
2-14-1 Basic I/O Units
Name
AC Input Unit
TTL I/O Unit
Interrupt Input Unit
Model
CS1W-IA111
CS1W-IA211
CS1W-ID211
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-ID291
CS1W-MD561
CS1W-INT01
Unit type
16-point Input Unit
16-point Input Unit
16-point Input Unit
32-point Input Unit
64-point Input Unit
96-point Input Unit
64-point I/O Unit
16-point Interrupt Input
Unit
High-speed Input Unit
Contact Output Unit
CS1W-IDP01
CS1W-OC201
16-point Input Unit
16-point Output Unit
CS1W-OC211
CS1W-OA201
CS1W-OA211
CS1W-OD211/212
CS1W-OD231/232
16-point Output Unit
16-point Output Unit
16-point Output Unit
16-point Output Unit
32-point Output Unit
CS1W-OD261/262
CS1W-OD291/292
CS1W-MD261/262
CS1W-MD291/292
64-point Output Unit
96-point Output Unit
64-point I/O Unit
96-point I/O Unit
DC Input Unit
Triac Output Unit
Transistor Output Unit
DC Input/Transistor Output
Unit
Note
1. An I/O setting error will occur if Units are not set correctly.
2. An I/O verification error will occur if the number of input or output words is
set incorrectly.
110
Section 2-14
I/O Table Settings
2-14-2 CS-series Special I/O Units
Name
Model
Unit type
CS1W-MAD44
CS1W-AD041/081(-V1)
CS1W-DA041/08V/08C
CS1W-PTS01-V1/11
Other Special I/O Units
Other Special I/O Units
Other Special I/O Units
Other Special I/O Units
1
1
1
1
Allocated words
Inputs
Outputs
5
5
9
1
1
9
10
0
Isolated Resistance TherCS1W-PTS02/03/12
mometer Input Unit
Isolated Ni508Ω Resistance CS1W-PTS03
Thermometer Input Unit
Other Special I/O Units
1
10
0
Other Special I/O Units
1
10
0
Isolated 2-wire Transmission CS1W-PTW01
Device Input Unit
Other Special I/O Units
1
10
0
Isolated DC Input Unit
Isolated Control Output Unit
(Analog Output Unit)
Power Transducer Input Unit
DC Input Unit (100 mA)
Isolated Pulse Input Unit
Motion Control Units
CS1W-PDC01/11
CS1W-PTR01
Other Special I/O Units
Other Special I/O Units
1
1
10
10
0
0
CS1W-PTR02
CS1W-PMV01
CS1W-PPS01
CS1W-MC221(-V1)
CS1W-MC421(-V1)
CS1W-NC113/133
CS1W-NC213/233
CS1W-NC413/433
Other Special I/O Units
Other Special I/O Units
Other Special I/O Units
Other Special I/O Units
Other Special I/O Units
Other Special I/O Units
Other Special I/O Units
Other Special I/O Units
1
1
1
3
5
1
1
2
10
5
10
20
32
3
6
12
0
5
0
10
18
2
4
8
Other Special I/O Units
1
5
5
Other Special I/O Units
Other Special I/O Units
4
1
26
5
14
5
Analog I/O Unit
Analog Input Units
Analog Output Units
Isolated Thermocouple
Input Unit
Position Control Units
Customizable Counter Units CS1WHIO01/HCP22/HCA22V1
High-speed Counter Unit
CS1W-CT021/041
GPIB Interface Unit
CS1W-GPI01
Number of unit
numbers
Note A Special I/O setting error will occur if Units, the number of input, or the number of output words is set incorrectly.
111
Section 2-14
I/O Table Settings
2-14-3 CS-series CPU Bus Units
Name
Controller Link Units
Model
CS1W-CLK11
CS1W-CLK21/12/52-V1
Unit type
Controller Link Unit
Serial Communications Unit
CS1W-SCU21-V1
Ethernet Units
CS1D Ethernet Unit
CS1W-ETN01/11/21
CS1D-ETN21D
Serial Communications
Unit
Ethernet Unit
CS1D Ethernet Unit
(See note.)
NX Service Units
SYSMAC LINK Unit
DeviceNet Unit
FL-Net Units
PROFIBUS-DP Master Unit
Loop Control Unit
High-resolution Motion Control Unit
CS1W-NXS01/11
CS1W-SLK21
CS1W-DRM21-V1
CS1W-FLN01/02/12
CS1W-PRM21
CS1W-LC001
CS1W-MCH71
NX Service Unit
SYSMAC LINK Unit
DeviceNet Unit
FL-Net Unit
PROFIBUS Master Unit
Loop Control Unit
High Function Numerical
Control Unit
Open Network Controllers
ITNC-EIS/EIX-CST
ONC/CS1 Bus IF
ITBC-CST01
Note Supported from CS-Programmer version 4.0 or higher.
112
SECTION 3
Duplex Functions
This section describes the basic operation of a Duplex System.
3-1
Duplex CPU Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
3-1-1
Duplex CPU Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
3-1-2
Errors Causing Operation to Switch to the Standby CPU Unit . . . .
117
3-1-3
Duplex Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
3-1-4
Automatic Recovery to Duplex Operation by Self-diagnosis . . . . .
120
3-1-5
Duplex Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
3-1-6
Duplex CPU Units with Different Unit Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
3-1-7
Duplex CPU System Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
3-2
Duplex Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
3-3
Duplex Communications Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
3-3-1
Active and Standby Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
3-3-2
Primary and Secondary Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
Duplex Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
3-4
113
Section 3-1
Duplex CPU Units
3-1
3-1-1
Duplex CPU Units
Duplex CPU Systems
A Duplex CPU System consists of two CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems
and one Duplex Unit mounted to a CS1D Backplane for Duplex CPU Systems.
Note
1. A Duplex CPU System must be used for Duplex CPU Unit operation. Duplex CPU Units cannot be used in a Single CPU Systems.
2. Inner Boards cannot be mounted in CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems.
The only Inner Boards that can be used for Duplex CPU Systems is the
CS1D-LCP05D built into the [email protected]@P Process-control CPU Units.
3. Memory Card functions can be executed in duplex only when the doing so
is enabled in the PLC Setup. No processing, however, is executed during
duplex initialization to match the data on the Memory Cards mounted in the
active and standby CPU Units. Therefore, before enabling duplex operation for Memory Cards, make sure that the contents and the capacities are
the same for both of the Memory Cards. If the free space or the contents
are different, write processing to the Memory Cards may not be completely
correctly.
4. EM file memory is configured in duplex between the two CPU Units.
Duplex Unit
CS1D Power Supply Units
CPU Units for
Duplex CPU Systems
RUN
ER R /A LM
CS
C S D P L01
D PLSTATU S
A C T IV E
R
C PU STATU S
A C T IV E
L
C PU STATU S
IN H B K U P
PRPH
CS
RUN
ER R /A LM
IN H B K U P
P R P HC O M M
R IG H T C P U
N O U SE
LEFT C P U
U SE
N O U SE
M O DE
ON
ON
SPL
O FF
DPL
A C T. A C T.
LEFT R IG H T
IN IT .
SW
COM M
PRPHL
A 39512
R SV
ON
Duplex CPU Units
Two Modes in a
Duplex CPU System
Duplex Power Supply Units
A Duplex CPU System can be operated in either Duplex Mode or Simplex
Mode.
Duplex Mode
In Duplex Mode, two CPU Units (active and standby) operate
in a duplex configuration. When an error causing operation to
switch to the standby occurs, the standby CPU Unit automatically switches to active status.
Simplex Mode
In Simplex Mode, a single CPU Unit controls operations independently. The Duplex System goes into Simplex Mode either
as a result of an error causing operation to switch to the
standby while in Duplex Mode or when Simplex Mode is
selected using the Mode Setting Switch.
• The mode can be toggled between Duplex Mode and Simplex Mode by
means of the Mode Setting Switch on the Duplex Unit.
• The present mode status is displayed by the DPL STATUS indicator on
the Duplex Unit (green flashing: Duplex Mode; OFF: Simplex Mode). It
can also be checked by means of A32808 in the Auxiliary Area (ON:
Duplex Mode, OFF: Simplex Mode).
114
Section 3-1
Duplex CPU Units
Active and Standby
CPU Units
In Duplex Mode, the two CPU Units run the same user program. One of them
executes actual control (e.g., refreshing the other Units), and the other one
remains on standby as a backup.
The two CPU Units use synchronized processing and the same user program,
I/O memory, and Parameter Area data.
Active CPU Unit
Standby CPU Unit
The active CPU Unit is the main CPU Unit that executes control. It runs the user program and exchanges data with external devices (through mounted Units and communications).
The standby CPU Unit runs the user program in parallel with
the active CPU Unit, and remains on standby to switch to
active status in case the active CPU Unit goes down. It constantly receives updated data from the active CPU Unit.
• The setting at the Active Setting Switch on the Duplex Unit determines
which of the two CPU Units is to be active.
• The R and L ACTIVE indicators on the Duplex Unit show which of the two
CPU Units is active. The active/standby status can also be checked using
A32809 in the Auxiliary Area.
Active and Standby CPU
Unit Operations
When the user program or parameters (e.g., PLC Setup) are changed, they
are transferred from the active CPU Unit to the standby CPU Unit. I/O memory
is transferred with each cycle. (These transfers are called “duplex transfers.”)
The details of active and standby CPU Unit operations are described below.
Data Transfers
Data
User program
I/O memory
Parameters
CPU Unit
Active CPU Unit
→
Standby CPU Unit
Transferred from active to standby CPU Unit whenever changed.
Constantly transferred from active to standby CPU Unit.
Transferred from active to standby CPU Unit whenever changed.
115
Section 3-1
Duplex CPU Units
Cyclic Operations
Active CPU Unit
Standby CPU Unit
Startup processing
Startup processing
Duplex initialization
Duplex initialization
Common cyclic
processing
Common cyclic
processing
User program
execution
User program
execution
Synchronized
processing
Synchronized
instructions (See note.)
Synchronized
instructions (See note.)
Beginning of duplex synchronization
Transfer processing
I/O refreshing
Duplex bus check
Peripheral servicing
Transfer processing
Peripheral servicing
Transfer processing
Duplex refreshing
Waiting for end of duplex synchronization
Note These instructions include IORF(097) (I/O REFRESH), DLINK(226) (CPU
BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH), IORD(222) (INTELLIGENT I/O READ),
IOWR(223) (INTELLIGENT I/O WRITE), PID(190) (PID), RXD(235)
(RECEIVE), FREAD(700) (READ DATA FILE), and FWRIT(701) (WRITE
DATA FILE).
The following table shows the processing related to duplex operation. For
details, refer to SECTION 9 CPU Unit Operation and the Cycle Time.
Processing
Startup processing
Duplex initialization
Beginning of duplex
synchronization and
Waiting for end of
duplex synchronization
116
Duplex-related processing
Duplex status is checked (i.e., whether the Unit status is active
or standby).
Data is transferred from the active CPU Unit to the standby
CPU Unit, and verified. (Details are provided below.)
In a Duplex CPU System, synchronization processing is executed in order to coordinate the timing of active and standby
CPU Unit operations.
Section 3-1
Duplex CPU Units
Processing
Duplex-related processing
User program execu- The same user program is executed.
tion
Synchronized instructions (see note) are executed simultaneously for both the active and standby CPU Units.
Note These instructions include IORF(097) (I/O REFRESH),
DLINK(226) (CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH),
IORD(222) (INTELLIGENT I/O READ), IOWR(223)
(INTELLIGENT I/O WRITE), PID(190) (PID),
RXD(235) (RECEIVE), FREAD(700) (READ DATA
FILE), and FWRIT(701) (WRITE DATA FILE).
I/O refreshing
Duplex bus check
Peripheral servicing
Duplex refreshing
Duplex Power Supply
Units
Inputs and outputs are refreshed only by the active CPU Unit.
When inputs are refreshed, the input data is transferred to the
standby CPU Unit.
A bus check is executed between the active CPU Unit, Duplex
Unit, and standby CPU Unit.
Writing for file accessing and FINS command execution is processed only for the active CPU Unit.
Reading for file accessing and FINS command execution is
processed for both the active and standby CPU Units.
With RS-232C port servicing, only reading can be processed
at the standby CPU Unit (i.e., when enabled in the PLC
Setup).
Peripheral servicing other than the above is executed only at
the active CPU Unit.
The Auxiliary Area status and error content at the active CPU
Unit are copied to the standby CPU Unit.
Power Supply Units can be used in a duplex configuration.
The mode does not change between Duplex Mode and Simplex Mode as a
result of Power Supply Unit errors.
Note CS1D Power Supply Units must be used.
Duplex
Communications
Units
Optical Controller Link Units or Ethernet Units can be used in a duplex configuration.
The mode does not change between Duplex Mode and Simplex Mode as a
result of Communications Unit errors.
Note Duplex Ethernet Units are supported only by CPU Unit Ver. 1.1 or later.
3-1-2
Errors Causing Operation to Switch to the Standby CPU Unit
If any of the “operation switching” errors listed below occur in the active CS1D
CPU Unit, causing it to stop operating, control is automatically switched to the
standby CPU Unit. At that time, the mode is also switched to Simplex Mode.
If, however, an operation switching error or a fatal error occurs simultaneously
at the active and standby CPU Units, the system will stop operating.
Operation switching errors
• Watchdog timer error (CPU error)
• Memory error: Memory Error Flag (A40115) turns ON. (Previously this
was a fatal error.)
• Program error: Program Error Flag (A40109) turns ON. (Previously this
was a fatal error.)
• Cycle time overrun: Cycle Time Overrun Flag (A40108) turns ON.
117
Section 3-1
Duplex CPU Units
• Fatal Inner Board error: Fatal Inner Board Error Flag (A40112) turns ON.
(This is a fatal error for Single CPU Systems or the CS1-H.) (Processcontrol CPU Units only)
• FALS error: FALS Error Flag (A40106) turns ON. (Previously this was a
fatal error.)
(1)
Power Supply
Unit
Power Supply
Unit
CPU Unit
Duplex Mode
Standby
(2)
Duplex Unit
CPU Unit
Other Units
• Power OFF (when the CPU Setting Switch on the active CPU Unit is
switched from USE to NO USE)
Active
(Operation switching error)
Mode switched
Simplex Mode
Active
CPU stopped.
The CPU Unit where the error occurred can be replaced while the system
continues operating using the CPU Unit online replacement function.
Note
1. To determine the cause of a switch to the standby CPU Unit, refer to A023
in the Auxiliary Area or to Mode Switch Reference, below.
2. In Simplex Mode, or in a Simplex System, operation stops when any of the
above errors occur.
3. When the mode is switched from Duplex Mode to Simplex Mode due to an
operation switching error or a duplex error, the cause of the mode switch
and the time at which it occurred are stored in the Auxiliary Area of the
newly active CPU Unit (i.e., the active CPU Unit following the mode switch).
Causes of Mode Switching
Word
A023
Bit
A02300
A02301
A02303
A02304
ON when mode is switched due to a CPU error (watchdog
timer error).
A02306
A02308
ON when mode is switched due to a FALS error.
ON when mode is switched due to cycle time overrun
error.
A02309
A02312
ON when mode is switched due to a program error.
ON when mode is switched due to a fatal Inner Board
error.
ON when mode is switched due to a memory error.
A02315
118
Description
ON when mode is switched due to a duplex verification
error.
ON when mode is switched due to a duplex bus error.
ON when mode is switched by the CPU Setting Switch.
Section 3-1
Duplex CPU Units
Time when Switching Occurred
Words
A024 to A026
Description
The time at which the mode was switched from Duplex Mode to
Simplex Mode is stored as follows:
A02400 to A02407: Second (00 to 59)
A02408 to A02415: Minute (00 to 59)
A02500 to A02507: Hour (00 to 23)
A02508 to A02515: Day (01 to 31)
A02600 to A02607: Month (01 to 12)
A02608 to A02615: Year (00 to 99)
The above Auxiliary Area words are cleared when the mode is restored
from Simplex Mode to Duplex Mode. At that time, the contents of A023 are
transferred to A019, and the contents of A024 to A026 are transferred to
A020 to A022, as an error log.
3-1-3
Duplex Errors
If an error occurs in the duplex processing itself, the mode is switched from
Duplex Mode to Simplex Mode. At that time, operation continues with the
presently active CPU Unit retaining its active status and the standby CPU Unit
remaining on standby.
Duplex errors
Duplex bus error An error has occurred in the Duplex System's
duplex bus. (A31601 turns ON. Error code: 0010
hex)
Duplex verifica- One of the following items does not match
tion errors
between the active and standby CPU Units.
(A31600 turns ON. Error code: 0011 hex)
User program or Parameter Area data
System configuration (CPU Unit models or
Duplex Inner Boards)
Note
1.
2.
There is no verification of Memory Card, including installation, models, and data contents, or verification of front-panel DIP
switch status. Even if any of these do not
match, operation will continue in Duplex
Mode.
The causes of duplex verification errors are
stored in the following bits of A317 in the
Auxiliary Area.
Bit 07: CPU Unit Model Verification Error
Flag
Bit 08: CPU Unit Version Verification Error
(CS1D CPU Unit Ver. 1.1 or later only)
Bit 10: Duplex Inner Board Model Verification Error Flag (Process-control CPU Units
only)
Bit 13: Parameter Area Verification Error
Flag
Bit 14: No Active CPU Unit Error Flag
Bit 15: User Program Verification Error Flag
119
Section 3-1
(1)
Power Supply
Unit
Power Supply
Unit
CPU Unit
Duplex Unit
CPU Unit
Other Units
Duplex CPU Units
Duplex Mode
Standby
Active
(Duplex error)
(2)
Simplex Mode
Remains in
standby
status
(cannot be
switched)
3-1-4
Remains
in active
status
Automatic Recovery to Duplex Operation by Self-diagnosis
After the mode has been switched from Duplex Mode to Simplex Mode due to
an operation switching error or a duplex error, an automatic attempt is made
to return to Duplex Mode if this function has been enabled in the PLC Setup.
This function is mainly useful for momentary or incidental disruptions (to
memory, bus, etc.) due to factors such as noise, rather than for hardware
breakdowns.
(1)
Power Supply
Unit
Power Supply
Unit
CPU Unit
Duplex Mode
Standby
(2)
Duplex Unit
CPU Unit
Other Units
When this automatic recovery function is executed, it does not return standby
status to active.
Active
(Operation switching error)
Mode switched.
Simplex Mode
Active
CPU Unit stopped.
Self-diagnosis normal
(3)
Duplex Mode
Active
Note
← Automatic recovery
Standby
1. In order for automatic recovery to be enabled, the power to the other CPU
Unit must not be OFF and the Mode Setting Switch must be set to DPL. If
the mode cannot be automatically returned to Duplex Mode, the following
bits in the Auxiliary Area (CPU Unit Duplex Unit Recovery Flags) will turn
ON.
Right CPU Unit: A32814 turns ON.
Left CPU Unit: A32815 turns ON.
2. When Duplex Mode operation has been recovered, the error log automatically will be transferred from the new active CPU Unit to the new standby
CPU Unit (i.e., the one that was the active CPU Unit before). To check the
120
Section 3-1
Duplex CPU Units
reason the standby CPU Unit previously failed (i.e., the reason for switching to Simplex Operation) or the time the switch was made, use A019 (reasons for switching) and A020 to A022 (time of switching).
3-1-5
Duplex Initialization
In Duplex Mode, duplex initialization is executed automatically at certain times
in order to synchronize the data in the active and standby CPU Units. The
duplex initialization is executed at times such as when the power is turned
ON, when operation is started, when transferring user programs or PLC Setup
data, etc.
By means of this duplex initialization, data is transferred from the active CPU
Unit to the standby CPU Unit and verified.
Duplex Initialization
Processing
Active CPU Unit
Standby CPU Unit
Data
transfer
and
verification
• During duplex initialization, the DPL STATUS indicator on the Duplex Unit
flashes green.
• During duplex initialization, the cycle time is temporarily extended.
• During duplex initialization, the mode is temporarily switched to Simplex
Mode. If an operation switching error occurs during this interval, operation
will not be continued.
Duplex initialization is executed automatically at the following times.
When power is turned
ON
When the power is turned ON while the Mode Setting
Switch is set to DPL.
When the Initial Switch is When the Initial Switch is pressed while the Mode Setting
pressed
Switch is set to DPL.
At the start of operation
When data is transferred
When operation is started while the Mode Setting Switch
is set to DPL (i.e., moving from PROGRAM Mode to RUN
or MONITOR Mode).
When a user program is transferred to the active CPU
Unit.
When PLC Setup data is transferred to the active CPU
Unit.
When I/O tables are created at the active CPU Unit.
When CPU Bus Unit system settings are written to the
active CPU Unit.
When online editing is executed at the active CPU Unit.
When Timer/Counter set values are changed at the active
CPU Unit.
During duplex initialization, the cycle time becomes longer than normal, as follows:
121
Section 3-1
Duplex CPU Units
Maximum cycle time = Normal cycle time + α
CS1D CPU Unit model
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
α (Maximum time beyond normal cycle time)
190 ms + A
520 ms + A
A is the time added when duplex Inner Boards are mounted. Refer to the
Inner Board Operation Manual for the value of A.
3-1-6
Duplex CPU Units with Different Unit Versions
Unit versions are used to identify functional additions to CS1D CPU Units.
(Refer to information on unit versions at the front of this manual for details.)
Upward compatibility is provided for all functional additions to CS1D CPU
Units. Duplex CPU Unit operation is thus possible for CPU Units of different
unit versions as long as only the functions supported by both unit versions are
used.
Requirements for
Duplex CPU Units
Duplex CPU Unit operation is possible as long as the active CPU Unit does
not use any functions not supported by the standby CPU Unit.
When the Standby CPU Unit
Is an Older Unit Version
When the Active CPU Unit
Is an Older Unit Version
Active
CPU Unit
Standby
CPU Unit
Functions
not
supported
Supported
functions
(not used)
Supported
functions
Supported
functions
Duplex CPU Unit operation
is possible as long as only
functions supported by
both CPU Units are used.
Active
CPU Unit
Standby
CPU Unit
Supported
functions
(not used)
Functions
not
supported
Supported
functions
Supported
functions
Duplex operation is
possible in this range.
When Duplex CPU
Unit Operation Is Not
Possible
Duplex CPU Unit operation is not possible if the unit version of the active CPU
Unit is earlier than that of the standby CPU Unit and the Active CPU Unit uses
functions not supported by the Standby CPU Unit. If this happens, a Duplex
Verification Error will occur and operation will be in Simplex Mode.
When the Standby CPU Unit
Is an Older Unit Version
Active
CPU Unit
Supported
functions
Functions used by
active CPU Unit
Supported
functions
Standby
CPU Unit
Functions
not
supported
Supported
functions
Duplex CPU Unit operation
is not possible because the
Active CPU Unit is using
functions not supported by
the Standby CPU Unit.
Functions used by
Standby CPU Unit
A31708 will turn ON to indicate a CPU Unit Version Verification Error as the
cause of the Duplex Verification Error. This error will be detected at the following times.
• When the system is started (i.e., when the power supply is turned ON)
• When operation is switched from Simplex Mode to Duplex Mode
• When using new functions is specified
122
Section 3-1
Duplex CPU Units
If duplex operation is prevented by a Duplex Verification Error, duplex operation can be recovered by stopping functions on the active CPU Unit that are
not supported by the standby CPU Unit. When a CPU Unit Version Verification
Error has occurred, the flags in A804 can be checked to identify the functions
that are not supported in the standby CPU Unit. (This function is supported by
CS1D CPU Units with unit version 1.3 or later only.)
Unit new functions can be specified from the Programming Console, by downloading files from a Memory Card, or by FINS write commands.
The CX-Programmer detects the unit versions of the CPU Units and allows
only functions supported by both. (The active CPU Unit compares it’s unit version to that of the standby CPU Unit and transfers the earlier unit version to
the CX-Programmer.) It is thus not possible to specify using functions not supported by the standby CPU Unit.
Standby CPU Unit Active CPU Unit
Unit version 2.0
Unit version 1.0
CX-Programmer
Unit version read.
If the standby CPU Unit is unit version
1.0 and the active CPU Unit is unit
version 2.0, a unit version of 1.0 will be
returned to the CX-Programmer.
Unit version 1.0
returned.
The standby CPU Unit is unit
version 1.0, so the CX-Programmer
will allow using only functions
supported by unit version 1.0.
Note The CX-Programmer checks the unit version when going online with the PLC
or when opening any of the setting windows, such as the PLC Setup Window.
The CX-Programmer will not update the unit version following online replacement of a Unit, and thus any data transfers will be performed as if the previous
unit version was still valid even if the unit version has been changed in the
online replacement procedure. After replacing a Unit online, restart the CXProgrammer or perform another action to update the unit version information
before transferring data.
3-1-7
Duplex CPU System Restrictions
This section describes the restrictions that apply to CS1D Duplex CPU Systems.
System Configuration
Restrictions
• C200H Units (e.g., C200H Basic I/O Units, Group-2 High-density I/O
Units, and C200H Special I/O Units) cannot be used.
• Inner Boards cannot be mounted in CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems.
The only Inner Boards that can be used for Duplex CPU Systems is the
CS1D-LCP05D built into the [email protected]@PProcess-control CPU Units.
(The CS1D-LCP05D Loop Control Board cannot be ordered separately
and must be ordered as part of a [email protected]@P Process-control CPU
Unit.)
• Memory Card functions can be executed in duplex only when the doing so
is enabled in the PLC Setup. No processing, however, is executed during
duplex initialization to match the data on the Memory Cards mounted in
the active and standby CPU Units. Therefore, before enabling duplex
operation for Memory Cards, make sure that the contents and the capacities are the same for both of the Memory Cards. If the free space or the
contents are different, write processing to the Memory Cards may not be
completely correctly.
123
Section 3-1
Duplex CPU Units
• Duplex operation is possible for EM file memory.
Operational
Restrictions
• Interrupts (including scheduled interrupt tasks, external interrupt tasks,
and power OFF interrupt tasks) cannot be used.
• Parallel processing for peripheral servicing (Parallel Processing Mode and
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode) cannot be executed.
• The clock function is synchronized with the active CPU Unit.
Instruction
Restrictions
• Instructions with the immediate refresh option (!) cannot be used. (The
IORF instruction, however, is available.)
• The accuracy of timer instructions (TIM, TIMX, TIMH(015), TIMHX(551),
TMHH(540), TMHHX(552), TTIM(087), TTIMX(555), TIMW(813),
TIMWX(816), TMHW(815), TMHWX(817), TIML(542), TIMLX(553),
MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554)) is less than for CS1-H CPU Units. The
accuracy is as follows:
TIM, TIMX, TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TMHH(540), TMHHX(552),
TTIM(087), TTIMX(555), TIML(542), TIMLX(553), MTIM(543),
MTIMX(554), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815), TMHWX(817):
±(10 ms + cycle time)
Note If the mode is changed from Duplex Mode to Simplex Mode during execution
of a timer instruction, the accuracy in the first cycle following the mode switch
is less than normal (as shown below).
TIM, TIMX, TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TTIM(087), TTIMX(555), TIML(542),
TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), MTIMX(554), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816),
TMHW(815), TMHWX(817) : ±(10 ms + cycle time) ±10 ms
TMHH(540), TMHHX(552) : ±(10 ms + cycle time) ±20 ms
Reference: Timer accuracy for the CS1-H is as follows:
TIM, TIMX, TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TTIM(087), TTIMX(555), TIML(542),
TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), MTIMX(554), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816),
TMHW(815), TMHWX(817) : 0 to −10 ms
TMHH(540), TMHHX(552) : 0 to −1 ms
• PV refresh operations during timer instruction jumps, or while a block program is stopped, are described below. (Operation is different from CS1-H
CPU Units.)
a) TIM, TIMX, TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TMHH(540), TMHHX(552),
TTIM(087), TTIMX(555):
When a jump is executed for a JMP, CJMP, or CMPN-JME instructions,
the timer PV is not refreshed (unlike CS1-H CPU Units). The next time
the instruction is executed (i.e., the next time the jump is not made) the
timer is refreshed for the period of time that elapsed since it was last
refreshed.
b) TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815), and TMHWX(817):
The timer PV is not refreshed when the BPRG instruction input condition is OFF or when the block program is paused by the BPPS instruction. (It is refreshed for CS1-H CPU Units.)
• Background execution cannot be used for text string processing instructions, table data instructions, or data shift instructions.
• Interrupt control instructions (MSKS, MSKR, CLI) and peripheral servicing
disable/enable instructions (IOSP/IORS) cannot be used. (They will be
executed as NOPs.)
• Execution of the following instructions (called “synchronized instructions”)
is synchronized between the two CPU Units, so their instruction execution
124
Section 3-1
Duplex CPU Units
times are longer than for the CS1-H. (For details on processing time, refer
to 9-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps.
Synchronized instructions:
IORF(097) (I/O REFRESH), DLINK(226) (CPU BUS UNIT I/O
REFRESH), IORD(222) (INTELLIGENT I/O READ), IOWR(223) (INTELLIGENT I/O WRITE), PID(190) (PID), RXD(235) (RECEIVE),
FREAD(700) (READ DATA FILE), and FWRIT(701) (WRITE DATA FILE)
• If the active and standby CPU Units cannot be synchronized when any of
the above instructions are executed (except for PID), the ER Flag will turn
ON. If that occurs, execute the instruction again.
• Also refer to the precautions in Appendix E Precautions in Replacing
CS1-H PLCs with CS1D PLCs.
CS1D Error
Classifications
(Reference)
The underlined errors are related to duplex operation.
Error status
Operation status
Duplex Mode
Simplex Mode or
Simplex System
Operation switching errors
• CPU error
• Memory error
• Fatal Inner Board error
• Program error
• Cycle time overrun error
• FALS error
Fatal errors
• I/O bus error
• Duplication error
• Too many I/O points error
• I/O setting error
Non-fatal
Errors causing a
switch to Simplex
errors
Mode (duplex errors)
• Duplex verification
error (See note 1.)
• Duplex bus error
(See note 1.)
Non-fatal errors in
Duplex Mode
• Duplex power supply
error
• Duplex communications error
• FAL error
• PLC Setup error
• I/O verification error
• Non-fatal Inner
Board error
• CPU Bus Unit error
• Special I/O Unit
error
• Battery error
• CPU Bus Unit setting error
• Special I/O Unit setting error
Operation continues in Operation stopped.
Simplex Mode.
(The status is
switched from standby
to active.)
CPU standby (See notes 1 and 2.)
Expansion Rack power interruption
Waits for operation.
Operation stopped.
Operation stopped.
Operation continues in Operation continues in
Simplex Mode.
Simplex Mode.
(Standby or active staNote Duplex verifitus remains
cation errors
unchanged.)
and duplex bus
errors do not
occur in Simplex Mode.
Operation continues in
Duplex Mode.
Waits for operation.
125
Section 3-1
Duplex CPU Units
Note
1. When a duplex verification error or duplex bus error occurs when the power
is turned ON, the CPU Unit goes into “CPU standby” status.
2. The cause of the “CPU standby” is stored in A322 in the Auxiliary Area.
Conditions for Mode Switching in a Duplex System (Reference)
Condition
When an
operation
switching
error occurs
at the active
CPU Unit.
System
operation
Power interruption (when Operation
the CPU Setting Switch
continues.
on the active CPU Unit is
switched from USE to NO
USE).
Duplex Mode
Active/standby status
Active CPU Unit
Standby CPU Unit
Switched to
Power interruption Switched to active. (OperSimplex Mode
ation continues.)
Watchdog timer error
(CPU error)
CPU stopped.
Memory error
Cycle time overrun
Program error
FALS error
Fatal Inner Board error
(Process-control CPU
Units only)
When a
Duplex bus error
duplex error
Duplex verification error
occurs.
During duplex initialization.
Remains active.
Remains in standby.
(Operation continues.)
Switched to
Switching between active and standby is disSimplex Mode abled.
Note If a cause of duplex switching occurs
during this interval, operation stops.
Standby CPU Power interruption (when
Unit
the CPU Setting Switch is
switched from USE to NO
USE).
Switched to
Remains active.
Power interruption
Simplex Mode (Operation continues.)
When one of the following
errors occurs: Watchdog
timer error, memory error,
cycle time overrun error,
program error, FALS
error, fatal Inner Board
error.
Mode Setting
Switch on
Duplex Unit
When set to SPL, and
when the Initial Switch is
pressed.
When set to DPL, and
when the Initial Switch is
pressed.
When a non-fatal error such as a battery
error occurs.
When a fatal error other than an operation Operation
switching error occurs.
stops
126
Remains in standby.
Switched to
Remains active.
Remains in standby.
Simplex Mode (Operation continues.)
No change
from Duplex
Mode.
Remains active.
Remains in standby.
Remains active.
Remains active.
Operation stops
Remains in standby.
Remains in standby.
Operation stops
Section 3-2
Duplex Power Supply Units
3-2
Duplex Power Supply Units
A CS1D Duplex System can be configured with Duplex Power Supply Units to
prevent the system from going down due to a Power Supply Unit error.
Be sure to use CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@ Power Supply Units. No other Power Supply Units can be used in a CS1D System. AC and DC Power Supply Units can
be used on the same Backplane.
CPU Rack
CPU Unit
Duplex Unit
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit
Power Supply system for
Power Supply Units on right.
Power Supply system for
Power Supply Units on left.
CS1D Expansion Rack
Power Supply Unit
When two CS1D Power Supply Units (CS1D-PA/[email protected]@@) are mounted, the
Backplane's power supply of 5 V DC and 26 V DC is provided in parallel from
the two Power Supply Units.
Even if the power is interrupted at one of the Power Supply Units, or if one of
the Power Supply Units breaks down, power can still be provided to the Rack
by the other Power Supply Unit alone.
Power Supply Unit errors can be checked using the Programming Console, or
by means of A31602, A319, and A320 in the Auxiliary Area.
3-3
Duplex Communications Units
The CS1D supports duplex operation of Ethernet and Controller Link Communications Units. With duplex Communications Units, communications will continue even if errors occur in a Communications Unit or on the communications
line.
There are two methods used for duplex communications: Active/standby and
primary/secondary. The method that is used depends on the type of Communications Unit that is being used.
Refer to the operation manual for the relative Communications Unit for details
on settings and other operating information.
3-3-1
Active and Standby Communications
The active/standby method of communications is used by the following Communications Units. These Units also achieve redundant communications
paths by using a loopback.
CS1W-CLK12-V1 Controller Link Unit
CS1W-CLK52-V1 Controller Link Unit
Two Communications Units are connected to the same communications line.
One of them operates in Active Mode, the other one in Standby Mode. The
same unit number and node address are set for both of the Units.
127
Section 3-3
Duplex Communications Units
The active (ACT) Communications Unit performs communications with the
nodes on the network. The standby (STB) Communications Unit runs on
standby while performing self-diagnosis. If the active Communications Unit
fails, the standby Communications Unit switches to Active Mode and continues communications operations.
Receives instructions from
CPU Unit and performs
normal operation.
Standby while performing selfdiagnosis. (Line performs node
bypass.)
ACT
Unit
error
STB
CPU
CPU
Normal
communications
Optical fiber
Optical fiber
Active/standby communications have been supported since the first CS1D
CPU Units were released, so they can be used on any CS1D CPU Unit
(including Pre-Ver. 1.1 CPU Units). CX-Programmer version 3.1 or higher is
required to make settings for duplex operation.
Up to three pairs of Communications Units using active/standby communications can be used for one CS1D PLC. Even when using Duplex Communications Units, only one unit number is allocated and no restrictions apply to
using other CPU Bus Units.
3-3-2
Primary and Secondary Communications
Primary/secondary communications are used with CS1D Ethernet Units
(CS1D-ETN21D). Two Communications Units are connected, but each is connected to a different communications line (network). One Unit operates as the
primary Communications Unit, the other as the secondary Communications
Unit.
The same unit number and node address are set for both of the Units, but two
unit numbers (twice the amount of memory) are allocated.
The primary Communications Unit performs communications with the nodes
on the primary network while confirming node participation in the primary network. The secondary Communications Unit runs on standby while confirming
node participation in the secondary network.
If there is a broken line in the primary network and communications are not
possible for a specific node or nodes, the secondary Communications Unit will
take over and continue communications with those nodes. If the primary Communications Unit fails, the secondary Communications Unit will take over all
communications previously performed by the primary Communications Unit.
128
Section 3-3
Duplex Communications Units
Secondary
Primary
Normal Operation
The primary Communications Unit
communicates with other nodes
through the primary network.
Primary network
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary network
Secondary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
If the primary Communications
Unit fails, the secondary
Communications Unit performs
all communications.
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Secondary
The secondary Communications
Unit communicates with nodes
with which the primary
Communications Unit cannot
communicate.
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Operation for Errors
CS1D CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems with a unit version of 1.1 or later or
a CS1D CPU Unit for Single CPU Systems with a unit version of 2.0 or later is
required to use Duplex Communication Units using primary/secondary communications. CX-Programmer version 2 or higher is required for duplex settings.
Up to three pairs of Communications Units using primary/secondary communications can be used for one CS1D PLC. The are also restrictions in the
number of Duplex Communications Units. Refer to the operation manuals for
the duplex Communications Units for details.
With duplex communications using primary/secondary communications,
memory is allocated for two unit numbers. Although the same unit number is
set for both Units, the primary Communications Unit uses the unit number that
is set and the secondary Communications Unit uses the next higher unit number. For example, if both Units are set to unit number 0, the memory normally
allocated for unit numbers 0 and 1 will be allocated to the duplex Communications Units. The unit number for these duplex Communications Unit cannot be
set to 15.
Using a number of pairs of duplex Communications Units using primary/secondary communications will restrict the number of other CPU Bus Units that
can be used, as shown in the following table.
Number of pairs of Communications
Units using primary/secondary
communications
0
1
2
3
Allowable number of
other CPU Bus Units.
16
14
12
10
129
Section 3-4
Duplex Connecting Cables
Number of pairs of Communications
Units using primary/secondary
communications
4
5
6
7
9
Allowable number of
other CPU Bus Units.
8
6
4
2
0
Communication Unit settings must be made for both the primary and secondary Communications Unit. Refer to the operation manual for the Communications Units for information on the settings that are required.
3-4
Duplex Connecting Cables
In a CS1D Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System, it is possible to duplex
the Connecting Cables between the CPU Rack and Expansion Rack and the
Connecting Cables between Expansion Racks. The system components
required for duplex Connecting Cables are a CS1D-DPL02D Duplex Unit,
CS1D-BC042D CPU Backplane, CS1D-BI082D Expansion Backplanes,
CS1D-IC102D I/O Control Units, CS1D-II102D I/O Interface Units, and Duplex
CPU Units with unit version 1.3 or later.
CS1D I/O Control Units
CPU
Unit
CPU Rack
CPU
Unit
Data is transferred
simultaneously
between the CPU Unit
and Units through the
duplexed cables.
Expansion
Rack
Even if there is a
problem in one cable,
data transfer continues
through the other cable.
Units
Expansion
Rack
Units
CS1D I/O Interface Units
A duplex Connecting Cable system can be configured by mounting two CS1D
I/O Control Units in the CPU Rack, mounting two CS1D I/O Interface Units in
each Expansion Rack, and connecting the Racks with two Connecting
Cables. In a PLC system with duplex Connecting Cables, data is simultaneously transferred over both cables between the CPU Unit and Units in the
Expansion Racks.
If one Connecting Cable is disconnected or damaged, data transfer will continue without interruption. When the Cable is reconnected or repaired, duplex
Connecting Cable operation will be restored.
Each Connecting Cable’s status can be checked with the flags in A270.
Note If there are problems in both Connecting Cables, the system will stop.
130
Section 3-4
Duplex Connecting Cables
CPU
Unit
CPU Rack
The system will stop
if there are problems
in both Connecting
Cables.
Expansion
Rack
Units
Expansion
Rack
131
Duplex Connecting Cables
132
Section 3-4
SECTION 4
Operating Procedures
This section outlines the steps required to assemble and operate a CS1D PLC system.
4-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
4-2
Basic Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
133
Section 4-1
Introduction
4-1
Introduction
The following procedure outlines the recommended steps to follow when preparing a Duplex CPU or Single CPU System for operation.
1,2,3...
1. Installation
Set the DIP switches on the front of each Unit as required.
Mount the two CPU Units (see note), Duplex Unit (see note), two Power
Supply Units, and other Units to the Backplane. For a Single CPU System,
install an Inner Board in the CPU Unit if required.
Refer to 5-2 Installation for details.
Note
For a Single CPU System, only one CPU Unit is required and no
Duplex Unit is required.
2. Wiring
Connect the power supply wiring and I/O wiring. Connect communications
wiring as required.
Refer to 5-3 Power Supply Wiring and 5-4 Wiring Methods for details on
power supply and I/O wiring.
3. Initial Settings (Hardware)
a) Set the following switches on the front of the Duplex Unit (Duplex CPU
Systems only).
• Set the mode switch (duplex/simplex) to DPL (duplex).
• Set the active-CPU Unit switch to ACT.RIGHT or ACT.LEFT.
• Set the CPU USE/NO USE switches to USE.
• Set the DPL USE/NO USE switch to USE (CS1D-DPL02D only).
• Set the communications switch on the Duplex Unit.
b) Set the DIP switches and rotary switches on the front of the CPU Unit
and other Units.
Refer to SECTION 2 Specifications, Nomenclature, and Functions for details.
4. Programming Device
Connect the Programming Device (the CX-Programmer or a Programming
Console) to the CPU Unit. (See note.)
Refer to 2-6 Programming Devices for details.
Note
With a Duplex CPU System, connect to the active CPU Unit.
5. Checking Initial Operation
a) Set the operating mode to PROGRAM mode.
b) Turn the power ON after checking the power supply wiring and voltage.
Confirm that the POWER indicator is lit on the Power Supply Unit.
c) Confirm that the DPL STATUS indicator on the Duplex Unit flashes
green and then lights green. (See note.)
d) Confirm that the ACTIVE indicator on the Active CPU Unit lights green.
(See note.)
Note
Duplex CPU System only.
6. PLC Setup Settings
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, change the settings in the PLC Setup
as necessary from the Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console). Set settings such as the Duplex Communications Unit settings. (Another method is to change the PLC Setup in CX-Programmer and
transfer it to the CPU Unit.)
134
Section 4-1
Introduction
Refer to SECTION 6 PLC Setup for details.
7. Registering the I/O Tables
Check the Units to verify that they are installed in the right slots. With the
PLC in PROGRAM mode, register the I/O tables from the Programming
Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console). (Another method is to
create the I/O tables in CX-Programmer and transfer them to the CPU
Unit.)
Refer to 7-1 I/O Allocations for details.
8. Special I/O Unit, CPU Bus Unit, and Special I/O Unit DM Area Settings
a) Use a Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console) to make any necessary settings in the parts of the DM Area that
are allocated to Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, and Inner Boards.
b) Reset the power (ON → OFF → ON) or turn ON the Restart Bit for
each Unit or Board. See the Unit’s or Board’s Operation Manual for details.
9. Writing the Program
Write the program with the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console.
10. Transferring the Program (CX-Programmer Only)
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, transfer the program from CX-Programmer to the CPU Unit.
Note
With a Duplex CPU System, transfer the program to the active CPU
Unit.
11. Testing Operation
a) Checking I/O Wiring
Output wiring
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, force-set output bits
and check the status of the corresponding outputs.
Input wiring
Activate sensors and switches and either check the status
of the indicators on the Input Unit or check the status of the
corresponding input bits with the Programming Device’s
Bit/Word Monitor operation.
b) Auxiliary Area Settings (as Required)
Check operation of special Auxiliary Area Settings such as the following:
Output OFF
Bit
Hot Start Settings
When necessary, turn ON the Output OFF Bit (A50015)
from the program and test operation with the outputs
forced OFF.
When you want to start operation (switch to RUN mode)
without changing the contents of I/O memory, turn ON the
IOM Hold Bit (A50012).
c) Trial Operation
Test PLC operation by switching the PLC to MONITOR mode.
d) Monitoring and Debugging
Monitor operation from the Programming Device. Use functions such
as force-setting/force-resetting bits, tracing, and online editing to debug the program.
See SECTION 7 Program Transfer, Trial Operation, and Debugging of
CS/CJ Series Programmable Controllers (W394) for details.
12. Save and print the program.
13. Running the Program
Switch the PLC to RUN mode to run the program.
135
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
4-2
Basic Procedures
1. Installation
1,2,3...
1. As necessary, set the DIP switches on the fronts of the Units.
2. Mount the two Duplex CPU Units, Duplex Unit, two Power Supply Units,
and other Units to the Backplane. Use the same model of CPU Unit for
both CPU Units.
Note a) For a Single CPU System, only one CPU Unit is required and no
Duplex Unit is required.
b) Only one Power Supply Unit is required. Two Power Supply Units
are mounted for duplex power supply operation.
LEFT CPU
RIGHT CPU
DPL SW
ON
INIT.
SW
ON
DUPLEX
3. For a Single CPU System, install an Inner Board in the CPU Unit if required.
2. Wiring
1,2,3...
1. Connect the power supply and I/O wiring.
2. Connect communications lines if required.
!Caution When 200 to 240 V AC power is being supplied, be sure to remove the jumper
bar that shorts the voltage selector terminals. The Power Supply Unit will be
damaged if 200 to 240 V AC is supplied with the jumper bar connected.
136
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
3. Initial Hardware Settings
Settings for Duplex CPU
Systems
1,2,3...
1. Duplex Unit Settings
3. Left CPU USE/NO USE Switch
When mounting or removing the
left CPU Unit, set this switch to
NO USE to turn OFF the power
supply to the CPU Unit.
DPL02D
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
L
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
R
CPU STATUS
CS
LEFT CPU
USE
NO USE
RIGHT CPU
USE
1. Mode Switch (DPL/SPL)
Set to duplex (DPL) or
simplex (SPL) mode.
NO USE
DPL SW
ON
2. Active CPU Switch
(ACT.RIGHT/ACT.LEFT)
Set whether the right CPU Unit
or the left CPU Unit is to be
active.
ON
SPL
OFF
DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
3. Right CPU USE/NO USE Switch
When mounting or removing the
right CPU Unit, set this switch to
NO USE to turn OFF the power
supply to the CPU Unit.
INIT.
SW
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
4. Communications Settings
Set communications parameters.
ON
3. DPL USE/NO USE Switch
(CS1D-DPL02D only)
When replacing the Duplex Unit,
set this switch to NO USE to turn
OFF the power supply to the
Duplex Unit.
DPL
USE
NO USE
a) Set the mode switch on the Duplex Unit to DPL (duplex).
DPL SW
Set to OFF.
ON
Note
ON
SPL
OFF
DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
For simplex operation, set the mode switch to SPL.
b) Set the active-CPU Unit switch to ACT.RIGHT or ACT.LEFT depending
on which CPU Unit is to be used as the active CPU Unit.
DPL SW
ON: The left-side CPU Unit will be active.
OFF: The right-side CPU Unit will be active.
Note
ON
ON
SPL
OFF
DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
For simplex operation, set the active-CPU switch to the side where
the CPU Unit is mounted.
c) Set the Duplex Unit’s left and right CPU USE/NO USE switches and
DPL USE/NO USE switch to USE. Power will be supplied to the CPU
Units and Duplex Unit only when the corresponding switch is set to
USE.
Left-side CPU Unit
LEFT CPU
Note
Right-side CPU Unit
RIGHT CPU
Duplex Unit
DPL
USE
USE
USE
NO USE
NO USE
NO USE
For simplex operation, set the CPU USE/NO USE switch to USE
only for the side where the CPU Unit is mounted.
137
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
d) Set the communications switch on the Duplex Unit. When connecting
a Programming Console to the peripheral port, set the PRPHL switch
to OFF. When connecting the CX-Programmer to the RS-232C port,
set the COMM switch to ON.
Note
When connecting anything other than a Programming Console to
the peripheral port, set the PRPHL switch to ON. When connecting
anything other than the CX-Programmer to the RS-232C port, set
the COMM switch to OFF.
Turn OFF when connecting
a Programming Console to
the peripheral port or the
active CPU Unit.
SW
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
ON
Turn ON when connecting
the CX-Programmer to
the RS-232C port or the
active CPU Unit.
Note In a Duplex CPU System, pin 4 (peripheral port communications settings) on
the DIP switches on the fronts of the CPU Units are disabled and the PRPHL
setting on the Duplex Unit is used instead. Also, pin 5 (RS-232C port communications settings) on the DIP switches on the fronts of the CPU Units are disabled and the COMM setting on the Duplex Unit is used instead.
2. CPU Unit Settings
a) Set the DIP switches on the fronts of the two CPU Units to the same
settings.
b) Confirm that both CPU Units are the same model.
Settings for Single CPU
Systems
The DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit must be set, along with other settings. Be particularly careful when setting the peripheral port and RS-232C
port settings.
Programming Console
Programming Device
138
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
• Turn OFF pin 4 on the DIP switch when connecting a Programming
Device to the peripheral port. Turn pin 4 ON when connecting any other
device.
• Turn ON pin 5 on the DIP switch when connected a Programming Device
other than a Programming Console to the RS-232C port. Turn pin 5 OFF
when connecting any other device.
4. Connecting a Programming Device
Connect the CX-Programmer or Programming Console to the active CPU
Unit’s peripheral port (the upper port) or connect the CX-Programmer to the
RS-232C port. (See note.)
Programming
Console
(peripheral port only)
Active CPU Unit
CX-Programmer
RUN
RUN
ERR/ALM
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
PRO27
PR
O27
PROGRAMMING
PR
OGRAMMING CONSOLE
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
LEFT CPU
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
RIGHT CPU
MCPWR
BUSY
MCPWR
BUSY
or
DPL SW
ON
FUN
AND
LD
INIT.
7
SW
PC-9801
BX
PORT
ON
PORT
NEC
SFT NOT
OR
CNT
OUT
TIM
DM
9
EXT
8
E
4
F
5
B
1
C
2
A
0
TR
LR HR
CH
6
D
3
DUPLEX
EAR MIC
Connect to peripheral
or RS-232C port on
active CPU Unit.
Note With a Duplex CPU System, operations, such as generating I/O tables and
transferring the program, will not be possible if the Programming Device is
connected to the standby CPU Unit.
5. Checking Initial Operation
!Caution When 200 to 240 V AC power is being supplied, be sure to remove the jumper
bar that shorts the voltage selector terminals. The Power Supply Unit will be
damaged if 200 to 240 V AC is supplied with the jumper bar connected.
1,2,3...
1. Check the power supply wiring and voltage and turn ON the power supply
to the CS1D Power Supply Units. Confirm that the POWER indicator on the
Power Supply Unit when power is turned ON.
2. With a Duplex CPU System, confirm that the DPL STATUS indicator on the
front of the Duplex Unit flashes green indicating that duplex operation is
being initialized. If initialization is completed normally, the DPL STATUS indicator will stop flashing and remain lit green.
Note If an inconsistency is detected between the two CS1D CPU Units, a duplex
verification error will occur and the DPL STATUS indicator will flash red. If this
happens, press the initialization switch. Unless there is a hardware error causing the inconsistency, the error should be cleared.
3. With a Duplex CPU System, confirm that the ACTIVE indicator on the active CPU Unit lights green and be sure that the Programming Device is
connected to the active CPU Unit.
!Caution With the default settings, the PLC Setup is set to specify using the mode set
on the Programming Console and if a Programming Console is not connected, the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode. Under these conditions, the PLC
will start operation as soon as power is turned ON.
139
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
6. PLC Setup Settings
These settings are the CPU Unit’s software configuration. Refer to SECTION
6 PLC Setup for details on the settings.
Note The PLC Setup settings are arranged by word addresses when a Programming Console is used to make PLC Setup settings. Refer to Appendix D PLC
Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console for details.
Examples:
• For Duplex CPU Systems, setting automatic recovery to duplex mode
when an error causes a switch from duplex to simplex mode
• Settings for Duplex Communications Units (CS1W-CLK12-V1 and CS1WCLK52-V1)
• For Duplex CPU Systems, settings to connect a Programming Device to
the RS-232C port on the standby CPU Unit to monitor PLC operation
(write operations will not be possible)
Using the CX-Programmer
1,2,3...
1. When setting the device type to “CS1H-H” for a Duplex CPU System, select Duplex Settings from the Options Menu on the PLC Settings Window
to enable setting the PLC Setup for a CS1D from the CX-Programmer.
Note
The device type setting on the CX-Programmer depends on the
version of CX-Programmer being used. When setting the device
type to “CS1H-H” for a Duplex CPU System, select Duplex Settings from the Options Menu on the PLC Settings Window to enable setting the PLC Setup for a CS1D from the CX-Programmer.
For other device type settings, the duplex settings can be made
without selecting this option.
System
Duplex CPU Systems
Single CPU Systems
CX-Programmer
version [email protected]
CS1H-H
Not supported
CX-Programmer
version 4 or higher
CS1H-H or CS1D-H
CS1D-S
2. Edit the PLC Setup and transfer it to the CPU Unit. (It can be transferred
separately or the CXP project can be saved and the PLC Setup can be
transferred together with the program.)
Note
140
In a Duplex CPU System, transfer to PLC Setup to the active CPU
Unit. (It cannot be transferred to the standby CPU Unit.)
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
Using a Programming Console
PRO27
PR
O27
PROGRAMMING
PR
OGRAMMING CONSOLE
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
Procedure
000000 CT00
CLR
FUN
VRFY
PC SETUP
0:MODE1:PC SETUP
PC SETUP
+000 0000
1
Specifying a word address in the PLC Setup.
(Example: 209)
↓
PC SETUP
+209
9
0
2
PC SETUP
+209
0000
↑
or
PC SETUP?
+209
0000 0000
CHG
Example: Input 8064.
8
6
0
4
WRITE
PC SETUP
+209
8064
Address
Bits
Setting
Description
95
00 to 14
Communications Unit ON: Enable
Duplex Settings for
OFF: Disable
primary/secondary
communications (See
note.)
121
00 to 15
Communications Unit ON: Enable
Duplex Settings for
OFF: Disable
active/standby communications
123
15
127
00 to 15
Automatic Duplex
Operation Recovery
Standby CPU Unit
RS-232C Port Setting
ON: Automatic recovery
OFF: No automatic recovery
0000 hex: Do not use independently.
5AA5 hex: Enable independent monitoring.
Note Supported for CPU Unit Ver. 1.1 or later.
7. Registering the I/O Tables in the CPU Unit
Registering the I/O tables allocates I/O memory to the Units actually installed
in the PLC. This operation is required in CS-series PLCs.
141
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
Note The I/O tables, user program, and PLC Setup data in CS1D CPU Units is
backed up in the built-in flash memory. The BKUP indicator will light on the
front of the CPU Unit when the backup operation is in progress. Do not turn
OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit. The
data will not be backed up if power is turned OFF.
Using the CX-Programmer Online
Use the following procedure to register the I/O tables with the CX-Programmer connected to the CPU Unit and all of the Units mounted to the system.
1,2,3...
1. Set the device type in the CX-Programmer as shown in the following table.
System
CX-Programmer
version [email protected]
CS1H-H
Not supported
Duplex CPU Systems
Single CPU Systems
CX-Programmer
version 4 or higher
CS1H-H or CS1D-H
CS1D-S
2. Place the CX-Programmer online to the PLC.
3. Create the I/O tables.
a) With the CPU Unit in PROGRAM mode, double-click IO Table on the
project tree in the main window. The I/O Table Window will be displayed.
b) Select Options and then Create. The models and positions of Units
mounted to the Racks will be written to the registered I/O tables in the
CPU Unit. With a Duplex CPU System running in Duplex Mode, the
I/O tables will automatically be created in both the active and standby
CPU Units.
When the I/O tables are
created, they are placed
in the active CPU Unit.
Status of actually
mounted Units
RUN
RUN
ERR/ALM
PRO27
PR
O27
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
LEFT CPU
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
RIGHT CPU
MCPWR
(Peripheral
port only)
PROGRAMMING
PR
OGRAMMING CONSOLE
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
Programming
Console
CX-Programmer
BUSY
MCPWR
BUSY
DPL SW
FUN
SFT NOT
AND
OR
CNT
OUT
TIM
DM
9
EXT
TR
LR HR
ON
or
INIT.
SW
PC-9801
BX
PORT
PORT
ON
NEC
LD
7
8
E
4
F
5
B
1
C
2
A
0
CH
6
D
3
DUPLEX
EAR MIC
Active
CPU Unit
Note
Create I/O Table
operation performed.
With a Duplex CPU System, the I/O tables cannot be created directly in the standby CPU Unit.
4. With a Duplex CPU System, confirm that the DPL STATUS indicator on the
Duplex Unit flashes green after the I/O tables have been created in the active CPU Unit. This indicates that the duplex system is being initialized,
e.g., the I/O tables that were written to the active CPU Unit are also being
written to the standby CPU Unit.
Note
If an inconsistency is detected between the two CS1D CPU Units,
a duplex verification error will occur and the DPL STATUS indicator will flash red. If this happens, press the initialization switch. Unless there is a hardware error causing the inconsistency, the error
should be cleared.
Using the CX-Programmer Offline
Use the following procedure to create the I/O tables offline with the CX-Programmer and later transfer the I/O tables to the CPU Unit.
142
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
1,2,3...
1. Set the device type in the CX-Programmer as shown in the following table.
System
CX-Programmer
version [email protected]
Duplex CPU Systems
Single CPU Systems
CS1H-H
Not supported
CX-Programmer
version 4 or higher
CS1H-H or CS1D-H
CS1D-S
2. Create the I/O tables offline.
a) Double-click IO Table on the project tree in the main window. The I/O
Table Window will be displayed.
b) Select PLC - PLC Information - I/O Table, and then double-click the
Rack to be edited. The slots for that Rack will be displayed.
c) Right-click the slots to be edited and select the desired Units from the
pull-down menu.
3. Select Options and then Transfer to PLC to transfer the I/O tables to the
active CPU Unit. The I/O tables will automatically be copied to the standby
CPU Unit as well.
Note The first word allocated to each Rack can be set in the PLC Setup under the
Options menu.
Using a Programming Console
Use the following procedure to register the I/O table with a Programming Console.
1,2,3...
1. Install all of the Units in the PLC.
Programming Console
PRO27
PR
O27
PROGRAMMING
PR
OGRAMMING CONSOLE
LEFT CPU
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
RIGHT CPU
FUN
DPL SW
INIT.
SFT NOT
AND
OR
CNT
LD
OUT
TIM
DM
8
9
EXT
7
ON
E
4
F
5
B
1
C
2
A
0
TR
LR HR
CH
6
D
3
SW
ON
EAR MIC
DUPLEX
Install the Units
2. Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral port. (See note.)
(It can be connected with the power ON.)
Note
With a Duplex CPU System, connect the Programming Console to
the active CPU Unit.
3. Register the I/O tables.
CLR
FUN
SHIFT
CH
*DM
CHG
000000 CT00
000000 I/O TBL ?
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
????
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
????
Password (9713)
143
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
WRITE
Specify holding or clearing
CPU Bus Unit information.
CLR
000000CPU BU ST?
0:CLR 1:KEEP
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT OK
000000 CT00
Note If an error occurs when creating the I/O tales, detailed I/O table error information is stored in A261 whenever the I/O tables. This information can be used to
identify the Unit causing the error.
8. Special I/O Unit, CPU Bus Unit, and Inner Board Settings
The following table shows the parts of the DM Area are allocated to Special
I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, and Inner Boards for initial settings. The actual settings depend on the model of Unit or Inner Board being used.
Unit/Board
Special I/O Units
Allocated words
D20000 to D29599 (100 words × 96 Units)
CPU Bus Units
D30000 to D31599 (100 words × 16 Units)
Inner Board
D32000 to D32099 (100 words × 1 Board)
After writing the initial settings to the DM Area, be sure to restart the Units by
turning the PLC OFF and then ON again or turning ON the Restart Bits for the
affected Units.
Special I/O Unit or
CS1 CPU Bus Unit
Restart
9. Writing the Program
Write the program with the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console.
10. Transferring the User Program, PLC Setup, and DM Area Settings to the CPU Unit
1,2,3...
1. When the user program, PLC Setup, and DM Area Settings have been created in a Programming Device other than a Programming Console, they
must be transferred to the CPU Unit. If a Duplex CPU System is being used
in Duplex Mode, the data is automatically transferred to both the active and
standby CPU Units.
Note
The user program and other data cannot be translated directly to
the standby CPU Unit.
2. With Duplex CPU Systems, confirm that the DPL STATUS indicator on the
Duplex Unit flashes green after the data has been transferred to the active
CPU Unit. This indicates that the duplex system is being initialized, e.g.,
the data that was transferred to the active CPU Unit is also being transferred to the standby CPU Unit.
Note
144
If an inconsistency is detected between the two CS1D CPU Units,
a duplex verification error will occur and the DPL STATUS indicator
will flash red. If this happens, press the initialization switch. Unless
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
there is a hardware error causing the inconsistency, the error
should be cleared.
11. Testing Operation
Checking I/O Wiring
Before performing a trial operation in MONITOR mode, check the I/O wiring.
Output Wiring
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, force-set and force-reset output bits and
verify that the corresponding outputs operate properly.
PRO27
PR
O27
PROGRAMMING
PR
OGRAMMING CONSOLE
LEFT CPU
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
RIGHT CPU
FUN
AND
DPL SW
LD
7
ON
E
SFT NOT
OR
CNT
OUT
TIM
DM
9
EXT
8
4
F
B
1
C
A
0
INIT.
6
5
2
D
SW
3
TR
LR HR
CH
Force-reset/
reset
EAR MIC
ON
DUPLEX
Input Wiring
Activate input devices such as sensors and switches and verify that the corresponding indicators on the Input Units light. Also, use the Bit/Word Monitor
operation in the Programming Device to verify the operation of the corresponding input bits.
Input Unit
LEFT CPU
RIGHT CPU
DPL SW
ON
INIT.
SW
ON
DUPLEX
Auxiliary Area Settings
Make any required Auxiliary Area settings, such as the ones shown below.
These settings can be made from a Programming Device (including a Programming Console) or instructions in the program.
IOM Hold Bit (A50012)
Turning ON the IOM Hold Bit protects the contents of I/O memory (the CIO
Area, Work Area, Timer Completion Flags and PVs, Index Registers, and
Data Registers) that would otherwise be cleared when the operating mode is
switched from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
Retained
I/O
memory
Operating mode changed
IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup
When the IOM Hold Bit has been turned ON and the PLC Setup is set to protect the status of the IOM Hold Bit at startup (PLC Setup address 80 bit 15
145
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
turned ON), the contents of I/O memory that would otherwise be cleared will
be retained when the PLC is turned ON.
Retained
I/O
memory
PLC turned ON.
Output OFF Bit (A50015)
Output Unit
Output Unit
Turning ON the Output OFF Bit causes all outputs on Basic I/O Units and
Special I/O Units to be turned OFF. The outputs will be turned OFF regardless
of the PLC’s operating mode.
↓ ↓
OFF OFF
Trial Operation
Use the Programming Console or Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to
switch the CPU Unit to MONITOR mode.
Using a Programming Console
Turn the Mode Switch to MONITOR for the trial operation. (Turn the switch to
RUN for full-scale PLC operation.)
Trial Operation
MONITOR
PRO27
PR
O27
PROGRAMMING
PR
OGRAMMING CONSOLE
RUN
RUN
RUN
ERR/ALM
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PRPHL COMM
LEFT CPU
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
RIGHT CPU
MCPWR
BUSY
MCPWR
BUSY
DPL SW
FUN
SFT NOT
AND
OR
CNT
OUT
TIM
DM
9
EXT
LD
ON
TR
LR HR
CH
INIT.
7
SW
PORT
ON
DUPLEX
8
E
4
F
5
B
1
C
2
A
0
PORT
6
D
3
EAR MIC
Programming
Console
Actual operation
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
Using the CX-Programmer
The PLC can be put into MONITOR mode with a host computer running CXProgrammer.
146
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
Trial Operation
RUN
RUN
ERR/ALM
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
PRPHL COMM
LEFT CPU
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
SYSMAC
CS1D-CPU67H
Select PLC, Mode, MONITOR.
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
RIGHT CPU
MCPWR
BUSY
MCPWR
BUSY
DPL SW
ON
INIT.
SW
PC-9801
BX
PORT
ON
Actual operation
PORT
DUPLEX
NEC
CX-Programmer
Select PLC, Mode, RUN.
Monitoring and Debugging
There are several ways to monitor and debug PLC operation, including the
force-set and force-reset operations, differentiation monitoring, time chart
monitoring, data tracing, and online editing.
Force-Set and Force-Reset
When necessary, the force-set and force-reset operations can be used to
force the status of bits and check program execution.
When a Programming Console is being used, monitor the bits with Bit/Word
Monitor or 3-word Monitor. Press the SHIFT+SET Keys to force-set a bit or
press the SHIFT+RESET Keys to force-reset a bit. The forced status can be
cleared by pressing the NOT Key.
CX-Programmer
1. Click the bit to be force-set or force-reset.
2. Select Force On or Off from the PLC
menu.
Programming Console
Force-set:
SHIFT
SET
Force-reset:
SHIFT
SET
Bit/Word Monitor display
3-word Monitor display
Clear:
NOT
Differentiation Monitor
The differentiation monitor operation can be used to monitor the up or down
differentiation of particular bits.
When a Programming Console is being used, monitor the bit with Bit/Word
Monitor. Press the SHIFT+Up Arrow Keys to specify up differentiation or press
the SHIFT+Down Arrow Keys to specify down differentiation.
CX-Programmer
1. Click the bit for differential monitoring.
2. Click Differential Monitor from the PLC
Menu. The Differential Monitor Dialog
Box will be displayed.
3. Click Rising or Falling.
4. Click the Start Button. The buzzer will
sound when the specified change is
detected and the count will be incremented.
5. Click the Stop Button. Differential monitoring will stop.
Programming Console
Detect up-differentiation:
SHIFT
↑
Detect down-differentiation:
SHIFT
↓
Bit/Word Monitor display
Time Chart Monitoring
The CX-Programmer’s time chart monitor operation can be used to check and
debug program execution.
Data Tracing
The CX-Programmer’s data trace operation can be used to check and debug
program execution.
147
Section 4-2
Basic Procedures
Online Editing
When a few lines of the program in the CPU Unit have to be modified, they
can be edited online with the PLC in MONITOR mode or PROGRAM mode.
When more extensive modifications are needed, upload the program from the
CPU Unit to the host computer, make the necessary changes, and transfer
the edited program back to the CPU Unit.
12. Save and Print the Program
To save the program, select File and then Save (or Save As) from the CXProgrammer menus.
To print the program, select File and then Print from the CX-Programmer
menus.
13. Run the Program
148
SECTION 5
Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to install a PLC System, including mounting the various Units and wiring the System. Be sure
to follow the instructions carefully. Improper installation can cause the PLC to malfunction, resulting in very dangerous
situations.
5-1
5-2
Fail-safe Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
5-2-1
Installation and Wiring Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
5-2-2
Installation in a Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
5-2-3
Mounting Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
5-2-4
Backplane Mounting Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157
5-2-5
Mounting Units to the Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157
5-2-6
I/O Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
5-2-7
Inner Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
5-3
Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
165
5-4
Wiring Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
5-4-1
Wiring Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
5-4-2
Wiring CS-series Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . .
174
5-4-3
Wiring CS-series Basic I/O Units with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176
5-4-4
Connecting I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
5-4-5
Reducing Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
185
149
Section 5-1
Fail-safe Circuits
5-1
Fail-safe Circuits
Be sure to set up safety circuits outside of the PLC to prevent dangerous conditions in the event of errors in the PLC or external power supply.
Order of Supplying Power
If the PLC’s power supply is turned ON after the controlled system’s power
supply, outputs in Units such as DC Output Units may malfunction momentarily. To prevent any malfunction, add an external circuit that prevents the
power supply to the controlled system from going ON before the power supply
to the PLC itself.
Managing PLC Errors
With a Single CPU System or a Duplex CPU System in Simplex Mode, PLC
operation will stop and all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF when
any of the following errors occurs.
• Operation of the Power Supply Unit’s overcurrent protection circuit
• A CPU error (watchdog timer error) or CPU on standby
• Any of the following fatal errors: Memory error, I/O bus error, duplicate
number error, fatal Inner Board error, too many I/O points error, I/O setting
error, program error, cycle time overrun error, or FALS(007) error
With a Duplex CPU System in Duplex Mode, PLC operation will stop and all
outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF when any of the following errors
occurs in the active CPU Unit.
• CPU on standby
• Any of the following fatal errors: I/O bus error, duplicate number error, too
many I/O points error, or I/O setting error.
Be sure to add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to ensure the safety
of the system in the event of an error that stops PLC operation.
Note When a fatal error occurs, all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF
even if the IOM Hold Bit has been turned ON to protect the contents of I/O
memory. (When the IOM Hold Bit is ON, the outputs will retain their previous
status after the PLC has been switched from RUN/MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode.)
Managing Output Malfunctions
It is possible for an output to remain ON due to a malfunction in the internal
circuitry of the Output Unit, such as a relay or transistor malfunction. Be sure
to add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to ensure the safety of the
system in the event that an output fails to go OFF.
Emergency Stop Circuit
The following emergency stop circuit controls the power supply to the controlled system so that power is supplied to the controlled system only when
the PLC is operating and the RUN output is ON.
An external relay (CR1) is connected to the RUN output from the Power Supply Unit as shown in the following diagram.
150
Section 5-2
Installation
MCB1
Power supply
MCB2
CR1
Controlled system
Transformer
or noise filter
CS1D PLC
in Duplex Mode
Twisted-pair wires
DC voltage
regulator
PLC RUN
output
CR1
+ DC
− input/output
Surge suppressor
Note Do not latch the RUN output and use it in a circuit to stop a controlled object.
Chattering of the relay contacts used in the output may cause incorrect operation.
Interlock Circuits
When the PLC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclockwise operation of a motor, provide an external interlock such as the one
shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from turning ON
at the same time.
Interlock circuit
000501
MC2
MC1 Motor clockwise
Output Unit
000502
MC1
MC2 Motor counterclockwise
This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from both being ON at the same
time even if both CIO 000501 and CIO 000502 are both ON, so the motor is
protected even if the PLC is programmed improperly or malfunctions.
5-2
5-2-1
Installation
Installation and Wiring Precautions
Be sure to consider the following factors when installing and wiring the PLC to
improve the reliability of the system and make the most of the PLC’s functions.
Ambient Conditions
Do not install the PLC in any of the following locations.
• Locations subject to ambient temperatures lower than 0°C or higher than
55°C.
151
Section 5-2
Installation
• Locations subject to drastic temperature changes or condensation.
• Locations subject to ambient humidity lower than 10% or higher than
90%.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to excessive dust, salt, or metal filings.
• Locations that would subject the PLC to direct shock or vibration.
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight.
• Locations that would subject the PLC to water, oil, or chemical reagents.
Be sure to enclose or protect the PLC sufficiently in the following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power lines.
Installation in Cabinets or Control Panels
When the PLC is being installed in a cabinet or control panel, be sure to provide proper ambient conditions as well as access for operation and maintenance.
Temperature Control
The ambient temperature within the enclosure must be within the operating
range of 0°C to 55°C. When necessary, take the following steps to maintain
the proper temperature.
• Provide enough space for good air flow.
• Do not install the PLC above equipment that generates a large amount of
heat such as heaters, transformers, or high-capacity resistors.
• If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, install a cooling fan or air conditioner.
Control
panel
Fan
PLC
Louver
• If a Programming Console will be left on the PLC, the ambient temperature must be within the Programming Console’s operating range of 0°C to
45°C.
Accessibility for Operation and Maintenance
• To ensure safe access for operation and maintenance, separate the PLC
as much as possible from high-voltage equipment and moving machinery.
• The PLC will be easiest to install and operate if it is mounted at a height of
about 1.0 to 1.6 m.
152
Section 5-2
Installation
Improving Noise Resistance
• Do not mount the PLC in a control panel containing high-voltage equipment.
• Install the PLC at least 200 mm (6.5 feet) from power lines.
Power lines
200 mm min.
PLC
200 mm min.
• Ground the mounting plate between the PLC and the mounting surface.
• When I/O Connecting Cables are 10 m or longer, connect the control panels in which Racks are mounted with heavier power wires (3 wires at least
2 mm2 in cross-sectional area).
PLC Orientation
• Each Rack must be mounted in an upright position to provide proper cooling.
Top
RUN
DPL01
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC CS1D
PROGRAMABL
E CONTROLLER
CPU67H
L
R
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
LEFT CPU
USE
NO USE
OPEN
MCPWR
SYSMAC CS1D
PROGRAMABL
E CONTROLLER
CPU67H
RIGHT CPU
BUSY
USE
OPEN
NO USE
OPEN
MCPWR
DPL SW
ON
PERIPHERAL
ON OFF
SPL DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
BUSY
OPEN
INIT.
PERIPHERAL
SW
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
PORT (RS-232C)
ON
DUPLEX
PORT (RS-232C)
Bottom
• Do not install a Rack in any of the following positions.
153
Section 5-2
BUSY
PORT (RS-232C)
PERIPHERAL
OPEN
INH BKUP
OPEN
RUN
CONTROLLER
MCPWR
CPU67H
SYSMAC CS1D
PROGRAMABLE
ERR/ALM
PRPHL COMM
Installation
PORT (RS-232C)
DUPLE
DUPL
EX
X
PORT (RS-232C)
ON
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
SW
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
ON
SW
INIT.
DPL SW
NO USE
USE
PERIPHERAL
PORT (RS-232C)
NO USE
USE
CPU STATUS
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
LEFT CPU
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
L
OPEN
BUSY
MCPWR
DPL01
R
BUSY
INH BKUP
OPEN
MCPWR
OPEN
PRPHL COMM
CONTROLLER
CPU67H
ON OFF
SPL DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
NO USE
RIGHT CPU
NO USE
USE
PROGRAMABLE
CONTROLLER
CPU67H
LEFT CPU
SYSMAC CS1D
PRPHL COMM
INH BKUP
ERR/ALM
RUN
OPEN
USE
BUSY
OPEN
RUN
RIGHT CPU
ON
DPL SW
OPEN
MCPWR
ERR/ALM
ON
ON OFF
SPL DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
INIT.
PERIPHERAL
SYSMAC CS1D
PROGRAMABLE
DUPLEX
PERIPHERAL
R
L
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
PROGRAMABLE
CONTROLLER
CPU67H
SYSMAC CS1D
PRPHL COMM
INH BKUP
ERR/ALM
RUN
DPL01
5-2-2
Installation in a Control Panel
• A typical installation is a CPU Rack mounted above an Expansion Rack
on a mounting plate in the control panel.
• The spacing between the CPU Rack and Expansion Rack (or between
two Expansion Racks) should be sufficient to allow space for a wiring
duct, wiring, air circulation, and replacement of Units in the Racks.
Note If the CS1D-PA207R Power Supply Unit is to be used at an ambient temperature of 50°C or higher, provide a minimum space of 80 mm between the top of
the Unit and any other objects, e.g., ceiling, wiring ducts, structural supports,
devices, etc.
80 mm min.
Duct or other object
CS1D-PA207R
80 mm min.
80 mm min.
Duct or other object
CS1D-PA207R
80 mm min.
Duct or other object
• Up to 7 Expansion Racks can be connected.
Each I/O Connecting Cable can be up to 12 m long, but the sum total of
all cables between the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks must be 12 m or
less.
• The mounting plate should be grounded completely and we recommend
using a mounting plate that has been plated with a good conductor to
improve noise resistance.
• If all of the Racks cannot be mounted to the same mounting plate, the
individual plates should be securely connected together using 3 wires of
at least 2 mm2 in cross-sectional area.
154
Section 5-2
Installation
• The Backplanes are mounted to the plate(s) with four M4 screws each.
• Whenever possible, route I/O wiring through wiring ducts or raceways.
Install the duct so that it is easy to fish wire from the I/O Units through the
duct. It is handy to have the duct at the same height as the Racks.
Duct
20 mm min.
Phillips
screwdrivers
Backplane
Unit
20 mm min.
Duct
Wiring Ducts
The following example shows the proper installation of wiring duct.
118 to 153 mm
CPU
Rack
30 mm
30 mm
40 mm
Mounting
bracket
Duct
Expansion
Rack
Note Tighten the Unit mounting screws, PLC Rack mounting screws, terminal block
screws, and cable screws to the following torques.
Screws
Unit mounting screws
Backplane mounting screws
Terminal screws
Cable connector screws
Routing Wiring Ducts
Unit/screw size
CPU Units
Power Supply Units
Duplex Unit
I/O Units
M3.5
M3
M2.6
Torque
0.9 N⋅m
0.9 N⋅m
0.4 N⋅m
0.4 N⋅m
0.9 N⋅m
0.8 N⋅m
0.5 N⋅m
0.2 N⋅m
Install the wiring ducts at least 20 mm between the tops of the Racks and any
other objects, (e.g., ceiling, wiring ducts, structural supports, devices, etc.) to
provide enough space for air circulation and replacement of Units. If the ambient temperature is 50 °C or higher, provide a minimum space of 80 mm.
155
Section 5-2
Installation
Input duct
Output duct
Power duct
200 mm min.
RUN
DPL01
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
CPU Rack
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC CS1D
PROGRAMABLE
CONTROLLER
CPU67H
L
R
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
RUN
ERR/ALM
CPU STATUS
INH BKUP
LEFT CPU
USE
NO USE
PRPHL COMM
SYSMAC CS1D
PROGRAMABLE
CONTROLLER
CPU67H
OPEN
MCPWR
RIGHT CPU
BUSY
USE
OPEN
NO USE
OPEN
MCPWR
DPL SW
ON
ON OFF
SPL DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
BUSY
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
INIT.
PERIPHERAL
SW
Breakers,
fuses
PRPHL
COMM
A39512
RSV
PORT (RS-232C)
ON
DUPLEX
PORT (RS-232C)
Expansion Rack
Power
equipment
such as
transformers
and magnetic
relays
Fuses, relays, timers, etc.
(NOT heat-generating equipment, power equipment, etc.)
5-2-3
Terminal
blocks or PLC
Terminal blocks for
power equipment
Mounting Height
The mounting height of CPU Racks and Expansion Racks is 123 to 153 mm,
depending on I/O Units mounted. If Programming Devices or connecting
cables are attached, the additional dimensions must be taken into account.
Allow sufficient clearance in the control panel in which the PLC is mounted.
123 to 153 mm
Approx. 180 to 223 mm
156
Section 5-2
Installation
5-2-4
Backplane Mounting Dimensions
491±0.3
Four, M4
131.9
CS1D-BC052/BC082S CPU Backplane
118±0.3
505.1
84 to
491±0.3
131.9
CS1D-BI092 Expansion Backplane
118±0.3
505.1
Four, M4
5-2-5
Mounting Units to the Backplane
The following table shows the mounting method.
Installation method
Hook the top of the Unit into the
slot on the Backplane and tighten
the screw on the bottom of Unit.
1,2,3...
Removal method
Loosen the screw on the bottom of
the Unit and rotate the Unit
upward.
1. Mount the Unit to the Backplane by hooking the top of the Unit into the slot
on the Backplane and rotating the I/O Unit downwards.
2. Make sure that the connector on the back of the Unit is properly inserted
into the connector in the Backplane.
3. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to tighten the screw on the bottom of Unit.
The screwdriver must be held at a slight angle, so be sure to leave enough
space below each Rack.
Note The screws at the bottoms of the Units must be tightened to the following
torques.
CPU Units:
0.9 N⋅m
Power Supply Units: 0.9 N⋅m
Duplex Unit:
0.4 N⋅m
I/O Units:
0.4 N⋅m
157
Section 5-2
Installation
Duct
20 mm min.
Unit
Backplane
20 mm min.
Duct
Phillips
screwdriver
4. To remove a Unit, use a phillips-head screwdriver to loosen the screw at
the bottom of the Unit, rotate the Unit upward, and remove it.
5-2-6
I/O Connecting Cables
I/O Connecting Cables are used to connect the CPU Rack and Expansion
Racks. There are two types of I/O Connecting Cables.
Type
CS-series I/O Connecting Cables
Model number
Connectors
Usage
CPU Rack
Expansion Rack
[email protected]@3 Simple lock
Simple lock con- CPU Rack →
connector
nector
Expansion Rack
Expansion Rack →
Expansion Rack
CV-series Long-distance Expansion Rack I/O Connecting Cables
Model Numbers
[email protected]@2
Simple lock connector
CS-series I/O Connecting Cables
Model number
CS1W-CN313 (See note.)
CS1W-CN713 (See note.)
CS1W-CN223
CS1W-CN323
CS1W-CN523
CS1W-CN133
CS1W-CN133B2
158
Cable length
0.3 m
0.7 m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
12 m
CPU Rack or Expansion Rack
→
Long-distance Expansion Rack
Section 5-2
Installation
Note Not all CS1W-CN313/CN713 Cables can be used. Refer to CS-series Connecting Cables on page 40 for details.
Long-distance Expansion Rack I/O Connecting Cables
Model number
CV500-CN312
CV500-CN612
CV500-CN122
CV500-CN222
CV500-CN322
CV500-CN522
CV500-CN132
CV500-CN232
Cable length
0.3 m
0.6 m
1m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
20 m
CV500-CN332
CV500-CN432
CV500-CN532
30 m
40 m
50 m
• When connecting Expansion Racks with CS-series I/O Connecting
Cables, install the Racks and select I/O Connecting Cables so that the
total length of all I/O Connecting Cables does not exceed 12 m.
• When connecting Expansion Racks with Long-distance Expansion Rack
I/O Connecting Cables, install the Racks and select I/O Connecting
Cables so that the total length of all I/O Connecting Cables in one system
does not exceed 50 m.
Example 1: CS-series I/O Connecting Cables
LEFT CPU
CPU Rack
RIGHT CPU
DPL SW
ON
INIT.
SW
CS1-series I/O
Connecting
Cable
Total cable length:
12 m max.
CS1-series I/O
Connecting
Cable
CS1-series I/O
Connecting
Cable
ON
DUPLEX
Expansion Rack
Expansion Rack
Expansion Rack
159
Section 5-2
Installation
Example 2: Long-distance Expansion Rack I/O Connecting Cables
IC102
CS
RDY
TER ERR
LEFT CPU
CPU Rack
RIGHT CPU
DPL SW
ON
INIT.
SW
ON
DUPLEX
Long-distance Expansion Rack
IC102
Total cable
length:
50 m max.
IC102
IC102
CS
RDY
TER ERR
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
IC102
CS
RDY
TER ERR
CS
RDY
TER ERR
Total cable
length:
50 m max.
CS
RDY
TER ERR
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
IC102
CS
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
RDY
TER ERR
IC102
CS
RDY
TER ERR
Long-distance Expansion Rack
Terminator
Longdistance
Expansion
Rack
Terminator
Note
1. Up to two series of Long-distance Expansion Racks can be connected.
2. A maximum of seven Long-distance Expansion Racks can be connected
(including all Racks in both series).
3. Each series of Long-distance Expansion Racks must be 50 m max. with a
total of 100 m max. for both series.
4. Expansion Racks and Long-distance Expansion Racks cannot be connected at the same time.
5. In a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System, use only the CS1D-BC042D
CPU Backplane and CS1D-BIO082D Expansion Backplanes. No other
Backplanes can be used.
6. In a Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System, use only the CS1D-BC052
CPU Backplane and CS1D-BIO092 Expansion Backplanes. No other
Backplanes can be used.
7. In a CS1D Single CPU System, use only the CS1D-BC082S CPU Backplane and CS1D-BIO092 Expansion Backplanes. No other Backplanes
can be used.
Connecting Cables
There are two connection methods that are used, depending on the type of
cable.
CS-series I/O Connecting Cables
With CS-series I/O Connecting Cables, simple locking connectors are used
on both the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks.
160
Section 5-2
Installation
CPU Rack or
Expansion Rack
Expansion Rack
Simple locking
connectors
The connectors can be inserted only one way; they cannot be inserted upside
down. Be sure that the connectors fit properly as they are inserted.
The connecting port for each CS-series I/O Connecting Cable depends on the
system configuration and the Rack being connected, as shown in the following diagrams. The PLC will not operate properly if the Racks are not connected as shown in the following diagrams.
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System
CPU Rack
Expansion To previous Rack
Rack
OUT IN
OUT
To next
Rack
CS1D I/O Control Unit
To next
Rack
CS1D I/O Interface Unit
Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System
CPU Rack
To
previous Expansion Rack
Rack
IN
To next Rack
OUT
To next Rack
CV-series Long-distance I/O Connecting Cables: Connecting Longdistance Expansion Racks
The following connections are used when an I/O Control Unit is mounted to
the CPU Rack. With the CS1D PLCs, an I/O Control Unit cannot be mounted
to an Expansion Rack.
161
Section 5-2
Installation
IC102
CS
RDY
TER ERR
CPU Rack
CV-series Long-distance
I/O Connecting Cables
I/O Control Unit
Long-distance
Expansion Rack
Long-distance
Expansion Rack
CS
IC102RDY
TER ERR
CS
IC102RDY
TER ERR
Series B
Series A
I/O Interface Unit
I/O Interface Unit
The connecting port for each CV-series Long-distance I/O Connecting Cable
depends on the system configuration and the Rack being connected, as
shown in the following diagrams. The PLC will not operate properly if the
Racks are not connected as shown in the following diagrams.
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System
Long-distance Expansion Racks cannot be connected.
Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System
CPU
Rack
Expansion
Rack
CS1D I/O Control
Unit
To
previous
Rack
To next To next
Rack Rack
CS1D I/O Interface
Unit
IN OUT
To next Rack
If there isn't another Rack, install a
Terminator in the empty connector.
Connecting the Simple Locking Connectors
Press the tabs on the end of the connector and insert the connector until it
locks in place. The PLC will not operate properly if the connector isn’t inserted
completely. To remove the connector, press the tabs and then pull the connector out.
Note
1. Do not route the I/O Connecting Cables through ducts that contain the I/O
or power wiring.
2. Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before connecting Cables.
3. An I/O bus error will occur and the PLC will stop if an I/O Connecting Cable’s connector separates from the Rack. Be sure that the connectors are
secure.
162
Section 5-2
Installation
4. A 75-mm hole will be required if the I/O Connecting Cable must pass
through a hole when connecting a Long-distance Expansion Rack and a
63-mm hole will be required for Cables connecting other Racks.
5. I/O Connecting Cables cannot be cut or rejoined. Be sure to use I/O Connecting Cables of the proper length, particularly when wiring inside panels
or wiring ducts.
6. Do not pull on the I/O Connecting Cables with excessive force.
7. The I/O Connecting Cables mustn’t be bent too severely. The minimum
bending radii are shown in the following diagram.
CV-series Long-distance
I/O Connecting Cable
CS-series I/O Connecting Cable
r = 80 mm min.
r = 69 mm min.
r
r
Cable diameter
= 10 mm
Cable diameter
= 8.6 mm
Installing the
Expansion Rack
Cable Mounting
Bracket
Expansion Rack Cable Mounting Brackets can be used to prevent the Expansion Cables from being disconnected unintentionally.
Note The Expansion Rack Cable Mounting Bracket is an accessory, which is sold
separately from the Connecting Cables and Backplanes.
1,2,3...
1. Connect the Cable as described in 5-2-6 I/O Connecting Cables.
2. Put on the Expansion Rack Cable Mounting Bracket from above and attach
it at the top and bottom with the provided Phillips-head screws.
Phillips-head screwdriver
Expansion Rack Cable Mounting Bracket
(CS1D-ATT01)
Backplane
Expansion Rack Cable
5-2-7
Inner Board Installation
An Inner Board can be mounted only to CPU Units for Single CPU Systems.
You cannot mount one to CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems. The only Inner
Boards that can be used for Duplex CPU Systems is the CS1D-LCP05D built
163
Section 5-2
Installation
into the [email protected]@PProcess-control CPU Units. The [email protected]@P
Process-control CPU Units are sold as a single product and the Board cannot
be removed.
Note
1. Duplex operation that includes Inner Boards can be used with CPU Units
from lot number 030422 onwards (i.e., CPU Units manufactured from April
22, 2003 onwards).
2. Always turn the power OFF before installing or removing the Inner Board.
Installing or removing the Inner Board with the power turned ON can cause
the CPU Unit to malfunction, damage internal components, or cause communications errors.
3. Before installing the Inner Board, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic
object, such as a metal water pipe, in order to discharge any static buildup from your body.
CPU Unit
Inner Board
1,2,3...
1. Press the catches at the top and bottom of the Inner Board compartment
cover and pull the cover forward.
Press the top catch.
Press the bottom catch.
2. Remove the Inner Board compartment cover.
3. Align the Inner Board with the groove and slide it into the compartment.
164
Section 5-3
Power Supply Wiring
RDY
COMM1
COMM2
5-3
Power Supply Wiring
The power supply systems are divided as follows: Power section, control circuits, CS1D Racks, and DC I/O. Wire each of these separately.
When using a duplex CS1D System, use a separate power source for each of
the two Duplex Power Supply Units.
Provide an emergency stop circuit to control the power supply to the controlled system so that power is supplied to the controlled system only when
the PLC is operating and the RUN output is ON. Connect an external relay to
the RUN output from the Power Supply Unit.
MCCB1
MCCB2
Power section
200 V AC
CP
Ry
Control circuits
Insulating
transformer
Tr
Stabilized
DC power
supply
DC I/O
+
−
PLC RUN output
Ry
CP
Insulating
transformer
LEFT CPU
RIGHT CPU
Tr
DPL SW
ON
INIT.
SW
ON
DUPLEX
The Duplex CPU and Expansion Backplanes for a CS1D PLC support Duplex
Power Supply Units. If anything happens to interrupt the power supply from
one of the Power Supply Units, the other one will continue supplying power to
the Unit on the Rack. To ensure that the PLC will continue operating even if
the power supply to the Power Supply Unit is interrupts, always provide power
to two Duplex Power Supply Units from different power sources.
165
Section 5-3
Power Supply Wiring
Wiring Examples: Expansion Racks
CP
AC power supply 1 (A1)
Tr
CS1D CPU Rack
PA207R
POWER
PA207R
POWER
CP
L2/N
L2/N
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
Tr
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
L1
L1
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
AC power supply 2 (A2)
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
CS1D Expansion Rack
PA207R
POWER
PA207R
POWER
L2/N
L2/N
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
L1
L1
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
Note
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
1. Wire the Power Supply Units so that they can be replaced safely and without interrupt the power supply to other Racks or devices in the event that
a Power Supply Unit fails.
2. Branching wiring at a Power Supply Unit terminal block will create a dangerous situation if a Unit must be replaced. Use relay terminals to branch
wiring and provide a circuit protector (CP) for each Power Supply Unit.
Relay
CP terminals
CS1D CPU Rack
POWER
PA207R
POWER
Tr
AC power supply 1 (A1)
Tr
AC power supply 2 (A2)
PA207R
CP
L2/N
L2/N
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
L1
L1
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
RUN
OUTPUT
AC250V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
RUN
OUTPUT
AC250V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
CP
CS1D Expansion Rack
POWER
PA207R
POWER
PA207R
CP
L2/N
L2/N
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
L1
L1
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
RUN
OUTPUT
AC250V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
166
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
RUN
OUTPUT
AC250V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
5-4
5-4-1
Wiring Methods
Wiring Power Supply Units
AC Power Supply Models
Note When 220 V AC power (200 to 240 V AC) is being supplied, be sure to
remove the jumper bar that shorts the voltage selector terminals. The Unit will
be damaged if 220 V AC is supplied with the jumper bar connected.
220 V AC
power
Voltage selector
terminals
Voltage selector
terminals
Unit will be damaged
if connected.
Not connected
(OPEN)
CORRECT
220 V AC
power
INCORRECT!
(Unit will be damaged.)
Note If 100 to 120 V AC power is supplied but the jumper bar has been removed to
select 200 to 220 V AC, the Unit will not operate because the power supply
voltage will be below the 85% minimum level.
• Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring procedures.
POWER
PA207R
Screws (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)
AC power supply
L2/N
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
1:1 isolating
transformer
L1
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
AC power source
100 to 200 V AC
200 to 240 V AC
Voltage selector:
Closed for 110 V AC
Open for 220 V AC
Remove the short bar before applying 200 to 240 V AC.
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
RUN output
ON when the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Power OFF when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode or when a fatal error has occurred.
supply
Note The RUN output can be used from either the Power Supply Units on the CPU
Rack or the Expansion Racks.
To obtain an output contact equivalent to RUN output when using a Power
Supply Unit without RUN output, use an output contact from the Power Supply
Unit with a constant ON flag as the input condition.
167
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
AC Power Source
• Supply 100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC.
• Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range:
Supply voltage
100 to 120 V AC
200 to 240 V AC
Allowable voltage fluctuations
85 to 132 V AC
170 to 264 V AC
• If one power supply phase of the equipment is grounded, connect the
grounded phase side to the L2/N (or L1/N if so indicated) terminal.
Voltage Selector
Shorted: 100 to 120 V AC
Open:
200 to 240 V AC
Short-circuit the voltage selector terminals with the jumper bar to select 100 to
120 V AC supply voltage. For 200 to 240 V AC leave them open.
!Caution The Power Supply Unit will be damaged if 200 to 240 V AC power is supplied
and the voltage selector terminals are connected with the jumper bar.
Isolating Transformer
The PLC’s internal noise isolation circuits are sufficient to control typical noise
in power supply lines, but noise between the PLC and ground can be significantly reduced by connecting a 1-to-1 isolating transformer. Do not ground the
secondary coil of the transformer.
Power Consumption
The power consumption will be 150 VA max. per Rack, but there will be a
surge current determined by power supply specifications when power is
turned ON.
RUN Output
This output is ON whenever the CPU Unit is operating in RUN or MONITOR
mode; it is OFF when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode or a fatal error has
occurred.
The RUN output can be used to control external systems, such as in an emergency stop circuit that turns OFF the power supply to external systems when
the PLC is not operating. (See 5-1 Fail-safe Circuits for more details on the
emergency stop circuit.)
Contact form
Maximum switching
capacity
168
CS1D-PA207R
SPST-NO
240 V AC: 2 A for resistive loads
120 V AC: 0.5 A for inductive loads
24 V DC: 2 A for resistive loads
2 A for inductive loads
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
Wiring Example: RUN Output
POWER
PA207R
POWER
L2/N
PA207R
L2/N
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
L1
L1
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
Power
supply
RUN
OUT450V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
Control circuits
in controlled system
Emergency
stop circuit
Wiring
Terminal screws
Recommended wire size
M3.5 self-rising screws
AWG 20 to 14 (0.517 to 2.08 mm2)
0.8 N·m
Recommended tightening
torque
Recommended crimp terminals
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
Manufacturer
JST Mfg.
Models
V1.25-YS3A
Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
0.25 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG
22 to 16)
V1.25-M3(RAV1.25-3.5) Round terminal
with sleeve
V2-YS3A
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
1.04 to 2.63 mm2 (AWG
16 to 14)
V2-M3(RAV2-3.5)
Note
Shape
Round terminal
with sleeve
1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.
7 mm max.
20 mm max.
M3.5 self-raising terminals
Torque to 0.8 N . m
169
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
!Caution Tighten the AC power supply terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N⋅m.
Loose screws may result in short-circuit, malfunction, or fire.
Note
1. Be sure to check the setting of the voltage selector before supplying power.
2. Always remove the label from the top of the Power Supply Unit after wiring
the Unit. The label will block air circulation needed for cooling.
DC Power Supply Models
Note Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring procedures. Do not forget to remove the
label from the top of the Unit after wiring the Unit. The label will block air circulation needed for cooling.
CS1D-PD024/025 Power Supply Unit
POWER
PD024
M3.5 self-raising terminals
L2/N
DC24V
L1
DC power source
NC
NC
NC
NC
DC Power Source
Supply 24 V DC. Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range (19.2 to
28.8 V DC).
Power Supply Capacity
The maximum power consumption is 40 W per Rack for the CS1D-PD024 and
60 W per Rack for the CS1D-PD025, but there will be a surge current of about
five times that level when the power is turned ON.
Wiring
Terminal screws
M3.5 self-rising screws
Recommended wire size
AWG 20 to 14 (0.517 to 2.08 mm2)
0.8 N·m
Recommended tightening
torque
170
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
Recommended crimp terminals
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
Manufacturer
JST Mfg.
Models
V1.25-YS3A
Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
0.25 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG
22 to 16)
V1.25-M3(RAV1.25-3.5) Round terminal
with sleeve
V2-YS3A
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
1.04 to 2.63 mm2 (AWG
16 to 14)
V2-M3(RAV2-3.5)
Note
Shape
Round terminal
with sleeve
1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.
3. Be sure not to reverse the positive and negative leads when wiring the
power supply terminals.
Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.
4. Do not forget to remove the label from the top of the Unit after wiring the
Unit. The label will block air circulation needed for cooling.
Grounding
POWER
PA207R
L2/N
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
L1
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
LG (Noise-filter neutral terminal)
Ground this terminal to less than 100 Ω to improve
noise resistance and prevent electric shock.
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
GR (Ground terminal)
Ground this terminal to less than 100 Ω to prevent
electric shock.
• To help prevent electrical shock, ground the ground terminal (GR:
)
with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω using a 14-gauge wire (minimum cross-sectional area of 2 mm2).
• The line ground terminal (LG: ) is a noise-filtered neutral terminal. If
noise is a significant source of errors or electrical shocks are a problem,
connect the line ground terminal to the ground terminal and ground both
with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω.
• To prevent electrical shock, always ground the LG-GR terminals to a
ground resistance of less than 100 Ω if these are connected to each
other.
• The ground wire should not be more than 20 m long.
• Using the same ground line is used together with other equipment, such
as motors and inverters, or connecting the ground line to structural parts
of buildings may actually increase noise and may have a negative affect
on operation.
171
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
CS1D PLC
Other equipment
LG
GR
GR
Ground
(100 Ω or less)
CS1D PLC
Ground
(100 Ω or less)
Other equipment
LG
GR
GR
Ground
(100 Ω or less)
Ground
(100 Ω or less)
• Do not share the PLC’s ground with other equipment or ground the PLC
to the metal structure of a building. The configuration shown in the following diagram may worsen operation.
CS-series PLC
Other equipment (motor, inverter, etc.)
Grounding Long-distance Expansion Racks
A difference in potential will occur between remote ground points if more than
one point is grounded on the CPU Rack and Long-distance Expansion Racks
in a CS1 Long-distance Expansion System. This is caused by high-frequency
noise from power lines, potential and phase differences between power lines,
and other factors. To prevent noise from entering on the GR (ground) terminal
as a result of a difference in potential, wire the system as shown below.
• Connect all of the GR terminals on the Racks and ground them at one
point only to 100 Ω or less.
• Short the LR terminals to the GR terminals.
• Use a ground wire of 2 mm2 min.
• Insert 1:1 isolating transformers into the power supply lines and do not
ground the secondary sides of the transformers.
172
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
Recommended Wiring
IC101
I102
CPU
L2
L1
1:1 Isolating
transformer
L2
L1
LG
GR
LG
GR
CPU Rack
1:1 Isolating
transformer
Match to the I/O
Expansion Cable.
Expansion Rack
I/O Expansion Cable
Control panel
Control panel
Wiring Susceptible to Noise
IC101
I102
CPU L2
L1
L2
L1
LG
GR
LG
GR
Noise source
Expansion Rack
CPU Rack
I/O Expansion Cable
Control panel
Grounded to building
Control panel
Wiring Communications Lines
When using communications from one or more Rack in the system, ground
the entire system so that only one point is grounded. (Refer to user documentation for the devices connected.) For detailed connection methods, refer to
the Operation Manual for the Communications Unit.
Recommended Wiring
Control panel
Control panel
IC101
II102 Expansion
CPU Rack
Rack
GR
GR
I/O Expansion Cable
GR
Wiring Susceptible to Noise
Control panel
Control panel
IC101
CPU Rack
II102
GR
Expansion Rack
GR
I/O Expansion Cable
Noise source
GR
173
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
Wiring
Terminal screws
Recommended wire size
Recommended tightening
torque
M3.5 self-rising screws
AWG 14 min. (2 mm2 min.)
0.8 N·m
Recommended crimp terminals
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
Manufacturer
JST Mfg.
Models
Shape
V2-YS3A
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
Round terminal
with sleeve
V2-M3(RAV2-3.5)
Note
Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
1.04 to 2.63 mm2 (AWG
16 to 14)
1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.
5-4-2
Wiring CS-series Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks
I/O Unit Specifications
Double-check the specifications for the I/O Units. In particular, do not apply a
voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the maximum switching capacity for Output Units. Doing so may result in breakdown, damage, or
fire.
When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, be sure to wire
them correctly.
Wire Sizes
The following wire gauges are recommended.
Wire Size
AWG 22 (0.32
mm2)
Note The current capacity of electric wire depends on factors such as the ambient
temperature and insulation thickness as well as the gauge of the conductor.
Wiring
Terminal screws
Recommended wire size
Recommended tightening
torque
M3.5 self-rising screws
AWG 22 to 18 (0.326 to 0.823 mm2)
0.8 N·m
Recommended crimp terminals
CS-series Basic I/O Units with 20-terminal Terminal Blocks
6.5 mm max.
Manufacturer
JST Mfg.
Note
174
7 mm max.
Models
V1.25-YS3A
Shape
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
V1.25-M3(RAV1.25-3.5) Round terminal
with sleeve
1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
0.25 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG
22 to 16)
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.
• Confirm that the Units have been mounted properly.
• Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring procedures.
• Remove the label after wiring has been completed to allow air circulation
needed for cooling.
During wiring
After wiring
Remove the label.
CS
ERR
0 1 2
3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10
11 12 13
14 15
CS
ERR
0 1 2
3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10
11 12 13
14 15
• Wire the Units so that they can be easily replaced.
• In addition, make sure that the I/O indicators are not covered by the wiring.
• Do not place the wiring for I/O Units in the same duct or raceway as power
lines. Inductive noise can cause errors in operation.
• Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0.8 N⋅m.
m
18 m
Screw (3.5 mm screw with
self-raising pressure plate)
175
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
Terminal Blocks
The I/O Units are equipped with removable terminal blocks. The lead wires do
not have to be removed from the terminal block to remove it from an I/O Unit.
The terminal block can be removed by taking out the terminal block mounting
screws.
CS
ERR
0 1 2
3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10
11 12 13
14 15
Terminal block mounting screws
(black screws under cover)
CS1-series Basic I/O Units
5-4-3
Wiring CS-series Basic I/O Units with Connectors
This section describes wiring CS-series Basic I/O Units with Connectors (32-,
64-, and 96-point Units). The user can combine a special connector with cable
or use a preassembled OMRON cable to connect a High-density I/O Unit to a
terminal block or I/O Terminal.
Note
1. Be sure not to apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units
or the maximum switching capacity for Output Units.
2. When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, be sure to
wire them correctly.
3. Use reinforced insulation or double insulation on the DC power supply connected to DC I/O Units when required by EC Directives (low voltage).
4. When connecting the connector to the I/O Unit, tighten the connector
screws to a torque of 0.2 N⋅m.
5. Turn ON the power after checking the connector’s wiring.
6. Do not pull the cable. Doing so will damage the cable.
7. Bending the cable too sharply can damage or break wiring in the cable.
Available Connectors
Use the following connectors when assembling a connector and cable.
CS-series 32- and 64-point
I/O Units
The following connectors are recommended for attachment to CS-series 32and 64-point I/O Units.
Connection
Solder-type
(included with Unit)
Pins
OMRON set
40
C500-CE404
Fujitsu parts
Socket: FCN-361J040-AU
Connector bar: FCN-360C040-J2
Crimp-type
40
C500-CE405
Crimp-type
40
C500-CE403
Socket: FCN-363J040
Connector bar: FCN-360C040-J2
Contacts: FCN-363J-AU
FCN-367J040-AU/F
Note Solder-type connectors are included with each Unit.
176
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
CS-series 96-point I/O
Units
The following connectors are recommended for attachment to CS-series 96point I/O Units.
Connection
Solder-type
(included with Unit)
Pins
OMRON set
56
CS1W-CE561
Fujitsu parts
Socket: FCN-361J056-AU
Connector bar: FCN-360C056-J3
Crimp-type
56
CS1W-CE562
Crimp-type
56
CS1W-CE563
Socket: FCN-363J056
Connector bar: FCN-360C056-J3
Contacts: FCN-363J-AU
FCN-367J056-AU/F
Note Solder-type connectors are included with each Unit.
Wire Sizes
We recommend using cable with wire gauges of AWG 28 to AWG 26
(0.2 mm2 to 0.13 mm2). Use cable with external wire diameters of 1.61 mm
max.
Wiring Procedure
1,2,3...
1. Check that each Unit is installed securely.
Note
Do not apply excessive force on the cables.
2. Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring. (Remove the label after wiring has
been completed to allow air circulation needed for cooling.)
Before wiring
After wiring
CS
20
1
CS
20
Remove label
after wiring
1
12
CN1
CN2
CN1
CN2
1
1
1
20
20
B
A
B
A
B
A
A
B
3. When solder-type connectors are being used, be sure not to accidentally
short adjacent terminals. Cover the solder joint with heat-shrink tubing.
177
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
Solder-type connector
included with Unit.
Heat-shrink tubing
Wire (0.2 to 0.13 mm2)
Note Double-check to make sure that the Output Unit’s power supply leads haven’t
been reversed. If the leads are reversed, the Unit’s internal fuse will blow and
the Unit will not operate.
4. Assemble the connector (included or purchased separately) as shown in
the following diagram. (The shape of the 56-pin connector is different.)
Small screws (3)
Connector cover
Small screws (2)
Socket
Connector-attaching
screws
Nuts (3)
Cable-securing
bracket
Nuts (2)
5. Insert the wired connector.
20
12
1
CN1
CN2
1
20
1
B
A
A
B
Basic I/O Unit
Connector
Connector
Basic I/O Unit
6. Remove the protective label after wiring has been completed to allow air
circulation needed for cooling.
178
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
After wiring
Remove label after wiring.
CS
20
1
12
CN1
Connector lock
screws
CN2
1
1
20
B
A
A
B
Tighten the connector-attaching screws to a torque of 0.2 N⋅m.
The following examples show applications for preassembled OMRON Cables.
Contact your OMRON dealer for more details.
Connecting to a Terminal
Block
Two sets of the following Cables and Conversion Units are required.
179
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
CS1 Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID291 (96 input points)
CS1W-OD291 (96 output points)
CS1W-OD292 (96 output points)
CS1W-MD291 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1W-MD292 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
2 required
[email protected]@@H-1 Connecting
Cable for Connector-Terminal
Block Conversion Unit
2 required
Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-60G4 or XW2B-60G5
CS1 Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID291 (96 input points)
CS1W-OD291 (96 output points)
CS1W-OD292 (96 output points)
CS1W-MD291 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1W-MD292 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
[email protected]@@H-2 Connecting
Cable for Connector-Terminal
Block Conversion Unit
2 required
Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-40G4 or XW2B-40G5
Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-20G4 or XW2B-20G5
180
CS1 Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID291 (96 input points)
CS1W-OD291 (96 output points)
CS1W-OD292 (96 output points)
CS1W-MD291 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1W-MD292 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
[email protected]@@H-3 Connecting
Cable for Connector-Terminal
Block Conversion Unit
Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-20G5 or XW2B-20G4
CS1 Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-OD231
CS1W-OD232
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD262
Connecting Cable
[email protected]@@B
[email protected]@@D
Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4, XW2B-40G5,
or XW2C-20GB-IN16
(Connectable to Input Unit
only.)
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
Connecting to a Relay
Terminal
Two sets of the following Cables and Relay Terminals are required.
CS1 Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-MD261 (inputs)
CS1W-OD231
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-MD261 (outputs)
CS1W-OD232
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD262 (outputs)
CS1 Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID291 (96 input points)
CS1W-OD291 (96 output points)
CS1W-OD292 (96 output points)
CS1W-MD291 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1W-MD292 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
#1
#2
#3
[email protected]@@[email protected]@@[email protected]@@
Connecting Cable for Relay Terminals
Connecting Cable
#1: [email protected]@
#2, #3: [email protected]@
2 required
2 sets required
for 64 points
[email protected] Input Relay Terminals or
G7TC-OC16 Output Relay Terminals
(CS1W-OD291/MD291)
G7TC-OC16-1 Output Relay
Terminals (CS1W-OD292/MD292)
#1: [email protected]
1 set required
for 32 points
#2: G7TC-OC16
[email protected]@16
G70A-ZOC16-3 and relays
#3: [email protected]@16-1
G70A-ZOC16-4
Products with the same numbers
#1, #2, and #3 correspond.
5-4-4
Connecting I/O Devices
Input Devices
Use the following information for reference when selecting or connecting input
devices.
DC Input Units
The following types of DC input devices can be connected.
• Contact output
IN
DC Input Unit
COM
• Two-wire DC output
IN
+
DC Input Unit
COM +
Sensor Power
Supply
181
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
• NPN open-collector output
Sensor Power
Supply
+
Output
IN
7 mA
0V
COM +
DC Input Unit
• NPN current output
+
Current
regulator
Output
DC Input Unit
IN
+
7 mA
0V
COM
Sensor Power
Supply
• PNP current output
Sensor Power
Supply
+
Output
AC/DC Input Unit
IN
7 mA
0V
COM
• Voltage current output
+
COM +
Output
DC Input Unit
IN
0V
Sensor Power
Supply
The circuit below should NOT be used for I/O devices having a voltage output.
Sensor Power
Supply
+
DC Input Unit
Output
0V
182
IN
COM
−
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
AC Input Units
• Contact output
IN
AC Input Unit
COM
• AC switching
IN
Proximity
switch
main
circuit
AC Input Unit
COM
Note When using a reed switch as the input contact for an AC Input Unit, use a
switch with an allowable current of 1 A or greater. If Reed switches with
smaller allowable currents are used, the contacts may fuse due to surge currents.
Precautions when
Connecting a Two-wire DC
Sensor
When using a two-wire sensor with a 12-V DC or 24-V DC input device, check
that the following conditions have been met. Failure to meet these conditions
may result in operating errors.
1,2,3...
1. Relation between voltage when the PLC is ON and the sensor residual
voltage:
VON ≤ VCC – VR
2. Relation between voltage when the PLC is ON and sensor control output
(load current):
IOUT (min) ≤ ION ≤ IOUT (max.)
ION = (VCC – VR – 1.5 [PLC internal residual voltage])/RIN
When ION is smaller than IOUT (min), connect a bleeder resistor R. The
bleeder resistor constant can be calculated as follows:
R ≤ (VCC – VR)/(IOUT (min.) – ION)
Power W ≥ (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
3. Relation between current when the PLC is OFF and sensor leakage current:
IOFF ≥ Ileak
If Ileak is larger than IOFF, connect a breeder resistor. The breeder resistor
constant can be calculated as follows:
R ≤ RIN × VOFF/(Ileak × RIN – VOFF)
Power W ≥ (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
183
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
DC Input Unit
VR
Two-wire sensor
R
RIN
VCC
VR: Sensor output residual current
IOUT: Sensor control current (load current)
Ileak: Sensor leakage current
R: Bleeder resistance
VCC: Power voltage
VON: PLC ON voltage
VOFF: PLC OFF voltage
ION: PLC ON current
IOFF: PLC OFF current
RIN: PLC input impedance
4. Precautions on Sensor Surge Current
An incorrect input may occur if a sensor is turned ON after the PLC has
started up to the point where inputs are possible. Determine the time required for sensor operation to stabilize after the sensor is turned ON and
take appropriate measures, such as inserting into the program a timer delay after turning ON the sensor.
Example
In this example, the sensor’s power supply voltage is used as the input to
CIO 000000 and a 100-ms timer delay (the time required for an OMRON
Proximity Sensor to stabilize) is created in the program. After the Completion Flag for the timer turns ON, the sensor input on CIO 000001 will cause
output bit CIO 000100 to turn ON.
000000
TIM
0000
#0001
TIM0000 000001
000100
Output Wiring Precautions
Output Short-circuit
Protection
If a load connected to the output terminals is short-circuited, output components and the and printed circuit boards may be damaged. To guard against
this, incorporate a fuse in the external circuit. Use a fuse with a capacity of
about twice the rated output.
Transistor Output
Residual Voltage
A TTL circuit cannot be connected directly to a transistor output because of
the transistor’s residual voltage. It is necessary to connect a pull-up resistor
and a CMOS IC between the two.
Output Leakage Current
If a Triac Output Unit is used to drive a low-current load, the leakage current
may prevent the output device from turning OFF. To prevent this, connect a
bleeder resistor in parallel with the load as shown in the following diagram.
OUT
L
Load power
supply
SYSMAC
COM
Bleeder resistor
184
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
Use the following formula to determine the resistance and rating for the
bleeder resistor.
R<
Output Surge Current
VON: ON voltage of the load (V)
I: Leakage current (mA)
R: Bleeder resistance (KΩ)
VON
I
When connecting a transistor or triac output to an output device having a high
surge current (such as an incandescent lamp), steps must be taken to avoid
damage to the transistor or triac. Use either of the following methods to
reduce the surge current.
Method 1
Add a resistor that draws about 1/3 of the current consumed by the bulb.
L
OUT
+
R
SYSMAC
COM
Method 2
Add a control resistor as shown in the following diagram.
R
OUT
L
+
SYSMAC
COM
5-4-5
Reducing Electrical Noise
I/O Signal Wiring
Whenever possible, place I/O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or
raceways both inside and outside of the control panel.
1 = I/O cables
2 = Power cables
1
2
1
2
In-floor duct
1
2
Conduits
Suspended duct
If the I/O wiring and power wiring must be routed in the same duct, use
shielded cable and connect the shield to the GR terminal to reduce noise.
Inductive Loads
When an inductive load is connected to an I/O Unit, connect a surge suppressor or diode in parallel with the load as shown below.
185
Section 5-4
Wiring Methods
IN
Diode
L
L
OUT
Relay output
or triac output
DC input
COM
COM
Surge suppressor
OUT
+
Relay output or
transistor output
COM
Diode
Note Use surge suppressors and diodes with the following specifications.
Resistance:
Capacitor:
Voltage:
50 Ω
0.47 µF
200 V
Breakdown voltage:
3 times load voltage min.
Mean rectification current: 1 A
External Wiring
Observe the following precautions for external wiring.
• When multi-conductor signal cable is being used, avoid combining I/O
wires and other control wires in the same cable.
• If wiring racks are parallel, allow at least 300 mm (12 inches) between the
racks.
Low-current cables
PLC I/O wiring
Control cables
300 mm min.
PLC power supply and
general control circuit wiring
Power cables
300 mm min.
Power lines
Ground to 100 Ω or less
If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they must
be shielded from each other using grounded steel sheet metal.
PLC power supply
and general
PLC I/O wiring control wiring
Power lines
Steel sheet metal
200 mm min.
Ground to 100 Ω or less
186
SECTION 6
PLC Setup
This section describes the settings in the PLC Setup and how they are used to control CPU Unit operation.
6-1
6-2
Overview of PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
6-1-1
Duplex System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
6-1-2
Settings Other Than Those for Duplex Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
6-1-3
Tab Pages for Duplex Settings in the PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
Specific PLC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
6-2-1
Startup Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
6-2-2
CPU Unit Tab Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
193
6-2-3
Timings Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
196
6-2-4
SIOU Refresh Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
198
6-2-5
Unit Settings Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
199
6-2-6
Host Link Port Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200
6-2-7
Peripheral Port Tab Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
6-2-8
Peripheral Service Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
6-2-9
FINS Protection Tab Page (Single CPU Systems Only). . . . . . . . . .
211
6-2-10 Comms Unit Duplex Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
212
6-2-11 CPU Duplex Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
6-2-12 Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219
187
Section 6-1
Overview of PLC Setup
6-1
Overview of PLC Setup
The PLC Setup contains basic CPU Unit software settings that the user can
change to customize PLC operation. These settings can be changed from a
Programming Console or other Programming Device. The various settings for
the CPU Unit are made in the PLC Setup.
6-1-1
Duplex System Settings
The following table lists cases in which the PLC Setup must be changed for
Duplex Systems.
Cases when settings must be changed
Reducing startup time when power is turned ON
Automatically returning to Duplex Mode after switching to
Simplex Mode (continuing operation in Duplex Mode with a
CPU Unit in which an operation switching error has
occurred)
PLC Setting(s) to be changed
CPU Duplex Tab Page
Run under Duplex Initial
(See note 1.)
(under Operation Settings)
Return Automatically (under
Operation Settings)
Starting operation if either of the CPU Units is normal when
the power is turned ON.
• Run under Duplex Initial
(under Operation Settings)
• When an operation switching error occurs in the
Active CPU Unit, the
Standby CPU Unit will
become the Active CPU
Unit and start operating
(See note 5.)
Using the RS-232C port on the standby CPU Unit to independently (i.e., independent from the active CPU Unit’s
serial port) monitor operation via an RS-232C cable (write
operations not allowed)
CPU Duplex Tab Page,
STB Serial Settings
(See note 1.)
Allow STB-COMM
Reducing the increase in the Using CPU Units containing
cycle time when initializing
the same program
duplex operation
Not using the EM Area in the
user program, data links, etc.
CPU Duplex Tab Page,
CPU Unit Duplex Transfer
Settings
(See note 1.)
Transfer Program
Setting duplex operation for Memory Cards (See note 3.)
CPU Duplex Tab Page,
Memory Card Setting
(See note 1.)
Removing a Unit that is operating without using the CPU
Unit’s Programming Device
Making I/O bus errors due to Unit failure non-fatal errors
Replacing a Unit during operation without using the CPU
Unit’s Programming Device
Setting I/O bus errors as non-fatal errors when they are
caused by a Unit failure
Turning ON the following Special I/O Unit Error, Unit Number Flags and when a Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit
Error, Unit Number Flags during online Unit replacement.
Special I/O Units: A41800 to 42315
CPU Bus Units: A41700 to 41715
CPU Duplex Tab Page,
Online Replacement
(See note 4.)
CPU Duplex Tab Page,
Online Replacement
(See notes 5 and 6.)
Allow removing Units without support software
CPU Duplex Tab Page,
Online Replacement
(See notes 5 and 6.)
When removing any special
unit, turn ON the error unit
flag
Note
• Transfer EM
• Division Size
Enable Memory Card Duplex
Setting
Enable removal/addition of
units without support software
1. Duplex CPU Systems only.
2. CS1D CPU Unit Ver. 1.1 or later and CX-Programmer version 4.0 or later
only.
3. CX-Programmer version 3.1 or higher.
4. This function is supported only by Duplex CPU Units with Unit Ver. 1.2 or
later and CX-Programmer version 6.1 or higher.
188
Section 6-1
Overview of PLC Setup
5. This function is supported only by Duplex CPU Units with Unit Ver. 1.3 or
later.
6. As of October 2006, these settings can be selected with the Programming
Console only. The settings will be added to the CX-Programmer in the next
version upgrade. The settings will be added to CX-Programmer version 7.0
when its functions are expanded by auto-update.
Making Settings from the CX-Programmer
When using CX-Programmer version 3.0 or higher, set the device type to
“CS1H-H” in the PLC Setup and select Duplex Settings from the Options
Menu on the PLC Settings Window to enable setting the PLC Setup for a
CS1D.
When using CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher and the device type is set
to “CS1S-H” or “CS1D-S,” is it not necessary to select Duplex Settings from
the Options Menu on the PLC Settings Window to enable setting the PLC
Setup for a CS1D.
6-1-2
Settings Other Than Those for Duplex Systems
The following table lists cases in which the PLC Setup must be changed for
aspects of operation not directly related to duplex operation.
Cases when settings must be changed
Setting(s) to be changed
The input response time settings for Basic I/O Units must be changed in the Basic I/O Unit Input Response Time
following cases:
• Chattering or noise occur in CS-series Basic I/O Units.
• Short pulse inputs are being received for intervals longer than the cycle
time.
Data in all regions of I/O Memory (including the CIO Area, Work Areas,
IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup
Timer Flags and PVs, Task Flags, Index Registers, and Data Registers)
must be retained when the PLC’s power is turned ON.
The status of bits force-set or force-reset from a Programming Device
Forced Status Hold Bit Status at Startup
(including Programming Consoles) must be retained when the PLC’s power
is turned on.
• You do not want the operating mode to be determined by the Programming Startup Mode
Console’s mode switch setting at startup.
• You want the PLC to go into RUN mode or MONITOR mode and start operating immediately after startup.
• You want the operating mode to be other than PROGRAM mode when the
power is turned ON.
Disabling detection of low-battery errors when it is not required.
Detecting interrupt-task errors is not required.
Data files are required but a Memory Card cannot be used or the files are
written frequently. (Part of the EM Area will be used as file memory.)
Detect Low Battery
Detect Interrupt Task Error (See note.)
EM File Memory
189
Section 6-1
Overview of PLC Setup
Cases when settings must be changed
Setting(s) to be changed
The peripheral port will not be used with the Programming Console or CX- Peripheral Port Settings
Programmer (peripheral bus) communications speed auto-detection and will
not used the default host link communications settings such as 9,600 bps.
Note With a Duplex CPU System, the PRPHL setting on the DIP switch on
the front of the Duplex Unit must be ON to change the PLC Setup
settings. With a Single CPU System, pin 4 the DIP switch on the
front of the CPU Unit must be ON.
The RS-232C port will not be used with the Programming Console or CXRS-232C Port Settings
Programmer (peripheral bus) communications speed auto-detection and will
not use the default host link communications settings such as 9,600 bps.
Note With a Duplex CPU System, the COMM setting on the DIP switch on
the front of the CPU Unit must be OFF to change the PLC Setup
settings. With a Single CPU System, pin 5 the DIP switch on the
front of the CPU Unit must be OFF.
You want to speed up communications with a PT via an NT Link.
Set the peripheral port or the RS-232C port
communications port baud rate to “highspeed NT Link.”
You want the intervals for scheduled interrupts to be set in units of 1 ms
rather than 10 ms.
Schedules Interrupt Time Units (See note.)
You want CPU Unit operation to be stopped for instruction errors, i.e., when Instruction Error Operation
the ER Flag or AER Flag is turned ON. (You want instruction errors to be
fatal errors.)
You want to find the instructions where instruction errors are occurring
(where the ER Flag is turning ON).
You want a minimum cycle time setting to create a consistent I/O refresh
Minimum Cycle Time
cycle.
You want to set a maximum cycle time other than 1 second (10 ms to
40,000 ms).
Watch Cycle Time
You want to delay peripheral servicing so that it is executed over several
cycles.
Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time (See note.)
You want to give priority to servicing peripherals over program execution.
Here, “peripherals” include CPU Bus Units, Special I/O Units, Inner Boards,
the built-in RS-232C port, and the peripheral port.
A power OFF interrupt task will be used.
You want to extend the detection of a power interruption.
IORF is executed in an interrupt task. (See note.)
You want to shorten the average cycle time when a lot of Special I/O Units
are being used.
You want to extend the I/O refreshing interval for Special I/O Units.
You want to improve both program execution and peripheral servicing
response.
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode (See
note.)
Power OFF Interrupt Task
Power OFF Detection Delay Time
Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing
CPU Processing Mode (See note.)
You do not want to wait for Units and Boards to complete startup processing Startup Condition
to start CPU Unit operation.
You do not want to record user-defined errors for FAL(006) and FPD(269) in FAL Error Log Registration
the error log.
You want to reduce fluctuation in the cycle time caused by text string processing.
Note Single CPU Systems only.
190
Background Execution for Table Data, Text
String, and Data Shift Instructions (See
note.)
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
6-1-3
Tab Pages for Duplex Settings in the PLC Setup
The location of duplex settings and the tab labels in CX-Programmer are different between version [email protected] and version 4.0 or higher.
Settings
CX-Programmer Ver. [email protected]
CPU Unit duplex settings
Duplex Tab Page
Communications duplex
settings
CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0
or higher
Comms Unit Duplex Tab
Page
CPU Duplex Tab Page
The CX-Programmer version 4.0 tab labels are used in this manual.
6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
The Programming Console addresses given in this section are used to access
and change settings in the PLC Setup when using a Programming Console or
the Programming Console function of an NS-series Programming Terminal.
The PLC Setup is stored in the Parameter Area, which can be accessed only
from a Programming Device. Do not use the Programming Console
addresses as operands in programming instructions. They will be interpreted
as addresses in the CIO Area of I/O memory.
6-2-1
Startup Tab Page
Startup Hold Settings
Forced Status Hold Bit
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
80
14
Settings
0: Cleared
1: Retained
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines whether or not the A50013
status of the Forced Status Hold Bit
(Forced Sta(A50013) is retained at startup.
tus Hold Bit)
When you want all of the bits that have been
force-set or force-reset to retain their forced
status when the power is turned on, turn ON
the Forced Status Hold Bit and set this setting to 1 (ON).
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
191
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
IOM Hold Bit
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
80
15
Settings
0: Cleared
1: Retained
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting determines whether or not the A50012 (IOM At startup
status of the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is
Hold Bit)
retained at startup.
When you want all of the data in I/O Memory
to be retained when the power is turned on,
turn ON the IOM Hold Bit and set this setting to 1 (ON).
Mode Setting
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
81
---
Settings
Program: PROGRAM
mode
Monitor: MONITOR mode
Run: RUN mode
Use programming console:
Programming Console’s
mode switch
Default: Program
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines whether the Startup --Mode will be the mode set on the Programming Console’s mode switch or the mode set
here in the PLC Setup.
If this setting is PRCN and a Programming
Console isn’t connected, startup mode will
be RUN mode.
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
Execution Settings (Single CPU Systems Only)
Setting to Start Program without Waiting for Specific Units/Inner Board (Single CPU Systems Only)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
83
Bit(s)
15
Settings
0: Wait for Units and
Boards.
1: Don’t wait.
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
To start the CPU Unit in MONITOR or PRO- --GRAM mode even if there is one or more
Boards or Units that has not completed startup processing, set this setting to 1 (Don’t
wait for Units and Boards). (The operation
for Inner Boards, however, also depends on
the next setting.)
To wait for all Units and Boards to finish startup processing, set this setting to 0 (Wait for
Units and Boards).
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
192
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Enable Setting in Word 83 for Inner Boards (Single CPU Systems Only)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
84
15
Settings
0: Wait for Boards.
1: Don’t wait.
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
To start the CPU Unit in MONITOR or PRO--GRAM mode even if there is one or more of
Boards that has not completed startup processing, set this setting to 1 (Don’t wait for
Boards).
To wait for all Boards to finish startup processing, set this setting to 0 (Wait for Boards).
This setting is valid only if the Startup Condition is set to 1 (Don’t wait for Units and
Boards).
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
6-2-2
CPU Unit Tab Page
Execute Process
Detect Low Battery
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
128
Settings
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
Bit(s)
15
0: Detect
1: Do not detect
Default: 0
This setting determines whether CPU Unit
battery errors are detected. If this setting is
set to 0 and a battery error is detected, the
ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will
flash and the Battery Error Flag (A40204)
will be turned ON, but CPU Unit operation
will continue.
A40204 (Bat- Takes effect
tery Error
the next cycle
Flag)
193
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Detect Interrupt Task Error (Single CPU Systems Only)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
128
14
Settings
0: Detect
1: Do not detect
Default: 0
Function
This setting determines whether interrupt
task errors are detected. If this setting is set
to 0 and an interrupt task error is detected,
the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will
flash and the Interrupt Task Error Flag
(A40213) will be turned ON, but CPU Unit
operation will continue.
Related
flags and
words
A40213
(Interrupt
Task Error
Flag)
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
the next cycle
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
Stop CPU on Instruction Error (Instruction Error Operation)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
197
Bit(s)
15
Settings
0: Continue
1: Stop
Default: 0
Function
This setting determines whether instruction
errors (instruction processing errors (ER)
and illegal access errors (AER)) are treated
as non-fatal or fatal errors. When this setting
is set to 1, CPU Unit operation will be
stopped if the ER or AER Flags is turned
ON (even when the AER Flag is turned ON
for an indirect DM/EM BCD error).
Related Flags: A29508 (Instruction Processing Error Flag)
A29509 (Indirect DM/EM BCD Error Flag)
A29510 (Illegal Access Error Flag)
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A29508,
Takes effect
A29509,
at the start of
A29510
operation
(If this setting
is set to 0,
these flags
won’t be
turned ON
even if an
instruction
error occurs.)
Don’t Register FAL to Error Log (User-defined FAL Error Storage)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
129
15
194
Settings
0: Record userdefined FAL errors
in error log.
1: Don’t record userdefined FAL errors
in error log.
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines if user-defined FAL --errors created with FAL(006) and time monitoring for FPD(269) will be recorded in the
error log (A100 to A199). Set it to 1 so prevent these errors from being recorded.
New setting’s effectiveness
Whenever
FAL(006) is
executed
(every cycle)
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Memory Allocation Settings
EM File Setting Enabled
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
136
Settings
Function
0: None
1: EM File Memory
Enabled
Default: 0
This setting determines whether part of the
EM Area will be used for file memory.
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
Bit(s)
7
---
After initialization from
Programming Device
or via FINS
command.
EM Start File No. (Starting Memory Starting Bank)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
136
Bit(s)
0 to 3
Settings
Function
0 to C hex (0 to 12)
Default: 0
If bit 7 (above) is set to 1, the setting here
specifies the EM bank where file memory
begins. The specified EM bank and all subsequent banks will be used as file memory.
This setting will be disabled if bit 7 is set to
0.
Related
flags and
words
A344 (EM
File Memory
Starting
Bank)
New setting’s effectiveness
After initialization from
Programming Device
or via FINS
command.
Background Execution Settings (Single CPU Systems Only)
Table Data Process Instructions
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
198
15
Settings
Function
0: Not executed in
background
1: Executed in background
Default: 0
This setting determines if Table Data
Instructions will be processed over multiple
cycle times (i.e., processed in the background).
Related
flags and
words
---
New setting’s effectiveness
Start of operation
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
String Data Process Instructions
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
198
14
Settings
Function
0: Not executed in
background
1: Executed in background
Default: 0
This setting determines if Text String Data
Instructions will be processed over multiple
cycle times (i.e., processed in the background).
Related
flags and
words
---
New setting’s effectiveness
Start of operation
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
195
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Data Shift Process Instructions
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
198
13
Settings
Function
Related
flags and
words
0: Not executed in
This setting determines if Data Shift Instruc- --background
tions will be processed over multiple cycle
1: Executed in back- times (i.e., processed in the background).
ground
Default: 0
New setting’s effectiveness
Start of operation
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
Communications Port Number for Background Execution
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
198
Bit(s)
0 to 3
Settings
0 to 7: Communications ports 0 to 7
(internal logical
ports)
Function
Related
flags and
words
The communications port number (internal --logical port) that will be used for background
execution.
New setting’s effectiveness
Start of operation
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
6-2-3
Timings Tab Page
Watch Cycle Time
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
209
196
Bit(s)
0 to 14
Settings
001 to FA0 hex: 10
to 40,000 ms
(10-ms units)
Default: 001 (1 s)
Function
This setting is valid only when bit 15 of 209
is set to 1. The Cycle Time Overrun Flag
(A40108) will be turned ON if the cycle time
exceeds this setting.
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A264 and
A265
(Present
Cycle Time)
At the start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Enable Watch Cycle Time Setting
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
209
15
Settings
0: Default
1: Bits 0 to 14
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
Set to 1 to enable the Watch Cycle Time
A40108
At the start of
Setting in bits 0 to 14. Leave this setting at 0 (Cycle Time operation
for a maximum cycle time of 1 s.
Overrun Flag) (Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Cycle Time (Minimum Cycle Time)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
208
Bit(s)
0 to 15
Settings
0001 to 7D00 hex: 1
to 32,000 ms
(1-ms units)
Default: 0000 hex
(No minimum)
Function
Related
flags and
words
Set to 0001 to 7D00 to specify a minimum
--cycle time (in parallel processing mode, the
cycle time for instruction execution, see
note). If the cycle time is less than this setting, it will be extended until this time
passes. Leave this setting at 0000 for a variable cycle time. (Can’t be changed during
operation.)
New setting’s effectiveness
At the start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Note Single CPU Systems only.
Schedule Interrupt Interval (Single CPU Systems Only)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
195
0 to 3
Settings
0 hex: 10 ms
1 hex: 1.0 ms
Default: 0 hex
Function
Sets the time interval for the scheduled
interrupt task.
Related
flags and
words
---
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation.
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
197
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Power OFF Detection Time (Power OFF Detection Delay Time)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
225
0 to 7
Settings
00 to 0A hex:
0 to 10 ms
(1-ms units)
Default: 00 hex
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines how much of a
--delay there will be from the detection of a
power interruption (approximately 10 to
25 ms for AC power and 2 to 5 ms for DC
power after the power supply voltage drops
below 85% of the rated value) to the confirmation of a power interruption. The default
setting is 0 ms.
If enabled, the power OFF interrupt will be
executed after a power interruption is confirmed (see note). If the power OFF interrupt
is not enabled, the CPU Unit will be reset
and operation will stop.
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup or
at the start of
operation.
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Note Single CPU Systems only.
Power OFF Interrupt Disable (Single CPU Systems Only)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
225
15
Settings
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
When this setting is set to 1, the power OFF --interrupt task will be executed when power
is interrupted.
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
6-2-4
198
SIOU Refresh Tab Page
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup or
at the start of
operation.
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing
Item
Cyclic Refreshing of Units 0 to
15
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
226
0 to 15
Cyclic Refreshing of Units 16
to 31
227
0 to 15
Cyclic Refreshing of Units 32
to 47
228
0 to 15
Cyclic Refreshing of Units 48
to 63
229
0 to 15
Cyclic Refreshing of Units 64
to 79
230
0 to 15
Cyclic Refreshing of Units 80
to 95
231
0 to 15
6-2-5
Settings
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
These settings determine whether
--data will be exchanged between the
specified Unit and the Special I/O
Unit’s allocated words (10 words/
Unit) during cyclic refreshing for Special I/O Units.
Turn ON the corresponding bit to disable cyclic refreshing when several
Special I/O Units are being used and
you don’t want to extend the cycle
time or the cycle time is so short that
the Special I/O Unit’s internal processing can’t keep up.
(Special I/O Units can be refreshed
from the program with IORF(097).)
New setting’s
effectiveness
At the start
of operation
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
Unit Settings Tab Page
199
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Basic I/O Unit Input (Rack) Response Times
Item
Rack 0, Slot 0
Rack 0, Slot 1
Rack 0, Slot 2
Rack 0, Slot 3
Rack 0, Slot 4
Rack 0, Slot 5
Rack 0, Slot 6
Rack 0, Slot 7
Rack 0, Slot 8
Rack 0, Slot 9
Rack 1, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 2, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 3, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 4, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 5, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 6, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 7, Slots 0 to 9
6-2-6
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
10
0 to 7
8 to 15
11
0 to 7
8 to 15
12
0 to 7
8 to 15
13
0 to 7
8 to 15
14
0 to 7
8 to 15
15 to 19 See
20 to 24 Rack 0.
Settings
Function
00 hex: 8 ms
10 hex: 0 ms
11 hex: 0.5 ms
12 hex: 1 ms
13 hex: 2 ms
14 hex: 4 ms
15 hex: 8 ms
16 hex: 16 ms
17 hex: 32 ms
Default:
00 hex (8 ms)
Sets the input response time
(ON response time = OFF
response time) for CS-series
Basic I/O Units. The default
setting is 8 ms and the setting
range is 0.5 ms to 32 ms.
This value can be increased to
reduce the effects of chattering and noise, or it can be
reduced to allow reception of
shorter input pulses.
Related
flags and
words
A220 to
A259:
Actual
input
response
times for
Basic I/O
Units
New setting’s
effectiveness
At startup
25 to 29
30 to 34
35 to 39
40 to 44
45 to 49
Host Link Port Tab Page
With a Duplex CPU System, these settings are valid when the COMM pin on
the DIP switch on the Duplex Unit is turned OFF.
With a Single CPU System, these settings are valid when the pin 5 on the DIP
switch on the CPU Unit is turned OFF.
200
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Host Link Settings
Communications Settings
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
160
Bit(s)
15
Settings
0: Default (standard)*
1: PLC Setup (custom)
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
*The default settings are for 1 start bit, 7
A61902
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud (RS-232C
rate of 9,600 bps.
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Mode: Communications Mode
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
160
8 to 11
Settings
00 hex: Host link
05 hex: Host link
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode. (Host
link can be specified with 00 or 05.)
The Peripheral bus mode is for communications with Programming Devices other than
the Programming Console.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or noprotocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or noprotocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Format: Data Bits
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
160
Settings
Bit(s)
3
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0
Format: Stop Bits
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
160
Settings
Bit(s)
2
0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0
201
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Format: Parity
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
160
0 to 1
Settings
00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or noprotocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or noprotocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting determines the CPU Unit’s unit
number when it is connected in a 1-to-N
(N=2 to 32) Host Link.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Baud Rate (bps)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
161
Bit(s)
0 to 7
Settings
00 hex: 9,600
01 hex: 300
02 hex: 600
03 hex: 1,200
04 hex: 2,400
05 hex: 4,800
06 hex: 9,600
07 hex: 19,200
08 hex: 38,400
09 hex: 57,600
0A hex: 115,200
(Unit: bps)
Default: 00 hex
Unit Number (for CPU Unit in Host Link Mode)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
163
Bit(s)
0 to 7
Settings
00 to 1F hex:
(0 to 31)
Default: 00 hex
NT Link Settings
Mode: Communications Mode
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
160
202
Bit(s)
8 to 11
Settings
02 hex: 1:N NT Link This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in host link mode or
Default: 0
another serial communications mode.
Note Communications will not be possible
with PTs set for 1:1 NT Links.
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Baud Rate (bps)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
161
0 to 7
Settings
00 hex: Standard
0A hex: High-speed
NT Link*
Default: 00 hex
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting determines the highest unit
number of PT that can be connected to the
PLC.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode. (Host
link can be specified with 00 or 05.)
The Peripheral Bus mode is for communications with Programming Devices other than
the Programming Console.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
* Set to 115,200 when setting this value
from the CX-Programmer. To return to the
standard setting, leave the setting set to
“PLC Setup” and set the baud rate to
9,600 bps.
NT Link Max. (Maximum Unit Number in NT Link Mode)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
166
Bit(s)
0 to 3
Settings
0 to 7
Default: 0
Peripheral Bus Settings
Communications Settings
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
160
15
Settings
0: Default (standard)*
1: PLC Setup (custom)
Default: 0
*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.
Mode: Communications Mode
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
160
8 to 11
Settings
04 hex: Peripheral
bus
Default: 0 hex
203
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Baud Rate (bps)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
161
0 to 7
Settings
00 hex: 9,600
06 hex: 9,600
07 hex: 19,200
08 hex: 38,400
09 hex: 57,600
0A hex: 115,200
(Unit: bps)
Default: 00 hex
Function
Related
flags and
words
Settings 00 hex and 06 hex through 0A hex A61902
are valid when the communications mode is (RS-232C
set to peripheral bus.
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
No-protocol Settings
Delay
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
162
Settings
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting determines the delay from execution of TXD(236) until the data is actually
transmitted from the specified port.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
Bit(s)
0 to 15
0000 to 270F hex:
0 to 99990 ms (10ms units)
Default: 0000 hex
Start Code/End Code
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
164
Bit(s)
8 to 15
0 to 7
165
12
8 and 9
0 to 7
204
Settings
00 to FF hex
Default: 00 hex
00 to FF hex
Default: 00 hex
Start code: Set this start code only when the A61902
start code is enabled (1) in bits 12 of 165.
(RS-232C
Port Settings
End code: Set this end code only when the Changing
end code is enabled (1) in bits 8 and 9 of
Flag)
165.
0: None
1: Code in 164
Default: 0
0 hex: None
1 hex: Code in 164
2 hex: CR+LF
Default: 0 hex
Start code setting:
A setting of 1 enables the start code in 164
bits 8 to 15.
00 hex:
256 bytes
01 to FF hex:
1 to 255 bytes
Default: 00 hex
Set the data length to be sent and received
with no-protocol communications. The end
code and start code are not included in the
data length.
Set this value only when the end code setting in bits 8 and of 165 is “0 hex: None.”
This setting can be used to change the
amount of data that can be transferred at
one time by TXD(236) or RXD(235). The
default setting is the maximum value of 256
bytes.
End code setting:
With a setting of 0, the amount of data being
received must be specified. A setting of 1
enables the end code in bits 0 to 7 of 164. A
setting of 2 enables an end code of CR+LF.
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
6-2-7
Peripheral Port Tab Page
With a Duplex CPU System, these settings are valid when the PRPHL pin on
the DIP switch on the Duplex Unit is turned ON.
With a Single CPU System, these settings are valid when the pin 4 on the DIP
switch on the CPU Unit is turned ON.
Host Link Settings
Communications Settings
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
144
Bit(s)
15
Settings
0: Default (standard)*
1: PLC Setup (Custom)
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
*The default settings are for 1 start bit, 7
A61901
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud (Peripheral
rate of 9,600 bps.
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Mode: Communications Mode
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
144
Bit(s)
8 to 11
Settings
00 hex: Host Link
05 hex: Host link
Default: 00 hex
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting determines whether the peripheral port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode. (Host
link can be specified with 00 or 05 hex.)
The peripheral bus mode is for communications with Programming Devices other than
the Programming Console.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
205
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Format: Data Bits
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
144
3
Settings
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to Host link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to Host link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to Host link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to the Host Link mode.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Format: Stop Bits
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
144
Settings
Bit(s)
2
0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0
Format: Parity
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
144
Bit(s)
0 and 1
Settings
00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00
Baud Rate (bps)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
145
206
Bit(s)
0 to 7
Settings
00 hex: 9,600
01 hex: 300
02 hex: 600
03 hex: 1,200
04 hex: 2,400
05 hex: 4,800
06 hex: 9,600
07 hex: 19,200
08 hex: 38,400
09 hex: 57,600
0A hex: 115,200
(Unit: bps)
Default: 00 hex
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Unit Number (for CPU Unit in Host Link Mode)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
147
0 to 7
Settings
00 to 1F hex
(0 to 31)
Default: 00 hex
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting determines the CPU Unit’s unit
number when it is connected in a 1-to-N
(N=2 to 32) Host Link.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting determines the highest unit
number of PT that can be connected to the
PLC in NT Link mode.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
NT Link Settings
Mode: Communications Mode
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
144
8 to 11
Settings
02 hex:1: N NT Link This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in host link mode or
Default: 00 hex
another serial communications mode.
Note Communications will not be possible
with PTs set for 1:1 NT Links.
Baud Rate (bps)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
145
0 to 7
Settings
00 hex: Standard
0A hex: High-speed
NT Link*
Default: 00 hex
Function
* Set to 115,200 when setting this value
from the CX-Programmer.
NT Link Max. (Maximum Unit Number in NT Link Mode)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
150
0 to 3
Settings
0 to 7 hex
Default: 0 hex
207
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Peripheral Bus Settings
Communications Setting
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
144
Bit(s)
15
Settings
0: Default (standard)*
1: PLC Setup (custom)
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting determines whether the communications mode for the peripheral port.
The peripheral bus mode is used for all Programming Devices except for Programming
Consoles.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps
Mode: Communications Mode
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
144
8 to 11
Settings
4 hex: Peripheral
bus
Default: 0 hex
Baud Rate (bps)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
144
0 to 7
6-2-8
208
Settings
00 hex: 9,600
06 hex: 9,600
07 hex: 19,200
08 hex: 38,400
09 hex: 57,600
0A hex: 115,200
(Unit: bps)
Default: 00 hex
The following settings are valid for the
peripheral bus mode: 00 and 06 to 0A hex.
Peripheral Service Tab Page
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
CPU Execution Mode Setting (Sync/Async Comms) (Single CPU Systems Only)
Execution Mode
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
219
Bit(s)
00 to 15
Settings
00
01
02
Default: 00
Note
Function
00: Not specified (disable parallel processing)
01: Synchronous (Synchronous Memory
Access
02: Asynchronous (Asynchronous Memory
Access)
Related
flags and
words
---
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
1. This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems. The default setting
will be used even if the setting is changed.
2. A PLC Setup error will occur if any non-specified value is set.
Set Time to All Events (Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time)
Enable Fixed Servicing Time
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
218
15
Settings
0: Default*
1: Bits 0 to 7
Default: 0
Function
Set to 1 to enable the fixed peripheral servicing time in bits 0 to 7.
*Default: 4% of the cycle time
Related
flags and
words
---
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Fixed Servicing Time
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
218
Bit(s)
0 to 7
Settings
00 to FF hex:
0.0 to 25.5 ms
(0.1-ms units)
Default: 00 hex
Function
Set the peripheral servicing time.
This setting is valid only when bit 15 of 218
is set to 1.
Related
flags and
words
---
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
209
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Peripheral Service Mode (Priority Mode) (Single CPU Systems Only)
Instruction Execution Time
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
219
Bit(s)
08 to 15
Settings
00
05 to FF (hex)
Default: 00 (hex)
Function
Related
flags and
words
00: Disable priority servicing
A266 and
05 to FF: Time slice for instruction execution A267
(5 to 255 ms in 1-ms increments)
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
Peripheral Service Execution Time
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
219
00 to 07
Settings
00 to FF (hex)
Default: 00 (hex)
Function
Related
flags and
words
00: Disable priority servicing
A266 and
01 to FF: Time slice for peripheral servicing A267
(0.1 to 25.5 ms in 0.1-ms increments)
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
Target Units (Units/Boards for Priority Servicing)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
220
221
222
Bit(s)
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
Settings
00
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
E1
FC
FD
Default: 00
Function
Related
flags and
words
Up to five Units and/or Boards can be speci- --fied for priority servicing.
00: Disable priority servicing
10 to 1F: CPU Bus Unit unit number + 10
(hex)
20 to 2F: CS-series Special I/O Unit unit
number + 20 (hex)
E1: Inner Boards
FC: RS-232C port
FD: Peripheral port
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
210
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
6-2-9
FINS Protection Tab Page (Single CPU Systems Only)
Enabling FINS Write Protection (Use FINS Write Protection)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
448
Bit(s)
15
Settings
0: Disable FINS
write protection
1: Enable FINS write
protection
Default: 0
Function
Enables or disables write protection for the
CPU Unit from FINS command sent over a
network (i.e., all connections except for
serial connections).
Related
flags and
words
---
New setting’s effectiveness
At any time
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
Nodes Excluded from Write Protection (Protection Releasing Addresses)
Address in
Programming
Console
Settings
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
Word
Bit(s)
Set the nodes and networks from which FINS write operations will be enabled. The total number of nodes set to be
excluded from write protection will be automatically set.
A maximum of 32 nodes can be set. If these settings are not made (i.e., if the total number of nodes is 0), write operations
will be disabled for all nodes but the local node.
Note: This setting is valid only when FINS write protection has been enabled.
449 to
8 to 15
0 to 127
FINS command source network address
--At any time
480
(00 to 7F hex)
448
0 to 7
1 to 255
FINS command source node address
(01 to FE hex)
Note: 255 (FF hex)
can be set to include
all nodes in the
specified network.
---
0 to 7
0 to 32
(00 to 20 hex)
---
Number of nodes excluded from protection
(Automatically calculated by the CX-Programmer; do not set.)
Note This setting cannot be used with Duplex CPU Systems.
211
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
6-2-10 Comms Unit Duplex Tab Page
There are two methods that can be used for duplex communications: Activestandby and primary-secondary. There are options available for both in the
PLC Setup. The methods that are used depends on the Communications
Units. Refer to the operation manuals for the Communications Units for
details.
Note CX-Programmer version [email protected] supports active-standby duplex communications, but it does not support primary-secondary communications for CS1D
Communications Units.
Active-Standby Settings (Check Boxes for Communications Units 0 to 15)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
121
0 to 15
212
Settings
0: Disable duplex
settings for Communications Units
1: Enable duplex
settings for Communications Units
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
These settings (individual bits) enable or
--disable duplex settings for individual Communications Units. Bits 00 to 15 correspond
to unit numbers 0 to F.
To use Duplex Communications Units, setting them must be enabled here, and then
either the I/O tables must be created automatically, or they must be edited to specify
active and standby modes for the Communications Units and then transferred to the
active CPU Unit.
If necessary, the I/O table editing operations
of the CX-Programmer can be used to specify the slot in which the standby Communications Unit is mounted.
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Primary-Secondary Settings (Check Boxes for CS1D Communications Units 0 to 15)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
95
0 to 15
Settings
0: Disable duplex
settings for Communications Units
1: Enable duplex
settings for Communications Units
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
These settings (individual bits) enable or
--disable duplex settings for individual Communications Units. Bits 00 to 15 correspond
to unit numbers 0 to F. The secondary Communications Unit will be allocated the unit
number one higher than the number
assigned to the primary Communications
Unit.
Set only the unit number for the primary
Communications Unit.
To use Duplex Communications Units, setting them must be enabled here, and then
either the I/O tables must be created automatically, or they must be edited to specify
primary and secondary Units for the Communications Units and then transferred to
the CPU Unit.
If necessary, the I/O table editing operations
of the CX-Programmer can be used to specify the slot in which the secondary Communications Unit is mounted.
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
Note This setting is supported only for CS1D CPU Units Ver. 1.1 or later. CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher must be used to make the setting.
6-2-11 CPU Duplex Tab Page
213
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Duplex Settings
Operation Settings, Run under Duplex Initial
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
123
Bit(s)
14
Settings
0: Do not run during
initialization (start
running after initialization
1: Start running during initialization
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines where operation is --started while the duplex system is being initialized.
In Duplex Mode, duplex initialization starts
after the power supply is turned ON. Normally, operation will begin only after initialization has been completed. This setting
can be used to start operation before initialization has been completed. Use this setting
to reduce startup time when the power is
turned ON.
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
When an operation switching error occurs in the Active CPU Unit, the Standby CPU Unit will become
the Active CPU Unit and start operating.
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
125
13
Settings
Function
0: No check (When
there is an error in
the Active CPU Unit
at startup, the
Standby CPU Unit
stays in standby status.)
1: Check performed
(When there is an
error in the Active
CPU Unit at startup,
the Standby CPU
Unit becomes the
Active CPU Unit and
starts operating.)
Default: 0
This setting determines whether the
Standby CPU Unit will become the Active
CPU Unit and starts operating if an error is
detected in the Duplex CPU Unit set as the
Active Unit when the power is turned ON.
This setting is enabled when the Duplex
system is set to Start under Duplex Initial.
Note
Related
flags and
words
---
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
1. This setting can be used in all of the Duplex CPU Unit versions.
2. This setting can be selected with CX-Programmer version 6.1 or higher.
214
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Operation Settings, Return Automatically
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
123
15
Settings
0: Do not automatically return to
duplex operation
1: Automatically
return to duplex
operation
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
When an error has caused operation to
--switch from Duplex Mode to Simplex Mode,
this setting determines whether the PLC will
attempt to return automatically to Duplex
Mode or will stay in Simplex Mode. An automatic return to Duplex Mode will be
attempted only if the same error does not
reoccur in self-diagnosis.
Automatic recovery can be set to give
Duplex Mode priority for intermittent errors
(e.g., WTD errors) or to eliminate the need
to press the initialization button after replacing a CPU Unit online.
New setting’s effectiveness
Every cycle
Memory Card Duplex Settings
Enable Memory Card Duplex Setting
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
130
Bit(s)
15
Settings
0: Disable duplex
operation for Memory Cards.
1: Enable duplex
operation for Memory Cards.
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
When data is written to Memory Cards, this --setting determines whether it is written to
the Memory Cards mounted in both CPU
Units or to just the Memory Card in the
active CPU Unit.
Note No processing, however, is executed during duplex initialization to
match the data on the Memory
Cards mounted in the active and
standby CPU Units. Therefore,
before enabling duplex operation for
Memory Cards, make sure that the
contents and capacities are the
same for both of the Memory Cards.
Note Data read from the Memory Card
mounted in the active CPU Unit is
used by both the active and standby
CPU Units.
New setting’s effectiveness
Every cycle
Note Memory Card duplex operation can be selected with CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1
or higher.
215
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
STB Serial Settings
Allow STB-COMM
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
127
Bit(s)
0 to 15
Settings
0000 hex: Disable
independent communications on the
standby CPU Unit’s
RS-232C port
5AA5 hex: Enable
independent communications on the
standby CPU Unit’s
RS-232C port
Default: 0000
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines if the RS-232C port --on the standby CPU Unit can be used independently for read-only communications.
To enable continuous communications for
PTs or host computers even when the active
CPU Unit is switched, the RS-232C ports on
both the active and standby CPU Units must
be connected using an RS-232C/RS-422
Adapter. When this is done, set this word to
0000 hex (i.e., disable independent monitoring operation on the standby CPU Unit’s
RS-232C port).
If continuous communications are not
required when the active CPU Unit is
switched, then set this word to 5A5A hex
(i.e., enable independent read-only communications on the standby CPU Unit’s RS232C port).
New setting’s effectiveness
Every cycle
CPU Unit Duplex Transfer Settings
EM Division Transmission, Division Size
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
96
Bit(s)
0 to 7
Settings
00 hex: 4,906 words
01 to 3F hex: 512
words x 1 to 63
Default: 00
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines the number of
--words to transfer each cycle in units of 512
words.
Normally, the default setting for 4,906 words
is used.
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
and at start of
operation
Note If either the Transfer Program or Transfer EM option is selected the specified
division size will be transferred each cycle.
Transfer Program
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
96
216
Bit(s)
15
Settings
0: Transfer program
1: Do not transfer
program
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines if the user program --is transferred to the standby CPU Unit
(including when the standby CPU Unit is
replaced) when duplex operation is started.
If the standby CPU Unit always contains the
same program, then the transfer can be disabled to save time at startup.
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
and at start of
operation
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
EM Division Transmission
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
96
14
Settings
0:Transfer the EM
Area together for
duplex operation
1: Transfer the EM
area over more than
one cycle
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines the method that will --be used to transfer the EM Area all at the
same time or in pieces over more than one
cycle (including when the standby CPU Unit
is replaced).
This setting can be used to reduce the cycle
time by transferring the data in pieces whenever the EM Area is not used by the program, for data links, etc.
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
and at start of
operation
Transfer Parameter Area of Inner Board
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
96
11
Settings
0: Transfer Inner
Board Parameter
Area
1: Do not transfer
Default: 0
Function
This setting determines if the parameter
area is transferred between Duplex Inner
Boards.
Related
flags and
words
---
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
and at start of
operation
Note As of October 2006, there are no Inner Boards to which this setting applies.
Use the default setting.
Transfer Variable Area of Inner Board
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
96
Bit(s)
10
Settings
Function
Related
flags and
words
0: Transfer Inner
This setting determines if the variable area --Board Variable Area is transferred between Duplex Inner Boards.
1: Do not transfer
Default: 0
New setting’s effectiveness
At startup
and at start of
operation
Note As of October 2006, there are no Inner Boards to which this setting applies.
Use the default setting.
217
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
Online Replacement Settings
Enabling Unit Removal without a Programming Device
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
131
0 to 15
Settings
Value other than
5AA5 hex: Online
replacement can be
performed with a
Programming
Device only. (An I/O
bus error will occur if
the Unit is removed
without using a PLC
Programming
Device.)
5AA5 hex: Enable
Unit removal without a Programming
Device.
Default: 0000
Note
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines if a Unit can be
A09911
removed without a PLC Programming
A80015
Device.
A80215
5AA5 hex: When Unit removal without Programming Device is enabled, I/O bus errors
caused by Unit failures are treated as nonfatal errors.
More than one Unit can be replaced at a
time.
A fatal error will occur if an Expansion Rack
Cable, Backplane, Duplex Unit, or Long-distance Expansion I/O Rack is removed or
fails.
New setting’s effectiveness
Every cycle
1. This setting can be used only in Duplex CPU Units with Unit Ver. 1.2 and
later.
2. This setting can be selected with CX-Programmer version 6.1 or higher.
Enabling Unit Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
132
Bit(s)
8 to 15
Settings
Value other than AA
hex: Online replacement can be performed with a
Programming
Device only. (An I/O
bus error will occur if
the Unit is removed
without using a PLC
Programming
Device.)
AA hex: Enable Unit
removal/addition
without a Programming Device.
Default: 00
Note
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines if Units can be
A09911
removed and added without a PLC ProA80015
gramming Device. With this setting, operation will recover automatically even if a Unit A80215
is added.
AA hex: When Removal/Addition of Units
without a Programming Device is enabled,
I/O bus errors caused by Unit failures are
treated as non-fatal errors.
More than one Unit can be replaced at a
time.
A fatal error will occur if an Expansion Rack
Cable, Backplane, Duplex Unit, or Long-distance Expansion I/O Rack is removed or
fails.
New setting’s effectiveness
Every cycle
1. This setting is supported only in CS1D CPU Units with unit version 1.3 or
later and a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System.
If the Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function is
selected in a Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System, the function will
operate as the earlier Unit Removal of without a Programming Device function.
2. As of October 2006, this setting can be selected with the Programming
Console only. The setting will be added to the CX-Programmer in the next
version upgrade. The setting will be added to CX-Programmer version 7.0
when its functions are expanded by auto-update.
218
Section 6-2
Specific PLC Setup Settings
!Caution If the Unit Removal without a Programming Device or Removal/Addition of
Units without a Programming Device function is enabled, I/O bus errors will be
treated as non-fatal errors and the PLC (CPU Unit) will not stop operating
even if a Basic I/O Unit, Special I/O Unit, or CPU Bus Unit fails. If there are
any Units that will adversely affect the system if an I/O bus error occurs, do
not enable the Unit Removal without a Programming Device or Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function in the PLC Setup.
Turning ON Error Unit Number Flag when Removing a Special I/O Unit Error or CPU Bus Unit
(When removing any special unit, turn ON the error unit flag in the CX-Programmer)
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
132
Bit(s)
0 to 7
Settings
AA hex: When a
Special I/O Unit or
CPU Bus Unit is
replaced online, the
corresponding Special I/O Unit Error
Unit Number Flag or
CPU Bus Unit Error
Unit Number Flag
will go ON.
Value other than AA
hex: The Unit Number Flags do not
operate.
Default: 00
Note
Function
When this setting is enabled, the corresponding Unit Number Error Flag (listed
below) will go ON during replacement.
Special I/O Units: A41800 to 42315
CPU Bus Units: A41700 to 41715
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A418 to A423 Every cycle
A417
1. This setting is supported only in CS1D CPU Units with unit version 1.3.
2. As of October 2006, this setting can be selected with the Programming
Console only. The setting will be added to the CX-Programmer in the next
version upgrade. The setting will be added to CX-Programmer version 7.0
when its functions are expanded by auto-update.
6-2-12 Other Settings
Online Replacement: Hot Swap
Replacing Multiple Units Online
Address in
Programming
Console
Word
Bit(s)
122
15
Settings
Function
0: Disable online
replacement of multiple Units
1: Enable online
replacement of multiple Units
Default: 0
This setting determines if only one Unit can
be replaced online at the same time or if
multiple Units can be replaced.
Replacing more than one Unit at a time will
increase the likelihood of operating errors.
Related
flags and
words
---
New setting’s effectiveness
Every cycle
Note This setting is supported only by a Programming Console.
219
Specific PLC Setup Settings
220
Section 6-2
SECTION 7
I/O Allocations
This section describes I/O allocations to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units, and data exchange with
CPU Bus Units.
7-1
I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
7-1-1
Unit Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
7-1-2
Creating I/O Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
I/O Allocation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
7-2-1
I/O Allocations to Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
7-2-2
I/O Allocations to Special I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233
7-2-3
I/O Allocations to CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
7-3
Allocating First Words to Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
7-4
Allocating First Words to Slots (Single CPU Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
237
7-5
Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
240
7-6
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
7-6-1
Special I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
7-6-2
Disabling Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
242
7-6-3
7-2
7-7
CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243
Online Addition of Units and Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
245
7-7-1
Conditions Required for Online Addition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
245
7-7-2
Online Addition Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
7-7-3
Cycle Time Extension during Online Addition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
250
221
Section 7-1
I/O Allocations
7-1
I/O Allocations
In CS1D PLCs, memory must be allocated to the Units mounted in the PLC.
I/O tables containing the models and locations of all Units and the allocations
made to each must be created and these I/O tables must be registered in the
CPU Unit. When the power supply is turned ON, the I/O tables are compared
against the mounted Units to verify their accuracy. The methods for creating
I/O tables are the same for both Duplex CPU and Single CPU Systems.
7-1-1
Unit Types
Memory is allocated differently to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CSseries CPU Bus Units.
Basic I/O Units
Basic I/O Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units
CS
ERR
0 1 2
3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10
11 12 13
14 15
8-point/
16-point Units
I/O Area
CH
0123
4567
32-point Units
Allocation
20
CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 (See note.)
(Memory is allocated in one-word
units based on mounting position in
the Racks.)
CN1
Note: The Rack's first word setting can be
changed from the default setting
(CIO 0000) to any word from CIO 0000 to
CIO 0999. The first word setting can be
changed only with the CX-Programmer.
1
B
A
CH
0123
4567
64-point Units
ICH IICH
0 1
2 3
DISPLA
Y
20
1
CN1
CN2
1
20
B
A
A
B
CH
0123
4567
1 CH
10CH 0 2 4
1 3 5
29
1
CN1
CN2
1
29
B
222
A
A
B
96-point Units
Section 7-1
I/O Allocations
The following table shows the maximum number of Units that can be mounted
in each type of system.
System
Duplex Connecting Cables
Single Connecting Cable
Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System
Single CPU System
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System
Max. number of Units
52
60
68
71
Special I/O Units
Special I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O Units
C200H-00215
Special I/O Unit Area
Allocation
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959
(Each Unit is allocated ten words
based on its unit number setting.)
CS-series CPU Bus Units
CS-series CPU Bus Units
CPU Bus Unit Area
Allocation
CIO 1500 to CIO 1899
(Each Unit is allocated 25 words
based on its unit number setting.)
C200H-00215
RDY
COMM1
COMM2
PORT1
PORT2
SCB21
7-1-2
Creating I/O Tables
There are two ways to allocate I/O memory to CS1D Units.
• Create the I/O tables online based on the Units actually mounted to the
PLC. This can be done from either the CX-Programmer or a Programming
Console. The Programming Device is connected online and then the I/O
tables are created based on the Units that are mounted.
• Create the I/O tables offline without basing them directly on the mounted
Units and then transfer the I/O tables to the PLC. This is done offline on
the CX-Programmer.
The word addresses, number of words, and mounting slot for each Unit are
registered in the CPU Unit as I/O tables. Data is exchanged between the Units
and the CPU Unit, e.g., to help prevent mistakes in mounting when replacing
Units.
223
Section 7-1
I/O Allocations
Creating I/O Tables Based on Mounted Units
Connect a Programming Console or the CX-Programmer to a CPU Unit in a
PLC with all the Units mounted and create the I/O tables. In the I/O table creation operation, information on the Unit models and mounting locations are
registered in the parameter area of the CPU Unit as the registered I/O tables
for all Units mounted to the basic PLC system.
CX-Programmer or Programming Console
I/O table creation operation
Online
Information on models and
positions of mounted Units:
Registered I/O table
Active CPU Unit
Standby CPU Unit
I/O Memory Allocations
When I/O memory is allocated automatically, words are automatically allocated to Units in the order they are mounted to the Racks. Words are allocated to Units from left to right starting on Rack 0 and then left to right on each
Rack through Rack 7.
In order from left to right starting with slot 00
Rack 0
In order from Rack 0
through Rack 7
Rack 1
In order from left to right starting with slot 00
II/O Table Creation with CX-Programmer
Use the following procedure to create the I/O tables online with the CX-Programmer.
1,2,3...
1. Double-click IO Table in the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table
Window will be displayed.
2. Select Options - Create. The models and positions of the Units mounted
to the Racks will be written to the CPU Unit as the registered I/O tables.
224
Section 7-1
I/O Allocations
I/O Table Creation with a Programming Console
Use the following procedure to register the I/O table with a Programming Console.
CLR
FUN
SHIFT
CH
*DM
000000 CT00
000000 I/O TBL ?
Note If the Rack first words have already been set from the CX-Programmer, “Rack 1st Word En” will be displayed on the second line.
9
CHG
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
????
3
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
9713
WRITE
000000CPU BU ST?
0:CLR 1:KEEP
1
7
1
0
CLR
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT OK
000000 CT00
Creating I/O Tables without Mounted Units
With the CX-Programmer, I/O tables can be created offline without mounted
Units and then transferred to the CPU Unit. The information on Unit models
and mounting locations are written to the parameter area of the CPU Unit as
the registered I/O tables.
CX-Programmer
Offline
Unit models and locations
(Registered I/O Tables)
CPU Rack
Unit model
00
01
Unit xx
Unit xx
02
Unit xx
Edit I/O tables and then transfer
them to the CPU Unit.
Edited I/O tables transferred.
I/O tables written to parameter
area in CPU Unit.
Active CPU Unit
Standby CPU Unit
I/O Table Creation with CX-Programmer
Use the following procedure to create the I/O tables offline with the CX-Programmer and then transfer them to the CPU Unit. Once the Units that are to
225
Section 7-1
I/O Allocations
be mounted are set for each Rack, the CX-Programmer will automatically allocate words according to Rack and slot positions starting from CIO 0000.
1,2,3...
1. Double-click IO Table in the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table
Window will be displayed.
2. Double-click the Rack to be edited. The slots will be displayed for the Rack.
3. Right-click the slot to which to assign a Unit and select the Unit from the
pop-up menu.
4. When all the desired Units have been assigned to slots, select Options Transfer to PLC. The I/O tables will be transferred.
With the CX-Programmer, you can also assign any desired word to an I/O Unit
regardless of it’s position on the Racks.
Setting the First Word on a Rack
The first word allocated on a Rack can be set to allocate specific words to the
Units on the Rack regardless of the order in which the Rack is connected.
Words will be allocated consecutively to the Units on the Rack in the order
that Units are mounted to the Rack. Refer to 7-3 Allocating First Words to
Racks for details.
Setting the First Word on Each Rack
Rack 0
The first word for slot 00 on the Rack is set. Words
are then allocated in order to Units from left to right.
Rack 1
The first word for slot 00 on the Rack is set. Words
are then allocated in order to Units from left to right.
Note The first words for Racks cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
slots.
Setting the First Word for a Slot
The first word allocated to the Unit in any slot on any Rack can be set regardless of the order of the Rack or the position of the slot. Words are then allocated in sequence to the following Units in the order they are mounted. Refer
to 7-4 Allocating First Words to Slots (Single CPU Systems Only) for details.
226
Section 7-1
I/O Allocations
Setting the First Words for Specific Slots
A word is set for slot 00 on the CPU Rack for group 00.
A word is set for slot 02 on the CPU Rack for group 01.
Rack 0
Rack 1
A word is set for slot 02 on Rack 1 for group 02.
Note The first words for Racks cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
slots.
Overview
Method
Using actual
mounted Units
Not using
actual
mounted Units
Operation
Perform I/O table
creation online.
Edit the I/O tables
offline and transfer
them to CPU Unit.
Note
Allocations
Rack allocation
order
Slot allocation
order within Rack
Automatic allocations according to
mounting position
Automatic allocations according to
mounting position
In order from Rack 0
to Rack 7
In order from Rack 0
to Rack 7
Left to right from
slot 00
Left to right from
slot 00
Partial manual
allocation without
restrictions by
mounting position
User-set
Left to right from
slot 00
Allocating Rack
first words
Allocation slot first
words
Left to right from
any slot allocated a
first word
1. Always create I/O tables either online or by editing them offline and transferring them to the CPU Unit. The CPU Unit will not be able to recognize
Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, or CPU Bus Units unless I/O tables are
registered in the CPU Unit.
2. For CPU Bus Units can be used even if they are not registered in the I/O
tables, this function is provided to enable online connections from Programming Devices running on personal computers (e.g., the CX-Programmer) and is not intended for normal system operation. Always register I/O
tables in the CPU Unit before starting operation.
3. The C200HX/HG/HE, C200H, and C200HS PLCs use fixed word allocations for slots, enabling operation without I/O tables. I/O tables were created only to prevent Units from being mounted to the wrong slot. With the
CS-series PLCs, the words allocated to any particular slots are not fixed.
Words are merely allocated to the Units actually mounted. If no Unit is
mounted, no words are allocated. If the mounted Unit requires more than
one word, the required number of words is allocated. Operation for CS-series PLCs is thus not possible unless I/O tables are registered.
227
Section 7-2
I/O Allocation Methods
7-2
7-2-1
I/O Allocation Methods
I/O Allocations to Basic I/O Units
Basic I/O Units include the following Units:
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
These Units are allocated words in the I/O Area (CIO 0000 to CIO 0319) and
can be mounted to the CPU Rack, and CS-series Expansion Racks.
Note Refer to 2-14 I/O Table Settings for details.
Allocation Methods
When I/O tables are created in the order of the Racks and the order that Units
are mounted, I/O words will be allocated as described below. If a Programming Console or the CX-Programmer is connected online and the I/O tables
are created automatically according to the Units that are actually mounted,
the CPU Unit will automatically create and register the I/O tables. If the I/O
tables are created offline using the CX-Programmer, the CX-Programmer will
automatically allocate words according to the Unit settings that have been
made.
Basic I/O Units on the CPU Rack
Basic I/O Units on the CPU Rack are allocated words from left to right starting
from CIO 0000 and each Unit is allocated as many words as it requires.
Note
1. Units that have 1 to 16 I/O points are allocated 16 bits (1 word) and Units
that have 17 to 32 I/O points are allocated 32 bits (2 words).
2. I/O words are not allocated to empty slots. To allocate words to an empty
slot, change the I/O table with a Programming Device.
Power Supply Unit
DPL Unit
CPU Unit
0000
CH
CPU Unit
CIO
0000
Power Supply Unit
Duplex CPU System, CPU Rack
CIO
0000
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit
Single CPU System, CPU Rack
Example 1
The following example shows the I/O allocations to 4 Basic I/O Units on the
CPU Rack with one empty slot.
IN
96
CIO CIO CIO
0000 0001 0003
to
0002 0008
228
Empty OUT OUT OUT
96
16
32
IN
32
CIO CIO CIO CIO
0009 0015 0016 0018
to
0017 0019
0014
Power Supply Unit
IN
32
CPU Unit
IN
16
Power Supply Unit
Example for Single CPU System, CPU Rack
Section 7-2
I/O Allocation Methods
Example 2
The following example shows the I/O allocations to 5 Basic I/O Units in the
CPU Rack. Two slots are filled with Dummy Units to reserve I/O words for
those slots.
ReReserved served
OUT OUT OUT
16
32
96
16
32
32
16
32
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0000 0001 0003 0009 0010 0012 0013 0015
0002
to
0008
0011
0014 0016
Power Supply Unit
IN
IN
CPU Unit
IN
Power Supply Unit
Example for Single CPU System, CPU Rack
Note Use the CX-Programmer’s I/O table change operation to reserve words for the
empty slots.
CS1D Expansion Racks
I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units continues from the CPU Rack to the Expansion Rack connected to the CPU Rack. Words are allocated from left to right
and each Unit is allocated as many words as it requires, just like Units in the
CPU Rack.
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CS1D Expansion Rack
8
Power Supply Unit
0
CPU Rack
8
Power Supply Unit
0
CPU Unit
CIO
0000
Power Supply Unit
3
Power Supply Unit
2
Power Supply Unit
1
Power Supply Unit
0
CS1D Expansion Rack
229
Section 7-2
I/O Allocation Methods
Example for Single CPU System
The following example shows the I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units in the CPU
Rack and two CS-series Expansion Racks.
7
IN
16
32 T16
32
96
32
32
32
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0000 0001 0003 0005
0015 0017 0019 0021
32
0002 0004
0016 0018 0020 to
0026
0
IN
1
IN
2
3
4
5
6
ReReserved served OUT OUT OUT
7
8
IN
Reserved
16
16
16
32
16
32
32
96
32
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0027 0028 0030 0031 0032 0034 0035 0037 0043
to
0033
0029
0036
0044
0042
0
1
OUT OUT
32
16
2
3
IN
Reserved
4
IN
ReRe0000 served OUT
served
5
6
16
16
32
CH
16
16
7
32
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0045 0047 0048 0049 0050 0050 0051 0052
0051
0046
0053
Power Supply Unit
6
Power Supply Unit
5
ReOUT
OU OUT served OUT
Single CPU System
CPU Rack
CS1D Expansion Rack
8
OUT
32
CIO
0054
0055
Power Supply Unit
4
Power Supply Unit
IN
3
Power Supply Unit
IN
2
Power Supply Unit
IN
1
CPU Unit
0
CS1D Expansion Rack
Note Use the CX-Programmer’s I/O table change operation to reserve a word for
the empty slot.
Allocations to CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks
In configurations containing CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks, up to
two series of CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks can be included.
Words are automatically allocated to the Units mounted to the Racks in order
of rack number and slot in the same way as for other configurations. The CPU
Rack is rack 0, the CS-series Expansion Rack (if there is one) is Rack 1. Rack
numbers are then assigned in order to the Racks in series A of CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks and finally to the Racks in series B of CSseries Long-distance Expansion Racks, to a maximum rack number of 7.
Although words are automatically allocated, the first word on each Rack can
be set.
Note
1. I/O words are not allocated to the I/O Control Units or I/O Interface Units.
2. No C200H Units of any kind can be mounted to CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Racks.
3. CS-series CPU Bus Units should always be placed on the CPU Rack or
CS-series Expansion Rack. Although they can be placed on CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks, doing so is not recommended because it
will increase the cycle time.
Reserving I/O Words for Expected Changes
If the system configuration will be changed at a later date, changes to the program can be minimized by reserving I/O words in advance for future Unit
changes or additions. To reserve I/O words, edit the I/O table with the CX-Programmer.
230
Section 7-2
I/O Allocation Methods
I/O Table Editing Operation
Double-click IO Table in the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table
Window will be displayed.
• CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or Earlier
Right-click the slot for which a word is to be reserved and select the
Dummy item from under the Basic I/O Unit with the correct number of I/O
points.
• CX-Programmer Ver. 6.0 or Later
Right-click the slot for which a word is to be reserved and select Add Unit
(alternatively, double-click the empty slot).
231
Section 7-2
I/O Allocation Methods
The following Select Unit Dialog Box will be displayed.
Click the expansion button (+) to the left of Basic I/O, select one of the
Dummy Units (CS_Dummy_016/032/048/064/096/128), and click the OK
Button.
Note Do not execute the I/O table creation operation after completing the above
editing operation. The reserved word settings will be lost.
232
Section 7-2
I/O Allocation Methods
7-2-2
I/O Allocations to Special I/O Units
Special I/O Units include the following Units:
• CS-series Special I/O Units
Each of these Units is allocated ten words in the Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) according the unit number set on the Unit.
Special I/O Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack, CS-series Expansion
Racks (see note).
Note Refer to 2-14 I/O Table Settings for more details on the available Special I/O
Units.
Word Allocation
The following table shows which words in the Special I/O Unit Area are allocated to each Unit according to unit number.
Unit number
0
1
2
Words allocated
CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
CIO 2010 to CIO 2019
CIO 2020 to CIO 2029
:
:
15
CIO 2150 to CIO 2159
:
:
95
CIO 2950 to CIO 2959
Special I/O Units are ignored during I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units. Slots
containing Special I/O Units are treated as empty slots and aren’t allocated
any words in the I/O Area.
Example
The following example shows the I/O word allocation to Basic I/O Units and
Special I/O Units in the CPU Rack of a Single CPU System.
Single CPU System, CPU Rack
3
4
IN
IN
IN
Special
I/O
5
OUT OUT
6
Special
I/O
7
OUT
16
32
96
16
32
32
Unit
Unit
0000 0001 0003 2000
0009 0010 2010 0012
32
to
to 0013
0002 to
0011
0008 2009
2019
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Unit
Model number
Words
required
16-point DC Input Unit
CS1W-ID211
1
32-point DC Input Unit
CS1W-ID231
2
96-point DC Input Unit
CS1W-ID291
6
Analog Input Unit
CS1W-AD081-V1 10
16-point Transistor Output Unit CS1W-OD211
1
32-point Transistor Output Unit CS1W-OD232
2
8-point Analog Output Unit
CS1W-DA08C
10
32-point Transistor Output Unit CS1W-OD232
2
Words allocated
Unit
number
CIO 0000
--CIO 0001 and CIO 0002 --CIO 0003 to CIO 0008
--CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
1
CIO 0009
--CIO 0010 and CIO 0011 --CIO 2010 to CIO 2019
2
CIO 0012 and CIO 0013 ---
Power Supply Unit
2
Power Supply Unit
1
CPU Unit
0
Group
Basic I/O Unit
Basic I/O Unit
Basic I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit
Basic I/O Unit
Basic I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit
Basic I/O Unit
233
Section 7-3
Allocating First Words to Racks
7-2-3
I/O Allocations to CPU Bus Units
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 25 words in the CPU Bus Unit Area
(CIO 1500 to CIO 1899) according the unit number set on the Unit. CPU Bus
Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or CS-series Expansion Racks.
Word Allocations
The following table shows which words in the CS-series CPU Bus Unit Area
are allocated to each Unit.
Unit number
Words allocated
CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
CIO 1550 to CIO 1574
0
1
2
:
:
15
CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
CS-series CPU Bus Units are ignored during I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units.
Slots containing CS-series CPU Bus Units are treated as empty slots and
aren’t allocated any words in the I/O Area.
Example
The following example shows the I/O word allocation to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CS-series CPU Bus Units in the CPU Rack of a Single CPU
System.
Single CPU System, CPU Rack
Special
I/O
Unit
OUT
32
3
4
Special
I/O
Unit
5
6
CLK CLK ETN
7
ETN
1500 1525 1550 1575
to
to
to
0000 2000 0002 2010 to
1524 1549 1574 1599
to
to
0001
0003
2019
2009
Slot
Unit
Model number
0
1
2
3
32-point DC Input Unit
Analog Input Unit
32-point Transistor Output Unit
Analog Output Unit
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-AD081
CS1W-SCU21
CS1W-DA08C
2
10
2
10
CIO 0000 and CIO 0001
CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
CIO 0002 and CIO 0003
CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
--0
--1
Basic I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit
Basic I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit
4
5
6
7
Controller Link Unit
Controller Link Unit
Ethernet Unit
Ethernet Unit
CS1W-CLK11
CS1W-CLK11
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-ETN21
25
25
25
25
CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
CIO 1550 to CIO 1574
CIO 1575 to CIO 1599
0
1
2
3
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Bus Unit
7-3
Words
required
Words allocated
Unit
number
Power Supply Unit
32
2
Power Supply Unit
IN
1
CPU Unit
0
Group
Allocating First Words to Racks
In the CS-series PLCs, the first word allocated to each Rack can be set with
the CX-Programmer’s I/O table edit operation. For example, the CPU Rack
can be set to be allocated words starting with CIO 0000; the next Rack, words
starting with CIO 0100; the next Rack, words starting with CIO 0200; etc. This
can make it easier to check word allocations to Units without calculating all the
way from the CPU Rack.
Note The first words for Racks cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
slots.
234
Section 7-3
Allocating First Words to Racks
Word Allocations
For Racks in which the first word address has been set, words are allocated to
Units in the order that the Units are mounted (from left to right) beginning with
the specified first word. Words are not allocated to empty slots.
For Racks in which the first word address has not been set, words are allocated in rack-number order (lowest to highest) continuing from the last word
allocated to the previous rack and starting with CIO 0000 on the first Rack for
which the first word is not set.
Example: Setting the First Words for Racks
In this example, the first words have been set for Racks 0 (the CPU Rack), 2,
and 3. For simplicity, only 16-bit Units have been used.
First word: CIO 0100
2
CIO
0102
3
4
5
CIO
0103
CIO
0104
CIO
0105
6
4
5
6
7
8
CIO
0203
CIO
0204
CIO
0205
CIO
0206
CIO
0207
CIO
0106
7
CIO
0107
Power Supply Unit
1
CIO
0101
Power Supply Unit
CIO
0100
CPU Unit
0
Rack number 0
CPU Rack
0
1
2
CIO
0200
CIO
0201
CIO
0202
3
Power Supply Unit
Rack number 1
Power Supply Unit
First word: CIO 0200
CS1D Expansion Rack
No first word setting (Words automatically allocated in order from CIO 0000.)
4
5
6
CIO
0003
CIO
0004
CIO
0005
3
4
5
6
7
8
CIO
0303
CIO
0304
CIO
0305
CIO
0306
CIO
0307
CIO
0308
CIO
0006
7
CIO
0007
8
CIO
0008
Power Supply Unit
CIO
0002
3
CS1D Expansion Rack
Power Supply Unit
CIO
0001
2
Power Supply Unit
CIO
0000
1
Power Supply Unit
0
Rack number 2
CS1D Expansion Rack
First word: CIO 0300
0
1
2
Rack number 3
CIO
0300
CIO
0301
CIO
0302
Rack First Word Settings
Rack
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 3
First word
CIO 0100
CIO 0200
Not set
CIO 0300
Note Rack numbers (0 to 7) are fixed according to the order that the Racks are
physically connected with cable. The CPU Rack is always Rack 0 and the
other Racks are, in order, Racks 1 to 7. These numbers cannot be changed.
In the above example, the shaded Racks are allocated words starting from the
235
Section 7-3
Allocating First Words to Racks
specified first words. The non-shaded Racks are allocated in order from left to
right and in order of Rack starting from CIO 0000.
Setting First Rack Words from the CX-Programmer
The first word allocated on each Rack can be set from the CX-Programmer.
These settings are not possible from a Programming Console.
Note For CS1-H CPU Units, an indication of whether or not the first rack words
have been set will be displayed on a Programming Console.
Use the following procedure to set the first rack words.
1,2,3...
1. Select the Rack/Slot Start Addresses from the Option Menu on the I/O
Table Window. The following dialog box will be displayed.
2. Select the Rack Start Addresses Settings Option and click the OK Button.
3. In the dialog box that will appear, remove the checkmarks from the settings
disabling the first rack word settings and set the address of the first words
for the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks (1 to 7).
Setting
Rack Start Address
Invalid
Setting range
Default
Remarks
0 to 9000
0
Same for all Racks
Selected or cleared Selected (invalid)
4. Click the OK Button.
Note Up to 8 Racks can be set for any CPU Unit model.
Confirming First Rack Word Settings on a Programming Console
With a CS1-H CPU Unit, the Programming Console can be used to check
whether or not the first word has been set on a Rack. Use the following procedure.
1,2,3...
236
1. Press the FUN, SHIFT, and CH Keys to start the I/O table creation operation. If the first work for a Rack has been set, a message saying so will appear on the second line of the display.
Allocating First Words to Slots (Single CPU Systems Only)
FUN
SHIFT
CH
*DM
Section 7-4
000000I/O TBL ?
Rack 1st Word En
If nothing is displayed, then a first word has not been set.
2. Press the CHG Key, enter the password (9713), and then press the
WRITE Key to continue creating the I/O tables, or press the CLR Key to
cancel the operation and return to the initial display.
Precautions in Setting Rack First Words
• Be sure to make first word settings so that allocated words do not overlap.
The first word setting for a rack can be any address from CIO 0000 to
CIO 0900. If the same word is allocated to two Racks, the I/O tables cannot be created and the Duplication Error Flag (A26103) in the I/O Table
Error Information will turn ON.
• Always register the I/O table after installing an I/O Unit, after setting a rack
number, or after setting the first word allocation for a Rack. The I/O Table
Registration operation registers the I/O words allocated to the Racks.
• I/O words will not be allocated to empty slots. If an I/O Unit will be
installed later, reserve words for the empty slot by changing the I/O table
with a Programming Device’s I/O Table Change Operation.
• If the actual system configuration is changed after registering the I/O table
so that the number of words or I/O type does not match the I/O table, an
I/O verification error (A40209) or I/O setting error (A40110) will occur. A
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Setting Error (A40203) or Special I/O Unit Setting Error (A40202) may occur as well.
• When a Unit is removed, words can be reserved for the missing Unit using
the I/O Table Change Operation. If a Unit is changed or added, all of the
words in the program following that Unit’s allocated words will be changed
and the I/O Table Registration Operation will have to be performed again.
7-4
Allocating First Words to Slots (Single CPU Systems Only)
With a Single CPU System, the first word allocated to a slot on any Rack can
be set with the CX-Programmer’s I/O table edit operation regardless of the
position of the slot. This feature can be used whenever it’s necessary to control allocations to specific Units, e.g., to group allocated I/O words by device or
circuit.
The first word can be set for up to 64 slots.
Note The first words for slots cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
Racks.
Word Allocations
When setting first words for slots, the first word must be set for slot 00 on the
CPU Rack. The first word can then be set for any slot on any Rack for up to 63
other slots.
Each first word set for a slot creates a group starting with that slot. Words are
allocated starting from the specified word to the first slot in the group and continuing left to right allocating consecutive words to each Unit until the next
group (i.e., until the next Unit for which a first slot word is set). The next group
can start on the same Rack or on a following Rack.
237
Section 7-4
Allocating First Words to Slots (Single CPU Systems Only)
Example: Setting the First Words for Racks
In this example, a first slot word has been set in the middle of each Rack. For
simplicity, only 16-bit Units have been used.
1
CIO
0001
4
3
2
CIO
0002
CIO
0100
CIO
0101
7
6
5
CIO
0102
CIO
0103
CIO
0104
Power Supply Unit
0
CIO
0000
Power Supply Unit
Rack number 0
Group 01 set for first
slot word of CIO 0200
CPU Unit
Group 00 set for first
slot word of CIO 0000
CPU Rack
Group 02 set for first slot word of CIO 0200
CIO
0105
CIO
0106
4
3
2
5
6
CIO
0201
CIO
0202
7
8
CIO
0200
CIO
0107
Rack number 2
2
CIO
0204
CS1D Expansion Rack
CS1D Expansion Rack
Group 05 set for first
slot word of CIO 0600
4
3
0
1
CIO
0500
CIO
0501
CIO
0502
CIO
0503
CIO
0504
1
2
3
4
7
6
5
CIO
0600
CIO
0601
CIO
0602
8
Power Supply Unit
Group 03 set for first
slot word of CIO 0500
CIO
0203
Power Supply Unit
Rack number 1
Power Supply Unit
1
Power Supply Unit
0
CIO
0603
Group 04 set for first slot word of CIO 0300
CIO
0604
CIO
0605
CIO
0606
CIO
0607
CIO
CIO
0608 0300
7
6
CIO
0301
CIO
0302
8
CIO
0303
Power Supply Unit
Rack number 3
5
Power Supply Unit
0
CS1D Expansion Rack
First Slot Word Settings
Group
00 (See note.)
01
02
Rack
CPU Rack
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Slot
00
03
04
Word
CIO 0000
CIO 0100
CIO 0200
03
04
05
Rack 2
Rack 3
Rack 4
00
05
05
CIO 0500
CIO 0300
CIO 0600
Note Group 00 must start at slot 00 on the CPU Rack. Any word can be set. Any
slot can be set on any Rack for groups 01 to 63.
Setting First Slot Words from the CX-Programmer
First slot words can be set from the CX-Programmer. These settings are not
possible from a Programming Console.
1,2,3...
238
1. Select the Rack/Slot Start Addresses from the Option Menu on the I/O
Table Window. The following dialog box will be displayed.
Section 7-4
Allocating First Words to Slots (Single CPU Systems Only)
2. Select the Slot Start Addresses Settings Option and click the OK Button.
3. In the dialog box that will appear, set the first word for slot 00 on the CPU
Rack.
4. To change the setting from CIO 0000, click the Edit Button. The follow dialog box will appear.
5. Set the desired word and click the OK Button.
6. To set slot first words for other groups, click the Add Button and make the
appropriate settings for the Rack, slot, and word.
Setting
Group
Setting range
Default
00 to 63
00
Rack
CPU Rack
(“MainRack”)
Racks 1 to 7
00 to 99
0 to 999
Slot
First word
CPU Rack
0
0
Remarks
Groups numbers are allocated
automatically in the order the
groups are displayed and set.
Group 00 always starts at slot 00
on the CPU Rack.
---
239
Section 7-5
Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors
Precautions in Setting First Slot Words
When the I/O tables are edited, the CX-Programmer checks for any duplications in word allocations caused by first word settings. It is conceivable, however, that duplications in word allocations could occur after the I/O tables have
been registered, e.g., as the result of replacing a 1-word Unit with a 2-word
Unit. In this case the extra word needed by the new Unit would still also be
allocated to the next Unit.
When the PLC is turned ON, the CPU Unit checks the registered I/O tables
against the actual Units mounted to the PLC. If there are any duplications, and
error will occur and it will be no longer possible to edit the I/O tables. If this
happens, the I/O tables will have to be deleted and recreated or retransferred
from a Programming Devices.
7-5
Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors
With a CS1-H CPU Unit, the contents of A261 provides information on the
Unit causing the error whenever one occurs when creating the I/O tables from
the Programming Console or CX-Programmer. This information will make it
easier to find the Unit causing the problem with troubleshooting I/O tables.
Refer to SECTION 10 Troubleshooting for actual procedures.
Name
CPU Bus Unit Setup
Area Initialization
Error Flag
I/O Overflow Flag
Duplication Error Flag
I/O Bus Error Flag
SYSMAC BUS Recognition Error Flag
Special I/O Unit Error
Flag
I/O Unconfirmed Error
Flag
Online Replacement
Flag
Duplex Communications Unit Error Flag
Duplex Communications Unit Verification
Error Flag
240
Address
Word Bit
Contents
When
At
changing startup
to RUN
mode
A261 00 ON: Error in CPU Bus Unit Setup
Held
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
02 ON: Overflow in maximum number of I/O points.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
03 ON: The same unit number was used more than
once.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
04 ON: I/O bus error
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
06 ON: SYSMAC BUS detection ended in an error.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
07 ON: Error in a Special I/O Unit
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
09 ON: I/O detection has not been completed.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
10 ON: An online replacement operation is in progress.
11 ON: Duplex Units are not mounted for a unit number
specified for Duplex Communications Units (i.e.,
one Unit is missing or the mounted Units do not
support duplex operation).
12 ON: The duplex setting in the PLC Setup for a unit
number specified for Duplex Communications Units
does not agree with the setting on the Duplex Communications Units. The I/O tables will not be created
and an I/O Table Creation Error will occur. Refer to
the Operation Manual for the Communications Units
for details on Unit settings.
Setting
timing
Cleared When I/O
tables are
created
Section 7-6
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
7-6
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
This section describes how data can be exchanged between Special I/O Units
or CS-series CPU Bus Units, and the CPU Unit.
7-6-1
Special I/O Units
Special I/O Units include C200H Special I/O Units and CS-series Special I/O
Units. Data can be exchanged between Special I/O Units and the CPU Unit
through the Special I/O Unit Area, the DM Area, or FINS commands.
Special I/O Unit Area
(I/O Refreshing)
Data is exchanged each cycle during I/O refreshing of the Special I/O Unit
Area. Basically, 10 words are allocated to each Special I/O Unit based on its
unit number setting. The number of words actually used by the Special I/O
Unit varies; there are models that require 2 words, 4 words, and 20 words.
The Special I/O Unit Area ranges from CIO 2000 to CIO 2959 (10 words × 96
Units).
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Special I/O Unit Area
10 words/Unit
Transferred in
I/O refreshing
Transfer of Words Allocated in DM Area
C200H Special I/O Units
The 100 words allocated to each Unit are transferred from the DM Area to the
Unit when the PLC is turned on or the Unit is restarted. Some C200H Special
I/O Units do not use any of the allocated DM words and others use only a part
of the allocated words.
CS-series Special I/O
Units
There are three times that data may be transferred through the words allocated to each Unit. The timing of data transfers depends on the model being
used.
1,2,3...
1. Data transferred when the PLC is turned on.
2. Data transferred when the Unit is restarted.
3. Data transferred when necessary.
Some models transfer data in both directions, from the DM Area to the Unit
and from the Unit to the DM Area. See the Unit’s Operation Manual for details
on data transfers.
Special I/O Unit Words in the DM Area: D20000 to D29599 (100 Words x 96 Units)
Each Special I/O Unit is allocated 100 words in the DM Area in the range of
D20000 to D29599 (100 words × 96 Units). These 100 words are generally
used to hold initial settings for the Special I/O Unit. When the contents of this
area are changed from the program to reflect a change in the system, the
Restart Bits for affected Units must be turned ON to restart the Units.
241
Section 7-6
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Transferred when power is turned
on or the Unit is restarted.
DM Area for Special I/O Units
100 words/Unit
Transferred each cycle
and when necessary.
FINS Commands
The CMND(490) instruction can be added to the ladder program to issue a
FINS command to the Special I/O Unit.
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
The FINS command is transmitted
when CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.
FINS command transmission
FINS commands can be transmitted to Special I/O Units in other PLCs in the
network, not just the local PLC.
Serial Communications Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Unit
Serial Communications Unit
CPU Unit
The FINS command is transmitted
when CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.
FINS command transmission
Special I/O Unit Initialization
Special I/O Units are initialized when the PLC’s power is turned on or the
Unit’s Restart Bit is turned ON. The Unit’s Special I/O Unit Initialization Flag
(A33000 to A33515) will be ON while the Unit is initializing.
I/O refreshing (cyclic I/O refreshing or refreshing by IORF(097)) will not be
performed for a Special I/O Unit while its Initialization Flag is ON.
7-6-2
Disabling Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing
Ten words are allocated to each Special I/O Unit in the Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) based on the unit number set on the front of each
Unit. The data in the Special I/O Unit Area is refreshed in the CPU Unit every
cycle during I/O refreshing (just after execution of the END(001) instruction).
I/O refreshing may take too long if too many Special I/O Units are installed. If
I/O refreshing is taking too much time, the PLC Setup can be set to disable
cyclic refreshing for particular Special I/O Units. (The Special I/O Unit Cyclic
Refreshing Disable Bits are in PLC Setup addresses 226 to 231.)
If the I/O refreshing time is too short, the Unit’s internal processing will not be
able to keep pace, the Special I/O Unit Error Flag (A40206) will be turned ON,
and the Special I/O Unit may not operate properly. In this case, the cycle time
242
Section 7-6
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
can be extended by setting a minimum cycle time in the PLC Setup or cyclic
I/O refreshing with the Special I/O Unit can be disabled. When cyclic refreshing has been disabled, the Special I/O Unit’s data can be refreshed during
program execution with IORF(097).
Note
1. Always disable a Special I/O Unit’s cyclic refreshing if the Unit’s I/O will be
refreshed in an interrupt task with IORF(097). An interrupt task error
(A40213) will occur if cyclic refreshing and IORF(097) refreshing are performed simultaneously.
2. Whenever disabling a Special I/O Unit’s cyclic refreshing, be sure that the
I/O for that Unit is refreshed with IORF(097) in the program at least every
11 seconds during operation. A CPU Unit service monitoring error will occur in the Special I/O Unit if it is not refreshed every 11 seconds.
7-6-3
CPU Bus Units
Data can be exchanged between CPU Bus Units and the CPU Unit through
the CPU Bus Unit Area, the DM Area, or FINS commands.
CPU Bus Unit Area (I/O Refreshing)
Data is exchanged each cycle during I/O refreshing of the CPU Bus Unit Area.
Basically, 25 words are allocated to each CPU Bus Unit based on its unit number setting. The number of words actually used by the CPU Bus Unit varies.
The Special I/O Unit Area ranges from CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 (25 words × 16
Units).
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit Area
25 words/Unit
Transferred in
I/O refreshing
Note With CS1-H CPU Units, the CPU BUS I/O REFRESH instruction
(DLNK(226)) can be executed in the ladder program to refresh the
CIO Area words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit of a specified unit
number.
Transfer of Words Allocated in the DM Area
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 100 words in the DM Area in the range of
D30000 to D31599 (100 words × 16 Units). There are three times that data
may be transferred through the words allocated to each Unit. The timing of
data transfers depends on the model being used.
1,2,3...
1. Data transferred when the PLC is turned ON.
2. Data transferred each cycle.
3. Data transferred when necessary.
Note With CS1-H CPU Units, the CPU BUS I/O REFRESH instruction
(DLNK(226)) can be executed in the ladder program to refresh the
DM Area words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit of a specified unit
number.
243
Section 7-6
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
Some models transfer data in both directions, from the DM Area to the Unit
and from the Unit to the DM Area. See the Unit’s Operation Manual for details
on data transfers.
These 100 words are generally used to hold initial settings for the CPU Bus
Unit. When the contents of this area are changed from the program to reflect a
change in the system, the Restart Bits (A50100 to A50115) for affected Units
must be turned ON to restart the Units.
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
Transferred when power is turned
on or the Unit is restarted.
DM Area for CPU Bus Units
100 words/Unit
Transferred each cycle
and when necessary.
FINS Commands
The CMND(490) instruction can be added to the ladder program to issue a
FINS command to the CPU Bus Unit.
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
The FINS command is transmitted
when CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.
FINS command transmission
FINS commands can be transmitted to CPU Bus Units in other PLCs in the
network, not just the local PLC.
Serial Communications CPU Bus Unit
Unit
CPU Unit
Serial Communications Unit
CPU Unit
The FINS command is transmitted
when CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.
Command transmission
CPU Bus Unit Initialization
CPU Bus Units are initialized when the PLC’s power is turned on or the Unit’s
Restart Bit is turned ON. The Unit’s CPU Bus Unit Initialization Flag (A30200
to A30215) will be ON while the Unit is initializing.
Cyclic I/O refreshing will not be performed for a CPU Bus Unit while its Initialization Flag is ON.
244
Section 7-7
Online Addition of Units and Backplanes
7-7
Online Addition of Units and Backplanes
This function allows previously unregistered Units to be added and controlled
during operation. Both Units and Expansion Racks can be added during operation.
Note A Duplex CPU Unit with unit version 1.3 or later is required to add Units
online. CPU Bus Units cannot be added online. Expansion Racks can be
added online only in a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System.
7-7-1
Conditions Required for Online Addition
Systems Supporting Online Addition
The following table shows the Units that can be added to each system.
Operation
Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System
Online Unit addition
Online Expansion Rack addition
Duplex CPU, Single I/O
Expansion System
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported (See note.)
Single CPU System
Not supported
Not supported (See note.)
Note With a Duplex CPU, Single I/O Expansion System or Single CPU System, the
system may stop if an Expansion Rack is added.
Online Addition of Basic I/O Units
When adding a Basic I/O Unit online, the new Unit’s allocated words must not
duplicate any words allocated to other Basic I/O Units that are already
mounted. Add the new Unit to a slot position so that the allocated words will
not be duplicated, as shown in the following diagrams.
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
CIO 2
CIO 5
CIO 8
Empty
Empty
Empty
CIO 7
Empty
CIO 1
CIO 4
CIO 6
A Unit cannot be added to the
shaded slots because the word
address would be duplicated.
Empty
CIO 0
CIO 3
Empty
• Creating the I/O Table using the Default Starting Words for each Rack
Units can be added in these
slots starting from CIO 9.
245
Section 7-7
Online Addition of Units and Backplanes
Units cannot be added to the
shaded slots because the word
addresses would be duplicated.
Empty
CIO 12
Empty
CIO 11
Starting rack word
is set to CIO 20.
CIO 10
• Creating the I/O Table by setting the Starting Word for each Rack
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
CIO 22
CIO 32
Empty
CIO 31
CIO 21
CIO 30
Starting rack word
is set to CIO 30.
Empty
Starting rack word
is set to CIO 20.
CIO 20
Units can be added in these
slots with word addresses
CIO 13 to CIO 19.
Units can be added in these
slots with word addresses
CIO 23 to CIO 29.
Units can be added in these
slots starting from CIO 33.
Online Addition of Special I/O Units
When adding a Special I/O Unit online, the new Unit’s allocated words must
not duplicate any words allocated to other Special I/O Units that are already
mounted. Add the new Unit to a slot position so that the allocated words will
not be duplicated. There are no other restrictions on the slot position.
Online Addition of CPU Bus Units
CPU Bus Units cannot be added online.
Online Addition of Expansion Backplanes
With a Duplex CPU Dual I/O Expansion System, Expansion Backplanes can
be added in addition to Units. The Expansion Backplane being added must be
a CS1D-BI082D Backplane with CS1D-II102D I/O Interface Units. The starting Rack word of the added Expansion Rack can be set.
When an Expansion Backplane is added, a Basic I/O Unit or Special I/O Unit
must be mounted in the Backplane. The Expansion Backplane will not be
added if it does not contain a Basic I/O Unit or Special I/O Unit.
When the Connecting Cables are duplexed, all of the Connecting Cable connections must be normal. The Expansion Backplane will not be added if there
is even one Connecting Cable disconnected.
246
Section 7-7
CIO 0
CIO 1
Empty
CIO 2
CIO 3
CIO 4
Empty
CIO 5
Empty
Empty
Empty
CIO 6
CIO 7
CIO 8
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
IC
II
II
II
A Unit cannot be added to the
shaded slots because the word
address would be duplicated.
CIO 9
IC
II
II
When the Connecting Cables
are duplexed, all of the cables
must be connected properly
before adding a Rack.
II
Online Addition of Units and Backplanes
Units can be added in these slots starting from CIO 9.
The starting Rack word can also be set.
Special I/O Units can also be added.
Maximum Number of Additional Units
Only 1 Unit can be added at a time. When multiple Units are being added, add
the Units one at a time.
7-7-2
Online Addition Procedure
Units and Backplanes can be added online only from the CX-Programmer’s
I/O Table Window; they cannot be added online from a Programming Console.
Note As of October 2006, the online addition function is supported by CX-Programmer version 7.0 only when it has been added as an expansion function.
Online Addition of Units
CIO 5
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
CIO 8
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
AD #0
Empty
Empty
CIO 7
CIO 2
CIO 4
CIO 6
Empty
CIO 3
Empty
CIO 1
1. Mount the additional Unit in an empty slot.
CIO 0
1,2,3...
Add a CS1W-AD0041 (unit
number 0) in Rack 1 slot 6.
Note: Always tighten the new Unit's
screws and verify that it is
secure.
2. Connect the CX-Programmer to the CPU Unit and go online.
3. Display the I/O Table Window. The I/O table will be matched to the PLC’s
status. If the I/O table does not match, transfer the I/O table from the PLC
to the computer.
4. Select Options - Online Add Unit - start. At this point, the CX-Programmer will check whether the I/O table matches the PLC configuration.
Note If the I/O table does not match, the online addition will not be executed.
247
Section 7-7
Online Addition of Units and Backplanes
Select start.
5. Right-click the Rack/slot in which the Unit will be added and select Add
Unit from the pop-up menu.
The Select Unit Window will be displayed. Select the Unit to add.
Select the Select
Unit Window from
Rack 01, Slot 06
and add a
CS1W-AD041.
6. Select Options - Online Add Unit - reflection. The Unit addition will be
completed if the Unit selected in the CX-Programmer matches the Unit that
was actually added.
Note If the Unit does not match, the online addition will not be executed.
248
Section 7-7
Online Addition of Units and Backplanes
Select reflection.
Online Addition of a Unit and Backplane
1. Mount the additional Unit in the Expansion Backplane and connect the CSseries Connecting Cables to the operating PLC.
Empty
CIO 5
Empty
Empty
CIO 8
Empty
Empty
Empty
CIO 1
CIO 3
CIO 6
Empty
CIO 0
CIO 2
Empty
CIO 4
IC
II
II
Verify that the
END RACK
indicator is lit.
CIO 7
IC
II
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
CIO 9
II
Becomes slot 2.
Empty
When the Connecting Cables
are duplexed, all of the cables
must be connected properly
before adding a Rack.
II
Note When the cables are duplexed, always verify that both cables are
connected properly. When adding a Rack, also verify that the connecting Rack is the last Expansion Rack (or CPU Rack). Verify that
the END RACK Indicator is lit in the Rack’s CS1D I/O Control Unit or
CS1D I/O Interface Unit.
II
1,2,3...
Note: When adding a Unit and
Backplane, always tighten the
screws and verify that the Unit
is secure.
2. Turn ON the power supply to the Rack that was added.
3. Follow steps 2 to 6 in the above Online Addition of Units procedure to use
the CX-Programmer to add the Unit.
249
Section 7-7
Online Addition of Units and Backplanes
7-7-3
Cycle Time Extension during Online Addition
The following table shows how much longer the cycle time will be during
online addition of an Expansion Rack.
Operation
Cycle time extension
Cycle time extension due to online 130 ms
addition of an Expansion Rack
Remarks
The cycle time will be longer while an Expansion
Rack is being added. The cycle time will not be
extended when only a Unit is being added.
Cycle time extension due to duplex For details, refer to 9-4-7 Duplex
initialization
Processing Cycle Time Extension
(Duplex CPU Systems Only).
The cycle time will be longer while a Unit or
Expansion Rack is being added.
Cycle time
The cycle time is extended in
just one cycle when
processing the addition of the
Expansion Rack.
Online addition
reflected
130 ms
250
Refer to 9-4-7 Duplex Processing Cycle Time Extension
(Duplex CPU Systems Only).
The cycle time is extended in
just one cycle for duplex
initialization.
SECTION 8
Memory Areas
This section describes the structure and functions of the I/O Memory Areas and Parameter Areas.
8-1
8-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
252
I/O Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
8-2-1
I/O Memory Area Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
8-2-2
Overview of the Data Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
254
8-2-3
Data Area Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
259
8-3
I/O Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
8-4
CS-series DeviceNet Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
266
8-5
Data Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
267
8-6
CPU Bus Unit Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
268
8-7
Inner Board Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
270
8-8
Special I/O Unit Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
8-9
Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
272
8-10 Holding Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
273
8-11 Auxiliary Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
274
8-12 TR (Temporary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
304
8-13 Timer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
305
8-14 Counter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
8-15 Data Memory (DM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
8-16 Extended Data Memory (EM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
310
8-17 Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
8-18 Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
317
8-19 Task Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
8-20 Condition Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
319
8-21 Clock Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
322
8-22 Parameter Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
323
8-22-1 PLC Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
323
8-22-2 Registered I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
323
8-22-3 Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
324
8-22-4 CPU Bus Unit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
325
251
Section 8-1
Introduction
8-1
Introduction
The CPU Unit’s memory (RAM with battery back-up) can be divided into three
parts: the User Program Memory, I/O Memory Area, and Parameter Area.
This section describes the I/O Memory Area and Parameter Area.
I/O Memory Area
This region of memory contains the data areas which can be accessed by
instruction operands. The data areas include the CIO Area, Work Area, Holding Area, Auxiliary Area, DM Area, EM Area, Timer Area, Counter Area, Task
Flag Area, Data Registers, Index Registers, Condition Flag Area, and Clock
Pulse Area.
Instruction
I/O Memory Area
Parameter Area
This region of memory contains various settings that cannot be specified by
instruction operands; they can be specified from a Programming Device only.
The settings include the PLC Setup, I/O Table, Routing Table, and CPU Bus
Unit settings.
Programming Device
Parameter Area
252
Section 8-2
I/O Memory Areas
8-2
I/O Memory Areas
8-2-1
I/O Memory Area Structure
The following table shows the basic structure of the I/O Memory Area.
Area
CIO
Area
Size
Range
External I/O
allocation
Bit
access
Word
access
Access
Read
Write
Change
from
Programming
Device
Status at
startup
or mode
change
Forcing
bit status
Cleared
(See note
2.)
OK
I/O Area
5,120
bits (320
words)
CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319
(See note
1.)
Basic I/O OK
Units
OK
OK
OK
OK
Data Link
Area
3,200
bits (200
words)
CIO 1000
to
CIO 1199
Data link
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
CPU Bus
Unit Area
6,400
bits (400
words)
CIO 1500
to
CIO 1899
CPU Bus OK
Units
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Special I/O
Unit Area
15,360
bits (960
words)
CIO 2000
to
CIO 2959
Special
I/O Units
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Inner Board
Area
1,600
bits (100
words)
CIO 1900
to
CIO 1999
Inner
Boards
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
CS-series
DeviceNet
Area
9,600
bits (600
words)
CIO 3200
to
CIO 3799
DeviceNet
Slaves
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Internal I/O
Areas
37,504
bits
(2,344
words)
4,800
bits (300
words)
CIO 1200
to
CIO 1499
CIO 3800
to
CIO 6143
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Work Area
8,192
bits (512
words)
W000 to
W511
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Holding Area
8,192
bits (512
words)
H000 to
H511
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Maintained
OK
Auxiliary Area
15,360
bits (960
words)
A000 to
A447
---
OK
OK
OK
No
No
No
OK
OK
Varies
from
address
to
address.
16 bits
TR0 to
TR15
OK
No
Cleared
No
TR Area
A448 to
A959
---
OK
---
OK
253
Section 8-2
I/O Memory Areas
Area
Size
Range
External I/O
allocation
Bit
access
Word
access
Access
Read
Write
Change
from
Programming
Device
Status at
startup
or mode
change
Forcing
bit status
DM Area
32,768
words
D00000 to
D32767
---
No (See
note 3.)
OK
OK
OK
OK
Maintained
No
EM Area
32,768
words
per bank
(0 to C,
13 max.)
E0_00000 --to
EC_32767
No (See
note 3.)
OK
OK
OK
OK
Maintained
No
Timer Completion
Flags
4,096
bits
T0000 to
T4095
---
OK
---
OK
OK
OK
Cleared
(See note
2.)
OK
Counter Completion
Flags
4,096
bits
C0000 to
C4095
---
OK
---
OK
OK
OK
Maintained
OK
Timer PVs
4,096
words
T0000 to
T4095
---
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
Cleared
(See note
2.)
No (See
note 5.)
Counter PVs
4,096
words
C0000 to
C4095
---
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
Maintained
No (See
note 6.)
Task Flag Area
32 bits
TK00 to
TK31
---
OK
---
OK
No
No
Cleared
No
Index Registers (See 16 regisnote 4.)
ters
IR0 to
IR15
---
OK
OK
Indirect
addressing only
Specific
instructions
only
No
Cleared
(See note
2.)
No
Data Registers (See
note 4.)
DR0 to
DR15
---
No
OK
OK
OK
No
Cleared
(See note
2.)
No
16 registers
Note
1. The I/O Area can be expanded to CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 by changing the
first words allocated to Racks.
2. If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the content of these words will be held
even if the operating mode is changed.
If the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup” setting is also set to
protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the I/O Area won’t be cleared
when the PLC’s power supply is cycled OFF and ON again.
3. Bits in the DM Area and EM Area can be manipulated using TST(350),
TSTN(351), SET, SETB(532), RSTB(533), OUTB(534).
4. Index registers and data registers can be used either individually by task
or they can be shared by all the tasks.
5. Timer PVs can be refreshed indirectly by forced setting/resetting Timer
Completion Flags.
6. Counter PVs can be refreshed indirectly by forced setting/resetting
Counter Completion Flags.
8-2-2
Overview of the Data Areas
The data areas in the I/O Memory Area are described in detail below.
CIO Area
It isn’t necessary to input the “CIO” acronym when specifying an address in
the CIO Area. The CIO Area is generally used for data exchanges such as I/O
refreshing with various Units. Words that aren’t allocated to Units may be
used as work words and work bits in the program only.
254
Section 8-2
I/O Memory Areas
Bit
Word
15
CIO 0000
Bit
00
I/O Area
CIO 0319
(CIO 0320)
(Not used,
but see note 1.)
(CIO 0999)
CIO 1000
Data Link Area
CIO 1199
CIO 1200
Internal I/O Area
CIO 1499
CIO 1500
CPU Bus Unit Area
(25 words/Unit)
CIO 1899
CIO 1900
Inner Board Area
CIO 1999
CIO 2000
Special I/O Unit Area
(10 words/Unit)
CIO 2959
(CIO 2960)
(Not used,
but see note 2.)
(CIO 3199)
CIO 3200
CS/CJ-series
DeviceNet Area
(CIO 3799)
CIO 3800
Internal I/O Area
CIO 6143
Note
1. It is possible to use CIO 0320 to CIO 0999 for I/O words by making the appropriate settings for the first words on the Racks. Settings for the first
words on the Racks can be made using the CX-Programmer to set the first
Rack addresses in the I/O table. The settings range for the first Rack addresses is from CIO 0000 to CIO 0900.
2. The parts of the CIO Area that are labelled “Not used” may be used in programming as work bits. In the future, however, unused CIO Area bits may
be used when expanding functions. Always use Work Area bits first.
I/O Area
These words are allocated to external I/O terminals on Basic I/O Units. Words
that aren’t allocated to external I/O terminals may be used only in the program.
255
Section 8-2
I/O Memory Areas
Link Area
Words in the Link Area are used for data links when LR is set as the data link
area for automatic allocation for Controller Link Networks. It is also used for
PLC Links. Words in the Link Area can be used in the program when LR is not
set as the data link area for Controller Link Networks and PLC Links are not
used.
CPU Bus Unit Area
These words are allocated to CPU Bus Units to transfer status information.
Each Unit is allocated 25 words and up to 16 Units (with unit numbers 0 to 15)
can be used. Words that aren’t used by CPU Bus Units may be used only in
the program.
Special I/O Unit Area
These words are allocated to Special I/O Units. Each Unit is allocated 10
words and up to 96 Units (unit numbers 0 to 95) can be used.
Words that aren’t used by Special I/O Units may be used only in the program.
Inner Board Area
These words are allocated to Inner Boards such as Communications Boards.
Up to 100 words can be allocated for input and output.
Note The Inner Board Area is used for Inner Boards only in Single CPU Systems or
for the Inner Boards in a Process-control CPU Units in Duplex CPU Systems.
CS-series DeviceNet Area
These words are allocated to Slaves for DeviceNet Remote I/O Communications for CS-series DeviceNet Units (CS1W-DRM21). Allocations are fixed
and cannot be changed. Be sure that allocates to not overlap with those used
for other I/O points.
Internal I/O Area
These words can be used only in the program; they cannot be used for I/O
exchange with external I/O terminals. Be sure to use the work words provided
in the Work Area (WR) before allocating words in the Internal I/O Area or
other unused words in the CIO Area. It is possible that these words will be
assigned to new functions in future versions of CS1D CPU Units, so the program may have to be changed before being used in a new CS1D PLC if CIO
Area words are used as work words in the program.
Work Area (WR)
Words in the Work Area can be used only in the program; they cannot be
used for I/O exchange with external I/O terminals. No new functions will be
assigned to this area in future versions of CS1D PLCs, so use this area for
work words and bits before any words in the CIO Area.
Word 15
Bit
W511
Holding Area (HR)
Words in the Holding Area can be used only in the program. These words
retain their content when the PLC is turned ON or the operating mode is
switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode.
256
Section 8-2
I/O Memory Areas
Word 15
Bit
H511
Auxiliary Area (AR)
The Auxiliary Area contains flags and control bits used to monitor and control
PLC operation. This area is divided into two parts: A000 to A447 are readonly and A448 to A959 can be read or written. Refer to 8-11 Auxiliary Area for
details on the Auxiliary Area.
Word 15
Bit
Read-only area
A447
A448
Read-write area
A959
Temporary Relay Area (TR)
The TR Area contains bits that record the ON/OFF status of program
branches. The TR bits are used with mnemonics only.
Data Memory Area (DM)
The DM Area is a multi-purpose data area that can be accessed in word-units
only (16-bit words). These words retain their content when the PLC is turned
ON or the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or
MONITOR mode.
257
Section 8-2
I/O Memory Areas
Word
D00000
D20000
Special I/O Unit Area
(100 words/Unit)
D29599
D30000
CPU Bus Unit Area
(100 words/Unit)
D31599
D32000
Inner Board Area
D32767
Extended Data Memory
Area (EM)
The EM Area is a multi-purpose data area that can be accessed in word-units
only (16-bit words). These words retain their content when the PLC is turned
ON or the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or
MONITOR mode.
The EM Area is divided into 32,767-word regions called banks. The number of
EM banks depends upon the model of CPU Unit, with a maximum of 13 banks
(0 to C). Refer to 2-1 Specifications for details on the number of EM banks
provided in each model of CPU Unit.
Word
Word
E0_00000
EC_00000
E0_32767
EC_32767
Timer Area
There are two timer data areas, the Timer Completion Flags and the Timer
Present Values (PVs). Up to 4,096 timers with timer numbers T0000 to T4095
can be used. The same number is used to access a timer’s Completion Flag
and PV.
Timer Completion Flags
These flags are read as bits. A Completion Flag is turned ON by the system
when the corresponding timer times out (the set time elapses).
Timer PVs
The PVs are read and written as words (16 bits). The PVs count up or down
as the timer operates.
Counter Area
There are two counter data areas, the Counter Completion Flags and the
Counter Present Values (PVs). Up to 4,096 counters with counter numbers
C0000 to C4095 can be used. The same number is used to access a
counter’s Completion Flag and PV.
258
Section 8-2
I/O Memory Areas
Counter Completion Flags
These flags are read as bits. A Completion Flag is turned ON by the system
when the corresponding counter counts out (the set value is reached).
Counter PVs
The PVs are read and written as words (16 bits). The PVs count up or down
as the counter operates.
Condition Flags
These flags include the Arithmetic Flags such as the Error Flag and Equals
Flag which indicate the results of instruction execution as well as the Always
ON and Always OFF Flags. The Condition Flags are specified with labels
(symbols) rather than addresses.
Clock Pulses
The Clock Pulses are turned ON and OFF by the CPU Unit’s internal timer.
These bits are specified with labels (symbols) rather than addresses.
Task Flag Area (TK)
Task Flags range from TK00 to TK31 and correspond to cyclic tasks 0 to 31. A
Task Flag will be ON when the corresponding cyclic task is in executable
(RUN) status and OFF when the cyclic task hasn’t been executed (INI) or is in
standby (WAIT) status.
Index Registers (IR)
These registers (IR0 to IR15) are used to store PLC memory addresses
(absolute memory addresses in RAM) to indirectly address words in I/O memory. The Index Registers can be used separately in each task or they can be
shared by all tasks.
Data Registers (DR)
These registers (DR0 to DR15) are used together with the Index Registers.
When a Data Register is input just before an Index Register, the content of the
Data Register is added to the PLC memory address in the Index Register to
offset that address. The Data Registers are used separately in each task or
they can be shared by all tasks.
8-2-3
Data Area Properties
Content After Fatal Errors, Forced Set/Reset Usage
Area
CIO I/O Area
Area Data Link Area
CPU Bus Units
Special I/O Unit Area
Inner Board Area
CS-series DeviceNet
Area
Internal I/O Area
External allocation
Basic I/O Units
Controller Link data
links
Fatal Error Generated
Execution of FALS(007)
Other Fatal Error
IOM Hold
IOM Hold IOM Hold IOM Hold
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Forced Set/
Forced Reset
Functions
Usable?
Retained
Yes
Retained
Cleared
Retained
CPU Bus Units
Special I/O Units
Inner Boards
DeviceNet Slaves or
Master
None
259
Section 8-3
I/O Area
Area
External allocation
Work Area (W)
None
Holding Area (H)
Auxiliary Area (A)
Data Memory Area (D)
Extended Data Memory Area
(E)
Timer Completion Flags (T)
Timer PVs (T)
Counter Completion Flags (C)
Counter PVs (C)
Task Flags (TK)
Index Registers (IR)
Data Registers (DR)
Fatal Error Generated
Execution of FALS(007)
Other Fatal Error
IOM Hold
IOM Hold IOM Hold IOM Hold
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained Retained
Status varies from address to address.
Retained
Retained
Retained Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained Retained
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Forced Set/
Forced Reset
Functions
Usable?
Content After Mode Change or Power Interruption
Area
CIO
Area
PLC Power OFF to ON
Mode Changed1
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
Cleared
I/O Area
Data Link Area
CPU Bus Units
IOM Hold
Bit ON
Retained
IOM Hold Bit Cleared2
IOM Hold
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Cleared
Cleared
IOM Hold Bit Held2
IOM Hold
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Cleared
Retained
Special I/O Unit Area
Inner Board Area
CS-series DeviceNet Area
Internal I/O Area
Work Area (W)
Holding Area (H)
Auxiliary Area (A)
Data Memory Area (D)
Extended Data Memory Area (E)
Timer Completion Flags (T)
Timer PVs (T)
Cleared
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Status varies from address to address.
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Counter Completion Flags (C)
Counter PVs (C)
Task Flags (TK)
Index Registers (IR)
Data Registers (DR)
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Note
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
1. Mode changed from PROGRAM to RUN/MONITOR or vice-versa.
2. The PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup” setting determines
whether the IOM Hold Bit’s status is held or cleared when the PLC is turned
ON.
8-3
I/O Area
I/O Area addresses range from CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 (CIO bits 000000 to
031915), but the area can be expanded to CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 by changing
260
Section 8-3
I/O Area
the first Rack word with any Programming Device other than a Programming
Console. The maximum number of bits that can be allocated for external I/O
will still be 5,120 (320 words) even if the I/O Area is expanded.
Note The maximum number of external I/O points depends upon the CPU Unit
being used.
Words in the I/O Area are allocated to I/O terminals on Basic I/O Units.
Words are allocated to Basic I/O Units based on the slot position (left to right)
and number of words required. The words are allocated consecutively and
empty slots are skipped. Words in the I/O Area that aren’t allocated to Basic
I/O Units can be used only in the program.
Bits in the I/O Area can be force-set and force-reset.
I/O Area Initialization
The contents of the I/O Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
(See the following explanation of IOM Hold Bit Operation.)
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
(See the following explanation of IOM Hold Bit Operation.)
3. The I/O Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the I/O Area will be retained if FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
By default, the I/O Area is cleared when power is interrupted or the CPU Unit
is restarted.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the contents of the I/O Area won’t be
cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the I/O
Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled. All I/O bits,
including outputs, will retain the status that they had before the PLC was
turned off.
Note If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be turned
OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PLC is switched from
RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode. Make sure that the external
loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this occurs. (When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced with the FALS(007)
instruction, all outputs from Output Unit will be turned OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained.)
Input Bits
A bit in the I/O Area is called an input bit when it is allocated to an Input Unit.
Input bits reflect the ON/OFF status of devices such as push-button switches,
limit switches, and photoelectric switches. There are two ways for the status of
input points to be refreshed in the PLC: normal I/O refreshing and IORF(097)
refreshing.
Normal I/O Refreshing
The status of I/O points on external devices is read once each cycle after program execution.
261
Section 8-3
I/O Area
In the following example, CIO 000101 is allocated to switch 1, an external
switch connected to the input terminal of an Input Unit. The ON/OFF status of
switch 1 is reflected in CIO 000101 once each cycle.
Ladder symbol
000101
Mnemonic
LD
000101
CPU Unit
Input Unit
Bit allocation
CIO 000101
Switch 1
Once
each
cycle
Immediate Refreshing
(Single CPU Systems
Only)
When the immediate refreshing variation of an instruction is specified by
inputting an exclamation point just before the instruction, and the instruction’s
operand is an input bit or word, the word containing the bit or the word itself
will be refreshed just before the instruction is executed. This immediate
refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I/O refreshing performed
once each cycle.
Note Immediate refreshing will be performed for input bits allocated to Basic I/O
Units only (excluding C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and Basic I/O
Units mounted in Remote I/O Slave Racks), not High-density I/O Units which
are Special I/O Units.
1,2,3...
1. Bit Operand
Just before the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the word containing the specified bit will be read to the
PLC.
2. Word Operand
Just before the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the specified word will be read to the PLC.
In the following example, CIO 000101 is allocated to switch 1, an external
switch connected to the input terminal of an Input Unit. The ON/OFF status of
switch 1 is read and reflected in CIO 000101 just before !LD 000101 is executed.
262
Section 8-3
I/O Area
Ladder symbol
000101
Mnemonic
!LD 000101
CPU Unit
Input Unit
CIO 000101
Switch 0
Switch 1
Switch 7
Read
just before
instruction
execution.
IORF(097) Refreshing
When IORF(097) (I/O REFRESH) is executed, the input bits in the specified
range of words are refreshed. This I/O refreshing is performed in addition to
the normal I/O refreshing performed once each cycle.
The following IORF(097) instruction refreshes the status of all I/O points in I/O
Area words CIO 0000 to CIO 0003. The status of input points is read from the
Input Units and the status of output bits is written to the Output Units.
In the following example, the status of input points allocated to CIO 0000 and
CIO 0001 are read from the Input Unit. (CIO 0002 and CIO 0003 are allocated
to Output Units.)
IORF
0000
0003
CPU Unit
Input Unit
Switch 0
Switch 16
Switch 1
Switch 17
Switch 15
Read
when
IORF
(097)
is
executed.
Switch 31
Limitations on Input bits
There is no limit on the number of times that input bits can be used as normally open and normally closed conditions in the program and the addresses
can be programmed in any order.
An input bit cannot be used as an operand in an Output instruction.
00001
Input Response Time
Settings
000100
Not allowed if
CIO 000100 is
an input bit.
The input response times for each Input Unit can be set in the PLC Setup.
Increasing the input response time will reduce chattering and the effects of
noise and decreasing the input response time allows higher speed input
pulses to be received.
263
Section 8-3
I/O Area
The default value for input response times is 8 ms and the setting range is 0 to
32 ms.
Note If the time is set to 0 ms, there will still be an ON delay time of 20 µs max. and
an OFF delay time of 300 µs due to delays caused by internal elements.
Pulses shorter than the time
constant are not received.
Input from switch
Input bit
Input time constant
Input time constant
Output Bits
A bit in the I/O Area is called an output bit when it is allocated to an Output
Unit. The ON/OFF status of an output bits are output to devices such as actuators. There are two ways for the status of output bits to be refreshed to an
Output Unit: normal I/O refreshing and IORF(097) refreshing.
Normal I/O Refreshing
The status of output bits are output to external devices once each cycle after
program execution.
In the following example, CIO 000201 is allocated to an actuator, an external
device connected to an output terminal of an Output Unit. The ON/OFF status
of CIO 000201 is output to that actuator once each cycle.
000201
OUT
000201
CPU Unit
Bit allocation
CIO 000201
Output Unit
Actuator or other
output device
Once
every
cycle
Immediate Refreshing
(Single CPU Systems
Only)
When the immediate refreshing variation of an instruction is specified by
inputting an exclamation point just before the instruction, and the instruction’s
operand is an output bit or word, the content of the word containing the bit or
the word itself will be output just after the instruction is executed. This immediate refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I/O refreshing performed
once each cycle.
Note Immediate refreshing will be performed for output bits allocated to Basic I/O
Units only (excluding C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and Basic I/O
Units mounted in Remote I/O Slave Racks), not High-density I/O Units which
are Special I/O Units.
1,2,3...
264
1. Bit Operand
Just after the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the word containing the specified bit will be output to the
output device(s).
Section 8-3
I/O Area
2. Word Operand
Just after the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the specified word will be output to the output device(s).
In the following example, CIO 000201 is allocated to an actuator, an external
device connected to the output terminal of an Output Unit. The ON/OFF status of CIO 000201 is output to the actuator just after !OUT 000201 is executed.
Ladder symbol
000201
Mnemonic
OUT 000201
!
CPU Unit
Bit allocation
CIO 000201
Output Unit
Actuator
Output
just after
instruction
execution.
IORF(097) Refreshing
When IORF(097) (I/O REFRESH) is executed, the ON/OFF status of output
bits in the specified range of words is output to their external devices. This I/O
refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I/O refreshing performed
once each cycle.
The following IORF(097) instruction refreshes the status of all I/O points in I/O
Area words CIO 0000 to CIO 0003. The status of input points is read from the
Input Units and the status of output bits is written to the Output Units.
In this example, the status of input points allocated to CIO 0002 and CIO 0003
are output to the Output Unit. (CIO 0000 and CIO 0001 are allocated to Input
Units.)
CPU Unit
Bit allocation
CIO 0002
Output Unit
Actuator or
other output
device
CIO 0003
Output when
IORF (097)
is executed.
Limitations on Output Bits
Output bits can be programmed in any order. Output bits can be used as operands in Input instructions and there is no limit on the number of times that an
output bit is used as a normally open and normally closed condition.
265
Section 8-4
CS-series DeviceNet Area
00002
00000
00000
An output bit can be used in only one Output instruction that controls its status. If an output bit is used in two or more Output instructions, only the last
instruction will be effective.
CIO 000000 is controlled
by CIO 000010.
Only this instruction is
effective.
Note All outputs on Basic I/O Units and Special I/O Units can be turned OFF by
turning ON the Output OFF Bit (A50015). The status of the output bits won’t
be affected even though the actual outputs are turned OFF.
8-4
CS-series DeviceNet Area
The CS-series DeviceNet Area addresses run from CIO 3200 to CIO 3799
(600 words).
Words in the CS-series DeviceNet Area are used for fixed allocations to
Slaves for DeviceNet remote I/O communications for the CS-series DeviceNet
Unit (CS1W-DRM21-V1).
The Fixed Allocation Setting Switches 1 to 3 (Software Switches) in the CIO
Area words allocated to the DeviceNet Unit determine which fixed allocation
words are used.
Area
Fixed Allocation Area 1
Fixed Allocation Area 2
Fixed Allocation Area 3
Master to Slave
(Output Words)
CIO 3200 to CIO 3263
CIO 3400 to CIO 3463
CIO 3600 to CIO 3663
Slave to Master
(Input Words)
CIO 3300 to CIO 3363
CIO 3500 to CIO 3563
CIO 3700 to CIO 3763
Note If the DeviceNet Unit is set to use the I/O slave function, the following
words are also allocated.
Area
Fixed Allocation Area 1
Fixed Allocation Area 2
Fixed Allocation Area 3
Master to Slave
(Output Word)
CIO 3370
CIO 3570
CIO 3770
Slave to Master
(Input Word)
CIO 3270
CIO 3470
CIO 3670
Data is exchanged regularly to Slaves in the network (independent of the program) through the CS-series DeviceNet Unit (CS1W-DRM21-V1) mounted in
the CPU Rack.
Words can be allocated to Slaves in two ways: fixed allocation (words allocated by node number) or free allocation (user-set word allocation).
• With fixed allocations, words in the CS-series DeviceNet Area are allocated automatically in node-number order in one of the fixed allocation
areas (1 to 3).
266
Section 8-5
Data Link Area
• With user-set allocations, the user can allocate words to Slaves from the
following words.
CIO 0000 to CIO 0235, CIO 0300 to CIO 0511, CIO 1000 to CIO 1063
W000 to W511
H000 to H511
D00000 to D32767
E00000 to E32767 (banks 0 to C)
For details on word allocations, refer to the CS/CJ Series DeviceNet Unit
Operation Manual (W380).
CPU Unit
CS-series DeviceNet Unit
(CS1W-DRM21-V1)
CS-series DeviceNet Area
DeviceNet Slaves
With fixed allocations, words are assigned according to node numbers.
(If a Slave requires two or more words, it will occupy as many node
numbers as words required.)
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the CS-series DeviceNet Area can be force-set and force-reset.
DeviceNet Area
Initialization
The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR mode and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The DeviceNet Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
By default, the DeviceNet Area is cleared when power is interrupted or the
CPU Unit is restarted.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the DeviceNet Area won’t
be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the
DeviceNet Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
8-5
Data Link Area
Data Link Area addresses range from CIO 1000 to CIO 1199 (CIO
bits 100000 to 119915). Words in the Link Area are used for data links when
LR is set as the data link area for automatic allocation for Controller Link Networks. It is also used for PLC Links.
267
Section 8-6
CPU Bus Unit Area
A data link automatically (independently of the program) shares data with Link
Areas in other CPU Units in the network through a Controller Link Unit
mounted to the PLC’s CPU Rack.
Data links can be generated automatically (using the same number of words
for each node) or manually. When a user defines the data link manually, he
can assign any number of words to each node and make nodes receive-only
or transmit-only. Refer to the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309)
for more details.
Words in the Link Area can be used in the program when LR is not set as the
data link area for automatic allocation for Controller Link Networks and PLC
Links are not used.
Link Areas
Controller
Link Unit
CPU Unit
Controller
Link Unit
CPU Unit
Controller
Link Unit
CPU Unit
Controller Link Network
Link Area Initialization
1,2,3...
The contents of the Link Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Link Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Link Area will be retained if FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
By default, the Data Link Area is cleared when power is interrupted or the
CPU Unit is restarted.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Link Area won’t be
cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Link
Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Forcing Bit Status
8-6
Bits in the Link Area can be force-set and force-reset.
CPU Bus Unit Area
The CPU Bus Unit Area contains 400 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 1500 to CIO 1899. Words in the CPU Bus Unit Area can be allocated to
CPU Bus Units to transfer data such as the operating status of the Unit. Each
Unit is allocated 25 words based on the Unit’s unit number setting.
268
Section 8-6
CPU Bus Unit Area
Data is exchanged with CPU Bus Units once each cycle during I/O refreshing,
which occurs after program execution. (Words in this data area cannot be
refreshed with IORF(097).)
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit Area
(25 words/Unit)
I/O refreshing
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 25 words based on its unit number, as shown
in the following table.
Unit number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Allocated words
CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
CIO 1550 to CIO 1574
CIO 1575 to CIO 1599
CIO 1600 to CIO 1624
CIO 1625 to CIO 1649
CIO 1650 to CIO 1674
CIO 1675 to CIO 1699
CIO 1700 to CIO 1724
CIO 1725 to CIO 1749
CIO 1750 to CIO 1774
CIO 1775 to CIO 1799
CIO 1800 to CIO 1824
CIO 1825 to CIO 1849
CIO 1850 to CIO 1874
CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
The function of the 25 words depends upon the CPU Bus Unit being used. For
details, refer to the Unit’s operation manual.
Words in the CPU Bus Unit Area that aren’t allocated to CPU Bus Units can
be used only in the program.
Bits in the CPU Bus Unit Area can be force-set and force-reset.
CPU Bus Unit Area
Initialization
The contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The CPU Bus Unit Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
By default, the CPU Bus Unit Area is cleared when power is interrupted or the
CPU Unit is restarted.
269
Section 8-7
Inner Board Area
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area
won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the CPU
Bus Unit Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
8-7
Inner Board Area
The Inner Board Area contains 100 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 1900 to CIO 1999. Words in the Inner Board Area can be allocated to a
Duplex Inner Board to transfer data such as the operating status of the Unit.
All 100 words must be allocated to just one Inner Board.
Note
1. The Inner Board Area is used for Inner Boards only in Single CPU Systems
or for the Inner Boards in a Process-control CPU Units in Duplex CPU Systems.
2. The user cannot mount Inner Boards into CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems.
Data is exchanged with the Duplex Inner Board once each cycle during normal I/O refreshing, which occurs after program execution. Depending on the
type of Inner Board that is mounted, data can also be refreshed directly.
Duplex Inner Board
CPU Unit
I/O refreshing
Inner Board Area
(100 words/Board)
The function of the 100 words in the Inner Board Area depends upon the
Duplex Inner Board being used. For details, refer to the Board’s Operation
Manual.
When the words in the Inner Board Area aren’t allocated to an Duplex Inner
Board, they can be used only in the program.
Bits in the Inner Board Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Inner Board Area
Initialization
The contents of the Inner Board Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Inner Board Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Inner Board Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
By default, the Inner Board Area is cleared when power is interrupted or the
CPU Unit is restarted.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Inner Board Area
won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
270
Section 8-8
Special I/O Unit Area
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Inner
Board Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
8-8
Special I/O Unit Area
The Special I/O Unit Area contains 960 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959. Words in the Special I/O Unit Area are allocated to
CS-series Special I/O Units to transfer data such as the operating status of
the Unit. Each Unit is allocated 10 words based on its unit number setting.
Data is exchanged with Special I/O Units once each cycle during I/O refreshing, which occurs after program execution. The words can also be refreshed
with IORF(097).
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Special I/O Unit Area
(10 words/Unit)
I/O
refreshing or
IORF
(097)
Each Special I/O Unit is allocated 25 words based on its unit number, as
shown in the following table.
Unit number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Allocated words
CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
CIO 2010 to CIO 2019
CIO 2020 to CIO 2029
CIO 2030 to CIO 2039
CIO 2040 to CIO 2049
CIO 2050 to CIO 2059
CIO 2060 to CIO 2069
CIO 2070 to CIO 2079
CIO 2080 to CIO 2089
CIO 2090 to CIO 2099
CIO 2100 to CIO 2109
CIO 2110 to CIO 2119
CIO 2120 to CIO 2129
CIO 2130 to CIO 2139
CIO 2140 to CIO 2149
CIO 2150 to CIO 2159
CIO 2160 to CIO 2169
CIO 2170 to CIO 2179
95
CIO 2950 to CIO 2959
The function of the words allocated to a Unit depends upon the Special I/O
Unit being used. For details, refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual.
Words in the Special I/O Unit Area that aren’t allocated to Special I/O Units
can be used only in the program.
271
Section 8-9
Work Area
Bits in the Special I/O Unit Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Special I/O Unit Area
Initialization
1,2,3...
The contents of the Special I/O Unit Area will be cleared in the following
cases:
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Special I/O Unit Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Special I/O Unit Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
8-9
By default, the Special I/O Unit Area is cleared when power is interrupted or
the CPU Unit is restarted.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Special I/O Unit Area
won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Special I/O Unit Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Work Area
The Work Area contains 512 words with addresses ranging from W000 to
W511. These words can be used only in the program as work words.
There are unused words in the CIO Area (CIO 1200 to CIO 1499 and
CIO 3800 to CIO 6143) that can also be used in the program, but use any
available words in the Work Area first because the unused words in the CIO
Area may be allocated to new functions in future versions of CS1D CPU Units.
Bits in the Work Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Work Area Initialization
1,2,3...
The contents of the Work Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Work Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Work Area will be retained when FALS(007)
is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
272
By default, the Work Area is cleared when power is interrupted or the CPU
Unit is restarted.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Work Area won’t be
cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Work
Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Section 8-10
Holding Area
8-10 Holding Area
The Holding Area contains 512 words with addresses ranging from H000 to
H511 (bits H00000 to H51115). These words can be used only in the program.
Holding Area bits can be used in any order in the program and can be used as
normally open or normally closed conditions as often as necessary.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the Holding Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Holding Area Initialization
Data in the Holding Area is not cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled
or the PLC’s operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN or
MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
A Holding Area bit will be cleared if it is programmed between IL(002) and
ILC(003) and the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF. To keep a bit ON
even when the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF, turn ON the bit with the
SET instruction just before IL(002).
Self-maintaining Bits
When a self-maintaining bit is programmed with a Holding Area bit, the selfmaintaining bit won’t be cleared even when the power is reset.
Note
1. If a Holding Area bit is not used for the self-maintaining bit, the bit will be
turned OFF and the self-maintaining bit will be cleared when the power is
reset.
2. If a Holding Area bit is used but not programmed as a self-maintaining bit
as in the following diagram, the bit will be turned OFF by execution condition A when the power is reset.
A
Precautions
H00000
When a Holding Area bit is used in a KEEP(011) instruction, never use a normally closed condition for the reset input if the input device uses an AC power
supply. When the power supply goes OFF or is temporarily interrupted, the
input will go OFF before the PLC’s internal power supply and the Holding Area
bit will be reset.
Set input
Input
Unit
Reset input
Instead, use a configuration like the one shown below.
273
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Set input
Input
Unit
Reset input
There are no restrictions in the order of using bit address or in the number of
N.C. or N.O. conditions that can be programmed.
8-11 Auxiliary Area
The Auxiliary Area contains 960 words with addresses ranging from A000 to
A959). These words are preassigned as flags and control bits to monitor and
control operation.
Some words and bits in the Auxiliary area are controlled by the system, others
can be set by the program or from a Programming Device. The Auxiliary Area
includes error flags, initialization flags, control bits, and monitoring data.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the Auxiliary Area cannot be force-set and force-reset continuously.
Writing Auxiliary Area Data
The following operations can be performed from a Programming Device to
write data in the Auxiliary Area.
• Using the CX-Programmer:
Online set/reset (not force-set/force-reset, see note), changing present
values when monitoring programming addresses (set values dialog box),
or transferring data to the PLC after editing the PLC data tables.
Refer to the CX-Programmer User Manual.
• Using a Programming Console:
Temporarily force-setting/force-resetting bits from the Bit/Word Monitor or
the 3-word Monitor operation (see Programming Consoles Operation
Manual).
Note Online set/reset operations are supported for Duplex CPU Systems by CXProgrammer version 3.0 or higher and for Single CPU Systems by CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher.
Functions
The following table lists the functions of Auxiliary Area flags and control bits.
The table is organized according to the functions of the flags and bits. For
more details or to look up a bit by its address, refer to Appendix B Auxiliary
Area.
274
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Switching from Duplex to Simplex Operation (Duplex CPU Systems Only)
■
Cause of Switching
Name
Duplex Verification Error
Switch Flag
Address
A02300
Duplex Bus Error Switch Flag
A02301
Duplex Initialization Error
Switch Flag
A02302
CPU Unit Setting Switch Flag
A02303
CPU Error (WDT) Switch Flag A02304
FALS Instruction Error Switch
Flag
A02306
Cycle Time Overrun Switch
Flag
A02308
Program Error Switch Flag
A02309
Fatal Inner Board Error Switch A02312
Flag (Process-control CPU
Units only)
Memory Error Switch Flag
A02315
Description
ON: A duplex verification error caused a switch from duplex
to simplex operation. Only operation is switched and the
active CPU Unit will not be switched.
This flag is turned OFF when duplex operation is restored.
ON: A duplex bus error caused a switch from duplex to simplex operation. Only operation is switched and the active
CPU Unit will not be switched.
This flag is turned OFF when duplex operation is restored.
ON: An error during duplex initialization caused a switch
from duplex to simplex operation and duplex operation was
never started. The active CPU Unit will not be switched.
This flag is turned OFF when duplex operation is restored.
ON: Changing the CPU Unit’s switch from USE to NO USE
caused a switch from duplex to simplex operation. The
active CPU Unit will be switched.
This flag is turned OFF when duplex operation is restored.
ON: A CPU Unit error (WDT) caused a switch from duplex to
simplex operation. The active CPU Unit will be switched.
This flag is turned OFF when duplex operation is restored.
ON: Execution of an FALS instruction caused a switch from
duplex to simplex operation. The active CPU Unit will be
switched.
This flag is turned OFF when duplex operation is restored.
ON: Exceeding the cycle time caused a switch from duplex
to simplex operation. The active CPU Unit will be switched.
This flag is turned OFF when duplex operation is restored.
ON: A program error caused a switch from duplex to simplex
operation.The active CPU Unit will be switched.
This flag is turned OFF when duplex operation is restored.
ON: A fatal Inner Board error caused a switch from duplex to
simplex operation. The active CPU Unit will be switched.
This flag is turned OFF when duplex operation is restored.
ON: A memory error caused a switch from duplex to simplex
operation. The active CPU Unit will be switched.
This flag is turned OFF when duplex operation is restored.
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
The following programming can be used with the flags in A023 to detect when
the system switches from duplex to simplex operation.
<>
A023
#0
Duplex error
If the contents of A023 is not 0, the “duplex error” output is turned ON to indicate that the system has switched to simplex operation.
275
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
■
Time of Switching
Name
Address
Time of Switch from Duplex to A024 to
Simplex Operation
A026
■
Description
The time when operation was switched from duplex to simplex operation is stored.
The time is cleared when duplex operation is restored.
A02400 to A02407: Seconds (00 to 59)
A02408 to A02415: Minutes (00 to 59)
A02500 to A02507: Hours (00 to 23)
A02508 to A02515: Day of month (01 to 31)
A02600 to A02607: Month (01 to 12)
A02608 to A02615: Year (00 to 99)
Access
Read-only
Previous Cause of Switching
Name
Duplex Verification Error
Switch Flag
Address
A01900
Description
ON: A duplex verification error caused the previous switch
from duplex to simplex operation.
Access
Read-only
Duplex Bus Error Switch Flag
A01901
ON: A duplex bus error caused the previous switch from
duplex to simplex operation.
Read-only
Duplex Initialization Error
Switch Flag
A01902
ON: An error during duplex initialization caused the previous Read-only
switch from duplex to simplex operation and duplex operation was never started.
CPU Unit Setting Switch Flag
A01903
ON: Changing the CPU Unit’s switch from USE to NO USE
caused the previous switch from duplex to simplex operation.
ON: A CPU Unit error (WDT) caused the previous switch
from duplex to simplex operation.
Read-only
CPU Error (WDT) Switch Flag A01904
Read-only
FALS Instruction Error Switch
Flag
A01906
ON: Execution of an FALS instruction caused the previous
switch from duplex to simplex operation.
Read-only
Cycle Time Overrun Switch
Flag
A01908
ON: Exceeding the cycle time caused the previous switch
from duplex to simplex operation.
Read-only
Program Error Switch Flag
A01909
ON: A program error caused the previous switch from duplex Read-only
to simplex operation.
ON: A fatal Inner Board error caused the previous switch
Read-only
from duplex to simplex operation.
Fatal Inner Board Error Switch A01912
Flag (Process-control CPU
Units only)
Memory Error Switch Flag
■
A01915
ON: A memory error caused the previous switch from duplex Read-only
to simplex operation.
Previous Time of Switching
Name
Time of Previous Switch from
Duplex to Simplex Operation
276
Address
A020 to
A022
Description
Access
The time of the previous switch from duplex to simplex oper- Read-only
ation is stored.
A02000 to A02007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A02008 to A02015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A02100 to A02107: Hours (00 to 23)
A02108 to A02115: Day of month (01 to 31)
A02200 to A02207: Month (01 to 12)
A02208 to A02215: Year (00 to 99)
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Non-fatal Duplex Errors
Name
Non-fatal Duplex Error Flag
Address
A40214
Duplex Verification Error Flag
(See note.)
A31600
Duplex Bus Error Flag (See
note.)
Duplex Power Supply Unit
Error Flag
A31601
A31602
Duplex Communications Error A31603
Flag
Description
ON: One of the following errors occurred: Duplex
verification error, duplex bus error, duplex power
supply unit error, or duplex communications error
(See note.)
Reference
Duplex Verifications
Errors
Duplex Power Supply
Errors
Duplex Communications Errors
ON: An inconsistency exists between the program Duplex Verifications
or memory of the active and standby CPU Units in Errors
Duplex Mode. (Refer to A317, A804 for details.)
ON: An error occurred on the sync transfer bus in --the duplex system.
ON: An error occurred in the Power Supply Unit or Duplex Power Supply
power supply system on a duplex CPU Rack,
Errors
Expansion Rack, or Long-distance Expansion
Rack.
ON: One of the duplex Communications Units has Duplex Communicafailed. (Refer to A434 to A437 for details.)
tions Errors
Note Duplex CPU Systems only.
■
Duplex Verifications Errors (Duplex CPU Systems Only)
Name
Duplex Verification Error Flag
Address
A31600
Description
ON: An inconsistency exists between the program or memory of the active and standby CPU Units in Duplex Mode.
(Refer to A317, A804 for details.)
Access
Read-only
Other CPU Unit Duplex Verifi- A31706
cation Error Flag
CPU Unit Model Verification
A31707
Error Flag
ON: A duplex error occurred in the other CPU Unit when
Read-only
entering Duplex Mode.
ON: The CPU Units were not the same model when entering Read-only
Duplex Mode.
CPU Unit Version Verification
Error Flag
ON: The unit version of the standby CPU Unit is earlier than Read-only
the unit version of the active CPU Unit and the active CPU
Unit uses function not supported by the standby CPU Unit.
ON: The duplex Inner Boards in the two Process-control
Read-only
CPU Units were not the same model when entering Duplex
Mode.
A31708
Inner Board Model Verification A31710
Error Flag (Process-control
CPU Units only)
Parameter Area Verification
A31713
Error Flag
No Active CPU Unit Error Flag A31714
ON: The parameter area in the two CPU Units in duplex
Read-only
mode do not have the same contents.
ON: There is no active CPU Unit for CPU Unit set for
Read-only
standby operation when power was turned ON in duplex
mode. This occurs when one of the following is detected:
The active CPU Unit is not mounted, the CPU Unit switch is
set to NO USE, or pin 7 on the DIP switch is set for simple
backup operation.
User Program Verification
Error Flag
Ethernet Duplex Setting Flag
A31715
ON: The user program in the two CPU Units in duplex mode Read-only
do not have the same contents.
ON: The unit version of the standby CPU Unit is earlier than Read-only
the unit version of the active CPU Unit and the active CPU
Unit uses a PLC Setup setting (Ethernet Duplex Setting) that
is not supported by the standby CPU Unit.
Unit Removal without a Programming Device Function
Setting Flag
A80401
A80400
ON: The unit version of the standby CPU Unit is earlier than Read-only
the unit version of the active CPU Unit and the active CPU
Unit uses a PLC Setup setting (Unit Removal without a Programming Device Function Setting) that is not supported by
the standby CPU Unit.
277
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Name
Removal/Addition of Units
without a Programming
Device Setting Flag
Address
A80402
Turn ON Error Unit Number
Flag when Removing a Special Unit Setting Flag
A80403
Communications Port Autoallocation Instruction
A80404
ON: The unit version of the standby CPU Unit is earlier than Read-only
the unit version of the active CPU Unit and the active CPU
Unit uses an instruction (automatically allocating the communications port) that is not supported by the standby CPU
Unit.
Non-fatal Duplex Error Flag
A40214
ON: One of the following errors occurred: Non-fatal duplex
error, duplex verification error, duplex bus error, duplex
power supply unit error, or duplex communications error
■
Description
Access
ON: The unit version of the standby CPU Unit is earlier than Read-only
the unit version of the active CPU Unit and the active CPU
Unit uses a PLC Setup setting (Removal/Addition of Units
without a Programming Device Setting) that is not supported
by the standby CPU Unit.
ON: The unit version of the standby CPU Unit is earlier than Read-only
the unit version of the active CPU Unit and the active CPU
Unit uses a PLC Setup setting (Turn ON Error Unit Number
Flag when Removing a Special Unit Setting) that is not supported by the standby CPU Unit.
Read-only
Duplex Power Supply Information
Name
Duplex Power Supply Unit
Error Flag
Address
A31602
Description
Access
ON: An error occurred in the Power Supply Unit or power sup- Read-only
ply system on a duplex CPU Rack, Expansion Rack, or Longdistance Expansion Rack.
Error Power Supply Unit
Location
A31900 to
A31915
When an error in a Power Supply Unit results in an error in the Read-only
5-V/26-V output, one of the following bits will turn ON to show
the location of the Power Supply Unit with the error.
A31900: Right Power Supply Unit on CPU Rack (rack 0).
A31901: Left Power Supply Unit on CPU Rack (rack 0).
A31902: Right Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (rack 1).
A31903: Left Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (rack 1).
...
A31914: Right Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (rack 7).
A31915: Left Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (rack 7).
A32000 to
A32015
When the voltage on the primary side of the Power Supply Unit Read-only
drops or is interrupted, one of the following bits will turn ON to
show the location of the Power Supply Unit with the error.
A32000: Right Power Supply Unit on CPU Rack (rack 0).
A32001: Left Power Supply Unit on CPU Rack (rack 0).
A32002: Right Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (rack 1).
A32003: Left Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (rack 1).
...
A32014: Right Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (rack 7).
A32015: Left Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (rack 7).
■
Duplex Communications Unit Information for I/O Table Generation
Name
Duplex Communications Unit
Missing or Non-Duplex Communications Unit Flag
Address
A26111
Duplex Communications Unit
Verification Error Flag
A26112
278
Description
Access
ON: Duplex Units are not mounted for a unit number speci- Read-only
fied for Duplex Communications Units (i.e., one Unit is missing or the mounted Units do not support duplex operation).
The I/O tables will not be created and an I/O Table Creation
Error will occur.
ON: The duplex setting in the PLC Setup for a unit number Read-only
specified for Duplex Communications Units does not agree
with the setting on the Duplex Communications Units. The
I/O tables will not be created and an I/O Table Creation Error
will occur. Refer to the Operation Manual for the Communications Units for details on Unit settings.
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
■
Duplex Communications Cable Information
Name
Duplex Communications
Cable Status Flags
Address
A271
Description
ON: The corresponding I/O Communications Cable is duplexed.
A27100: Cable between CPU Rack and Expansion Rack 1
A27101: Cable between Expansion Racks 1 and 2
A27102: Cable between Expansion Racks 2 and 3
A27103: Cable between Expansion Racks 3 and 4
A27104: Cable between Expansion Racks 4 and 5
A27105: Cable between Expansion Racks 5 and 6
A27106: Cable between Expansion Racks 6 and 7
Access
Read-only
Duplex Communications
Cable Error Flags
A270
ON: An error has occurred at some point in the corresponding I/O
Communications Cable.
A27000: Error between CPU Rack slot 0 and Expansion Rack 1
A27001: Error between CPU Rack slot 1 and Expansion Rack 1
A27002: Error between Expansion Rack 1 slot 0 and Rack 2
A27003: Error between Expansion Rack 1 slot 1 and Rack 2
A27004: Error between Expansion Rack 2 slot 0 and Rack 3
A27005: Error between Expansion Rack 2 slot 1 and Rack 3
A27006: Error between Expansion Rack 3 slot 0 and Rack 4
A27007: Error between Expansion Rack 3 slot 1 and Rack 4
A27008: Error between Expansion Rack 4 slot 0 and Rack 5
A27009: Error between Expansion Rack 4 slot 1 and Rack 5
A27010: Error between Expansion Rack 5 slot 0 and Rack 6
A27011: Error between Expansion Rack 5 slot 1 and Rack 6
A27012: Error between Expansion Rack 6 slot 0 and Rack 7
A27013: Error between Expansion Rack 6 slot 1 and Rack 7
Read-only
■
Duplex Communications Errors
Name
Address
Duplex Communications Unit A02700 to
Operating Flags
A02715
Duplex Communications
Error Flag
A31603
Duplex Communications Rec- A43400 to
ognition Error Flags
A43415
Duplex Communications Veri- A43500 to
fication Error Flags
A43515
Duplex Communications
Switched Flags (non-fatal
communications error)
A43600 to
A43615
Description
Access
ON: The Communications Unit with the corresponding unit
Read-only
number is in duplex operation.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
ON: One of the duplex Communications Unit has failed. (Refer Read-only
to A434 to A437 for details.)
ON: Duplex Communications Units for the corresponding unit Read-only
number does not exist, i.e., it is not mounted, the Unit does not
support duplex operation, or the unit number is illegal.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
ON: The settings of the pair of Units mounted for duplex com- Read-only
munications are not the same. Refer to the Operation Manual
for the Communications Unit for details on settings.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
Active/Standby Communications Units
Read-only
ON: An error was detected in self-diagnosis in the active Communications Unit and operation was switched to the standby
Communications Unit. Communications will be continued by
the standby Communications Unit.
Primary/Secondary Communications Units (See Note)
ON: An error was detected in self-diagnosis in the primary
Communications Unit and operation was switched to the secondary Communications Unit. Communications will be continued by the secondary Communications Unit.
All Communications Units
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
This flag is turned OFF when online Unit replacement is performed for the faulty Communications Unit.
Note: Primary/Secondary Communications Units are supported by CPU Unit Ver. 1.1 or later.
279
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Name
Address
Duplex Communications
Standby Unit Error Flags
(non-fatal communications
error)
A43700 to
A43715
Duplex Communications
Switch Cause Flags
A042 to
A049
280
Description
Access
Active/Standby Communications Units
Read-only
ON: An error was detected in self-diagnosis in the standby
Communications Unit. Communications will be continued by
the active Communications Unit.
Primary/Secondary Communications Units (See Note)
ON: An error was detected in self-diagnosis in the secondary
Communications Unit. Communications will be continued by
the primary Communications Unit.
All Communications Units
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
This flag is turned OFF when online Unit replacement is performed for the faulty Communications Unit.
Note: Primary/Secondary Communications Units are supported by CPU Unit Ver. 1.1 or later.
Active/Standby Communications Units
Read-only
When an error occurs in the active Communications Unit and
operation is switched to the standby Communications Unit, an
error code will be stored to show the cause of the error in the
active Communications Unit. An error code is not stored when
an error occurs in the standby Communications Unit.
Primary/Secondary Communications Units (See Note)
When an error occurs in the primary Communications Unit
and operation is switched to the secondary Communications
Unit, an error code will be stored to show the cause of the
error in the primary Communications Unit. When an error
occurs in the secondary Communications Unit, an error code
is stored in the words for one unit number higher than the primary Communications Unit.
All Communications Units
The corresponding bit in A436 (Duplex Communications
Switched Flags) will also turn ON.
Refer to the Operation Manual for the Communications Unit
for details on error codes.
Note: Primary/Secondary Communications Units are supported by CPU Unit Ver. 1.1 or later.
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Duplex System Status
Name
Duplex/Simplex Mode Flag
(Duplex CPU Systems only)
Address
A32808
Description
Indicates the current mode as follows:
1: Duplex Mode
0: Simplex Mode
A32808 is turned OFF in duplex initialization and thus cannot be used alone to detect errors causing a switch to Simplex Mode. Use A32808 together with A43915 as shown
below.
A32808
Access
Read-only
A43915
Duplex error
The Duplex Initialization Flag is also used for write processing in online editing, when the initialize switch is pressed,
when processing commands from communications or Programming Devices, etc.
Note The above output will also indicate a duplex error for
one cycle when online editing is performed. If this
causes a problem in the system, use the flags in A023
that indicate the cause of switching to detect switching
to simplex operation.
Active CPU Unit Location Flag A32809
(Duplex CPU Systems only)
Indicates which CPU Unit is the active CPU Unit.
ON: Right CPU Unit, OFF: Left CPU Unit
A32810 and Indicates the system configuration, CS1H CPU Units or
A32811
CS1D CPU Units.
A32810 OFF, A32811 OFF:
CS1-H CPU Unit
A32810 ON, A32811 OFF:
CS1D CPU Unit for Single CPU System
A32810 ON, A32811 ON:
CS1D CPU Unit for Duplex CPU System
Read-only
Duplex System Configuration
Flags
Read-only
Right CPU Unit Duplex
Recovery Failed Flag (Duplex
CPU Systems only)
Left CPU Unit Duplex Recovery Failed Flag (Duplex CPU
Systems only)
A32814
This CPU Unit Location Flag
(Duplex CPU Systems only)
A32515
Indicates where this CPU Unit is mounted.
ON: Right side, OFF: Left side
Read-only
Duplex Initialization Flag
(Duplex CPU Systems only)
A43915
ON: Duplex operation being initialized.
Read-only
Description
ON: Error in CPU Bus Unit Setup
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Overflow in maximum number of I/O points.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: The same unit number was used more than once.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O bus error
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Error in a Special I/O Unit
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
Access
Read-only
A32815
ON: The right CPU Unit failed to recover duplex operation in Read-only
Duplex Mode even after the error was cleared and an
attempt was made to recover duplex operation automatically.
ON: The left CPU Unit failed to recover duplex operation in Read-only
Duplex Mode even after the error was cleared and an
attempt was made to recover duplex operation automatically.
■ I/O Table Generation Errors
Name
Address
CPU Bus Unit Setup Area Ini- A26100
tialization Error Flag
I/O Overflow Flag
A26102
Duplication Error Flag
A26103
I/O Bus Error Flag
A26104
Special I/O Unit Error Flag
A26107
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
281
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Name
I/O Unconfirmed Error Flag
Address
A26109
Online Replacement Flag
A26110
Duplex Communications Unit
Error Flag
A26111
Duplex Communications Unit
Verification Error Flag
A26112
Description
Access
ON: I/O detection has not been completed.
Read-only
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: An online replacement operation is being performed (It Read-only
is treated as an I/O table creation error.) This flag will be
turned OFF automatically when the online replacement
operation has been completed. (Do not attempt to create the
I/O tables while this flag is ON.) (See Unit Online Replacement Information below.)
ON: Duplex Units are not mounted for a unit number speci- Read-only
fied for Duplex Communications Units (i.e., one Unit is missing or the mounted Units do not support duplex operation).
ON: The duplex setting in the PLC Setup for a unit number Read-only
specified for Duplex Communications Units does not agree
with the setting on the Duplex Communications Units. The
I/O tables will not be created and an I/O Table Creation Error
will occur. Refer to the Operation Manual for the Communications Units for details on Unit settings.
CPU Standby Information
Name
Address
Description
Access
CPU Bus/Special I/O Unit
Startup Flag
A32203
ON: The CPU Unit is on standby waiting for CPU Bus or
Special I/O Units to start.
Read-only
Duplex Bus Error Standby
Flag (Duplex CPU Systems
only)
Duplex Verification Error
Standby Flag (Duplex CPU
Systems only)
A32204
ON: The CPU Unit is on standby because a duplex bus error Read-only
occurred at startup.
A32205
ON: The CPU Unit is on standby because a duplex verification error occurred at startup.
Read-only
Waiting for Other CPU Unit
Standby Flag (Duplex CPU
Systems only)
Inner Board Startup Flag
(Duplex CPU Systems only)
A32206
ON: The CPU Unit is on standby waiting for the other CPU
Unit to start operation at startup.
Read-only
A32207
ON: The CPU Unit is on standby waiting for an Inner Board
to start.
Read-only
Expansion Power OFF
Standby Flag
A32208
ON: The CPU Unit is on standby because power is not being Read-only
supplied to an Expansion Rack.
Unit Online Replacement Information
Name
Online Replacement Flag
Address
A03115
I/O Table Creation Error Flag
A26110
Online Replacement Slot
Flags
A034 to
A041
282
Description
ON: A Basic I/O Unit, Special I/O Unit, or CPU Bus Unit is
being replaced online on the CPU Rack, an Expansion
Rack, or a Long-distance Expansion Rack. (See note 3.)
ON: User attempted to generate the I/O table during online
replacement, causing an I/O table creation error. (See note
3.) (Do not attempt to create an I/O table while a Basic I/O
Unit, Special I/O Unit, or CPU Bus Unit is being replaced
online, i.e., while one of the Online Replacement Slot Flags
in A034 to A041 is ON.)
Access
Read-only
Read-only
ON: Online replacement is being performed (see note 3) for Read-only
the slot that corresponds to the ON bit.
A03400 to A03404: CPU Rack slots 0 to 4
A03405 to A03407: CPU Rack slots 5 to 7
(Single CPU Systems only)
A03415:
Duplex Unit
A03500 to A03508: Expansion Rack 1, slots 0 to 8
A03600 to A03608: Expansion Rack 2, slots 0 to 8
...
A04100 to A04108: Expansion Rack 7, slots 0 to 8
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Name
CPU Bus Unit Error, Unit
Number Flags
Address
A41700 to
A41715
Special I/O Unit Error, Unit
Number Flags
A41800 to
A42315
Description
Access
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Read-only
Unit and a CPU Bus Unit, the CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
(A40207) and the corresponding flag in A417 are turned ON.
If the PLC Setup is set to turn ON the corresponding Error
Unit Number Flag when a Special Unit (Special I/O Unit or
CPU Bus Unit) is being replaced, the corresponding flag will
be turned ON when the Unit is being replaced.
If a duplexed CLK Unit is being replaced, the corresponding
flag will be turned ON during replacement.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Read-only
Unit and a Special I/O Unit, the Special I/O Unit Error Flag
(A40206) and the corresponding flag in these words are
turned ON.
If the PLC Setup is set to turn ON the corresponding Error
Unit Number Flag when a Special Unit (Special I/O Unit or
CPU Bus Unit) is being replaced, the corresponding flag will
be turned ON when the Unit is being replaced.
Unit Replacement without a
A09911
Programming Device Enabled
Flag
ON when the Unit Removal without a Programming Device Read-only
or Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device
function has been enabled in the PLC Setup.
Maintenance Start Bit
A80015
This bit is provided to prevent non-fatal errors from occurring Read/write
during Unit removal without a Programming Device.
When this bit is ON, a Basic I/O Unit error, Special I/O Unit
error, or CPU Bus Unit error will not occur when a Unit is
removed. In addition, the CPU Unit will not detect an error
even if a Basic I/O Unit error, Special I/O Unit error, or CPU
Bus Unit error occurs in a Unit other than the one being
removed.
When this bit is OFF, a Basic I/O Unit error, Special I/O Unit
error, or CPU Bus Unit error will occur when a Unit is
removed. In addition, the CPU Unit will detect Basic I/O Unit
errors, Special I/O Unit errors, or CPU Bus Unit errors occurring in Units other than the one being removed.
After replacing the Units, turn ON the Online Replacement
Completed Bit (A80215) to restart data exchange. This bit is
turned OFF automatically when the Online Replacement
Completed Bit goes ON. (See note 4.)
This bit can also be turned OFF manually by the user before
all of the online replacements have been completed. Turn
this bit OFF when you want to detect errors in Units other
than the ones being replaced.
Online Replacement Completed Bit
A80215
The bit is provided to restart the data exchange between the Read/write
replaced Unit and CPU Unit. After a Unit has been replaced
without a Programming Device, turn ON the Online Replacement Completed Bit to restart the data exchange between
the CPU Unit and the slot where the Unit was replaced.
Once data exchange has started, the bit goes OFF.
ON: Online replacement (see note 3) failed.
Read/write
This flag indicates the completion status for the last online
Unit replacement that occurred, so it will be turned OFF
when a Unit is successfully replaced even if there is still a
Unit in the PLC which was not replaced successfully.
Online Replacement Comple- A80115
tion Error Flag
Online Replacement Comple- A80300 to
tion Error Details
A80303
When an online replacement function (see note 3) failed, the Read/write
relevant flag will be turned ON.
A80300: No Unit mounted or Unit mounted in another slot.
A80301: Replaced Unit and new Unit are different models.
A80302: Different unit numbers on replaced and new Units.
A80303: Different node numbers on replaced and new Units
(when replacing a duplex Communications Unit).
283
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Note
1. Do not turn ON the Maintenance Start Bit continuously from the ladder program or other source. As long as the Maintenance Start Bit is ON, errors
will not be generated even if there are Unit malfunctions, so the system
may be adversely affected.
2. Do not turn ON the Online Replacement Completed Bit continuously from
the ladder program or other source. If the Unit is mounted while the Online
Replacement Completed Bit is ON, the PLC (CPU Unit) may stop operating.
3. The flags in A034 to A041 indicate removal of a Unit with any one of the
following functions.
• Online Unit Replacement using a Programming Device
• Unit Removal without a Programming Device
• Unit Removal/Addition without a Programming Device
4. This bit will turn OFF automatically after all Units have been mounted to
complete the online replacement operation (i.e., after data exchange has
started) when the Unit Removal/Addition without a Programming Device
function is used for a Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion System.
Online Backplane/Unit Addition Information
Name
Online Addition Failed Flag
Address
A27215
Online Addition Failure Cause A27300 to
Flags
A27309
284
Description
Access
ON: An error occurred that prevented a Backplane and Unit Read/write
from being added online.
When an error occurred that prevented a Backplane and
Read/write
Unit from being added online, the relevant flag will be turned
ON.
A27300: Transmitted I/O tables are invalid (changed or
deleted).
A27301: Basic I/O Unit mounted in an invalid slot.
A27302: No Unit mounted in the added slot.
A27303: Specified an Expansion Backplane addition to an
earlier CPU Backplane version.
A27304: A CPU Bus Unit was added.
A27305: The added Unit’s model is different from the Unit
that was specified to be mounted.
A27306: The added Basic I/O Unit’s allocated words duplicate the words of an existing Unit.
A27307: The added unit number duplicates an existing unit
number.
A27308: The number of I/O points exceeds the maximum
(5,120 I/O points).
A27309: There is an error in the added Expansion Backplane (power supply OFF).
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
■ Operation Start/Stop Times (CPU Unit Ver. 1.1 or Later Only)
Name
Operation Start Time
Address
A515 to
A517
Operation End Time
A518 to
A520
Description
Access
The time that operation started as a result of changing the
Read/write
operating mode to RUN or MONITOR mode is stored here in
BCD.
A51500 to A51507: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51508 to A51515: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51600 to A51607: Hour (00 to 23)
A51608 to A51615: Day of month (01 to 31)
A51700 to A51707: Month (01 to 12)
A51708 to A51715: Year (00 to 99)
Note: The previous start time is stored after turning ON the
power supply until operation is started.
The time that operation stopped as a result of changing the Read/write
operating mode to PROGRAM mode is stored here in BCD.
A51800 to A51807: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51808 to A51815: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51900 to A51907: Hour (00 to 23)
A51908 to A51915: Day of month (01 to 31)
A52000 to A52007: Month (01 to 12)
A52008 to A52015: Year (00 to 99)
Note: If an error occurs in operation, the time of the error will
be stored. If the operating mode is then changed to PROGRAM mode, the time that PROGRAM mode was entered
will be stored.
■ Power Supply Information
Name
Startup Time
Address
A510 and
A511
Description
These words contain the time (in BCD) at which the power
was turned ON. The contents are updated every time that
the power is turned ON.
A51000 to A51007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51008 to A51015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51100 to A51107: Hour (00 to 23)
A51108 to A51115: Day of the month (01 to 31)
Access
Read/write
Power Interruption Time
A512 and
A513
Read/write
Number of Power
Interruptions
A514
These words contain the time (in BCD) at which the power
was interrupted. The contents are updated every time that
the power is interrupted.
A51200 to A51207: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51208 to A51215: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51300 to A51307: Hour (00 to 23)
A51308 to A51315: Day of month (01 to 31)
These words are not cleared when the power supply is
turned ON.
Contains the number of times (in binary) that power has
been interrupted since the power was first turned on. To
reset this value, overwrite the current value with 0000.
Total Power ON Time
A523
Read/write
Contains the total time (in binary) that the PLC has been on Read/write
in 10-hour units. The data is stored is updated every 10
hours. To reset this value, overwrite the current value with
0000.
285
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
■ Battery Errors
Name
Battery Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Address
A40204
Right CPU Unit Battery Error
Flag (Duplex CPU Systems
only)
Left CPU Unit Battery Error
Flag (Duplex CPU Systems
only)
A32411
Description
Access
ON if the CPU Unit’s battery is disconnected or its voltage is Read-only
low and the PLC Setup has been set to detect this error.
(Detect Low Battery)
ON if A40204 is ON in the right CPU Unit.
Read-only
A32413
ON if A40204 is ON in the left CPU Unit.
Read-only
File Memory Information
■
File Memory Information for Active CPU Unit or CPU Unit in Single CPU System
The following words and bits provide file memory status for Single CPU Systems or for the active CPU Unit in a Duplex CPU Systems. For a Only the
Memory Card in the active CPU Unit is accessed. For information on the CPU
Unit’s file memory-related status, refer to Read-only Words in Appendix B
Auxiliary Area Allocations.
Name
Memory Card Type
Address
A34300 to
A34302
EM File Memory Format Error A34306
Flag
Description
The Memory Card type is output to A34300 to A34302.
(0 hex: No Memory Card; 4 hex: Flash ROM)
With a Duplex CPU System, the information depends on the
setting of duplex operation for the Memory Card, as shown
below.
• Memory Card duplex operation disabled: Memory Card
type for active CPU Unit is stored.
• Memory Card duplex operation enabled: Memory Card
type is stored only when mounted in both CPU Units.
Turns ON when a format error occurs in the first EM bank
allocated for file memory in the CPU Unit.
Turns OFF when formatting is completed normally.
ON when the Memory Card is not formatted or a formatting
error has occurred in the active CPU Unit.
ON when an error occurred while writing data to file memory
in the active CPU Unit.
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Memory Card Format Error
Flag
File Transfer Error Flag
A34307
File Write Error Flag
A34309
ON when data cannot be written to file memory because it is Read-only
write-protected or the data exceeds the capacity of the file
memory in the active CPU Unit.
File Read Error
A34310
ON when a file could not be read because of a malfunction Read-only
(file is damaged or data is corrupted) in the active CPU Unit.
File Missing Flag
A34311
ON when an attempt is made to read a file that doesn’t exist Read-only
or an attempt is made to write to a file in a directory that
doesn’t exist in the active CPU Unit.
File Memory Operation Flag
A34313
ON while any of the following operations is being executed in Read-only
the active CPU Unit. OFF when none of them are being executed.
CMND instruction sending a FINS command to the local
CPU Unit.
FREAD/FWRIT instructions.
Program replacement using the control bit in the Auxiliary
Area.
Simple backup operation.
286
A34308
Read-only
Read-only
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Name
Accessing File Data Flag
Memory Card Detected Flag
■
Address
A34314
A34315
Description
Access
ON while file data is being accessed in the active CPU Unit. Read-only
ON when a Memory Card has been detected in the active
Read-only
CPU Unit.
OFF when a Memory Card has not been detected.
File Memory Information for Left CPU Unit (Duplex CPU Systems Only)
Name
Memory Card Type
Address
A34100 to
A34102
EM File Memory Format Error A34106
Flag
Description
Access
Indicates the type of Memory Card, if any, installed in the left Read-only
CPU Unit.
0 hex: No Memory Card, Flash ROM: 4 hex
Turns ON when a format error occurs in the first EM bank
Read-only
allocated for file memory in the left CPU Unit.
Turns OFF when formatting is completed normally.
ON when the Memory Card is not formatted or a formatting Read-only
error has occurred in the left CPU Unit.
Memory Card Format Error
Flag
A34107
File Transfer Error Flag
A34108
ON when an error occurred while writing data to file memory Read-only
in the left CPU Unit.
File Write Error Flag
A34109
ON when data cannot be written to file memory because it is Read-only
write-protected or the data exceeds the capacity of the file
memory in the left CPU Unit.
File Read Error
A34110
ON when a file could not be read because of a malfunction
(file is damaged or data is corrupted) in the left CPU Unit.
Read-only
File Missing Flag
A34111
Read-only
File Memory Operation Flag
A34113
Accessing File Data Flag
Memory Card Detected Flag
A34114
A34115
ON when an attempt is made to read a file that doesn’t exist
or an attempt is made to write to a file in a directory that
doesn’t exist in the left CPU Unit.
ON while any of the following operations is being executed in
the left CPU Unit. OFF when none of them are being executed.
CMND instruction sending a FINS command to the local
CPU Unit.
FREAD/FWRIT instructions.
Program replacement using the control bit in the Auxiliary
Area.
Simple backup operation.
ON while file data is being accessed in the left CPU Unit.
ON when a Memory Card has been detected in the left CPU
Unit.
OFF when a Memory Card has not been detected.
■
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
File Memory Information for Right CPU Unit (Duplex CPU Systems Only)
Name
Memory Card Type
Address
A34200 to
A34202
EM File Memory Format Error A34206
Flag
Memory Card Format Error
Flag
File Transfer Error Flag
A34207
File Write Error Flag
A34209
A34208
Description
Indicates the type of Memory Card, if any, installed in the
right CPU Unit.
0 hex: No Memory Card, Flash ROM: 4 hex
Turns ON when a format error occurs in the first EM bank
allocated for file memory in the right CPU Unit.
Turns OFF when formatting is completed normally.
ON when the Memory Card is not formatted or a formatting
error has occurred in the right CPU Unit.
ON when an error occurred while writing data to file memory
in the right CPU Unit.
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
ON when data cannot be written to file memory because it is Read-only
write-protected or the data exceeds the capacity of the file
memory in the right CPU Unit.
287
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Name
File Read Error
Address
A34210
File Missing Flag
A34211
File Memory Operation Flag
A34213
Accessing File Data Flag
Memory Card Detected Flag
A34214
A34215
Description
Access
ON when a file could not be read because of a malfunction Read-only
(file is damaged or data is corrupted) in the right CPU Unit.
ON when an attempt is made to read a file that doesn’t exist Read-only
or an attempt is made to write to a file in a directory that
doesn’t exist in the right CPU Unit.
ON while any of the following operations is being executed in Read-only
the right CPU Unit. OFF when none of them are being executed.
CMND instruction sending a FINS command to the local
CPU Unit.
FREAD/FWRIT instructions.
Program replacement using the control bit in the Auxiliary
Area.
Simple backup operation.
ON while file data is being accessed in the right CPU Unit.
Read-only
ON when a Memory Card has been detected in the right
Read-only
CPU Unit.
OFF when a Memory Card has not been detected.
Other File Memory Information
Name
Number of Items to
Transfer
Address
A346 to
A347
Description
These words contain the number of words or fields remaining to be transferred (8-digit hexadecimal).
For binary files (.IOM), the value is decremented for each
word that is read. For text (.TXT) or CSV (.CSV) data, the
value is decremented for each field that is read.
EM File Memory Starting
Bank
A344
Contains the starting bank number of EM file memory (bank Read-only
number of the first formatted bank).
This number is read when starting to write data from a Memory Card. If the largest bank number for which there is an
EM file for simple backup ([email protected], where represents consecutive bank numbers) is the same as the largest
bank number supported by the CPU Unit, the EM Area will
be formatted as file memory using the value in A344. If the
maximum bank numbers are different, the EM Area will be
returned to it’s unformatted (not file memory) status.
File Deletion Flags
A39506
The system automatically deleted the remainder of an EM
Read-only
file memory file that was being updated when a power interruption occurred.
A39507
The system automatically deleted the remainder of a Mem- Read-only
ory Card file that was being updated when a power interruption occurred.
Simple Backup Write Capacity A397
288
Access
Read-only
If a write for a simple backup operation fails, A397 will con- Read-only
tain the Memory Card capacity that would have been
required to complete the write operation. The value is in
Kbytes. (This indicates that the Memory Card did not have
the specified capacity when the write operation was started.)
0001 to FFFF hex: Write error (value indicates required
capacity from 1 to 65,535 Kbytes).
A397 will be cleared to 0000 hex when the write is completed successfully for a simple backup operation.
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Name
Address
Program Replacement End
Code
A65000 to
A65007
Replacement Error Flag
A65014
Replacement Start Bit
A65015
Program Password
A651
Program File Name
A654 to
A657
Description
Access
Normal End (i.e., when A65014 is OFF)
Read-only
01 hex: Program file (.OBJ) replaced.
Error End (i.e., when A65014 is ON)
00 hex: Fatal error
01 hex: Memory error
11 hex: Write-protected
12 hex: Program replacement password error
21 hex: No Memory Card
22 hex: No such file
23 hex: Specified file exceeds capacity (memory error).
31 hex: One of the following in progress:
File memory operation
User program write
Operating mode change
ON when the Replacement Start Bit (A65015) has been
Read/write
turned ON to replace the program, but there is an error. If
the Replacement Start Bit is turned ON again, the Replacement Error Flag will be turned OFF.
Program replacement starts when the Replacement Start Bit Read/write
is turned ON if the Program Password (A651) is valid (A5A5
hex). Do not turn OFF the Replacement Start Bit during program replacement.
When the power is turned ON or program replacement is
completed, the Replacement Start Bit will be turned OFF,
regardless of whether replacement was completed normally
or in error.
It is possible to confirm if program replacement is being executed by reading the Replacement Start Bit using a Programming Device, PT, or host computer.
Store the password to replace a program.
Read/write
A5A5 hex: Replacement Start Bit (A65015) is enabled.
Any other value: Replacement Start Bit (A65015) is disabled.
When the power is turned ON or program replacement is
completed, the Replacement Start Bit will be turned OFF,
regardless of whether replacement was completed normally
or in error.
When program replacement starts, the program file name
Read/write
will be stored in ASCII. File names can be specified up to
eight characters in length excluding the extension.
File names are stored in the following order: A654 to A657
(i.e., from the lowest word to the highest), and from the highest byte to the lowest. If a file name is less than eight characters, the lowest remaining bytes and the highest remaining
word will be filled with spaces (20 hex). Null characters and
space characters cannot be used within file names.
Example: File name is ABC.OBJ
289
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
CPU Unit/Duplex Unit Setting
Name
DIP Switch Setting Flag
Address
A39512
Description
Access
Shows the ON/OFF status of the following switches depend- Read-only
ing on the system.
Duplex CPU Systems: Status of the “A39512” switch on the
DIP switch on the front of the Duplex Unit.
Single CPU Systems: Status of the pin 6 on the DIP switch
on the front of the CPU Unit.
Address
A22000 to
A25915
Description
Contains the current I/O response times for Basic I/O Units.
Initial Settings
Name
I/O Response Times in Basic
I/O Units
Basic I/O Unit Information Bits A05000 to
A08915
Access
Read-only
These flags correspond to slots 0 to 8 on Racks 0 to 7 in
Read-only
order from slot 0 on Rack 0 to slot 8 on Rack 7. A flag will be
ON when the fuse is burnt out in a Basic I/O Unit mounted in
the corresponding slot.
CPU Bus Unit Flags/Bits
Name
CPU Bus Unit Initialization
Flags
Address
A30200 to
A30215
Description
Access
These flags correspond to CPU Bus Units 0 to 15. A flag will Read-only
be ON while the corresponding Unit is initializing after the
power is turned ON or the Unit’s Restart Bit (A50100 to
A50115) is turned ON.
CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
A50100 to
A50115
These bits correspond to CPU Bus Units 0 to 15. Turn a bit Read/write
from OFF to ON to restart the corresponding Unit.
Note: After a Unit restarts, its CPU Bus Unit Initialization
Flag (in A302) will go ON and this bit will be turned
OFF by the system automatically after initialization.
Do not turn this bit OFF from a Programming Device
or the ladder program.
Special I/O Unit Flags/Bits
Name
Special I/O Unit Initialization
Flags
Address
A33000 to
A33515
Description
These flags correspond to Special I/O Units 0 to 95. A flag
will be ON while the corresponding Unit is initializing after
the power is turned ON or the Unit’s Restart Bit is turned
ON. (Restart Bits A50200 to A50715 correspond to Units 0
to 95.)
Access
Read-only
Special I/O Unit Restart Bits
A50200 to
A50715
These bits correspond to Special I/O Units 0 to 95. Turn a bit Read/write
from OFF to ON to restart the corresponding Unit.
Note: After a Unit restarts, its Special I/O Unit Initialization
Flag (in A330 to A335) will go ON and this bit will be
turned OFF by the system automatically after initialization. Do not turn this bit OFF from a Programming
Device or the ladder program.
Inner Board Flags/Bits (Single CPU Systems or Process-control CPU Units)
Name
Inner Board Monitoring Area
Address
A35500 to
A35915
Description
The function of these words is defined in the Inner Board.
Access
Read-only
Inner Board Restart Bit
A60800
Read/write
Inner Board User Interface
Area
A60900 to
A61315
Turn the bit from OFF to ON to restart the corresponding
Inner Board.
This interface area can be used to transfer data from the
CPU Unit to the Inner Board. The function of the data is
defined in the Inner Board.
290
Read/write
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
System Flags
Name
First Cycle Flag
Address
A20011
Description
This flag is turned ON for one cycle when program execution
starts (the operating mode is switched from PROGRAM to
RUN/MONITOR).
When a task switches from INI to RUN status for the first
time, this flag will be turned ON within the task for one cycle
only.
When a task switches from WAIT or INI to RUN status, this
flag will be turned ON within the task for one cycle only.
The only difference between this flag and A20015 is that this
flag also turns ON when the task switches from WAIT to
RUN status.
These words contain the maximum cycle time in units of
0.1 ms. The time is updated every cycle and is recorded in
32-bit binary (0 to FFFF FFFF, or 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms).
(A263 is the leftmost word.) (See note.)
Access
Read-only
Initial Task Execution Flag
A20015
Task Started Flag
A20014
Maximum Cycle Time
A262 to
A263
Present Cycle Time
A264 to
A265
These words contain the present cycle time in units of
0.1 ms. The time is updated every cycle and is recorded in
32-bit binary (0 to FFFF FFFF, or 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms).
(A265 is the leftmost word.) (See note.)
Read-only
Peripheral Processing Cycle
Time (Single CPU Systems
only)
A268
When Parallel Processing Mode (with or without synchroRead-only
nous access to I/O memory) is being used, this word contains the peripheral processing cycle time in binary.
0000 to 4E20 hex: 0.0 to 2,000.0 ms (unit: 0.1 ms)
Note: If the cycle time exceeds 2,000.0 ms, then 4E20 hex
will be stored.
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Note With a Single CPU System, this would be the same as the instruction execution cycle if Parallel Processing Mode is being used.
Task Information
Name
Task Number when Program
Stopped
Address
A294
Description
This word contains the task number of the task that was
being executed when program execution was stopped
because of a program error.
This word contains the maximum processing time for any
interrupt task in binary (unit: 0.1 ms).
Access
Read-only
Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Time (Single CPU
Systems only)
A440
Number of Task with Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Time (Single CPU
Systems only)
A441
This word contains the number of the interrupt task that gen- Read-only
erated the maximum processing time in binary (8000 to
80FF hex). Bit 15 will turn ON when an interrupt has
occurred. The lower two digits of the hexadecimal value correspond to the task number (00 to FF hex).
IR/DR Operation between
Tasks
A09914
Turn ON this bit to share index and data registers between
all tasks. Turn OFF this bit to use separate index and data
registers between in each task.
Read-only
Read-only
291
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Debugging Information
■
Online Editing
Name
Online Editing Wait Flag
Description
ON when an online editing process is waiting.
(An online editing request was received while online editing
was disabled.)
Access
Read-only
Online Editing Processing
A20111
Flag
Online Editing Disable Bit Vali- A52700 to
dator
A52707
ON when an online editing process is being executed.
Read-only
The Online Editing Disable Bit (A52709) is valid only when
this byte contains 5A.
Read/write
Online Editing Disable Bit
A52709
Turn this bit ON to disable online editing.
(A52700 to A52707 must be set to 5A.)
Read/write
Address
A50015
Description
Access
Turn this bit ON to turn OFF all outputs from Basic I/O Units, Read/write
Output Units, and Special I/O Units.
Address
A50809
Description
Access
ON when the differentiate monitor condition has been estab- Read/write
lished during execution of differentiation monitoring.
Name
Sampling Start Bit
Address
A50815
Description
Access
When a data trace is started by turning this bit from OFF to Read/write
ON from a Programming Device, the PLC will begin storing
data in Trace Memory by one of the three following methods:
1) Periodic sampling (10 to 2,550 ms)
2) Sampling at execution of TRSM(045)
3) Sampling at the end of every cycle.
Trace Start Bit
A50814
Trace Busy Flag
A50813
Turn this bit from OFF to ON to establish the trigger condiRead/write
tion. The offset indicated by the delay value (positive or negative) determines which data samples are valid.
ON when the Sampling Start Bit (A50815) is turned from
Read/write
OFF to ON. OFF when the trace is completed.
Trace Completed Flag
A50812
ON when sampling of a region of trace memory has been
completed during execution of a Trace. OFF when the next
time the Sampling Start Bit (A50815) is turned from OFF to
ON.
Trace Trigger Monitor Flag
A50811
ON when a trigger condition is established by the Trace Start Read/write
Bit (A50814). OFF when the next Data Trace is started by
the Sampling Start bit (A50815).
■
Output Control
Name
Output OFF Bit
■
Differentiate Monitor
Name
Differentiate Monitor Completed Flag
■
Address
A20110
Data Tracing
292
Read/write
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Program Error Information
Name
Program Error Flag
(Fatal error)
Address
A40109
Description
ON when program contents are incorrect.
With a Single CPU System, CPU Unit operation will stop.
With a Duplex CPU System in Duplex Mode, operation will
switch to the standby CPU Unit and operation will continue.
With a Duplex CPU System in Simplex Mode, CPU Unit
operation will stop.
Program Error Task
A294
Instruction Processing Error
Flag
A29508
Provides the type and number of the tack that was being
Read-only
executed when program execution stops as a result of a program error.
This flag and the Error Flag (ER) will be turned ON when an Read-only
instruction processing error has occurred and the PLC
Setup has been set to stop operation for an instruction error.
Indirect DM/EM BCD Error
Flag
A29509
This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be turned ON Read-only
when an indirect DM/EM BCD error has occurred and the
PLC Setup has been set to stop operation an indirect DM/
EM BCD error.
Illegal Access Error Flag
A29510
This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be turned ON Read-only
when an illegal access error has occurred and the PLC
Setup has been set to stop operation an illegal access error.
No END Error Flag
A29511
ON when there isn’t an END(001) instruction in each program within a task.
Task Error Flag
A29512
ON when a task error has occurred. The following conditions Read-only
will generate a task error.
1) There isn’t an executable cyclic task.
2) There isn’t a program allocated to the task.
Differentiation Overflow Error
Flag
A29513
ON when the specified Differentiation Flag Number exceeds Read-only
the allowed value.
Illegal Instruction Error Flag
A29514
Read-only
UM Overflow Error Flag
A29515
ON when a program that cannot be executed has been
stored.
ON when the last address in UM (user program memory)
has been exceeded.
These words contain the 8-digit hexadecimal program
address of the instruction where program execution was
stopped due to a program error.
(A299 contains the leftmost digits.)
Read-only
Access
Read-only
Program Address Where Pro- A298 and
gram Stopped
A299
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Error Information
■ Error Log, Error Code
Name
Error Log Area
Address
A100 to
A199
Description
When an error has occurred, the error code, error contents,
and error’s time and date are stored in the Error Log Area.
Error Log Pointer
A300
When an error occurs, the Error Log Pointer is incremented Read-only
by 1 to indicate the location where the next error record will
be recorded as an offset from the beginning of the Error Log
Area (A100).
Error Log Pointer Reset Bit
Error Code
A50014
A400
Turn this bit ON to reset the Error Log Pointer (A300) to 00. Read/write
When a non-fatal error (user-defined FALS(006) or system Read-only
error) or a fatal error (user-defined FALS(007) or system
error) occurs, the 4-digit hexadecimal error code is written to
this word.
293
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
■ FAL/FALS Error Information
Name
FAL Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Address
A40215
Description
ON when a non-fatal error is generated by executing
FAL(006).
Access
Read-only
Executed FAL Number Flags
A360 to
A391
FALS Error Flag
(Fatal error)
A40106
FAL/FALS Number for System Error Simulation
A529
The flag corresponding to the specified FAL number will be Read-only
turned ON when FAL(006) is executed. Bits A36001 to
A39115 correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 511.
ON when a fatal error is generated by the FALS(007)
Read-only
instruction.
With a Single CPU System, CPU Unit operation will stop.
With a Duplex CPU System in Duplex Mode, operation will
switch to the standby CPU Unit and operation will continue.
With a Duplex CPU System in Simplex Mode, CPU Unit
operation will stop.
Set a dummy FAL/FALS number to use to simulate the sys- Read/write
tem error using FAL(006) or FALS(007).
0001 to 01FF hex: FAL/FALS numbers 1 to 511
0000 or 0200 to FFFF hex: No FAL/FALS number for system
error simulation. (No error will be generated.)
■ Memory Error Information
Name
Memory Error Flag
(Fatal error)
Address
A40115
Memory Error Location
A40300 to
A40308
Startup Memory Card Transfer A40309
Error Flag
Flash Memory Error
294
A40310
Description
Access
ON when there was an error in automatic transfer from the Read-only
Memory Card or an error occurred in memory when the
power was turned ON.
With a Single CPU System, CPU Unit operation will stop.
With a Duplex CPU System in Duplex Mode, operation will
switch to the standby CPU Unit and operation will continue.
With a Duplex CPU System in Simplex Mode, CPU Unit
operation will stop.
The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
light.
If the automatic data transfer at startup fails, A40309 will be
turned ON. If an error occurs in automatic transfer at startup,
this error cannot be cleared.
When a memory error occurs, the Memory Error Flag
Read-only
(A40115) is turned ON and one of the following flags is
turned ON to indicate the memory area where the error
occurred.
A40300: User program
A40304: PLC Setup
A40305: Registered I/O Table
A40307: Routing Table
A40308: CPU Bus Unit Settings
ON when an error occurs in automatically transferring a file
from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit at startup, including
when a file is missing or a Memory Card is not mounted.
The error can be cleared by turning OFF the power. (This
error cannot be cleared while the power is ON.)
Turns ON when the flash memory fails.
Read-only
Read-only
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
■ PLC Setup Error Information
Name
PLC Setup Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
PLC Setup Error Location
Address
A40210
Description
ON when there is a setting error in the PLC Setup.
Access
Read-only
A406
When there is a setting error in the PLC Setup, the location
of that error is written to A406 in 4-digit hexadecimal. The
location is given as the address set on the Programming
Console.
Read-only
■ Interrupt Task Error Information (Single CPU Systems Only)
Name
Interrupt Task Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Address
A40213
Description
Access
ON when the Detect Interrupt Task Errors setting in the PLC Read-only
Setup is set to “Detect” and one of the following occurs.
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) in a cyclic task are competing with
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) in an interrupt task.
An interrupt task is executed for more than 10 ms during I/O
refreshing of a C200H Special I/O Unit or a SYSMAC BUS
I/O Unit.
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) was executed in an interrupt task
when I/O was being refreshed.
Interrupt Task Error Cause
Flag
Interrupt Task Error, Task
Number
A42615
Indicates the cause of an Interrupt Task Error.
A42600 to
A42611
The function of these bits depends upon the status of
Read-only
A42615 (the Interrupt Task Error Cause Flag).
A42615 OFF:
Contains the interrupt task number when an interrupt task
was executed for more than 10 ms during I/O refreshing of a
C200H Special I/O Unit or a SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Unit.
A42615 ON:
Contains the Special I/O Unit’s unit number when an attempt
was made to refresh a Special I/O Unit’s I/O from an interrupt task with IORF(097) while the Unit’s I/O was being
refreshed by cyclic I/O refreshing (duplicate refreshing).
Name
Basic I/O Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Address
A40212
Description
ON when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit.
Access
Read-only
Basic I/O Unit Error, Slot
Number
A40800 to
A40807
Contains the binary slot number where the error occurred
when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit.
Read-only
Basic I/O Unit Error, Rack
Number
I/O Setting Error Flag
(Fatal error)
A40808 to
A40815
A40110
Contains the binary rack number where the error occurred
Read-only
when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit.
ON when an Input Unit has been installed in an Output
Read-only
Unit’s slot or vice-versa, so the Input and Output Units clash
in the registered I/O table.
I/O Verification Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40209
Read-only
Expansion I/O Rack Number
Duplication Flags
A40900 to
A40907
ON when a Basic I/O Unit registered in the I/O Table does
not match the Basic I/O Unit actually installed in the PLC
because a Unit was added or removed.
The corresponding flag will be turned ON when an Expansion I/O Rack’s starting word address was set from a Programming Device and two Racks have overlapping word
allocations or a Rack’s starting address exceeds CIO 0901.
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to Racks 0 to 7.
Too Many I/O Points Flag
(Fatal error)
A40111
ON when the number of I/O points being used in Basic I/O
Units exceeds the maximum allowed for the PLC.
Read-only
Read-only
■ I/O Information
Read-only
295
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Name
Too Many I/O Points, Details
Address
A40700 to
A40712
Description
Access
The 2 possible causes of the Too Many I/O Points Error are Read-only
listed below. The 3-digit binary value in A40713 to A40715
indicates the cause of the error. (The causes corresponding
to values 0 to 5 are listed below.)
• The number of I/O points will be written here when the
total number of I/O points set in the I/O Table exceeds the
maximum allowed for the CPU Unit.
• The number of Racks will be written here when the number of Expansion I/O Racks exceeds the maximum.
• Number of interrupt input points when there are more than
32 (Single CPU Systems only)
Too Many I/O Points, Cause
A40713 to
A40715
Read-only
I/O Bus Error Flag
(Fatal error)
I/O Bus Error Slot Number
A40114
A40400 to
A40407
These three bits indicate the cause of the Too Many I/O
Points Error. (See A40700 to A40712.)
000 (0): Too many I/O points
001: Too many interrupt input points
101 (5): Too many Expansion Racks connected
ON when an error occurs in a data transfer between the
CPU Unit and a Unit mounted to a slot.
Contains the 8-bit binary slot number (00 to 08) where an
I/O Bus Error occurred in binary (00 to 08 hex).
I/O Bus Error Rack Number
A40408 to
A40415
Contains the 8-bit binary rack number (00 to 07) where an
I/O Bus Error occurred in binary (00 to 07 hex).
Read-only
Duplication Error Flag
(Fatal error)
A40113
ON in the following cases:
Read-only
Two CPU Bus Units have been assigned the same unit number.
Two Special I/O Units have been assigned the same unit
number.
Two Basic I/O Units have been allocated the same words.
The same rack number is set for more than one Expansion
Rack.
I/O Table Creation Error Infor- A261
mation
Read-only
Read-only
Refer to information provided separately in this manual on
I/O table creation.
■ CPU Bus Unit Information
Name
CPU Bus Unit Number Duplication Flags
Address
A41000 to
A41015
Description
Access
The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the corresponding Read-only
flag in A410 will be turned ON when a CPU Bus Unit’s unit
number has been duplicated.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
CPU Bus Unit Error, Unit
Number Flags
A41700 to
A41715
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error,
Unit Number Flags
A42700 to
A42715
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error
Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40203
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Read-only
Unit and a CPU Bus Unit, the CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
(A40207) and the corresponding flag in A417 are turned ON.
If the PLC Setup is set to turn ON the corresponding Error
Unit Number Flag when a Special Unit (Special I/O Unit or
CPU Bus Unit) is being replaced, the corresponding flag will
be turned ON when the Unit is being replaced.
If a duplexed CLK Unit is being replaced, the corresponding
flag will be turned ON during replacement.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
When a CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs, A40203 and the Read-only
corresponding flag in A27 are turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
ON when an installed CPU Bus Unit does not match the
Read-only
CPU Bus Unit registered in the I/O table.
CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40207
296
ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the
Read-only
CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit (including an error in the CPU
Bus Unit itself).
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
■ Special I/O Unit Information
Name
Special I/O Unit Number
Duplication Flags
Address
A41100 to
A41615
Description
Access
The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the corresponding Read-only
flag in A411 through A416 will be turned ON when a Special
I/O Unit’s unit number has been duplicated. (Bits A41100 to
A41615 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.)
Special I/O Unit Setting Error
Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Special I/O Unit Setting Error,
Unit Number Flags
A40202
ON when an installed Special I/O Unit does not match the
Special I/O Unit registered in the I/O table.
Read-only
A42800 to
A43315
Read-only
Special I/O Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40206
When a Special I/O Unit Setting Error occurs, A40202 and
the corresponding flag in these words are turned ON. (Bits
A42800 to A43315 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.)
ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the
CPU Unit and a Special I/O Unit (including an error in the
Special I/O Unit itself).
Special I/O Unit Error, Unit
Number Flags
A41800 to
A42315
Read-only
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Read-only
Unit and a Special I/O Unit, the Special I/O Unit Error Flag
(A40206) and the corresponding flag in these words are
turned ON.
If the PLC Setup is set to turn ON the corresponding Error
Unit Number Flag when a Special Unit (Special I/O Unit or
CPU Bus Unit) is being replaced, the corresponding flag will
be turned ON when the Unit is being replaced.
■ Inner Board Information (Single CPU Systems or Process-control CPU Units Only)
Name
Inner Board Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Address
A40208
Description
Access
ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the
Read-only
CPU Unit and the Inner Board (including an error in the Inner
Board itself).
Inner Board Error
Information
A42400 to
A42415
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Read-only
Unit and the Inner Board, the Inner Board Error Flag
(A40208) and the appropriate error code will be written to
A424.
Fatal Inner Board Error Flag
(Operation switched)
A40112
ON when there is an Inner Board Error (watchdog timer
error).
With a Single CPU System, CPU Unit operation will stop.
With a Duplex CPU System in Duplex Mode, operation will
switch to the standby CPU Unit and operation will continue.
With a Duplex CPU System in Simplex Mode, CPU Unit
operation will stop.
Read-only
Right-side Inner Board Error
Flag (Non-fatal error) (Process-control CPU Units only)
A32406
ON when an Inner Board Error has occurred in the Inner
Board in the CPU Unit on the right. A40208 will also turn
ON.
Read-only
Left-side Inner Board Error
Flag (Non-fatal error) (Process-control CPU Units only)
A32407
ON when an Inner Board Error has occurred in the Inner
Read-only
Board in the CPU Unit on the left. A40208 will also turn ON.
297
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
■ Other PLC Operating Information
Name
Cycle Time Overrun Flag
(Operation switched)
Address
A40108
Description
Access
ON if the cycle time exceeds the maximum cycle time set in Read-only
the PLC Setup. (Watch Cycle Time) With a Single CPU System in Parallel Processing Mode, this will be the cycle time
for instruction execution.
With a Single CPU System, CPU Unit operation will stop.
With a Duplex CPU System in Duplex Mode, operation will
switch to the standby CPU Unit and operation will continue.
With a Duplex CPU System in Simplex Mode, CPU Unit
operation will stop.
Peripheral Servicing Too Long A40515
Flag (Fatal error, Single CPU
Systems only)
FPD Teaching Bit
A59800
Turns ON when the peripheral servicing time exceeds 2 s.
Read-only
This will also cause a cycle time error and operation will
stop.
Turn this bit ON to set the monitoring time in FPD(269) auto- Read/write
matically with the teaching function.
Memory Backup Battery Failure Flag
Data from the I/O memory areas that are maintained when
power is turned OFF (HR, DM, etc.) are backed up with a
Battery. A39511 turns ON if the Battery voltage drops and
the data can no longer be maintained. The data in the I/O
memory will not be dependable when this happens.
A39511
Read-only
Clock Information
Name
Clock Data
298
Address
Description
Access
The clock data from the clock built into the CPU Unit is stored here in BCD. Read-only
A35100 to
Seconds: 00 to 59 (BCD)
Read-only
A35107
A35108 to
Minutes: 00 to 59 (BCD)
Read-only
A35115
A35200 to
A35207
Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD)
Read-only
A35208 to
A35215
Day of the month: 01 to 31 (BCD)
Read-only
A35300 to
A35307
A35308 to
A35315
Month: 01 to 12 (BCD)
Read-only
Year: 00 to 99 (BCD)
Read-only
A35400 to
A35407
Day of the week: 00: Sunday, 01: Monday,
02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday, 04: Thursday,
05: Friday, 06: Saturday
Read-only
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Flash Memory Backup Information
Name
User Program Date
Address
A090 to
A093
Description
Access
These words contain in BCD the date and time that the user Read-only
program was last overwritten.
A09000 to A09007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A09008 to A09015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A09100 to A09107: Hour (00 to 23)
A09108 to A09115: Day of month (01 to 31)
A09200 to A09207: Month (01 to 12)
A09208 to A09215: Year (00 to 99)
A09308 to A09307: Day of the week
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday,
04: Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday)
Parameter Date
A094 to
A0947
These words contain in BCD the date and time that the
parameters were last overwritten.
A09400 to A09407: Seconds (00 to 59)
A09408 to A09415: Minutes (00 to 59)
A09500 to A09507: Hour (00 to 23)
A09508 to A09515: Day of month (01 to 31)
A09600 to A09607: Month (01 to 12)
A09608 to A09615: Year (00 to 99)
A09708 to A09707: Day of the week
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday,
04: Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday)
Read-only
Information on Read Protection Using a Password (Single CPU Systems Only)
Name
UM Read Protection Flag
Address
A09900
Description
Indicates whether the entire user program in the PLC is
read-protected.
0: UM not read-protected.
1: UM read-protected.
Access
Read-only
Task Read Protection Flag
A09901
Indicates whether read protection is set for individual tasks.
0: Tasks not read-protected.
1: Tasks read-protected.
Read-only
Program Write Protection for
Read Protection
A09902
Read-only
Enable/Disable Bit for Program Backup
A09903
Indicates whether the program is write-protected.
0: Write-enabled.
1: Write-protected.
Indicates whether creating a backup program file (.OBJ) is
enabled or disabled.
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Read-only
Note These bits/flags cannot be used for Duplex CPU Systems.
299
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
Communications
■ Network Communications Information
Name
Address
Communications Port Enabled A20200 to
Flags
A20207
Description
Access
ON when a network instruction (SEND, RECV, CMND, or
Read-only
PMCR) or background processing (see note) can be executed with the corresponding port number. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
When the simple backup operation is used to performed a
write or compare operation for a Memory Card on a CS1D
CPU Unit, a communications port will be automatically allocated, and the corresponding flag will be turned ON during
the operation and turned OFF when the operation has been
completed.
Note: Background processing is supported by Single CPU
Systems only.
Communications Port Completion Codes
A203 to
A210
These words contain the completion codes for the correRead-only
sponding port numbers when network instructions (SEND,
RECV, CMND, or PMCR) have been executed. Words A203
to A210 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
When the simple backup operation is used to performed a
write or compare operation for a Memory Card on a CS1D
CPU Unit, a communications port will be automatically allocated, and a completion code will be stored in the corresponding word.
Communications Port Error
Flags
A21900 to
A21907
ON when an error occurred during execution of a network
Read-only
instruction (SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR). Turns OFF
then execution has been finished normally. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
When the simple backup operation is used to performed a
write or compare operation for a Memory Card on a CS1D
CPU Unit, a communications port will be automatically allocated. The corresponding flag will be turned ON if an error
occurs and will be turned OFF if the simple backup operation ends normally.
300
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
■ Information on Communications Instruction Execution with Automatic Allocation of Communications Ports
Name
Network Communications
Port Allocation Enabled Flag
Address
A20215
Description
Access
ON when a communications instruction can be executed
Read-only
with automatic port allocation and there is a communications
port available for automatic allocation.
Note: When 9 or more communications instructions are
being used simultaneously, use this flag to confirm
that a communications port is available for automatic
allocation before executing the communications
instructions.
When a communications instruction is executed with autoRead-only
matic port allocation, the corresponding flag is turned ON for
just one cycle after communications have been completed.
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to ports 0 to 7.
Use the Used Communications Port Number stored in A218
to determine which flag to access.
Note: These flags are not effective until the next cycle after
the communications instruction is executed. Delay
accessing them for at least one cycle.
First Cycle Flags after Network Communications Finished
A21400 to
A21407
First Cycle Flags after Network Communications Error
Flags
A21500 to
A21507
When a communications instruction was executed with auto- Read-only
matic port allocation and an error occurred, the corresponding flag is turned ON for just one cycle. Bits 00 to 07
correspond to ports 0 to 7.
The cause of the error can be determined with the Communications Port Completion Codes stored in A203 to A210.
Use the Used Communications Port Number stored in A218
to determine which flag to access.
Note: These flags are not effective until the next cycle after
the communications instruction is executed. Delay
accessing them for at least one cycle.
Network Communications
Completion Code Storage
Address
A216 to
A217
Used Communications Port
Numbers
A218
When a communications instruction was executed with auto- Read-only
matic port allocation, the response (completion) code for the
communications instruction is automatically stored in the
word with the PLC memory address specified in these
words.
Note: The PLC memory address specified here can be
transferred to an index register in order to indirectly
address the specified word and read the code.
When a communications instruction is executed with autoRead-only
matic port allocation, the allocated communications port
number is stored in this word. Values 0000 to 0007 hex correspond to ports 0 to 7.
301
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
■ Information on Explicit Message Instructions (Single CPU Systems Only)
Name
Address
Explicit Communications Error A21300 to
Flag
A21307
Description
Access
Turn ON when an error occurs in executing an Explicit Mes- Read-only
sage Instruction (EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR, ECHRD, or
ECHWR).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
The corresponding bit will turn ON both when the explicit
message cannot be sent and when an error response is
returned for the explicit message.
The status will be maintained until the next explicit message
communication is executed. The bit will always turn OFF
when the next Explicit Message Instruction is executed.
Network Communications
Error Flag
A21900 to
A21907
Turn ON if the explicit message cannot be sent when execut- Read-only
ing an Explicit Message Instruction (EXPLT, EGATR,
ESATR, ECHRD, or ECHWR).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
The corresponding bit will turn ON when the explicit message cannot be sent.
The status will be maintained until the next explicit message
communication is executed. The bit will always turn OFF
when the next Explicit Message Instruction is executed.
Network Communications
Response Code
A203 to
A210
The following codes will be stored when an Explicit Message Read-only
Instruction (EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR, ECHRD, or ECHWR)
has been executed.
A203 to A210 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag turns OFF, 0000
hex is stored.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag is ON and the Network Communications Error Flag is ON, the FINS end code
is stored.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag is ON and the Network Communications Error Flag is OFF, the explicit message end code is stored.
During communications, 0000 hex will be stored and the
suitable code will be stored when execution has been completed. The code will be cleared when operation is started.
■ Peripheral Port Communications Information
Name
Peripheral Port Communications Error Flag
Peripheral Port Restart Bit
Peripheral Port Settings
Change Bit
Address
A39212
Description
ON when a communications error has occurred at the
peripheral port.
Turn this bit ON to restart the peripheral port.
ON while the peripheral port’s communications settings are
being changed.
Access
Read-only
Peripheral Port Error Flags
A52808 to
A52815
These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at the
peripheral port.
Read/write
Peripheral Port PT Communications Flags
A39400 to
A39407
Peripheral Port PT Priority
Registered Flags
A39408 to
A39415
The corresponding bit will be ON when the peripheral port is Read-only
communicating with a PT in NT link mode. Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has priority Read-only
when the peripheral port is communicating in NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
302
A52601
A61901
Read/write
Read/write
Section 8-11
Auxiliary Area
■ RS-232C Port Communications Information
Name
RS-232C Port Communications Error Flag
RS-232C Port Restart Bit
RS-232C Port Settings
Change Bit
Address
A39204
Description
ON when a communications error has occurred at the RS232C port.
Turn this bit ON to restart the RS-232C port.
ON while the RS-232C port’s communications settings are
being changed.
Access
Read-only
RS-232C Port Error Flags
A52800 to
A52807
These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at the
RS-232C port.
Read/write
RS-232C Port Send Ready
Flag
(No-protocol mode)
RS-232C Port Reception
Completed Flag
(No-protocol mode)
RS-232C Port Reception
Overflow Flag
(No-protocol mode)
A39205
ON when the RS-232C port is able to send data in no-proto- Read-only
col mode.
A39206
ON when the RS-232C port has completed the reception in
no-protocol mode.
A39207
ON when a data overflow occurred during reception through Read-only
the RS-232C port in no-protocol mode.
RS-232C Port PT Communications Flags
A39300 to
A39307
The corresponding bit will be ON when the RS-232C port is Read-only
communicating with a PT in NT link mode. Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
RS-232C Port PT Priority
Registered Flags
A39308 to
A39315
RS-232C Port Reception
Counter
(No-protocol mode)
A39300 to
A39315
The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has priority Read-only
when the RS-232C port is communicating in NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
Indicates (in binary) the number of bytes of data received
Read-only
when the RS-232C port is in no-protocol mode.
A52600
A61902
Read/write
Read/write
Read-only
■ Serial Device Communications Information
Name
Communications Units 0 to
15, Ports 1 to 4 Settings
Change Bits
Address
A62001 to
A63504
Description
Access
The corresponding flag will be ON when the settings for that Read/write
port are being changed.
(Bits 1 to 4 in A620 to A635 correspond to ports 1 to 4 in
Communications Units 0 to 15.)
Communications Board Ports
1 to 4 Settings Change Bits
A63601 to
A63604
The corresponding flag will be ON when the settings for that Read/write
port are being changed.
(Bits 1 to 4 correspond to ports 1 to 4.)
Step Flag
Address
A20012
Current EM Bank
A301
Description
ON for one cycle when step execution is started with
STEP(008).
This word contains the current EM bank number in 4-digit
hexadecimal.
Macro Area Input Words
A600 to
A603
When MCRO(099) is executed, it copies the input data from Read/write
the specified source words (input parameter words) to A600
through A603.
Macro Area Output Words
A604 to
A607
After the subroutine specified in MCRO(099) has been executed, the results of the subroutine are transferred from
A604 through A607 to the specified destination words (output parameter words).
Read/write
Differentiated Flag Number
Maximum Value
A339 to
A340
This word contains the value of the largest Differentiated
Flag number used in the differentiated instructions.
Read-only
Instruction Information
Name
Access
Read-only
Read-only
303
Section 8-12
TR (Temporary Relay) Area
Background Execution Information (Single CPU Systems Only)
Name
DR00 Output for Background
Execution
Address
A597
IR00 Output for Background
Execution
A595 and
A596
Equals Flag for Background
Execution
A59801
ER/AER Flag for Background
Execution
A39510
Description
When a data register is specified as the output for an
instruction processed in the background, A597 receives the
output instead of DR00.
0000 to FFFF hex
When an Index Register is specified as the output for an
instruction processed in the background, A595 and A596
receive the output instead of IR00.
0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex
(A596 contains the leftmost digits.)
Turns ON if matching data is found for an SRCH(181)
instruction executed in the background.
Access
Read-only
Turns ON if an error or illegal access occurs during background execution. Turns OFF when power is turned ON or
operation is started.
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
8-12 TR (Temporary Relay) Area
The TR Area contains 16 bits with addresses ranging from TR0 to TR15.
These temporarily store the ON/OFF status of an instruction block for branching. TR bits are useful when there are several output branches and interlocks
cannot be used.
It is not necessary to consider TR bits when displaying ladder diagrams on the
CX-Programmer.
The TR bits can be used as many times as required and in any order required
as long as the same TR bit is not used twice in the same instruction block.
TR bits can be used only with the OUT and LD instructions. OUT instructions
(OUT TR0 to OUT TR15) store the ON OFF status of a branch point and LD
instructions recall the stored ON OFF status of the branch point.
TR bits cannot be changed from a Programming Device.
Examples
In this example, a TR bit is used when two outputs have been directly connected to a branch point.
Instruction
Operand
LD
OR
OUT
AND
OUT
LD
AND
OUT
000000
000001
TR 0
000002
000003
TR 0
000004
000005
In this example, a TR bit is used when an output is connected to a branch
point without a separate execution condition.
000003
304
Instruction
LD
OUT
AND
OUT
LD
OUT
Operand
000000
TR 0
000001
000002
TR 0
000003
Section 8-13
Timer Area
Note A TR bit is not required when there are no execution conditions after the
branch point or there is an execution condition only in the last line of the
instruction block.
000001
000002
000001
000003
Instruction
LD
OUT
OUT
Operand
000000
000001
000002
Instruction
Operand
LD
OUT
AND
OUT
000000
000001
000002
000003
8-13 Timer Area
The 4,096 timer numbers (T0000 to T4095) are shared by the TIM, TIMX,
TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TMHH(540), TMHHX(552), TTIM(087),
TTIMX(555), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815), and TMHWX(817)
instructions. Timer Completion Flags and present values (PVs) for these
instructions are accessed with the timer numbers. (The TIML(542),
TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554) instructions do not use timer numbers.)
When a timer number is used in an operand that requires bit data, the timer
number accesses the Completion Flag of the timer. When a timer number is
used in an operand that requires word data, the timer number accesses the
PV of the timer. Timer Completion Flags can be used as often as necessary
as normally open and normally closed conditions and the values of timer PVs
can be read as normal word data.
With CS1D CPU Units, the refresh method for timer PVs can be set from the
CX-Programmer to either BCD or binary.
Note
1. It is not recommended to use the same timer number in two timer instructions because the timers will not operate correctly if they are timing simultaneously.
(If two or more timer instructions use the same timer number, an error will
be generated during the program check, but the timers will operate as long
as the instructions are not executed in the same cycle.)
2. The accuracy of timers is different for Duplex CPU Systems than for Single
CPU Systems or CS1-H CPU Units.
305
Section 8-13
Timer Area
The following table shows when timer PVs and Completion Flags will be reset.
Instruction name
Effect on PV and Completion Flag
Mode change1 PLC start-up2
TIMER: TIM or TIMX
HIGH-SPEED TIMER:
TIMH(015) or TIMHX(551)
ONE-MS TIMER:
TMHH(540) or TMHHX(552)
PV → 0
Flag → OFF
PV → 0
Flag → OFF
CNR(545) or
CNRX(547)
PV → 9999
Flag → OFF
Operation in
Jumps and Interlocks
Jumps
Interlocks
(JMP-JME) or
(IL-ILC)
Tasks on standby4
PV Maintained
PV → SV
(Reset to SV.)
Flag → OFF
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER:
TTIM(087) or TTIMX(555)
PV Maintained
TIMER WAIT: TIMW(813) or
TIMWX(816)
HIGH-SPEED TIMER WAIT:
TMHW(815) or TMHWX(817)
---
Note
---
1. If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the PV and Completion Flag will be
retained when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa. The PV and
Completion Flag will be cleared when power is cycled.
2. If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the PV and Completion Flag will be retained when the PLC’s power is cycled.
3. Since the TIML(542), TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554) instructions do not use timer numbers, they are reset under different conditions.
Refer to the descriptions of these instructions for details.
4. The present value of TIM, TIMX, TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TMHH(540),
TMHHX(552), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815), and TMHWX(817)
timers are held when the timer is jumped between JMP and JME instructions or when in a task that is on standby.
Forcing Bit Status
Timer Completion Flags can be force-set and force-reset.
Timer PVs cannot be force-set or force-reset, although the PVs can be
refreshed indirectly by force-setting/resetting the Completion Flag.
Timer Accuracy
The accuracy of timers is different for Duplex CPU Systems than for Single
CPU Systems or CS1-H CPU Units.
Accuracy in Normal Operation
The following table shows the timer accuracy in normal operation.
Timer
TIMER: TIM or TIMX
HIGH-SPEED TIMER:
TIMH(015) or TIMHX(551)
ONE-MS TIMER: TMHH(540) or
TMHHX(552)
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER:
TTIM(087) or TTIMX(555)
MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER: MTIM(543) or
MTIMX(554)
TIMER WAIT: TIMW(813) or TIMWX(816)
HIGH-SPEED TIMER WAIT:
TMHW(815) or TMHWX(817)
306
Accuracy
(−10 ms to 0 ms) + (0 ms to
cycle time)
Section 8-14
Counter Area
Accuracy when Switching from Duplex to Simplex Operation
The accuracy of timers may be longer in the first cycle after switching from
duplex to simplex operation. The following table shows the timer accuracy in
the first cycle after switching.
Timer
TIMER: TIM or TIMX
HIGH-SPEED TIMER:
TIMH(015) or TIMHX(551)
Accuracy
(−10 ms to 0 ms) + (0 ms to
cycle time) ±10 ms
ONE-MS TIMER: TMHH(540) or
TMHHX(552)
(−10 ms to 0 ms) + (0 ms to
cycle time) ±20 ms
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER:
TTIM(087) or TTIMX(555)
MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER: MTIM(543) or
MTIMX(554)
(−10 ms to 0 ms) + (0 ms to
cycle time) ±10 ms
TIMER WAIT: TIMW(813) or TIMWX(816)
HIGH-SPEED TIMER WAIT:
TMHW(815) or TMHWX(817)
8-14 Counter Area
The 4,096 counter numbers (C0000 to C4095) are shared by the CNT, CNTX,
CNTR(012), CNTRX(548), CNTW(814), and CNTWX(818) instructions.
Counter Completion Flags and present values (PVs) for these instructions are
accessed with the counter numbers. The counter numbers are independent
from the timer numbers used by timer instructions.
When a counter number is used in an operand that requires bit data, the
counter number accesses the Completion Flag of the counter. When a
counter number is used in an operand that requires word data, the counter
number accesses the PV of the counter.
With CS1D CPU Units, the refresh method for counter PVs can be set from
the CX-Programmer to either BCD or binary.
It is not recommended to use the same counter number in two counter
instructions because the counters will not operate correctly if they are counting simultaneously. If two or more counter instructions use the same counter
number, an error will be generated during the program check, but the counters
will operate as long as the instructions are not executed in the same cycle.
The following table shows when counter PVs and Completion Flags will be
reset.
Instruction name
Reset
COUNTER: CNT or
CNTX
REVERSIBLE
COUNTER: CNTR(012)
or CNTRX(548)
PV → 0000
Flag → OFF
Mode
change
Maintained
Effect on PV and Completion Flag
PLC startup Reset Input CNR(545) or
CNRX(548)
Maintained
Reset
Reset
Interlocks
(IL-ILC)
Maintained
COUNTER WAIT:
CNTW(814) or
CNTWX(818)
8-15 Data Memory (DM) Area
The DM Area contains 32,768 words with addresses ranging from D00000 to
D32767. This data area is used for general data storage and manipulation
and is accessible only by word.
307
Section 8-15
Data Memory (DM) Area
Data in the DM Area is retained when the PLC’s power is cycled or the PLC’s
operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode
or vice-versa.
Although bits in the DM Area cannot be accessed directly, the status of these
bits can be accessed with the BIT TEST instructions, TST(350) and
TSTN(351).
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the DM Area cannot be force-set or force-reset.
Indirect Addressing
Words in the DM Area can be indirectly addressed in two ways: binary-mode
and BCD-mode.
Binary-mode Addressing (@D)
When a “@” character is input before a DM address, the content of that DM
word is treated as binary and the instruction will operate on the DM word at
that binary address. The entire DM Area (D00000 to D32767) can be indirectly addressed with hexadecimal values 0000 to 7FFF.
@D00100
0100
D00256
Address actually used.
BCD-mode Addressing (*D)
When a “*” character is input before a DM address, the content of that DM
word is treated as BCD and the instruction will operate on the DM word at that
BCD address. Only part of the DM Area (D00000 to D09999) can be indirectly
addressed with BCD values 0000 to 9999.
*D00100
308
0100
D00100
Address actually used.
Section 8-15
Data Memory (DM) Area
DM Area Allocation to
Special Units Inner Board
1,2,3...
Parts of the DM Area are allocated to Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, and
Inner Boards for functions such as initial Unit settings. The timing for data
transfers is different for these Units, but may occur at any of the three following times.
1. Transfer data when the PLC’s power is turned on or the Unit is restarted.
2. Transfer data once each cycle.
3. Transfer data when required.
Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on data transfer timing.
Special I/O Units (D20000 to D29599)
Each Special I/O Unit is allocated 100 words (based on unit numbers 0 to 95).
Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on the function of these
words.
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Data transferred to the
Special I/O
Unit when the
PLC is turned
ON or the Unit
is restarted.
DM Area for Special I/O Units
(100 words/Unit)
Data transferred to the
CPU Unit at
cyclic refreshing or when
necessary.
CPU Bus Units (D30000 to D31599)
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 100 words (based on unit numbers 0 to F).
Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on the function of these
words. With some CPU Bus Units such as Ethernet Units, initial settings must
be registered in the CPU Unit’s Parameter Area; this data can be registered
with a Programming Device other than a Programming Console.
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
Data transferred to the
CS1 Special
Unit when the
PLC is turned
ON or the Unit
is restarted.
DM Area for CPU Bus Units
(100 words/Unit)
Data transferred to the
CPU Unit at
cyclic refreshing or when
necessary.
309
Section 8-16
Extended Data Memory (EM) Area
Inner Board (D32000 to D32099)
The Inner Board is allocated 100 words. Refer to the Board’s Operation Manual for details on the function of these words.
CPU Unit
DM Area for Inner Board
(100 words)
Note Inner Boards are supported for Single CPU Systems and Process-control
CPU Units only.
8-16 Extended Data Memory (EM) Area
The EM Area is divided into 13 banks (0 to C) that each contain 32,768 words.
EM Area addresses range from E0_00000 to EC_32767. This data area is
used for general data storage and manipulation and is accessible only by
word.
Data in the EM Area is retained when the PLC’s power is cycled or the PLC’s
operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode
or vice-versa.
Although bits in the EM Area cannot be accessed directly, the status of these
bits can be accessed with the BIT TEST instructions, TST(350) and
TSTN(351).
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the EM Area cannot be force-set or force-reset.
Specifying EM Addresses
There are two ways to specify an EM address: the bank and address can be
specified at the same time or an address in the current bank can be specified
(after changing the current bank, if necessary). In general, we recommend
specifying the bank and address simultaneously.
1,2,3...
1. Bank and Address Specification
With this method, the bank number is specified just before the EM address.
For example, E2_00010 specifies EM address 00010 in bank 2.
2. Current Bank Address Specification
With this method, just the EM address is specified. For example, E00010
specifies EM address 00010 in the current bank. (The current bank must
be changed with EMBC(281) to access data in another bank. A301 contains the current EM bank number.)
The current bank will be reset to 0 when the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode, unless the IOM Hold Bit
(A50012) is ON. The current bank is not changed as the program proceeds
through cyclic tasks.
Indirect Addressing
Words in the EM Area can be indirectly addressed in two ways: binary-mode
and BCD-mode.
Binary-mode Addressing (@E)
When a “@” character is input before a EM address, the content of that EM
word is treated as binary and the instruction will operate on the EM word in
the same bank at that binary address. All of the words in the same EM bank
(E00000 to E32767) can be indirectly addressed with hexadecimal values
310
Section 8-17
Index Registers
0000 to 7FFF and words in the next EM bank (E00000 to E32767) can be
addressed with hexadecimal values 8000 to FFFF.
@E1_00100
0200
E1_00512
Address actually used.
@E00100
0200
E0_00512
Address actually used.
(When the current
bank is bank 0.)
BCD-mode Addressing (*E)
When a “*” character is input before a EM address, the content of that EM
word is treated as BCD and the instruction will operate on the EM word in the
same bank at that BCD address. Only part of the EM bank (E00000 to
E09999) can be indirectly addressed with BCD values 0000 to 9999.
File Memory Conversion
*E1_00100
0200
*E00100
0200
E1_00200
Address actually used.
E0_00200
Address actually used.
(When the current
bank is bank 0.)
Part of the EM Area can be converted for use as file memory with settings in
the PLC Setup. All EM banks from the specified bank (EM File Memory Starting Bank) to the last EM bank will be converted to file memory.
Once EM banks have been converted to file memory, they cannot be
accessed (read or written) by instructions. An Illegal Access Error will occur if
a file-memory bank is specified as an operand in an instruction.
The following example shows EM file memory when the EM File Memory
Starting Bank has been set to 3 in the PLC Setup.
EM bank number
0
1
2
3
.
.
.
B
C
Example:
EM File Memory Starting
Bank set to 3 in the PLC Setup
EM file memory
(Cannot be accessed
from instructions.)
8-17 Index Registers
The sixteen Index Registers (IR0 to IR15) are used for indirect addressing.
Each Index Register can hold a single PLC memory address, which is the
absolute memory address of a word in I/O memory. Use MOVR(560) to convert a regular data area address to its equivalent PLC memory address and
write that value to the specified Index Register. (Use MOVRW(561) to set the
PLC memory address of a timer/counter PV in an Index Register.)
Bits in Index Registers cannot be force-set or force-reset.
Note Refer to Appendix E Memory Map for more details on PLC memory
addresses.
Indirect Addressing
When an Index Register is used as an operand with a “,” prefix, the instruction
will operate on the word indicated by the PLC memory address in the Index
Register, not the Index Register itself. Basically, the Index Registers are I/O
memory pointers.
• All addresses in I/O memory (except Index Registers, Data Registers, and
Condition Flags) can be specified seamlessly with PLC memory
addresses. It isn’t necessary to specify the data area.
311
Section 8-17
Index Registers
• In addition to basic indirect addressing, the PLC memory address in an
Index Register can be offset with a constant or Data Register, auto-incremented, or auto-decremented. These functions can be used in loops to
read or write data while incrementing or decrementing the address by one
each time that the instruction is executed.
With the offset and increment/decrement variations, the Index Registers can
be set to base values with MOVR(560) or MOVRW(561) and then modified as
pointers in each instruction.
I/O Memory
Set to a base value
with MOVR(560) or
MOVRW(561).
Pointer
Note It is possible to specify regions outside of I/O memory and generate an Illegal
Access Error when indirectly addressing memory with Index Registers. Refer
to Appendix E Memory Map for details on the limits of PLC memory
addresses.
The following table shows the variations available when indirectly addressing
I/O memory with Index Registers. ([email protected] represents an Index Register from IR0
to IR15.)
Variation
Indirect addressing
Indirect addressing
with constant offset
Function
The content of [email protected] is treated as
the PLC memory address of a bit
or word.
The constant prefix is added to the
content of [email protected] and the result is
treated as the PLC memory
address of a bit or word.
The constant may be any integer
from –2,048 to 2,047.
Syntax
,[email protected]
LD ,IR0
Constant ,[email protected]
(Include a + or –
in the constant.)
LD +5,IR0
Example
Loads the bit at the PLC
memory address contained
in IR0.
Adds 5 to the contents of IR0
and loads the bit at that PLC
memory address.
Indirect addressing
with DR offset
The content of the Data Register [email protected],[email protected]
is added to the content of [email protected] and
the result is treated as the PLC
memory address of a bit or word.
LD
DR0,IR0
Adds the contents of DR0 to
the contents of IR0 and
loads the bit at that PLC
memory address.
Indirect addressing
with auto-increment
After referencing the content of
[email protected] as the PLC memory address
of a bit or word, the content is
incremented by 1 or 2.
Increment by 1:
,[email protected]+
Increment by 2:
,[email protected]++
LD , IR0++
Loads the bit at the PLC
memory address contained
in IR0 and then increments
the content of IR0 by 2.
Decrement by 1:
,–[email protected]
Decrement by 2:
,– –[email protected]
LD , – –IR0 Decrements the content of
IR0 by 2 and then loads the
bit at that PLC memory
address.
Indirect addressing
The content of [email protected] is decrewith auto-decrement mented by 1 or 2 and the result is
treated as the PLC memory
address of a bit or word.
Example
This example shows how to store the PLC memory address of a word
(CIO 0002) in an Index Register (IR0), use the Index Register in an instruction, and use the auto-increment variation.
MOVR(560)
312
0002
IR0
Stores the PLC memory address of
CIO 0002 in IR0.
Section 8-17
Index Registers
MOV(021)
#0001
,IR0
MOV(021)
#0020
+1,IR0 Reads the content of IR0, adds 1,
and writes #0020 to that PLC memory address.
Regular
data area
address
Writes #0001 to the PLC memory address contained in IR0.
PLC memory address
MOVE TO REGISTER instruction
MOVR(560) 0002 IR0
I/O memory
Pointer
#0001
#0020
Note
1. The PLC memory addresses are listed in the diagram above, but it isn’t
necessary to know the PLC memory addresses when using Index Registers.
2. Auto-incrementing and auto-decrementing is performed when the instruction is executed. Caution is required when using instructions like OUT that
are constantly executed. (Refer to 1-1-5 Inputting Data in Operands in
SYSMAC CS/CJ-series Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference
Manual (W340) for details.)
Example:
MOVR(560)
000013
IR0
LD
P_Off
OUT
,IR0+
Above, OUT turns OFF CIO 000013 and IR0 is incremented to indicate
CIO 000014.
MOVR(560)
000013
IR0
LD
P_Off
SET
,IR0+
SET is executed only when the input condition is ON. Thus SET is not executed above and IR0 is not incremented.
Since some operands are treated as word data and others are treated as bit
data, the meaning of the data in an Index Register will differ depending on the
operand in which it is used.
1,2,3...
1. Word Operand:
MOVR(560)
0000
MOV(021)
D00000
IR2
IR2
When the operand is treated as a word, the contents of the Index Register
are used “as is” as the PLC memory address of a word.
In this example MOVR(560) sets the PLC memory address of CIO 0002 in
IR2 and the MOV(021) instruction copies the contents of D00000 to
CIO 0002.
313
Section 8-17
Index Registers
2. Bit Operand:
MOVR(560)
SET
000013
+5,IR2
IR2
When the operand is treated as a bit, the leftmost 7 digits of the Index Register specify the word address and the rightmost digit specifies the bit number. In this example, MOVR(560) sets the PLC memory address of
CIO 000013 (0C000D hex) in IR2. The SET instruction adds +5 from bit 13
to this PLC memory address, so it turns ON bit CIO 000102.
Index Register
Initialization
The Index Registers will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the Index Registers won’t be cleared
when a FALS error occurs, when the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa, or when power supply
recovers after a power interruption.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, and if the Index Registers
are not set to be shared between tasks (default setting), Index Registers will
be held in the following way when power is interrupted. For tasks that were
completed before power was interrupted, the values for the cycle during which
power was interrupted will be held. For tasks that were not completed before
power was interrupted, the values for the cycle before the cycle during which
power was interrupted will be held. For example, in a program with three
tasks, tasks 0, 1, and 2, if power is interrupted in the nth cycle during execution of task 1, then the execution result for the nth cycle of task 0 and the execution results for the (n−1)th cycle of tasks 1 and 2 will be held.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at
Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, and the Index Registers are
set to be shared between tasks, Index Registers will not be held when the
PLC’s power supply is reset (ON →OFF →ON). The Index Registers may take
undefined values. Be sure to set the values before continuing.
Direct Addressing
When an Index Register is used as an operand without a “,” prefix, the instruction will operate on the contents of the Index Register itself (a two-word or
“double” value). Index Registers can be directly addressed only in the instructions shown in the following table. Use these instructions to operate on the
Index Registers as pointers.
With Single CPU Systems, the values of Index Registers are not stable when
a interrupt task is started. When using Index Registers inside interrupt tasks,
always MOVR (for all values except timer/counter PV) and MOVRW (for timer/
counter PV) inside the interrupt tasks to set the values of the Index Registers.
314
Section 8-17
Index Registers
The Index Registers cannot be directly addressed in any other instructions,
although they can usually be used for indirect addressing.
Instruction group
Instruction name
Data Movement
MOVE TO REGISTER
Instructions
MOVE TIMER/COUNTER PV TO REGISTER
DOUBLE MOVE
DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE
Table Data ProSET RECORD LOCATION
cessing InstrucGET RECORD NUMBER
tions
Mnemonic
MOVR(560)
MOVRW(561)
MOVL(498)
XCGL(562)
SETR(635)
GETR(636)
Increment/Decrement Instructions
DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY
DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY
DOUBLE EQUAL
DOUBLE NOT EQUAL
++L(591)
– –L(593)
=L(301)
< >L(306)
DOUBLE LESS THAN
DOUBLE LESS THAN OR EQUAL
DOUBLE GREATER THAN
DOUBLE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
< L(311)
< =L(316)
> L(321)
> =L(326)
DOUBLE COMPARE
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
CMPL(060)
+L(401)
Comparison
Instructions
Symbol Math
Instructions
–L(411)
The SRCH(181), MAX(182), and MIN(183) instructions can output the PLC
memory address of the word with the desired value (search value, maximum,
or minimum) to IR0. In this case, IR0 can be used in later instructions to
access the contents of that word.
Precautions
Do not use Index Registers until a PLC memory address has been set in the
register. The pointer operation will be unreliable if the registers are used without setting their values.
Each Index Register task is processed independently, so they do not affect
each other. For example, IR0 used in Task 1 and IR0 used in Task 2 are different. Consequently, each Index Register task has 16 Index Registers.
Limitations when Using Index Registers
1,2,3...
1. It is only possible to read the Index Register for the last task executed within the cycle from the Programming Devices. If using Index Registers with
the same number to perform multiple tasks, it is only possible with the Programming Devices to read the Index Register value for the last task performed within the cycle from the multiple tasks. Nor is it possible to write
the Index Register value from the Programming Devices.
2. It is not possible to either read or write to the Index Registers using Host
Link commands or FINS commands.
Index Registers can be shared between all tasks.
Monitoring and Sharing
Index Registers
It is possible to monitor or share Index Registers as follows:
To use the Programming Devices to monitor the final Index Register values for
each task, or to monitor the Index Register values using Host Link commands
or FINS commands, write a program to store Index Register values from each
task to another area (e.g., DM area) at the end of each task, and to read Index
315
Section 8-17
Index Registers
Register values from the storage words (e.g., DM area) at the beginning of
each task. The values stored for each task in other areas (e.g., DM area) can
then be edited using the Programming Devices, Host Link commands, or
FINS commands.
Note Be sure to use PLC memory addresses in Index Registers.
IR storage words for task 1
Task 1
D01001 and D01000
stored in IR0
or
or
Actual memory address of
CIO 0000 (0000C000 Hex)
stored in IR0
Contents of IR0 stored in
D01001 and D01000
IR storage words for task 2
Task 2
D02001 and D02000
stored in IR0
or
or
Actual memory address
CIO 0005 (0000C005 Hex)
stored in IR0
Contents of IR0 stored in
D02001 and D02000
Peripheral servicing
316
Read D01001
and D01000
Read D02001
and D02000
Section 8-18
Data Registers
Sharing Index Registers
This setting can be made from the CX-Programmer.
To share Index Registers among tasks, remove the check from (deselect) the
Use IRs/DRs independently per task Option.
8-18 Data Registers
The sixteen Data Registers (DR0 to DR15) are used to offset the PLC memory addresses in Index Registers when addressing words indirectly.
The value in a Data Register can be added to the PLC memory address in an
Index Register to specify the absolute memory address of a bit or word in I/O
memory. Data Registers contain signed binary data, so the content of an
Index Register can be offset to a lower or higher address.
Bits in Data Registers cannot be force-set or force-reset.
Regular instructions can be used to store data in Data Registers.
I/O Memory
Set to a base value
with MOVR(560) or
MOVRW(561).
Pointer
Set with a regular
instruction.
Examples
The following examples show how Data Registers are used to offset the PLC
memory addresses in Index Registers.
LD
DR0 ,IR0
MOV(021) #0001 DR0 ,IR1
Range of Values
Adds the contents of DR0 to the contents
of IR0 and loads the bit at that PLC memory address.
Adds the contents of DR0 to the contents
of IR1 and writes #0001 to that PLC
memory address.
The contents of data registers are treated as signed binary data and thus
have a range of –32,768 to 32,767.
Hexadecimal content
Decimal equivalent
8000 to FFFF
–32,768 to –1
0000 to 7FFF
0 to 32,767
Data Register Initialization
1,2,3...
The Data Registers will be cleared in the following cases:
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
317
Section 8-19
Task Flags
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
IOM Hold Bit Operation
By default, data registers are cleared when power is interrupted or the CPU
Unit is restarted.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the Data Registers won’t be cleared when
a FALS error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode
to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, and if the Data Registers
are not set to be shared between tasks (default setting), Data Registers will
be held in the following way when power is interrupted. For tasks that were
completed before power was interrupted, the values for the cycle during which
power was interrupted will be held. For tasks that were not completed before
power was interrupted, the values for the cycle before the cycle during which
power was interrupted will be held. For example, in a program with three
tasks, tasks 0, 1, and 2, if power is interrupted in the nth cycle during execution of task 1, then the execution result for the nth cycle of task 0 and the execution results for the (n−1)th cycle of tasks 1 and 2 will be held.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at
Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, and the Data Registers are
set to be shared between tasks, Data Registers will not be held when the
PLC’s power supply is reset (ON →OFF →ON). The Data Registers may take
undefined values. Be sure to set the values before continuing.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in Data Registers cannot be force-set and force-reset.
Precautions
Data Registers are normally local to each task. For example, DR0 used in
task 1 is different from DR0 used in task 2. A PLC Setup setting can be made
from the CX-Programmer to share Data Registers between tasks.
The content of Data Registers cannot be accessed (read or written) from a
Programming Device.
Do not use Data Registers until a value has been set in the register. The register’s operation will be unreliable if they are used without setting their values.
Sharing Data Registers
The following setting can be made from the PLC properties dialog box on the
CX-Programmer to control sharing index and data registers between tasks.
8-19 Task Flags
Task Flags range from TK00 to TK31 and correspond to cyclic tasks 0 to 31. A
Task Flag will be ON when the corresponding cyclic task is in executable
(RUN) status and OFF when the cyclic task hasn’t been executed (INI) or is in
standby (WAIT) status.
Note These flags indicate the status of cyclic tasks (including extra cyclic tasks).
318
Section 8-20
Condition Flags
Task Flag Initialization
The Task Flags will be cleared in the following cases, regardless of the status
of the IOM Hold Bit.
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Forcing Bit Status
The Task Flags cannot be force-set and force-reset.
8-20 Condition Flags
These flags include the Arithmetic Flags such as the Error Flag and Equals
Flag which indicate the results of instruction execution. In earlier PLCs, these
flags were in the SR Area.
The Condition Flags are specified with labels, such as CY and ER, or with
symbols, such as P_Carry and P_Instr_Error, rather than addresses. The status of these flags reflects the results of instruction execution, but the flags are
read-only; they cannot be written directly from instructions or Programming
Devices.
Note The CX-Programmer treats condition flags as global symbols beginning with
P_.
All Condition Flags are cleared when the program switches tasks, so the status of the ER and AER flags are maintained only in the task in which the error
occurred.
Forcing Bit Status
The Condition Flags cannot be force-set and force-reset.
Summary of the Condition
Flags
The following table summarizes the functions of the Condition Flags, although
the functions of these flags will vary slightly from instruction to instruction.
319
Section 8-20
Condition Flags
Refer to the description of the instruction for complete details on the operation
of the Condition Flags for a particular instruction.
Name
Error Flag
P_ER
Symbol
Access Error Flag
P_AER
AER
Turned ON when an Illegal Access Error occurs. The Illegal Access
Error indicates that an instruction attempted to access an area of
memory that should not be accessed.
When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction error
(Instruction Error Operation), program execution will be stopped and
the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A429510) will be turned ON
when the Access Error Flag is turned ON.
Carry Flag
P_CY
CY
Turned ON when there is a carry in the result of an arithmetic operation or a “1” is shifted to the Carry Flag by a Data Shift instruction.
The Carry Flag is part of the result of some Data Shift and Symbol
Math instructions.
Greater Than Flag
P_GT
>
Equals Flag
P_EQ
=
Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is
greater than the second or a value exceeds a specified range.
Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are
equal the result of a calculation is 0.
Less Than Flag
P_LT
<
Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less
than the second or a value is below a specified range.
Negative Flag
Overflow Flag
P_N
P_OF
N
OF
Turned ON when the most significant bit (sign bit) of a result is ON.
Turned ON when the result of calculation overflows the capacity of the
result word(s).
Underflow Flag
P_UF
UF
Greater Than or
Equals Flag
P_GE
>=
Turned ON when the result of calculation underflows the capacity of
the result word(s).
Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is
greater than or equal to the second.
Not Equal Flag
P_NE
<>
Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are
not equal.
Less Than or
Equals Flag
Always ON Flag
P_LE
<=
P_On
ON
Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less
than or equal to the second.
Always ON. (Always 1.)
Always OFF Flag
P_Off
OFF
Always OFF. (Always 0.)
Using the Condition Flags
Label
Function
ER
Turned ON when the operand data in an instruction is incorrect (an
instruction processing error) to indicate that an instruction ended
because of an error.
When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction error
(Instruction Error Operation), program execution will be stopped and
the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A29508) will be turned ON
when the Error Flag is turned ON.
The Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions, so their status may
change often in a single cycle. Be sure to read the Condition Flags immediately after the execution of instruction, preferably in a branch from the same
execution condition.
Instruction A
The result from instruction A is
reflected in the Equals Flag.
Instruction B
320
Instruction
LD
Instruction A
AND
Instruction B
Operand
=
Section 8-20
Condition Flags
!Caution Condition Flags can be tricky to use. They are manipulated by essentially all
instructions and if they are not used with the proper timing, the wrong status
may be read, leading to unexpected operation. Program Condition Flags with
caution.
The Condition Flags are cleared when the program switches tasks, so the status of a Condition Flag cannot be passed to another task. For example the
status of a flag in task 1 cannot be read in task 2. (The flag’s status must be
transferred to a bit.)
Saving and Loading Condition Flag Status
The CS1D CPU Units support instructions to save and load the Condition
Flag status (CCS(282) and CCL(283)). These can be used to access the status of the Condition Flags at other locations in a task or in a different task.
The following example shows how the Equals Flag is used at a different location in the same task.
Task
CMP
CCS
Stores result of comparison in the Condition
Flags. This will enable loading the results to
use with Instruction B.
Saves status of Condition Flags.
Instruction A
CCL
=
Instruction B
Loads the statuses of the Conditions Flags
that were stored.
The result of the comparison instruction in the
Equals Flag can be used by Instruction B
without interference from Instruction A.
321
Section 8-21
Clock Pulses
8-21 Clock Pulses
The Clock Pulses are flags that are turned ON and OFF at regular intervals by
the system.
Name
Label
0.02 s Clock Pulse 0.02s
Symbol
P_0_02_s
Operation
ON for 0.01 s
OFF for 0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.1 s Clock Pulse
0.1s
P_0_1s
ON for 0.05 s
OFF for 0.05 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
0.2 s Clock Pulse
0.2s
P_0_2s
ON for 0.1 s
OFF for 0.1 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
1 s Clock Pulse
1s
P_1s
ON for 0.5 s
OFF for 0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
1 min Clock Pulse
1min
P_1min
ON for 30 s
OFF for 30 s
30 s
30 s
The Clock Pulses are specified with labels (or symbols) rather than
addresses.
Note The CX-Programmer treats condition flags as global symbols beginning with
P_.
The Clock Pulses are read-only; they cannot be overwritten from instructions
or Programming Devices.
The Clock Pulses are cleared at the start of operation.
Using the Clock Pulses
1s
The following example turns CIO 000000 ON and OFF at 0.5 s intervals.
000000
0.5 s
000000
0.5 s
322
Instruction
Operand
LD
OUT
1s
000000
Section 8-22
Parameter Areas
Clock Pulse Accuracy
The accuracy of the clock pulses is different for Duplex CPU Systems than for
Single CPU Systems or CS1-H CPU Units.
Accuracy in Normal Operation
The following table shows the clock pulse accuracy in normal operation.
Timer
0.02 s Clock Pulse
0.1 s Clock Pulse
0.2 s Clock Pulse
1 s Clock Pulse
1 min Clock Pulse
Accuracy
±(10 ms + cycle time)
Accuracy when Switching from Duplex to Simplex Operation
The accuracy of the clock pulses may be longer in the first cycle after switching from duplex to simplex operation. The following table shows the clock
pulse accuracy in the first cycle after switching.
Timer
0.02 s Clock Pulse
0.1 s Clock Pulse
Accuracy
±(10 ms + cycle time) ±10 ms
0.2 s Clock Pulse
1 s Clock Pulse
1 min Clock Pulse
8-22 Parameter Areas
Unlike the data areas in I/O memory which can be used in instruction operands, the Parameter Area can be accessed only from a Programming Device.
The Parameter Area is made up of the following parts.
• The PLC Setup
• The Registered I/O Tables
• The Routing Table
• The CPU Bus Unit Settings
8-22-1 PLC Setup
The user can customize the basic specifications of the CPU Unit with the settings in the PLC Setup. The PLC Setup contains settings such as the serial
port communications settings and minimum cycle time setting.
Refer to SECTION 6 PLC Setup for details on the PLC Setup settings and
refer to the Programming Device’s Operation Manual for details on changing
these settings.
8-22-2 Registered I/O Tables
The Registered I/O Tables are tables in the CPU Unit that contain the information on the model and slot location of all of the Units mounted to the CPU
Rack and Expansion I/O Racks. The I/O Tables are written to the CPU Unit
with a Programming Device operation.
The CPU Unit allocates I/O memory to actual I/O points (on Basic I/O Units or
Remote I/O Units) and CPU Bus Units based on the information in the Regis-
323
Section 8-22
Parameter Areas
tered I/O Tables. Refer to the Programming Device’s Operation Manual for
details on registering the I/O Tables.
0
1
Analog
Communications
Programming Device
2
3
4
0
Analog
CPU Unit
16-point Input
12-point Output
16-point Output
2
Output 16
4
3
Registered
I/O
Tables
1
Communications
Output 12
Input 16
The I/O Verification Error Flag (A40209) will be turned ON if the models and
locations of the Units actually mounted to the PLC (CPU Rack and Expansion
I/O Racks) do not match the information in the Registered I/O Tables.
8-22-3 Routing Tables
When transferring data between networks, it is necessary to create a table in
each CPU Unit that shows the communications route from the local PLC’s
Communications Unit to the other networks. These tables of communications
routes are called “Routing Tables.”
Create the Routing Tables with a Programming Device or the Controller Link
Support Software and transfer the tables to each CPU Unit. The following diagram shows the Routing Tables used for a data transfer from PLC #1 to PLC
#4.
Node number M
Network 2
PLC#1
PLC#2
PLC#3
Unit number n
Network 1
Network 3
PLC#4
Node number N
1,2,3...
1. Relay Network Table of PLC #1:
Destination network
3
Relay network
1
Relay node
N
2. Relay Network Table of PLC #2:
Destination network
3
Relay network
2
M
3. Local Network Table of PLC #3:
Local network
3
324
Unit number
n
Relay node
Section 8-22
Parameter Areas
Relay Network Table
This table lists the network address and node number of the first relay node to
contact in order to reach the destination network. The destination network is
reached through these relay nodes.
Local Network Table
This table lists the network address and unit number of the Communications
Unit connected to the local PLC.
These are settings for the CPU Bus Units which are controlled by the CPU
Unit. The actual settings depend on the model of CPU Bus Unit being used;
refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details.
8-22-4 CPU Bus Unit Settings
These settings are not managed directly like the I/O memory’s data areas, but
are set from a Programming Device like the Registered I/O Tables.
Example 1: For Controller Link Units, user-set data link parameters and network parameters are managed as CPU Bus Unit settings.
Example 2: For Ethernet Units, the settings required to operate as an Ethernet node, such as the IP address table, are managed as CPU Bus Unit settings.
Refer to the Programming Device’s Operation Manual for details on changing
these settings.
Programming Device
CS1 CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
CS1 CPU
Bus Unit
Settings
325
Parameter Areas
326
Section 8-22
SECTION 9
CPU Unit Operation and the Cycle Time
This section describes the internal operation of the CPU Unit and the cycle used to perform internal processing.
9-1
CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
329
9-1-1
General Flow for Duplex CPU Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
329
9-1-2
General Flow for Single CPU Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
330
9-1-3
I/O Refreshing and Peripheral Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
332
9-1-4
Initialization at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
333
9-1-5
Duplex Initialization (Duplex CPU Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
335
CPU Unit Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
336
9-2-1
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
336
9-2-2
Status and Operations in Each Operating Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
336
9-3
9-2-3 Operating Mode Changes and I/O Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
337
338
9-4
9-3-1 Instruction Execution for Power Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computing the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
340
342
9-4-1
CPU Unit Operation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
342
9-4-2
Cycle Time Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
344
9-4-3
I/O Unit Refresh Times for Individual Units and Boards. . . . . . . . .
349
9-4-4
Cycle Time Calculation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
353
9-4-5
Online Editing Cycle Time Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
354
9-4-6
Affects of Duplex and Simplex Operation on the Cycle Time
(Duplex CPU Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
354
9-2
9-5
9-4-7
Duplex Processing Cycle Time Extension
(Duplex CPU Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
355
9-4-8
I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
356
9-4-9 Interrupt Response Times (Single CPU Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
357
358
9-5-1
Sequence Input Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
359
9-5-2
Sequence Output Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
360
9-5-3
Sequence Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
361
9-5-4
Timer and Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
362
9-5-5
Comparison Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
363
9-5-6
Data Movement Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
364
9-5-7
Data Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
9-5-8
Increment/Decrement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
367
9-5-9
Symbol Math Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
367
9-5-10 Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
369
9-5-11 Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
371
9-5-12 Special Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
371
9-5-13 Floating-point Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
372
9-5-14 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
373
9-5-15 Table Data Processing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
374
327
328
9-5-16 Data Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
375
9-5-17 Subroutine Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
376
9-5-18 Interrupt Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
377
9-5-19 Step Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
377
9-5-20 Basic I/O Unit Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
378
9-5-21 Serial Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
379
9-5-22 Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
379
9-5-23 File Memory Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
380
9-5-24 Display Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
380
9-5-25 Clock Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
380
9-5-26 Debugging Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
381
9-5-27 Failure Diagnosis Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
381
9-5-28 Other Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
381
9-5-29 Block Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
9-5-30 Text String Processing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
384
9-5-31 Task Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
384
Section 9-1
CPU Unit Operation
9-1
9-1-1
CPU Unit Operation
General Flow for Duplex CPU Systems
The following flowchart shows the overall operation of the CPU Units in a
Duplex CPU System.
CPU Unit Operation Flow
This section describes the internal operation of the CPU Unit and the cycle
used to perform internal processing. After the instructions in the user program
have been executed, I/O is refreshed and peripherals are services. These
operations are then repeated cyclically.
Note The CPU Units for Duplex CPU Systems do not support parallel processing
modes.
Active CPU Unit
Standby CPU Unit
Power ON
Power ON
Initialize hardware
Startup
memory and system
initialization work area.
Verify actual Units with
registered I/O tables.
Clear I/O memory.
Detect I/O.
Check user memory.
Automatically transfer Clear forced status,
data from Memory
etc.
Card.
Initialize hardware
Startup
memory and system
initialization work area.
Data is transferred from the active CPU Unit
Duplex
initialization to the standby CPU Unit and verified.
Data is transferred from the active CPU Unit
Duplex
initialization to the standby CPU Unit and verified.
Overseeing
processing
Program
execution
Check the Battery.
Check for Memory
Card and other
devices.
Verify actual Units with
registered I/O tables.
Clear I/O memory.
Detect I/O.
Check user memory.
Automatically transfer Clear forced status,
data from Memory
etc.
Card.
Read DIP switch settings.
Check I/O bus.
Check user program
memory.
Overseeing
processing
Operation processing: Execute the user program.
Error processing: Turn OFF outputs. (Reset Units for bus
errors.)
After error: Clear I/O memory is an error occurs (unless a
FALS(007) instruction created the error).
Program
execution
Check the Battery.
Check for Memory
Card and other
devices.
Read DIP switch settings.
Check I/O bus.
Check user program
memory.
Operation processing: Execute the user program.
Error processing: Turn OFF outputs. (Reset Units for bus
errors.)
After error: Clear I/O memory is an error occurs (unless a
FALS(007) instruction created the error).
Duplex synchronization started
Data transfer
Cycle time
data refresh for the following Units
I/O refreshing Cyclic
1. Basic I/O Units
2. Special I/O Units (refreshing allocated
(even in
words in CIO and DM Areas and specific
PROGRAM Unit data)
3. CPU Bus Units (refreshing allocated
mode)
words in CIO and DM Areas and specific
On standby for
synchronization
processing
Unit data)
Duplex bus check
services executed if an event
Peripheral Following
has occurred.
I/O Unit event service
servicing Special
CPU Bus Unit event service
Data transfer
Peripheral
servicing
Peripheral port service
RS-232C port service
Peripheral port service
RS-232C port service
Inner Board event service
File access service
Communications port service
Duplex initialization
Not normally performed.
Duplex initialization
Not normally performed.
Duplex refresh
Duplex synchronization completed.
329
Section 9-1
CPU Unit Operation
9-1-2
General Flow for Single CPU Systems
The following flowchart shows the overall operation of the CPU Unit.
Note The CPU Unit’s processing mode is set to Normal Mode, Parallel Processing
with Synchronous Memory Access, or Parallel Processing with Asynchronous
Memory Access in the PLC Setup (Programming Console address 219, bits
08 to 15). This setting is also possible from the CX-Programmer.
Normal Mode for Single CPU Systems
In the normal mode, the program is executed before I/O is refreshed and
peripherals are serviced. This cycle is executed repeatedly.
Power ON
Startup
initialization
Initialize hardware
memory and system work
area.
Detect I/O.
Automatically transfer data
from Memory Card.
Overseeing Check the Battery.
processing
Check for Memory Card
and other devices.
Read DIP switch settings.
Program
execution
Cycle time
Verify actual Units with
registered I/O tables.
Clear I/O memory.
Check user memory.
Clear forced status, etc.
Check I/O bus.
Check user program
memory.
Operation processing: Execute the user program.
Error processing: Turn OFF outputs. (Reset Units
for bus errors.)
After error: Clear I/O memory is an error occurs
(unless a FALS(007) instruction created the error).
I/O refreshing
(even in
Refresh data for the following
PROGRAM
Units.
mode)
Basic I/O Units
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master
Units
Special I/O Units (both words
allocated in CIO and DM area and
specific data for each Unit)
Peripheral
servicing
330
Perform the following
servicing if any events have
occurred.
Special I/O Unit event
servicing
CPU Bus Unit event servicing
CPU Bus Units (both words
allocated in CIO and DM area and
specific data for each Unit)
Inner Boards (both words
allocated in CIO and DM area and
specific data for each Unit)
Peripheral port servicing
RS-232C port servicing
Inner Board event servicing
File access servicing
Communications port
servicing
Section 9-1
CPU Unit Operation
Parallel Processing (Single CPU Systems Only)
The following two types of processing are performed in parallel in either of the
Parallel Processing Modes.
1,2,3...
1. Program execution: Includes user program execution and I/O refreshing. It
is this cycle time that is monitored from a Programming Device.
2. Peripheral servicing: Programming Devices and events from Special I/O
Units and CPU Bus Units are serviced when they occur.
There are two different Parallel Processing Modes. Parallel Processing with
Synchronous Memory Access refreshes I/O memory in the program execution
cycle and Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access refreshes
I/O memory in the peripheral servicing cycle.
Power ON
Startup
initialization
Program
Execution
Cycle
Initialize hardware
memory and system
work area.
Detect I/O.
Automatically transfer
data from Memory
Card.
Overseeing
processing
Program
execution
Program
execution
cycle time
Verify actual Units with
registered I/O tables.
Clear I/O memory.
Check user memory.
Clear forced status,
etc.
Read DIP switch settings.
Check I/O bus.
Operation processing: Execute the user
program.
Error processing: Turn OFF outputs.
(Reset Units for bus errors.)
After error: Clear I/O memory is an error
occurs (unless a FALS(007) instruction
created the error).
I/O
refreshing
(even in
PROGRAM
mode)
Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Refresh data for the following Units.
Basic I/O Units
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units
Special I/O Units (both words allocated in
CIO and DM area and specific data for
each Unit)
CPU Bus Units (both words allocated in
CIO and DM area and specific data for
each Unit)
Inner Boards (both words allocated in CIO
and DM area and specific data for each
Unit)
Overseeing
processing
Peripheral
servicing
cycle time
Check the Battery.
Check I/O bus.
Check user program
memory.
Peripheral Perform the following servicing if any
servicing events have occurred.
Special I/O Unit event servicing
CPU Bus Unit event servicing
Peripheral port servicing
RS-232C port servicing
Inner Board event servicing
Communications port servicing
Note: In Parallel Processing with
Synchronous Memory Access, any
events requiring I/O memory access are
serviced in the program execution cycle.
Peripheral Perform the following servicing if any events
occurred.
servicing have
File access servicing
Note: In Parallel Processing with Synchronous
Memory Access, any events requiring I/O
memory access are serviced here.
Note Always disconnect the Programming Console from the peripheral port during
actual system operation in a Parallel Processing Mode. If the Programming
Console is left attached, excess time will be allocated to increase key
response for the Programming Console, adversely affecting performance.
331
Section 9-1
CPU Unit Operation
9-1-3
I/O Refreshing and Peripheral Servicing
I/O Refreshing
I/O refreshing involves cyclically transferring data with external devices using
preset words in memory. I/O refreshing includes the following:
• Refreshing the CIO Area for Basic I/O Units
• Refreshing Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, and Inner Boards, and the
words allocated to these in the CIO Area (and for CPU Bus Units, words
allocated in the DM Area)
• Refreshing specific data for the Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, and
Inner Boards, such as data links and remote I/O communications.
All I/O refreshing is completed each cycle without time slicing. I/O is always
refreshed after the instructions in the user program are executed.
Units
Basic I/O Units
Special I/O
Units
CPU Bus Units
Max. data
exchange
Words allocated in CIO Area
Words allocated in CIO Area
Words allocated in DM Area
Unit-specific data
Depends on the Unit.
10 words/Unit
(Depends on the
Unit.)
25 words/Unit
100 words/Unit
Controller Link Unit
Depends on the Unit.
and SYSMAC LINK
Unit
CS-series DeviceNet Depends on the Unit.
Unit
Data exchange area
I/O Bit Area
Special I/O Unit Area
CPU Bus Unit Area
Words in DM Area allocated to
CPU Bus Units
Words set for data links (for either
fixed or user-set allocations)
Words set for remote I/O communications (for either fixed or userset allocations)
Serial Communications Unit
Depends on the pro- Communications data set for protocol macros.
tocol macros
Ethernet Unit
Depends on the Unit. Communications data for socket
services initiated by specific control bit operations.
100 words/Unit
Inner Board Area
Depends on the
Depends on the Board being used.
Board being used.
Inner Boards
Words allocated in CIO Area
(Single CPU
Unit-specific data
Inner Boards
Systems or Process-control
CPU Units only)
Peripheral Servicing
Peripheral servicing involves servicing non-scheduled events for external
devices. This includes both events from external devices and service requests
to external devices.
Most peripheral servicing for CS1D PLCs involved FINS commands. The specific amount of time set in the system is allocated to each type of servicing
332
Section 9-1
CPU Unit Operation
and executed every cycle. If all servicing cannot be completed within the allocated time, the remaining servicing is performed the next cycle.
Units
Event servicing for
Special I/O Units
Event servicing for
CPU Bus Units
Servicing
Non-scheduled servicing for FINS commands from Special I/O
Units, CPU Bus Units, and Inner Boards
Non-scheduled servicing for FINS commands from the CPU
Unit to the above Units
Event servicing for
Inner Boards (Single
CPU Systems or
Process-control CPU
Units only)
Peripheral port ser- Non-scheduled servicing for FINS or Host Link commands
vicing
received via the peripheral or RS-232C ports from Programming Devices, PTs, or host computers (e.g., requests to transRS-232C port serfer programming, monitoring, forced-set/reset operations, or
vicing
online editing
Non-scheduled servicing from the CPU Unit transmitted from
the peripheral or RS-232C port (non-solicited communications)
Communications
Servicing to execute network communications, serial commuport servicing
nications, or file memory access for the SEND, RECV, CMND
or PMCR instructions using communications ports 0 to 7
(internal logical ports)
File access servicing File read/write operations for Memory Cards or EM file memory
Note
1. Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, RS-232C communications ports, Inner
Boards, and file servicing is allocated 4% of the cycle time by default (the
default can be changed). If servicing is separated over many cycles, delaying completion of the servicing, set the same allocated time (same time for
all services) rather than a percentage under execute time settings in the
PLC Setup.
2. In either of the Parallel Processing Modes for a Single CPU System, all peripheral servicing except for file access is performed in the peripheral servicing cycle.
9-1-4
Initialization at Startup
The following initializing processes will be performed once each time the
power is turned ON.
• Detect mounted Units.
• Compare the registered I/O tables and the actual Units.
• Clear the non-holding areas of I/O memory according to the status of the
IOM Hold Bit. (See note 1.)
• Clear forced status according to the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit.
(See note 2.)
• Autoboot using the autotransfer files in the Memory Card if one is
inserted.
• Perform self-diagnosis (user memory check).
• Restore the user program (See note 3.)
333
Section 9-1
CPU Unit Operation
Note
1. The I/O memory is held or cleared according to the status of the IOM Host
Bit and the setting for IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup in the PLC Setup
(read only when power is turned ON).
Auxiliary bit
PLC Setup setting
IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup
(Programming Console address:
Word 80, bit 15)
Note
Clear
(OFF)
Hold
(ON)
IOM Hold Bit (A50012)
Clear (OFF)
Hold (ON)
At power ON: Clear
At power ON: Clear
At mode change: Clear At mode change: Hold
At power ON: Hold
At mode change: Hold
I/O memory treatment depends on the status of the IOM Hold Bit at
the time the operating mode is changed (to or from PROGRAM
mode).
2. The forced status held or cleared according to the status of the Force Status Hold Bit and the setting for Forced Status Hold Bit Status at Startup in
the PLC Setup.
Auxiliary bit
PLC Setup setting
Forced Status Hold
Bit Status at Startup
(Programming Console address:
Word 80, bit 14)
Note
Clear
(OFF)
Hold
(ON)
Forced Status Hold Bit (A50013)
Clear (OFF)
Hold (ON)
At power ON: Clear
At power ON: Clear
At mode change: Clear At mode change: Hold
At power ON: Hold
At mode change: Hold
Force status treatment depends on the status of the Forced Status
Hold Bit at the time the operating mode is changed (to or from
PROGRAM mode).
3. If online editing is performed, but the power supply to the CPU Unit is
turned OFF before the CPU Unit has completed backup processing, the
user program will require restoring when the power supply is turned ON
again. The BKUP indicator will light to indicate this. Refer to 6-6-10 Flash
Memory in the Programming Manual (W394) for details.
334
Section 9-1
CPU Unit Operation
9-1-5
Duplex Initialization (Duplex CPU Systems Only)
The Duplex System is initialized when the power supply is turned ON, when
operation is started, when the user program or PLC Setup is transferred, etc.
It involves transferring data from the active CPU Unit to the standby CPU Unit
and verifying that both CPU Units contain the same data. Duplex initialization
is performed only in Duplex Mode.
Execution Timing and Processed Items
The following tables lists the items that are processed for duplex initialization
and when each item is processed.
Event
Item
System
verification
(CPU models
and Inner
Boards)
Program
Program
Parameter Parameter
transfer verification
area
area
transfer
verification
Inner Board
setting
transfer
(Processcontrol CPU
Units only)
Inner Board
setting
verification
(Processcontrol CPU
Units only)
I/O
Inner Board
memory variable area
transfer
transfer
(including
(ProcessEM Area) control CPU
Units only)
Power turned ON in Duplex
Mode
Initialized
---
Initialization button
pressed in Duplex Mode
Initialized
Operation started in
Duplex Mode
FINS
command
executed
---
Initialized
---
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
---
Initialized
---
Initialized
---
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
0203 hex:
Initialized
PARAMETER
AREA CLEAR
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
0307 hex:
PROGRAM
AREA WRITE
Initialized
Initialized Initialized
---
---
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
0308 hex:
Initialized
PROGRAM
AREA CLEAR
Initialized Initialized
---
---
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
0321 hex:
PROGRAM
REPLACE/
DELETE
Initialized
Initialized Initialized
---
---
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
2104 hex:
ONLINE UNIT
REPLACEMENT
Initialized
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
220B hex:
PARAMETER
AREA–FILE
TRANSFER
Initialized
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
220C hex:
PROGRAM
AREA–FILE
TRANSFER
Initialized
Initialized Initialized
---
---
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
Program
transfer
Initialized
Initialized Initialized
---
---
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
Online editing
Initialized
Initialized Initialized
---
---
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
Unit online
replacement
Initialized
---
Initialized
Initialized
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
Automatic transfer at startup (program and PLC
Setup transfer)
Initialized
Initialized Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Program replacement used
during operation
Initialized
Initialized Initialized
---
---
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
Inner Board settings
changed (Process-control
CPU Units only)
Initialized
---
---
---
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
0202 hex:
PARAMETER
AREA WRITE
CX-ProPLC Setup
grammer
transfer
operations
I/O table
transfer
Initialized
---
---
Duplex operating status does not exist during duplex initialization (i.e., duplex
initialization is performed in simplex operating status). This means that the
335
Section 9-2
CPU Unit Operating Modes
active CPU Unit will not be switched. Because of this, operation will not continue if an error that would cause the CPU Unit to be switched occurs during
duplex initialization, including CPU errors, memory errors, fatal Inner Board
errors, program errors, exceeding the cycle time limit, and execution of FALS
instructions).
Duplex Refreshing
Duplex refreshing is used to transfer errors detected by the active CPU Unit or
the status of special flags and bits changed by the active CPU Unit to the
standby CPU Unit. It is performed only in Duplex Mode.
9-2
CPU Unit Operating Modes
9-2-1
Operating Modes
The CPU Unit has three operating modes that control the entire user program
and are common to all tasks.
9-2-2
PROGRAM:
Programs are not executed and preparations, such as creating I/O tables, initializing the PLC Setup and other settings,
transferring programs, checking programs, force-setting and
force-resetting can be executed prior to program execution.
MONITOR:
Programs are executed, but some operations, such as online
editing, forced-set/reset, and changes to present values in I/O
memory, are enabled for trial operation and other adjustments.
RUN:
Programs are executed and some operations are disabled.
Status and Operations in Each Operating Mode
PROGRAM, RUN, and MONITOR are the three operating modes available in
the CPU Unit. The following lists status and operations for each mode.
Overall Operation
Mode
Program
(See note)
I/O refresh
External outputs
I/O Memory
Non-holding
Holding areas
areas
PROGRAM
Stopped
Executed
OFF
Clear
RUN
Executed
Executed
Controlled by program
MONITOR
Executed
Executed
Controlled by program
Controlled by program
Hold
Controlled by program
Programming Console Operations
Mode
PROGRAM
MONITOR
RUN
Mode
PROGRAM
336
Monitor I/O
Memory
OK
OK
OK
PLC
Setup
OK
Monitor
Program
OK
OK
OK
Modify
program
OK
Transfer Program
PLC to
Programming
Programming Device to PLC
Device
OK
OK
OK
OK
X
X
Check
Program
OK
X
X
Create I/O
Table
OK
X
X
Forceset/reset
Changing timer/
counter SV
Changing timer/
counter PV
Changing I/O Unit online
memory PV replacement
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Section 9-2
CPU Unit Operating Modes
Mode
PLC
Setup
RUN
MONITOR
X
X
Modify
program
X
OK
ForceChanging timer/ Changing timer/ Changing I/O Unit online
set/reset
counter SV
counter PV
memory PV replacement
X
X
X
X
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Note The following table shows the relationship of operating modes to tasks.
Mode
PROGRAM
RUN
MONITOR
Cyclic task status
Interrupt task
status (See note.)
Disabled status (INI)
• Any task that has not yet been executed, will be in disabled status (INI).
• A task will go to READY status if the task is set to go to READY status at
startup or the TASK ON (TKON) instruction has been executed for it.
• A task in READY status will be executed (RUN status) when it obtains the
right to execute.
• A status will go to standby (WAIT) status if a READY task is put into Standby
status by a TASK OFF (TKOF) instruction.
Stopped
Executed if interrupt condition is
met.
Note Interrupt tasks are supported only by Single CPU Systems and cannot be
used in Duplex CPU Systems.
9-2-3
Operating Mode Changes and I/O Memory
Mode Changes
Non-holding areas
I/O bits
Data Link bits
CPU Bus Unit bits
Special I/O Unit bits
Inner Board bits
DeviceNet bits
Work bits
Timer PV/Completion
Flags
• Index Registers
• Data Registers
• Task Flags
(Auxiliary Area bits/words
are holding or non-holding
depending on the address.)
RUN or MONITOR to Cleared (See note 1.)
PROGRAM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PROGRAM to RUN Cleared (See note 1.)
or MONITOR
RUN to MONITOR or Held (See note 2.)
MONITOR to RUN
Note
Holding Areas
• HR Area
• DM Area
• EM Area
Counter PV and Completion
Flags
(Auxiliary Area bits/words are
holding or non-holding
depending on the address.)
Held
Held
Held
1. The following processing is performed depending on the status of the I/O
Memory Hold Bit. Output from Output Units will be turned OFF when operation stops even if I/O bit status is held in the CPU Unit.
337
Section 9-3
Power OFF Operation
2. The cycle time will increase by approximately 10 ms when the operating
mode is changed from MONITOR to RUN mode. This will not, however,
cause an error for exceeding the maximum cycle time limit.
I/O Memory
I/O Memory
Hold Bit status Mode changed
Operation stopped
(A50012)
between
Fatal error
FALS
PROGRAM
other than
executed
and RUN/
FALS
MONITOR
OFF
Cleared
Cleared
Held
ON
Held
Held
Held
Output bits allocated to Output Units
Mode changed
Operation stopped
between
Fatal error
FALS
PROGRAM
other than
executed
and RUN/
FALS
MONITOR
OFF
OFF
OFF
Held
OFF
OFF
Refer to 8-2 I/O Memory Areas for more details on I/O Memory.
9-3
Power OFF Operation
The following processing is performed if CPU Unit power is turned OFF.
Power OFF processing will be performed if the power supply falls below 85%
of the rated voltage while the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode.
1,2,3...
1. The CPU Unit will stop.
2. Outputs from all Output Units will be turned OFF.
Note All output will turn OFF despite an I/O Memory Hold Bit or I/O Memory Hold
Bit at power ON settings in the PLC Setup.
85% of the rated voltage:
AC power: 85 V for a 100 V AC system and 170 V for a 200 V AC system
The following processing will be performed if power drops only momentarily (momentary power interruption).
1,2,3...
1. The system will continue to run unconditionally if the momentary power interruption lasts less than 10 ms, i.e., the time it takes the rated voltage at
85% or less to return to 85% or higher is less than 10 ms.
2. A momentary power interruption that lasts more than 10 ms but less than
25 ms is difficult to determine and a power interruption may or may not be
detected.
3. The system will stop unconditionally if the momentary power interruption
lasts more than 25 ms.
If operation stops under the conditions given in items 2 and 3 above, the timing used to stop operation can be delayed by setting the Power OFF Detection
Delay Time (0 to 10 ms) in the PLC Setup. Operation, however, will always be
stopped 10 to 25 ms after detecting a momentary power interruption regardless of the setting in the PLC Setup.
338
Section 9-3
Power OFF Operation
85% of the rated voltage or less
10 ms
25 ms
0
0 to 10 ms
Momentary power interruption
not detected and operation
continues.
Power supply
voltage
10 to 25 ms
Power supply
voltage
Operation will continue or stop
depending on whether or not a
momentary power interruption
is detected.
Power supply
voltage
Over 25 ms
Momentary power interruption
detected and operation stops.
Note The above timing chart shows an example when the power OFF detection
time is set to 0 ms (the default value).
The following timing chart shows the CPU Unit power OFF operation in more
detail.
Power OFF Timing Chart
Operation always stopped
at this point regardless.
85% of rated
voltage
Holding time for 5 V internal power
supply after power OFF detection:
10 ms.
Power OFF detected Power OFF confirmed
Default power OFF
detection time: 10 to
25 ms
Power OFF
detected signal
Program execution
status
Cyclic tasks
Power OFF Detection
Delay Time: 0 to 10 ms
(set in PLC Setup)
Processing time after power
OFF is confirmed: 10 ms
minus Power OFF Detection
Delay Time
Stopped
CPU reset signal
Power OFF Detection Time
The time it takes to detect power OFF after the power supply falls below 85%
of the rated voltage.
Power OFF Detection Delay Time
The delay time after power OFF is detected until it is confirmed. This can be
set in the PLC Setup within a range from 0 to 10 ms. (The default is 0 ms.)
Power Holding Time
The maximum amount of time (fixed at 10 ms) that 5 V will be held internally
after power shuts OFF.
Description of Operation
1,2,3...
1. Power OFF will be detected if the 100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC power supply falls below 85% of the rated voltage for the power OFF detection
time (somewhere between 10 to 25 ms).
339
Section 9-3
Power OFF Operation
2. If the Power OFF Detection Delay Time is set (0 to 10 ms in 1-ms increments) in the PLC Setup, the CPU reset signal will turn ON while the internal power supply is maintained and the CPU Unit will be reset.
Note a) Power OFF interrupt tasks cannot be used in Duplex CPU Systems.
b) Power OFF interrupt tasks are supported only by Single CPU Systems. However, the CPU reset signal will turn ON and the CPU will
be reset after the power OFF interrupt task has been executed.
Make sure that the power OFF interrupt task will finish executing
within 10 ms minus the Power OFF Detection Delay Time = processing time after power OFF. The 5-V internal power supply will
be maintained only for 10 ms after power OFF is detected.
9-3-1
Instruction Execution for Power Interruptions
If power is interrupted and the interruption is confirmed when the CPU Unit is
operating in RUN or MONITOR mode, the instruction currently being executed
will be completed (see note) and the following power interruption processing
will be performed.
• If the power OFF interrupt task has not been enabled, the CPU Unit will
be reset immediately.
• If the power OFF interrupt task has been enabled, the task will be executed and then the CPU Unit will be reset immediately.
Note
1. The current instruction can be completed only when the time required to
complete execution is less than or equal to the processing time after power
interruption detection (10 ms − power interruption detection delay time). If
the instruction is not completed within this time, it will be interrupted and
the above processing will be performed.
2. Power OFF interrupt tasks are supported only by Single CPU Systems and
cannot be used in Duplex CPU Systems.
Disabling Power Interruption Processing in the Program
Areas of the program can be protected from power interruptions so that the
instructions will be executed before the CPU Unit even if the power supply is
interrupted. This is achieved by using the DISABLE INTERRUPTS (DI(693))
and ENABLE INTERRUPTS (EI(694)) instructions. Using these instructions
must be enabled in the PLC Setup.
The following procedure is used.
1,2,3...
1. Insert DI(693) before the program section to be protected to disable interrupts and then place EI(694) after the section to enable interrupts.
2. Set the Disable Setting for Power OFF Interrupts in A530 to A5A5 hex to
enable disabling power interruption processing.
Note A530 is normally cleared when power is turned OFF. To prevent this,
the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) must be turned ON and the PLC Setup
must be set to maintain the setting of the IOM Hold Bit at Startup, or
the following type of instruction must be included at the beginning of
the program to set A530 to A5A5 hex.
A20011
First Cycle Flag
340
MOV
#A5A5
A530
Set A530 to A5A5 Hex at the
beginning of the program to enable
disabling power interruption
processing.
Section 9-3
Power OFF Operation
Note If the power interruption becomes finalized during execution of DI(693), the
instructions through EI(694) or END(001) will not be executed and the CPU
Unit will be reset.
The following illustration is for a CS1D CPU Unit with A530 set
to A5A5 hex to enable prohibiting power interrupt processing.
Operation always stopped
at this point regardless.
85% of rated
voltage
Holding time for 5 V internal power
supply after power OFF detection:
10 ms.
Power OFF detected Power OFF confirmed
Power OFF
detected signal
Program execution
status
Default power OFF Power OFF Detection
detection time: 10 to Delay Time: 0 to 10 ms
(set in PLC Setup)
25 ms
D
I
Cyclic tasks
E
I
Processing time after
power OFF is confirmed:
10 ms minus Power OFF
Detection Delay Time
Note: The interrupt task
execution time must be
less than or equal to processing time after power
OFF is confirmed.
Stopped
Instructions between
DI(693) and EI(694)
are executed.
CPU reset signal
If A530 is not set to A5A5 hex, i.e., if prohibiting power interruption processing
is not enabled, only the current instruction will be executed and then power
interruption processing will be performed.
Power interruption processing is performed according to the contents of A530.
Duplex CPU Systems
A530 = A5A5 hex
A530 = Any value except A5A5 hex
(disabling power interrupt processing)
All instructions between DI(693) and
Execution of the current instruction is
EI(694) are executed and the CPU Unit is completed and the CPU Unit is reset.
reset.
Single CPU Systems
A530
Power OFF
Disabled
Interrupt Task
(PLC Setup)
Enabled
A5A5 hex (disabling
Other
power interrupt
processing)
All instructions between
Execution of the current
DI(693) and EI(694) are
instruction is completed
executed and the CPU Unit and the CPU Unit is reset.
is reset.
Execution of the current instruction is completed, the
Power OFF Interrupt Task is executed, and the CPU Unit
is reset.
341
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
9-4
9-4-1
Computing the Cycle Time
CPU Unit Operation Flowchart
The CS1D CPU Units process data in repeating cycles from the overseeing
processing up to peripheral servicing as shown in the following diagram.
Normal Processing Mode
Power ON
Checks Unit
connection status.
Startup
initialization
Duplex
initialization
Checks hardware and
user program memory
NO
Overseeing
processing
Check OK?
YES
Sets error flags
ERR/ALM indicator
ON or Flashing?
Flashing (nonfatal error)
Executes user program
(i.e., executes READY
cyclic tasks).
Program
execution
ON (fatal error)
NO
End of program?
YES
Resets watchdog timer
and waits until the set
cycle time has elapsed
Calculates cycle
time
Cycle time
calculation
I/O refreshing
Performs I/O
refreshing
Services Programming
Devices
342
Peripheral
servicing
PLC cycle
time
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Parallel Processing Mode
Checks Unit
connection status
Program Execution
Cycle
Startup
initialization
Power ON
Peripheral
Servicing Cycle
Check hardware,
etc.
Set error flags.
Lit: Fatal error
Program
completed?
NO
Program
execution
Services
peripherals.
Execute user
program (i.e., READY
cyclic tasks).
Calculates cycle
time.
Refreshes I/O.
Services peripherals.
Cycle time
calculations
YES
Wait for specified
cycle time.
I/O refreshing
Flashing:
Non-fatal
error
Peripheral
servicing
ERR/ALM
indicator lit or
flashing
Program execution
cycle time
Check OK?
Overseeing
processing
Check OK?
Peripheral
servicing
Overseeing
processing
Check user program
memory, etc.
343
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
9-4-2
Cycle Time Overview
Normal Processing Mode
The cycle time depends on the following conditions.
• Type and number of instructions in the user program (in all cyclic tasks
that are executed during a cycle, including additional cyclic tasks).
• Type and number of Basic I/O Units
• Type and number of Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, Inner Boards, and
type of services being executed.
• Specific servicing for the following Units/Boards
• Data link refreshing and the number of data link words for Controller
Link and SYSMAC LINK Units
• Remote I/O for DeviceNet (Master) Units and the number of remote
I/O words
• Use of protocol macros and the largest communications message
• Socket services for specific control bits for Ethernet Units and the number of send/receive words
• Fixed cycle time setting in the PLC Setup
• File access in file memory, and the amount of data transferred to/from file
memory
• Event servicing for Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, Inner Boards, and
communications ports
• Use of peripheral and RS-232C ports
• Fixed peripheral servicing time in the PLC Setup
Note
1. The cycle time is not affected by the number of tasks that are used in the
user program. The tasks that affect the cycle time are those cyclic tasks
that are READY in the cycle.
2. When the mode is switched from MONITOR mode to RUN mode, the cycle
time will be extended by 10 ms (this will not, however, take the cycle time
over its limit).
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
1: Overseeing
Details
Checks the I/O bus and user program
memory, checks for battery errors and
refreshes the clock.
Processing time and fluctuation cause
Duplex CPU Systems: 1.9 ms
Single CPU Systems: 0.5 ms
2: Program Execution
Details
Executes the user program, and calculates the total time taken for the instructions to execute the program.
Processing time and fluctuation cause
Total instruction execution time
3: Cycle Time Calculation
Details
Waits for the specified cycle time to
elapse when a minimum (fixed) cycle time
has been set in the PLC Setup.
Calculates the cycle time.
344
Processing time and fluctuation cause
When the cycle time is not fixed, the time
for step 3 is approximately 0.
When the cycle time is fixed, the time for
step 3 is the preset fixed cycle time minus
the actual cycle time ((1) + (2) + (4) + (5)).
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
4: I/O Refreshing
Details
Processing time and
fluctuation cause
Basic I/O Units
Basic I/O Units are refreshed. Out- I/O refresh time for each Unit
puts from the CPU Unit to the I/O multiplied by the number of
Unit are refreshed first for each
Units used
Unit, and then inputs.
Special I/O
Units
Words allocated in CIO Area
CPU Bus Units
I/O refresh time for each Unit
multiplied by the number of
Units used
Words allocated in CIO and DM
I/O refresh time for each Unit
Areas
multiplied by the number of
Unit-specific Data links for Con- Units used
data
troller Link and
SYSMAC LINK
Units, DeviceNet
remote I/O for CSseries DeviceNet
Units, send/receive
data for protocol
macros, and
socket services for
specific control bits
for Ethernet Units
Inner Boards
Words allocated in Inner Board
(Single CPU
Area
Systems or Pro- Unit-specific data
cess-control
CPU Units only)
Inner Board I/O refresh time
5: Peripheral Servicing
Details
Services events for Special I/O Units.
Processing time and fluctuation cause
If a uniform peripheral servicing time
hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for this
Note Peripheral servicing does not servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s
include I/O refreshing.
cycle time (calculated in step (3)) will be
Services events for CPU Bus Units.
allowed for peripheral servicing.
Note Peripheral servicing does not If a uniform peripheral servicing time has
been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will
include I/O refreshing.
be performed for the set time. At least
0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether
the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If no Units are mounted, the servicing
time is 0 ms.
Services events for peripheral ports.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time
hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for this
Services RS-232C ports.
servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s
cycle time (calculated in step (3)) will be
allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has
been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will
be performed for the set time. At least
0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether
the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If the ports are not connected, the servicing time is 0 ms.
345
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Details
Processing time and fluctuation cause
Services Inner Board events (Single CPU If a uniform peripheral servicing time
Systems or Process-control CPU Units
hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for this
only)
servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s
cycle time (calculated in step (3)) will be
allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has
been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will
be performed for the set time. At least
0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether
the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If no Inner Boards are mounted, the servicing time is 0 ms.
Services file access (Memory Card or EM If a uniform peripheral servicing time
file memory)
hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for this
servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s
cycle time (calculated in step (3)) will be
allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has
been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will
be performed for the set time. At least
0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether
the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If there is no file access, the servicing
time is 0 ms.
Services communications ports
If a uniform peripheral servicing time
hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for this
servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s
cycle time (calculated in step (3)) will be
allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has
been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will
be performed for the set time. At least
0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether
the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If no communications ports are used, the
servicing time is 0 ms.
Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access (Single CPU Systems Only)
Program Execution Cycle
The program execution cycle time depends on the following conditions.
• Type and number of instructions in the user program (in all cyclic tasks
that are executed during a cycle, and within interrupt tasks for which the
execution conditions have been satisfied).
• Type and number of Basic I/O Units
• Number of SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units and number of I/O
points on the Slaves
• Type and number of Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, Inner
Boards, and type of services being executed.
• Specific servicing for the following Units/Boards
• Data link refreshing and the number of data link words for Controller
Link and SYSMAC LINK Units
• Remote I/O for DeviceNet (Master) Units and the number of remote
I/O words
• Use of protocol macros and the largest communications message
• Socket services for specific control bits for Ethernet Units and the number of send/receive words
346
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
• Fixed cycle time setting in the PLC Setup
• File access in file memory, and the amount of data transferred to/from file
memory
• Fixed peripheral servicing time in the PLC Setup
The program execution cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to perform the 5 operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
Details
Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Time
Processing time and
fluctuation cause
I/O bus check, etc.
0.3 ms
Same as for Normal Mode. Same as for Normal Mode.
Waits for the specified
Same as for Normal Mode.
cycle time.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Overseeing
Program execution
Cycle time calculation
(4)
I/O refreshing
Same as for Normal Processing Mode.
Same as for Normal Processing Mode.
(5)
Partial peripheral
servicing
Servicing file access
Same as for Normal Processing Mode.
The peripheral servicing execution cycle time depends on the following conditions.
• Type and number of Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, Inner
Boards, and type of services being executed.
• Type and frequency of event servicing requiring communications ports.
• Use of peripheral and RS-232C ports
The peripheral servicing cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to
perform the 5 operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2)
Name
(1)
(2)
Overseeing
processing
Peripheral
servicing
Processing
Checks user program memory,
checks for battery errors, etc.
Performs
Events with CS-series
services for Special I/O Units (does
the events
not include I/O refreshgive at the
ing)
right, includ- Events with CS-series
ing I/O
CPU Bus Units (does
memory
not include I/O refreshaccess.
ing)
Processing time and
fluctuation cause
0.4 ms
1.0 ms for each type of
service
If servicing ends before
1 ms has expired, the
next type of servicing
will be started immediately without waiting.
Peripheral port events
RS-232C port events
Events with Inner
Boards
Events using communications ports
Note
1. The cycle time display on a Programming Device is the Program Execution
Cycle Time.
2. The peripheral service cycle time varies with the event load and number of
Units that are mounted. In a Parallel Processing Mode, however, this variation will not affect the program execution cycle time.
347
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Parallel Processing with Synchronous Memory Access (Single CPU Systems Only)
Program Execution Cycle
The program execution cycle time depends on the same conditions as the
Normal Mode. Partial peripheral servicing ((5) below), however, is restricted to
servicing for file and I/O memory access.
The program execution cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to perform the 5 operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
Details
(1)
(2)
Overseeing
I/O bus check, etc.
Program exe- Same as for Normal Mode.
cution
Processing time and
fluctuation cause
0.3 ms
Same as for Normal
Mode.
(3)
Cycle time
calculation
Same as for Normal
Mode.
(4)
I/O refreshing Same as for Normal Processing Mode. Same as for Normal
Mode.
Partial
Servicing file access (Memory Card or Same as for Normal
peripheral
EM file memory)
Mode.
servicing
Performs
Events with CS-series
(5)
Waits for the specified cycle time.
services for
the events
give at the
right that
requires I/
O memory
access
Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Time
Special I/O Units (does
not include I/O refreshing)
Events with CS-series
CPU Bus Units (does not
include I/O refreshing)
Peripheral port events
RS-232C port events
Events with Inner Boards
Events using communications ports
The peripheral servicing execution cycle time depends on the same conditions as the Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access. Peripheral servicing ((2) below), however, is restricted to servicing that does not
access I/O memory.
The peripheral servicing cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to
perform the 2 operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2)
Name
348
Processing
(1)
Overseeing
processing
Checks user program memory,
checks for battery errors, etc.
(2)
Peripheral
servicing
Performs
services for
the events
give at the
right,
excluding
those that
require I/O
memory
access.
Events with CS-series
Special I/O Units (does
not include I/O refreshing)
Processing time and
fluctuation cause
0.4 ms
1.0 ms for each type of
service
If servicing ends before
1 ms has expired, the
Events with CS-series next type of servicing
will be started immediCPU Bus Units (does
not include I/O refresh- ately without waiting.
ing)
Peripheral port events
RS-232C port events
Events with Inner
Boards
Events using communications ports
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Note
1. The cycle time display on a Programming Device is the Program Execution
Cycle Time.
2. The peripheral service cycle time varies with the event load and number of
Units that are mounted. In a Parallel Processing Mode, however, this variation will not affect the program execution cycle time.
9-4-3
I/O Unit Refresh Times for Individual Units and Boards
Basic I/O Unit Refresh
Unit
Name
Model
I/O refresh time
per Unit
0.004 ms (See
note.)
CS-series Basic 16-point DC Input Unit
I/O Units
CS1W-ID211
16-point AC Input Unit
CS1W-IA111/
211
0.004 ms (See
note.)
8/16-point Relay Output Unit
CS1W-OC201/
211
CS1W-OA201/
211
0.004 ms (See
note.)
0.004 ms (See
note.)
16-point Transistor Output
Unit, sinking outputs
CS1W-OD211
0.004 ms (See
note.)
16-point Transistor Output
Unit, sourcing outputs
CS1W-OD212
0.004 ms (See
note.)
16-point Interrupt Input Unit
CS1W-INT01
16-point High-speed Input
Unit
CS1W-IDP01
0.004 ms (See
note.)
0.004 ms (See
note.)
32-point DC Input Unit
CS1W-ID231
0.007 ms (See
note.)
64-point DC Input Unit
CS1W-ID261
96-point DC Input Unit
CS1W-ID291
0.014 ms (See
note.)
0.02 ms (See
note.)
32-point Transistor Output
Unit, sinking outputs
CS1W-OD231
0.008 ms (See
note.)
32-point Transistor Output
Unit, sourcing outputs
64-point Transistor Output
Unit, sinking outputs
CS1W-OD232
0.008 ms (See
note.)
0.016 ms (See
note.)
64-point Transistor Output
Unit, sourcing outputs
CS1W-OD262
0.016 ms (See
note.)
96-point Transistor Output
Unit, sinking outputs
96-point Transistor Output
Unit, sourcing outputs
CS1W-OD291
0.02 ms (See
note.)
0.02 ms (See
note.)
8/16-point Triac Output Unit
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD292
32-point DC Input/32-point
CS1W-MD261
Transistor Output Unit, sourcing outputs
32-point DC Input/32-point
CS1W-MD262
Transistor Output Unit, sinking
outputs
0.015 ms (See
note.)
48-point DC Input/48-point
CS1W-MD291
Transistor Output Unit, sinking
outputs
0.02 ms (See
note.)
48-point DC Input/48-point
Transistor Output Unit, sourcing outputs
0.02 ms (See
note.)
CS1W-MD292
0.015 ms (See
note.)
349
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Note Longer I/O refresh times will be required according to the distance from the
CPU Rack to the Unit when these Units are mounted to Long-distance Expansion Racks. Multiply the values given in the table by the factors on line *1 in
the following graph.
Factor
4
4
(*3)
3.5
3
2.5
2.5
2
1.5
(*1)
1.8
(*2)
1.3
1.5
1.1
1
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Distance to Unit (m)
350
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Unit
CS-series Special
I/O Units
Name
Model
I/O refresh time per Unit
Normal
Mounted on Longdistance
Expansion Rack
(See note.)
Analog I/O Unit
Analog Input Unit
Analog Output Unit
CS1W-MAD44
0.12 ms
CS1W-AD041/081 0.12 ms
CS1W-DA041/08V/ 0.12 ms
08C
0.2 ms × *2
0.2 ms × *2
0.2 ms × *2
Isolated Thermocouple Input Unit
Isolated Resistance Thermometer
Input Unit
Isolated Ni508Ω Resistance Thermometer Input Unit
CS1W-PTS01-V1
CS1W-PTS02
0.16 ms
0.16 ms
0.3 ms × *2
0.3 ms × *2
CS1W-PTS03
0.16 ms
0.3 ms × *2
Isolated 2-wire Transmission
Device Input Unit
CS1W-PTW01
0.16 ms
0.3 ms × *2
Isolated DC Input Unit
Isolated Control Output Unit (Analog Output Unit)
Power Transducer Input Unit
DC Input Unit (100 mV)
Isolated Pulse Input Unit
Position Control Unit
CS1W-PDC01
CS1W-PMV01
0.16 ms
0.16 ms
0.3 ms × *2
0.3 ms × *2
CS1W-PTR01
CS1W-PTR02
CS1W-PPS01
CS1W-NC113/133
0.16 ms
0.3 ms × *2
0.16 ms
0.3 ms × *2
0.16 ms
0.3 ms × *2
0.29 ms × *2 (+ 0.7 ms for each instruction (IOWR/ IORD) used to transfer data)
CS1W-NC213/233
0.32 ms × *2 (+ 0.7 ms for each instruction (IOWR/ IORD) used to transfer data)
CS1W-NC413/433
0.41 ms × *2 (+ 0.6 ms for each instruction (IOWR/ IORD) used to transfer data)
CS1W-CT021/041
CS1W-MC221(-V1)
CS1W-MC421(-V1)
CS1W-HIO01-V1
CS1W-HCP22-V1
CS1W-HCA22-V1
CS1W-GPI01
0.14 ms
0.2 ms × *2
0.32 ms
0.8 ms × *2
0.42 ms
0.85 ms × *2
0.2 ms × *2 (+ 0.3 ms if DM Area or LR
Area is used for data exchange with CPU
Unit)
High-speed Counter Unit
Motion Control Unit
Customizable Counter Unit
GPIB Interface Unit
Note Longer increases in the cycle time will occur according to the distance from
the CPU Rack to the Unit when these Units are mounted to Long-distance
Expansion Racks. Multiply the values given in the table by the factors on line
*2 in the graph on page 350 for the increases for data link words and send/
receive words.
351
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Increase in Cycle Time Caused by CPU Bus Units
Unit
CPU Bus Units
Name
Controller Link
Unit
Model
CS1W-CLK11
CS1W-CLK21-V1
Increase
0.1 ms
With Long-distance Expansion
Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2
CS1W-CLK12/52-V1
0.1 ms
With Long-distance Expansion
Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2
SYSMAC LINK
CS1W-SLK11/21
0.1 ms
With Long-distance Expansion
Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2
Serial Communications Unit
CS1W-SCU21
0.22 ms
With Long-distance Expansion
Rack:
0.25 ms × factor *2
DeviceNet Unit
CS1W-DRM21-V1
0.4 ms + 0.7 µs for --each allocated
word
With Long-distance Expansion
Rack:
(0.7 ms + (number
of allocated words
× 1 µs)) × factor *3
Ethernet Unit
CS1W-ETN01/11/21
CS1D-ETN21D
0.1 ms
With Long-distance Expansion
Rack:
0.25 ms × factor *2
Loop Control Unit
CS1W-LC001
0.1 ms
With Long-distance Expansion
Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2
Note
352
Remarks
There will be an increase of 0.1 ms
+ 0.7 µs x number of data link
words. (*3)
With Long-distance Expansion
Rack:
(1.5 ms + (number of send words ×
1 µs)) × factor *3
There will be an additional
increase of the event execution
times when message services are
used.
There will be an increase of up to
the following time when a protocol
macro is executed:
0.1 ms + 0.7 µs x maximum number of data words sent or received
(0 to 500 words)
With Long-distance Expansion
Rack:
(1.3 ms + (max. number of send/
receive words × 1 µs)) × factor *3
There will be an increase of the
event execution times when Host
Links or 1:N NT Links are used.
If socket services are executed
with software switches, there will
be an increase of 1.4 µs x the
number of bytes sent/received.
With Long-distance Expansion
Rack:
(number of send or receive bytes ×
2 µs) × factor *3
There will be an increase of the
event execution times when FINS
communications services, socket
services for CMND instructions, or
FTP services are performed.
---
1. Performance is given for the [email protected] and [email protected]
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
2. Longer increases in the cycle time will occur according to the distance from
the CPU Rack to the Unit when these Units are mounted to Long-distance
Expansion Racks. Multiply the values given in the table by the factors on
line *2 in the graph on page 350 for the increases and by the factors on line
*3 for the additional increases for data link words and send/receive words.
Increase in Cycle Time Caused by Inner Board
Name
Serial Communications
Board
9-4-4
Model
CS1WSCB21V1/41-V1
Increase
0.22 ms
Remarks
There will be an increase of up to the
following time when a protocol macro is
executed:
0.1 ms +maximum number of data
words sent or received (0 to 500 words)
x 0.7 µs
There will be an increase of the event
execution times when Host Links or 1:N
NT Links are used.
Cycle Time Calculation Example
The following example shows the method used to calculate the cycle time
when Basic I/O Units only are mounted to the PLC with a [email protected]
Conditions
Item
CPU Rack (8 slots)
Details
CS1W-ID291 96-point Input Units
CS1W-OD291 96-point Output Units
Expansion Rack (8 slots) x CS1W-ID291 96-point Input Units
1 Unit
CS1W-OD291 96-point Output Units
User program
5 Ksteps
4 Units
4 Units
4 Units
4 Units
LD instruction
2.5 Ksteps, OUT
instruction
2.5 Ksteps
Peripheral port connection Yes and no
Fixed cycle time process- No
ing
RS-232C port connection No
Peripheral servicing with
No
other devices (Special I/O
Units, CS-series CPU Bus
Units, Inner Boards, and
file access)
Calculation Example
Process name
Calculation
Processing time
With
Without
Programming
Programming
Device
Device
(1) Overseeing
(2) Program execution
(3) Cycle time calculation
--1.9 ms
0.04 µs × 2,500 + 0.04 µs 0.2 ms
× 2,500
(Fixed cycle time not set) 0 ms
1.9 ms
0.2 ms
(4) I/O refreshing
0.02 ms × 8 + 0.02 ms ×
8
0.32 ms
0.32 ms
0.1 ms
0 ms
(5) Peripheral servic- (Peripheral port coning
nected only)
0 ms
353
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Process name
Cycle time
9-4-5
Calculation
(1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
Processing time
With
Without
Programming
Programming
Device
Device
2.52 ms
2.42 ms
Online Editing Cycle Time Extension
When online editing is executed from a Programming Device (such as Programming Console or CX-Programmer) while the CPU Unit is operating in
MONITOR mode to change the program, the CPU Unit will momentarily suspend operation while the program is being changed. The period of time that
the cycle time is extended is determined by the following conditions.
• Number of steps changed
• Editing operations (insert/delete/overwrite)
• Types of instructions used
The time increase for online editing is affected very little by the size of the
largest program in the tasks.
If the maximum program size for each task is 64 Ksteps, the online editing
cycle time extension will be as follows (See note.):
CPU Unit
[email protected] CPU Units
for Duplex CPU Systems
Increase in cycle time for online editing
Maximum: 55 ms, Normal: 8 ms
[email protected] CPU Units
for Single CPU Systems
[email protected] CPU Units
for Single CPU Systems
Maximum: 55 ms, Normal: 8 ms
Maximum: 75 ms, Normal: 11 ms
When editing online, the cycle time will be extended by the time that operation
is stopped.
Note
1. When there is one task, online editing is processed all in the cycle time following the cycle in which online editing is executed (written). When there
are multiple tasks (cyclic tasks), online editing is separated, so that for n
tasks, processing is executed over n to n ×2 cycles max.
2. The above cycle time extensions assume that a lot of instructions requiring
time are being used in the program. The cycle time extension would be as
follows for most programs:
CS1D CPU Units: 12 ms max.
9-4-6
Affects of Duplex and Simplex Operation on the Cycle Time
(Duplex CPU Systems Only)
If operation switches from Duplex Mode to Simplex Mode, processing to synchronize the active and standby CPU Units will no longer be performed,
resulting in a shorter cycle time. The more instructions requiring synchronization (such as IORF, DLNK, IORD, IOWR, PID, RXD, FREAD, and FWRIT) are
used, the greater the difference between Duplex Mode and Simplex Mode
operation will be (with Duplex Mode having the longer cycle time). Confirm
that the system will operate correctly and safely even for the cycle time in both
Simplex and Duplex Modes.
354
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
9-4-7
Duplex Processing Cycle Time Extension (Duplex CPU Systems
Only)
The cycle time for a Duplex CPU System can be extended at various times as
described below. Enter actual system operation only after verifying that the
system operates correctly for the maximum possible cycle time.
Cycle Time Extension for
Duplex Initialization
The cycle time will be increased over the normal cycle time whenever duplex
operation is initialized, including when power is turned ON, when the initialization button is pressed, when operation is started, and when data is transferred. The maximum increases are listed in the following table. The maximum
cycle time would thus be the normal cycle time plus the increase in the cycle
time for duplex initialization shown in the following table.
CPU Unit model
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
Increase in cycle time
190 ms +A
520 ms +A
A is the time added when duplex Inner Boards are mounted. Refer to the
Inner Board Operation Manual for the value of A.
Example: The maximum cycle times would be as shown in the following table
if the normal cycle time was 20 ms.
CPU Unit model
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
Maximum cycle time
20 ms + 190 ms = 210 ms
20 ms + 520 ms = 540 ms
Set the monitoring time (10 to 40,000 ms, default: 1 s) +B* for the cycle time
high enough to allow for this increase. Also, confirm that the system will operate correctly and safely even for the maximum cycle time, including the
increase for duplex initialization.
*B is the time added to the cycle-time monitoring time only for duplex initialization when duplex Inner Boards are mounted. Refer to the Inner Board Operation Manual for the value of B.
Cycle Time Extension
when Switching to
Standby CPU Unit
The cycle time will be extended if an error occurs in the active CPU Unit that
causes operation to be switched to the standby CPU Unit.
Error switching
operation
Processing to
switch operation
There are two factors involved in the cycle time extension:
• Time required to detect the error causing operation to switch
• Time required to actually switch operation to the standby CPU Unit.
The following table list the time by which the cycle time will be extended
depending on the error that caused operation to be switched.
Error switching
operation
Cycle time
extension
Remarks
Switch with CPU
Unit switch setting
11.5 ms
Time required to detect switch setting: 11 ms
Operation switching time: 0.5 ms
CPU error (WDT
error)
125.5 ms
Time required to detect microcomputer WDT error in the CS1D: 125 ms
Operation switching time: 0.5 ms
355
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Error switching
operation
Cycle time
extension
Remarks
FALS error (when
executed in only
active CPU Unit)
0.5 ms
FALS errors are detected when the FALS instruction is executed, so no time is
required to detect the error. Only the operation switching time (0.5 ms) is required.
Maximum cycle
time exceeded
Program error
Maximum cycle
time + 0.5 ms
0.5 ms
Time required by the CS1D to detect the long cycle time (depends on the setting of
the maximum cycle time) plus the operation switching time (0.5 ms).
Program error detection is performed constantly, so no time is required to detect
the error. Only the operation switching time (0.5 ms) is required.
Inner Board error
(Process-control
CPU Units only)
Memory error
0.5 ms
Inner Board error detection is performed constantly, so no time is required to detect
the error. Only the operation switching time (0.5 ms) is required.
0.5 ms
Memory error detection is performed constantly, so no time is required to detect the
error. Only the operation switching time (0.5 ms) is required.
9-4-8
I/O Response Time
The I/O response time is the time it takes from when an Input Unit’s input
turns ON, the data is recognized by the CPU Unit, and the user program is
executed, up to the time for the result to be output to an Output Unit’s output
terminals.
The length of the I/O response time depends on the following conditions.
• Timing of Input Bit turning ON.
• Cycle time.
• Type of Rack to which Input and Output Units are mounted (CPU Rack or
Expansion Rack).
Basic I/O Units
Minimum I/O Response
Time
The I/O response time is shortest when data is retrieved immediately before
I/O refresh of the CPU Unit.
The minimum I/O response time is the total of the Input ON delay, the cycle
time, and the Output ON delay.
Note The Input and Output ON delay differs according to the Unit used.
I/O refresh
Input
Input ON delay
(Interrupt to CPU Unit)
Cycle time
Cycle time
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Output ON delay
Output
Minimum I/O response time
Maximum I/O Response
Time
The I/O response time is longest when data is retrieved immediately after I/O
refresh of the Input Unit.
The maximum I/O response time is the total of the Input ON delay, (the cycle
time × 2), and the Output ON delay.
356
Section 9-4
Computing the Cycle Time
I/O refresh
Input
Input ON delay
(Interrupt to CPU Unit)
Cycle time
Cycle time
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Output ON delay
Output
Maximum I/O response time
Calculation Example
Conditions:
Input ON delay
Output ON delay
Cycle time
1.5 ms
0.2 ms
20.0 ms
Minimum I/O response time = 1.5 ms + 20 ms + 0.2 ms = 21.7 ms
Maximum I/O response time = 1.5 ms + (20 ms ×2) + 0.2 ms = 41.7 ms
9-4-9
Interrupt Response Times (Single CPU Systems Only)
I/O Interrupt Tasks
The interrupt response time for I/O interrupt tasks is the time taken from when
an input from a CS1W-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit has turned ON (or OFF) until
the I/O interrupt task has actually been executed.
The length of the interrupt response time for I/O interrupt tasks depends on
the following conditions.
Note
Item
Hardware response
Time
Upward differentiation: 0.1 ms,
Downward differentiation: 0.5 ms
Software interrupt response
124 µs
1. The software interrupt response time will be 1 ms if there is a C200H Special I/O Unit in the PLC.
2. I/O interrupt tasks can be executed (while an instruction is being executed,
or by stopping the execution of an instruction) during execution of the user
program, I/O refresh, peripheral servicing, or overseeing. The interrupt response time is not affected by the Input of the Interrupt Input Unit turning
ON during any of the above processing operations.
Some I/O interrupts, however, are not executed during interrupt tasks even
if the I/O interrupt conditions are satisfied. Instead, the I/O interrupts are
executed in order of priority after the other interrupt task has completed execution and the software interrupt response time (1 ms max.) has elapsed.
The interrupt response time of I/O interrupt tasks is the sum of the Input ON
delay (0.2 ms max.) and the software interrupt response time (1 ms max.).
357
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Input
Input ON delay
(Interrupt Input Unit retrieval)
Software interrupt response time
Interrupt task execution
I/O interrupt task interrupt response time
Scheduled Interrupt Tasks
The interrupt response time of scheduled interrupt tasks is the time taken
from after the scheduled time specified by the MSKS(690) instruction has
elapsed until the interrupt task has actually been executed.
The length of the interrupt response time for scheduled interrupt tasks is 1 ms
max.
Note Scheduled interrupt tasks can be executed (while an instruction is being executed, or by stopping the execution of an instruction) during execution of the
user program, I/O refresh, peripheral servicing, or overseeing. The interrupt
response time is not affected by the scheduled time elapsing during any of the
above processing operations.
Some scheduled interrupts, however, are not executed during other interrupt
tasks even if the scheduled interrupt conditions are satisfied. Instead, the
scheduled interrupts are executed in order of priority after the other interrupt
task has completed execution and the software interrupt response time (1 ms
max.) has elapsed.
Scheduled interrupt time
Internal timer
Software interrupt response time
Scheduled interrupt task
External Interrupt Tasks
The interrupt response time for external interrupt tasks differs depending on
the Unit or Board (Special I/O Unit, CS-series CPU Bus Unit, or Inner Board)
that is requesting the external interrupt task of the CPU Unit and the type of
service requested by the interrupt. For details, refer to the appropriate operation manual for the Unit or Board being used.
Power OFF Interrupt Tasks
Power OFF interrupt tasks are executed within 0.1 ms of the power being confirmed as OFF.
9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
The following table lists the execution times for all instructions that are available for CS1D CPU Units.
The total execution time of instructions within one whole user program (i.e.,
within all the tasks that are executed in a cycle) is the process time for program execution when calculating the cycle time (See note.).
The conditions (e.g., operands) under which an instruction is executed affect
the execution time, as does the model of the CPU Unit. The execution time
can also vary when the execution condition is OFF.
358
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
The following table also lists the length of each instruction in the Length
(steps) column. The number of steps required in the user program area for
each of the instructions varies from 1 to 7 steps, depending upon the instruction and the operands used with it. The number of steps in a program is not
the same as the number of instructions.
Note
1. Program capacity for CS-series PLCs is measured in steps, whereas program capacity for previous OMRON PLCs, such as the C-series and CVseries PLCs, was measured in words. Basically speaking, 1 step is equivalent to 1 word. The amount of memory required for each instruction, however, is different for some of the CS-series instructions, and inaccuracies
will occur if the capacity of a user program for another PLC is converted for
a CS-series PLC based on the assumption that 1 word is 1 step. Refer to
the information at the end of 9-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number
of Steps for guidelines on converting program capacities from previous
OMRON PLCs.
Most instructions are supported in differentiated form (indicated with ↑, ↓,
@, and %). Specifying differentiation will increase the execution times by
the following amounts.
Symbol
↑ or ↓
@ or %
CS1D CPU Unit
[email protected]/[email protected] (µs)
[email protected] (µs)
+0.24
+0.32
+0.24
+0.32
2. When the execution condition for an instruction is OFF, the execution time
is given in the following table.
CS1D CPU Unit
[email protected]/[email protected] (µs)
[email protected] (µs)
Approx. 0.1
9-5-1
Approx. 0.2
Sequence Input Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
LOAD
LD
!LD
-----
1
2
LOAD NOT
LD NOT
!LD NOT
-----
1
2
AND
AND
!AND
-----
AND NOT
AND NOT
!AND NOT
OR
OR NOT
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
0.02
(See note
2.)
0.02
(See note
2.)
0.02
+21.14
0.04
+21.16
-----
0.02
+21.14
0.04
+21.16
-----
1
2
0.02
(See note
2.)
0.02
+21.14
0.04
+21.16
-----
-----
1
2
0.02
+21.14
0.04
+21.16
-----
OR
!OR
-----
1
2
0.02
(See note
2.)
0.02
(See note
2.)
0.02
+21.14
0.04
+21.16
-----
OR NOT
!OR NOT
-----
1
2
0.02
(See note
2.)
0.02
+21.14
0.04
+21.16
-----
359
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
AND LOAD
OR LOAD
NOT
CONDITION
ON
AND LD
OR LD
NOT
UP
----520
521
1
1
1
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
0.02
0.02
0.04
0.02
0.02
0.04
0.02
0.02
0.04
0.3
0.3
0.42
CONDITION
OFF
LOAD BIT
TEST
DOWN
522
4
0.3
0.3
0.42
---
LD TST
350
4
0.14
0.14
0.24
---
LOAD BIT
TEST NOT
LDTSTN
351
4
0.14
0.14
0.24
---
351
4
0.14
0.14
0.24
---
350
351
4
4
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.24
0.24
-----
AND BIT TEST AND TSTN
NOT
OR BIT TEST
OR TST
OR BIT TEST
OR TSTN
NOT
Code
Note
Length
(steps)
Conditions
---------
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Not supported by Duplex CPU Systems.
9-5-2
Sequence Output Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
OUTPUT
OUT
!OUT
-----
1
2
OUTPUT NOT
OUT NOT
!OUT NOT
-----
1
2
KEEP
DIFFERENTIATE UP
KEEP
DIFU
011
013
DIFFERENTIATE DOWN
SET
DIFD
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
0.02
(See note
2.)
0.02
(See note
2.)
0.02
+21.37
0.04
+21.37
-----
0.02
+21.37
0.04
+21.37
-----
1
2
0.06
0.24
0.06
0.24
0.08
0.40
-----
014
2
0.24
0.24
0.40
---
SET
!SET
-----
1
2
0.02
(See note
2.)
0.02
+21.37
0.06
+21.37
-----
RESET
RSET
!RSET
-----
1
2
0.02
(See note
2.)
0.02
+21.37
0.06
+21.37
Word specified
---
MULTIPLE BIT
SET
SETA
530
4
MULTIPLE BIT
RESET
RSTA
531
4
5.8
25.7
5.7
25.8
5.8
25.7
5.8
25.8
6.1
27.2
6.1
27.2
With 1-bit set
With 1,000-bit set
With 1-bit reset
With 1,000-bit
reset
360
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
SINGLE BIT
SET
SETB
!SETB
532
532
2
3
SINGLE BIT
RESET
RSTB
!RSTB
534
534
2
3
SINGLE BIT
OUTPUT
OUTB
!OUTB
534
534
2
3
Note
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
0.24
0.24
0.34
(See note
+21.44
+21.54
2.)
0.24
(See note
2.)
0.22
(See note
2.)
Conditions
-----
0.24
+21.44
0.34
+21.54
-----
0.22
+21.42
0.32
+21.52
-----
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Not supported by Duplex CPU Systems.
9-5-3
Sequence Control Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
END
NO OPERATION
END
NOP
001
000
1
1
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
5.5
5.5
6.0
0.02
0.02
0.04
INTERLOCK
INTERLOCK
CLEAR
IL
ILC
002
003
1
1
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.06
-----
517
3
(See note
2.)
6.1
7.5
6.5
7.9
8.9
9.7
During interlock
Not during interlock
and interlock not
set
Not during interlock
and interlock set
6.1
7.5
6.5
7.9
During interlock
Not during interlock
and interlock not
set
8.9
9.7
Not during interlock
and interlock set
5.0
5.6
Interlock not
cleared
Interlock cleared
----When JMP condition is satisfied
When JMP condition is satisfied
MULTI-INTER- MILH
LOCK DIFFERENTIATION
HOLD
MULTI-INTER- MILR
LOCK DIFFERENTIATION
RELEASE
Code
518
Length
(steps)
3
(See note
2.)
Conditions
-----
MULTI-INTERLOCK CLEAR
MILC
519
2
(See note
2.)
JUMP
JUMP END
CONDITIONAL JUMP
CONDITIONAL JUMP
NOT
JMP
JME
CJP
004
005
510
2
2
2
0.38
--0.38
5.7
0.38
--0.38
6.2
0.48
--0.48
CJPN
511
2
0.38
0.38
0.48
MULTIPLE
JUMP
MULTIPLE
JUMP END
JMP0
515
1
0.06
0.06
0.06
---
JME0
516
1
0.06
0.06
0.06
---
361
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
FOR LOOP
FOR
512
2
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
0.12
0.12
0.21
BREAK LOOP
NEXT LOOP
BREAK
NEXT
514
513
1
1
0.12
0.17
0.12
0.17
0.12
0.17
0.12
0.12
0.12
Note
Length
(steps)
Conditions
Designating a constant
--When loop is continued
When loop is
ended
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Not supported by Duplex CPU Systems.
9-5-4
Timer and Counter Instructions
Instruction
TIMER
COUNTER
HIGH-SPEED
TIMER
ONE-MS
TIMER
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER
LONG TIMER
MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER
REVERSIBLE
COUNTER
362
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
TIM
TIMX
CNT
CNTX
TIMH
TIMHX
--550
--546
015
551
3
3
3
3
3
3
0.56
0.56
0.56
0.56
0.88
0.88
0.56
0.56
0.56
0.56
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
1.14
1.14
-------------
TMHH
TMHHX
TTIM
540
552
087
3
3
3
TTIMX
555
3
TIML
542
4
TIMLX
553
4
MTIM
543
4
MTIMX
554
4
CNTR
CNTRX
012
548
3
3
0.86
0.86
16.1
10.9
8.5
16.1
10.9
8.5
7.6
6.2
7.6
6.2
20.9
5.6
20.9
5.6
16.9
16.9
0.86
0.86
16.1
10.9
8.5
16.1
10.9
8.5
7.6
6.2
7.6
6.2
20.9
5.6
20.9
5.6
16.9
16.9
1.12
1.12
17.0
11.4
8.7
17.0
11.4
8.7
10.0
6.5
10.0
6.5
23.3
5.8
23.3
5.8
19.0
19.0
------When resetting
When interlocking
--When resetting
When interlocking
--When interlocking
--When interlocking
--When resetting
--When resetting
-----
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
RESET TIMER/ CNR
COUNTER
Code
Length
(steps)
545
CNRX
3
547
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
9.9
9.9
10.6
4.16 ms
4.16 ms
4.16 ms
9.9
9.9
10.6
4.16 ms
4.16 ms
4.16 ms
Conditions
When resetting 1
word
When resetting
1,000 words
When resetting 1
word
When resetting
1,000 words
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-5
Comparison Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Input Compari- LD, AND, OR+=
son Instructions LD, AND, OR+<>
(unsigned)
LD, AND, OR+<
LD, AND, OR+<=
LD, AND, OR+>
LD, AND, OR+>=
Input Compari- LD, AND, OR+=+L
son Instructions LD, AND, OR+<>+L
(double,
LD, AND, OR+<+L
unsigned)
LD, AND, OR+<=+L
LD, AND, OR+>+L
LD, AND, OR+>=+L
Input Compari- LD, AND, OR+=+S
son Instructions LD, AND, OR+<>+S
(signed)
LD, AND, OR+<+S
LD, AND, OR+<=S
LD, AND, OR+>+S
LD, AND, OR+>=+S
Input Compari- LD, AND, OR+=+SL
son Instructions LD, AND,
(double, signed) OR+<>+SL
300
305
310
315
320
325
301
306
311
316
321
326
302
307
312
317
322
327
303
308
LD, AND, OR+<+SL
LD, AND,
OR+<=+SL
LD, AND, OR+>+SL
LD, AND,
OR+>=+SL
313
318
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
4
0.10
0.10
0.16
---
4
0.10
0.10
0.16
---
4
0.10
0.10
0.16
---
4
0.10
0.10
0.16
---
323
328
363
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Time Compari- LD, AND, OR+=DT
son Instructions LD, AND, OR+<>DT
LD, AND, OR+<DT
LD, AND, OR+<=DT
LD, AND, OR+>DT
LD, AND, OR+>=DT
COMPARE
CMP
!CMP
341
342
343
344
345
346
020
020
4
(See note
2.)
3
7
0.04
(See note
2.)
DOUBLE COM- CMPL
PARE
SIGNED
CPS
BINARY COM- !CPS
PARE
060
3
114
114
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY COMPARE
CPSL
TABLE COMPARE
Conditions
25.1
25.2
25.2
25.2
25.1
25.2
0.04
+42.1
36.4
Execution times
are the same for
both ON execution and OFF
execution.
0.04
+42.1
-----
0.08
0.08
0.08
---
3
7
0.08
(See note
2.)
0.08
+35.9
0.08
+35.9
-----
115
3
0.08
0.08
0.08
---
TCMP
085
4
14.0
14.0
15.2
---
MULTIPLE
COMPARE
UNSIGNED
BLOCK COMPARE
MCMP
019
4
20.5
20.5
22.8
---
BCMP
068
4
21.5
21.5
23.7
---
EXPANDED
BLOCK COMPARE
BCMP2
502
4
(See note
2.)
8.4
9.3
Number of data
words: 1
313.0
345.3
AREA RANGE
COMPARE
ZCP
DOUBLE AREA ZCPL
RANGE COMPARE
Note
088
3
5.3
5.3
5.4
Number of data
words: 255
---
116
3
5.5
5.5
6.7
---
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Not supported by Duplex CPU Systems.
9-5-6
Data Movement Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
MOVE
MOV
!MOV
021
021
3
7
DOUBLE
MOVE
MOVL
498
MOVE NOT
MVN
022
364
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
0.18
+21.38
0.20
+21.40
-----
3
0.18
(See note
2.)
0.32
0.32
0.34
---
3
0.18
0.18
0.20
---
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
CPU6[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
0.32
0.32
0.34
Conditions
DOUBLE
MOVE NOT
MVNL
499
3
MOVE BIT
MOVE DIGIT
MULTIPLE BIT
TRANSFER
MOVB
MOVD
XFRB
082
083
062
4
4
4
0.24
0.24
10.1
186.4
0.24
0.24
10.1
186.4
0.34
0.34
10.8
189.8
BLOCK
TRANSFER
XFER
070
4
0.36
300.1
0.36
300.1
0.44
380.1
BLOCK SET
BSET
071
4
0.26
200.1
0.26
200.1
0.28
220.1
Setting 1 word
Setting 1,000
words
DATA
XCHG
EXCHANGE
DOUBLE DATA XCGL
EXCHANGE
073
3
0.40
0.40
0.56
---
562
3
0.76
0.76
1.04
---
SINGLE
WORD DISTRIBUTE
DATA COLLECT
DIST
080
4
5.1
5.1
5.4
---
COLL
081
4
5.1
5.1
5.3
---
MOVE TO
REGISTER
MOVR
560
3
0.08
0.08
0.08
---
561
3
0.42
0.42
0.50
---
MOVE TIMER/ MOVRW
COUNTER PV
TO REGISTER
Note
------Transferring 1 bit
Transferring 255
bits
Transferring 1 word
Transferring 1,000
words
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Not supported by Duplex CPU Systems.
9-5-7
Data Shift Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
SHIFT
REGISTER
SFT
010
3
7.4
433.2
7.4
433.2
10.4
488.0
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000
words
REVERSIBLE
SHIFT
REGISTER
SFTR
084
4
6.9
615.3
6.9
615.3
7.2
680.2
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000
words
ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT
REGISTER
ASFT
017
4
6.2
1.22 ms
6.2
1.22 ms
6.4
1.22 ms
WORD SHIFT
WSFT
016
4
4.5
171.5
4.5
171.5
4.7
171.7
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000
words
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000
words
ARITHMETIC
SHIFT LEFT
ASL
025
2
0.22
0.22
0.32
---
365
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
DOUBLE
SHIFT LEFT
ASLL
570
2
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
0.40
0.40
0.56
Conditions
ARITHMETIC
SHIFT RIGHT
DOUBLE
SHIFT RIGHT
ASR
026
2
0.22
0.22
0.32
---
ASRL
571
2
0.40
0.40
0.56
---
ROTATE LEFT
DOUBLE
ROTATE LEFT
ROL
ROLL
027
572
2
2
0.22
0.40
0.22
0.40
0.32
0.56
-----
ROTATE LEFT
WITHOUT
CARRY
RLNC
574
2
0.22
0.22
0.32
---
DOUBLE
ROTATE LEFT
WITHOUT
CARRY
RLNL
576
2
0.40
0.40
0.56
---
ROTATE
RIGHT
ROR
028
2
0.22
0.22
0.32
---
DOUBLE
ROTATE
RIGHT
RORL
573
2
0.40
0.40
0.56
---
ROTATE
RIGHT WITHOUT CARRY
RRNC
575
2
0.22
0.22
0.32
---
DOUBLE
ROTATE
RIGHT WITHOUT CARRY
RRNL
577
2
0.40
0.40
0.56
---
ONE DIGIT
SHIFT LEFT
SLD
074
3
5.9
561.1
5.9
561.1
6.1
626.3
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000
words
ONE DIGIT
SHIFT RIGHT
SRD
075
3
6.9
760.5
6.9
760.5
7.1
895.5
SHIFT N-BIT
DATA LEFT
NSFL
578
4
7.5
40.3
7.5
40.3
8.3
45.4
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000
words
Shifting 1 bit
Shifting 1,000 bits
SHIFT N-BIT
DATA RIGHT
NSFR
579
4
SHIFT N-BITS
LEFT
DOUBLE
SHIFT N-BITS
LEFT
NASL
580
3
7.5
50.5
0.22
7.5
50.5
0.22
8.3
55.3
0.32
Shifting 1 bit
Shifting 1,000 bits
---
NSLL
582
3
0.40
0.40
0.56
---
SHIFT N-BITS
RIGHT
DOUBLE
SHIFT N-BITS
RIGHT
NASR
581
3
0.22
0.22
0.32
---
NSRL
583
3
0.40
0.40
0.56
---
---
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
366
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
9-5-8
Increment/Decrement Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
INCREMENT
BINARY
++
590
2
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
0.22
0.22
0.32
OUBLE
INCREMENT
BINARY
DECREMENT
BINARY
++L
591
2
0.40
0.40
0.56
---
−−
592
2
0.22
0.22
0.32
---
DOUBLE DEC- −−L
REMENT
BINARY
INCREMENT
++B
BCD
593
2
0.40
0.40
0.56
---
594
2
6.4
6.4
4.5
---
DOUBLE
INCREMENT
BCD
DECREMENT
BCD
++BL
595
2
5.6
5.6
4.9
---
−−B
596
2
6.3
6.3
4.6
---
597
2
5.3
5.3
4.7
---
DOUBLE DEC- −−BL
REMENT BCD
Code
Length
(steps)
Conditions
---
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-9
Symbol Math Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
SIGNED
BINARY ADD
WITHOUT
CARRY
+
400
4
0.18
0.18
0.20
---
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY ADD
WITHOUT
CARRY
+L
401
4
0.32
0.32
0.34
---
SIGNED
BINARY ADD
WITH CARRY
+C
402
4
0.18
0.18
0.20
---
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY ADD
WITH CARRY
+CL
403
4
0.32
0.32
0.34
---
BCD ADD
WITHOUT
CARRY
+B
404
4
8.2
8.2
8.4
---
DOUBLE BCD +BL
ADD WITHOUT
CARRY
405
4
13.3
13.3
14.5
---
BCD ADD
WITH CARRY
406
4
8.9
8.9
9.1
---
+BC
367
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
DOUBLE BCD
ADD WITH
CARRY
+BCL
407
4
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
13.8
13.8
15.0
SIGNED
BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
−
410
4
0.18
0.18
0.20
---
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
−L
411
4
0.32
0.32
0.34
---
SIGNED
BINARY SUBTRACT WITH
CARRY
−C
412
4
0.18
0.18
0.20
---
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY SUBTRACT WITH
CARRY
−CL
413
4
0.32
0.32
0.34
---
BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
−B
414
4
8.0
8.0
8.2
---
DOUBLE BCD
SUBTRACT
WITHOUT
CARRY
−BL
415
4
12.8
12.8
14.0
---
BCD SUBTRACT WITH
CARRY
−BC
416
4
8.5
8.5
8.6
---
DOUBLE BCD
SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
−BCL
417
4
13.4
13.4
14.7
---
SIGNED
BINARY MULTIPLY
*
420
4
0.38
0.38
0.40
---
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY MULTIPLY
*L
421
4
7.23
7.23
8.45
---
UNSIGNED
BINARY MULTIPLY
*U
422
4
0.38
0.38
0.40
---
DOUBLE
UNSIGNED
BINARY MULTIPLY
*UL
423
4
7.1
7.1
8.3
---
BCD MULTIPLY *B
DOUBLE BCD *BL
MULTIPLY
424
425
4
4
9.0
23.0
9.0
23.0
9.2
24.2
-----
SIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
/
430
4
0.40
0.40
0.42
---
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
/L
431
4
7.2
7.2
8.4
---
368
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Conditions
---
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
UNSIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
/U
432
4
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
0.40
0.40
0.42
Conditions
DOUBLE
UNSIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
/UL
433
4
6.9
6.9
8.1
---
BCD DIVIDE
DOUBLE BCD
DIVIDE
/B
/BL
434
435
4
4
8.6
17.7
8.6
17.7
8.8
18.9
---
---
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-10 Conversion Instructions
Instruction
023
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
0.22
0.22
0.24
DOUBLE BCD- BINL
TO-DOUBLE
BINARY
BINARY-TOBCD
BCD
058
3
6.5
6.5
6.8
---
024
3
0.24
0.24
0.26
---
DOUBLE
BINARY-TODOUBLE BCD
2’S COMPLEMENT
BCDL
059
3
6.7
6.7
7.0
---
NEG
160
3
0.18
0.18
0.20
---
DOUBLE 2’S
NEGL
COMPLEMENT
16-BIT TO 32- SIGN
BIT SIGNED
BINARY
161
3
0.32
0.32
0.34
---
600
3
0.32
0.32
0.34
---
DATA
DECODER
076
4
0.32
0.32
0.42
Decoding 1 digit (4
to 16)
0.98
0.98
1.20
3.30
3.30
4.00
Decoding 4 digits
(4 to 16)
Decoding 1 digit 8
to 256
6.50
6.50
7.90
Decoding 2 digits
(8 to 256)
7.5
7.5
7.9
49.6
49.6
50.2
Encoding 1 digit
(16 to 4)
Encoding 4 digits
(16 to 4)
18.2
18.2
18.6
Encoding 1 digit
(256 to 8)
55.1
55.1
57.4
Encoding 2 digits
(256 to 8)
BCD-TOBINARY
DATA
ENCODER
Mnemonic
BIN
MLPX
DMPX
Code
077
Length
(steps)
4
Conditions
---
369
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
ASCII CONVERT
Mnemonic
ASC
Code
086
Length
(steps)
4
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
6.8
6.8
7.1
Converting 1 digit
into ASCII
11.2
11.2
11.7
ASCII TO HEX
COLUMN TO
LINE
HEX
LINE
162
063
4
4
7.1
19.0
7.1
19.0
7.4
23.1
Converting 4 digits
into ASCII
Converting 1 digit
---
LINE TO COLUMN
COLM
064
4
23.2
23.2
27.5
---
SIGNED BCDTO-BINARY
BINS
470
4
8.0
8.0
8.3
8.0
8.0
8.3
Data format setting No. 0
Data format setting No. 1
8.3
8.3
8.6
Data format setting No. 2
8.5
8.5
8.8
9.2
9.2
9.6
Data format setting No. 3
Data format setting No. 0
9.2
9.2
9.6
Data format setting No. 1
9.5
9.5
9.9
9.6
9.6
10.0
Data format setting No. 2
Data format setting No. 3
6.6
6.6
6.9
Data format setting No. 0
6.7
6.7
7.0
Data format setting No. 1
6.8
6.8
7.1
7.2
7.2
7.5
Data format setting No. 2
Data format setting No. 3
8.1
8.1
8.4
Data format setting No. 0
8.2
8.2
8.6
8.3
8.3
8.7
Data format setting No. 1
Data format setting No. 2
8.8
8.8
9.2
Data format setting No. 3
(See note
2.)
46.9
49.6
57.7
61.8
64.5
72.8
52.3
72.1
75.2
87.7
96.7
99.6
112.4
87.2
8-bit binary
8-bit BCD
8-bit angle
15-bit binary
15-bit BCD
15-bit angle
360° binary
55.1
64.8
90.4
98.5
360° BCD
360° angle
DOUBLE
SIGNED BCDTO-BINARY
SIGNED
BINARY-TOBCD
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY-TOBCD
GRAY CODE
CONVERSION
370
BISL
BCDS
BDSL
GRY
472
471
473
474
4
4
4
4
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Note
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Not supported by Duplex CPU Systems.
9-5-11 Logic Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
LOGICAL AND ANDW
DOUBLE LOG- ANDL
ICAL AND
034
610
4
4
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
0.18
0.18
0.20
0.32
0.32
0.34
Conditions
LOGICAL OR
ORW
DOUBLE LOG- ORWL
ICAL OR
EXCLUSIVE
XORW
OR
035
611
4
4
0.22
0.32
0.22
0.32
0.32
0.34
-----
036
4
0.22
0.22
0.32
---
DOUBLE
EXCLUSIVE
OR
XORL
612
4
0.32
0.32
0.34
---
EXCLUSIVE
NOR
XNRW
037
4
0.22
0.22
0.32
---
DOUBLE
XNRL
EXCLUSIVE
NOR
COMPLEMENT COM
DOUBLE COM- COML
PLEMENT
613
4
0.32
0.32
0.34
---
029
614
2
2
0.22
0.40
0.22
0.40
0.32
0.56
-----
-----
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-12 Special Math Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
BINARY ROOT ROTB
BCD SQUARE ROOT
ROOT
620
072
3
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
49.6
49.6
50.0
13.7
13.7
13.9
ARITHMETIC
PROCESS
069
4
6.7
6.7
6.9
17.2
17.2
18.4
Designating SIN
and COS
Designating linesegment approximation
APR
FLOATING
FDIV
POINT DIVIDE
BIT COUNTER BCNT
Code
Length
(steps)
Conditions
-----
079
4
116.6
116.6
176.6
---
067
4
0.3
0.3
0.38
Counting 1 word
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
371
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
9-5-13 Floating-point Math Instructions
Instruction
FLOATING TO
16-BIT
FIX
450
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
10.6
10.6
10.8
FLOATING TO
32-BIT
FIXL
451
3
10.8
10.8
11.0
---
16-BIT TO
FLOATING
32-BIT TO
FLOATING
FLT
452
3
8.3
8.3
8.5
---
FLTL
453
3
8.3
8.3
8.5
---
FLOATINGPOINT ADD
+F
454
4
8.0
8.0
9.2
---
FLOATINGPOINT SUBTRACT
FLOATINGPOINT DIVIDE
−F
455
4
8.0
8.0
9.2
---
/F
457
4
8.7
8.7
9.9
---
FLOATINGPOINT MULTIPLY
DEGREES TO
RADIANS
*F
456
4
8.0
8.0
9.2
---
RAD
458
3
10.1
10.1
10.2
---
RADIANS TO
DEGREES
SINE
DEG
459
3
9.9
9.9
10.1
---
SIN
460
3
42.0
42.0
42.2
---
COSINE
TANGENT
ARC SINE
ARC COSINE
ARC TANGENT
SQUARE
ROOT
EXPONENT
LOGARITHM
COS
TAN
ASIN
ACOS
ATAN
SQRT
461
462
463
464
465
466
3
3
3
3
3
3
31.5
16.3
17.6
20.4
16.1
19.0
31.5
16.3
17.6
20.4
16.1
19.0
31.8
16.6
17.9
20.7
16.4
19.3
-------------
EXP
LOG
467
468
3
3
65.9
12.8
65.9
12.8
66.2
13.1
-----
EXPONENTIAL POWER
PWR
840
4
125.4
125.4
126.0
---
Floating Symbol LD, AND, OR+=F
Comparison
LD, AND, OR+<>F
LD, AND, OR+<F
LD, AND, OR+<=F
329
330
331
332
3
6.6
6.6
8.3
---
LD, AND, OR+>F
LD, AND, OR+>=F
FSTR
333
334
448
4
48.5
48.5
48.9
---
FVAL
449
3
21.1
21.1
21.3
---
FLOATINGPOINT TO
ASCII
ASCII TO
FLOATINGPOINT
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Conditions
---
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
372
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
9-5-14 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
DOUBLE SYM- LD, AND, OR+=D
BOL COMPARI- LD, AND, OR+<>D
SON
LD, AND, OR+<D
LD, AND, OR+<=D
LD, AND, OR+>D
LD, AND, OR+>=D
DOUBLE
FIXD
FLOATING TO
16-BIT BINARY
335
336
337
338
339
340
841
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
8.5
8.5
10.3
Conditions
3
11.7
11.7
12.1
---
DOUBLE
FIXLD
FLOATING TO
32-BIT BINARY
16-BIT BINARY DBL
TO DOUBLE
FLOATING
32-BIT BINARY DBLL
TO DOUBLE
FLOATING
842
3
11.6
11.6
12.1
---
843
3
9.9
9.9
10.0
---
844
3
9.8
9.8
10.0
---
DOUBLE
FLOATINGPOINT ADD
DOUBLE
FLOATINGPOINT SUBTRACT
+D
845
4
11.2
11.2
11.9
---
−D
846
4
11.2
11.2
11.9
---
DOUBLE
FLOATINGPOINT MULTIPLY
*D
847
4
12.0
12.0
12.7
---
DOUBLE
FLOATINGPOINT DIVIDE
/D
848
4
23.5
23.5
24.2
---
DOUBLE
RADD
DEGREES TO
RADIANS
DOUBLE RADI- DEGD
ANS TO
DEGREES
849
3
27.4
27.4
27.8
---
850
3
11.2
11.2
11.9
---
DOUBLE SINE
DOUBLE
COSINE
SIND
COSD
851
852
3
3
45.4
43.0
45.4
43.0
45.8
43.4
-----
DOUBLE TANGENT
TAND
853
3
20.1
20.1
20.5
---
DOUBLE ARC
SINE
DOUBLE ARC
COSINE
ASIND
854
3
21.5
21.5
21.9
---
ACOSD
855
3
24.7
24.7
25.1
---
DOUBLE ARC
TANGENT
ATAND
856
3
19.3
19.3
19.7
---
DOUBLE
SQUARE
ROOT
SQRTD
857
3
47.4
47.4
47.9
---
---
373
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
DOUBLE
EXPONENT
EXPD
858
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
121.0
121.0
121.4
Conditions
DOUBLE LOGARITHM
DOUBLE
EXPONENTIAL POWER
LOGD
859
3
16.0
16.0
16.4
---
PWRD
860
4
223.9
223.9
224.2
---
---
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-15 Table Data Processing Instructions
Instruction
SET STACK
Mnemonic
SSET
Code
630
Length
(steps)
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
8.0
8.0
8.3
231.6
231.6
251.8
Conditions
Designating 5
words in stack area
Designating 1,000
words in stack area
PUSH ONTO
STACK
PUSH
632
3
6.5
6.5
8.6
---
FIRST IN
FIRST OUT
FIFO
633
3
6.9
6.9
8.9
352.6
352.6
434.3
Designating 5
words in stack area
Designating 1,000
words in stack area
LAST IN FIRST LIFO
OUT
634
3
7.0
7.0
9.0
---
DIMENSION
RECORD
TABLE
SET RECORD
LOCATION
DIM
631
5
15.2
15.2
21.6
---
SETR
635
4
5.4
5.4
5.9
---
GET RECORD
NUMBER
GETR
636
4
7.8
7.8
8.4
---
DATA SEARCH SRCH
181
4
15.5
15.5
19.5
2.42 ms
2.42 ms
3.34 ms
Searching for 1
word
Searching for
1,000 words
SWAP BYTES
SWAP
637
3
12.2
1.94 ms
12.2
1.94 ms
13.6
2.82 ms
Swapping 1 word
Swapping 1,000
words
FIND MAXIMUM
MAX
182
4
19.2
19.2
24.9
2.39 ms
2.39 ms
3.36 ms
Searching for 1
word
Searching for
1,000 words
19.2
19.2
25.3
Searching for 1
word
2.39 ms
2.39 ms
3.33 ms
Searching for
1,000 words
FIND MINIMUM
374
MIN
183
4
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
SUM
SUM
184
4
FRAME
CHECKSUM
FCS
180
4
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
28.2
28.2
38.5
1.42 ms
1.42 ms
1.95 ms
20.0
20.0
28.3
16.5 ms
16.5 ms
2.48 ms
Conditions
Adding 1 word
Adding 1,000
words
For 1-word table
length
For 1,000-word
table length
STACK SIZE
READ
SNUM
638
3
6.0
6.0
6.3
---
STACK DATA
READ
STACK DATA
OVERWRITE
SREAD
639
4
8.0
8.0
8.4
---
SWRIT
640
4
7.2
7.2
7.6
---
STACK DATA
INSERT
SINS
641
4
7.8
7.8
9.9
For 1,000-word
table
354.0
354.0
434.8
---
STACK DATA
DELETE
SDEL
642
4
8.6
354.0
8.6
354.0
10.6
436.0
--For 1,000-word
table
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-16 Data Control Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
PID CONTROL PID
Code
190
Length
(steps)
4
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
436.2 (sim- 436.2
678.2
plex)
676.2
(duplex)
Conditions
Initial execution
332.3 (simplex)
572.3
(duplex)
332.3
474.9
Sampling
97.3 (simplex)
337.3
(duplex)
97.3
141.3
Not sampling
LIMIT CONTROL
DEAD BAND
CONTROL
LMT
680
4
16.1
16.1
22.1
---
BAND
681
4
17.0
17.0
22.5
---
DEAD ZONE
CONTROL
ZONE
682
4
15.4
15.4
20.5
---
375
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
TIME-PROPORTIONAL
OUTPUT
SCALING
SCALING 2
SCALING 3
AVERAGE
Mnemonic
TPO
Code
685
SCL
SCL2
SCL3
AVG
4
194
486
487
195
PID CONTROL PIDAT
WITH AUTOTUNING
4
4
4
4
191
Note
Length
(steps)
4
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
(See note
10.6
14.8
2.)
Conditions
OFF execution
time
54.5
82.0
ON execution time
with duty designation or displayed
output limit
61.0
91.9
37.1
28.5
33.4
36.3
37.1
28.5
33.4
36.3
53.0
40.2
47.0
52.6
ON execution time
with manipulated
variable designation and output limit
enabled
------Average of an
operation
291.0
291.0
419.9
Average of 64
operations
446.3
339.4
100.7
189.2
446.3
339.4
100.7
189.2
712.5
533.9
147.1
281.6
535.2
535.2
709.8
Initial execution
Sampling
Not sampling
Initial execution of
autotuning
Autotuning when
sampling
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Not supported by Duplex CPU Systems.
9-5-17 Subroutine Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
SUBROUTINE
CALL
SUBROUTINE
ENTRY
SBS
091
2
1.26
1.26
1.96
---
SBN
092
2
---
---
---
---
SUBROUTINE
RETURN
RET
093
1
0.86
0.86
1.60
---
MACRO
GLOBAL SUBROUTINE
CALL
GLOBAL SUBROUTINE
ENTRY
GLOBAL SUBROUTINE
RETURN
MCRO
GSBN
099
751
4
2
23.3
---
23.3
---
23.3
---
-----
GRET
752
1
1.26
1.26
1.96
---
GSBS
750
2
0.86
0.86
1.60
---
376
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-18 Interrupt Control Instructions
Instruction
SET INTERRUPT MASK
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
MSKS
690
3
READ INTER- MSKR
RUPT MASK
CLEAR INTER- CLI
RUPT
692
3
691
3
DISABLE
INTERRUPTS
DI
693
ENABLE
INTERRUPTS
EI
694
Note
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
(See note
25.6
38.4
2.)
Conditions
---
(See note
2.)
(See note
2.)
11.9
11.9
---
27.4
41.3
---
1
15.0
15.0
16.8
---
1
19.5
19.5
21.8
---
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Not supported by Duplex CPU Systems.
9-5-19 Step Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
STEP DEFINE
STEP
008
2
17.4
11.8
17.4
11.8
20.7
13.7
STEP START
SNXT
009
2
6.6
6.6
7.3
Conditions
Step control bit ON
Step control bit
OFF
---
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
377
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
9-5-20 Basic I/O Unit Instructions
Instruction
I/O REFRESH
Mnemonic
IORF
Code
097
Length
(steps)
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
15.5 (sim15.5
16.4
plex)
255.5
(duplex)
Conditions
1-word refresh for
input words
17.2 (simplex)
257.2
(duplex)
17.2
18.4
1-word refresh output words
319.9 (simplex)
559.9
(duplex)
319.9
320.7
60-word refresh
input words
358.0 (simplex)
598.0
(duplex)
358.0
354.4
60-word refresh
output words
7-SEGMENT
DECODER
SDEC
078
4
6.5
6.5
6.9
---
DIGITAL
SWITCH
INPUT
DSW
210
6
(See note
2.)
50.7
73.5
4 digits, data input
value: 0
51.5
73.4
51.3
73.5
4 digits, data input
value: F
8 digits, data input
value: 0
50.7
73.4
8 digits, data input
value: F
9.7
10.7
50.3
50.1
13.2
14.8
70.9
71.2
Data input value: 0
Data input value: F
Data input value: 0
Data input value: F
47.8
48.0
58.1
68.1
68.0
83.3
Data input value: 0
Data input value: F
4 digits
63.3
90.3
8 digits
(See note
3.)
(See note
3.)
(See note
3.)
(See note
3.)
(See note
3.)
(See note
3.)
---
287.8 (simplex)
527.8
(duplex)
287.8
315.5
Allocated 1 word
TEN KEY
INPUT
TKY
211
4
(See note
2.)
HEXADECIHKY
MAL KEY
INPUT
MATRIX INPUT MTR
212
5
(See note
2.)
213
5
(See note
2.)
7-SEGMENT
7SEG
DISPLAY OUTPUT
214
5
(See note
2.)
INTELLIGENT
I/O READ
IORD
222
4
IOWR
223
4
DLNK
226
4
Note
---
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Not supported by Duplex CPU Systems.
3. Read/write times depend on the Special I/O Unit for which the instruction
is being executed.
378
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
9-5-21 Serial Communications Instructions
Instruction
PROTOCOL
MACRO
Mnemonic
PMCR
Code
260
Length
(steps)
5
TRANSMIT
TXD
236
4
RECEIVE
RXD
235
4
CHANGE
SERIAL PORT
SETUP
STUP
237
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
100.1
100.1
142.1
Conditions
Sending 0 words,
receiving 0 words
134.2
134.2
189.6
68.5
734.3
89.6 (simplex)
329.6
(duplex)
68.5
734.3
89.6
98.8
1.10 ms
131.1
Sending 249
words, receiving
249 words
Sending 1 byte
Sending 256 bytes
Storing 1 byte
724.2 (simplex)
964.2
(duplex)
724.2
1.11 ms
Storing 256 bytes
341.2
341.2
400.0
---
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-22 Network Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
NETWORK
SEND
NETWORK
RECEIVE
SEND
090
4
84.4
84.4
123.9
---
RECV
098
4
85.4
85.4
124.7
---
DELIVER
COMMAND
CMND
490
4
106.8
106.8
136.8
---
EXPLICIT
MESSAGE
SEND
EXPLT
720
4
(See note
2.)
127.6
190.0
---
EXPLICIT GET EGATR
ATTRIBUTE
721
4
(See note
2.)
123.9
185.0
---
EXPLICIT SET
ATTRIBUTE
EXPLICIT
WORD READ
ESATR
722
3
110.0
164.4
---
ECHRD
723
4
(See note
2.)
(See note
2.)
106.8
158.9
---
EXPLICIT
WORD WRITE
ECHWR
724
4
(See note
2.)
106.0
158.3
---
Note
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Not supported by Duplex CPU Systems.
379
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
9-5-23 File Memory Instructions
Instruction
READ DATA
FILE
WRITE DATA
FILE
Mnemonic
FREAD
Code
700
FWRIT
701
Length
(steps)
5
5
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
391.4 (sim- 391.4
632.4
plex)
631.4
(duplex)
836.1 (simplex)
1,076.1
(duplex)
836.1
1.33 ms
387.8 (simplex)
627.8
(duplex)
387.8
627.0
833.3 (simplex)
1,073.3
(duplex)
833.3
1.32 ms
Conditions
Binary data
2-character directory + file name in
binary
Binary data
73-character directory + file name in
binary
Binary data
2-character directory + file name in
binary
Binary data
73-character directory + file name in
binary
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-24 Display Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
DISPLAY MES- MSG
SAGE
Code
046
Length
(steps)
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
10.1
10.1
14.2
8.4
8.4
11.3
Conditions
Displaying message
Deleting displayed
message
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-25 Clock Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
CALENDAR
ADD
CALENDAR
SUBTRACT
CADD
730
4
38.3
38.3
201.9
---
CSUB
731
4
38.6
38.6
170.4
---
HOURS TO
SECONDS
SEC
065
3
21.4
21.4
29.3
---
SECONDS TO
HOURS
CLOCK
ADJUSTMENT
HMS
066
3
22.2
22.2
30.9
---
DATE
735
2
60.5
60.5
87.4
---
380
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-26 Debugging Instructions
Instruction
Trace Memory
Sampling
Mnemonic
TRSM
Code
045
Length
(steps)
1
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
80.4
80.4
120.0
848.1
848.1
1.06 ms
Conditions
Sampling 1 bit and
0 words
Sampling 31 bits
and 6 words
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-27 Failure Diagnosis Instructions
Instruction
FAILURE
ALARM
SEVERE FAILURE ALARM
Mnemonic
FAL
Code
006
FALS
FAILURE
FPD
POINT DETECTION
Length
(steps)
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
15.4
15.4
16.7
179.8
179.8
244.8
432.4
432.4
657.1
161.5
161.5
219.4
Conditions
Recording errors
Deleting errors (in
order of priority)
Deleting errors (all
errors)
Deleting errors
(individually)
007
3
---
---
---
---
269
4
140.9
163.4
185.2
207.2
140.9
163.4
185.2
207.2
202.3
217.6
268.9
283.6
When executed
First time
When executed
First time
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-28 Other Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
(Duplex
CPU)
[email protected]
(Single
CPU)
Conditions
[email protected]
(Single
CPU)
SET CARRY
CLEAR CARRY
SELECT EM
BANK
EXTEND MAXIMUM CYCLE
TIME
STC
CLC
EMBC
040
041
281
1
1
2
0.06
0.06
14.0
0.06
0.06
14.0
0.06
0.06
15.1
-------
WDT
094
2
15.0
15.0
19.7
---
SAVE CONDITION FLAGS
LOAD CONDITION FLAGS
CCS
282
1
8.6
8.6
12.5
---
CCL
283
1
9.8
9.8
13.9
---
381
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
CONVERT
ADDRESS
FROM CV
CONVERT
ADDRESS TO
CV
FRMCV
284
3
13.6
13.6
19.9
---
TOCV
285
3
11.9
11.9
17.2
---
DISABLE
PERIPHERAL
SERVICING
ENABLE
PERIPHERAL
SERVICING
IOSP
287
1
(See note
2.)
13.9
19.8
---
IORS
288
1
(See note
2.)
63.6
92.3
---
Note
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Not supported by Duplex CPU Systems.
9-5-29 Block Programming Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
Conditions
BLOCK PROGRAM BEGIN
BPRG
096
2
12.1
12.1
13.0
---
BLOCK PROGRAM END
BLOCK PROGRAM PAUSE
BEND
801
1
9.6
9.6
12.3
---
BPPS
811
2
10.6
10.6
12.3
---
BLOCK PROGRAM
RESTART
CONDITIONAL
BLOCK EXIT
BPRS
812
2
5.1
5.1
5.6
---
Execution
condition
806
1
10.0
10.0
11.3
EXIT condition satisfied
4.0
4.0
4.9
EXIT condition not
satisfied
CONDITIONAL
BLOCK EXIT
EXIT (bit
address)
6.8
6.8
13.5
4.7
4.7
7.2
EXIT condition satisfied
EXIT condition not
satisfied
CONDITIONAL
BLOCK EXIT
(NOT)
EXIT NOT
(bit
address)
806
12.4
12.4
14.0
EXIT condition satisfied
7.1
7.1
7.6
Branching
Execution
condition
802
1
4.6
4.6
4.8
EXIT condition not
satisfied
IF true
802
2
802
2
6.7
6.8
9.0
7.1
9.2
6.7
6.8
9.0
7.1
9.2
7.3
7.2
9.6
7.6
10.1
IF false
IF true
IF false
IF true
IF false
Branching
Branching
(NOT)
382
EXIT
IF
IF (relay
number)
IF NOT
(relay number)
806
2
2
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
Length
(steps)
Branching
ELSE
803
1
Branching
IEND
804
1
ONE CYCLE
AND WAIT
Execution
condition
805
1
WAIT
ONE CYCLE
AND WAIT
WAIT (relay 805
number)
2
ONE CYCLE
AND WAIT
(NOT)
WAIT NOT
(relay number)
805
COUNTER
WAIT
CNTW
814
4
CNTWX
818
4
TMHW
815
3
TMHWX
817
3
LOOP
Execution
condition
809
810
1
1
HIGH-SPEED
TIMER WAIT
Loop Control
Loop Control
2
LEND
Loop Control
Loop Control
TIMER WAIT
LEND (relay 810
number)
2
LEND NOT
(relay number)
810
2
TIMW
813
3
TIMWX
816
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
6.2
6.2
6.7
6.8
6.8
7.7
6.9
6.9
7.7
4.4
4.4
4.6
12.6
12.6
13.7
Conditions
IF true
IF false
IF true
IF false
WAIT condition
satisfied
3.9
3.9
4.1
WAIT condition not
satisfied
WAIT condition
satisfied
12.0
12.0
13.4
6.1
6.1
6.5
WAIT condition not
satisfied
12.2
12.2
13.8
6.4
6.4
6.9
WAIT condition
satisfied
WAIT condition not
satisfied
17.9
19.1
17.9
19.1
25.8
20.6
25.8
20.6
7.9
7.7
17.9
19.1
17.9
19.1
25.8
20.6
25.8
20.6
7.9
7.7
22.6
23.9
22.6
23.9
27.9
22.7
27.9
22.7
9.1
8.4
Default setting
Normal execution
Default setting
Normal execution
Default setting
Normal execution
Default setting
Normal execution
--LEND condition
satisfied
6.8
6.8
8.0
LEND condition not
satisfied
9.9
9.9
10.7
8.9
8.9
10.3
LEND condition
satisfied
LEND condition not
satisfied
10.2
10.2
11.2
LEND condition
satisfied
9.3
9.3
10.8
22.3
24.9
22.3
24.9
22.3
24.9
22.3
24.9
25.2
27.8
25.2
27.8
LEND condition not
satisfied
Default setting
Normal execution
Default setting
Normal execution
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
383
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
9-5-30 Text String Processing Instructions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Code
MOV STRING
MOV$
664
3
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
45.6
45.6
66.0
CONCATENATE STRING
+$
656
4
86.5
86.5
126.0
1 character + 1
character
GET STRING
LEFT
LEFT$
652
4
53.0
53.0
77.4
GET STRING
RIGHT
RGHT$
653
4
52.2
52.2
76.3
GET STRING
MIDDLE
MID$
654
5
56.5
56.5
84.6
Retrieving 1
character from
2 characters
Retrieving 1
character from
2 characters
Retrieving 1
character from
3 characters
FIND IN
STRING
FIND$
660
4
51.4
51.4
77.5
Searching for 1
character from
2 characters
STRING
LENGTH
LEN$
650
3
19.8
19.8
28.9
Detecting 1
character
REPLACE IN
STRING
RPLC$
661
6
175.1
175.1
258.7
Replacing the
first of 2 characters with 1 character
DELETE
STRING
DEL$
658
5
63.4
63.4
94.2
Deleting the
leading character of 2 characters
EXCHANGE
STRING
XCHG$
665
3
60.6
60.6
87.2
CLEAR
STRING
CLR$
666
2
23.8
23.8
36.0
Exchanging 1
character with 1
character
Clearing 1 character
INSERT INTO
STRING
INS$
657
5
136.5
136.5
200.6
Inserting 1
character after
the first of 2
characters
670
671
672
674
675
4
48.5
48.5
69.8
Comparing 1
character with 1
character
String Compari- LD, AND, OR+=$
son Instructions LD, AND, OR+<>$
LD, AND, OR+<$
LD, AND, OR+>$
LD, AND, OR+>=$
Length
(steps)
Conditions
Transferring 1
character
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
9-5-31 Task Control Instructions
Instruction
TASK ON
TASK OFF
384
Mnemonic
TKON
TKOF
Code
820
821
Length
(steps)
2
2
Execution time (µs)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
(Duplex
(Single
(Single
CPU)
CPU)
CPU)
19.5
13.3
19.5
13.3
26.3
19.0
Conditions
-----
Section 9-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Guidelines on Converting
Program Capacities from
Previous OMRON PLCs
Guidelines are provided in the following table for converting the program
capacity (unit: words) of previous OMRON PLCs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1, or CV-series PLCs) to the program capacity (unit: steps) of the CSseries PLCs.
Add the following value (n) to the program capacity (unit: words) of the previous PLCs for each instruction to obtain the program capacity (unit: steps) of
the CS-series PLCs.
Instructions
Basic
instructions
Special
instructions
CS-series steps = “a” (words) of previous PLC + n
Variations
Value of n when
Value of n when
converting from
converting from
C200HX/HG/HE to CV-series PLC or
CS Series
CVM1 to CS
Series
None
OUT, SET, RSET,
or KEEP(011): –1
Other instructions:
0
0
Upward Differentiation
None
Immediate Refreshing (See Not supported by
note.)
CS1D.
+1
---
Upward Differentiation and
Immediate Refreshing (See
note.)
None
Upward Differentiation
Immediate Refreshing (See
note.)
Not supported by
CS1D.
---
0
+1
Not supported by
CS1D.
–1
0
---
Upward Differentiation and Not supported by
Immediate Refreshing (See CS1D.
note.)
---
Note Duplex CPU Systems only. These functions are not supported by Duplex CPU
Systems.
For example, if OUT is used with an address of CIO 000000 to CIO 25515, the
program capacity of the previous PLC would be 2 words per instruction and
that of the CS-series PLC would be 1 (2 – 1) step per instruction.
For example, if !MOV is used (MOVE instruction with immediate refreshing),
the program capacity of a CV-series PLC would be 4 words per instruction
and that of the CJ-series PLC would be 7 (4 + 3) steps. (Duplex CPU Systems
only. Immediate refreshing is not supported by Duplex CPU Systems.)
385
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
386
Section 9-5
SECTION 10
Troubleshooting
This section provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PLC operation.
10-1 Error Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
388
10-2 Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
389
10-2-1 Error Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
389
10-2-2 Error Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
390
10-2-3 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
392
10-2-4 Errors and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
395
10-2-5 Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
406
10-2-6 Duplex Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
408
10-2-7 Power Supply Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
10-2-8 Memory Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
412
10-2-9 Program Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
413
10-2-10 Cycle Time Overrun Error Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
413
10-2-11 PLC Setup Setting Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
413
10-2-12 Battery Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
414
10-2-13 Environmental Conditions Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
414
10-2-14 I/O Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
415
10-3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
416
10-4 Troubleshooting Errors in Duplex Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
419
10-4-1 Identifying and Correcting the Cause of the Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
419
387
Section 10-1
Error Log
10-1 Error Log
Each time that an error occurs, the CPU Unit stores error information in the
Error Log Area. The error information includes the error code (stored in
A400), error contents, and time that the error occurred. Up to 20 records can
be stored in the Error Log.
Errors Generated by
FAL(006)/FALS(007)
In addition to system-generated errors, the PLC records user-defined
FAL(006) and FALS(007) errors, making it easier to track the operating status
of the system.
A user-defined error is generated when FAL(006) or FALS(007) is executed in
the program. The execution conditions of these instructions constitute the
user-defined error conditions. FAL(006) generates a non-fatal error and
FALS(007) generates a fatal error. With a Single CPU System, CPU Unit
operation will stop for a FALS error. With a Duplex CPU System in Duplex
Mode, operation will switch to the standby CPU Unit for a FALS error and
operation will continue. With a Duplex CPU System in Simplex Mode, CPU
Unit operation will stop for a FALS error.
The following table shows the error codes for FAL(006) (beginning with “4”)
and FALS(007) (beginning with “C”).
Instruction
FAL(006)
FALS(007)
FAL numbers
#0001 to #01FF hex (1 to 511 decimal)
#0001 to #01FF hex (1 to 511 decimal)
Error codes
4101 to 42FF
C101 to C2FF
The time the error occurred is also stored. If the program generates an FAL
error, the CPU Unit will continue operation. If it generates an FALS error in
Duplex Mode, the standby CPU Unit will become the active CPU Unit unless
the error occurs in both CPU Units, in which case both CPU Units will stop.
Error Log Structure
When more than 20 errors occur, the oldest error data (in A100 to A104) is
deleted, the errors in A105 to A199 are shifted by one, and the newest record
is stored in A195 to A199.
Error Log Area
Order of
Error code occurrence
A100
4102
00F7
1
2
4
1 0 2
Error contents
A102
Minute, second
A103
Day, hour
Year, month
A104
A105
009D
Error code
A101
0
0 F 7
Error code
A106
Error contents
A107
Minute, second
A108
Day, hour
Year, month
A109
Time of
occurrence
Time of
occurrence
20
A195
0
0 9 D
Error code
A196
Error contents
A197
Minute, second
A198
Day, hour
Year, month
A199
Time of
occurrence
A300
Error Log Pointer (error counter)
The number of records is stored in binary in the Error Log Pointer (A300).
Note The Error Log Pointer can be reset by turning ON the Error Log Pointer Reset
Bit (A50014). This operation will also clear the error log display for Programming Devices, but it will not clear the data in the Error Log itself (A100 to
A199).
388
Section 10-2
Error Processing
10-2 Error Processing
10-2-1 Error Categories
Error are classified as shown in the following table for CS1D Duplex Systems.
Error status
Operation switching errors
• CPU errors
• Memory errors
• Program errors
• Cycle time overrun errors
• FALS execution
• Fatal Inner Board errors (Single CPU Systems
or Process-control CPU Units only)
Duplex CPU Systems
Duplex Mode
Simplex Mode
Operation continues Operation stops.
in Simplex Mode with
the standby CPU Unit
being switched to the
active CPU Unit.
Operation stops if the
error occurs in both
CPU Units.
Single CPU Systems
Operation stops.
Fatal errors
• I/O bus errors
• Number duplication errors (unit numbers or rack
numbers)
• Too many I/O points
• I/O setting errors
Non-fatal
Duplex errors (errors causing a
errors
switch to Simplex Mode)
• Duplex verification errors
• Duplex bus errors
Errors for which Duplex Mode continues
• Duplex power supply error
• Duplex communications error
• FAL error
• PLC Setup error
• I/O verification error
• Basic I/O Unit error
• CPU Bus Unit error
• Special I/O Unit error
• Battery error
• CPU Bus Unit setting error
• Special I/O Unit setting error
• Non-fatal Inner Board error (Single
CPU Systems or Process-control
CPU Units only)
Operation stops.
CPU
standby
(See note.)
Waiting for operation
Waiting for operation
Waiting for operation
Waiting for operation
Waiting for operation
Waiting for operation
• Waiting for standby CPU Unit at
startup
• Duplex bus error at startup
• Duplex verification error at startup
• Waiting for Special I/O Unit
• Waiting for CPU Bus Unit
• Waiting for Inner Board (Single
CPU Systems or Process-control
CPU Units only)
Expansion Rack power interruption
Operation continues, Operation continues.
in Simplex Mode without changing the
active CPU Unit.
Will not occur on a
Single CPU System.
Operation continues,
in Duplex Mode without changing the
active CPU Unit.
Operation continues.
Note The cause of the CPU Unit remaining on standby is stored in A322.
389
Section 10-2
Error Processing
10-2-2 Error Information
There are basically five sources of information on errors that have occurred:
• The indicators on the CPU Units
• The indicators on the Duplex Unit (Duplex CPU Systems only)
• The Auxiliary Area Error Flags
• The Auxiliary Area Error Information Flag and Words
• The Auxiliary Area Error Code Word
Indicators on CS1D CPU Units
Auxiliary Area Flags and Words
RUN: Lit when the PLC is in
RUN or MONITOR mode.
ERR/ALM: Flashing: Non-fatal
error
Lit: Fatal error
RUN
BKUP: Lit when data is
being written to
the flash
CS
memory.
ERR/ALM
INH: Lit when Output OFF Bit.
PRPHL: Lit when the CPU Unit
is communicating
through the peripheral
port.
INH
PRPH
BKUP
COMM
COMM: Lit when the
CPU Unit is
communicating
through the
RS-232C port.
Indicators on Duplex Unit
DPL STATUS: Lit green: Normal operation
in Duplex Mode
Flashing green: Duplex
initialization
Lit red: Duplex bus error
Flashing red: Duplex
verification error
Not lit: Normal operation in
Simplex Mode
DPL01
L
R
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
Error Flags
Error Info.
Flags
indicating
the type of
error
Words
providing
error
information
Error Code
Word (A400)
Error Code
Word (A400)
A400
contains
the error
code (See
note.)
CS
L.ACTIVE/R.ACTIVE: Active CPU Unit
Lit green: Active
Not lit: Standby
L.CPU STATUS/R.CPU STATUS
Lit green: RUN or MONITOR mode
Flashing green: Duplex initialization or CPU standby
Lit red: CPU error causing operation to switch
Flashing read: Other error causing operation to switch
Not lit: PROGRAM mode or other status
Note When two or more errors occur at the same time, the highest (most serious)
error code will be stored in A400.
390
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Indicator Status and Error Classifications for Duplex CPU Systems
Simplex Mode
Fatal errors
Duplex Mode
Operation switched
and operation
continues
Indicator
(See note 1.)
CPU Unit
Duplex
Unit
CPU error
RUN
Not lit
Non-fatal errors
Operation
stops
Fatal error
causing
operation
to switch
Fatal error
Duplex
initialization
Operation continues
Duplex
bus or
verification error
Non-fatal
error
Communications error
Peripheral port
RS-232C
port
CPU
standby
Outputs
turned
OFF
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
---
Not lit
ERR/ALM Lit
Lit
Lit
Flashing
Flashing
---
---
---
---
Not lit
INH
Not lit
---
---
---
---
---
---
Lit
---
---
PRPHL
---
---
---
---
---
Not lit
---
---
---
---
COMM
---
---
---
---
---
---
Not lit
---
---
---
DPL
STATUS
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit (See
note 3.)
Lit or flash- --ing red
---
---
---
Flashing
green
---
ACTIVE
Not lit
Not lit (See
note 2.)
---
Lit
---
---
---
---
---
---
CPU
STATUS
Lit red
Flashing
red
Not lit (See
note 3.)
---
---
---
---
---
Flashing
green
Flashing
green
Note
1. The status of the indicators are given in RUN or MONITOR mode. “---” indicates that the indicator may be any status.
2. The ACTIVE indicator on the new active CPU Unit will light.
3. The indicator will flash green for any fatal errors except an I/O bus error.
Indicator Status and Error Classifications for Single CPU Systems
Indicator*
CPU error
CPU standby
Fatal error
Non-fatal
error
RUN
ERR/ALM
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Flashing
Communications error
Peripheral
RS-232C
ON
ON
-----
INH
PRPHL
COMM
OFF
-----
-------
-------
-------
--OFF
---
----OFF
Output OFF
Bit ON
ON
--ON
-----
Note The status of the indicators are given in RUN or MONITOR mode. “---” indicates that the indicator may be any status.
391
Section 10-2
Error Processing
10-2-3 Troubleshooting Flowcharts
The following flowchart shows troubleshooting using a Programming Console.
Determine the error according to the mode and take appropriate measures.
Duplex CPU Systems in Duplex Mode
Error during operation
POWER
indicator
lit?
Not lit.
Go to 10-2-7 Power Supply Check.
Lit
DPL
STATUS indicator
on DPL Unit
lit?
Lit/flashing read
Duplex error (non-fatal)
Not lit.
Lit
Connect Programming
Console to active CPU Unit.
DPL VERIFY ERR
Duplex verification error
DPL BUS ERR
Duplex bus error
RUN
indicator on
CPU Unit
lit?
A
Lit
Not lit.
Not lit.
B
ERR/ALM
indicator
lit?
Lit
Fatal error
Connect Programming
Console.
I/O BUS ERR * (*5)
I/O bus error
UNIT NO. DPL ERR
Unit No. duplication error
RACK NO. DPL ERR
Rack No. duplication error
TOO MANY I/O PNT
Too many I/O points
I/O SET ERR
I/O setting error
Connect Programming
Console to active CPU Unit.
EXT POWER OFF
CPU WAIT'G
To CPU Standby Errors
and Expansion Rack
Power Interruption
Note *1: *** indicates the FAL or FALS number.
*2: ** indicates the unit number.
*3: In x-y, x indicates the rack number and y indicates left or right.
*4: * indicates the unit number.
*5: * indicates the rack number.
392
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Duplex Mode, Continued
A
Operation switching error
(The CPU Unit that was
Connect Programming
Console to standby CPU Unit. the active CPU Unit.)
---------------------------
CPU error (WDT)
MEMORY ERR
Memory error
FATAL INNER ERR
Fatal Inner Board error
PROGRAM ERR
Program error
CYCLE TIME ERR
Cycle time overrun
SYS FAIL FALS *** (*1)
System FALS error
B
ERR/ALM
indicator
flashing?
Not lit.
Go to 10-2-13 Environmental
Conditions Check.
Flashing
Non-fatal error
Connect Programming
Console to active CPU Unit.
PS ERR x-y (*3)
Duplex power error
NET DPL ERR* (*4)
Duplex communications
error
SYS FAIL FAL*** (*1)
System FAL error
DENSITY I/O ERR
Basic I/O error
PC SETUP ERR
PLC Setup setting error
I/O VRFY ERR
I/O verification error
NO-FTL INNER ERR
Non-fatal Inner Board
error
CPU BUS ERR** (*2)
CPU Bus error
SIOU ERR** (*2)
Special I/O Unit error
BAT LOW
Battery error
CPU BU STUP** (*2)
CPU Bus Unit setting error
SIOU SETUP** (*2)
Special I/O Unit setting error
Note *1: *** indicates the FAL or FALS number.
*2: ** indicates the unit number.
*3: In x-y, x indicates the rack number and y indicates left or right.
*4: * indicates the unit number.
*5: * indicates the rack number.
393
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Duplex CPU Systems in Simplex Mode or Single CPU Systems
Error during operation
Not lit.
POWER
indicator
lit?
Go to 10-2-7 Power Supply Check.
Lit
RUN
indicator on
CPU Unit
lit?
Lit
Not lit.
Not lit.
ERR/ALM
indicator
flashing?
ERR/ALM
indicator
lit?
Not lit.
Go to 10-2-13 Environmental
Conditions Check.
Flashing
Lit
Non-fatal error
Fatal error
Connect Programming
Console.
Connect Programming
Console.
---------------------------
CPU error (WDT)
MEMORY ERR
Memory error
FATAL INNER ERR
Fatal Inner Board error
PROGRAM ERR
Program error
CYCLE TIME ERR
Cycle time exceeded
SYS FAIL FALS *** (*1)
System FALS error
I/O BUS ERR * (*5)
I/O bus error
UNIT NO. DPL ERR
Unit No. duplication error
RACK NO. DPL ERR
Rack No. duplication error
TOO MANY I/O PNT
Too many I/O points
I/O SET ERR
I/O setting error
Connect Programming
Console.
EXP POWER OFF
CPU WAIT'G
PS ERR x-y (*3)
Duplex power error
NETW DPL ERR* (*4)
Duplex communications
error
SYS FAIL FAL*** (*1)
System FAL error
DENSITY I/O ERR
Basic I/O error
PC SETUP ER
PLC Setup setting error
I/O VRFY ERR
I/O verification error
NO-FTL INNER ERR
Non-fatal Inner Board
error
CPU BU ERR** (*2)
CPU Bus error
SIOU ERR** (*2)
Special I/O Unit error
BAT LOW
Power supply error
CPU BUS STUP** (*2)
CPU Bus Unit setting error
SIOU SETUP** (*2)
Special I/O Unit setting error
To CPU Standby Errors
and Expansion Rack
Power Interruption
Note *1: *** indicates the FAL or FALS number.
*2: ** indicates the unit number.
*3: In x-y, x indicates the rack number and y indicates left or right.
*4: * indicates the unit number.
*5: * indicates the rack number.
394
Section 10-2
Error Processing
10-2-4 Errors and Troubleshooting
The following tables show error messages for errors which can occur in CS1D
PLCs and indicate the likely cause of the errors.
CPU Standby Errors
and Expansion Rack
Power Interruptions
When the following indicator status appears during operation in RUN or MONITOR Mode, a CPU standby error or Expansion Rack power interruption has
occurred and the CX-Programmer display will indicate one of these errors.
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
Duplex Unit (with
error occurring on
active CPU Unit)
(Duplex CPU Systems)
POWER
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL
COMM
DPL STATUS
Active CPU Unit
indicators
Standby CPU Unit
indicators
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
Lit green
Not lit
Not lit
--------Lit green
Flashing green
Not lit
Flashing green
For all of the following errors, operation will stop if the error occurs with a Single CPU Systems, or in either Duplex Mode or Simplex Mode with a Duplex
CPU System.
Error
CPU
standby
error
Expansion
Rack power
interruption
Programming
Console
display
Error
flags in
Auxiliary
Area
CPU
WAIT’G
None
Error
code (in
A400)
None
Flags and
word data
A32203
Probable cause
A CPU Bus Unit has
not started properly.
Possible remedy
Check the settings of the CPU Bus Unit.
A Special I/O Unit was Check the settings of the Special I/O Unit.
not recognized.
EXT
POWER
OFF
None
None
A32207
Inner Board was not
recognized.
Check the settings of the Inner Board.
A32205
Duplex verification
error.
Press the initialization switch on the Duplex
Unit. If the problem persists, check the model
number of the CPU Units and the Inner Units to
see if they are the same.
A32204
Duplex bus error.
Press the initialization switch on the Duplex
Unit. If the problem persists, replace the
Duplex Unit.
A32206
Waiting for other CPU
unit.
Check the settings of the standby CPU Unit.
A32208
Power is not being
supplied to an Expansion Rack.
Supply power to the Expansion Rack.
With the CS1D, the Programming Console can
be used in this condition.
Note When power supply is interrupted to an Expansion Rack, the CPU Unit will
stop program operation. If power is then restored to the Expansion Rack, the
CPU Unit will perform startup processing, i.e., the same operational status as
existed before the power interrupt will not necessarily be continued.
395
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Operation Switching
Errors (Operation
Stops in Simplex
Mode or for Single
CPU Systems)
In a Duplex CPU System, the standby CPU Unit will become the active CPU
Unit and continue operation (assuming the standby CPU Unit is normal) in
RUN or MONITOR mode and in Simplex Mode whenever an error causing
operation to switch occurs. If, however, the same error occurs in the CPU Unit
that was the standby or another error that would cause operation to switch
occurs, system operation will stop.
In Simplex Mode or will a Single CPU System, all of these errors are fatal and
will cause operation to stop.
Connect the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console to display the error
message (in the PLC Error Window on the CX-Programmer). The cause of
the error can be determined from the error message and related Auxiliary
Area flags and words.
An error causing operation to switch (or a fatal error in Simplex Mode) has
occurred if the indicators have the following conditions during operation in
RUN or MONITOR mode.
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
With a Duplex CPU
System, the CPU
Unit that was active
when the error
occurred
Duplex Unit (Duplex
CPU System only)
POWER
RUN
ERR/ALM
Lit green
Not lit
Lit red
INH
PRPHL
COMM
DPL STATUS
Active CPU Unit
indicators
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
------Not lit
Not lit
CPU error: Lit red
Other: Flashing red
Standby CPU Unit
indicators
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
Lit green
Lit green
The standby CPU Unit in a Duplex CPU System will have the following indicator status when an error causing operation to switch occurs.
Power Supply Unit
POWER
CPU Unit that was
RUN
on standby when the ERR/ALM
error occurred
INH
PRPHL
COMM
Duplex Unit
DPL STATUS
Active CPU Unit
indicators
Standby CPU Unit
indicators
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
Lit green
Not lit
Lit red
------Not lit
Lit green
Lit green
Not lit
CPU error: Lit red
Other: Flashing red
Note With a Duplex CPU System in Simplex Mode or with a Single CPU System,
status will be as follows:
I/O memory will be cleared when any error that switches operation occurs
except for an error generated by an FALS instruction. I/O memory will not be
cleared for a FALS instruction.
If the I/O Memory Hold Bit is ON, I/O memory will be held, but outputs to all
Output Units will be turned OFF.
396
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Intentionally Creating
Errors to Switch Operation
With a Duplex CPU System, a hot standby method is used, which means that
the standby CPU Unit executes the same program as the active CPU Unit.
Thus, if FALS(007) is executed with the same conditions on both the CPU
Units, FALS(007) will be executed at the same time in both CPU Units and
operation will not switch to the standby, causing the CPU STATUS indicators
on the Duplex Unit to flash red for both CPU Units. This is true for other errors
causing operation to switch.
To cause the active CPU Unit to switch during debugging operations, either
use the USE/NO USE switch on the Duplex Unit or use the following type of
programming for FALS(007).
A32808
A32809
A32515
Bit used to switch
operation
FALS
Duplex/Simplex
Mode Flag
ON: Duplex
OFF: Simplex
A32809
A32515
001
#0
Active CPU Unit
Location Flag
ON: Right side
OFF: Left side
This CPU Unit
Location Flag
ON: Right side
OFF: Left side
Note If the right and left CPU Units are made to perform different operation, they
will not longer be synchronized and a duplex bus error or other error may
occur. Do not use the above type of programming with A32515 (This CPU Unit
Location Flag) for any other application.
397
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Troubleshooting Table
Error
Programming
Console
display
For all of the following errors, operation will be switched to the standby and
operation will continue in a Duplex CPU System in Duplex Mode. If the error
occurs in a Single CPU System or in a Duplex CPU System in Simplex Mode,
operation will stop.
Error
flags in
Auxiliary
Area
Error
code (in
A400)
None
CPU
error
−−−−
None
Memory
error
MEMORY
ERR
A40115:
80F1
Memory
Error Flag
Flags
and
word
data
Probable cause
Possible remedy
None
Watchdog timer has exceeded
maximum setting.
Use one of the following methods.
• Toggle the USE/NO USE switch for the
CPU Unit with the error to NO USE and
back to USE and then press the initialization button.
• If the automatic recovery setting has been
enabled in the PLC Setup, use the automatic recovery function to restart.
• If operation still cannot be recovered,
replace the CPU Unit.
A403:
Memory
Error
Location
An error has occurred in mem- See below for specific bits.
ory. A bit in A403 will turn ON
to show the location of the
error as listed below.
A40300 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the user program
memory. An illegal instruction
was detected.
A40304 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the PLC Setup.
A40305 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the registered I/O
table.
A40307 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the routing tables.
Use one of the following methods
If operation has switched from Duplex to
Simplex Mode:
• Toggle the USE/NO USE switch for the
CPU Unit with the error to NO USE and
back to USE and then press the initialization button.
• If the automatic recovery setting has been
enabled in the PLC Setup, use the automatic recovery function to restart.
• If operation still cannot be recovered,
replace the CPU Unit.
If the error occurs in Simplex Mode:
• Retransfer the program and parameters.
• If operation still cannot be recovered,
replace the CPU Unit.
A40308 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the CS-series CPU
Bus Unit setup.
Fatal
Inner
Board
error
398
FATAL
INNER
ERR
A40112:
82F0
Fatal
Inner
Board
Error Flag
A424:
Inner
Board
Error
Information
A40309 ON:
An error occurred during automatic transfer from the Memory Card at startup.
Make sure that the Memory Card is installed
properly and that the correct file is on the
Card.
A40310 ON:
Flash memory has failed.
A hardware error has occurred in the CPU
Unit. Replace the CPU Unit.
The Inner Board is faulty.
An error occurred on the Inner
bus.
Check the indicators on the Inner Boards
and refer to the operation manual for the
Inner Board.
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Error
Program
error
Programming
Console
display
PROGRAM
ERR
Error
flags in
Auxiliary
Area
Error
code (in
A400)
A40109:
80F0
Program
Error Flag
Flags
and
word
data
Probable cause
Possible remedy
A294 to
A299:
Program
error
information
The program is incorrect. See
the following rows of this table
for details.
The address at which the program stopped will be stored in
A298 and A299. The task
where the program stopped
will be stored in A294.
If the error has occurred in both the active
and standby CPU Units, use the information
in A294, A298, and A299 to find the location
and cause of the error, check the program,
and correct the error. Then, clear the error.
If the error occurred in only one of the CPU
Units, use one of the following methods.
• Toggle the USE/NO USE switch for the
CPU Unit with the error to NO USE and
back to USE and then press the initialization button.
• If the automatic recovery setting has been
enabled in the PLC Setup, use the automatic recovery function to restart.
• If operation still cannot be recovered,
replace the CPU Unit.
A29511: No END error
If the error has occurred in both the active
and standby CPU Units, place END(001) at
the end of the task indicated in A294.
A29512: Task error
A task error has occurred. The
following conditions will generate a task error.
1. There isn’t an executable
cyclic task.
2. There isn’t a program allocated to the task. Check
A294 for the number of the
task missing a program.
3. The task specified in a
TKON(820), TKOF(821), or
MSKS(690) instruction
doesn’t exist.
If the error has occurred in both the active
and standby CPU Units, check the startup
cyclic task attributes.
Check the execution status of each task as
controlled by TKON(820) and TKOF(821).
Make sure that all of the task numbers specified in TKON(820), TKOF(821), and
MSKS(690) instructions have corresponding
tasks.
A29510: Illegal access error
An illegal access error has
occurred and the PLC Setup
has been set to stop operation
for an instruction error. The following are illegal access
errors:
1. Reading/writing a parameter area.
2. Writing memory that is not
installed.
3. Writing an EM bank that is
EM file memory.
4. Writing to a read-only area.
5. Indirect DM/EM address
that is not in BCD when
BCD mode is specified.
If the error has occurred in both the active
and standby CPU Units, find the program
address where the error occurred
(A298/A299) and correct the instruction.
A29509: Indirect DM/EM BCD
error
An indirect DM/EM BCD error
has occurred and the PLC
Setup has been set to stop
operation for an instruction
error.
If the error has occurred in both the active
and standby CPU Units, find the program
address where the error occurred
(A298/A299) and correct the indirect
addressing or change to binary mode.
A29508: Instruction error
An instruction processing error
has occurred and the PLC
Setup has been set to stop
operation for an instruction
error.
If the error has occurred in both the active
and standby CPU Units, find the program
address where the error occurred
(A298/A299) and correct the instruction.
Alternatively, set the PLC Setup to continue
operation for an instruction error.
A29513: Differentiation overflow error
Too many differentiated
instructions have been
inserted or deleted during
online editing.
If the error has occurred in both the active
and standby CPU Units, write any changes
to the program, switch to PROGRAM mode
and then return to MONITOR mode to continue editing the program.
399
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Error
Program
error
Programming
Console
display
PROGRAM
ERR
Error
flags in
Auxiliary
Area
Error
code (in
A400)
A40109:
80F0
Program
Error Flag
Cycle
Time
Overrun
error
CYCLE
TIME ERR
A40108:
Cycle
Time
Overrun
Flag
System
FALS
error
SYS FAIL
FALS
A40106:
C101 to
FALS
C2FF
Error Flag
400
809F
Flags
and
word
data
Probable cause
Possible remedy
A294 to
A299:
Program
error
information
A29514: Illegal instruction
error
The program contains an
instruction that cannot be executed.
If the error has occurred in both the active
and standby CPU Units, retransfer the program to the CPU Unit.
A29515: UM overflow error
The last address in UM (user
program memory) has been
exceeded.
If the error has occurred in both the active
and standby CPU Units, use a Programming
Device to transfer the program again.
---
The cycle time has exceeded
the maximum cycle time
(watch cycle time) set in the
PLC Setup.
If the error has occurred in both the active
and standby CPU Units, change the program to reduce the cycle time or change the
maximum cycle time setting.
The cycle time can be reduced by dividing
unused parts of the program into tasks,
jumping unused instructions in tasks, and
disabling cyclic refreshing of Special I/O
Units that don’t require frequent refreshing.
If the error occurred in only one of the CPU
Units, use one of the following methods.
• Toggle the USE/NO USE switch for the
CPU Unit with the error to NO USE and
back to USE and then press the initialization button.
• If the automatic recovery setting has been
enabled in the PLC Setup, use the automatic recovery function to restart.
• If operation still cannot be recovered,
replace the CPU Unit.
---
FALS(007) has been executed
in the program.
The error code in A400 will
indicate the FAL number. The
leftmost digit of the code will
be C and the rightmost 3 digits
of the code will be from 100 to
2FF hex and will correspond to
FAL numbers 001 to 511.
If the error has occurred in both the active
and standby CPU Units, correct according
to cause indicated by the FAL number (set
by user).
If the error occurred in only one of the CPU
Units, use one of the following methods.
• Toggle the USE/NO USE switch for the
CPU Unit with the error to NO USE and
back to USE and then press the initialization button.
• If the automatic recovery setting has been
enabled in the PLC Setup, use the automatic recovery function to restart.
• If operation still cannot be recovered,
replace the CPU Unit.
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Fatal Errors
For the following errors, operation will stop for a Duplex CPU System in
Duplex Mode or in Simplex Mode, or for a Single CPU System.
Connect the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console to display the error
message (in the PLC Error Window on the CX-Programmer). The cause of
the error can be determined from the error message and related Auxiliary
Area flags and words.
A fatal error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions during
operation in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
Duplex Unit (with
error occurring on
active CPU Unit)
POWER
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL
COMM
DPL STATUS
Active CPU Unit
indicators
Standby CPU Unit
indicators
Note
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
Lit green
Not lit
Lit red
------Lit green
Lit green
Not lit
Not lit
CPU STATUS
Not lit
1. I/O memory will be cleared when a fatal error occurs.
2. If the I/O Hold Bit is ON, I/O memory will not be cleared, but all outputs from
Output Units will be turned OFF.
401
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Troubleshooting Table
Error
I/O Bus
error
Unit/Rack
Number
Duplication error
For the following errors, operation will stop for a Duplex CPU System in
Duplex Mode or in Simplex Mode, or for a Single CPU System.
Programming
Console
display
Error
flags in
Auxiliary
Area
I/O BUS
ERR *
A40114:
80C0 to
I/O Bus
80C7, or
Error Flag 80CF
A404: I/O
Bus Error
Slot and
Rack
Numbers
Error has occurred in the bus line
between the CPU and I/O Units.
A40400 to A40407 contain the
error slot number (00 to 09) in
binary. 0F indicates that the slot
cannot be determined.
A40408 to A40415 contain the
error rack number (00 to 07) in
binary. 0F indicates that the rack
cannot be determined.
Try turning the power OFF and ON
again.
If the error isn’t corrected, turn the
power OFF and check cable connections between the I/O Units and
Racks.
Check for damage to the cable or
Units.
Correct the cause of the error and
then turn the Rack’s power supply
OFF and then ON again.
I/O BUS
ERR B
or
I/O BUS
ERR C
A40114:
80CC,
I/O Bus
80CB
Error Flag
A404: I/O
Bus Error
Slot and
Rack
Numbers
I/O bus error B: The CPU Units are
not mounted to a Duplex CPU
Backplane.
I/O bus error C: The cable to an
Expansion Rack is wired incorrectly.
A40400 to A40407: 0F hex
A40408 to A40415:
0B hex: I/O bus error B
0C hex: I/O bus error C
Turn OFF the power supply and
replace the Backplane with a [email protected]@@@ Backplane.
Correct the cable connections.
UNIT NO.
DPL ERR
A40113:
Duplication Error
Flag
A410:
CPU Bus
Unit
Duplicate
Number
Flags
The same number has been allocated to more than one CPU Bus
Unit.
Bits A41000 to A41015 correspond
to unit numbers 0 to F.
Check the unit numbers, eliminate the
duplications, and turn the Rack’s
power supply OFF and then ON
again.
A411 to
A416:
Special
I/O Unit
Duplicate
Number
Flags
The same number has been allocated to more than one Special I/O
Unit.
Bits A41100 to A41615 correspond
to unit numbers 0 to 95.
Check the unit numbers, eliminate the
duplications, and turn the Rack’s
power supply OFF and then ON
again.
A409:
Expansion Rack
Duplicate
Rack
Number
The same I/O word has been allocated to more than one Basic I/O
Unit.
Check allocations to Units on the rack
number whose bit in ON in A40900 to
A40907. Correct the allocations so
that no words are allocated more than
once, including to Units on other
Racks, and turn the Rack’s power
supply OFF and then ON again.
An Expansion I/O Rack’s starting
word address exceeds CIO 0901.
The corresponding bit in A40900 to
A40907 (Racks 0 to 7) will be
turned ON.
Check the first word setting for the
Rack indicated in A40900 to A40907
and change the setting to a valid word
address below CIO 0901 with a Programming Device.
RACK
NO. DPL
ERR
Error
code (in
A400)
80E9
80EA
Flags
and word
data
Probable cause
Possible remedy
Too Many
I/O Points
error
TOO
A40111:
MANY I/O Too Many
PNT
I/O Points
Flag
80E1
A407: Too
Many I/O
Points,
Details
The probable causes are listed
Correct the problem indicated by the
below. The 3-digit binary value (000 content of A407 and turn the power
to 101) in A40713 to A40715 indiOFF and ON again.
cates the cause of the error. The
value of these 3 bits is also output
to A40700 to A40712.
1. The total number of I/O points
set in the I/O tables exceeds the
maximum allowed for the CPU
Unit (bits: 000).
2. The number of Expansion
Racks exceeds the maximum
(bits: 101).
I/O Table
Setting
error
I/O SET
ERR
80E0
---
Input and output word allocations
Check the I/O table with I/O Table Verdo no agree with input/output words ification operation. When the system
required by Units actually mounted. has been corrected, register the I/O
table again.
402
A40110:
I/O Setting Error
Flag
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Non-fatal Errors
Operation will continue for any of the following errors for a Duplex CPU System in Duplex Mode or in Simplex Mode, or for a Single CPU System. For
some of these errors, operation for a Duplex CPU System will switch from
Duplex Mode to Simplex Mode and for other errors, operation will remain in
Duplex Mode. These are listed separately below.
Connect the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console to display the error
message (in the PLC Error Window on the CX-Programmer). The cause of
the error can be determined from the error message and related Auxiliary
Area flags and words.
Duplex Errors
(Errors Causing a Switch
to Simplex Operation for
Duplex CPU Systems)
For a Duplex CPU System, duplex errors will cause operation to be switched
to Simplex Mode, but operation will continue in RUN or MONITOR mode.
A non-fatal duplex error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions during operation in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Duplex errors are unique to Duplex CPU Systems and will not occur on Single
CPU Systems.
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
Duplex Unit (with
error occurring on
active CPU Unit)
POWER
RUN
ERR/ALM
Lit green
Lit green
Flashing red
INH
PRPHL
COMM
DPL STATUS
------Duplex verification
error: Flashing red
Duplex bus error:
Lit red
Lit green
Lit green
Not lit
Lit green
Active CPU Unit
indicators
Standby CPU Unit
indicators
Troubleshooting Table
Error
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
For all of the following errors, operation will continue if the error occurs in
Duplex Mode or in Simplex Mode. If it occurs in Duplex Mode, operation will
switch to Simplex Mode.
ProgramDPL
Error
Error
ming
STATUS flags in code (in
Console indicator
AuxilA400)
display
iary Area
Flags
and
word
data
Probable cause
Possible remedy
Duplex
verification error
DPL VER- Flashing
IFY ERR red
A31600,
A40214
0011
A317
One of the following is not
the same between the two
CPU Units.
• CPU Unit model number
• Parameter area data
• User program
• Inner Board internal data
inconsistency
Check the items to the left between
the two CPU Units and be sure they
are the same and then toggle the
power supply.
If the problem persists, retransfer the
user program and parameter area
data (including the PLC Setup CPU
Bus Unit settings and I/O tables) to the
active CPU Unit.
If the problem persists, replace the
Duplex Unit.
Duplex
bus error
DPL BUS
ERR
A31601,
A40214
0010
---
An error occurred on the
duplex bus in the Duplex
System.
Prepare the system to stop operation
and then press the initialization button
on the Duplex Unit.
If the problem persists, replace the
Duplex Unit.
Lit red
403
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Errors for which Duplex
Mode Continues
If any of the following errors occurs for a Duplex CPU System in Duplex Mode,
operation will continue in Duplex Mode and in RUN or MONITOR mode. Operation will also continue if any of these errors occurs in Simplex Mode or in a
Single CPU System.
A non-fatal error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions
during operation in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
Duplex Unit (with
error occurring on
active CPU Unit)
POWER
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL
COMM
DPL STATUS
Active CPU Unit
indicators
Standby CPU Unit
indicators
Troubleshooting Table
Error
Programming Console
display
Error
flags in
Auxiliary
Area
ACTIVE
Lit green
Lit green
Flashing red
---------Lit green
Lit green
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
Lit green
Not lit
Lit green
For all of the following errors, operation will continue if the error occurs for a
Duplex CPU System in Duplex Mode or in Simplex Mode, or for a Single CPU
System. If it occurs in Duplex Mode, operation will continue in Duplex Mode.
Error
code (in
A400)
Flags
and
word
data
Probable cause
Possible remedy
Duplex
power
supply
error
PS ERROR A31602,
x-y
A40214
x = Rack #
y = Slot
0003
A319,
A320
An error has occurred in one of the
Power Supply Units.
• The primary-side power supply
has been interrupted.
• The secondary-side voltage has
dropped below 5 V or is an overvoltage.
Use A319 and A320 to identify the
Power Supply Unit with an error and
either correct the error or, if necessary, replace the Unit.
Duplex
communications
error
NET DPL
ERR *
0600 to
060F
Rightmost
digit is
unit No.
A434 to
A437
An error has occurred for a Communications Unit (Controller Link Unit)
with a unit number that was set for
duplex operation.
Use A434 and A437 to identify the
Communications Unit with an error
and either correct the error or, if necessary, replace the Unit.
System
FAL error
SYS FAIL
FAL
A40215: 4101 to
FAL Error 42FF
Flag
A360 to
A391:
Executed
FAL
Number
Flags
FAL(006) has been executed in pro- Correct according to cause indicated
gram.
by FAL number (set by user).
Executed FAL Number Flags
A36001 to A39115 correspond to
FAL numbers 001 to 511.
The error code in A400 will indicate
the FAL number. The leftmost digit of
the code will be 4 and the rightmost
3 digits of the code will be from 100
to 2FF hex and will correspond to
FAL numbers 001 to 511.
PLC
Setup
error
PC SETUP
ERR
A40210: 009B
PLC
Setup
Error Flag
A406:
PLC
Setup
Error
Location
There is a setting error in the PLC
Setup. The location (binary offset) of
the error is written to A406.
Change the indicated setting to a
valid setting.
I/O Table
Verification error
I/O VRFY
ERR
A40209: 00E7
I/O Verification
Error Flag
---
A Unit has been added or removed,
so the registered I/O tables don’t
agree with the actual Units in the
PLC.
The I/O Verification Error Flag goes
OFF when the situation is corrected.
Execute the I/O Table Verify operation to find the problem location. Create new I/O tables or replace the Unit
to match the registered I/O tables.
Non-fatal
Inner
Board
error
NO-FTL
INNER
ERR
A40208: 02F0
Inner
Board
Error Flag
A424:
Inner
Board
Error
Information
An error occurred in the Duplex Inner Check the Inner Board indicators.
Board
Refer to the Duplex Inner Board’s
operation manual for details.
404
* = Node
address
A31603,
A40214
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Error
Programming Console
display
Error
flags in
Auxiliary
Area
CS-series
CPU Bus
Unit error
CPU BU
ERR
Special
I/O Unit
error
Error
code (in
A400)
Flags
and
word
data
Probable cause
Possible remedy
A40207: 0200 to
CS-series 020F
CPU Bus
Unit Error
Flag
A417:
CSseries
CPU Bus
Unit
Error,
Unit
Number
Flags
An error occurred in a data exchange
between the CPU Unit and a CSseries CPU Bus Unit.
The corresponding flag in A417 is
turned ON to indicate the problem
Unit. Bits A41700 to A41715 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
Check the Unit indicated in A417.
Refer to the Unit’s operation manual
to find and correct the cause of the
error. Restart the Unit by toggling its
Restart Bit or turn the power OFF
and ON again.
Replace the Unit if it won’t restart.
SIOU ERR
A40206: 0300 to
Special
035F, or
I/O Unit
03FF
Error Flag
A418 to
A423:
Special
I/O Unit
Error,
Unit
Number
Flags
An error occurred in a data exchange
between the CPU Unit and a Special
I/O Unit.
The corresponding flag in A418 to
A423 is turned ON to indicate the
problem Unit. Bits A41800 to A42315
correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.
Check the Unit indicated in A418 to
A423. Refer to the Unit’s operation
manual to find and correct the cause
of the error. Restart the Unit by toggling its Restart Bit or turn the power
OFF and ON again.
Replace the Unit if it won’t restart.
Basic I/O
Unit error
DENSITY
I/O ERR
A40212: 009A
Basic I/O
Unit Error
Flag
A408:
Basic I/O
Unit
error, slot
number
An error occurred in the data
Mount the I/O Unit in the Backplane.
exchange between the CPU Unit and If the error is not recurs, replace the
a Basic I/O Unit.
I/O Unit.
Note: A408 contains the slot number where the error occurred.
Battery
error
BATT LOW
A40204: 00F7
Battery
Error Flag
---
This error occurs when the PLC
Setup has been set to detect battery
errors and the CPU Unit’s backup
battery is missing or its voltage has
dropped.
CS-series CPU BU
CPU Bus STUP
Unit Setup
error
A40203: 0400 to
CS-series 040F
CPU Bus
Unit Setting Error
Flag
A427:
CSseries
CPU Bus
Unit Setting
Error,
Unit
Number
Flags
An installed CS-series CPU Bus Unit Change the registered I/O tables.
does not match the CS-series CPU
Bus Unit registered in the I/O table.
The corresponding flag in A427 will
be ON. Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
unit numbers 0 to F.
Special
I/O Unit
Setup
error
SIOU
SETUP
A40202: 0500 to
Special
055F
I/O Unit
Setting
Error Flag
A428 to
A433:
Special
I/O Unit
Setting
Error,
Unit
Number
Flags
An installed Special I/O Unit does
not match the Special I/O Unit registered in the I/O table.
The corresponding flag in A428 to
A433 will be ON. Bits A42800 to
A43315 correspond to unit numbers
0 to 95.
Interrupt
task error
INTRPT
ERR
A40213: 008B
Interrupt
Task
Error Flag
A426:
Interrupt
Task
Error,
Task
Number
An attempt was made to refresh I/O
for a Special I/O Unit with IORF(097)
within an interrupt task while cyclic
I/O refresh processing was being
performed for the same Special I/O
Unit. Detecting interrupt task errors
must be enabled in the PLC Setup to
detect this error (redundant refreshing).
Check battery and replace if necessary. Change the PLC Setup setting
if battery-free operation is being
used.
Review the program and either disable detecting interrupt task errors or
prevent redundant refreshing from
occurring.
405
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Other Errors
Error
flags in
Auxiliary
Area
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
POWER
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL
COMM
Lit green.
Lit green.
----Not lit.
---
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
POWER
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL
COMM
Lit green.
Lit green.
------Not lit.
Error
code
(in
A400)
Flags
and
word
data
Error
Probable cause
Possible remedy
----
----
----
Peripheral
Port Communications Error
A communications error has
occurred in communications with
the device connected to the
peripheral port if
the indicators
have the status
shown at the left.
Check the PRPHL setting on the Duplex Unit
or the DIP switch setting
on the CPU Unit and the
peripheral port settings
in the PLC Setup. Also
check the cable connections.
----
----
----
RS-232C
Port Communications Error
A communications error has
occurred in communications with
the device connected to the RS232C port if the
indicators have
the status shown
at the left.
Check the COMM setting on the Duplex Unit
or the DIP switch setting
on the CPU Unit, and
also the RS-232C port
settings in the PLC
Setup. Also check the
cable connections. If a
host computer is connected, check the communications settings of
the serial port on the
host computer and the
communications program in the host computer.
10-2-5 Error Codes
The following table list error in order of severity, with the most serious error
given first. When more than one error occurs at the same time, the most serious error code will be stored in A400.
Rank
Programming
Console display
1
Memory error
MEMORY ERR
2
I/O bus errors
I/O BUS ERR *
(See note 1.)
3
4
5
I/O BUS ERR B
I/O BUS ERR C
UNIT NO. DPL ERR
RACK NO. DPL ERR
TOO MANY I/O PNT
6
Duplicated
number errors
Too many I/O
points
I/O setting error I/O SET ERR
7
Program error
8
Cycle time
CYCLE TIME ERR
overrun error
FALS execution SYS FAIL FALS ***
(See note 2.)
Duplex verifica- DPL VERIFY ERR
tion error
(See note 6.)
Duplex bus
DPL BUS ERR
error
(See note 6.)
Duplex power
PS ERR x-y
error
(See note 3.)
Duplex commu- NET DPL ERR *
nications error (See note 4.)
9
10
11
12
13
406
Error
PROGRAM ERR
Error flag
A40115
Memory Error Flag
A40114
I/O Bus Error Flag
Code
stored
in A400
80F1
80C0 to
80C7,
80CF
80CC
A40113
Duplicated Number Flag
A40111
Too Many I/O Points Flag
A40110
I/O Setting Error Flag
A40109
Program Error Flag
A40108
Cycle Time Overrun Flag
A40106
FALS Error Flag
A40214, A31600
80E9
80EA
80E1
A40214, A31601
0010
A40214, A31602
0003
A40214, A31603
0600 to
060F
80E0
80F0
809F
C101 to
C2FF
0011
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Rank
Programming
Console display
SYS FAIL FAL ***
(See note 2.)
INTRPT ERR
14
FAL execution
15
Interrupt task
error
Basic I/O Unit
DENSITY I/O ERR
error
PLC Setup set- PC SETUP ERR
ting error
16
17
18
I/O verification
error
CPU Bus Unit
error
Special I/O Unit
error
I/O VRFY ERR
21
Battery error
BATT LOW
22
CPU Bus Unit
setting error
CPU BU STUP **
(See note 5.)
23
Special I/O Unit SIOU SETUP **
setting error
(See note 5.)
19
20
Note
Error
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CPU BU ERR **
(See note 5.)
SIOU ERR **
(See note 5.)
Error flag
A40215
FAL Error Flag
A40213: Interrupt Task
Error Flag
A40212
Basic I/O Unit Error Flag
A40210
PLC Setup Setting Error
Flag
A40209
I/O Verification Error Flag
A40207
CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
A40206
Special I/O Unit Error Flag
A40204
Battery Error Flag
A40203
CPU Bus Unit Setting
Error Flag
A40202
Special I/O Unit Setting
Error Flag
Code
stored
in A400
4101 to
42FF
008B
009A
009B
00E7
0200 to
020F
0300 to
035F,
03FF
00F7
0400 to
040F
0500 to
055F
* = Rack number
*** = FAL or FALS number
x-y: x = Rack number, y = L for left or R for right
* = Unit number
** = Unit number
These errors occur only for Duplex CPU Systems.
407
Section 10-2
Error Processing
10-2-6 Duplex Check
Errors Causing Operation
to Switch to Standby CPU
Unit (Duplex CPU Systems
Only)
CPU STATUS indicator for active
CPU Unit lights.
Operation switched to Simplex Mode.
Take countermeasures for CPU Unit
where the error occurred.
Error
eliminated?
Yes
No
Switch the switch for the CPU
Unit where the error remains to
NO USE.
Replace the CPU Unit.
Switch the switch for the new CPU
Unit to USE.
Is
automatic
recovery to Duplex Mode
set in the PLC
Setup?
No
Press the initialization
button.
Operation should restart in
Duplex Mode.
408
Yes
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Duplication
Verification Errors
(Duplex CPU Systems
Only)
DPL STATUS indicator flashes red.
Duplex verification error (to Simplex Mode)
Check
A31714 (no active
CPU Unit) from Programming
Device. ON or
OFF?
ON
OFF
Turn the power supply OFF.
Be sure the active CPU Unit switch is set
and do not use the Simple Backup Mode.
Turn the power supply back ON.
Check
A31707/A31710
from Programming Device.
Either one
ON?
One or more ON
Turn OFF the power supply.
Both OFF
Check the Inner Board model numbers
and installation if A31710 is ON or
replace the CPU Unit if A31707 is ON.
Turn the power supply back ON.
Check
A31708 from
Programming Device.
ON?
ON
OFF
Replace the standby CPU Unit with a
CPU of a unit version higher than that of
the active CPU Unit or do not use any
functions on the active CPU Unit not
supported by the standby CPU Unit.
Check A31713 (Parameter Area verification
error) and A31715 (user program verification
error) from Programming Device.
Transfer the user program and parameter
area data (PLC Setup, I/O tables, etc.) to
active CPU Unit.
Press the initialization button.
DPL
STATUS indicator
still flashing red?
No
Yes
Replace the Duplex Unit.
Operation should restart in Duplex Mode.
409
Section 10-2
Error Processing
Duplex Bus Errors
(Duplex CPU Systems
Only)
DPL STATUS indicator lit red.
Duplex bus error (to Simplex Mode)
Turn power supply OFF and then ON.
DPL
STATUS indicator
still flashing
red?
Yes
No
Operation should restart in Duplex Mode.
Replace the Duplex Unit.
Duplex Power Supply
Errors
Duplex Power Supply Error Flag
(A31602) is ON.
Check the location of the Power Supply
Unit by reading A319 and A320 from a
Programming Console.
Follow the procedure in 10-2-7
Power Supply Check and correct
any problems with the power
supply connection.
Replace the Power Supply Unit.
Clear error.
Error
cleared?
No
410
Yes
Restart operation.
Section 10-2
Error Processing
10-2-7 Power Supply Check
Power indicator not lit.
Is power being
supplied?
No
Power Supply Unit Power supply voltage
Allowable voltage range
CS1D-PA207R 100 to 120 V AC
200 to 240 V AC
CS1D-PD024 24 V DC
CS1D-PD025 24 V DC
85 to 132 V AC
170 to 264 V AC
19.2 to 28.8 V DC
19.2 to 28.8 V DC
Connect power supply.
Yes
Not lit
Lit
Is Power indicator lit?
Is voltage selector
set correctly?
No
Note Always remove the short
jumper before supplying 200 to
240 VAC. The Power Supply
Unit will be destroyed if 200 to
240 VAC is supply with the
jumper connected.
100 to 120 VAC: Shorted
200 to 240 VAC: Open
Yes
or
Is there no power supply selector?
No
Yes
Is Power indicator lit?
Power supply
voltage in acceptable
range?
Yes
Set supply voltage within
acceptable limits.
No
Not lit
Lit
Is Power indicator lit?
Are there any loose
terminal screws or broken
wires?
Yes
Tighten screws or
replace wires.
No
Not lit
Lit
Is Power indicator lit?
Replace the Power
Supply Unit.
End
411
Section 10-2
Error Processing
10-2-8 Memory Error Check
Memory error occurred.
A40309
(autotransfer at
startup error)
ON?
Conditions have not been met for
automatic transfer at startup. Confirm
that the required files are on the
Memory Card and the pin 2 on the
DIP switch is OFF.
ON
OFF
The write life of the flash memory has
been exceeded. Replace the CPU Unit.
ON
A40310 (flash
memory error)
ON?
OFF
Battery connected?
No
Yes
Battery-free
operation
necessary?
Yes
Check to see if battery-free operation has
been set correctly. Retransfer the user
program and parameters and set the PLC
Setup so that battery errors are not
detected.
No
Mount a Battery.
Power
turned OFF during
backup (with BKUP
lit)?
Yes
No
If power was turned OFF during the
backup operation, retransfer the user
program and parameters.
Turn ON the power
supply.
Operation
normal?
Yes
It's possible that noise or
other temporary factory
caused the error. Check
the operating environment
if necessary.
412
No
There may be a hardware error in
internal memory. Replace the CPU
Unit.
Section 10-2
Error Processing
10-2-9 Program Error Check
Program error occurred.
The specified task does not exist.
A29512 (Task
Error Flag) ON?
ON
Task that stopped
program (A294)?
#FFFF Check the pairing of the TKON and
TKOF instructions.
Not #FFFF
OFF
There is no END(001) in the task that
stopped the program (A294). Add
END(001).
ON
A29511 (No END
Flag) ON?
OFF
A29508 to A29510
(instruction error
flags) ON?
The program was stopped for the PLC Setup
setting to stop the program for instruction
errors. Check the program based on the task
(A294) and address (A298 and A299) that
stopped the program.
ON
OFF
Turn the power supply OFF and then back ON
again.
10-2-10 Cycle Time Overrun Error Check
The cycle time was too long.
OFF
Anticipated cycle time
less than PLC Setup
monitor setting?
Executing the program resulted in
exceeding the monitor time. Set the
maximum cycle time (Watch Cycle Time)
in the PLC Setup.
ON
There may be a bug in the program. Check
the program in all tasks. Check FOR/LOOP
and JMP, CJP, and CPN.
10-2-11 PLC Setup Setting Error Check
PLC Setup setting error occurred.
PC Setup written
from Programming
Console?
Yes
The setting indicated by the contents
of A406 is illegal. Check the setting
from a Programming Console.
No
A communications error may have occurred
during data transfer from the CXProgrammer. Retransfer the PLC Setup.
413
Section 10-2
Error Processing
10-2-12 Battery Error Check
Battery error occurred.
Battery-free operation
required?
Set the PLC Setup so that battery
errors are not detected. (DM Area
contents may be unstable when this
setting is used.)
Refer to the CS/CJ Programming
Manual for details.
Yes
No
The Battery is missing or the voltage
has dropped. Replace the Battery.
10-2-13 Environmental Conditions Check
Environmental conditions check
Is the ambient
temperature below
55°C?
No
Consider using a fan or
cooler.
Yes
Is the ambient
temperature above
0°C?
No
Consider using a heater.
Yes
Is the ambient humidity
between 10% and
90%?
No
Consider using an air
conditioner.
Yes
Is noise being
controlled?
No
Install surge protectors or
other noise-reducing
equipment at noise sources.
Yes
Is the installation
environment okay?
Yes
Is there
vibration?
End
414
No
(See note.)
Check the structure of the
panel and the installation
site.
Note: Check for corrosive gases,
flammable gases, dust, dirt,
salts, metal dust, direct light,
water, oils, and chemicals.
Install the PLC where there
is less vibration.
Section 10-2
Error Processing
10-2-14 I/O Check
The I/O check flowchart is based on the following ladder diagram section
assuming that SOL1 does not turn ON.
(LS1)
000002
(LS1)
000003
000500
SOL1
000500
Start
NO
Indicator of
000500 normal?
YES
Check terminal voltage
of 000500 with tester
Replace terminal block
connector
Correct wiring
YES
NO
YES
ABNORMAL
Output wiring
correct?
Voltage normal?
Monitor ON/OFF status of
000500 with Programming
Device
Replace fuse
NO
Faulty terminal block
connector contact?
Is the blown fuse
indicator lit?
NO
YES
NORMAL
NORMAL
(Units
with
internal
fuse)
Disconnect external wiring
and check terminal voltage of
000500 with tester
NORMAL
Voltage normal?
ABNORMAL
Operation OK?
ABNORMAL
(Unit
without
fuse)
Check output device SOL1
Indicators of inputs
(000002, 000003)
normal?
Replace Output Unit
NO
YES
Check terminal voltages of
000002 and 000003 with
tester
Check terminal voltages of
000002 and 000003 with
tester
Voltage normal?
ABNORMAL
Voltage normal?
NORMAL
YES
NORMAL
Faulty, terminal
block connector
contact?
Input wiring correct?
YES
NO
ABNORMAL
Operation OK?
Correctly wire
NO
NO
ABNORMAL
Remove external wiring
and mount Dummy Input
Unit to check
Terminal screws
loose?
YES
Tighten
Replace terminal
block connector
NORMAL
Replace Input Unit
Check LS1 and LS2
Replace Input Unit
Return to START
415
Section 10-3
Troubleshooting Racks and Units
10-3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units
CPU Racks and Standard Expansion Racks
Symptom
POWER indicator is not lit on Power
Supply Unit.
Cause
PCB short-circuited or damaged.
RUN indicator is not lit on CPU Unit
Remedy
Replace Power Supply Unit or Backplane.
(1) Error in program.
(2) Power line is faulty.
RUN output does not turn ON on Power Internal circuitry of Power Supply Unit
Supply Unit.
is faulty.
RUN indicator lit on CPU Unit.
Serial Communications Unit or CS(1) The I/O Connecting Cable is faulty.
series CPU Bus Unit does not operate (2) The I/O bus is faulty.
or malfunctions.
Correct program.
Replace Power Supply Unit.
Replace Power Supply Unit.
Replace the I/O Connecting Cable.
Replace the Backplane.
Bits do not operate past a certain point.
Error occurs in units of 8 or 16 points.
I/O bit turns ON.
All bits in one Unit do not turn ON.
Special I/O Units
Refer to the Operation Manual for the Special I/O Unit to troubleshoot any
other errors.
Symptom
Cause
The ERH and RUN
I/O refreshing is not being performed for the
indicators on the Spe- Unit from the CPU Unit (CPU Unit monitoring
cial I/O Unit are lit.
error).
It’s possible that cyclic refreshing has been disabled for the Special I/O Unit in the Cyclic
Refresh Disable Setting in the PLC Setup (i.e.,
the bit corresponding to the unit number has
been set to 1).
Remedy
Change the bit corresponding to the unit number to 0 to enable cyclic refreshing, or make
sure that the Unit is refreshed from the program
using IORF at least once every 11 s.
Long-distance Expansion Racks
Symptom
Expansion Rack not
detected.
I/O bus error or I/O verification error occurs.
416
Cause
(1) A Terminator is not connected.
Remedy
If the TERM indicator is lit, connect a Terminator.
(2) An Expansion Rack is not connected
correctly.
Recheck the connections and configuration
using information in 2-2-2 Expansion Racks
and 2-10-1 CS1W-IC102 I/O Control Units,
I/O Interface Units, and Terminators.
(3) A Unit is faulty.
Gradually remove/replace Units to determine the Unit that is faulty, including the
Backplane, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units,
I/O Control/Interface Unit, and I/O Connecting Cable.
(1) An I/O Connecting Cable or Terminator
connection is faulty.
(2) Noise or other external factor.
Check that I/O Connecting Cables and Terminators are connected correctly.
Separate all cables from possible sources of
noise or place them in metal ducts.
(3) A Unit is faulty.
Gradually remove/replace Units to determine the Unit that is faulty, including the
Backplane, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units,
I/O Control/Interface Unit, and I/O Connecting Cable.
Section 10-3
Troubleshooting Racks and Units
Symptom
Cycle time is too long.
Cause
(1) A CPU Bus Unit that is allocated many
words (e.g., Controller Link Unit) is
mounted to a Long-distance Expansion
Rack.
Remedy
Move the CPU Bus Unit to the CPU Rack.
(2) A Unit is faulty.
Gradually remove/replace Units to determine the Unit that is faulty, including the
Backplane, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units,
I/O Control/Interface Unit, and I/O Connecting Cable.
I/O Control Unit and I/O Inter- This is not an error. These Units are not allo- --face Units do not appear on cated I/O words and thus are not registered
CX-Programmer I/O table.
in the I/O tables.
Input Units
Symptom
Cause
Not all inputs turn ON or indi- (1) Power is not supplied to Input Unit.
cators are not lit.
(2) Supply voltage is low.
(3) Terminal block mounting screws are
loose.
(4) Faulty contact of terminal block connector.
Remedy
Supply power
Adjust supply voltage to within rated range.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Not all inputs turn ON (indica- Input circuit is faulty. (There is a short at the
tor lit).
load or something else that caused an overcurrent to flow.)
Not all inputs turn OFF.
Input circuit is faulty.
Specific bit does not turn ON. (1) Input device is faulty.
(2) Input wiring disconnected.
(3) Terminal block screws are loose.
(4) Faulty terminal block connector contact.
(5) Too short ON time of external input.
(6) Faulty input circuit
(7) Input bit number is used for output
instruction.
Replace Unit.
Specific bit does not turn
OFF.
(1) Input circuit is faulty.
(2) Input bit number is used for output
instruction.
Replace Unit.
Correct program.
Input irregularly turns
ON/OFF.
(1) External input voltage is low or unstable. Adjust external input voltage to within rated
range.
(2) Malfunction due to noise.
Take protective measures against noise,
such as:
(1) Increase input response time (PLC
Setup)
(2) Install surge suppressor.
(3) Install insulation transformer.
(4) Install shielded cables between the Input
Unit and the loads.
(3) Terminal block screws are loose.
(4) Faulty terminal block connector contact.
Error occurs in units of
(1) Common terminal screws are loose.
8 points or 16 points, i.e., for (2) Faulty terminal block connector contact.
the same common.
(3) Faulty data bus
(4) Faulty CPU
Input indicator is not lit in nor- Faulty indicator or indicator circuit.
mal operation.
Replace Unit.
Replace input devices.
Check input wiring.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Adjust input device.
Replace Unit.
Correct program.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Replace Unit.
Replace CPU.
Replace Unit.
417
Section 10-3
Troubleshooting Racks and Units
Output Units
Symptom
Not all outputs turn ON.
Cause
Load is not supplied with power.
Load voltage is low.
Terminal block screws are loose.
Faulty terminal block connector contact.
An overcurrent (possibly caused by a
short at the load) resulted in a blown
fuse in the Output Unit. (Some Output
Units provide an indicator for blown
fuses.)
(6) Faulty I/O bus connector contact.
(7) Output circuit is faulty.
(8) If the INH indicator is lit, the Output OFF
Bit (A50015) is ON.
Remedy
Supply power
Adjust voltage to within rated range.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Replace fuse or Unit.
Output circuit is faulty.
(1) Output ON time too short because of a
mistake in programming.
Replace Unit.
Correct program to increase the time that
the output is ON.
(2) Bit status controlled by multiple instructions.
(3) Faulty output circuit.
Output of a specific bit num- (1) Faulty output device.
ber does not turn ON (indica- (2) Break in output wiring.
tor lit).
(3) Loose terminal block screws.
(4) Faulty terminal block connector faulty.
(5) Faulty output bit.
Correct program so that each output bit is
controlled by only one instruction.
Replace Unit.
Replace output device.
Check output wiring.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Replace relay or Unit.
Not all outputs turn OFF.
Output of a specific bit number does not turn ON or indicator is not lit.
Output of a specific bit number does not turn OFF (indicator is not lit).
Output of a specific bit number does not turn OFF (indicator lit).
Output irregularly turns
ON/OFF.
Error occurs in units of
8 points or 16 points, i.e., for
the same common.
Output indicator is not lit
(operation is normal).
418
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Replace Unit.
Replace Unit.
Turn A50015 OFF.
(6) Faulty output circuit.
(1) Faulty output bit.
(2) Bit does not turn OFF due to leakage
current or residual voltage.
(1) Bit status controlled by multiple instructions.
Replace Unit.
Replace relay or Unit.
Replace external load or add dummy resistor.
Correct program.
(2) Faulty output circuit.
(1) Low or unstable load voltage.
(2) Bit status controlled by multiple instructions.
Replace Unit.
Adjust load voltage to within rated range.
Correct program so that each output bit is
controlled by only one instruction.
(3) Malfunction due to noise.
Protective measures against noise:
(1) Install surge suppressor.
(2) Install insulation transformer.
(3) Use shielded cables between the Output
Unit and the loads.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Replace fuse or Unit.
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Terminal block screws are loose.
Faulty terminal block connector contact.
Loose common terminal screw.
Faulty terminal block connector contact.
An overcurrent (possibly caused by a
short at the load) resulted in a blown
fuse in the Output Unit.
(4) Faulty data bus.
(5) Faulty CPU.
Replace Unit.
Replace CPU.
Faulty indicator.
Replace Unit.
Section 10-4
Troubleshooting Errors in Duplex Connecting Cables
10-4 Troubleshooting Errors in Duplex Connecting Cables
10-4-1 Identifying and Correcting the Cause of the Error
When a duplexed Connecting Cable is disconnected or damaged, the location
of the error can be identified with Auxiliary Area flags (in A270 and A271), the
CS1D I/O Control Unit LED indicators, and the CS1D I/O Interface Unit LED
indicators.
Note The CPU Unit’s alarm output (alarm display) does not indicate the error.
■
Error Indications for a Disconnected/Damaged Connecting Cable
In this example, there is an error in the Connecting Cable between Rack 1,
slot 0 and Rack 2, so the corresponding flag in A270 (A27002) is turned ON.
The flag for the same slot in the following Rack (A27004) is also turned ON.
Since the error occurred in a Connecting Cable after Rack 1, the Duplex Communications Cable Status Flags are OFF for the connections between Rack 1
and Rack 2 (A27101) and between Rack 2 and Rack 3 (A27102).
The CS1D I/O Control Unit and CS1D I/O Interface Unit LED indicators all
indicate errors in the side where the break occurred. The CABLE ERR L Indicator is lit red in the Units above the break and the CABLE ERR R Indicator is
lit red in the Units below the break.
Error between Rack 1, slot 0 and Rack 2
Error between Rack 2, slot 0 and Rack 3
A270 (Duplex Communications Cable
Error Flags)
= 0014
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Left slot
Right slot
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
RDY
RDY
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
CPU Rack
(Rack 0)
RDY
CABLE ERR R
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
RDY
CABLE ERR R
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
Expansion
Rack
(Rack 1)
RDY
CABLE ERR R
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
RDY
CABLE ERR R
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
Expansion
Rack
(Rack 2)
RDY
CABLE ERR R
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
RDY
CABLE ERR R
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
Errors are displayed
in all Racks after the
Expansion Rack break.
(Rack 3)
Break is below
these Racks.
Location of break
Break is above
these Racks.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
A271 (Duplex Communications Cable Status Flags)
= 0001
Indicates that the Connecting Cables are not duplexed
between Rack 1 and Rack 2, and between Rack 2 and Rack 3.
419
Section 10-4
Troubleshooting Errors in Duplex Connecting Cables
■
Error Indications When an Expansion Unit is Removed
In this example, the Expansion Unit in Rack 1, slot 0 is removed, so the
affected slot 0 flags in A270 (A27002, A27004, and A27006) are turned ON.
The Duplex Communications Cable Status Flags are turned OFF for the all of
the Racks (A27100 to A27102).
The CS1D I/O Control Unit and CS1D I/O Interface Unit LED indicators all
indicate errors in the side where the error occurred. The CABLE ERR L Indicator is lit red in the Units above the error and the CABLE ERR R Indicator is
lit red in the Units below the error.
There are errors in slot 0 of all Racks.
A270 (Duplex Communications
Cable Error Flags)
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
= 0015
Left slot
Error is below
these Racks.
Right slot
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
RDY
RDY
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
CPU Rack
(Rack 0)
RDY
CABLE ERR R
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
RDY
CABLE ERR R
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
Expansion
Rack
(Rack 1)
RDY
CABLE ERR R
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
RDY
CABLE ERR R
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
RDY
CABLE ERR R
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
RDY
CABLE ERR R
CABLE ERR L
END RACK
Location of error
Error is above
these Racks.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Expansion
Rack
(Rack 2)
Expansion
Rack (Rack 3)
Errors are displayed in
all Racks after the
error location.
A271 (Duplex Communications Cable Status Flags)
= 0000
Indicates that the Connecting Cables are not duplexed between any of the Racks.
■
Troubleshooting Connecting Cable and Expansion Unit Problems
Once the error location has been identified, use the remedy described in the
following table to correct the error.
Cause
Disconnected Connecting Cable
Bad cable connection
420
Remedy
Connect the cable that is disconnected.
Disconnect the cable and then connect it again.
If an error occurs when the cable is reconnected, replace the cable.
Note If the cable to the other slot is disconnected, the PLC will stop.
Section 10-4
Troubleshooting Errors in Duplex Connecting Cables
Cause
Remedy
Cable IN/OUT connections are
reversed.
Connect the Connecting Cables properly.
If either cable is connected to the wrong side
when the power supply is turned ON, an I/O bus
error C will occur and the PLC will not operate.
Note If the cable to the other slot is disconnected, the PLC will stop.
Faulty Expansion Unit
Replace the Expansion Unit. Refer to 11-6
Replacement of Expansion Units for details.
Note If the cable to the other slot is disconnected, the PLC will stop.
421
Troubleshooting Errors in Duplex Connecting Cables
422
Section 10-4
SECTION 11
Inspection and Maintenance
This section provides inspection and maintenance information.
11-1 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
424
11-1-1 Inspection Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
424
11-1-2 Unit Replacement Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
425
11-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
426
11-2-1 Battery Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
426
11-3 Replacing a CPU Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
11-3-1 Replacement Flowchart after Switch to Standby CPU Unit. . . . . . .
432
11-3-2 CPU Unit Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
433
11-4 Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units . .
435
11-4-1 Replacing One Unit at a Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
435
11-4-2 Replacing More than One Unit at a Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
440
11-4-3 Error Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
441
11-4-4 Online Replacement Precautions for Special I/O and CPU Bus Units
442
11-4-5 Online Replacement without a Programming Device . . . . . . . . . . .
448
11-5 Replacing Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
455
11-6 Replacement of Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
455
11-7 Replacing the Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
457
423
Section 11-1
Inspections
11-1 Inspections
Daily or periodic inspections are required in order to maintain the CS1D’s
functions in peak operating condition.
11-1-1 Inspection Points
The major electronic components in CS1D PLCs are semiconductor components, which although have an extremely long life time, can deteriorate under
improper environmental conditions. Periodic inspections are thus required to
ensure that the required conditions are being kept.
Inspection is recommended at least once every six months to a year, but more
frequent inspections will be necessary in adverse environments.
Take immediate steps to correct the situation if any of the conditions in the following table are not met.
Inspection Points
No.
Item
1
Source Power
Supply
Inspection
Criteria
Check for voltage fluctuations The voltage must be within
at the power supply terminals. the allowable voltage fluctuation range.
(See note.)
2
I/O Power Supply
Check for voltage fluctuations Voltages must be within
Use a voltage tester to check the
at the I/O terminals.
specifications for each Unit. power supply at the terminals. Take
necessary steps to bring voltage
fluctuations within limits.
3
Ambient environ- Check the ambient temperament
ture. (Inside the control panel
if the PLC is in a control
panel.)
424
0 to 55°C
Action
Use a voltage tester to check the
power supply at the terminals. Take
necessary steps to bring voltage
fluctuations within limits.
Use a thermometer to check the
temperature and ensure that the
ambient temperature remains
within the allowed range of 0 to
55°C.
Check the ambient humidity.
Relative humidity must be
(Inside the control panel if the 10% to 90% with no conPLC is in a control panel.)
densation.
Use a hygrometer to check the
humidity and ensure that the ambient humidity remains within the
allowed range.
Check that the PLC is not in
direct sunlight.
Not in direct sunlight
Protect the PLC if necessary.
Check for accumulation of
dirt, dust, salt, metal filings,
etc.
No accumulation
Clean and protect the PLC if necessary.
Check for water, oil, or chemi- No spray on the PLC
cal sprays hitting the PLC.
Clean and protect the PLC if necessary.
Check for corrosive or flamNo corrosive or flammable
mable gases in the area of the gases
PLC.
Check by smell or use a sensor.
Check the level of vibration or Vibration and shock must
shock.
be within specifications.
Install cushioning or shock absorbing equipment if necessary.
Check for noise sources near
the PLC.
Either separate the PLC and noise
source or protect the PLC.
No significant noise
sources
Section 11-1
Inspections
No.
Item
4
Installation and
wiring
5
User-serviceable parts
Inspection
Check that each Unit is
installed securely.
Check that cable connectors
are fully inserted and locked.
Criteria
No looseness
Check for loose screws in
external wiring.
No looseness
Check crimp connectors in
external wiring.
Check for damaged external
wiring cables.
Adequate spacing between Check visually and adjust if necesconnectors
sary.
No damage
Check visually and replace cables if
necessary.
No looseness
Check whether the CS1WLife expectancy is 5 years
BAT01 Battery has reached its at 25°C, less at higher temservice life.
peratures.
(From 0.4 to 5 years
depending on model,
power supply rate, and
ambient temperature.)
Action
Tighten loose screws with a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Correct any improperly installed
connectors.
Tighten loose screws with a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Replace the battery when its service life has passed even if a battery error has not occurred.
(Battery life depends upon the
model, the percentage of time in
service, and ambient conditions.)
Note The following table shows the allowable voltage fluctuation ranges for source
power supplies.
Supply voltage
100 to 120 V AC
200 to 240 V AC
24 V DC
Allowable voltage range
85 to 132 V AC
170 to 264 V AC
19.2 to 28.8 V DC
Tools Required for Inspections
Required Tools
• Slotted and Phillips-head screwdrivers
• Voltage tester or digital voltmeter
• Industrial alcohol and clean cotton cloth
Tools Required Occasionally
• Synchroscope
• Oscilloscope with pen plotter
• Thermometer and hygrometer (humidity meter)
11-1-2 Unit Replacement Precautions
Check the following when replacing any faulty Unit.
• Either do not replace a Unit until the power is turned OFF or perform one
of the following.
Replacing a CPU Unit
Replacing a Basic I/O
Unit, Special I/O Unit, or
CPU Bus Unit
Replacing a Power Supply Unit
Set the switch on the Duplex Unit to “NO USE” and
turn OFF the power supply only to the CPU Unit
being replaced. (Duplex CPU Systems only)
Perform the online Unit replacement operation from
the CX-Programmer or from a Programming Console.
Turn OFF the power supply to the Power Supply Unit
being replaced.
425
Section 11-2
Replacing User-serviceable Parts
Replacing a Duplex Unit
(Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System only)
Replacing an Expansion
Unit
(Duplex CPU, Dual I/O
Expansion System with
duplex Connection
Cables only)
Set the DPL Switch on the front of the Duplex Unit to
NO USE and turn OFF the power supply to the
Duplex Unit only.
Disconnect the cables to the Expansion Unit and
remove the Expansion Unit.
Note Before replacing an Expansion Unit, verify
that the cable to the other slot is functioning
properly.
• Check the new Unit to make sure that there are no errors.
• If a faulty Unit is being returned for repair, describe the problem in as
much detail as possible, enclose this description with the Unit, and return
the Unit to your OMRON representative.
• For poor contact, take a clean cotton cloth, soak the cloth in industrial
alcohol, and carefully wipe the contacts clean. Be sure to remove any lint
prior to remounting the Unit.
Note
1. When replacing a CPU Unit, be sure that not only the user program but
also all other data required for operation is transferred to or set in the new
CPU Unit before starting operation, including DM Area and HR Area settings. If data area and other data are not correct for the user program, unexpected accidents may occur. Be sure to include the routing tables,
Controller Link Unit data link tables, network parameters, and other CPU
Bus Unit data, which are stored as parameters in the CPU Unit. Refer to
the CPU Bus Unit and Special I/O Unit operation manuals for details on the
data required by each Unit.
2. The simple backup operation can be used to store the user program and
all parameters for the CS1D CPU Unit, DeviceNet Units, Serial Communications Units, and other specific Units in a Memory Card as backup files.
A Memory Card and the simple backup operation can be used to easily restore data after replacing any of these Units. Refer to the CS/CJ Series
Programming Manual (W394) for details.
11-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts
The following parts should be replaced periodically as preventative maintenance. The procedures for replacing these parts are described later in this
section.
• Battery (the CPU Unit’s RAM-backup battery)
11-2-1 Battery Replacement
Battery Functions
The battery retains the following data of the CPU Unit’s RAM when the main
power supply is OFF. This data will not be stable when the power supply is
turned OFF if a battery is not installed or the battery has expired its useful life.
• Retained regions of I/O memory (such as the Holding Area and DM Area)
Battery Service Life and Replacement Period
At 25°C, the maximum service life for batteries is 5 years whether or not
power is supplied to the CPU Unit while the battery is installed. The battery’s
lifetime will be shorter when it is used at higher temperatures and when power
is not supplied to the CPU Unit for long periods. In the worst case conditions,
the battery will last for only 1.8 years.
426
Section 11-2
Replacing User-serviceable Parts
The time that CPU power is ON shown in the following table (power supply
rate) is calculated as follows:
Power supply rate =
Total time power is ON/(total time power is ON + total time power is OFF)
The following table shows minimum lifetimes and typical lifetimes for the
backup battery.
Model
[email protected]@H
[email protected]
[email protected]
Time that
CPU Unit
power is ON
0%
30%
50%
70%
100%
0%
30%
50%
70%
626 days (1 yr, 8 mo)
886 days (2 yr, 5 mo)
1,225 days (3 yr, 4 mo)
1,825 days (5 yr)
1,825 days (5 yr)
780 days (2 yr, 1 mo)
1,101 days (3 yr)
1,519 days (4 yr, 1 mo)
1,825 days (5 yr)
100%
1,825 days (5 yr)
Note
Minimum lifetime
Typical lifetime
1,825 days (5 yr)
1,825 days (5 yr)
1,825 days (5 yr)
1,825 days (5 yr)
1,825 days (5 yr)
1,825 days (5 yr)
1,825 days (5 yr)
1,825 days (5 yr)
1,825 days (5 yr)
Min. time for
battery error
detection
626 days
886 days
1,225 days
1,825 days
1,825 days
780 days
1,101 days
1,519 days
1,825 days
Time from battery
error detection to
complete discharge
5 days
5 days
5 days
5 days
5 days
5 days
5 days
5 days
5 days
1,825 days (5 yr)
1,825 days
5 days
1. The minimum lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temperature of 55°C. The typical lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient
temperature of 25°C.
2. There is no difference between the minimum lifetimes and the minimum
times to battery error detection.
3. The battery lifetime and low battery voltage detection will vary under application at high power-supply rates.
2000
1800
Memory Backup Time (Days)
1600
1400
1200
1000
800
600
[email protected]@H/[email protected] (Minimum lifetime)
[email protected]@H/[email protected] (Typical lifetime)
[email protected] (Minimum lifetime)
[email protected] (Typical lifetime)
400
200
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
Power-supply rate (%)
Low Battery Indicators
If the PLC Setup has been set to detect a low-battery error, the ERR/ALM
indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash when the CPU Unit detects that
the battery is nearly discharged.
427
Section 11-2
Replacing User-serviceable Parts
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPHL COMM
When the ERR/ALM indicator flashes, connect the CX-Programmer to the
peripheral port and read the error message. If the message “BATT LOW”
appears on the Programming Console* and the Battery Error Flag (A40204) is
ON*, first check whether the battery is properly connected to the CPU Unit. If
the battery is properly connected, replace the battery as soon as possible.
BATT LOW
Once a low-battery error has been detected, it will take 5 days before the battery fails. Battery failure can be delayed by ensuring that the CPU Unit power
is not turned OFF until the battery has been replaced.
Note *The PLC Setup must be set to detect a low-battery error (Detect Low Battery). If this setting has not been made, the BATT LOW error message will not
appear on the Programming Console and the Battery Error Flag (A40204) will
not go ON when the battery fails.
Replacement Battery
Install a replacement battery within 2 years of the production date shown on
the battery’s label.
Use the following replacement battery: CS1W-BAT01 Battery Set
Production Date
CS1W-BAT01
02 − 6
Replacement Battery
Manufactured in June 2002.
The battery replacement method depends on whether a CPU Unit is used in a
duplex or simplex system, and on the CPU Unit’s unit version.
!Caution We recommend replacing the battery with the power OFF to prevent the CPU
Unit’s sensitive internal components from being damaged by static electricity.
The battery can be replaced with the power ON, but be sure to touch a
grounded metal object to discharge any static electricity before replacing the
battery. After replacing the battery, connect a Programming Device and clear
the battery error.
Unit Versions and Corresponding Battery Replacement Methods
Type
CPU Simplex System
Unit version
Unit Ver. 2.0
CPU Duplex System No unit version
Unit Ver. 1.1
Unit Ver. 1.2 or later
428
Number of
battery
connectors
Replacement
time (see note)
Replacement method
1
3 min.
Refer to Replacement Procedure
for CS1-H (Pre-Ver. 2.0 and Ver.
2.0) CPU Units with One Battery
Connectors.
1
3 min.
Refer to Replacement Procedure
for CPU Units with One Battery
Connector.
2
3 min.
Refer to Replacement Procedure
for CPU Units with Two Battery
Connectors.
Replacing User-serviceable Parts
Section 11-2
Replacement Procedure for CPU Units with One Battery Connector
Use the following procedure to replace a battery that has been completely discharged.
1,2,3...
1. Turn OFF the power to the CPU Unit. (If the power was already OFF, turn
the power ON for at least one minute before turning the power OFF again.)
Note There is a capacitor in the CPU Unit that will back up memory while the battery is being replaced. If this capacitor is not completely charged by turning
ON the power supply for one minute, data will not be stable during battery
replacement.
2. Insert a small flat-blade screwdriver into the notch at the bottom of the battery compartment cover and lift open the cover.
3. Disconnect the connector under the cover of the CPU Unit, remove the old
battery from the compartment, and replace the battery with a new one.
Note Complete the battery replacement procedure (at an ambient temperature of
25°C) within three minutes of turning OFF the power supply. If more than
three minutes elapse without a battery installed in the CPU Unit, data will not
be stable during battery replacement.
Replacement Procedure for CPU Units with Two Battery Connectors
Use the following procedure to replace a battery that has been completely discharged.
When replacing a battery with the power OFF, connect the new battery while
the old battery is in place. Remove the old battery after connecting the new
battery. (There are two pairs of identical connectors for the battery. The old
battery will not be charged even if the new battery is connected at the same
time.)
1,2,3...
1. Turn OFF the power to the CPU Unit. (If the power was already OFF, turn
the power ON for at least ten seconds before turning the power OFF
again.)
2. Insert a small flat-blade screwdriver into the notch at the bottom of the battery compartment cover and lift open the cover.
429
Section 11-2
Replacing User-serviceable Parts
3. Remove the old battery from the compartment, but leave its connector connected.
Old battery
Leave connected.
Old battery
4. Insert the new battery into the battery compartment with the cable and
connector facing outward.
Battery compartment
New battery
New battery
Old battery
5. With the old battery connected, insert the new battery’s connector in the
open connector in the CPU Unit. Be sure that the connector is inserted so
that its red wire is at the top and the white wire is at the bottom.
New battery
Old battery
Old battery
430
Section 11-2
Replacing User-serviceable Parts
6. Remove the old battery’s connector.
Old battery
7. Push the new battery’s wire into the battery compartment and close the
cover.
8. Connect a Programming Device and verify that the Battery Error has been
cleared.
Note
1. With CPU Units Ver. 1.2 or later in a Duplex CPU System, even if this procedure is not used and the old battery is disconnected with the power OFF
(power OFF and no battery connected), memory will be backed up for a
short time by an internal capacitor. In this case, the internal capacitor will
discharge within approximately 30 s after the power is turned OFF, so be
sure to connect the new battery immediately.
2. If the above procedure is not used and the old battery is disconnected with
the power ON (power ON and no battery connected), memory will still be
backed up. However, be sure to touch a grounded metal object to discharge any static electricity before replacing the battery.
3. With CPU Units that have two battery connectors, leave the old battery attached while connecting the new battery. This prevents a battery error occurring during battery replacement. Remove the old battery after the new
battery is connected.
!Caution Do not short the battery terminals or charge, disassemble, heat, or incinerate
the battery. Do not subject the battery to strong shocks. Doing any of these
may result in leakage, rupture, heat generation, or ignition of the battery.
!Caution Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subjected to excessive shock. Batteries that have been subjected to shock may
leak if they are used.
!Caution Do not allow unqualified persons to replace batteries. UL standards required
that batteries be replaced only by experienced technicians.
431
Section 11-3
Replacing a CPU Unit
!Caution Turn ON the power after replacing the battery for a CPU Unit that has been
unused for a long time. Leaving the CPU Unit unused again without turning
ON the power even once after the battery is replaced may result in a shorter
battery life.
11-3 Replacing a CPU Unit
If the active CPU Unit fails during operation in a Duplex CPU System, the
standby CPU Unit will switch to become the active CPU Unit and operation
will continue. Use the following procedure to replace the faulty CPU Unit and
restore duplex operation.
Online Unit replacement is not possible for a CPU Unit in a Single CPU System. Turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before replacing the Unit.
11-3-1 Replacement Flowchart after Switch to Standby CPU Unit
The CPU STATUS indicator for the
active CPU Unit flashing or lit red.
Error causing switch to standby CPU
Unit in Simplex Mode. (See A023 for
the cause of the switch and A024 to
A025 for the time the switch was
made.)
Change the switch for the faulty
CPU Unit (the one that was the
active CPU Unit) to NO USE.
Replace the CPU Unit.
Change the switch for the new
CPU Unit to NO USE.
PLC
Setup set for
automatic recovery
to Duplex
Mode?
Yes
No
Press the initialization
button.
Operation should start in Duplex Mode.
432
Section 11-3
Replacing a CPU Unit
11-3-2 CPU Unit Replacement Procedure
1,2,3...
1. Change the USE/NO USE switch for the CPU Unit to be replaced to NO
USE. When the switch is changed to NO USE, the power supply to the
CPU Unit will turn OFF.
2. Confirm that the indicators on the CPU Unit to be replaced have all gone
out.
!Caution You must set the USE/NO USE switch on the Duplex Unit to NO USE before
replacing a CPU Unit to turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit. If a CPU
Unit is replaced while power is still being provided (i.e., with the switch set to
USE), the CPU Backplane for Duplex CPU System or Duplex Unit may be
damaged.
Example: The following illustration shows the switch setting when the right
CPU Unit has failed and the left CPU Unit has taken over operation in Simplex Mode.
Duplex Unit
Operating
Failed
Switch for right-side CPU Unit
on the Duplex Unit
RIG H T C P U
USE
NO USE
Set to NO USE.
Confirm that all indicators on the
right-side CPU Unit are OFF.
3. Replace the faulty CPU Unit with a new CPU Unit.
Duplex Unit
Operating
New CPU Unit
Failed CPU Unit
CS
CS
RUN
RUN
ERR/ ALM
ERR/ALM
IN H BKUP
PRPH C O M
M
IN H BKUP
P R PH CO
OMM
4. Confirm the following for the new CPU Unit.
• That it has the same model number as the previous CPU Unit
• If an Inner Board is being used, that the new Inner Board has the same
model number as the previous Inner Board.
433
Section 11-3
Replacing a CPU Unit
5. Change the USE/NO USE switch for the new CPU Unit to USE.
Duplex Unit
Operating
New CPU Unit
Switch for right-side CPU Unit
on the Duplex Unit
RIG H T C P U
USE
NO USE
Note
Set to USE.
If the PLC Setup is not set for automatic recovery to Duplex Mode
(the default setting disables automatic recovery), then the program
and parameter data will not be transferred to the new CPU Unit
even if the USE/NO USE switch is set to USE. Operation will continue in Simplex Mode and operation will stop if an error occurs in
the CPU Unit that is currently running.
6. Use the following procedure if the PLC Setup has not been changed to enable automatic recovery to Duplex Mode.
a) Confirm that the switch is set for duplex operation.
DPL SW
Turn OFF for
Duplex operation.
ON
ON
SPL
OFF
DPL
ACT. ACT.
LEFT RIGHT
b) After setting the USE/NO USE switch to USE, press the initialization
button.
INIT.
Note
If initialization is not started when the initialization button is
pressed, press it again.
c) When the initialization button is pressed, the DPL STATUS and CPU
STATUS indicators will flash green and the program and parameter
data will be transferred. When these indicators stop flashing and light
green, the transfer has been completed and operation has restarted in
Duplex Mode.
DPL01
R
L
CS
DPL STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
ACTIVE
CPU STATUS
The DPL STATUS and CPU STATUS indicators
will flash green and the program and parameter
data will be transferred. When the indicators stop
flashing, operation has restarted in Duplex Mode.
If automatic recovery to Duplex Mode has been set in the PLC Setup and the
mode has been set to Duplex Mode on the Duplex Unit, the program and
parameter data will be transferred automatically and operation will restart in
Duplex Mode when the USE/NO USE switch is set to USE.
434
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Section 11-4
11-4 Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and
CPU Bus Units
I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units can be replaced while power
is being supplied and the PLC is operating in both Single CPU and Duplex
CPU Systems.
• Online replacement is possible from a Programming Console or the CXProgrammer (Ver. 3.1 or later).
• I/O for the Unit that is being replaced with be interrupted during the
replacement operation.
• When a Unit is replaced, some of that Unit's CPU Unit data is retained
and some is cleared.
A Basic I/O Unit's output data is retained.
A Basic I/O Unit's input data is not retained.
If the Unit is a Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit, the data is retained in
Special I/O Unit Area or CPU Bus Unit Area allocated to that Unit.
!Caution Before replacing a Unit online, always disable the operation of all connected
external devices before starting the replacement procedure. Unexpected outputs from the Unit being replaced may result in unexpected operation of controlled devices or systems.
!Caution If an Output Unit is replaced and ON status is held in memory for that Unit, the
corresponding output will turn ON as soon as the online replacement operation has been completed. Confirm system safety in advance.
!Caution When online replacement is started or completed in a Duplex CPU System,
duplex initialization will be performed. This will cause a cycle time that is
longer than the normal cycle time. Confirm system safety in advance for the
increase in the cycle time.
11-4-1 Replacing One Unit at a Time
Operating Mode
As shown below, online replacement is possible in any operating mode.
RUN
OK
MONITOR
OK
PROGRAM
OK
Note Units cannot be replaced if the CPU is on standby or power is interrupted to
an Expansion Rack.
435
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Section 11-4
Basic Procedure
Initial
display
FUN
CH
SHIFT
1. Display the initial display
for the I/O table creation
operation.
*DM
*EM
EM_/EXT
Rack
No.
2. Select online
replacement.
CF
SRCH
Slot
No.
3. Specify the Rack and slot
of the Unit to be replaced.
DEL
4. Start the online
replacement.
Mount
Unit
Remove
Unit
5. Replace the Unit.
6. Complete the online
replacement operation.
INS
Example Procedure
1,2,3...
1. Connect a Programming Console to the peripheral port on the active CPU
Unit.
2. Access the I/O table creation display from the initial display by pressing the
keys shown below.
CLR
FUN
SHIFT
CH
*DM
000000 CT**
000000 I/O TBL ?
3. Select online replacement by pressing the EXT Key.
*EM
EM_/EXT
Replace?
?-?=
To exit online replacement, go to step 7. To start online replacement, continue to step 4.
4. Specify the number of the Rack and the slot where the Unit is to be replaced.
In this example, slot 8 on Rack 5 is used. In 5-8=I32 in the following displays, 5 is the rack number, 8 is the slot number, and I32 is the Unit type.
436
5
Replace?
5-?=
8
Replace?
5-8=
CF
SRCH
Replace?
5-8=I32
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Section 11-4
!Caution Before replacing a Unit online, always disable the operation of all connected
external devices before starting the replacement procedure. Unexpected outputs from the Unit being replaced may result in unexpected operation of controlled devices or systems.
5. Start the online replacement operation by pressing the DEL Key and Up
Key. The square displayed at the lower left of the display indicates that online replacement has been enabled.
DEL
↑
Replace Start?
5-8=I32
Replace Start
~5-8=I32
6. Confirm that online replacement has been enabled using the flags listed in
Related Auxiliary Area Flags, below, and then replace the Unit.
Note
After installing the replacement Unit, tighten the mounting screws
to the proper torque to secure the Unit.
!WARNING Do not touch any live terminals. You will receive an electric shock.
!Caution Before replacing a Unit online, always disable the operation of all connected
external devices before starting the replacement procedure. Unexpected outputs from the Unit being replaced may result in unexpected operation of controlled devices or systems.
!Caution If an Output Unit is replaced and ON status is held in memory for that Unit, the
corresponding output will turn ON as soon as the online replacement operation has been completed. Confirm system safety in advance.
Note Always replace the Unit with one of the same model number.
7. After the Unit has been replaced, end the online replacement operation by
pressing the INS Key and Down Key.
INS
↓
Canceling Online
Replacement
Replace End?
~5-8=I32
Replace End
5-8=I32
Use the following procedure to return to the initial display after starting the
online replacement procedure.
• Instead of the Rack and slot numbers, press the following keys to enter
Online Replacement Mode.
CLR
FUN
SHIFT
CH
*DM
Replace?
?-?=
*EM
EM_/EXT
• Press the INS Key and Down Key to go to the display that appears for
step 6. This will enable ending the online replacement operation.
437
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
INS
↓
Section 11-4
Replace End?
~5-8=I32
Replace End
5-8=I32
Related Auxiliary Area Flags
438
Word
A034
Bits
Description
00 to 04 Used to confirm when online replacement is in progress for a slot
on Rack 0. A bit will be ON when online replacement is in
progress for the corresponding slot. Bits 00 to 04 correspond to
slots 0 to 4.
00: ON when online replacement is in progress for slot 0 on Rack
0.
01: ON when online replacement is in progress for slot 1 on Rack
0.
02: ON when online replacement is in progress for slot 2 on Rack
0.
03: ON when online replacement is in progress for slot 3 on Rack
0.
04: ON when online replacement is in progress for slot 4 on Rack
0.
A035
00 to 08 Used to confirm when online replacement is in progress for a slot
on Rack 1. A bit will be ON when online replacement is in
progress for the corresponding slot. Bits 00 to 08 correspond to
slots 0 to 8.
A036
00 to 08 Used to confirm when online replacement is in progress for a slot
on Rack 2. A bit will be ON when online replacement is in
progress for the corresponding slot. Bits 00 to 08 correspond to
slots 0 to 8.
A037
00 to 08 Used to confirm when online replacement is in progress for a slot
on Rack 3. A bit will be ON when online replacement is in
progress for the corresponding slot. Bits 00 to 08 correspond to
slots 0 to 8.
A038
00 to 08 Used to confirm when online replacement is in progress for a slot
on Rack 4. A bit will be ON when online replacement is in
progress for the corresponding slot. Bits 00 to 08 correspond to
slots 0 to 8.
A039
00 to 08 Used to confirm when online replacement is in progress for a slot
on Rack 5. A bit will be ON when online replacement is in
progress for the corresponding slot. Bits 00 to 08 correspond to
slots 0 to 8.
A040
00 to 08 Used to confirm when online replacement is in progress for a slot
on Rack 6. A bit will be ON when online replacement is in
progress for the corresponding slot. Bits 00 to 08 correspond to
slots 0 to 8.
A041
00 to 08 Used to confirm when online replacement is in progress for a slot
on Rack 7. A bit will be ON when online replacement is in
progress for the corresponding slot. Bits 00 to 08 correspond to
slots 0 to 8.
A261
10
ON while an online replacement operation is in progress. Turns
OFF when the operation is completed normally.
Section 11-4
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Unit Types
The unit types displayed on the Programming Console during online replacement are listed in the following table.
Unit
None or Dummy Unit
Basic I/O Input Unit
Units
Examples
*****
I8, I16, I32, I48, I64, I96
Output Unit
“O” followed by number of
output points
O8, O16, O32, O48, O64,
O96
Mixed I/O Unit
“M” followed by number of
I/O points
“INT” followed by the Interrupt Input Unit number.
(Interrupt Input Units can
be used only as normal
Input Units for the CS1D.)
“SIO” followed by the unit
number
M8, M16, M32, M48,
M64, M96
INT0, INT1
“ET” followed by the unit
number
“ED” followed by the unit
number
ET00
Controller Link
Unit
“NS” followed by the unit
number
NS12 (See note 1.)
SYSMAC Link
Unit
Serial Communications Unit
“SL” followed by the unit
number
“SC” followed by the unit
number
SL11
DeviceNet Unit
“DN” followed by the unit
number
DN14
Loop Control Unit “LC” followed by the unit
number
LC15
Interrupt Input
Unit
Special I/O Unit
CPU Bus Ethernet Unit
Units
CS1D Ethernet
Unit
Note
Programming Console
display
*****
“I” followed by number of
input points
SIO00, SIO95
ED10 (See note 2.)
SC13
1. If a Duplex Controller Link Unit is used, “a” will be added to the end of the
display for the active Unit and “s” will be added for the standby Unit. For
example, “NS12a” would be a Controller Link Unit with a unit number of 12
functioning as the active Unit. “NS12s” would be the same Unit functioning
as the standby Unit.
2. When using duplex Ethernet Units (CS1D Ethernet Units), a “p” will be
added to the end of the unit type for the primary Unit and an “s” will be added for the secondary Unit.
Examples:
ED10p: The primary CS1D Ethernet Unit set to unit number 10
ED10s: The second CS1D Ethernet Unit set to unit number 10
439
Section 11-4
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
11-4-2 Replacing More than One Unit at a Time
The PLC Setup can be set to enable online replacement of more than one
Unit at a time.
This operation is possible only from the Programming Console.
Starting Online
Replacement for
Multiple Units
Another Unit can be replaced after completing steps 1. to 5. in the basic procedure by pressing the CLR Key and then repeating steps 1. to 5., or by
pressing the EXT Key and then using the following procedure.
Replace Start
~5-8=I32
↑
If the EXT Key is pressed in the status shown above, the display will appear to
enable inputting another rack number and slot number.
*EM
EM_/EXT
Replace?
?-?=
The following example shows the key inputs for replacing Units online in slot 4
or Rack 0, slot 5 in Rack 8, and slot 2 in Rack 3.
CLR
CH
*EM
*DM
EM_/EXT
8
CF
SRCH
DEL
2
CF
SRCH
DEL
FUN
SHIFT
5
3
*EM
EM_/EXT
*EM
EM_/EXT
Ending Replacement
of Multiple Units
0
4
CF
SRCH
DEL
When the last Unit has been replaced and the online replacement procedure
for it has been completed, the replacement procedures for the remaining Units
can be ended either by pressing the CLR Key and then performing steps 1.
through 3. and then step 7. in the basic procedure, or by using the following
procedure to end the replacement procedures directly using step 7.
↓
Replace End
5-8=I32
If the INS Key is pressed in the status shown above, the following displays will
appear allowing you to end the replacement procedures for all Units for which
replacement has been started.
INS
↓
INS
440
Replace End?
~0-4=O32
Replace End
0-4=O32
Replace End?
~3-2=M96
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
↓
Section 11-4
Replace End
3-2=M96
When the online replacement procedure for the last Unit has been ended, the
display will not change even if the INS Key is pressed. If the INS Key is
pressed without pressing the Down Key, the Units for which online replacement procedures have been started can be displayed without ending the procedures.
INS
Replace End?
~5-8=I32
INS
Replace End?
~0-4=O32
INS
Replace End?
~3-2=M96
INS
Replace End?
~5-8=I32
11-4-3 Error Displays
Errors can occur when starting and stopping online replacement procedures.
These are described in this section.
Starting Online
Replacement
Specifying an Empty Slot
DEL
↑
Replace Start?
5-8=*****
Error Displays when Ending Online Replacement
• The following display will appear if a different type of Unit is mounted from
the one that was removed.
• It is also displayed if the unit number (UNIT No./MACH No.) is different
from the Unit that was removed.
Replace End?
DIFFERENT UNIT
• The following display will appear if the node number is different from the
Unit that was removed (for online replacement of a Duplex Controller Link
Unit or Duplex Ethernet Unit).
Replace End?
NETWORK DPL ERR
The CLR Key can be pressed to display the Unit registered in the I/O tables
and the Unit that was mounted.
The display on the left is the registered Unit and the display on the right is the
Unit that is currently mounted.
441
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Section 11-4
CLR
Replace End?
~5-8=I32
O32
CLR
Replace End?
~5-8=I32
*****
11-4-4 Online Replacement Precautions for Special I/O and CPU Bus
Units
Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units have hardware switches, software
switches, and parameters, all of which help to control Unit operation. When a
Unit is replaced, all of these must be set to the same status as the Unit that
was replaced.
The specific settings that must be set depend on the type of Unit that is being
used. Refer to the operation manual for the specific Unit for details on these
settings.
!Caution Before replacing a Unit online, always disable the operation of all connected
external devices before starting the replacement procedure. Unexpected outputs from the Unit being replaced may result in unexpected operation of controlled devices or systems.
!Caution If an Output Unit is replaced and ON status is held in memory for that Unit, the
corresponding output will turn ON as soon as the online replacement operation has been completed. Confirm system safety in advance.
!Caution If the settings in the new Unit are not the same as those in the Unit that was
replaced, unexpected operation may result possibly causing an accident.
Replace a Unit only after making sure that all settings are the same.
Refer to the operation manual of the specific Unit for details on any Units not
listed in the following tables and follow all replacements provided in the manual.
442
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Section 11-4
Unit Settings and Replacement Precautions
Special I/O Units
Name and model
number
Settings
Hardware
settings
on Special
I/O Unit
Settings
stored in
CPU Unit
Precautions
Settings stored
in Special I/O
Unit
Analog Input Units Unit number (rotary
CS1W-AD041
CS1W-AD041-V1 switch)
CS1W-AD081
CS1W-AD081-V1
Settings in
allocated
DM Area
words
None
Analog Output
Units
CS1W-DA041
CS1W-DA08V
CS1W-DA08C
Unit number (rotary
switch)
Settings in
allocated
DM Area
words
None
Analog I/O Unit
CS1W-MAD44
Unit number (rotary
switch)
Settings in
allocated
DM Area
words
None
Process I/O Units Unit numCS1W-PTS01-V1 ber (rotary
CS1W-PTS02/03 switch)
CS1W-PTW01
CS1W-PD01
CS1W-PMV01/02
CS1W-PTR01/02
CS1W-PPS01
Settings in
allocated
DM Area
words
None
Customizable
Unit numCounter Units
ber (rotary
CS1W-HIO01-V1 switch)
CS1W-HCP22-V1
CS1W-HCA22-V1
CS1W-HCA12-V1
Settings in
allocated
DM Area
words
In flash memory:
• User program
• General-purpose read-only
DM Area
• Unit functions
setting area
• Expansion
instructions
information
• Ladder library
information
Refer to the operation manual for replacement procedures, and
observe the following precautions.
1) Turn OFF the power supply to all external devices connected to
the Unit before starting the replacement procedure.
2) Set the same unit number on the new Unit as was set on the Unit
being replaced.
3) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in
the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
Refer to the Customizable Counter Unit operation manual for
replacement procedures, and observe the following precautions.
1) Turn OFF the power supply to all external devices connected to
the Unit before starting the replacement procedure.
2) Stop Unit operation before starting the replacement procedure.
3) Set the same unit number on the new Unit as was set on the Unit
being replaced.
4) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in
the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
5) Use one of the following methods to transfer the same data to the
flash memory in the Special I/O Unit as was in the Unit that was
replaced: a) Use the simple backup function or b) Transfer the
user program and required data from the CX-Programmer.
Note The version 1 (-V1) Customizable Counter Units support a
simple backup function. If the data stored in the flash memory
in the Unit is saved to a Memory Card in advance and the
Memory Card is inserted into the CPU Unit, the Memory Card
can be used after online replacement to automatically transfer
the required data to the new Unit. (See note 1 following next
table.)
Pre-V1 versions of the Units do not support the simple backup
operation. Use the CX-Programmer to either transfer the
required data or set it again to the same settings as the Unit
being replaced. (See note 2 following next table.)
High-speed
Unit numCounter Units (2 or ber (rotary
4 axes)
switch)
CS1W-CT021
CS1W-CT041
Settings in
allocated
DM Area
words
None
Refer to the High-speed Counter Unit operation manual for replacement procedures, and observe the following precautions.
1) Turn OFF the power supply to all external devices connected to
the Unit before starting the replacement procedure.
2) Set the same unit number on the new Unit as was set on the Unit
being replaced.
3) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in
the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
Note If the gate open operation is being performed with bit operations for the following bits, turn the bits ON after completing
online replacement so that the bits are effective: Bit 00 of
CIO n+2, Bit 00 of CIO n+5, Bit 00 of CIO n+8, and Bit 00 of
CIO n+11.
443
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Name and model
number
Settings
Hardware
settings
on Special
I/O Unit
Settings
stored in
CPU Unit
Section 11-4
Precautions
Settings stored
in Special I/O
Unit
GP-IB Interface
Unit
CS1W-GPI01
Unit number (rotary
switch)
Settings in
allocated
DM Area
words
None
Refer to the GP-IB Unit operation manual for replacement procedures, and observe the following precautions.
1) Turn OFF the power supply to all external devices connected to
the Unit before starting the replacement procedure.
2) Set the same unit number on the new Unit as was set on the Unit
being replaced.
3) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in
the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
Position Control
Units
CS1W-NC113
CS1W-NC133
CS1W-NC213
CS1W-NC233
CS1W-NC413
CS1W-NC433
Unit number (rotary
switch)
Settings in
allocated
DM Area
words
There may
also be settings in userspecified
DM/EM Area
words.
In flash memory:
• Axis parameters
• Sequence data
• Speed data
• Acceleration/
deceleration
data
• Dwell data
• Zone data
Refer to the Position Control Unit operation manual for replacement
procedures, and observe the following precautions.
1) Turn OFF the power supply to all external devices connected to
the Unit before starting the replacement procedure.
2) Set the same unit number on the new Unit as was set on the Unit
being replaced.
3) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in
the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
4) Write the same parameters as the Unit being replaced to flash
memory in the new Unit in advance by downloading them from
the CX-Position. (See note 2 following next table.)
Motion Control
Unit numUnits
ber (rotary
CS1W-MC421-V1 switch)
CS1W-MD221-V1
Settings in
allocated
DM Area
words
In flash memory
(if save is performed):
• System parameters
• Position data
• G-language
program
Refer to the Motion Control Unit operation manual for replacement
procedures, and observe the following precautions.
1) Turn OFF the power supply to all external devices connected to
the Unit before starting the replacement procedure.
2) Set the same unit number on the new Unit as was set on the Unit
being replaced.
3) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in
the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
4) Write the same parameters as the Unit being replaced to flash
memory in the new Unit in advance by downloading them from
the CX-Motion. (See note 2 following next table.)
ID Sensor Units
CS1W-V600C11
CS1W-V600C12
Settings in
allocated
DM Area
words
None
Refer to the I/O Sensor Unit operation manual for replacement procedures, and observe the following precautions.
1) Turn OFF the power supply to all external devices connected to
the Unit before starting the replacement procedure.
2) Set the same unit number on the new Unit as was set on the Unit
being replaced.
3) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in
the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
444
Unit number (rotary
switch)
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Section 11-4
CPU Bus Units
Name and model
number
Settings
Hardware
Settings stored
settings on
in CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit
Precautions
Settings stored
in CPU Bus
Unit
Optical-ring Controller Link Units
CS1W-CLK12-V1
CS1W-CLK52-V1
Unit number
(rotary switch)
Node address
(rotary switch)
In CPU Bus
None
Setup Area:
• Data link tables
• Network
parameters
• Routing tables
In allocated DM
Area words:
• Data link settings, others
Refer to the procedure in the Controller Link Unit operation
manual for replacing the Unit while the system is still operating, and observe the following precautions.
1) The external power supply must be turned OFF. If
another node is sharing the power supply so that the
power supply cannot be turned OFF only to the Unit
being replaced, a power interruption will be detected,
causing a communications error. Confirm that the power
supply can be turned OFF safety.
2) When the optical cable is removed, a disconnection of
the line will be detected at other nodes.
3) If a Duplex Communications Unit is being used, the
standby Unit will take over and continue communications.
(Pre-V1 Unit do not support duplex operation and cannot
continue communications when replaced. Communications, however, will be continued at the other nodes.)
4) Set the same unit number and node address on the new
Unit as were set on the Unit being replaced.
5) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online
replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
Optical-bus Controller Link Units
CS1W-CLK11
Unit number
(rotary switch)
Node address
(rotary switch)
In CPU Bus
None
Setup Area:
• Data link tables
• Network
parameters
• Routing tables
In allocated DM
Area words:
• Data link settings, others
Refer to the Controller Link Unit operation manual for
replacement procedures and observe the following precautions.
1) The external power supply must be turned OFF to all
nodes before a Unit can be replaced. Communications
will stop for all nodes.
2) Set the same unit number and node address on the new
Unit as were set on the Unit being replaced.
3) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online
replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
Wired Controller
Link Units
CS1W-CLK21-V1
Unit number
(rotary switch)
Node address
(rotary switch)
Baud rate
(DIP switch)
Terminating
resistance
(slide switch)
In CPU Bus
None
Setup Area:
• Data link tables
• Network
parameters
• Routing tables
In allocated DM
Area words:
• Data link settings, others
Refer to the Controller Link Unit operation manual for
replacement procedures and observe the following precautions.
1) If a CJ1W-TB101 Relay Terminal Block is being used, a
Unit can be replaced without turning OFF the power supply to all nodes in the network. Communications will stop
for the node of the Unit being replaced.
2) If a Relay Terminal Block is not being used or if the node
of the Unit being replaced is at the end of the network,
power must be turned OFF to all nodes on the network
before replacement is possible. Communications will
stop for all nodes.
3) Set the same unit number, node address, baud rate, and
terminating resistance setting on the new Unit as were
set on the Unit being replaced.
4) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online
replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
SYSMAC Link Units
CS1W-SLK21
(coaxial)
CS1W-SLK11
(optical)
Unit number
(rotary switch)
Node address
(rotary switch)
In CPU Bus
None
Setup Area:
• Data link tables
• Network
parameters
• Routing tables
In allocated DM
Area words:
• Data link settings, others
Refer to the SYSMAC Link Unit operation manual for
replacement procedures and observe the following precautions.
1) Turn OFF the power supply to all nodes in the network
before replacing the Unit. Because the power is turned
OFF to all nodes during online replacement, communications cannot be continued.
2) Set the same unit number and node address on the new
Unit as were set on the Unit being replaced.
3) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online
replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
445
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Name and model
number
Settings
Hardware
Settings stored
settings on
in CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit
Section 11-4
Precautions
Settings stored
in CPU Bus
Unit
Ethernet Units
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
Unit number
(rotary switch)
Node address
(rotary switch)
IP address
(rotary switch)
In CPU Bus
None
Setup Area:
Network settings
• Routing tables
In allocated DM
Area words:
• Various settings
Refer to the Ethernet Unit operation manual for replacement
procedures and observe the following precautions.
1) Turn OFF the power supply connected to the Unit before
starting the replacement procedure.
2) Set the same unit number, node address, and I/P
address on the new Unit as were set on the Unit being
replaced.
3) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online
replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
Ethernet units
CS1W-ETN21
CS1D-ETN21D
Unit number
(rotary switch)
Node address
(rotary switch)
In CPU Bus
Setup Area:
• Network settings
(e.g., IP
address)
• Routing tables
In allocated DM
Area words:
• Various settings
Refer to the Ethernet Unit operation manual for replacement
procedures and observe the following precautions.
1) Set the same unit number and node address, on the new
Unit as were set on the Unit being replaced.
2) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online
replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
Serial Communications Unit
CS1W-SCU21-V1
CS1W-SCU31-V1
Unit number
In allocated DM In flash memory:
(rotary switch) Area words:
• Protocol macro
• Baud rate, oth- data
ers
None
Refer to the Serial Communications Unit operation manual
for replacement procedures, and observe the following precautions.
1) Turn OFF the power supply to all external devices connected to the Unit before starting the replacement procedure.
2) Set the same unit number on the new Unit as was set on
the Unit being replaced.
3) When the new Unit has been mounted and the online
replacement operation has been completed for it, the settings stored in the CPU Unit will be automatically transferred to the new Unit.
4) If protocol macros are being used, use one of the following methods to transfer the same data to the flash memory in the Special I/O Unit as was in the Unit that was
replaced: a) Use the simple backup function or b) Transfer the required data from the CX-Protocol.
Note The version 1 (-V1) Serial Communications Units support a simple backup function. If the data stored in the
flash memory in the Unit is saved to a Memory Card in
advance and the Memory Card is inserted into the
CPU Unit, the Memory Card can be used after online
replacement to automatically transfer the required
data to the new Unit. (See note 1.)
Pre-V1 versions of the Units do not support the simple
backup operation. Use the CX-Protocol to either
transfer the required data or set it again to the same
settings as the Unit being replaced. (See note 2.)
446
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Name and model
number
DeviceNet Unit
CS1W-DRM21-V1
Settings
Precautions
Settings stored
Hardware
in CPU Unit
settings on
CPU Bus Unit
Settings stored
in CPU Bus
Unit
Unit number
(rotary switch)
Node address
(rotary switch)
Baud rate
(rotary switch)
Continuation
of remote I/O
for communications error
(master, DIP
switch)
Hold/Clear of
remote I/O for
communications error
(slave, DIP
switch)
In non-volatile
memory:
• Scan list (master)
• Communications cycle time
settings (master)
• Slave scan list
(slave)
• Message monitor time list (for
message communications)
• Master/Slave
function enable
settings
In CPU Bus
Setup Area:
• Routing tables
(when required)
Section 11-4
Refer to the DeviceNet Unit operation manual for replacement procedures, and observe the following precautions.
When Using Master Function
1) All parameters are stored in non-volatile memory in the
Unit. Write all of these parameters to the Unit before
starting the replacement procedure by downloading them
from the DeviceNet Configurator. (See note 2.)
2) Remote I/O communications will stop when the
DeviceNet communications connector is removed and
communications errors will occur at all the slaves.
3) At this point, a network power error can be confirmed at
the CPU Unit. The status of all inputs to the CPU Unit
from the DeviceNet Unit will be held by the CPU Unit.
4) The outputs from Output Slaves will be either held or
cleared when the communications error occurs, depending on the settings at the slaves.
5) Remote I/O communications will automatically recover
when the DeviceNet communications connector is reconnected after the replacement operation. After recovery,
the status of outputs from Output Slaves will be controlled again by the status of the output words allocated
to them in the CPU Unit.
When Using Slave Function
1) Just like the master function, all parameters are stored in
non-volatile memory in the Unit. Write all of these parameters to the Unit before starting the replacement procedure by downloading them from the DeviceNet
Configurator. (See note 2.)
2) A communications error will occur at the master when the
DeviceNet communications connector is removed.
Depending on the settings of the master, all I/O communications may stop. Check the settings and operation of
the master.
3) A network power error can be confirmed at the CPU Unit.
The status of all inputs to the slave (outputs from the
CPU Unit will be held or cleared according to the setting
on the DIP switch.
4) If the master is set so that remote I/O communications
will not stop, only communications for the Unit being
replaced will stop and normal communications will be
possible for other slaves. Normal communications will
recover when the DeviceNet communications connector
is reconnected.
5) If the master is set so that all remote I/O communications
stop, then restarting communications must be specified
at the master after the Unit is replaced and the communications connector is reconnected.
6) Set the same unit number on the new Unit as was set on
the Unit being replaced.
Note The version 1 (-V1) DeviceNet Unit (to be released
soon) will support a simple backup function. If the
data stored in the non-volatile memory in the Unit is
saved to a Memory Card in advance and the Memory
Card is inserted into the CPU Unit, the Memory Card
can be used after online replacement to automatically
transfer the required data to the new Unit. (See note
1.) The remaining precautions given above will still
apply.
Loop Control Unit
CS1W-LC001
Unit number
In allocated DM
(rotary switch) Area words:
None
In batterybackup RAM or
flash memory (if
save is performed for flash
memory):
• Function block
data
Refer to the Loop Control Unit operation manual for replacement procedures, and observe the following precautions.
1) Turn OFF the power supply to all external devices connected to the Unit before starting the replacement procedure.
2) Set the same unit number on the new Unit as was set on
the Unit being replaced.
3) Write the same function block data as the previous Unit
to the new Unit and save it to flash memory in advance
by downloading them from the CX-Process Tool. (See
note 2.)
447
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Note
Section 11-4
1. Refer to the Programming Manual (W339), 5-2-6 Simple Backup Operation
for details on the simple backup function. If the Memory Card is inserted in
the new Unit, the data on the Memory Card will be automatically transferred to the Unit when the online replacement operation is completed.
2. To write parameters (such as the settings stored in the Special I/O Unit or
CPU Bus Unit) to the Unit in advance for replacement, it is necessary to
prepare separately a system consisting of a CS-series CPU Unit, CPU
Backplane, and Power Supply Unit. Mount the Unit to be used for replacement to this Backplane and download the parameters to it from a Programming Device.
11-4-5 Online Replacement without a Programming Device
When the Unit Removal without a Programming Device or Removal/Addition
of Units without a Programming Device function is enabled in the PLC Setup,
a Unit can be replaced without using the CX-Programmer or a Programming
Console.
Note The following table shows the CPU Units that support these functions.
Unit version
Unit Removal without a
Programming Device or
Unit version 1.1 Not supported (See note 1.)
or earlier
Unit version 1.2 Supported
Unit version 1.3 Supported (See note 3.)
Note
Removal/Addition of Units
without a Programming Device
Not supported (See note 1.)
Not supported (See note 2.)
Supported (See note 3.)
(Duplex CPU, Dual I/O Expansion Systems only)
1. If either of these functions is set in a CPU Unit with unit version 1.1, the
function will not operate. An I/O bus error will occur if a Unit is removed
without using a Programming Device.
2. If just the Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function is set in a CPU Unit with unit version 1.2, it will not operate. An I/O bus
error will occur if a Unit is removed without using a Programming Device.
3. If both functions are set in a CPU Unit with unit version 1.3 operating in a
Duplex CPU Dual I/O Expansion System, the Removal/Addition of Units
without a Programming Device function will be enabled. If the system is a
a Duplex CPU Single I/O Expansion System, the Unit Removal without a
Programming Device will be enabled.
A Programming Device can be used for online replacement even if one of
these functions is enabled. Two or more Units can be removed at one time
with this setting.
Note When two or more Units are being replaced at one time, incorrect operation
may occur.
Previously, if a Unit was removed or failed, an I/O bus error will occur and the
PLC (CPU Unit) will stop operating, but this function causes the I/O bus error
to be treated as a non-fatal error so the PLC will continue operating.
Note
448
1. In a Single CPU System or Duplex CPU Single I/O Expansion System, a
fatal error will occur if another major component (such as a Backplane, Expansion Rack Cable, Duplex Unit, or Long-distance Expansion I/O Rack)
is removed or fails. In a Duplex CPU Dual I/O Expansion System, a fatal
error will occur if a Backplane is removed or fails.
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Section 11-4
2. When a Unit has been removed during operation without a PLC Programming Device (CX-Programmer or a Programming Console), data transferred from the removed Unit to the CPU Unit may be invalid. If an invalid
data transfer will adversely affect the system, use a Programming Device
to replace the Unit online.
3. When the Unit Removal without a Programming Device or Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function is enabled in the PLC
Setup and a Special I/O Unit has been removed, the Special I/O Unit Area
words allocated to that Unit for data transfer (to and from the CPU Unit) will
be cleared. If the loss of the Special I/O Unit Area data will adversely affect
the system, disable the Unit Removal without a Programming Device or
Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function in the
PLC Setup and use a Programming Device to replace the Unit online.
(When a Programming Device is used to replace the Unit online, the data
in the Special I/O Unit Area is retained while the Unit is removed.)
4. An I/O bus error, which can be caused by a Unit malfunction, is normally a
fatal error that stops operation. When the Unit Removal without a Programming Device or Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device
function is enabled in the PLC Setup, the I/O bus error will be treated as a
non-fatal error and PLC (CPU Unit) will not stop operating. If there are any
Units that will adversely affect the system if an I/O bus error occurs, do not
enable the Unit Removal without a Programming Device or Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function in the PLC Setup.
Differences between
the Online Unit
Removal Functions
The following table shows the differences between the Unit Removal without a
Programming Device or Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming
Device function.
Status change
Unit removal
Unit Removal without a
Removal/Addition of Units
Programming Device function without a Programming Device
function
A Programming Device is not
A Programming Device is not
required. A non-fatal Unit error
required. A Unit error will not
will occur in the Unit being
occur. (See note.)
replaced.
Unit addition
The Online Replacement Completed Bit (A80215) will go ON.
A Programming Device is not
required.
Unit failure
A non-fatal Unit error will occur.
A non-fatal Unit error will occur.
Note A Unit error may occur if the Unit is removed slowly.
Steps required before Starting Online Replacement without a Programming Device
The following steps must be performed in advance before replacing a Unit
online without a PLC Programming Device.
Enable Online
Replacement without a
Programming Device
The Unit Removal without a Programming Device or Removal/Addition of
Units without a Programming Device function must be enabled in the PLC
Setup in order to remove a Unit without a PLC Programming Device.
Use a Programming Console to set the appropriate PLC Setup address.
Note
1. As of October 2006, the Unit Removal without a Programming Device and
Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function can be
selected with the Programming Console only. The settings will be added to
the CX-Programmer in the next version upgrade. The settings will be added to CX-Programmer version 7.0 when its functions are expanded by
auto-update.
449
Section 11-4
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
2. Before removing a Unit during operation without a PLC Programming Device (CX-Programmer or a Programming Console), always confirm that the
Unit Removal without a Programming Device or Removal/Addition of Units
without a Programming Device function has been enabled in the PLC Setup. If a Unit is mistakenly removed without enabling the function in the PLC
Setup, an I/O bus error will occur and the PLC (CPU Unit) will stop operating.
When this function is enabled in the PLC Setup, the Unit Replacement
without a Programming Device Enabled Flag (A09911) will be ON. This
flag can be used to confirm that the required PLC Setup setting has been
made.
Example
Enable Unit removal without a
Programming Device in the PLC Setup.
Indicator shows that Unit
removal without a Programming
Device is enabled.
A09911 is the Unit Removal without a
Programming Device Enabled Flag.
PT
Indicator controlled by A09911.
Setting enabled
Program example
A09911
Output to LED
A09911 is allocated to a PT
indicator.
Maintenance Start Bit (A80015)
When the Unit Removal without a Programming Device function is selected
and a Unit is removed without a PLC Programming Device, one of the following non-fatal errors will be generated depending on the type of Unit that was
removed. The PLC (CPU Unit) will not stop operating even if one of these
non-fatal errors occurs.
Unit type
Basic I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit
CPU Bus Unit
Non-fatal error
Basic I/O Unit error
Special I/O Unit error
CPU Bus Unit error
The Maintenance Start Bit is provided to prevent a non-fatal error from occurring even if a Unit is removed without a Programming Device.
When you don't want a non-fatal error to be generated, turn this bit ON before
removing the Unit.
This bit can be turned ON externally (just like the Online Replacement Completed Bit) by allocating the bit to an external switch on an Input Unit and
inputting the signal or turning ON the bit from a PT. (The bit can also be
turned ON from the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console.)
Note Do not turn ON the Maintenance Start Bit (A80015) continuously from the ladder program or other source. As long as the Maintenance Start Bit is ON,
errors will not be generated even if there are Unit malfunctions, so the system
may be adversely affected.
450
Section 11-4
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
The Maintenance Start Bit will be turned OFF automatically when the Online
Replacement Completed Bit (A80215) is turned ON to restart data exchange
between the replacement Unit and the CPU Unit.
When two or more Units have been removed and replacement Units are being
added to the system in order, the Maintenance Start Bit will be turned OFF
when data exchange is restarted with the last Unit that was replaced.
Example
5 Units removed.
Units to replace:
5 Units
Mount 2 Units
and turn A80215
from OFF to ON.
Units to replace:
3 Units
Mount 2 more Units
and turn A80215 from
OFF to ON.
Mount 1 more Unit
and turn A80215
from OFF to ON.
Units to replace:
1 Unit
Replacement
complete
The CPU Unit will not detect errors occurring in Units,
including Units not being replaced. (See note.)
Maintenance
Start Bit
(A80015)
The system automatically
turns the bit OFF when all
of the Units have been
replaced and data
exchange has restarted
with all of those Units.
Turned ON by user
before removing Units.
Online
Replacement
Completed Bit
(A80215)
Restart data
exchange with
2 Units.
Restart data
exchange with
2 more Units.
Restart data
exchange with
1 more Unit.
Note If you want to detect errors in other Units before all of the Units have been
replaced online, turn OFF the Maintenance Start Bit.
Online Replacement Completed Bit (A80215)
When the Unit Removal without a Programming Device function is selected
and a Unit has been installed during operation without a Programming Device,
the Online Replacement Completed Bit (A80215) must be turned ON in order
to restart the data exchange between the replaced Unit and the CPU Unit.
When turning this bit ON externally, allocating the bit to an external switch or
turn the bit ON from a PT. (The bit can also be turned ON from the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console.)
Note Do not turn ON the Online Replacement Completed Bit (A80215) continuously from the ladder program or other source. If the Unit is mounted while the
Online Replacement Completed Bit is ON, the PLC (CPU Unit) may stop
operating.
If two or more Units have been removed at one time, data exchange will
restart only with the newly mounted Units when the Online Replacement
Completed Bit is turned ON. Therefore, the Online Replacement Completed
Bit must be turned ON each time that Units are mounted.
451
Section 11-4
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Example
Mount 2 more Units
and turn A80215 from
OFF to ON.
Mount 2 Units and turn
A80215 from OFF to ON.
5 Units removed.
Units to replace:
5 Units
Mount 1 more Unit
and turn A80215 from
OFF to ON.
Units to replace:
1 Unit
Units to replace:
3 Units
Replacement
complete
Online Replacement
Completed Bit
(A80215)
Restart data exchange
with 2 Units.
Restart data exchange
with 2 more Units.
Restart data exchange
with 1 more Unit.
Example
Online Replacement
Completed Bit (A80215)
Replacement Completed Switch
PT
The switch is connected to an Input Unit
and turns A80215 in the ladder program.
Replacement
Completed
Turn A80215 ON from the PT with
a button operation.
Ladder Programming for the Online Replacement Bit and Maintenance
Start Bit
Example
Input from external switch
(for Online Replacement
Completed Bit)
Turn bit ON with the corresponding switch.
A80215
Online Replacement
Completed Bit
Input from external switch
(for Maintenance Start Bit)
TIM a
A80015
Maintenance Start Bit
A80015
TIM
Timer (5 minutes)
a
Creates a self-holding bit.
#3000
If the Maintenance Start Bit is turned ON by mistake, an error will
not be generated even if a Unit fails. Therefore, the Maintenance
Start Bit is turned OFF after a short time. (In this example, it is
turned OFF by the 5-minute timer.)
452
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Section 11-4
Procedure for Online Replacement without a Programming Device
Flowchart of the Replacement Procedure
Turn ON the Maintenance Start Bit (A80015) if you want to prevent non-fatal errors when
removing a Unit without a Programming Device.
(Do not turn ON the bit continuously from the ladder program.)
Remove the Unit.
Mount the replacement Unit.
Turn ON the Online Replacement Completed Bit (A80215). See note.
(Do not turn the bit ON continuously from the ladder program.)
Data exchange restarts with the mounted Unit.
A Unit still needs to be replaced.
Replace Unit?
All Unit replacements completed.
Online Replacement Completed
(If the Maintenance Start Bit (A80015) was turned ON, it will be turned OFF automatically.)
Note The Online Replacement Completed Flag is required only when the Unit
Removal without a Programming Device function is being used. When the
Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function is being
used, the data exchange is restarted automatically after the replacement Unit
is mounted.
1,2,3...
1. Confirm that the Unit Removal without a Programming Device or the Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming Device function is enabled
in the PLC Setup.
!Caution Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
Note a) If an Output Unit is being replaced, output ON status is retained
and the outputs will go back ON as soon as online replacement is
completed.
b) When a Unit has been removed during operation without a PLC
Programming Device (CX-Programmer or a Programming Console), data transferred from the removed Unit to the CPU Unit may
be invalid. If an invalid data transfer will adversely affect the system, use a Programming Device to replace the Unit online.
453
Online Replacement of I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
Section 11-4
2. Remove the Unit that is being replaced.
When the Unit Removal without a Programming Device function is selected, one of the following non-fatal errors will be generated at this point, depending on the type of Unit that was removed.
Unit type
Basic I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit
CPU Bus Unit
Non-fatal error
Basic I/O Unit error
Special I/O Unit error
CPU Bus Unit error
Note a) These non-fatal errors will not be generated when the Removal/
Addition of Units without a Programming Device function is selected, unless the Unit is removed or mounted slowly.
b) If you don't want one of these non-fatal errors to be generated
when removing a Unit without a Programming Device, turn ON the
Maintenance Start Bit (A80015) before removing the Unit. When
this bit is ON, the errors above will not occur when the Unit is removed.
c) Do not turn ON the Maintenance Start Bit (A80015) continuously
from the ladder program or other source. As long as the Maintenance Start Bit is ON, errors will not be generated even if there are
Unit malfunctions, so the system may be adversely affected.
3. Replace the Unit.
Note a) If an Output Unit is being replaced, output ON status is retained
and the outputs will go back ON as soon as online replacement is
completed.
b) Replace the Unit with the same kind of Unit.
4. After the Unit is replaced, turn ON the Online Replacement Completed Bit
(A80215). (This step is not required with the Removal/Addition of Units
without a Programming Device function.)
Note a) The Online Replacement Completed Flag is required only when
the Unit Removal without a Programming Device function is being
used. When the Removal/Addition of Units without a Programming
Device function is being used, the data exchange is restarted automatically after the replacement Unit is mounted.
b) When the Online Replacement Completed Bit (A80215) is turned
ON, the replaced Unit will restart data exchange processing with
the CPU Unit.
When data exchange processing restarts, the Online Replacement Completed Bit (A80215) will turned OFF. At the same time,
the Maintenance Start Bit (A80015) will be turned OFF automatically if it is ON.
5. Check the replaced Unit's indicators and confirm that the Unit is operating
properly to complete the replacement procedure.
454
Section 11-5
Replacing Power Supply Unit
11-5 Replacing Power Supply Unit
Use the following procedure to replace a Power Supply Unit when ever it is
necessary to replace it, e.g., when an error is detected in the Power Supply
Unit or for periodic maintenance.
1,2,3...
1. Turn OFF the power supply to the Unit to be replaced and remove the wiring. If the RUN output is being used in the external sequence circuits, either keep the RUN output shorted when removing the wires or prepare the
sequence circuits so that they will be no adverse affects when the RUN
output wires are removed.
!WARNING Do not touch any live terminals. You will receive an electric shock.
POWER
PA207R
Screws (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)
AC power supply
L2/N
1:1 isolating
transformer
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
L1
100-120
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
AC power source
100 to 200 V AC
200 to 240 V AC
Voltage selector:
Closed for 110 V AC
Open for 220 V AC
Remove the short bar before applying 200 to 240 V AC.
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
2A RESISTIVE
RUN output
ON when the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Power OFF when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode or when a fatal error has occurred.
supply
2. Remove the Power Supply Unit.
3. Mount a new Power Supply Unit, making sure it is the same model of CS1D
Power Supply Unit.
4. Connect the wiring that was removed to the new Power Supply Unit.
5. Turn ON the power supply to the Unit and confirm that the POWER indicator lights.
6. Clear the error from the CPU Unit and check A31602 to confirm that there
is no error in the Power Supply. If there is no error, then this completes the
replacement procedure.
11-6 Replacement of Expansion Units
With a Duplex CPU Dual I/O Expansion System, a CS1D I/O Control Unit or
CS1D I/O Interface Unit can be replaced when an error occurs in the Unit or
during periodic maintenance. Use the following procedure to replace an
Expansion Unit.
455
Section 11-6
Replacement of Expansion Units
1,2,3...
1. Disconnect the Connecting Cables from the Unit being replaced.
Remove cables
from Unit being
replaced.
Replace
Note
Before replacing an Expansion Unit, verify that the other Expansion
Unit in the Rack is operating normally by checking the Duplex Communications Cable Error Flags in A270 as well as the LED Indicators on each Expansion Unit.
2. Remove the old Expansion Unit and mount the new Expansion Unit.
Note
456
When removing and mounting a Unit, move the Unit smoothly so
that it is not disconnected/reconnected repeatedly. After mounting
a Unit, secure it by tightening the mounting screws to the proper
torque.
Section 11-7
Replacing the Duplex Unit
3. Connect the Connecting Cables to the replacement Unit. Be sure to connect the cables to their original positions. If the cables are connected incorrectly, the PLC will not operate normally.
Connect cables to their
original positions.
If the connections are reversed,
an error will occur and the PLC
will not operate.
4. Verify that the Expansion Units RDY Indicator is lit and its ERR Indicator is
not lit. If there are no errors, the Unit replacement is completed.
11-7 Replacing the Duplex Unit
With a Duplex CPU Dual I/O Expansion System, the Duplex Unit can be
replaced when an error occurs in the Unit or during periodic maintenance.
Use the following procedure to replace an Duplex Unit.
Note The only Duplex Unit that can be replaced is the CS1D-DPL02D Duplex Unit,
which is used in a Duplex CPU Dual I/O Expansion System. The CS1DDPL01 Duplex Unit, which is used in a Duplex CPU Single I/O Expansion System, cannot be replaced. (The PLC will stop if a CS1D-DPL01 Duplex Unit is
replaced.)
The CPU Unit will operate in Simplex Mode while the Duplex Unit is being
replaced. If the active CPU Unit stops during replacement, the PLC will stop.
1,2,3...
1. Set the Duplex Unit’s DPL Switch to NO USE.
When the DPL Switch is set to NO USE, the power supply to the Duplex
Unit and standby CPU Unit will be turned OFF. All of the Duplex Unit indicators will be OFF (not lit).
!Caution Before replacing the Duplex Unit, be sure to set the Duplex Unit’s DPL Switch
to NO USE. If the Unit is removed while the DPL Switch is set to USE, the
CPU Backplane may fail or the PLC may operate unpredictably.
457
Section 11-7
Replacing the Duplex Unit
Duplex Unit
Standby CPU
CPU
Active CPU
CPU
Set the DPL Switch to NO USE.
DPL
DPL
USE
USE
NO USE
NO USE
Verify that all of the Duplex Unit's
The standby CPU will also stop The active CPU will continue LED Indicators are OFF.
(power OFF) when the DPL
operating independently.
Switch is set to NO USE.
Note
Once the DPL Switch is set to NO USE, the power to the Duplex
Unit will remain OFF even if the DPL Switch is switched to USE unless the Duplex Unit has been removed. If you want to restart the
same Duplex Unit, remove the Duplex Unit, mount it again, and proceed to step 4.
2. Remove the Duplex Unit. Verify that the new Duplex Unit’s DPL Switch is
set to NO USE and mount the new Duplex Unit.
Standby CPU
Active CPU
Verify that the new Duplex Unit's DPL Switch
is set to NO USE before mounting the Unit.
DPL
USE
NO USE
Note
When removing and mounting the Unit, move the Unit smoothly so
that it is not disconnected/reconnected repeatedly. After mounting
the Unit, secure it by tightening the mounting screws to the proper
torque.
3. Verify that the new Duplex Unit’s LEFT CPU and RIGHT CPU Operating
Switches are both set to USE (supply power to the CPU Units).
458
Section 11-7
Replacing the Duplex Unit
4. Set the Duplex Unit’s DPL Switch to USE. Verify that the ACTIVE and CPU
STATUS Indicators for the active CPU Unit are both lit on the front of the
Duplex Unit.
Duplex Unit
Standby CPU
Active CPU
Set the DPL Switch to USE.
DPL
DPL
USE
USE
NO USE
NO USE
Verify that the Duplex Unit's ACTIVE
and CPU STATUS LED Indicators are
both lit for the active CPU Unit.
5. Verify that the new Duplex Unit’s Duplex Setting Switches (DPL SW) are
set to DPL, and press the Initial (INIT) Button. When the Initial Button is
pressed, the DPL STATUS and CPU STATUS Indicators flash green and
then stay lit when operation restarts in Duplex Mode.
DPL02D
CS
D PLSTATU S
A C T IV E
R
C PU STATU S
A C T IV E
L
C PU STATU S
The DPL STATUS indicator will flash.
When it stops flashing and remains lit,
operation will restart in Duplex Mode.
459
Replacing the Duplex Unit
460
Section 11-7
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and
High-density I/O Units
List of Basic I/O Units
Input Units
Category
Name
CS-series Basic
AC Input Units
Input Units with Terminal Blocks
DC Input Units
Interrupt Input Units
CS-series Basic
Input Units with
Connectors
Specifications
100 to 120 V AC/V DC, 16 inputs, 50/60 Hz
200 to 240 V AC, 16 inputs, 50/60 Hz
24 V DC, 16 inputs
24 V DC, 16 inputs
Model
CS1W-IA111
CS1W-IA211
CS1W-ID211
CS1W-INT01
(See note.)
Page
463
463
464
466
High-speed Input
Unit
24 V DC, 16 inputs
CS1W-IDP01
467
DC Input Units
24 V DC, 32 inputs
24 V DC, 64 inputs
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
468
469
24 V DC, 96 inputs
Simultaneously ON 24-V DC inputs for
CS1W-ID291/MD291/MD292
CS1W-ID291
470
496
Note The Interrupt Input Unit can be used to input interrupts with a Single CPU System. With a Duplex CPU
System, the Interrupt Input Unit will function only as a standard Input Unit.
Output Units
Category
CS-series
Basic Outputs
Units with Terminal Blocks
Name
Relay Output
Units
Triac Output
Units
Specifications
Model
250V AC/24 V DC, 2 A; 120 V DC, 0.1 A; indepenCS1W-OC201
dent contacts, 8 outputs
250V AC/24 V DC, 2 A; 120 V DC, 0.1 A; 16 outputs CS1W-OC211
Relay contact outputs
250 V AC, 1.2 A, with fuse burnout detection circuit, CS1W-OA201
8 outputs
250 V AC, 0.5 A, 16 outputs
Transistor Out- 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 16 outputs
put Units, sink- 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 32 outputs
ing
12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, 64 outputs
12 to 24 V DC, 0.1 A, with fuse burnout detection circuit, 96 outputs
CS1W-OA211
CS1W-OD211
CS1W-OD231
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD291
Transistor Out- 24 V DC, 0.5 A, load short-circuit protection,
CS1W-OD212
put Units,
16 outputs
sourcing outLoad short-circuit protection for CS1W-OD212/OD232/OD262/MD262
puts
24 V DC, 0.5 A, load short-circuit protection,
CS1W-OD232
32 outputs
Page
473
472
497
475
474
476
477
478
479
481
499
482
24 V DC, 0.3 A, load short-circuit protection,
64 outputs
CS1W-OD262
484
24 V DC, with fuse burnout detection circuit, 0.1 A,
96 outputs
CS1W-OD292
485
461
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Mixed I/O Units
Category
Name
CS-series Basic I/O DC Input/Transistor
Units with Connec- Output Units
tors
TTL I/O Units
Specifications
24 V DC inputs;
12 to 24 V DC, 0.3-A, sinking outputs;
32 inputs, 32 outputs
24 V DC inputs;
12 to 24 V DC, 0.1A, sinking outputs
with fuse burnout detection circuit;
48 inputs, 48 outputs
Model
CS1W-MD261
Page
487
CS1W-MD291
489
24 V DC inputs
24 V DC, 0.3 A, sourcing outputs with
load short-circuit protection;
32 inputs, 32 outputs
CS1W-MD262
491
24 V DC inputs
24 V DC, 0.1 A, sourcing outputs with
fuse burnout detection circuit;
48 inputs, 48 outputs
CS1W-MD292
493
Inputs: 5 V DC, 3.5 mA
Outputs: 5 V DC, 35 mA
32 inputs, 32 outputs
CS1W-MD561
495
Reading Terminal Connection Diagrams
• I/O terminals in terminal connection diagrams are shown as viewed from the front panel of the Unit.
• Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on all Units.
• A0 to A20 and B0 to B20 are printed on the Units.
462
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Basic I/O Units
Basic Input Units
CS1W-IA111 100 V AC Input Unit (16 points)
Rated Input Voltage
100 to 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 100 to 120 V DC
Allowable Input Voltage
Range
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
85 to 132 V AC (50/60 Hz), 85 to 132 V DC
10 kΩ (50 Hz), 8 kΩ (60 Hz), 69 kΩ (DC)
100 mA typical (at 100 V AC), 1.5 mA typical (at 100 V DC)
65 V AC min., 75 V DC min.
20 V AC max., 25 V DC max.
18 ms max. when PLC Setup on default setting (8 ms) (See note 1.)
63 ms max. when PLC Setup on default setting (8 ms) (See note 1.)
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (500 V DC)
2,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
No. of Circuits
16 points (8 points/common, 2 commons)
Number of Inputs ON Simulta- 100% simultaneously ON (for 110 V AC, 120 V DC) Refer to the diagram below.
neously
110 VAC, 120 VDC
16
120 VAC
12
No. of inputs
ON simultaneously
132 VDC
8
4
0
132 VAC
0
10
20
30
40
50
60 (°C)
Ambient temperature
Internal Current Consumption 110 mA 5 V DC max.
260 g max.
IN0
to
IN7
470 Ω
68 kΩ
0.33 µF
2.2 kΩ
470 Ω
68 kΩ
0.33 µF
2.2 kΩ
Internal circuits
Weight
Circuit Layout
COM0
IN8
to
IN15
Input indicator
COM1
Terminal Connections
0
2
100 to 120
VAC/VDC
100 to 120
VAC/VDC
4
6
A0
A1
A2
A3
COM0
A4
8
A5
10
A6
12
A7
14
A8
COM1
A9
B0
B1
B2
1
3
5
7
B3
NC
B4
9
B5
11
B6
13
B7
15
B8
NC
B9
Note 1. The Input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to 0 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms,
4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms in the PLC Setup. When the response times have been set to 0 ms, the
ON response time will be 10 ms maximum and the OFF response time will be 40 ms maximum due
to internal element delays.
2. Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
463
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
CS1W-IA211 200-V AC Input Unit (16 points)
Rated Input Voltage
Allowable Input Voltage
Range
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON current
OFF Voltage/OFF current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Number of Inputs ON Simultaneously
200 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
170 to 264 V AC (50/60 Hz)
21 kΩ (50 Hz), 18 kΩ (60 Hz)
10 mA typical (at 200 V AC)
120 V AC min.
40 V AC max.
18 ms max. when PLC Setup on default setting (8 ms) (See note.)
48 ms max. when PLC Setup on default setting (8 ms) (See note.)
16 points (8 points/common, 2 commons)
100% simultaneously ON (for 230 V AC). Refer to the diagram below.
230 VAC
16
12
240 VAC
No. of inputs ON
simultaneously
8
264 VAC
4
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60 (°C)
Ambient temperature
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (500 V DC)
2,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 110 mA 5 V DC max.
Weight
260 g max.
Circuit Configuration
820 Ω 1 MΩ
0.15 µF
220 Ω
Internal circuits
IN0
to
IN7
COM0
820 Ω
IN8
to
IN15
0.15 µF
1 MΩ
Input indicator
220 Ω
COM1
Terminal Connections
0
200 to 240 VAC
200 to 240 VAC
A0
2
B0
A1
4
B1
A2
6
B2
A3
COM0
B3
A4
8
B4
A5
10
B5
A6
12
B6
A7
14
B7
A8
COM1
B8
A9
B9
1
3
5
7
NC
9
11
13
15
NC
Note 1. The Input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to 0 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms,
4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms in the PLC Setup. When the response times have been set to 0 ms, the
ON response time will be 10 ms maximum and the OFF response time will be 40 ms maximum due
to internal element delays.
2. Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
464
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Appendix A
CS1W-ID211 24-V DC Input Unit (16 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Allowable Input Voltage
Range
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Number of Simultaneously
ON Points
24 V DC
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
3.3 kΩ
7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
14.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
8.0 ms max. (Possible to set to between 0 and 32 ms in the PLC Setup.) (See note.)
8.0 ms max. (Possible to set to between 0 and 32 ms using PLC) (See note.)
16 (8 points/common, 2 circuits)
100% simultaneously ON
Internal Current Consumption 100 mA max.
Weight
270 g max.
470 Ω
3.3 kΩ
IN00
to
IN07
1000 pF
COM0
Input indicator
470 Ω
3.3 kΩ
IN08
to
Internal circuits
Circuit Configuration
IN15
1000 pF
COM1
Terminal Connections
24
VDC
0
A0
2
A1
4
6
B0
1
B1
3
B2
5
A2
A3
B3
7
B4
NC
COM0 A4
24
VDC
8
A5
10
A6
12
A7
14
A8
B5
9
B6
11
B7
13
B8
15
B9
NC
COM1 A9
Note 1. The ON response time will be 20 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even
if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
2. Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on all Units.
3. Terminal numbers A0 to A20 and B0 to B20 are printed on all Units.
465
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
CS1W-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit (16 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
24 V DC
Allowable Input Voltage
Range
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Number of Simultaneously
ON Points
3.3 kΩ
7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
14.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
0.1 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
16 (8 points/common, 2 circuits)
100% simultaneously ON
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 100 mA max.
Weight
270 g max.
Circuit Configuration
470 Ω
3.3 kΩ
Internal circuits
IN00
to
IN07
1000 pF
COM0
Input indicator
3.3 kΩ
470 Ω
IN08
to
IN15
• Up to two Interrupt Input Units can be mounted
to the CPU Rack.
• Interrupts cannot be used when an Interrupt Input Unit is mounted to an Expansion I/O Rack,
i.e., it will be treated as a 16-point Input Unit.
• Set the pulse width of signals input to the Interrupt Input Unit so they satisfy the above conditions.
0.5 ms min.
1000 pF
COM1
0.1 ms min.
Terminal Connections
24
VDC
24
VDC
0
A0
2
A1
4
A2
6
A3
COM0
A4
8
A5
10
A6
12
A7
14
A8
COM1
B0
1
B1
3
B2
5
B3
7
B4
NC
B5
9
B6
11
B7
13
B8
15
B9
NC
A9
Polarity of the input power supply can connected in either direction.
Note 1. Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
2. The Interrupt Input Unit can be used to input interrupts with a Single CPU System. With a Duplex CPU
System, the Interrupt Input Unit will function only as a standard Input Unit.
466
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Appendix A
CS1W-IDP01 High-speed Input Unit (16 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
24 V DC
Allowable Input Voltage
Range
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Number of Simultaneously
ON Points
3.3 kΩ
7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
14.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
0.1 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
16 (8 points/common, 2 circuits)
100% simultaneously ON
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 100 mA max.
Weight
270 g max.
Circuit Configuration
470 Ω
3.3 kΩ
Internal circuits
IN00
to
IN07
1000 pF
COM0
Input indicator
3.3 kΩ
470 Ω
IN08
to
IN15
1000 pF
COM1
Terminal Connections
24
VDC
0
A0
2
A1
4
A2
6
A3
COM0
24
VDC
B0
1
B1
3
B2
5
B3
7
B4
NC
A4
8
A5
10
A6
12
A7
14
A8
COM1
A9
B5
9
B6
11
B7
13
B8
15
B9
NC
Polarity of the input power supply can be connected in either direction.
• With a High-speed Input Unit, pulse inputs shorter than the cycle time of the CPU Unit can be read.
• The minimum pulse width (ON time) that can be read by the High-speed Input Unit is 0.1 ms.
• Input data in the internal circuits is cleared during the input refresh period.
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
467
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
CS1W-ID231 DC Input Unit (32 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
24 V DC
Allowable Input Voltage Range
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Number of Simultaneously ON
Points
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
3.9 kΩ
6 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
15.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See note.)
8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the PLC Setup) (See note.)
32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
70% (11 points/common) (at 24 V DC) (Refer to the following illustrations.)
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption
Weight
Accessories
Circuit Configuration
150 mA max.
200 g max.
One connector for external wiring (soldered)
1000 pF
COM0
COM0
560 Ω
Input indicator
3.9 kΩ
B
IN00
to
IN15
1000 pF
COM1
COM1
Terminal Connections
560 Ω
B
I/O word "m + 1"
NC
NC
COM1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
COM1
7
24
VDC
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
Number of Simultaneously
ON Points vs. Ambient
Temperature Characteristic
32 points at 34°C 32 points at 40°C
Number of simultaneously
ON points
A
Internal circuits
3.9 kΩ
IN00
to
IN15
35
Input voltage: 24 VDC
Input voltage: 26.4 VDC
30
25
20
22 points at 55°C
15
16 points at 55°C
10
5
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60 (°C)
Ambient Temperature
I/O word "m"
NC
NC
COM0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
COM0
7
6
24
VDC
5
4
3
2
1
0
• The input power polarity can be connected in either direction provided that the same
polarity is set for rows A and B.
• Both COM0 and COM1 have two pins each. Although they are internally connected,
wire all points completely.
Note The ON response time will be 20 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
468
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
CS1W-ID261 DC Input Unit (64 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
24 V DC
Allowable Input Voltage
Range
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Number of Simultaneously
ON Points
3.9 kΩ
6 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
15.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See note.)
8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See note.)
64 (16 points/common, 4 circuits)
50% (8 points/common) (at 24 V DC) (Refer to the following illustrations.)
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 150 mA max.
Weight
260 g max.
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)
3.9 kΩ
1000 pF
IN00
B
560 Ω
SW
IN15
COM1
COM1
Indicator
switching
circuit
Input indicator
Internal circuits
CN1
IN15
COM0
COM0
3.9 kΩ
IN00
A
CN2
IN15
COM2
COM2
1000 pF
560 Ω
IN00
B
Number of Simultaneously
ON Points
IN00
A
Number of Simultaneously
ON Points vs. Ambient
Temperature Characteristic
Internal circuits
Accessories
Circuit Configuration
70
64 points 64 points 64 points
at 25°C at 36°C at 52°C
Input voltage: 20.4 VDC
V
60
50
Input voltage: 24 VDC
40
30
32 points at 55°C
28 points at 55°C
10
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60 (°C)
Ambient Temperature
IN15
COM3
COM3
Terminal Connections
CN1
I/O word "m+1"
B
NC
NC
COM1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
COM1
7
24
VDC
48 points at 55°C
Input voltage: 26.4 VDC
20
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9
CN2
I/O word "m"
A
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
I/O word "m+2"
B
0
1
1
0
1
2
2
1
2
3
3
2
3
4
4
3
4
5
5
4
5
6
6
5
6
7
7
6
7
8
8
9
9
NC
NC
COM0
15
14
24
VDC
13
12
11
COM2
10
10 10
11 11
9
10
12 12
10
13 13
11
12
14 14
12
13
15 15
13
14
16 16
14
15
17 17
COM2
18 18
NC
19 19
NC
NC
20 20
NC
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
8
11
COM0
24
VDC
7
9
8
24
VDC
COM3
8
9
6
I/O word "m+3"
A
15
COM3
• The input power polarity can be connected in either direction provided that the same
polarity be set for rows A and B.
• COM0, COM1, COM2, and COM3 have two pins each. Although they are internally connected, wire all points completely.
Note The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
469
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
CS1W-ID291 DC Input Unit (96 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
24 V DC
Allowable Input Voltage
Range
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time
4.7 kΩ
Approx. 5 mA (at 24 V DC)
17 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
8.0 ms max. (Possible to select one out of eight times from 0 to 32 ms in the PLC Setup.)
(See note 1.)
OFF Response Time
8.0 ms max. (Possible to select one out of eight times from 0 to 32 ms in the PLC Setup.)
(See note 1.)
No. of Circuits
96 points (16 points/common, 6 commons)
Number of Inputs ON Simulta- 50% (8 points/common) (at 24 V DC) (Depends on ambient temperature) (See note 2.)
neously
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption
Weight
Accessories
Circuit Configuration
200 mA max.
320 g max.
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)
The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs
maximum even if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays. (See
note below.)
× 3 CN1 circuits
1000 pF
COM
560 Ω
SW
Input indicator
4.7 kΩ
× 3 CN2 circuits
IN00
to
IN15
1000 pF
COM
Terminal Connections
560 Ω
Indicator
switch
circuit
Internal circuits
4.7 kΩ
IN00
to
IN15
Internal circuits
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
See Figure 1.
The polarity of the input power supply can be in either direction.
Note 1. The Input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to 0 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms,
4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms in the PLC Setup.
2. The number of allowable simultaneously ON inputs depends on the ambient temperature. Refer to
page 496.
470
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections
The polarity of the input power supply can be in either direction, as indicated by the dotted lines.
CN2
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
NC
15
Word (m+1)
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
NC
15
14
Word m
13
12
11
10
9
8
1
B
1
2
2
9
2
3
3
10
3
4
4
11
4
5
5
12
5
6
6
13
5
6
7
7
14
4
7
8
8
15
9
9
NC
A
28 28
27 27
26 26
25 25
24 24
23 23
22 22
21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
NC
24
VDC
24
VDC
COM2
7
6
COM3
3
8
2
0
10 10
1
1
11 11
9
2
12 12
10
3
13 13
11
4
14 14
12
5
15 15
13
6
16 16
14
7
17 17
15
18 18
NC
0
19 19
8
1
20 20
9
COM0
2
21 21
10
7
3
22 22
11
6
4
23 23
12
5
5
24 24
13
4
6
25 25
14
7
26 26
15
27 27
NC
28 28
NC
0
24
VDC
COM1
8
7
6
5
4
24
VDC
3
COM4
2
1
0
3
2
24
VDC
COM5
Word (m+3)
Word (m+2)
15
1
Word (m+4)
NC
B
0
Word (m+5)
NC
A
CN1
1
0
24
VDC
NC
Figure 1 Terminal Connections: CS1W-ID291 24-V DC 96-point Input Unit
471
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Basic Output Units
CS1W-OC211 Contact Output Unit (16 points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay Replacement
2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 24 V DC (8 A/common, 16 A/Unit), 0.1 A 120 V DC
1 mA 5 V DC
NY-24W-K-IE (Fujitsu Takamizawa Component Ltd.)
Relays cannot be replaced by users.
Service Life of Relay
Electrical: 150,000 operations (resistive load)/100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 20,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the connected load. Refer to page 497 for information
on service life according to the load.
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Number of Inputs ON Simultaneously
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
16 points (8 points/common, 2 commons)
16
Surge Protector
Fuses
Insulation Resistance
None
None
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (500 V DC)
Dielectric Strength
2,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
Internal circuits
Internal Current Consumption 130 mA 5 V DC max. 96 mA 26 V DC (6 mA × No. points ON)
Weight
290 g max.
Circuit Configuration
OUT0
to
OUT7
COM0
Output indicator
OUT8
to
OUT15
COM1
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L
0
A0
2
A1
4
A2
6
A3
COM0
L
2 A 250 VAC,
2 A 24 VDC,
0.1 A 120 VDC max.
L
L
8
10
A4
A5
A6
12
A7
14
L
A8
COM1
A9
1
3
B1
5
B2
7
B3
NC
B4
9
B5
11
B6
13
B7
15
B8
NC
B9
B0
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
472
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
CS1W-OC201 Contact Output Unit (8 points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay replacement
2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 24 V DC (16 A/Unit), 0.1 A 120 V DC
1 mA 5 V DC
NY-24W-K-IE (Fujitsu Takamizawa Component Ltd.)
Relays cannot be replaced by users.
Service Life of Relay
Electrical: 150,000 operations (resistive load)/100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 20,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the connected load. Refer to page 497 for information
on service life according to the load.
ON Response Time
15 ms max.
OFF Response Time
15 ms max.
No. of Circuits
8 independent contacts
Number of Inputs ON Simulta- 8
neously
Surge Protector
Fuses
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
None
None
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (500 V DC)
2,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
Internal circuits
Internal Current Consumption 100 mA 5 V DC max. 48 mA 26 V DC (6 mA × No. points ON)
Weight
260 g max.
Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
OUT
OUTc
Terminal Connections
*
c0
A0
B0
A1
c2
B1
A2
c3
B2
A3
c4
B3
A4
c5
B4
A5
c6
B5
A6
c7
B6
A7
B7
NC A8
B8
NC A9
B9
c1
2 A 250 VAC,
2 A 24 VDC,
0.1 A 120 VDC max.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NC
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
* A relay contact is used,
so there is no polarity
when a DC power supply
is used.
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
473
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
CS1W-OA211 Triac Output Unit (16 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Max. Inrush Current
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Surge Protector
Fuses
Blown Fuse Detection Circuit
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
0.5 A 250 V AC, 50/60 Hz (2 A/common, 4 A/Unit)
15 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
50 mA 75 V AC
1.5 mA (200 V AC) max.
1.6 V AC max.
1 ms max.
1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
16 points (8 points/common, 2 commons)
C.R Absorber + Surge Absorber
2 × 4 A (1 per common)
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
None
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (500 V DC)
2,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 406 mA 5 V DC max. (70 mA + 21 mA × No. of ON points)
Weight
300 g max.
Internal circuits
Circuit Configuration
OUT0
to
OUT7
Output indicator
COM0
Fuse
OUT8
to
OUT15
COM1
Fuse
Terminal Connections
0
A0
B0
2
A1
B1
4
A2
L
B2
6
A3
L
B3
COM0
A4
B4
8
A5
L
B5
10
A6
L
B6
12
A7
L
B7
14
A8
L
B8
COM1
A9
B9
L
L
0.5 A 250 VAC max.
1
3
5
7
NC
9
11
13
15
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
474
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Appendix A
CS1W-OA201 Triac Output Unit (8 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Max. Inrush Current
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Surge Protector
Fuses
Blown Fuse Detection Circuit
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
1.2 A 250 V AC, 50/60 Hz (4.8 A/Unit)
10 A (pulse width: 100 ms), 20 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
100 mA 10 V AC, 50 mA 24 V AC, 10 mA 100 V AC min.
1.5 mA (120 V AC) max., 3.0 mA (240 V AC) max.
1.5 V AC max. (50 to 500 mA), 5.0 V AC max. (10 to 50 mA)
1 ms max.
1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
8 points (8 points/common, 1 common)
C.R Absorber + Surge Absorber
8A
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
ERR indicator lit when fuse blown. Also, the corresponding Flag in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (500 V DC)
2,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 230 mA 5 V DC max. (70 mA + 20 mA × No. of ON points)
300 g max.
Output indicator
ERR indicator
Internal circuits
Weight
Circuit Configuration
Terminal Connections
NC A0
NC A1
NC A2
NC A3
NC A4
NC A5
NC A6
NC A7
NC A8
NC A9
Fuse
OUT0
to
OUT7
COM
Blown fuse
detection
circuit
0
B0
1
B1
2
B2
3
B3
4
B4
5
B5
6
B6
7
B7
COM
B8
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
1.2 A 250 VAC max.
B9 NC
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
475
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Appendix A
CS1W-OD211 Transistor Output Unit (16 Points, Sinking)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage
Range
Maximum Load Current
Maximum Inrush Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
12 to 24 V DC
10.2 to 26.4 V DC
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuses
External Power Supply
Weight
16 (8 points/common, 2 circuits)
5 V DC 170 mA max.
None
10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 20 mA max.
270 g max.
0.5 A/point, 4.0 A/common, 8.0 A/Unit
4.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
Circuit Configuration
Internal circuits
+V
OUT00
to
OUT07
COM0
Output indicator
+V
OUT00
to
OUT07
COM1
Terminal Connections
L
L
12 to 24 VDC
L
L
0
A0
2
A1
4
A2
6
A3
COM0
L
L
12 to 24 VDC
L
L
1
B1
3
B2
5
B3
7
A4
B4
8
A5
10
A6
12
A7
14
A8
COM1
B0
9
B6
11
B7
13
B8
15
B9
L
L
L
+V
B5
A9
L
L
L
L
L
+V
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity.
• The load may operate incorrectly if the polarity is reversed.
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
476
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Appendix A
CS1W-OD231 Transistor Output Unit (32 Points, Sinking)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current
Maximum Inrush Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuses
External Power Supply
Weight
Accessories
Circuit Configuration
12 to 24 V DC
10.2 to 26.4 V DC
0.5 A/point, 2.5 A/common, 5.0 A/Unit (See note.)
4.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max.
32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
5 V DC 270 mA max.
None
10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 30 mA max.
200 g max.
One connector for external wiring (soldered)
Internal circuits
+V
OUT00
to
A
OUT15
COM0
COM0
Output indicator
+V
OUT00
to
OUT15
B
COM1
COM1
Terminal Connections
I/O word "m+1"
I/O word "m"
B
+V
COM1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
+V
COM1
L
L
L
L
12 to 24 VDC
L
L
L
L
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
+V
COM0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+V
COM0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L
L
L
L
L
12 to 24 VDC
L
L
L
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity. The load may operate if the polarity is
reversed.
• Although the +V and COM terminals of rows A and B are internally connected, wire all
points completely.
Note The maximum load currents will be 2.0 A/common and 4.0 A/Unit if a pressure-welded connector is
used.
477
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
CS1W-OD261 Transistor Output Unit (64 Points, Sinking)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage
Range
Maximum Load Current
Maximum Inrush Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
12 to 24 V DC
10.2 to 26.4 V DC
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuses
External Power Supply
Weight
64 (16 points/common, 4 circuits)
5 V DC 390 mA max.
None
10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 50 mA max.
260 g max.
Accessories
Circuit Configuration
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)
0.3 A/point, 1.6 A/common, 6.4 A/Unit
3.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
+V
OUT00
Internal circuits
to
OUT15
COM0
COM0
+V
OUT00
SW
to
OUT15
COM1
COM1
+V
Output indicator
OUT00
to
OUT15
COM2
COM2
+V
OUT00
to
OUT15
COM3
COM3
Terminal Connections
CN1
I/O word "m+1"
B
+V
COM1
L
L
L
12 to
24 VDC
L
L
L
L
L
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
+V
COM1
L
L
12 to
24 VDC
L
L
L
L
L
L
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A
CN1
B
A
CN2
B
I/O word "m+2"
I/O word "m"
A
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
+V
COM0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
L
L
1
2
2
1
L
L
12 to
24 VDC
L
2
3
3
2
3
4
4
3
4
5
5
4
L
L
L
L
5
6
6
5
L
L
6
7
7
6
L
L
L
7
8
8
7
L
9
9
COM3
L
L
L
COM2
L
+V
10 10
+V
L
8
11 11
8
L
L
9
12 12
9
L
L
10
13 13
10
L
11
14 14
11
12
15 15
12
13
16 16
13
14
17 17
14
15
18 18
15
+V
6
1
L
COM0
7
1
L
12 to
24 VDC
I/O word "m+3"
B
0
L
L
CN2
A
L
L
L
L
L
12 to
24 VDC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM2
+V
19 19
20 20
12 to
24 VDC
L
L
L
L
L
COM3
+V
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity. The load may operate if the polarity is
reversed.
• Although the +V and COM terminals of rows A and B of CN1 and CN2 are internally
connected, wire all points completely.
478
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Appendix A
CS1W-OD291 Transistor Output Unit (96 Points, Sinking)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage
Maximum Load Current
Maximum Inrush Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
12 to 24 V DC
10.2 to 26.4 V DC
0.1 A/point, 1.2 A/common, 7.2 A/Unit (See note.)
1.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
8.0 A/common, 10 ms max.
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
No. of Circuits
96 points (16 points/common, 6 commons)
Internal Current Consumption 480 mA max. at 5 V DC
Fuses
3 A (1 per common, 6 total)
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
External Power Supply
10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 100 mA max.
Weight
Accessories
Circuit Configuration
320 g max.
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)
Internal circuit
10.2 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
to
OUT15
× 3 CN1 circuits
COM
Fuse
SW
Indicator
switch circuit
Blown fuse
detection
circuit
Output indicator
ERR indicator
Internal circuit
10.2 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
to
OUT15
× 3 CN2 circuits
COM
Fuse
The ERR indicator will light if a fuse blows or if the external power supply is turned OFF,
and the corresponding Flag in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn
ON.
Terminal Connections
Refer to Figure 2.
When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity. The load may operate if the polarity is
reversed.
Note The maximum load currents will be 1.0 A/common and 6.0 A/Unit if a pressure-welded connector is
used.
479
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
CN1
L
15
L
14
L
L
L
L
L
L
13
12
11
10
9
8
Word (m+1)
+V
L
15
L
14
L
13
L
12
L
11
L
L
L
10
9
8
+V
L
L
Word m
L
15
14
13
L
12
L
11
L
10
L
9
L
8
27 27
26 26
25 25
24 24
23 23
22 22
21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
CN2
12 to
24 VDC
L
COM2
7
L
6
L
5
4
3
2
1
0
L
L
L
12 to
24 VDC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
7
L
6
L
L
3
L
1
0
12 to
24 VDC
L
L
L
L
12 to
24 VDC
L
L
6
5
L
L
L
L
L
L
4
L
3
L
2
L
1
L
0
L
L
COM0
7
L
L
4
2
L
L
COM1
5
L
L
12 to
24 VDC
L
L
L
L
L
L
12 to
24 VDC
A
B
0
1
1
8
1
2
2
9
2
3
3
10
3
4
4
11
4
5
5
12
5
6
6
13
6
7
7
14
7
8
8
15
COM3
9
9
+V
0
10 10
8
1
11 11
9
2
12 12
10
3
13 13
11
4
14 14
12
5
15 15
13
6
16 16
14
7
17 17
15
COM4
18 18
+V
0
19 19
8
1
20 20
9
2
21 21
10
3
22 22
11
4
23 23
12
5
24 24
13
6
25 25
14
7
26 26
15
COM5
27 27
+V
NC
28 28
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
Word (m+3)
Word (m+2)
+V
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Word (m+4)
NC
A
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Word (m+5)
B
28 28
L
L
Figure 2 Terminal Connections: CS1W-OD291 24-V DC 96-point Transistor Output Unit (Sinking Outputs)
480
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Appendix A
CS1W-OD212 Transistor Output Unit (16 Points, Sourcing)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage
Range
Maximum Load Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Load Short-circuit Prevention
24 V DC
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
External Power Supply
Weight
16 (8 points/common, 2 circuits)
5 V DC 170 mA max.
20.4 to 26.4 V DC, 40 mA max.
270 g max.
0.5 A/point, 2.5 A/common, 5.0 A/Unit
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Automatic restart after error clearance. (Refer to page 499.)
Circuit Configuration
Internal circuits
Short-circuit
protection
COM0 (+V)
OUT00
to
OUT07
0V
Output indicator
Short-circuit
protection
COM1 (+V)
OUT08
to
OUT15
0V
ERR indicator
When overcurrent is detected, the ERR indicator will light, and the corresponding flag in
the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
0
A0
2
A1
4
1
B1
3
B2
5
A2
6
A3
0V
A4
B3
B4
8
A5
10
A6
12
B0
A8
0V
A9
9
B6
11
B7
13
B8
B9
L
24 VDC
L
L
COM0(+V)
B5
A7
14
7
L
15
L
L
24 VDC
L
L
COM1(+V)
When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load
may operate if the polarity is reversed.
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
481
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Appendix A
CS1W-OD232 Transistor Output Unit (32 Points, Sourcing)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage
Range
Maximum Load Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Load Short-circuit Prevention
24 V DC
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage
current of 10 mA max.
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
External Power Supply
Weight
32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
5 V DC 270 mA max.
20.4 to 26.4 V DC, 70 mA max.
210 g max.
Accessories
One connector for external wiring (soldered)
482
0.5 A/point, 2.5 A/common, 5.0 A/Unit (See note.)
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Automatic restart after error clearance. (Refer to page 499.)
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration
Appendix A
COM0 (+V)
Short-circuit
protection
COM0 (+V)
OUT00
to
OUT15
A
Output indicator
COM1 (+V)
COM1 (+V)
Short-circuit
protection
Internal circuits
0V
OUT00
to
OUT15
B
0V
ERR indicator
When the output current of any output exceeds the detection current, the output for that
point will turn OFF. At the same time, the ERR indicator will light and the corresponding
flag (one for each common) in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn
ON.
Terminal Connections
I/O word "m"
I/O word "m+1"
B
COM1(+V)
0V
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
COM1(+V)
0V
L
L
24 VDC
L
L
L
L
L
L
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
COM0(+V)
0V
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM0(+V)
0V
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L
L
L
24 VDC
L
L
L
L
L
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load
may operate if the polarity is reversed.
• Although the COM(+V) and 0V of rows A and B are internally connected, wire all points
completely.
Note The maximum load currents will be 2.0 A/common and 4.0 A/Unit if a pressure-welded connector is
used.
483
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
CS1W-OD262 Transistor Output Unit (64 Points, Sourcing)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage
Range
Maximum Load Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Load Short-circuit Prevention
24 V DC
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the e